Beruflich Dokumente
Kultur Dokumente
2023 AD
by: S. A. H.
“Signs and Symbols rule the World, not Words nor Laws.”
“Words are Numbers and Numbers are Words”
“Prophecy is history, written in advance.”
The visionaries, scholars, intellectuals, writers, philosophers, thinkers, etc of all the
religions of the world cannot be wrong at the same time. They are coming up with
the same result of 2023 AD as the second coming of Jesus Christ, Messiah and
Mahdi, which would be the Start of the Divine Kingdom.
1445 HIJRI
2023 = 17 x 17 x 7
1445 = 17 x 17 x 5
The different views and concepts regarding the End Times are from:
1. Sunnis point of view regarding the Arrival of Hazrat Esa and Mahdi
2. Shias version regarding the Arrival of Imam Mahdi and Hazrat Esa
3. Christians beliefs regarding the Second Coming of Jesus Christ
4. Jews beliefs regarding the Arrival of Messiach
5. Hindus concepts regarding the Coming Age of Divine Kingdom
6. Buddhists religion and their concepts about End Times
7. Mason's belief regarding the End of 4th Era and start of 5th Era
8. Zoriastrianism thougts regarding End Times
Main Purpose of the Research ---- To Find the Exact End Times
o 1998 AD to 2015 AD ------ The whole world would remain under different kinds of
attacks and wars since 1998 AD whether they are economic, political or social.
9-11 terrorist events happened in USA. 7-7 terrorist events happened in UK. 26 - 11
terrorist events happened in India. Then there were wars and foreign invasions in
Afghanistan, Pakistan, Syria, Yemen, Libya, Sudan, Iraq, Ukraine, etc and the list goes on.
o The stocks and insurance markets fell in 2008 in USA and since then the whole world has
been experiencing a continuous recession, depression, social riots in Europe, USA, protests
in Thailand, Egypt, Ukraine, and so on. The Euro and Dollar is still in crisis. The Gold and
Silver markets are totally unpredictable.
o The trend analysts are forecasting a big war in Middle East. The currency and trade wars
are ON between West and China and Russia. The world is watching the Ukraine Crisis
which is converting into Civil War of Ukraine. The West along with USA is in full
confrontation with Russia on the issues of Ukraine, Syria and Iran. Recently Russia and
China made a deal of $400 Billion dollars Gas deal which is also not in the favor of West.
The Cold War is now converting into Hot War and finally it would convert into a Big Third
World War by the 2019.
o 2016 AD to 2020 AD –: India would attack Pakistan by the year 2019 AD. Their planning
of war and intentions was quoted by the Chief of the Army Staff of India in his recent
speech on where he mentioned that India might be engaged with Pakistan and China at
the same time and they are preparing for two wars at the same time.
It is very interesting to note that the top 3 Weapons buyers countries in the World are
1. India
2. China
3. Pakistan
7 Years ---- Tribulation Period (28th July, 2016 till 28th July, 2023 AD)
2016 AD: Worldwide--- Wars & Conflicts, Economic Tribulation and Disturbances.
2017 AD: Wars and International Conflicts would pick its momentum when Western powers
would start colliding with the Eastern powers.
2018 AD: The World would see Trade Wars, Currency Wars and Psycho Wars.
2019 AD: Political and Economic turmoils all over the world. The Wars would further escalate.
2020 AD: Major Economic Collapse in the World and the World would go in Great Depression.
2021 AD: Global Drought and Diseases. Worldwide Drought and Diseases, Global political
instability. World War - 3 would officially start in the Middle East and South Asia.
2022 AD: 1/3rd population of the world would die in 3rd World War Destruction. “Red Death”
would occur in the World as told by Jesus Christ & Prophet (PBUH). 1/3rd - More population
would die by Global Drought and Diseases. “White Death” would occur in the World as told
by Jesus Christ and Prophet Muhammad (PBUH). Dajjal (Anti Christ) would appear and New
World Order would be in effect. The Last Suffiani named, “Usman” would emerge from the
Middle East in early 2023 AD in the month of Rajab.
2024 AD: War of Mahdi and Jesus Christ against the enemies of Humanity and God.
Punishment of all major criminals of Humanity in the History by Mahdi.
2025 AD: The Establishment of the Divine Kingdom and the Rule of Law and Justice. World
would be divided into 313 Provinces under 313 Governors appointed by Mahdi.
2026 AD: The period of peace and prosperity under Mahdi's rule would start.
2026 AD onwards: Mahdi would rule the Whole World for 7 years and each year would be like
10 Worldly years, so a total of 70 years of Divine Kingdom.
But in the recent past, all the famous astrologers and pandits predicted about the
arrival of the last reformer of the world in the very near future in 2023 AD.
Let us examine a few of the predictions and prophecies of the most famous people
of the world in the field of astrology and future predictions:
So according to his prophecy, a major world war would start by 1995 and would
continue till 2023 for 27 years and then ultimate peace and justice would be
restored in the world by the hands of the reformer and saviour of the world.
3. Approximately 40% of the Christians of the world are expecting the arrival of
the Christ soon in the coming years.
4. According to Mayan culture, the world would enter into its 5th and the last
phase on 21st December, 2012 AD and the world would see major changes all over
including earth quakes, tsunamis, world wars, drought and then a final saviour
would come to save the earth and put this world in order
5. All the Shia and Sunni ulemas of the Islamic world are also predicting and
claiming that the Arrival and the arrival of Mahdi is very near in the coming years.
They agreed that the World War has already started in 2001 by the attacks in USA,
then entered its second phase when USA entered Afghanistan and attacked Iraq in
2003. Then the financial collapse of international markets in 2008 was the next
episode in that war. Now the World War has entered in its next stage and we are
seeing mass protests and color revolutions in the Arab world.
All these events would eventually lead the world into offical opening of the Third
World War by the collapse of USA Dollar, the collapse of Euro by 2016. The War
would continue till 2019 and then the world would see severe drought and deaths
after the end of the world. Then our Mahdi would Arrival on His Due Date of
Arrival.
Now we would see what Hazrat Ali and Prophet Muhammad mentioned about the
Arrival of Mahdi in the light of Ahadith and Quranic Verses.
After these 5 tests of humanity and the world, our Savior – Mahdi would Arrival
along with Jesus Christ on 28th July, 2023.
If the answers to these questions are - YES, then you should read this
research document and you would find your answers in this research work
Now to understand the whole picture of the End Times Events before the Arrival of
Mahdi, we have to join all the pieces of the puzzle together meaning to understand
all the Signs, Symbols, Facts and Figures at the same time rather than discussing
one Sign at a time and discussing another Fact at different time.
"Astrologer is anyone who studies astrology and uses it to tell people how they
believe it will affect their lives."
Astrology is strictly prohibited in Islam and Hazrat Ali rejected the use of this
knowledge to predict the future of any person. Because Fate is in the hands of Allah
and decided according to the His Will and Wish and not according to the Stars.
Examples:
Astronomy is a subject of Science and not prohibited in the teachings of Islam. Even
in early history of Islam, lot of people from the Islamic world became famous
Astronomers and made scienitific observatories and laboratories to study stars,
planets, etc.
Visionaries:
"The people who received Visions about the Future and they showed to the people
in their writings or sayings."
Nostradamus
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 23
Edgar Cayce
Baba Venga
Saints:
"These are the people who pray and meditate and become spiritually purfied and
receive visions and guidance from the Almighty God."
There are many famous Saints in Islamic History. One of the famous who made
prophecies about the future is Hazrat Naemat Shah Wali.
Hazrat Naemat Shah Wali made prophecies for the next 800 years and his
prophecies proved correct in time. I have included his prophecies in the research
work.
True Prophets:
The people who receive Revelations from the Almighty Allah and then they pass
those teachings to the people. They also make prophecies and predictions about
future so that the future generations would recognize them as true Prophets once
they see those events and prophecies coming true in front of them. They also
perform Miracles to show their Truth before the people.
Miracles:
A Miracle is an extra ordinary thing which is performed by True Prophets to show
their Truth to the people. Prophets like Moses, Jesus, Muhammad (PBUH) and
Imams like Hazrat Ali, Imam Hassan, Imam Hussain (AS) show different Miracles in
front of the people to show that they are Real Prophets and Imams from the
Almighty God.
Symbols:
A Symbol can be interpreted in more than ONE way and has more than One
meaning.. For example Black color is a Symbol that may represent Death, may
represent Evil, may represent Fear. So Black Color is a Symbol of different Words
and Characters. It is Symbolic and can be used in any meaning according to the
person using it in that form. Other examples like Broker Mirror, a Ladder,
La Red Rose,
etc.
The End Times are represented mostly by End Signs and some are
Symbolic Words used to explain the End Times.
Dart Game
What is Accuracy?
The quality or state of being Correct, True, or Exact
The degree to which the result of a measurement, calculation, or specification
conforms to the correct value or a standard.
The degree of correctness of a quantity or expression.
What is Precision?
The Variation and refinement in a measurement, calculation or specification
and represented by many results near to be accurate or correct
If we know the Precise and Accurate Signs of the End Times and their repetition in
the Major Holy Scriptures and the Prophecies of the True Prophets and the Holy
Saints, then we can reach the Accurate results.
Almighty Allah taught Hazrat Idress (AS) 70 different languages and one of the
languages was Arabic. With the teaching of the Arabic Alphabets, Allah has given
the Numeric values of every Arabic Alphabet.
Arabic Language is a Perfect language and contains 28 Alphabets and the Number –
28 is the 2nd Perfect Number in Mathematics.
The first Alphabet – Alif is the Foundation and the Root of all other 27 Arabic
Alphabets.
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 29
Alif is the mother of all 27 Arabic Alphabets
The book available on the subject of the topic of Abjad --- The Science of Abjad
One can download this book from the link given below to understand the hidden
meanings of Arabic Alphabets:
The Constant Pattern in our Universe, Time and Space requires Perfect
Mathematics. Our Almighty Allah is a Mathematician and He used Rules and
Regulations in the Creation of the Universe, Time and Space.
The Rules and Regulations of the Universe, Time and Space are also
mathematically encoded. The Subject of Mathematics comes under Pure Science.
No research is authentic unless proven by Mathematical Rules and Formulas.
Justice requires Facts and Figures. The Facts and Figures govern by the Knowledge
of Mathematics. So our God is Almighty Mathematician.
The Greatest Ghaib of Allah is the Arrival of Jesus and Mahdi near Qiyamat.
The Abjad of Arabic Words, "Ghaib e Azam" - غ ـ ـ ــب اعظ ــم meaning - The
Greatest Ghaib is:
“The life of this Ummah (the nation of last Prophet s.a.w) will exceed
1000, yet will be limited to 1500 years.”
(Shaikh Muhammad ibn `Abd ar-Rasul Barzanji (d.1103 AH), Al-Isha`ah li Ashrat as-
Sa`ah, p. 299)
"The life span of my Ummah (the nation of last Prophet of God) will not
extend much past 1500 years.”
The Total Lifespan of Prophet Muhammad (PBUH) Ummah is less than 1500 years.
The Hijri year starts from 622 AD when Prophet Muhammad (PBUH) migrated from
Mecca to Medina.
( ال م71)
The Jew calculated the Abjad or the Numeric Value of الـ ــمi.e. 71. He said that it is
very less. Then Prophet added:
( ال ر231)
The Jew added the Abjad of ال ـ ــرi.e. 231 and again said that it is less. Then again
Prophet said:
( الم ر271)
The Jew kept on asking the same question and the Prophet Muhammad (PBUH)
kept on adding the Haroof e Muqatead.
Prophet Muhammad (PBUH) mentioned few other Haroof e Muqatead. The Jew
Scholar added the sum of the Haroof e Muqatead and calculated to 1498.
The Jew replied then the Age of your Ummat (Nation) would be 1498 Years,
around 1500 years.
Prophet Muhammad (PBUH) spent 53 Years of His Life in Mecca and then
Migrated to Madina and spent 10 years in Madina before His Death. The Hijri
Calendar of Muslims started with the Migration (Hijrat) of Prophet Muhammad
(PBUH) from Mecca to Madina. The Total Life of Prophet Muhammad was 63 Years.
Now we see is there any link between his most popular name ‘Mahdi’ and the Hijri
year – 1445.
In the year 1445, the first two numbers – 14 corresponds to the century and the last
two numbers – 45 corresponds to the year.
14 ------- Century
45 ------- Year
Now the name ‘Mahdi’ comprised of 4 Arabic letters . If we add the numerical
value of first two Arabic letters in the name of ‘Mahdi’, we see that:
مهـ ــدى
مه دي
(10 + 4) (5 + 40)
14 45
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 37
The numerical value of ‘Meem’ is 40 and ‘Ha’ is 5. Now adding the values of first
two Arabic letters,
Now adding the numerical values of the last two Arabic letters in the name ‘Mahdi’,
we see that:
The numerical value of ‘Da’ is 4 and ‘Ye’ is 10. Now adding the values of the last
two Arabic letters,
The Arabic Name, "Mahdi" is from the Last Arabic Alphabets of the names of
Bibi Fatima - Mah, Muhammad - Dal and Ali - Ye.
If we diagnose His name, “Mahdi” carefully, we would notice that His name
comprised of 4 Sacred Arabic Alphabets.
First two Arabic Alphabets in his name, Mahdi are, “Mem and Ha”
If we look carefully, we would notice that the last two Arabic Alphabets in Bibi
Fatima’s name are also: “Mem and Ha” - ﻓﺎﻃم ـ ـ ـ ـ ـ ـ ــﻪ
So if we take the last two Arabic Alphabets from “Fatima” - ﻓﺎﻃم ـ ـ ـ ـ ـ ـ ــﻪname, last
Arabic Alphabet from “Muhammad” name and the last Arabic Alphabet from
“Ali” name, we would get:
MAH (…… )م ـ ــﻪ..The Abjad of “Mah” - م ـ ــﻪis 45……….which tells the ‘Arrival Year’
Di (………)دي.The Abjad of “Di” - ديis 14…………which tells the ‘Arrival Century’
Century - 14 45 - Year
MAHDI - مهـ ــدى 59
5 and 9
If we add the first 5 Numbers from 1 to 5, it will give the Century of the
Arrival of Mahdi
If we add the first 5 Numbers from 1 to 5, it will give the Century of the
Arrival of Mahdi
‘The Jubilee Cycle is the never ending pattern of counting seven – seven of years.
Included are the dates for Creation, the Flood, the Exodus, the destruction of
Solomon’s Temple, the rebuilding of the Second Temple, and many other
historical events that were dated relative to the Jubilee Cycle.
There are enough historical records to demonstrate that this Timeline cannot be
shifted in either direction, not even by one year. This Creation Jubilee Timeline
becomes the backbone for reconstructing all of historical chronology.
Revealed in this book is that we are indeed living in the last days.
Lost in the traditional translations of the Bible is that Genesis 6:3 and Daniel 9:24
are prophecies referring to the Jubilee Cycles. This book provides the evidence
that both prophecies will end in September 2023. All of the end time prophecies
will be fulfilled in the next few years.”
Tuesday – 26th Sept, 2023 Tishri (10th Day)…..Starts the 122nd Jubilee Cycle
‘This day ends the 121st Jubilee Cycle since Creation. In this time Adam’s children
have had full reign outside of YHWH’s Garden and Kingdom – rule for (49
times 121) = 5929 Years.
Both of the timelines of Daniel 9:24 and Genesis 6:3 end here.
YHWH (Almighty God) is Sovereign, and may decide to fulfill His end time
prophecies in ways people just do not except. The warning of this timeline is that
the reader be dutiful and watchful, looking for the promised events that are
coming.”
The 122nd Jubilee Cycle Will Begin the Rest of History ………….2023 AD
www.120Jubilees.com
Book Features:
Prophetic events for the decade 2014 - 2023. Intel and info to help you
prepare!
Specific events to watch for if you are Jewish and if you live in Israel. If you are
NOT Jewish, and you do not live in Israel, then you better for sure read this!
These events are actually “signs” prerecorded in the Hebrew Scriptures to alert
you.
1. To let you know how and by what mean your enemies will deceive you;
2. To prepare you for the coming of the Messiah to Israel to establish His
Kingdom.
The years of Lord 2016 AD to 2023 AD are interpreted to be the prophetic “Seven
Years Tribulation” on earth and the simultaneous fulfillment of the Lord’s first
wedding week to his Chruch bride in heaven.
The Scriptural justification for this interpretation is revealed in both the Old and
New Testament’s. This includes Jacob’s marriage to Leah, the Book of Daniel, the
The End Time prophetic interpretation for the years of our Lord 2016 AD to 2023
AD centers on the people of Israel and the unbelieving Gentile inhabitants of the
world.
It has been interpreted that the “Seven Year Great Church Harvest” will be
completed at the time of the Rapture in the prophetic year of 2016 AD. The
“Seven Year Tribulation” will begin immediately after the Church Rapture in the
year 2016 AD. The next “seven years” on earth will be subjected to the wrath of
God. This Tribulation period will last seven years from the year 2016 AD until the
year 2023 AD.”
The Mayan civilization, which reached its height from 300 A.D. to 900 A.D., had a
talent for astronomy. Advanced mathematics and primitive astronomy
flourished, creating what many have called the most accurate calendar in the
world.
The Mayans predicted a final event that included a solar shift, a Venus transit
and violent earthquakes.
Their Long Count calendar begins in 3,114 B.C., marking time in roughly
394-year periods known as Baktuns. Thirteen was a significant,
sacred number for the Mayas, and they wrote that the 13th Baktun ends on Dec.
21, 2012.
Starting from 3,144 B.C till 2012 AD, there are 5122 Years and the Mayans
Calendars were accurately predicting the Exact Dates of All Solar and Lunar
Eclipses during this long period of 5122 Years.
Their Calendar was so accurate that they accurately predicted the Solar and
Lunar Eclipses for the last 5000 years with no mistake and that is very
remarkable and unbelievable for the Ancient Civilization to calculate exact dates.
10. And it waxed great, even to the host of heaven; and it cast down some of the host
and of the stars to the ground, and stamped upon them.
11. Yea, he magnified himself even to the prince of the host, and by him
the daily sacrifice was taken away, and the place of his sanctuary was cast down.
12. And an host was given him against the daily sacrifice by reason of transgression, and
it cast down the truth to the ground; and it practised, and prospered.
14. And he said unto me, Unto two thousand and three hundred days;
then shall the sanctuary be cleansed.
1. Daniel 8: 9 – 14 (Verses)
2. Daniel 8: 9………….B.C 277 (277 Years before Christ)
3. B.C. 277…………Macedonia Kingdom’s starting year
7. And I heard the man clothed in linen, which was upon the waters of the river, when he
held up his right hand and his left hand unto heaven, and sware by him that liveth for ever
that it shall be for a time, times, and an half; and when he shall have accomplished
to scatter the power of the holy people, all thesethings shall be finished.
8. And I heard, but I understood not: then said I, O my Lord, whatshall be the end of
these things?
9. And he said, Go thy way, Daniel: for the words are closed up and sealed till the time of
the end.
10. Many shall be purified, and made white, and tried; but thewicked shall do wickedly: and
none of the wicked shall understand; but the wise shall understand.
11. And from the time that the daily sacrifice shall be taken away, and the abomination that
maketh desolate set up, there shall be a thousand two hundred and ninety days.
12. Blessed is he that waiteth, and cometh to the thousand three hundred and five and
thirty days.
13. But go thou thy way till the end be: for thou shalt rest, andstand in thy lot at the end of
the days.
The Book of Daniel – Old Testament – The World will End in 2023 AD
Research for this section came from a book by Ian Gurney, the Cassandra
Prophesy, published in 1999.
God didn’t say you can’t know the year, and in fact, Daniel in chapter 12, verses
11& 12 says Jesus will cometh back in 1335 days.
“And from the time that the daily sacrifice shall be taken away, and the
abomination that maketh desolate set up, there shall be 1290 days. Dan 12, v11
Blessed is he that waiteth and cometh to the 1335 days. Dan 12, v12”
In order to calculate the date of the 2nd Coming of the Messiah and the End-of-
the World, we need to identify the abomination that maketh desolate.
There are three stumbling blocks that have kept mankind and scholars from fully
understanding the book of Revelation and the event that ranks as one of the
most important in the history of the Jews, Christians and Muslims: “The
abomination of the desolation”.
“And arms shall stand on his part, and they shall pollute the sanctuary of
strength, and shall take away the daily sacrifice, and they shall place the
abomination that maketh desolate Dan 11:31”
But when ye shall see the abomination of desolation, spoken of by Daniel the
prophet, standing where it ought not, (let him that readeth understand). Mark
13:14”
The two verses refer to a conversation between Jesus, Peter, James and Andrew
on the Mount of Olives. Before he mentions the abomination Jesus says the
following to his disciples admiring the grandeur of the temple.
“Seest thou these great buildings? There shall not be left one stone upon
another, that shall not be thrown down Mark 13:2”
Here Jesus is prophesying an event that is to take place within the lifetime of the
disciples. August 29th in 70 A.D. (the exact same day the Babylonians burned
down Solomon's temple 657 years earlier) the Roman army razed Herod's
Temple to the ground.
As Jesus places the event of the abomination after the destruction of the temple
in 70 A.D. and uses the words “when ye shall see” (Mark 13:14), he places the
event in the future.
It is impossible the abomination spoken of by Jesus could have taken place prior
to 70 AD and therefore any exegesis that identifies the abomination, as 167 B.C.
is the “error” made over 1400 years ago.
On the death of Abu Bakr, Omar ibn al Khattab, advisor to Mohammed became
the second caliph and ordered that a magnificent golden domed mosque, Islam’s
third holiest shrine, be built… directly over “the most holy place” in Jerusalem.
The Mosque of Omar, The Dome of the Rock is the correct identification of the
abomination of desolation.
Biblical scholars acknowledge the words of Ezekiel who wrote 30 years before
Daniel. “I have appointed thee each day for a year”. Using each day for a year,
“And from the time that the daily sacrifice shall be taken away, and the
abomination that maketh desolate set up in 688 A.D., there shall be 1290 years.
Daniel 12:11
Blessed is he that waiteth for the Messiah and cometh to the 1335 years or 2023.
Daniel 12:12
But the court which is without the Temple leave out and measure it not; for it is
given unto the Gentiles: and the holy city shall they tread under foot forty and
These two verses appear to be talking about the same time scale and the same
event. But only if we assume an average month is thirty days - then forty-two
months = 1260 days. An “average month” does not account for the extra day for
a leap year. Using the reckonings from the Julian calendar and the extra day, the
period of forty-two months is 1279 not 1260 days.
We also know verse 1 refers to the area outside the temple as being in the hands
of the Gentiles (non Jews) as well as the holy city of Jerusalem for 1279 years
(“each day for a year”.); and in verse 2 the two witnesses of God the Jewish
people, the Houses of Judah and Israel, will prophesy or preach for a similar 1260
years “clothed in sackcloth”. Sackcloth is symbolic of regret, repentance and
mourning.
So now the Bible has correctly given us the three most important dates in the
history of the Jewish people in this century; 1948, 1967 and 1978 (688 A.D. +
1290 The Camp David Peace accord).
The last date recorded in Daniel, the Second Coming of Christ and the End-of-
the-World as we know it can now be calculated.
Blessed is he that waiteth and cometh to the 1335 days. Dan 12, v12
Notice Daniel uses the term “Blessed.” Blessed is found throughout the Bible and
is a word which is always a description of a state of grace that each individual
can attain. A oneness with God, a state of redemption and can be better
understood by the following verse from Revelation:
In this verse the first resurrection refers to an apocalyptic event in our future, an
event described in the preceding verse of Revelation.
And I saw thrones, and they that sat upon them, and judgment was given unto
them: and I saw the souls of them that were beheaded for the witness of Jesus,
and for the word of God,, and which had not worshipped the beast, neither his
image, neither had received his mark upon their foreheads, or in their hands:
and they lived and reigned with Christ a 1000 years. But the rest of the dead
lived not again until the 1000 years were finished: this is the first resurrection.
Rev 20, v4&5
Having been given this final dating Daniel is then told, in the last verse of his
book:
But go thy way till the end be: for thou shalt rest, and stand in thy lot at the end
of the days. Dan 12, v13
He finality of this last verse is unequivocal and relates directly to the
penultimate verse stating as it does that those who reach the 1335 days [years]
are not only blessed but will have reach the “end of the days”
http://www.thepeoplesvoice.org/TPV3/Voices.php/2012/03/10/2012-is-not-the-end-of-the-
world-it-s-2023
Another very good website on You Tube - Rapture of the Church in 2023 ?
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=yjmf68qCbuU
Unless you are living under a rock you have heard about Nostradamas, the man
who, 500 years ago, made an estimated 6,338 predictions/prophecies. Followers
claim he predicted everything from Hitler to 9/11, the death of Princess Diana,
along with the assassination of just about every important person in history.
“Jupiter and Saturn joined in Aries, Eternal God what changes. When after a long
century the bad times will return In France and Italy what turmoil. Century 1.
Quatrain 51”
The conjunction of Jupiter and Saturn in Aries is very rare. The astronomical
conjunction occurred almost two hundred years ago and then again on
September 2, 1995.
The long century brings this quatrain into the present time; as Nostradamus
refers to the 20th century as the long century. The bad times in France and Italy
have been going on during the 20th and 21st century.
“Fire from the heavens will strike the West, and the Muslim (Midy) world will
rush upon Israel (au Levant), People will die of hunger without finding a root to
feed on. This is the third world war, the fury of the Gods of war, the
revolutionaries (Escarboucles) will light their flaming fires, the war of revolution
and at the finish will be famine. Sixain 27”
We have September 2, 1995 as the starting point; now we need to find the
duration of these troubles.
“The third antichrist is soon annihilated; His bloody war will have lasted 27
years. The heretics/unbelievers are dead, captured, exiled. The blood of human
bodies will redden the whole earth. Century 8. Quatrain 77”
“Long awaited he will never return in Europe, in Asia he will appear. One of the
leaguer issued from the great Hermes, and he will have power above all the
kings of the East. Century 10. Quatrain 75”
In Hermetic terms the God Hermes stands for Mercury, with Jupiter indicating
Islam. Therefore, Nostradamus states the problems the Antichrist starts will last
for 27 years.
“Thus shall it come to pass that each one will be led into its own pasture. For
feeding in strange pasture causeth distress, contention, and misery in this world.
As soon as each one cometh into its own stall there shall be unity. For the mouth
This corresponds to the great change that is forecast in the Bible: a total
renewal, a resurrection. The date given at the end is confusing since there is no
such Roman numeral. At first glance it could be 43, but in Roman numerals this
would be XLIII, in other words 50 minus ten plus 3. The fact that Paracelsus tells
us this is a year is the clue to the correct interpretation of the figure.
Baba Vanga was a blind Bulgarian woman (born 1911, died 1996) who was a
herbalist and alleged mystic who made many predictions for the future. She
became incredibly popular due to her so-called mystical powers. When she died
huge crowds attended her funeral.
Closer to our own time she predicted a change in the Earth’s orbit in 2023.
Curiously she predicted the beginning of World War III in 2010 AD and her
followers say the Syria War, Sudan War, Libya War, Ukraine Crisis, etc are all
leading to the predicted Big World War by 2022 AD.
“The Sun would Rise from the West instead of East on the arrival of
Mahdi.”…………………………Change in the Earth’s Orbit
Baba Wanga also predicted that Black President would come in USA 15 years ago
before Barack Obama become the 1st Black President of USA in 2008 Elections
and mentioned that after that Black President, the Next President would destroy
USA.
Nursi inspired a faith movement that has played a vital role in the revival of
Islam in Turkey and now numbers several millions of followers world
wide. His followers, often known as the "Nurcu" movement or the "Nur
cemaat", often call him by the venerating mononymic Üstad ("the Master").
Harun Yahya – A famous Muslim Turkish Scholar, in his book – “The Time of
Struggle of Mahdi” mentioned the predictions of Said Nursi.
Bediuzzaman Said Nursi said Mahdi will start his first duty at start of 15th
Islamic century i.e. 1979.
The 10th Muharram, 1400 Hijri was on 30th November, 1979 AD. It was
also Friday.
So 10th Muharram, 1400 Hijri was Friday on 30th Nov, 1979 AD and similarly
10th Muharram, 1445 Hijri was also Friday on 28th July, 2023 AD.
www.endtimes2014.com
http://www.discoveringislam.org/end_of_israel.htm
He mentioned in his book that by the end of year – 2022 AD, the Second Coming of
Jesus Christ is expected along with the Arrival of Mahdi.
This End of Time book (including its predictions) is beneficial not just for Muslims,
but also for Christians (Catholics, Protestants, Orthodox, Mormons, Jehovah's
Witnesses, etc.), Jews (including Kabbalists), and people who follow other religious/
philosophical/ occult beliefs and practices (such as Hinduism, Buddhism, Taoism,
Confucianism, Shintoism, Scientology, Paganism, Satanism, Sorcery, Gnosticism,
etc.), as well as atheists, agnostics, and people who do not follow any religion.
For example, the book is very useful for Jews and Christians whose perception of
the End Times is limited to the Torah (Tanakh)/ Talmud/ Zohar or to Biblical (Bible)/
Messianic/ Christian prophecies, predictions, apparitions (visions), and dreams.Its
research seems to indicate that, most probably, the first phase of the End of Time
will start when the first evil person (False Elijah/Elias, Messiah son of Joseph, etc.)
arrives. This will trigger the Mahdi (Mehdi) to appear, in-sha-Allah (if God is willing).
The last evil person (Dajjal / Anti-Christ, False Messiah son of David, etc.) will come
(or return) in year 2022 AD. In response, Prophet Jesus Christ son of Mary will come
down from Heaven to Earth and end Kingdom of the Dajjal (AntiChrist), in-sha-
Allah (if God is willing). Thus, the first phase of the End Times will end in 2022 (1444
Hijri).
The Jews are expecting two Messiahs to arise in the End of Days (End of Time): the
first one is Messiah son of Joseph and the second one is Messiah son of David.
The Christians are expecting two witnesses to come before Jesus Christ. The
Christians believe one of the witnesses is going to be Prophet Elijah (Elias). The first
evil person (Araj or Dajjal) who will probably come in 2014 AD may falsely claim to
be Messiah son of Joseph and one of the witnesses expected by Christians. The last
evil person (Dajjal or Anti-Christ) who will appear (or return) in 2022 AD is likely to
falsely claim to be Messiah son of David of the Jews and Jesus Christ of the
Christians.
In 1139 A.D. the Catholic Saint Malachy was said to have experienced visions
during a trip to Rome. He subsequently put these visions to paper and penned
a document containing 112 short phrases purporting to describe all future
popes that would head the Catholic Church. Though not a part of official
Catholic dogma or church teachings, this Prophecy of the Popes is well known
by Vatican officials and church scholars because it has been remarkably
accurate about naming the last 111 heads of one of the world’s oldest and
most widespread religions.
“In extreme persecution the seat of the Holy Roman Church will be occupied
by Peter the Roman…”
“Who will pasture his sheep in many tribulations and when these things are
finished, the city of seven hills will be destroyed, and the terrible or fearsome
judge will judge his people.
The End.”
Prophecy of the Popes – Attributed to St. Malachy circa 1139 A.D.
Within the Book of Revelation, also known as The Apocalypse of John, are
references to the destruction of the City of Seven Hills (Rome) and to the
many trials that will be faced by mankind ahead of the final judgement – the
rapture, the rise of the anti-christ, seven years of tribulations, and the end of
days.Suffice it to say, if the prophecy is accurate, then the world will soon be
engulfed in a battle between good and evil.
The idea by some Catholics that the next pope on St. Malachy’s list heralds
the beginning of “great apostasy” followed by “great tribulation” sets the
stage for the imminent unfolding of apocalyptic events, something many non-
As stated by Dr. Michael Lake on the front cover of this unprecedented report,
Catholic and evangelical scholars have dreaded this moment for centuries.
Unfortunately – as you will discover in the next 90 days – time for avoiding
Peter the Roman just ran out.
Pope John Paul II is referred to as “De labore folis,” or “from the labour of the
sun,” and is the only pope to have been born on the day of an eclipse and
entombed on one as well.
There are scores of similar parallels between prophecy and pope, adding all
the more credence to its legitimacy.
In its last prediction, though the prophecy refers to Petrus Romanus as the
shepherd that will pasture his sheep, it may not necessarily mean the Pope
will be on the side of the people, or even God. According to Thomas Horn, the
author of Petrus Romanus: The Final Pope Is Here, the last pope is not the
anti-christ, but he may well be the false prophet who ushers him in - a chilling
thought for the billions of Catholics and Christians around the world:
The important fact is this. The very next Pope, following Pope Benedict the
XVI who, according to a lot of news coming out of Rome right now – his days
are numbered. He’s getting older, he’s getting feeble, he may retire……
The next Pope is the final one on a 900 year old prophecy.
While describing the world events from 2014 to 2023, they mentioned that from
2021 to 2023 the following events would occur:
“In 2021, the establishment of the era of rekindling Spirituality in mankind will begin . In
2023, there will be arrival of particles from Satyalok, the subtlest and purest of the 14
main subtle-regions to help with the positive work taking place towards establishment
of the Divine Kingdom.”
While mentioning the World War 3 events before 2023 AD, they mentioned:
“The fact that the intensity of the battle will increase up to 70 units in 2019 gives us
an indication of the severity of the battle. It will then rapidly come down to zero by
2023.”
“Only a fraction of Armageddon will be experienced on Earth. But this fraction itself will be
catastrophic and the cause of mass destruction. We will physically witness this fraction of
Armageddon in the form of the unleashing of forces of nature and World War 3 where
weapons of mass destruction will be used. The rise in natural disasters such as floods,
earthquakes and volcanoes will be primarily due to the rise in Raja and Tama fuelled by
“The tide of the battle of good versus evil at a physical level begins to change and the forces of
good start to win. The Governance of the Divine Kingdom.”
2023 AD:
Establishment of the Sattva predominant (Divine) Kingdom
So even different religions are predicting the Establishment of Divine Kingdom
by 2023 AD and the Arrival of the 14th Purest in 2023 AD.
“I will bring you out from the peoples and gather you out of the countries where
you are scattered with a mighty hand and an outstretched arm and with wrath
poured with.” (Ezekiel – 20:34)
So the Jews scholars and their Rabbis are also preparing for the “Messiah” for their
salvation in Israel.
https://ghayb.com/2015/12/when-will-we-see-imam-mahdi-ra-and-isa-as/
“We gave Jesus, son of Mary, clear signs and strengthened him with the Holy
Spirit.” (2:87)
“There is not one of the People of the Book who will not believe in [Jesus] before his
death”. (4:159)
The Prophet (pbuh) described the Masih Isa Ibn Marryam, ‘On the night of the Isra
wal Miraj, “I met Moses – he was a slim man with wavy hair, and looked like a man
from the Shanu’ah tribe. I also met Jesus – he was of medium height and of a red
complexion, as if he had just come out of the bath'” (Bukhari, Muslim)
The Prophet (saws) said, “Whilst I was asleep, I saw myself (in a dream) making
Tawaf around the Ka’bah. I saw a brown-skinned man, with straight hair, being
supported by two men, and with water dripping from his head. I said, ‘Who is this?’
They said, ‘The son of Mary’. I turned around and saw a fat, ruddy man, with curly
hair, who was blind in his right eye; his eye looked like a floating grape. I asked,
‘Who is this?’ They said, ‘The Dajjal’ The one who most resembles him is Ibn Qatan.”
Al-Zuhri explained: Ibn Qatan was a man from Khuza’ah who died during the
Jahiliyyah (before the coming of Islam). (Bukhari)
Imam Ibn Kathir said: “After the lesser signs of the Hour appear and increase,
mankind will have reached a stage of great suffering. Then the awaited Mahdi will
The false Messiah will remain for a while, destroying mankind completely, and the
earth will witness the greatest Fitnah (tribulation) in its history. Then the Messiah
Isa (a.s) will descend, bringing justice from heaven. He will kill the Dajjal (The Curse
Of Allah Upon Him), and there will be years of safety and security.”
Ibn Kathir said: The black flags that will come with Al-Mahdi, whose name is
Muhammad ibn ‘Abdullah Al Ulwee (from the descendants of ‘Alee), Al-Faatimee
(from the descendants of Fatimah), and Al-Husanee (from the descendants of Al-
Hasan or Al-Husain). Allah will rectify him in a single night — meaning that He will
forgive him, guide him, make him understand, and make him wise, after not having
been of that description. Allah will provide him with help from the people of the
East, who will support him and establish his rule. Their flags will be black, a color
which carries with it dignity. The flag of the Messenger of Allah was black, and it
was called Al-lqaab. Khaalid ibn Waleed planted it in the ground in Ath-Thunayyah,
which is eastern Damascus. This is when he came from Iraq…Similarly, when the
Prophet, entered Makkah during its conquest, he wore a black helmet on his head;
and according to another narration he was wearing a black turban over his helmet.
Anas ibn Maalik said that he heard the Messenger of Allah ‘say, “We, the children of
‘Abdul-Muttalib, are the chiefs of the dwellers of Paradise, I, Hamzah (the prophets
Uncle), ‘Alee, Ja’far (one of the First to accept Islam), Al-Hasan, Al-Husain (his
grandchildren), and Al-Mahdi.” (Ibn Maajah)
Ali (r.a) said, “The Prophet (pbuh) said, ‘The Mahdi is one of us, from among the
people of my household. In one night Allah will inspire him and prepare him to carry
out his task successfully.’” (Ahmad and ibn Majah.)
Narrated Umm Salamah, Ummul Mu’minin: The Prophet (saws) said: Disagreement
will occur at the death of a caliph and a man of the people of Medina will come
flying forth to Mecca. Some of the people of Mecca will come to him, bring him out
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 92
against his will and swear allegiance to him between the Corner and the Maqam.
An expeditionary force will then be sent against him from Syria but will be
swallowed up in the desert between Mecca and Medina. When the people see that,
the eminent saints (abdal) of Syria and the best people of Iraq will come to him and
swear allegiance to him between the Corner and the Maqam. Then there will arise a
man of Quraysh whose maternal uncles belong to Kalb (the ruling class of syria) and
(he will) send against them an expeditionary force which will be overcome by them,
and that is the expedition of Kalb. Disappointed will be the one who does not
receive the booty of Kalb. He will divide the property, and will govern the people by
the Sunnah of their Prophet (saws) and establish Islam on Earth. He will remain
seven years, then die, and the Muslims will pray over him. (Abu Dawud said:
Some transmitted from Hisham “nine years” and some “seven years”.
When the Army Sent from Syria is Swallowed up that will be the clear sign for the
rest of the World that this is the Mahdi (ra) of Allah. This will be the time when it
will become an obligation upon this Ummah to respond and go to Him because that
is when the Awliyah (Saints, literally Abdal in the hadith) and the best people of
Iraq will respond to him first, and they are the best of people, whoever comes latter
will be among the others of this Ummah, similar to how the best of Quraish
responded to the message of the prophet (saws) first then those lesser than them
responded later.
In terms of hadith literature as a whole, if we place all the Ahadith referring to the
Signs of the Hour on a timeline of events that will occur before the advent of the
Mahdi, and after His arrival in an order, we will see there are not many events still
expected to occur before Mahdi (ra) arrives.
Abdullah ibn Amr said Allah’s Messenger (peace be upon him) said: The Dajjaal will
appear in my Ummah and he will stay (in the world) for forty — I cannot say
whether he meant forty days, forty months or forty years. Allah will then send Isa
(a.s), son of Mary, who will resemble Urwah ibn Masud. He (Isa (a.s) ) will chase him
and kill him. Then people will live for seven years, during which time there will be
no rancor between any two persons. After that Allah will send a cold wind from the
He (Jesus) will slay the Dajjal and he will stay in the World for 40 years. Then, he
will die and the Muslims will perform the funeral prayer for him.”
These Ahadith give us the length of years for events to occur, we know Islam
has 1500 years on earth, if we take from the 1500 year lifespan the 40 years
that Isa (a.s) will be alive on earth, and the 7 years between his death and the time
Allah takes the life of every Muslim with the cool breeze we have 1500 – 40 – 7 =
1453 Hijri or 2031 AD approximately, that is when we can expect Isa (as) at the
soonest.
We say approximately because later we will show how these numbers may change
by as much as a decade from this number, and no figure can be exact as closer
analysis of the subject would show there is room for interpretation in this
time range.
These calculations are more like a weather forecast of what is coming over the
horizon in an estimated period of time according to the Ahadith of Rasul Allah
(saws), sometimes the rain arrives as we expect it sometimes it is a little late.
Abu Sa’eed Al-Khudree reported that the Prophet said, “In my nation there will be
the Mahdee. If his period is shortened, then (his rule is) for seven (years);
otherwise, it is for nine (years). My nation will enjoy blessings the likes of which it
had never previously heard of; the earth will give forth its fruits and none of it will
be stored away. Wealth in those days will be abundant. A man will stand and say,
‘O Mahdee, give me’ He will answer, ‘Take. (Ibn Maajah, Ibn Katheer in his al Bidaya
wa Nihaya)
If we calculate, 1500 – 40 (the life of Isa) – 7 (time left after Isa dies) – 9
(life of the Mahdi) = 1444 Hijra approximately. .............. {2023 AD}
Therefor 1444H – 1437H (present day) = 7 years from now is the soonest, He is
expected which is 2023 AD, or 9 years from now in 2025 AD, if we use 7 years in
the initial calculation instead of the 9.
Abu As-Sadeeq An-Naajee related that Abu Sa’eed Al-Khudree said, “We feared that
there would be a Hadath (something new but objectionable) and so we asked the
Prophet, ” He said, “Indeed in my nation there is the Mahdi, and he will come out
and live for 5 or 7 or 9. A man will go to him and say, ‘O Mahdi, give me.’ He will
throw handfuls into the man’s garment, filling it with whatever the man is able to
carry.” (Hasan, At-Tirmidhee, Ibn Katheer in his al Bidaya wa Nihaya)
The 7 or 9 years are the most common numbers for the Mahdi’s time on earth, but
there is a chance it may be 5 years instead. If we use 5 years we have 1500 – 40 – 7
– 5 = 1448 Hijra therefor, 1448H – 1437 H = 11 years from now.
Therefore in total we have 7, 9 and 11 years from now based on the numbers
given to us by the Prophet (saws) or 2023, 2025 or 2027AD, the later we see him
the later we will see Isa (as).
Because we can place all the ahadtih on a timeline we can place names and years
for when the events occur, which all leads to one question when will the end come.
For muslims there are two “ends” they are waiting for in life, the hour itself and the
end of Islam on earth before that time.
This book will present not just the ahadith that speak about the specific lifespan of
Islam, but the ahadith in which the prophet gave a timeline for events in years such
as Mahdi (ra) ruling for 9 years or Isa (as) remaining on earth for 40 years after He
(saws) returns, this book will show that both types of Ahadith say the exact same
thing about how much time Islam has.
The exact year itself isn’t important, the numbers give us a time frame of
when these events are expected to occur, and any one of these factors listed above
or a combination of them could change the years given in the calculations, but they
are a fair estimation.
One can download his book, "The Syrian Uprising and the Signs of the
Hour" from his website:
https://ghayb.com/syria-and-signs-of-the-hour/
Hazrat Naemat Shah Wali is a known person in the Sub continent (India and
Pakistan). He made predictions around 1160 – 1175 AD or 570 Hijri around 850
years ago and his predictions came true.
He predicted that the Arrival of Mahdi would be very near after 1420 Hijri or
2000 AD. That is 25 years from 1420 Hijri.
2. Second Phase (5 Years)………….Increase of prices of all things all over the world
(2003 – 2008 AD)
3. Third Phase (5 Years)………….Increase in Food Prices all over the world
(2008 – 2013 AD)
Since 2000 AD the events on the map of the world are quickly changing and the
world is going through drastic changes. All the prophecies are coming true and
sooner we would see the Arrival of Mahdi in 2023 AD or 1445 Hijri.
1998 – 2003 AD……………Spread of Diseases like Bird flu, SARS, Mad cow, etc and
after 9 – 11 incident in USA, the kings and tyrants of the world suppress the
freedom and liberty of the people all over the world by introducing different
laws and regulations and fear spread among the nations.
2008 – 2013 AD………….. Increase in the Food Prices all over the world. Global
Recession and Depression would happen all over the World.
2013 – 2023 AD ………….In the last 2 Phases of 5 years each, the whole World
would see the World War – 3 which has already been started in Middle East and
would spread to the rest of the world and 1/3rd people would die by the end of
this Big War in 2022 AD. World wide Drought and Diseases would spread after
the World War and 1/3rd people would die with drought and diseases. The mass
murder would happen all across the Globe after the World War 3 in 2022 AD and
continue till the Arrival of Mahdi in 2023 AD.
The Jewish year – 5783 would start on their first month – Tishri, on
26th September, 2022 and would continue till September 16th, 2023.
As the Jews are also expecting the Arrival of their Messiah in the year - 2023 AD.
The Kharooj (Exit) and the Arrival of Mahdi is also in the year - 2023 AD.
"....(Thus said Jehovah, God of David thy father,) I have heard thy
prayer, I have seen thy tear. Io, I give healing to thee on the third
day (thou dost go up to the house of Jehovah;)
The Gematrical Value of the Verse - 2 Chronicles 23:13, The Holy Bible is also 5783,
which states as:
: 13 and seeth, and Io, the king is standing by his pillar in the
entrance, and the heads, and the trumpets [are] by the king, and
all the people of the land rejoicing...."
So it is quite evident even from the Holy Verses of the Holy Bible that the Second
Coming of Jesus Chrish and the Arrival of Mahdi is in the 5783 Year of Jews and
2023 AD of the Gregorian Calendar.
Albert Pike
Pike was said to be a genius, able to read and write in different languages. At various stages of his
life he was a poet, philosopher, frontiersman, soldier, humanitarian and philanthropist.
Between 1859 and 1871, Pike worked out a military blueprint for three world wars and various
revolutions throughout the world. He was a 33rd Degree Free Mason and leading the famous
Secret Society in America - The Illuminati.
Albert Pike received a vision, which he described in a letter that he wrote to Mazzini, dated
August 15, 1871. This letter graphically outlined plans for three world wars that were seen as
necessary to bring about the One World Order, and we can marvel at how accurately it has
predicted events that have already taken place.
The letter was written on August which is the 8th month and the date was 15th and the year
was 1871.
1871 15 8 and then divide the number by 19, we would see the number is
completely divided by number - 19.
98482 x 19 = 1871 15 8
"The First World War must be brought about in order to permit the Illuminati to overthrow the
power of the Czars in Russia and of making that country a fortress of atheistic Communism.
The divergences caused by the "agentur" (agents) of the Illuminati between the British and
Germanic Empires will be used to foment this war. At the end of the war, Communism will be
built and used in order to destroy the other governments and in order to weaken the
religions."
"The Second World War must be fomented by taking advantage of the differences between
the Fascists and the political Zionists. This war must be brought about so that Nazism is
destroyed and that the political Zionism be strong enough to institute a sovereign state of
Israel in Palestine. During the Second World War, International Communism must become
strong enough in order to balance Christendom, which would be then restrained and held in
check until the time when we would need it for the final social cataclysm."
After this Second World War, Communism was made strong enough to begin taking over
weaker governments. In 1945, at the Potsdam Conference between Truman, Churchill, and
Stalin, a large portion of Europe was simply handed over to Russia, and on the other side of
the world, the aftermath of the war with Japan helped to sweep the tide of Communism into
China.
(Readers who argue that the terms Nazism and Zionism were not known in 1871 should
remember that the Secret Society invented both these movements. In addition, Communism
as an ideology, and as a coined phrase, originates in France during the Revolution.)
"The Third World War must be fomented by taking advantage of the differences caused by the
"agentur" of the "Illuminati" between the political Zionists and the leaders of Islamic World.
World
The war must be conducted in such a way that Islam (the Moslem Arabic World) and political
Zionism (the State of Israel) mutually destroy each other. Meanwhile the other nations, once
more divided on this issue will be constrained to fight to the point of complete physical, moral,
spiritual and economical exhaustion…We shall unleash the Nihilists and the atheists, and we
shall provoke a formidable social cataclysm which in all its horror will show clearly to the
nations the effect of absolute atheism, origin of savagery and of the most bloody turmoil.
Since the terrorist attacks of Sept 11, 2001, world events, and in particular in the Middle East,
show a growing unrest and instability between ModeModern rn Zionism and the Arabic World. This is
completely in line with the call for a Third World War to be fought between the two, and their
allies on both sides. This Third World War is still to come, and recent events show us that it is
not far off.”
World War 3 would reach its Climax by 15th August, 2022 AD between West and
Russia and China.
So there are 151 years from 1871 AD till 2022 AD till the completion of His Evil
plan to wage 3 World Wars in the World to destroy the humanity.
Then US Invasion of Iraq in 1990 AD with the famous name - Desert Storm
Operation, then Again Invasion of Iraq by USA in 2003, then Israel - Lebanon War
in 2006 AD, then Syria War started in 2011 AD.
The Yemen War started in 2015 AD when Saudi Arabia attacked Yemen with the
help of UAE and Qatar and the support of Israel and USA. The Proxy wars
between Iran and Saudi Arabia and Iran and Israel has been continous since 1979
Iranian Revolution in all 16 Middle Eastern Countries.
Then we see the Conflicts and Wars in the neighbouring countries of Middle East
like Libya War when the NATO forces attacked Libya in 2011 AD and since then
Libya is in severe Civil War condition. Then we saw the conflict in Egypt and the
struggle of Power between different factions in Egypt. Saddam Hussin - Leader of
Iraq was killed, Mommar Qadafi - Leader of Libya was killed, Hosni Mubarak -
Leader of Egypt was removed and so on.
Now the USA has imposed severe Economic Sanctions against Iran and is
planning to attack Iran after the Trump Elections. USA has more than 50,000
active military troops in the Middle East and has more than 800 Military bases in
195 Countries all over the World.
Once the attack on Iran would start, 3rd World War would officially start in the
World as Russia and China would be directly involved in the Middle East War and
that was the Plan of Albert Pike in his letter written more than 150 years ago.
As we know that New World Order is the dream of the Elite and the Leaders of the
World and they have been working to implement for the last 150 years.
The New World Order Cards of the Illuminati would show how they are
implementing their Global plan to achieve their goals very swiftly in the World.
The Elite Members of Illuminati control Politics, Media, Military and Financial
Institutions in the World. They are directly controlled by Satanic Evil forces and they
want to establish ONE WORLD ORDER to give the throne to Anti - Christ or Messiah
or Dajjal or Satan after achieving their goal. This is a brief introduction to the Secret
Society.
This famous ILLUMINATI - Pack of 450 Cards known as Steve Jackson Cards which
was initially prepared by 1st November, 1971 but officially released in 1982 as 1st
Edition. Then they released several other Editions. The Last Edition was published in
1995.
These Illuminati Cards which is Pack of 450 Cards show their Planned Events which
would occur at their respective times to control the World and lead towards their
main Goal - Establishment of NEW WORLD ORDER for the Dajjal or Anti Christ to
Now if you notice the Brochure of this Illuminati - Cards, you will notice one word
i.e. SECRET and there is a Number below that Word - Secret ---- 23
SECRET 23
The Number - 23 is also showing in its LAST CARD - Mass Murder. The Number - 23
indicates the Year - 2023 by which they are planning to bring the Anti Christ or
Dajjal in front of the World to establish His Throne in Jerusalem, Israel as His Head
Quarter.
It is just a one proof of the Satanic Planning of the World Events and Destruction of
the Humanity by His Evil Agenda.
For details about this Illuminati Card Game, Please visit this website on youtube:
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=A82xqNEgkfw&t=191s
There are 13 Ruling Families in the Elite World. So the New World Order Cards are
also 13. Let us discuss them one by one:
The Financial Crisis - 2008 --- Too Big to Fail (US Big Banks)
Card - 3: Energy Crisis
Divide and Rule through ---- Fear and Discrimination since 2001
Card - 5: Law and Order
End of the World as 2/3rd Population of the World would be Dead by 2023 AD
This is the time when Mahdi and Hazrat Isa (AS) would appear to save humanity in 20 23 AD
when 2/3rd World population would already be dead by Wars and Drought by that time.
1. Corruption
2. Confusion
3. Crimes
4. Crisis
5. Chaos
6. Collapse
1. Hazrat Ali mentioned that Hajj would be stopped 3 years before the Arrival and
we all witnessed that the Hajj and Umrah was stopped in 2020 AD because of the
Global Pandemic exactly 3 years before His Arrival in 2023 AD
2. Imam Baqir mentioned about the Start of Global Draught and Global Shortages 3
Years before the Arrival of Mahdi and all the world experienced severe Global
Shortages of all kinds and the Global Draught and Global Hunger increased because
of the Global Pandemic in 2020 AD
3. Our Prophet Muhammad (PBUH) told us that the World would see the Global
Pandemic few years before the Arrival of Mahdi and the humans witnessed the
Start of Global Pandemic in the year - 2020 AD
4. Imam Jaffar e Sadiq told that the War between Azerbaijan and Armenia would
start few years before the Arrival of Mahdi and the World witnessed the Start of
Azerbaijan and Armenia in the Year - 2020 AD
5. Prophet Muhammad (PBUH) told us that the Wars in between China and India
and in 2020 AD we saw that China captured 38,000 Sq Km area of India and the
conflict between India and China went to the War level with all kinds of War
preparation from both sides on all border areas and that would escalate to full scale
war in the coming months any time soon.
https://drnaumanshad.wordpress.com/2015/04/18/the-countdown-to-malhama-
armageddon-world-war-3-after/
“And there is no city but that We will destroy it before the Day of Resurrection or
punish it with a severe punishment. That has ever been in the Register inscribed.”
(Holy Quran 17: 58)
Introduction
A war which shall bring about so much destruction that World War 1 and World War
2 will seem like a war over peanuts as compared to this one.
More details on this disastrous conflict surprisingly being expected to occur in the near
future by Muslims, Christians & the Jews
Kindly read this fresh blog about the major signs before and after Malhama & the
Chronological Sequence in which they have/expected to occur:
http://www.drnaumanshad.wordpress.com/2017/01/07/major-signs-of-the-end-times-the-
sequence-of-their-coming/
A nuclear war is also indicated from the following verse from Holy Quran and
saying of the Holy Prophet (PBUH) about ‘Smoke’ being one of the Signs of the
end of times:
“Then watch for the Day when the sky will bring a visible smoke. Covering the
people; this is a painful torment.
(Holy Quran 44: 10,11)
Narrated by Hazrat Huzaifah (RA) that the Holy Prophet (PBUH) stated that:
“Qiyamah will not come till you see ten signs, which are: Smoke which spreads
throughout the East and West for forty days….” (Sahih Muslim)
Short glimpses of nuclear smoke have been seen in Hiroshima, Nagasaki,
Chernobyl and Bhopal, so Allah knows, it maybe this 3rd World Nuclear War may
bring about a much longer Smoke of 40 days.
A nuclear war may also be indicated in the following verse of Surah tul Kahf (a
chapter of the Holy Quran with importance to end times):
“…..Then we hurriedly went on till we came to that monastery and found a well-
built person there with his hands tied to his neck and having iron shackles
between his two legs up to the ankles…….”
Dajjal was in chains then the implication would be that he had not as yet been
released by Allah Most High.
The Hadith narrated by Hazrat Fatima bint Qais confirmed such when Dajjal
declared that he would soon be released:
“……..I am going to tell you about myself and I am Dajjal and would be soon
permitted to get out………”
The opinion is that we human beings cannot actually see Dajjal in the form of a
human being (in contrast to seeing him in a dream or vision) unless and until his
day is like our day, hence when he is in our world of space and time.
Release of Dajjal
The Holy Prophet (PBUH) said:
Pax Judaica:
1 Day like a year – Pax Britannica
Remaining (37 Days) like all our days – Pax Satanica (Dajjalian Rule or NEW
WORLD ORDER)
The days that will be like our days will be when Dajjal emerges in human form in
Israel and humans will be able to see him.
According to Islam, one heavenly day is like a 1000 human years
as mentioned in the Holy Quran:
(He arranges [each] matter from the heaven to the earth; then it will ascend to Him in a
Day, the extent of which is a thousand years of those which you count (Holy Quran: 32:
5)
and as such we can understand that the Dajjal ruled from Britain for 1000 years.
So if a day like a year (as mentioned in the Hadith) is 1000 human years
(as mentioned in the Holy Quran, then
900+1000 = 1900 approximately (depending on Hijri or Gregorian calendar)
http://www.theatlantic.com/international/archive/2014/12/the-real-story-of-how-
america-became-an-economic-superpower/384034/
The dajjal then rules from there in a “day like a month”.
And we saw from 1919 to 2002 the US was calling the shots and policing the
world, whilst dominating the economy and all media outlets
Then the dajjal will rule from Israel for a “day like a week”. This also saw 9/11 and
the numerous wars that followed (Afghanistan, Iraq, Arab springs, etc)
culminating in the transfer of power from USA to Israel.
We can clearly see that Israel is now the ruling power of the world; it even
controls USA & its congress and all NATO countries, in fact Israel controls the
United Nations, hence the new ruling power.
Second Opinion
Some believe that Pax Judaica is still yet to come near or after Malhama, as change in
ruling status occurs after great wars.
And Pax Judaica will end with the conquest of Constantinople after which Dajjal will
physically appear to complete his 40 days.
And Allah knows best….
“It will not come until you see ten signs beforehand” and (in this connection) he
mentioned them as follows:
“It (Last Hour) will not come until you see ten signs before and (in this
connection) he made a mention of the smoke, Dajjal, the beast, the rising of
the sun from the west, the descent of Jesus son of Mary (AS), the Gog and
Magog, and landslidings/sinking of the earth (due to Earthquakes?) in three
places, one in the east, one in the west and one in Arabia at the end of
which fire would burn forth from the Yemen, and would drive people to the
place of their assembly.”
(Sahih Muslim, Chapter 13, Book 041, No 6391)
From these two Ahadiths we can conclude that Arabs will be destroyed for all the
evil they committed on the land. There is no doubt that the Arabs lead by Saudi
Arabia have done more harm to the Muslim Ummah than any other Muslim
country. Their unprovoked attack on Yemen is believed to be the fire burning from
Yemen mentioned in the Hadith by many scholars and is expected to lead to their
down fall and ultimate destruction of Saudi Arabia
Hazrat Zainab bint Jahsh (RA) reported that Allah’s apostle (PBUH), got up from
sleep with a flushed red face and said:
In the nearest land. But they, after their defeat, will overcome
Within three to nine years. To Allah belongs the command before and AFTER.
And that day the believers will rejoice”
Russia is now home of the Orthodox Christians, and they are said by some
Scholars to be the Romans (Byzantines) who will be victorious AFTER as
mentioned in verse 4 of this Sura named after the Romans
“You will make peace with the Romans (i.e. Christians / ‘Rum’) in a secure
truce/alliance, and you and they will fight an enemy who is behind you, and you
will be victorious”
(Hadith No. 4292, Book of the Great Battles, Sunan Abu Dawud, Vol. 4)
Black Sea and Crimea separate Rum (Russia) from Constantinople (now Istanbul
& a historical center of Byzantine Empire). Russia has now taken back Crimea
bringing them closer to Constantinople. Constantinople was the former capital of
the Romans & Orthodox Christianity. This will be opposed by the Zionists who
desperately want Crimea back from Russia and may ultimately lead to the start of
World War III (Mal’hama, Armageddon) and fulfillment of the divine prophecy of
the conquest of Constantinople mentioned in the Holy Quran and Hadith
https://drnaumanshad.wordpress.com/2015/09/24/gog-and-magog-yajuj-and-
majuj-of-yesterday-and-today/
2. Martial Law Imposed on USA after or just before the collapse of dollar
Martial Law most likely will be imposed before US elections next year by Mr.
Obama who may become another false messiah before Dajjal. This explains his
Muslim middle name of Hussein and also explains why many people believe he is
acting and behaving like he is with the Muslims (so many people from the Muslim
Brotherhood working closely with him)
3. Turkish invasion of Syria: this would bring in Russia and hence lead to World
War 3
https://drnaumanshad.wordpress.com/2015/08/01/the-sheer-hypocrisy-of-turkey/
4. A nuclear false flag on USA or NATO country and blamed on Iran or Pakistan
Any of these will lead to extremely high inflation in all parts of the world which
could lead to chaos/riots in many parts of the world including USA and Muslim
countries like Pakistan which is probably what Zionists wanted anyways
USA & NATO will retaliate and Russia & probably also China will intervene
triggering a massive nuclear war.
This Hadith (saying of the Holy Prophet PBUH) is most likely about the
NATO Rome (which is under Judeo-Christian/Zionist) control. There are
probably around 80 NATO nations along with their allies at the moment.
This Hadith may indicate break of truce of United Nations and possibly a start to
the Malhama.
https://drnaumanshad.wordpress.com/2016/10/20/racing-towards-world-war-3-
with-nasty-warmongering-clinton/
The Malhama
It will be a nuclear world war. Many countries in the world will be destroyed and
the war will probably bring many humans back to stone age with horses, donkeys
etc and probably no air force left. Maybe that is why Dajjal will come riding on a
donkey (or a really fast donkey could refer to an airplane). 99/100 humans will die
as stated in one Hadith:
“The Messenger of Allah (PBUH) said: “The time is near when the River
Euphrates will uncover a treasure of gold. Whosoever may be alive at that time,
Russia and Israel will ‘survive’ the Armageddon along with Muslims from various
countries including Pakistan, Iran, Arabian countries and India
Conquest of Constantinople
This may occur during the course of Malhama Word War 3 or after it. Russia with
help of Muslims will conquer Constantinople
It is only then that ‘a day like a week’ will end and days like our days will start and
so Dajjāl will appear in person
The news of his allegiance will quickly spread and thus an army from Sham
(Syria) will be sent to fight him. This may be the army of ISIS (Daesh) or a
faction from the Shias. However no harm will come to Mahdi nor his followers
who will be supported by ALLAH (swt). The earth will swallow up this army before
it can get near to the Imam in a place called Baidah (a flat piece of land between
Makkah and Madinah). When this Earthquake Sinking happens this will be the
last of the prophesized earthquake sinking’s to happen. One earthquake sinking
in the East, one earthquake sinking in the West and one earthquake sinking in
Saudi Arabia. The earthquake sinking which happens in Saudi Arabia is the last
of the 3 major earthquake sinkings.
After seeing and hearing about this extraordinary event and sign, the Awliya
(pious saints) of Syria and Iraq will come to Mahdi and swear allegiance to him
between the black stone and the Maqam (the place of Ibrahim which is near the
Ka’aba). (The above content can be found in the Hadith of Umm Salama and Abu
Daud).
Ghazwa Hind/Khurasan
The Ghazwa Hind will most likely happen after the Malhama with army (people)
from Afghanistan, Pakistan (may include or may not include members of present
Pakistan army, Allah know best), Muslims from India and parts of Iran defeating
the Hindus of India.
After they defeat Hindus they will join Hazrat Isa in Syria
Narrated by Hazrat Abu Huraira (RA), the Holy Prophet (PBUH) said :
“One of your Battalion will fight in Hind (India), Allah will give success to them to
the level that they (Mujahideen) will enchain their (Hindu) rulers with clutches, and
Allah will forgive sins of these warriors and when they return they will find Hazrat
Eesa (AS) in Damascus.” (Naeem bin Hammad quoted this Hadees in his book
‘Kitab Al Fitan’, Ishaq bin Rahuya(R) also quoted this Hadees in his ‘Masnad’)
‘Forgive sins of these warriors’ in this Ahadith: we do know soldiers in Pakistan
army may have done many wrongs…?
Conquest of Constantinople will occur after Malhama, via a truce of Muslims with
the Russians.
Note 1: There may be slight differences in dates as according to Gregorian and
Hijri Calendar. For example 1000 years Hijri calendar is about 970 years
Gregorian calendar
Note 2: Recommended to be read with my other blog: Political Messages of the
Chapter of the Cave (Surah-tul-Kahf) :-
https://drnaumanshad.wordpress.com/2013/08/30/political-messages-of-the-
chapter-of-the-cave-surah-tul-kahf/ Article by Dr. Mohammad Nauman Shad MD
There is a very Important Question, when the End Times started before the
Arrival of Mahdi?
The End Times started exactly 75 years in 1948 AD before the Arrival of
Mahdi in 2023 AD, with the Establishment of Israel as Allah promised Bani
Israel that Allah would gather the Nation of Israel in the End Times and it is
mentioned in the Holy Quran in Surah - 17, Verse - 104 as indicated
above.
These 3 Stages of End Times are calculated by the Abjad of Bibi's name, "Fatima"
i.e. 135
The State of Israel was established on 15th May, 1948 AD i.e. 75 years from 2023
AD and it was the Promise of Allah mentioned in the Verse - 104 of Surah - 17 of
the Holy Quran that Allah would gather the Nation of Bani Israel in the End Times.
So the Start of the End Times would be 75 Years from 2023 AD i.e. in the Year 1948
with the Establishment of Israel in 1948 AD.
As we know the Code of the Holy Quran is Number - 19 and the Abjad of
Allah's name, "Wahid" is also 19.
If we divide the Day, Month and the Year of the Start of End Times, we would
see that it is fully divided by Number - 19
30,11,1979/19 = 1584841
19 x 1584841 = 30,11,1979
1400 (Year in Hijri) 1st (Month of Muharram) 10th (Day) ---- Friday
1400 1 10....................1400110
1400,1,10/19 = 73690
73690 x 19 = 1400,110
Analysis of 10th Muharram, 1400 Hijri, Friday
1400 Hijri - 1st (Month) 10th Day
1400 1 10....................1400 110
1400 110
1400,1,10/19 = 73,690
73,690 x 19 = 1400,110
Arrival Year:
1445 Hijri, 10th Day, 01st Month (Muharram)
1445 10 01 (Friday)
1445 1001
1445,10,01/19 = 760,579
760,579 x 19 = 1400,1001
1,584,841 x 19 = 30,11,1979
106,512 x 19 = 2023,7,28
1400,1,10/19 = 73,690
30th November, 1979 AD
30,11,1979/19 = 1,584,841
10th Muharram, 1445 Hijri
1445,10,01/19 = 760,579
28th July, 2023 AD
2023,7,28/19 = 106,512
The Total Number of Days from 30th November, 1979 AD (10th Muharram,
1400 Hijri, Friday) till 28th July, 2023 AD (10th Muharram, 1445 Hijri, Friday)
are 15,945 Days.
The Final Stage of End Times started in 2008 AD exactly 15 Years from 2023 AD as
mentioned in the equation of the Abjad of Bibi Fatima's name i.e.
2023 7 28
2023,7,28/19 = 106,512
106,512 x 19 = 2023,7,28
3 Persons were mentioned in the Sayings of Hazrat Ali that they would
emerge on the same day but from different areas in the Middle East in the
Holy Month of Rajab, 6 months before the Arrival of Mahdi
2023,27,01/19 = 10,648,79
10,648,79 x 19 = 2023,27,01
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 153
The Day is Spiritual as it is fully divided by Number - 19, which is
the Code of the Holy Quran and also Friday.
1444 5 7
1444,5,7/19 = 7603
7603 x 19 = 1444,5,7
Appearance of Suffiani, Khorasani and Yamani ---- 6
Months Ago before Arrival
1444 = 19 x 19 x 4
1444 Hijri = 19 x 19 x 4
1445 = 17 x 17 x 5
2023 = 17 x 17 x 7
Now there are two 17’s in the mathematical formula of 1445 and there are two 17’s
in the mathematical formula of 2023. If we take these four 17’s from the above
formulas, we see:
3468 = 17 x 17 x 12
The Arrival of Mahdi and Jesus Christ is in the Year – 1445 Hijri.
He would come for the final salvation of Adam and Eve all over the world.
The Century of Arrival of Mahdi and Jesus Christ is 15th Century Hijri
The Salvation of Adam and Eve would be done before the End of 6000 years of the
Arrival from the Paradise.
Mahdi would wage a Big War against the Satan in the Year - 2024 AD.
The following article is taken with the courtesy from the website:
http://www.bibliotecapleyades.net/profecias/esp_profecia07c.htm
"Mitar Tarabich (1829–1899), an illiterate peasant from the small Serbian village of Kremna,
experienced occasional prophetic visions. Being a religious person and having a local Serbian
orthodox priest for a godfather, he told this priest about his episodes of "seeing into the future".
The priest, Zaharije Zaharich (1836–1918), wrote down everything in a small notebook, which was
damaged by fire in 1943 when his family home was destroyed by the occupying Bulgarian Army.
This text is now in the possession of the family of Zaharich’s great-grandson, Mr Dejan
Malenkovich. Tarabich’s prophecies were literally very straightforward, unlike the prophecies
of Nostradamus (1503–1566) that seem to be encrypted with the latest 1,024-bit encryption
technology.
Tarabich’s best-known prophecy has to do with a series of political events in 19th-century Serbia.
He predicted a sequence of events, spanning a course of decades, that eventually led to the
removal of the ruling Obrenovich family from the Serbian royal throne. This prophecy came to be
known in the Balkan region as "the Black Prophecy", and it played out as predicted.
Tarabich’s words come from conversations with his godfather Zaharich, so you should be aware
that any references to "you" or "your descendants" relate to Zaharich (the priest) specifically. When
Tarabich says "us" he means the Serbs, but he does not distinguish between Croats, Serbs,
Slovenians, etc. To him, anyone who spoke his language was a Serb.
Perhaps it is also important to note that we don’t really know how much of Tarabich’s prophecies
was influenced by his own opinion. Some of the adjectives used to describe the people and events
he saw could be a reflection of his "peasant-like" interpretation of those events (examples:
intelligent, brave, honest, horrible, calamity, etc.).
1. "After the assassination of the king and queen [Alexander and Draga Obrenovich], the
Karageorgevichs will come to power. Then we will again start a war with the Turks. Four
Christian states will attack Turkey, and our border will be on the River Lim. Then we shall
finally conquer and avenge Kosovo."
Historical Facts:
• 1903 – Alexander and Draga Obrenovich were assassinated by their own guards, and
Petar Karageorgevich became the ruler of Serbia.
• 1912 – The First Balkan War erupted between the Balkan Alliance (Serbia, Greece,
Bulgaria and Montenegro) and Turkey (Ottoman Empire). The Balkan Alliance won, and
Serbia moved its border up to the River Lim. Serbia gained Kosovo from the Turks.
2. "Soon after this war, another war will start...the Big War in which a lot of blood will be spilled.
If that blood were a river, a huge stone of 300 kilograms would roll in its current easily. A
mighty army from across a river, three times bigger than ours, will attack us... They will
destroy everything on their way. They penetrate deep into our land... Hard times will come
upon us... Our army will almost give up, but than suddenly an intelligent man on a black
stallion will take command and cry out, ’Forward to victory, my people! Forward, brother
Serbs!’ Our army springs to life. Its fighting spirit wakes up and the enemy is chased away
across the river..."
Historical Facts:
• 1914 – The Austro-Hungarian Empire started a war against Serbia after a Serb nationalist,
Gavrilo Princip, assassinated the heir to the Austrian throne, Archduke Francis Ferdinand,
and his wife in Sarajevo. This regional war soon developed into World War I (with 32
nations involved). In the beginning, Austria conquered the northern and central parts of
Serbia easily but when General Alexandar Mishich—the man on a black stallion—took
command, the Serbian armies were able to repel the Austrian invaders back across the
River Drina until October 1915.
Historical Facts:
The Germans started their attack from the north and by December 1915 had defeated the
Serbs. The Serbian Army and Government fled to the Greek island of Kérkira (Corfu) in
1916. There they regrouped, and after a full recovery they sailed for Salonika where they
formed a new front with other allied armies. After much heavy fighting, Serbia was finally
free and reunited with the other southern Slav nations (Croats and Slovenians), whose
territories had been part of the Austro-Hungarian Empire. During the German occupation, a
large number of people in Serbia died of hunger and sickness.
4. "I will tell you one more thing, father: the invading army will come to Kremna exactly on your
baptismal day, stay for three years and go away on the same day they came—St Luke’s
Day. But you will not see the end of the war. In the last year of the world’s big carnage, you
will die. Both these wars, the one with the Turks and the big one when the whole world will
be at war, will take away two of your grandchildren—one before, and the other after your
death."
Historical Facts:
• The Germans entered Kremna on St Luke’s Day, and the village was liberated on exactly
the same date three years later. Zaharije Zaharich died in 1918, the last year of World War
I, which also took the lives of two of his grandchildren—one before, and one after his death.
1. "Listen to me, my good father: after the first Big War, Austria will disappear and Serbia will
be as big as a real kingdom. We will live together with our northern brothers."
Historical Facts:
• 1918 – The Austro-Hungarian Empire was dissolved. In December 1918 a new State,
officially titled the Kingdom of the Serbs, Croats and Slovenes, was proclaimed. It was
constantly riddled with economic, social and political problems caused mostly by conflicts
between various nationalistic political parties.
2. "For some years we shall live in peace, love and prosperity. But it will not last for long. A
venomous hatred will come into our people... Blood is spilled...horrible! I do not know when
or why, but it is probably because of this hatred."
3. "Then the one who sits on the throne of our kingdom is killed. He will leave behind a widow
and orphans. A relative of his will replace him on the throne, and he will try to rule justly and
take good care of his cousin’s children. But people do not love him, and he is accused of
being an unjust ruler. He is dethroned and imprisoned by his army. His life will be saved by
England’s king and queen. Then, on the empty throne, our killed king’s boy sits. But he will
rule only for a few days. He will be taken by his soldiers over the seas because our kingdom
is again invaded by a foreign, evil army. All of Europe is under the rule of the crooked anti-
cross."
Historical Facts:
• On 9 October 1934, a Macedonian terrorist connected with Croatian separatist groups
assassinated King Alexander, then in France on a diplomatic mission. The king’s son, still a
youth, succeeded to the throne of Yugoslavia as Petar II. Control of the government was
vested in a tripartite Regency Council headed by Prince Pavle Karageorgevich, a cousin of
the late king. Because of his growing unpopularity, Pavle was ousted by his army and exiled
to England. World War II started in 1939. The German Army invaded Yugoslavia in April
1941, but young King Petar fled Yugoslavia with the government ahead of the invading Nazi
hordes. Most of Europe fell under Nazi occupation.
4. "In the beginning, Russia will not wage war; but when attacked by the evil army, they will
fight back. There is a red czar on the Russian throne."
Historical Facts:
• When Nazi Germany started World War II, the USSR (Russia) remained neutral. On 22
June 1941, more than three million German troops invaded the USSR. Under Communist
Party leader Joseph Stalin, the USSR fought back.
5. "Here, men with stars on their foreheads will appear. They will rule Uzice and this region for
exactly 73 days, and then fleeing their enemies they will go over the River Drina. These are
times of hunger and great evil... Serbs will fight and butcher each other. The invading
enemy looks upon Serbian evil hatred and laughs at us. A man with blue eyes on a white
horse appears among our people. A star shines on his forehead. The evil enemy will hunt
him all over our country, in the woods, over rivers and upon the sea, but in vain. The man
will gather a mighty army and free occupied Belgrade. He will chase away the enemy from
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 163
our country, and our kingdom will be bigger than ever. Russia will make an alliance with
other great kingdoms over the seas, and they will burn down the crooked anti-cross and
free all the enslaved people of Europe."
Historical Facts:
• In Yugoslavia the Communist Party, led by Croatian communist Josip Broz Tito—the man
with blue eyes on a white horse—started the resistance against the Germans and Italians
as well as against the Serb and Croat nationalist extremists who were waging war against
each other. The symbol of Tito’s Communist Party was a red star, which they wore on their
hats.
• The first territory liberated by Tito and his army was the region around the city of Uzice.
They held it against German and Italian forces for exactly 73 days, and then Tito and his
army were forced to flee over the River Drina to Bosnia. Guerrilla war was fought all over
Yugoslavia.
• By May 1945, the Germans were defeated by the alliance of the USSR, USA, UK and
France, and by the end of the year Yugoslavia was united. Tito entered Belgrade on a white
horse and made the Royal Palace his residence. Communist Yugoslavia was formed, and
gained more territories from the neighbouring state of Italy.
1. "Mitar told me that the man with blue eyes and the star upon his forehead would break the
long-lasting love with our Christian Orthodox brothers, the Russians. He would not be
grateful to them for the fact that he was sitting on our throne because they had put him
there in the first place. A great hatred would erupt between us and the Russians. Blood
would be spilled among our people. These wounds would be quickly healed and we would
again be friends with the Russians, but never sincerely, only formally, pretending for the
sake of others not to understand how we cheat and lie to each other."
Historical Facts:
• In 1948, Tito refused to accept orders from USSR leader Joseph Stalin—the man who
formed him politically in the early 1920s and sent him back to Yugoslavia to organise a
communist party. The USSR denounced Tito, accusing him of major deviations from
orthodox communist policy. Tito purged and executed members of his party who opposed
this decision. Cordial relations with communist USSR resumed after Stalin’s death in 1953.
Yugoslavia’s relationship with the democratic capitalist countries caused mistrust with the
USSR.
Historical Facts:
• In December 1945, the United Nations (UN) was established. Articles 33–38 of the charter
authorize the Security Council to encourage disputing nations to settle their differences
through peaceful means including negotiations, inquiry, mediation, conciliation, arbitration
and judicial settlement.
• From 1946 to 1970, dozens of countries from Asia, Africa, the Middle East and South
America achieved independence.
3. "After a while some great kings, as well as some small ones, will start to fake their respect
for the court while doing whatever they please... Many small wars will begin because of
this... Thousands upon thousands will die, but there will be no big wars."
Historical Facts:
• Korean War (1950–1953), Vietnam War (1959–1975), Afghanistan War (1979–1988),
Nicaragua and the Iran–Contra scandal (1979–1989), etc.
4. "There will be a few wars around the kingdom of Israel, but sooner or later the peace will
come even there. In these wars, brothers fight brothers; then they make peace and kiss
each other, but their hatred remains... All these small wars are initiated by the great
kingdoms because of their wickedness and malice; those who fight and butcher each other
do it because of their blind stupidity."
Historical Facts:
• In 1947, the State of Israel was founded in the Middle East. In 1967, a war—known as the
Six-Day War—broke out between Israel and its Arab neighbours. In 1975, civil war broke
out in Lebanon, with involvement of the Iranians, Syrians, Palestinians and Israelis.
• Other wars included the Iraq–Iran War (1980–1988), the Iraq–Kuwait War (1991), etc.
5. "In our country, the time of peace and prosperity will last for a long time. Many a generation
will be born to live and die in peace, knowing about war only through wise books, words and
different strange apparitions."
Historical Facts:
• In 1965 and 1966, economic reforms in Yugoslavia produced what has been called an
economic revolution. Total industrial production in 1957 increased by 70 per cent over that
of 1953, and by 1966 it was more than double the 1957 figure. By 1967, prices had been
stabilized, savings were increasing steadily and labour productivity had risen by about
seven per cent.
• TV and radio enjoyed a great boom in the 1950s and 1960s.
Historical Facts:
• There was economic prosperity, coupled with the introduction of the car, bus, van and air
transportation (Yugoslavia started its own airline company).
7. "Serbia will prosper best while the man with blue eyes on a white horse governs, one who
will come to Serbia bringing some kind of new religion. He will ascend our throne, and will
be strong and healthy, living a long life close to one hundred years. He will very much like to
hunt, and one time while hunting he will accidentally fall from his white horse and thus lose
his leg. From this wound he will die, not because of his great age."
Historical Facts:
• Tito’s leadership brought economic prosperity and communism to Yugoslavia. Tito lived
until 87 years of age (1892–1980). He did not have a hunting accident but he enjoyed
horse-riding and hunting. The real cause of his death was diabetes, which caused his leg to
be amputated.
8. "After him our land will be governed by some kind of commission, but it will never be as it
was. Even though the people in our kingdom will forget about misery and hunger and will
live in great wealth, brother will start to hate and think evil of brother."
Historical Facts:
• After Tito’s death, Yugoslavia was ruled by "collective presidency" until 1991. In the
1980s, tensions ran high in the southern Serbian province of Kosovo, which had become
autonomous in 1968 after riots protesting against Serbian control. Seeking more
independence and calling for a separate republic, the majority population of ethnic
Albanians clashed with Serbians and Montenegrins throughout the decade.
9. "On our borders and over them a new nation will appear. They will grow like grass after a
deluge. They will be good and honest, and they will answer our hatred with reason. They
will take care of each other like brothers. And we, because of our madness, shall think that
we know everything and that we can do anything, and we shall baptize them with some new
fate of ours, but all that will be in vain because they will believe only in themselves and in
nobody else. Big trouble will come of it, because this nation will be brave."
Historical Facts:
10. "Many summers this trouble will last, and nobody will be able to stop it, because that nation
will grow like grass. One who will be born many summers after you will be honest and
intelligent; he will deal with them in peace. We shall live in peace—they there, us here and
there."
Historical Facts:
• The Bosnian–Croatian–Serbian War lasted for five years (1991–1995). One of the major
aspects of the conflict was international involvement, both diplomatic and military (by
NATO). The international community took a series of limited measures including peace
initiatives and peace plans. "They there, us here and there": after the war, ethnic Croatians
lived only in Croatia while ethnic Serbs lived in both Serbia and Croatia.
11. "You see, my godfather, when the world starts to live in peace and abundance after the
Second Big War, all of that will be just a bitter illusion because many will forget God and
they will worship only their own human intelligence... And do you know, my godfather, what
is human intelligence compared to God’s will and knowledge? Not even a single drop in the
ocean."
Historical Facts:
• With the increase in scientific knowledge and the consequent scientific explanation of
phenomena formerly considered supernatural, atheism became a more natural and less
despised philosophical trend.
12. "Men will build a box and within will be some kind of gadget with images, but they will not be
able to communicate with me already dead, even though this image gadget will be as close
to this other world as hairs on the human scalp are close to each other. With the help of this
image gadget, man will be able to see everything that is happening all over the world."
Historical Facts:
• Invention of television and the computer.
• Influence of the Internet, CNN, Al-Jazeera, Fox News, CCTV, etc.
• Searching Google with the search words "Ghost" and "Detector" takes us to this entry:
1. "EMF Detectors. EMF detectors were designed to detect electromagnetic emissions
from microwave ovens and high-tension electrical wires. EMF detectors alert
investigators to the presence of ghosts by measuring electromagnetic distortion in
the two to seven milligauss range. The models that come most highly recommended
by paranormal investigators are the TriField EMF Detector and the TriField Natural
EM."
13. "People will drill wells deep in the ground and dig out gold, which will give them light, speed
and power, and the Earth will shed tears of sorrow because there will be much more gold
and light on its surface than in its interior. The Earth will suffer because of these open
wounds. Instead of working in the fields, people will dig everywhere, in right and wrong
places, but the real power will be all around them, not being able to tell them, ’Come on,
take me; don’t you see that I am here, all around you?’ Only after many a summer, people
Historical Facts:
• Oil (petroleum), also known as "black gold", powers the car, electric generator, plane, etc.
Exploration to find oilfields is an economically risky task, but in the 1980s the oil exploration
technique was perfected, although the risks of discovering economically non-viable oilfields
still existed. Oil experts have estimated that by 2050, world oil reserves will run dry.
14. "This power will also be present in people, but it will take a long time before they discover it
and use it. Thus man will live for a long, long time, not being able to know himself. There will
be many learned men who will think, through their books, that they know and can do
everything. They will be the great obstacle for this realization (self-knowledge), but once
men get this knowledge then people will see what kind of delusion it was when they listened
to their learned men. When that happens, people will be so sorry that they didn’t discover it
before, because this knowledge is so simple.
"People will do many stupid things, thinking that they know and can do everything, not
knowing anything. Wise men will appear in the Orient, and their wisdom will cross all seas
and frontiers, but people will not trust this wisdom for a long time, and this real truth they will
proclaim for a lie. Their souls will not be possessed by the Devil, but by something much
worse. They will believe that their illusion is the real truth, although there will be no truth in
their heads.
"Here at home it will be the same as all over the world. People will start to hate clean air
and this divine freshness and all divine beauty, and will hide in rankness. Nobody will force
them to do that, but they will do it of their own free will. Here in Kremna, many a field will
become a meadow and many a home will be abandoned, but then those who have left will
come back to heal themselves by breathing fresh air. In Serbia, it will not be possible to
distinguish a man from a woman. Everybody will dress the same. This calamity will come to
us from abroad, but it will stay with us the longest. A groom will take a bride, but nobody will
know who is who. People will be lost and more and more senseless day by day. Men will be
born not knowing who was their grandfather and great-grandfather. People will think that
they know everything, but not a thing they will know."
Historical Facts:
• As has been happening all over the world, people are leaving rural areas to seek jobs in
the big cities. More women are having their hair cut short and are wearing trousers, as
compared to the time of Tarabich. Children born out of wedlock has become commonplace.
15. "The Serbs will separate from each other and they will say, ’I am not a Serb; I am not a
Serb’. The unholy one will infiltrate this nation and bed with Serbian sisters, mothers and
wives. He will sire such children that among the Serbs, since the beginning of the world,
these will be the worst of offspring. Only weaklings will be born, and nobody will be strong
enough to give birth to a real hero."
16. "At one time we shall disappear from this land of ours. We shall go to the north, and then
realising our stupid deed we shall return. When we come back, we shall wise up and chase
away the unholy one, not to see him, in God’s name, ever again."
Historical Facts:
• By the time the Balkan War ended in 1995, the Serbian, Croatian and Bosnian economies
were ruined and there was widespread unemployment. Serbian, Croatian and Bosnian
people have to go to Germany, Denmark, Belgium, etc. in the north to work. In Kosovo,
Serbs have become refugees.
• As of June 2004, there were 200,000 Serb refugees from Kosovo, and only 80,000 Serbs
remained in Kosovo. As of March 2004, KFOR in Kosovo had 19,000 troops from a peak of
50,000; and as of June 2004, SFOR in Bosnia had 7,000 troops from the peak of 60,000.
• As of June 2004, there was news from Kosovo that ethnic Albanians were chasing ethnic
Serbs from Kosovo, using mob riots to destroy churches and houses belonging to the
Serbs, while KFOR troops were behaving like lame ducks.
17. "The whole world will be plagued by a strange disease and nobody will be able to find a
cure; everybody will say, ’I know, I know, because I am learned and smart’, but nobody will
know anything. People will think and think, but they will not be able to find the right cure,
which will be with God’s help, all around them and in themselves.
18. "Man will travel to other worlds to find lifeless deserts there, and still, God forgive him, he
will think that he knows better than God himself. There, except for the eternal peace of God,
he will see nothing, but he will sense with his heart and soul all of God’s beauty and power.
People will drive in rigs upon the Moon and stars. They will look for life, but life similar to
ours they will not find. It will be there, but they will not be able to understand it and see that
it is life. One who goes there, God forgive him, not believing in God as it is proper for an
honourable and decent person, when he comes back he will say, ’Oh, you people who
mention God’s name with doubt, go there where I was; then you will see what is God’s mind
and power’.
19. "The more people will know, the less they will love and care for each other. Hatred will be
so great between them that they will care more for their different gadgets than for their
relatives. Man will trust his gadget more than his first neighbour...
20. "Among people of a nation far in the north, a little man will appear who will teach men about
love and compassion, but there will be many hypocrites around him so that he will have
many ups and downs. Not one of these hypocrites will want to know what is real human
grace, but his wise books will remain and all the words he will say, and then people will see
how self-deceived they were.
Predictions and Events during World War III [ 2017 ----- 2023 AD]
1. "When they start to meditate more, they will be closer to God’s wisdom, but it will be too late
because the evil ones will already ravage the whole Earth and men will start to die in great
numbers. Then people will run away from cities to the country and look for the mountains
with three crosses, and there, inside, they will be able to breathe and drink water. Those
who will escape will save themselves and their families, but not for long, because a great
famine will appear. There will be plenty of food in towns and villages, but it will be poisoned.
Many will eat because of hunger and die immediately. Those who will fast to the end will
survive, because the Holy Ghost will save them and they will be close to God.
2. "The greatest and the angriest [USA] will strike against the mightiest [CHINA] and the most
furious! [RUSSIA]. When this horrible war starts, woe to those armies that fly over skies;
better off will be those who fight on ground and water.
3. "People waging this war will have their scientists who will invent different and strange
cannonballs. When they explode, these cannonballs instead of killing will cast a spell over
all that lives—people, armies and livestock. This spell will make them sleep, and sleep they
will instead of fighting, and after this they will come back to their senses.
4. "We will not fight in this war, but others will do battle over our heads. Burning people will fall
from the sky over Pozega [a town in Serbia]. Only one country at the end of the world,
surrounded by great seas [ATLANTIC OCEAN, PACIFIC OCEAN, ARCTIC OCEAN], as big
as our Europe [Canada], will live in peace, without any troubles... Upon it or over it, not a
single cannonball will explode! Those who will run and hide in the mountains with three
crosses will find shelter and will be saved to live after in abundance, happiness and love,
because there will be no more wars [AFTER 2023 AD]..."
He mentioned that Only One Country at the end of the world, surrounded by great
seas as big as Europe will live in peace in the last World War.
As he has not told about the name of the Country. So we analyze the features of the Country
which would fit the prophecy of Mitar Tarabich.
Let us assume,
sume, Canada is that Country who would fit the features of the Prophecy. Now we
analyze Canada:
The world's second largest country in total area. Situated in northern North
America (constituting 41% of the continent's area), Canada spans a vast, diverse territory
between the North Pacific Ocean to the west and the North Atlantic Ocean to the east and
the Arctic Ocean to the north (hence the country's motto "From sea to sea"), with
the United States to the south (contiguous United States) and northwest (Al
(Alaska).
aska). Greenland is to
Canada's Northern part touches the North Pole ---- End of the World (North Side)
As Big as Europe:
Europe --- Europe is a continent that comprises of many countries, the westernmost part of
Eurasia. Europe is bordered by the Arctic Ocean to the north, the Atlantic Ocean to the west, and
the Mediterranean Sea to the south. Europe's total geographical area is 10,288,305 km²
Covering 9,984,670 km2 (land: 9,093,507 km2; freshwater: 891,163 km2), Canada is slightly smaller
than Europe.
So Only One Country in the World i.e. Canada fulfill the features mentioned in the
Prophecy of Mitar Tarabich, which would remain in peace in the coming Last
Armageddon i.e. 3rd World War
And all the Scholars agree that the Arrival and Kharooj of Mahdi is very near in the
future. Even the other religions also agree that the Return of their Messiah or the
Second Coming of Jesus Christ according to the Christians faith is also very near.
Now if we analyze the 12 years starting from 2019 AD till 2030 AD and see which
year in the near future fulfills all the 3 main Characteristics of Arrival and Kharooj
i.e. the Day should be Friday on both 23rd Ramazan and 10th Muharram and the
year should be Odd year.
So we come up with only ONE year and i.e. 2023 AD in which both 23rd
Ramazan and 10th Muharram falls on Friday and the Year of the Arrival is
also Odd year i.e. 1445 Hijri or 2023 AD.
There is a video uploaded on "You Tube" which describes in detail about the
prophecies of Hazrat Ali in which He mentions the name of America as "The Land of
America".
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=syH1Ibi-L68
"And Bilal appears from Tahnaf, in Fifty Stars, and they are not in
the Sky but rather in the Great Land."
"A time which promises the end for them, during which they do
wrong to all the faces of the Arabs."
"And the nation which disobeyed its Prophet and turned off its lamp
with its own hand, shall cry."
"And he shall enter in a deceptive way, and will decorate the fifty
partitionsd with the ornaments of the worldly life."
"And he will tie the fifty cities to the rope of Bani Israel (The
Children of Israel) which comes from Mount Zion."
"They call it "The Land of the Americ". Their leader will be from the
children of Isaac and the children of Israel."
"He will gather the people upon their language, and he will call
them by their call. And the Land of Americ will complete the Fitna."
"After the blessings spread the wings of its genorisity on them and
after the World gave them its pleasures, and after Iblis (Satan)
walked in its cities and alleys."
"After he violated its sancitities. And the religion of Iblis (Satan) will
appear with them: desires, arrogance and thirst for the worldly
life."
"Thier matters settled for them in the shadows of an evil ruler, and
their condition ended with a losing side."
"It angers the Ones who are oppressed in the Earth, the non
muslims and the truly muslim. And Allah will establish His proof
upon the lands of the Americ."
"So He will curse them by what they disobeyed and transgressed
with."
"And the Mahdi will come down in the lands of the Americ from
above the clouds."
"In some domes of sunlight. It has light in the darkness, like the
moon and the stars."
"And Allah will destroy the lands of the America and collapse their
earth, and the earth will eat up its depths, and its waves will eat up
its countries and people."
"And their efforts and exhaustion will all be wasted like dust with
the permission of Allah."
"And if it was not for the promise of Allah, their end would have
been like Qaroun (Who was given punishement by Hazrat Musa
with the orders of Allah."
"Until He Says!"
"The Dajjal will come from the mountain of Sanam, and shall
bewitch the people, with him shall be a Mountain of Fire and a
Mountain of Food."
For it claims that it is your Greater Lord and it does not see except with ONE
EYE, which is the Eye of the Devilish Interest of the America. And these Dajjals
claim that they represent Jesus Chrish (PBUH) despite all that which they are
in of corruption and perversion. So America is the Anti - Christ and it
conquered the Earth in order to fill it with corruption and America is the ONE
- EYED Dajjal.
http://www.cnn.com/2017/12/08/opinions/jerusalem-israel-evangelicals-end-
times-butler-bass-opinion/index.html
Diana Butler Bass (@dianabutlerbass) holds a Ph.D. in religious studies from Duke
University and is the author of 10 books on American religion and culture, including
"Grateful: The Transformative Power of Giving Thanks" (forthcoming, HarperOne:
April 2018). The views expressed in this commentary are solely those of the author.
As I watched Donald Trump announce that the United States would recognize
Jerusalem as Israel's capital and move our embassy to that city, I could only think of
one thing: my high school youth group Bible study.
I know that sounds odd. Especially coming from a liberal Episcopalian like me. But
there you have it. The President makes a world-important declaration about global
politics, and an absurdly apocalyptic thought arises, "Jerusalem? The Last Days
must be at hand!"
Central to that plan was Jerusalem, the city of peace, and the dwelling place of God.
It was special to the Jews because it was the home of Abraham and David. It was
special to us because it was where Jesus had died and risen. We believed that
ultimately, Christ would return to Jerusalem to rule as its king. We longed for this
Jerusalem was our prophetic bellwether. God's plan hung on its fate. Whenever
Israel gained more political territory, whenever Israel extended its boundaries, it
was God's will, the end-times unfolding on the evening news. Jerusalem, as the
spiritual heart of Israel, mattered. Jerusalem was God's holy city, of the ancient
past, in its conflicted present, and for the biblical future.
For many conservative evangelicals, Jerusalem is not about politics. It is not about
peace plans or Palestinians or two-state solutions. It is about prophecy. About the
Bible. And, most certainly, it is about the end-times.
When I was young, our pastor insisted that Jerusalem had an important role to play
in these end-times events. When the Jews rejected Jesus as the messiah, he
explained, God chose the church to accomplish his mission. Soon this "church age"
would end with the rapture of true believers.
But God still loved the Jews, he told us, and wanted to redeem them. Thus, absent
the church, the Jews would experience a great religious rebirth and rebuild their
temple in Jerusalem. This would spark a series of cataclysmic events that would
culminate in the Battle of Armageddon, the last war of humanity. But it would also
cause the Jews to finally accept Jesus as their savior. After all this occurred, Jesus
would return in glory and God's kingdom -- a thousand-year reign of peace. And it
would begin in Jerusalem.
This theology -- a literal belief that all these things must happen before Jesus will
return to reign on Earth -- is called "dispensational pre-millennialism" and it is not
the quirky opinion of some isolated church. Although the majority of Christians do
not share these views, versions of dispensational pre-millennialism dominate
American evangelicalism.
If you know evangelicals, chances are very good that you know this theology,
whether you believe it or not. You cannot avoid it. And if you hear the President of
the United States say something about Jerusalem, you take notice. Especially when
that President won 81% of the white evangelical vote.
When the President issued his order, I was not the only person hearing echoes of
dispensationalism. Robert Jeffress, one of Trump's evangelical advisers, declared:
"Jerusalem has been the object of the affection of both Jews and Christians down
through history and the touchstone of prophecy."
Other evangelical pastors and teachers also praised the action as "biblical" and
likened it to a "fulfilled prophecy."
While that may sound benign (or perhaps nutty) to the theologically uninitiated,
they are referring to the "prophecy" of the conversion of the Jews, the second
coming of Jesus, the final judgment, and the end of the world -- the events referred
to as the biblical apocalypse.
I may not believe it -- anymore, at least. You may not believe it. Donald Trump
might not even truly believe it. But millions do. That matters. Not only for American
http://www.independent.co.uk/voices/jerusalem-donald-trump-israel-capital-
decision-reason-why-evangelical-voters-us-fear-a8099321.html
But Trump’s Jerusalem declaration has been widely and enthusiastically welcomed
by his religious base. Johnnie Moore, who acts as a spokesperson for the Trump’s
evangelical advisers stated: “The issue was second only to concerns about the
judiciary among the evangelical supporters. President Trump has yet again
demonstrated to his evangelical supporters that he will do what he says he will do.”
For Paula White, a “megachurch” pastor from Florida who is close to Trump: “once
again, President Trump has shown the world what I have always known, he is a
leader who is willing to do what is right however loud are the voices of the sceptics
and the critics. Evangelicals are ecstatic, for Israel is to us a sacred place and the
Jewish people are our dearest friends.”
There is also the money in this. Trump’s campaign has received substantial funding
from the Christian right and also hardline American Jewish promoters of Israel.
They include Sheldon Adelson, the casino billionaire and Republican donor, who
had given $20m (£14.9m) to a PAC (political action committee) which supported
the Trump campaign and another $1.5m to the organisers of the Republican
convention. Adelson has been lobbying the President persistently on the embassy
transfer.
Trump is not the only senior member of the administration to cultivate the Christian
right. Vice President Mike Pence, who could be seen on TV standing behind Trump
as the embassy announcement was made, with a reverent glow to his face, had
pressed for a move to Jerusalem. And backing also came from Nikki Haley, the
ambassador to the UN who tries her best to match Trump on hawkish rhetoric about
There were those in the administration who pointed out that the Jerusalem move
will inflame passions in the Middle East and the wider Muslim world; make a
settlement between the Israelis and the Palestinians even more difficult; make it
harder to maintain coalitions against Islamist extremists and may put American
lives in danger.
They included Secretary of State Rex Tillerson and Defence Secretary James
Mattis. Jared Kushner, Trump’s son-in-law who is leading the Israel/Palestine peace
initiative had apparently also urged caution initially. But Tillerson may soon be the
latest casualty in the Trump administration, to be replaced by the recently appointed
CIA director, Mike Pompeo, and Kushner is said to have changed his stance after
talks with Adelson.
The evangelists could always site God on their side. For Indiana pastor Paul Begley
the embassy move is the beginning of “End of Days”: “The Jewish People – I’ve
been there, I’m telling you – they believe when the Temple’s built, the Messiah will
be revealed to them. Jesus will be revealed to the Jewish people, and they will
embrace him.”
Saudi Arabian forces, joined by nine other countries, have launched a military
operation in Yemen against Shiite Houthi rebels. The offensive, which started with
airstrikes, will also involve other military assets.
The military operation in Yemen started at 7 p.m. EST (11 p.m. GMT) on 25 th March,
2015 AD.
US has authorized the provision of logistical and intelligence support to the Gulf
Cooperation Council (GCC)-led military operations in Yemen, the White House said
in a statement, confirming that Washington had close communication with Hadi,
the Saudis and other GCC states prior to the launch of the military operation.
“While US forces are not taking direct military action in Yemen in support of this
effort, we are establishing a Joint Planning Cell with Saudi Arabia to coordinate US
military and intelligence support,” the statement said.
Saudi Arabia is planning to commit 100 warplanes and 150,000 soldiers to the
Yemen offensive, according to Al Arabiya. The United Arab Emirates, Bahrain,
Egypt is providing political and military support for the operation, the country’s
state media said. Cairo is prepared to take part in air, naval and ground operations
if necessary, the Egyptian Foreign Ministry has announced. Media reports said that
Jordan, Sudan, Morocco and Pakistan are also part of the coalition and have offered
their support for military operation in Yemen.
In August 2014, Houthi rebels moved in from the north and demanded economic
and political reforms. In September, they seized key state installations in Sanaa.
As Houthis took command of the capital last month, the US embassy closed its
operations in Sanaa, while the two rival governments in the north and south have
continued to compete for power. Last weekend, Shiite rebels seized Yemen’s third
largest city Taiz.
Now the war has erupted in Yemen as mentioned by Hazrat Ali before the Arrival of
Mahdi. The wars in Middle Eastern would spread to other countries and we would
see 2019 AD as the last year of International Hajj. There would be No International
Hajj from 2020 AD till the Arrival of Mahdi in 2023 AD.
Yemen is in the South of Saudi Arabia as you can see in the map.
After 2022 AD, the Good News of the Arrival of Mahdi would be in the Year -
2023 AD.
The Christians say that there are 7 years of Tribulation before the Second
Coming of Jesus Christ and the Muslims know that Jesus Christ would come
with Mahdi upon His Arrival.
Adding the 7 years of Tribulation in the Death Year of the King Abdullah, we
would know the Year in which Jesus Christ would come back along with
Mahdi
We have to ask from our Prophet Muhammad (PBUH) and Hazrat Ali about
Dajjal.
Now Prophet Muhammad (PBUH) has mentioned two words in the description
of Dajjal and that are –
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 195
ONE EYE
We have to understand both words – ONE and EYE to understand the face of
Dajjal.
Then we would understand the ORDER of SATAN from these two words – ONE
and EYE
What is ONE ?
ONE – stands for – OUR NEW EMPIRE
In recent years, you would have noticed a lot of things, places and companies
associated with word – ONE.
1. ONE WORLD
2. ONE WORLD ORDER
3. ONE Channel
4. ONE EYE
5. ONE Direction
6. ONE Path
7. ONE World Action
8. ONE World Kids
9. ONE Ocean
10. Survivor – ONE WORLD
11. ONE World Day
E – Everyone
Y – Yields to
E – Evil
Now we would go through the word – EYE and you would also be seeing the
symbol EYE everywhere in the world. The symbol of EYE is one of the oldest
and the most famous among all signs and symbols in the World. EYE is the
oldest Egyptian symbol of “Horus Eye”.
We would look into many photos and pictures of EYE in our media, culture
and almost everywhere in the world.
ONE WORLD ORDER and ONE WORLD GOVERNMENT is the goal of ONE EYE.
1. Destruction by War
2. Drought after War
3. Diseases after War
The Power elite (Military + Bankers + Politicians) of the World are making stage for
World War 3 by introducing different kinds of wars in all its forms and shapes.
They are leading the World into Big Hot World War- 3 in 6 Stages
Let us see what kind of Wars are people of the world fighting in our current world?
Armageddon will be, according to the Book of Revelation, the site of gathering
of armies for a battle during the end times, variously interpreted as either a
literal or symbolic location. The term is also used in a generic sense to refer to
any end of the world scenario.
The word "Armageddon" appears only once in the Greek New Testament, in
Revelation 16:16. The word is translated to Greek from Hebrew har məgiddô
()מגידו הר, har - Strong H2022 - meaning "a mountain or range of hills
(sometimes used figuratively): - hill (country), mount (-ain), X promotion." This
is a shortened form of Harar - Strong H2042 - "to loom up; a mountain; -hill,
mount". Megiddo - Strong ְמגִ דּוֹןH4023 /meg-id-do'/ "Megiddon or Megiddo, a
place of crowds."). H2022 is indicating a year - 2022 AD for
Armagedoon.
"Mount" Tel Megiddo is not actually a mountain, but a tell (a hill created by
many generations of people living and rebuilding on the same spot) on which
Megiddo was the location of various ancient battles, including one in the 15th
century BC and one in 609 BC. Modern Megiddo is a town approximately 25
miles (40 km) west-southwest of the southern tip of the Sea of Galilee in the
Kishon River area.
The famous battle of Armageddon or the Third World War or the War between
Gog and Magog would be fought in the year 2022 AD and the major World
powers would collide using all kinds of weapons of Mass Destruction like
Thermo Nuclear weapons, solar weapons, chemical weapons, electro-magnetic
weapons, etc.
In the coming War of Armageddon, USA, Israel, Western Europe, India and the
Arab countries like Saudi Arabia, Turkey, Qatar, UAE, Kuwait would fight against
Russia, China, Iran, Pakistan, etc.
The whole world especially the Middle East would be affected and 1/3rd
population of the world would die in this coming war of Armageddon as
The 1/3rd Population of the world would die especially in Middle East, India,
China and Pakistan in 2022 AD and then Final Battle of Satan would fight with
Jesus Christ (Hazrat Esa) in 2024 AD in which Hazrat Esa would defeat the Dajjal
forces.
It is mentioned in the Sayings of Hazrat Ali that Three (3) Abduls would rule
Iraq in Succession in the End Times before the Ruler who would be removed
by a Tyrant.
“Then this ruler would be removed by cruel tyrant of the world. When this
would happen, Hope for the Arrival of Mahdi.”
Now all the Prophecies about Three – Abduls who came in succession as the
Rulers of Iraq and then Saddam Hussain came in Iraq and then finally
removed from the office in 2003 after the invasion of Iraq by US forces.
Saddam Hussain was responsible for Iran – Iraq war in which millions of
people died. Then he invaded Kuwait in 1989 and then US attacked Iraq in
1990 and millions of Iraqis killed after that invasion and economic sanctions
by the West and USA because of Saddam’s military operations n the Middle
East.
Then USA again attacked Iraq in 2003 and removed Saddam Hussain from his
office. He was then hanged in Iraq.
Millions of people have died in Iraq, Iran and Syria because of wars, invasions
and military operations since 1979.
The birth of many groups like ISIS is the result of these wars and invasions.
There are lot of speeches of Hazrat Ali on the war and destruction of Iraq and
especially the destruction of Baghdad, Basra and Kufa as He himself ruled the
Muslim World as a Caliph and His Headquarters was Kufa, Iraq.
“The conditions of Iraq would remain unstable till the Arrival of Mahdi.”
So Iraq would remain under war conditions before the Arrival of Mahdi.
“The name of the Commander in chief of the army who would enter into Iraq
from West would end with the Arabic Alphabet “Sheen”.
And we know that in both Iraq Wars in 1990 and 2003, the Commanders in Chief
of US Army were:
1. Senior Bush
2. Junior Bush
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 207
And their names end with the Arabic Alphabet, “Sheen” - ش
In another speech, Hazrat Ali (AS) said:
We have seen that the Baghdad city was destroyed in both wars – 1990 and 2003
AD. Even today, the city sees lot of terrorist attacks in its suburbs and the
infrastructure of the city is totally collapsed. Again in 2014, Obama order to
attack Iraqi cities to liberate them from ISIS – a new Wahabi Militant Group.
Iraq was attacked 4 times by USA in the last 25 years and still under attack.
There are so many Ahadith of Prophet Muhammad (PBUH) and the Speeches of
Hazrat Ali on the war and crisis in Syria before the Arrival of Mahdi.
The Civil War was started in Syria in March, 2011 and up till now millions of
people in Syria have either internally displaced or become refugees in Jordan,
Turkey, Iraq and neighbouring countries.
Hundreds and thousands of people died in this Civil War and more than 18
countries are involved in this crisis. There is a lot of international pressure on the
President of Syria to resign from the Government.
The ISIS and other terrorist organizations are currently involved in creating chaos
and unrest in Syria. They also moved to Iraq in recent days and captured many
cities in Iraq including Mosul.
Just 9 months before the Arrival of Mahdi, Suffiani would be plotted in Syria and
he would kill thousands of Shia Muslims and his opponents in Syria and the
neighbouring regions.
His army would be finally punished by Mahdi when that army would be
marching towards Mecca to destroy Holy Kaaba.
The last 7 years which extend from 28th July, 2016 till 28th July, 2023 AD is the
period which has been prophecised by Jesus Christ in the Holy Bible as the
“Period of Great Tribulation”.
Period of Great Tribulation ---- 28th July, 2016 till 28th July, 2023 AD
In this period, the whole world would see Great and Final War, Depressions,
Drought, Diseases and Global Disturbance all over the world.
In these last 7 years, 5 people out of 7 would die in War, Drought and
Diseases.
As we know that 5 out of 7 people would be dead by 28th July, 2023 AD i.e.
1445 Hijri. Let us calculate it mathematically,
By the Year – 2023 x (5/7) people would be dead = 1445 Hijri…Year of Arrival
The Bible Experts calculated that there are 2023 years from the Birth of Adam till
Hazrat Abraham.
You can check the details in the following You Tube Video - Is 2023 a possible
Rapture Year?
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=SdYIRenXgEg&t=1609s
There are 1948 years from the Birth of Adam till the Birth of Hazrat Abraham.
Number - 1948
1948 is again a very special number. In 1948, Israel was established on 14th
May, 1948 AD.
Again there are 75 years from 1948 AD since the Establishment of Israel
till the Second Coming of Jesus Christ in 2023 AD
'So likewise ye, when ye shall see all these things, know that it is near, even at
the doors.' ... And we are certainly now seeing "ALL these things".
Matthew 24:33
Our Generation is the FIRST generation to fulfill ALL the biblical signs. So we will show you from
the many following signs on this and other pages that without doubt we are living in the final
years that the Bible prophesied were to come. We are here only to warn the world that the
second coming of Christ Jesus is NEAR, even "at the door".
"After seeing ALL the signs, even the scoffers will struggle to argue!"
If you take into consideration all the signs, there is no mistaking that our generation is living in
the last days, nearing the second coming of Jesus. The truth being that WE ARE living in the
end times.
"The beginning of sorrows" started nearly 2000 years ago with the
persecution of the early church and the destruction of
Jerusalem. We are living at the end of time.
Daniel 2:31-45
More than being a "sign" of the times, this is an historical FACT of where we stand in earth's history.
The vision that God gave King Nebuchadnezzar as shown in the Bible verses above, and
subsequently the interpretation to the prophet Daniel, consisted of an image of a man which
depicted all the "ages" and ruling kingdoms from the time of Babylon until the second coming of
Christ Jesus (the destroying Rock, which is the eternal kingdom of God).
By the way, if you are not convinced that the Bible is any sort of authority, then
study this prophecy of Daniel 2. It perfectly foretold the future kingdoms of this
world up until the end of time. And history confirms it as ACCURATE.
Daniel 12:4 ...'even to the time of the end: many shall run to and fro, and knowledge
shall be increased.'
Revelation 13:17 ...'And that no man might buy or sell, save he that had the mark, or
the name of the beast, or the number of his name.'
Luke 17:28-30 ...'Likewise also as it was in the days of Lot; they did eat, they drank,
they bought, they sold, they planted, they builded; But the same day that Lot went out
of Sodom it rained fire and brimstone from heaven, and destroyed them all. Even thus
shall it be in the day when the Son of man is revealed.'
Hosea 4:3 ...'Therefore shall the land mourn, and every one that dwelleth therein shall
languish, with the beasts of the field, and with the fowls of heaven; yea, the fishes of
the sea also shall be taken away.'
Luke 21:25-26 ...'and upon the earth distress of nations, with perplexity; the sea and
the waves roaring; Men's hearts failing them for fear, and for looking after those
things which are coming on the earth: for the powers of heaven shall be shaken.'
Unsealed Prophecy
Daniel 12:4 ...'But thou, O Daniel, shut up the words, and seal the book, even to the
time of the end.'
God tells Daniel to seal the book. In other words, to seal the prophecies contained within it. And that
at the "time of the end", the prophecies would be unsealed and we would know what they mean.
God has now revealed the truth about the prophecies of Daniel to His end time church and we now
know the meaning of these prophecies, showing that we are in the "time of the end". The
prophecies of Daniel 2 and 7 have been UNSEALED. Daniel's 70 week prophecy has been
UNSEALED. And the 2300 day prophecy has also been UNSEALED. So this alone confirms that we
are living in the end times. But taking all the other signs together will show us how close we are to
the second coming of Christ Jesus, the Son of the living God, and the end of the world.
Matthew 24:4-5,11 ...'many shall come in My Name, saying, I am Christ ... and many
false prophets shall arise and deceive many.'
Increase in War
Matthew 24:6-7 ...'And ye shall hear of wars ... For nation shall rise against nation and
kingdom against kingdom.'
Increase in Sin
Matthew 24:12 ...'And because iniquity shall abound, the love of many shall wax cold.'
And do you know the worst thing about "sin" today? It is made into
"ENTERTAINMENT"! Through movies, television programs, radio, magazines,
comics, you name it! The majority of people in this world today are happily
entertained by the very thing that put the Son of God on the cross!
2 Timothy 4:3-4 ...'For the time will come when they will not endure sound doctrine;
but after their own lusts shall they heap to themselves teachers, having itching ears;
And they shall turn away their ears from the truth, and shall be turned unto fables.'
Revelation 11:18 ...'And the nations were angry, and thy wrath is come, and the time of
the dead, that they should be judged, and that thou shouldest give reward unto thy
servants the prophets, and to the saints, and them that fear thy name, small and great;
and shouldest destroy them which destroy the earth.'
Matthew 24:14 ...'And this gospel of the kingdom shall be preached in all the world for
a witness unto all nations; and then shall the end come.'
Source: http://www.signs-of-end-times.com/
"All who profess to be the children of God need now to realize that we are
living in perilous times. The end of all things is near at hand. The signs
are rapidly fulfilling, yet it would seem that but few realize that the day of
the Lord is coming swiftly, silently as a thief in the night. Many are saying
"peace and safety". Unless they are watching for their Lord, they will be
taken as in a snare." (E.G.White, Last Day Events, P.18)
“Multitudes, multitudes in the valley of decision: for the day of the Lord is
near in the valley of decision."(Joel 3:14)
http://www.end-times-prophecy.org/
From the above discussion, it is now clear that even the Christians
believe that the End Times is very near and the Second Coming of Jesus
Christ is in the near future.
“Author’s note Notice how the seventy years = [138] prophecy keeps reappearing
because the seventy years prophecy is involved with the sign of Jonah = [138]
prophecy. So it appears that both Babylon, the western world and Japan will
topple approximately at the same year, approximately seventy years after the
term of Nebuchadnezzar’s [or on the Key of David language Harry S. Truman.]
term in office. Truman started his presidency on April 1945 and ended it 1953, if
you add seventy years the years 2015 to 2023 pop up as the End of
Babylon, the capitalist west.”
“As a human being, a creation of God, you should know about God’s wrath that is about to
come on the world. But you don’t know – because you have not sought God to learn “what is
to come” (Jn 16). There is a strong chance that time is very short. The idea that no one
knows is a lie. Based on the Bible, God’s wrathful judgments – His end-time plagues –
could conclude by the year 2023.
God’s end judgments involve seals, trumpets, and bowls; and the seals come first. If
2023 is correct, God’s seals would start right away. The seals involve the four
horses (Rev 6) and will include cataclysmic events such as:
These horrific seal events are “birth pangs” (Mt 24) that you will see occur more
rapidly as time passes. They are from God, not so-called mother nature, and have
nothing to do with the Mayan 2012 hoax. When the world doesn’t end in 2012,
people will likely be saying “peace and safety,” but be on the alert – destruction is
right around the corner…
The major event of this time period is likely a nuclear conflict at the sixth seal. There could be
nuclear warfare as never seen before, among prominent nations. The sky will be “split apart
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 223
like a scroll when it is rolled up,” and people will try to seek shelter in bunkers and caves,
hiding in the “mountains” and “rocks” (Rev 6). So great will be the devastation, that people
will assume it’s the end of the world – but Armageddon is still years away.
How destructive are God’s seals? By the end of them, a fourth of the world’s population will
have died – approximately 1.5 billion people!
From 2016 to 2023, approximately, God would release His trumpet and bowl
plagues. With the first four trumpets/bowls, God will bring destruction and wreak
havoc on:
People will be overcome with fear because of the calamity happening in the world.
With the last three trumpets/bowls of Revelation, the world will see massive carnage,
warfare, and death. Yet people will still refuse to repent. At this time, the “antichrist”
will arise and…
At the sixth trumpet, a third of the world will die (another 1.5 billion people). Then, at the
battle of Armageddon, the “antichrist” and his army will be defeated by the Lord Himself,
who will return to earth at the seventh and last trumpet to judge the nations by the sword
of His mouth. At the Lord’s coming, He will gather His “few” to Himself. A great number
will be judged and destroyed immediately. Many others will be allowed to live on
(entering the millennium) and have a further chance to seek God.
If you have any care about God at all, or about other people at all, or for your own soul,
you should be concerned with what’s coming. Many, many people, possibly, are about to
die (earthly, first death). What’s worse, during all of this earthly death, billions of people
will be killed spiritually by the utterly worthless teachings of men’s churches,
synagogues, temples, mosques, and religions.
In Scripture, God never says to go to church, synagogue, or religion to find Him. Instead,
God calls people to Himself, to be taught by Him alone. Therefore, in the midst of all this
calamity, God will be trying to get people to repent and go to Him. He wants people to
seek Him to understand the end, be alert in the face of it, and respond properly.
He must be your One Teacher. If He has not opened His Book to you, what makes you
think He will open His kingdom to you? If you do not know the Word of God, you do not
know Him. He is the Word of God. That is His Name.”
Scriptures are taken from the New American Standard Bible (NASB), which this site would
recommend, along with the King James Version (KJV).”
Coronaviurs (CoVid - 19) epidemic hit the World in late December, 2019 AD which
started in China and spread all over the World. This Virus has no cure and no
vaccination and the Economy of the World is severely affected especially China's
economy has severe negative impact in the coming months.
9 (September) 11 (Year)...................... 9 11
The World already know this Number 9 - 11 - The September Attacks on USA.
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 227
They already show in 2011 movie what they are planning for the World and in 2019
the same events and same type of Virus hit the World and started in China on their
New Year Holidays.
1. Nuclear Weapons
The WHO (World Health Organization) has called the Global Health Emergency
because of this Virus and millions of people in the World could be affected and
killed because of this Virus.
“When you stop planes and ships, trains and and motor vehicles from moving, it
starts to shut down the economy — and that can have a cascading effect
throughout society,” Dr. Eric Toner, senior scholar at the Johns Hopkins Center for
Health Security, said Saturday, after multiple airlines announced that they would
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 228
suspend or cut back on flights to and from China, and several countries, including
the U.S., imposed travel restrictions. “And it’s not just airline pilots who get out of
work, I mean, it’s you know, it’s everybody that they depend on.”
On 10th May, 1981 a Suspense book was published by Dean Koontz named - The
Eyes of Darkness.
400 is a Code
Coronavirus has spread in the World in 2020 AD
If we multiply the Number of Century with the Year, we would get - Number 400
In Page - 181 of the book, this Wuhan 400 was mentioned as:
Page - 312 of her book is attached for the reference above as how she explained
about the Pneumonia like Illness which would spread in 2020 AD which we are
witnessing these days.
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 231
Global Depopulation Agenda of the World Zionist Elite
There is a famous Quotation of a Secret Society, ILLUMINATI:
This Coronavirus would prove as a Catalyst in bringing the Recession in the World
quickly as most economists are predicting that the major Economic indicators show
that the World would enter Official Recession by the Start of August, 2020 AD.
Now see what US Federal Reserve introduced a coin of 25 cents in Feb 3rd,
2020 AD.
China is blaming USA that it was a hidden CIA project and the Virus was developed
in North Carolina Laboratory and then injected in different parts of the World to
pursue the Hidden Agendas of Implementation of New World Order and the
Achievement of the goals of Agenda - 21 to reduce the population of the World by
War, Diseases and Draught to 3 billion in the coming years.
Now the whole economy is collapsing all over the World and this Virus has become
a Economic Bomb used as a Weapon of Mass Destruction on all the humanity. This
crisis is leading the whole World to the World War 3 which would be waged in 2022
AD between USA and China and China would be supported by Russia, Iran, Pakistan,
Turkey and Venezuela and USA would be supported by Europe and Israel.
2/3rd Population of the World would die in World War 3 and then the Intervention
of Allah - The Almighty God would take place in the Arrival of Mahdi.
Our Prophet Muhammad (PBUH) mentioned 1400 years ago that just before the
Arrival of Mahdi, the whole world would see the Global Plague and millions of
people would die in that "White Death" as mentioned in all the Holy Scriptures
including the Holy Quran and the Bible that 1/3rd People all over the World would
die because of Diseases and Draught before the Arrival of Mahdi and the Second
Coming of Jesus Christ.
The Global Draught would trigger because of this Global Pandamic as mentioned by
our Imam Baqir (AS):
"The Global Draught would start 3 years before the Arrival of Mahdi."
The UNO indicated recently that they are foreseeing the Global Draught in coming
months because of this Global Pandemic - Coronavirus and they are telling the
World in March, 2020 AD
Predicting New Am
American
erican Revolution soon
Health Minister Yaakov Litzman, also head of the ultra-Orthodox United Torah Judaism party, at a press
conference in Jerusalem, March 19, 2020
“We are praying and hoping that the Messiah will arrive
before Passover, the time of our redemption. I am sure that
the Messiah will come and bring us out as [God] brought us
out of Egypt. Soon we will go out in freedom and the
Messiah will come and redeem us from all the troubles of the
world.”
This remark was made by Health Minister Yaakov Litzman last week, after Yaniv
Kalif of the Hebrew-language news website Hamal asked him whether Israelis will
be forced to remain under lockdown until the holiday, which begins April 8.
This was the Statement from the Health Minister of Israel - The Next Super Power
of the World - The Next and Final Dajjal before the Final Arrival of Mahdi who
clearly says that the Return of Messiah is Imminent for the Redemption of Jews.
In one of the famous speeches of Hazrat Ali regarding the End Times before
the Arrival of Mahdi given in Kufa, he mentioned:
“The routes to Mecca for Hajj would be abandoned before the Arrival of
Mahdi.”
Now it has openly staged a War against Iran by attacking all its opponents. It
has also helped Bahrain by sending its military to crush Shia uprising in
Bahrain. Saudi Arabia spends approximately 80 Billion Dollars on military
purposes and spends around 70 Billion Dollars to spread “Wahabism” its
Radical Islamic Philosophy to be propogated all over the World.
The political analysts are predicting that if the current situation worsens, then
2019 AD would be the Last International Hajj. Now as the Global Panademic -
Coronavirus has spread all over the World and the Saudi Government would
close its borders in 2020 AD for the International Hajj because of the fears of
the spread of Coronavirus in Hajj. Then in 2021 AD the Saudi Government
would make another excuse or the Military conflict between Iran and Israel
might start in 2021 AD and again there would be NO Hajj. Then in 2022 AD,
there would be a World War 3 and obviously there would be NO international
flights to Saudi Arabia and No International Hajj. We are living in the End
Times and witnessing the Last Days before our own eyes.
After the spread of Coronavirus in 2020 AD, the Saudi Arabia announced that no
one is allowed to enter Mecca and Madina as fears of spread of Coronaviurs in
Saudi Arabia grows.
Saudi Arabia halted travel to the holiest sites in Islam over coronavirus fears just
months ahead of the annual Hajj pilgrimage, as the Middle East recorded more
than 220 confirmed cases.
The extraordinary decision by Saudi Arabia prevents foreigners from reaching the
holy city of Mecca and the Kaaba, the world's 1.8 billion Muslims pray towards five
times a day. It also said travel was suspended to Prophet Muhammad's mosque in
Medina.
While millions attend the 10-day Hajj, set for late July into early August in 2020,
millions more visit during the rest of the year to the holy sites in the kingdom for
Umrah.
It is naive to say that the Hajj can't be stopped by Saudi Arabia Government
because it has been performed by millions of Muslims for the last many centuries.
As we are witnessing the End Times Signs, so we would witness the Closure of Hajj
Event in our lives soon before the Arrival of Mahdi and Second Coming of Jesus
Christ.
The War in between Azerbaijan and Armenia was mentioned by Imam Jaffar which
would lead to the Arrival of Mahdi. The Ahadith of Imam was mentioned in the
most popular book on the Ghaibat of Mahdi i.e. 'Ghaibat e Nomania' and the
references are quoted here.
Imam said:
Another Saying of our Imam mentioned in the book, "Ghaibat e Nomania" mentions
about this war as:
"Nearly 100 people, including civilians, have died as battles rage on between
Armenian and Azerbaijani forces over the disputed Nagorno-Karabakh region.
The mountainous enclave is officially part of Azerbaijan, but has been run by ethnic
Armenians since 1994. The self-proclaimed republic has reported 84 military deaths
since Sunday, as well as civilian victims. Azerbaijan has not revealed its military
losses, but has confirmed seven civilian deaths. The fighting that started three days
ago now appears to be spilling out of Nagorno-Karabakh. The fighting is the
heaviest seen in the long-running conflict since 2016, and later on Tuesday the UN
Security Council is due to hold emergency talks on the issue.
They put the fatality figure on the Azerbaijani side at nearly 400, saying that one
aircraft, four helicopters and a number of tanks had been destroyed."
"Five (5) people would die out of Seven (7) people before
the Arrival of Mahdi."
Five (5)
Seven (7)
So Five (5) people would die out of Seven (7) people before the Arrival of Mahdi in
2023 AD.
Both Years - 1445 Hijri and 2023 AD of the Arrival of Mahdi are
connected with the Numbers - 5 and 7 as shown in the above
equations.
"When Abdullah would die, the people would not agree on the
Successor and the issue would be kept alive till the rise of Mahdi.
An Age of 100 Years Rule would come to an End and an Age of
Lasting Kingdom would Arrive."
1. Death of Abdullah:
King Abdullah of Saudi Arabia died officially on 23rd January, 2015 AD. He was the
6th King of Saudi Arabia. He came in power on 1st August, 2005 AD after the death
of King Fahd.
2. Salman became the 7th King of Saudi Arabia but he is very ill and weak and he
appointed his son, Muhammad Bin Salman as the Crown Prince after removing
Muhammad Bin Nayef in 2017 AD who was appointed as Crown Prince in 2015 by
King Salman.
Later the whole world witnessed that how MBS - Muhammad Bin Salman, the
crown prince of Saudi Arabia killed his family members and his cousins so that no
body can threaten him to become the next King of Saudi Arabia after the death of
King Salman.
There is a continous dispute and internal fight going on in the Saud Family over the
issue of next King after the death of King Salman who is very ill and can die any day.
100 Years of Rule of Saudi Kingdom would end by 2023 AD as told by Imam Jaffar e
Sadiq (AS) and the Arrival of Mahdi would take place on 28th July, 2023
https://thehill.com/opinion/energy-environment/504499-introducing-the-great-
reset-world-leaders-radical-plan-to
"For decades, progressives have attempted to use climate change to justify liberal policy changes.
But their latest attempt – a new proposal called the “Great Reset” – is the most ambitious and
radical plan the world has seen in more than a generation.
At a virtual meeting earlier in June hosted by the World Economic Forum, some of the planet’s
most powerful business leaders, government officials and activists announced a proposal to “reset”
the global economy. Instead of traditional capitalism, the high-profile group said the world should
adopt more socialistic policies, such as wealth taxes, additional regulations and massive Green
New Deal-like government programs.
“Every country, from the United States to China, must participate, and every industry, from oil and
gas to tech, must be transformed,” wrote Klaus Schwab, the founder and executive chairman of
the World Economic Forum, in an article published on WEF’s website. “In short, we need a
‘Great Reset’ of capitalism.”
Schwab also said that “all aspects of our societies and economies” must be “revamped,” “from
education to social contracts and working conditions.”
Joining Schwab at the WEF event was Prince Charles, one of the primary proponents of the Great
Reset; Gina Gopinath, the chief economist at the International Monetary Fund; António Guterres,
the secretary-general of the United Nations; and CEOs and presidents of major international
corporations, such as Microsoft and BP.
Although many details about the Great Reset won’t be rolled out until the World Economic Forum
meets in Davos in January 2021, the general principles of the plan are clear: The world needs
massive new government programs and far-reaching policies comparable to those offered by
American socialists such as Sen. Bernie Sanders (I-Vt.), and Rep. Alexandria Ocasio-Cortez (D-
N.Y.) in their Green New Deal plan.
Or, put another way, we need a form of socialism — a word the World Economic Forum has
deliberately avoided using, all while calling for countless socialist and progressive plans.
“We need to design policies to align with investment in people and the environment,” said the
general secretary of the International Trade Union Confederation, Sharan Burrow. “But above
all, the longer-term perspective is about rebalancing economies.”
One of the main themes of the June meeting was that the coronavirus pandemic has created an
important “opportunity” for many of the World Economic Forum’s members to enact their radical
transformation of capitalism, which they acknowledged would likely not have been made possible
without the pandemic.
“We have a golden opportunity to seize something good from this crisis — its unprecedented
shockwaves may well make people more receptive to big visions of change,” said Prince Charles at
the meeting, adding later, “It is an opportunity we have never had before and may never have
again.”
You might be wondering how these leaders plan to convince the world to completely alter its
economy over the long run, since the COVID-19 pandemic most assuredly won’t remain a crisis
forever. The answer is that they’ve already identified another “crisis” that will require expansive
government intervention: Climate change.
“The threat of climate change has been more gradual [than COVID-19]—but its devastating
reality for many people and their livelihoods around the world, and its ever greater potential to
disrupt, surpasses even that of Covid-19,” Prince Charles said.
Of course, these government officials, activists and influencers can’t impose a systemic change of
this size on their own. Which is why they have already started to activate vast networks of left-wing
activists from around the world, who will throughout 2021 demand changes in line with the Great
Reset.
According to the World Economic Forum, its 2021 Davos summit will include thousands of
members of the Global Shapers Community, youth activists located in 400 cities across the planet.
The Global Shapers program was involved in the widespread “climate strikes” of 2019, and more
than 1,300 have already been trained by the Climate Reality Project, the highly influential, well-
funded climate activist organization run by former Vice President Al Gore, who serves on the
World Economic Forum’s Board of Trustees.
Making matters worse, the left has already proven throughout the COVID-19 pandemic that it can
radically transform political realities in the midst of a crisis, so it’s not hard to see how the Great
Reset could eventually come to fruition.
Can you imagine George W. Bush or Bill Clinton printing trillions of dollars and mailing it to
millions of people who didn’t lose their jobs? This would have been unthinkable just a couple of
decades ago. Today, this policy garners bipartisan support.
Prince Charles was right: The present pandemic is a “golden opportunity” for radical change. And
if Al Gore, Prince Charles and the rest of the World Economic Forum can convince enough
people that attempting to stop climate change is also worth dramatically pushing humanity toward
greater government control, then radical – and catastrophic – change is exactly what we’re going
to get.
https://braveneweurope.com/norbert-haring-the-world-economic-forum-is-planning-
the-great-reset-to-prevent-it-from-happening
According to its own description, the World Economic Forum is “THE international organisation for public-
private cooperation” and has as its main objective “to improve the state of the world”. The foundation,
founded in 1971 by German economist Klaus Schwab, lacks neither power nor self-confidence. For years
now, almost all the world’s major heads of government have made the pilgrimage (mostly in their private
jets) to the annual meeting in Davos to pay their respects to multinational corporations and billionaires.
The World Bank, a close collaborator of the Forum, has made it a strategy to only support development
projects that the member companies of this club can earn money from. The United Nations (UN) have
been made highly dependent on the money of the corporations and can do practically nothing that does
not promote their interests or even runs counter to them. Even the International Monetary Fund (IMF)
now acts quite unabashedly as a door-opener for multinationals when it is supposed to help a poor
country in difficulty or assess its financial system.
So this powerful organisation, the World Economic Forum, has been working for nearly 50 years to make
the world a better place, with great success, it claims:
The World Economic Forum has developed a reputation as a trusted platform for informed collaboration and
cooperation between all stakeholders – reinforced by a track record of success over five decades.
However, if you watch the short film that the Forum has released to get you in the mood for the Great
Reset, you can’t help but judge that it has either failed miserably in its main objective, or – more likely –
that it wants to improve the state of the world just for its members. In this case the huge profits of the
large corporations and the increasing inequality of income, wealth, and power are signs of great success.
After this not so subtle introduction, the video continues with an extremely high profile line-up of
testimonial-givers. They include the British heir to the throne, the head of the International Monetary Fund
and the Director-General of the United Nations.
So that you don’t have to do it, I have watched it, until my capacity for cliché intake was exhausted at
about the middle of the film. Klaus Schwab declared at the beginning that “Now is the time to design the
system for the post-Corona period.” UN Secretary General Guterres and Prince Charles talked about
peace on earth and a society in harmony with nature. Nothing is said about how we get there.
The boss of Mastercard, Ajay Banga, finally explained how the transition to the Great-Reset-paradise can
be managed “from the point of view of the companies”, at least in principle: “In order for it to work, the
private sector must make it part of its business model”, i.e. be able to make money from it. Otherwise it
won’t work, we learn. To do this, you need “enormous trust between the private and public sectors, which
is very difficult to achieve”. But thanks to Corona, there is more of that trust now. States now entrust
companies with much more data for free processing. More of it, and all will be well.
If politicians and aristocrats are only interested in spreading euphonious phrases, and the corporations
only want what they have always wanted, namely to earn money, then why all the big boost with star
cast?
I’m certainly not the only one who came up with the idea of calling a book-project “Reset”. Subtitle: “How
Capitalism Works and How We Can Overcome It”. This kind of thinking is in the air, when in such a deep
economic crisis like we are currently experiencing the richest people in the world gain many billions in
wealth and the stock markets act – after a brief moment of shock – as if nothing had happened. However,
before the World Economic Forum also came up with the “Reset” label, I had already changed the
somewhat abstract working title to the more concrete one: “The World being led on a nose ring: How the
corporations are taking power and what we can do about it”.
The next annual meeting in Davos is to be a “twin summit”: On the one hand, the usual rendezvous of the
corporation leaders and billionaires with the heads of government and the media. On the other hand, all
important stakeholders are to be represented, at least digitally, to help plan the Great Reset.
“Stakeholders” is a managerial buzzword for representatives of groups with a stake in the companies’
actions, which have been hand-picked by the companies themselves.
Let’s take a look at the list of stakeholders of this event that the World Economic Forum is convening. It
seems to be somewhat exhaustive, if one takes the following at its word: “The announcement of the ‘Great
New Start’ was made by H.K.H. The Prince of Wales and Professor Schwab during a virtual meeting, followed by
statements by UN Secretary General António Guterres and IMF Executive Director Kristalina Georgieva. Their
statements were supported by voices from all stakeholder groups in world society, including
Victoria Alonsoperez, founder and CEO of Chipsafer, Uruguay, and a Young Global Leader;
Caroline Anstey, President and CEO of Pact, USA;
Ajay S. Banga, Managing Director, Mastercard, USA;
Sharan Burrow, General Secretary, International Trade Union Confederation (ITUC), Brussels;
Ma Jun, Chairman, Green Finance Committee, China Society for Finance and Banking, and
member of the Monetary Policy Committee, People’s Bank of China;
Bernard Looney, Managing Director, BP, United Kingdom;
Juliana Rotich, Venture Partner, Atlantica Ventures, Kenya;
Bradford L. Smith, President, Microsoft, USA;
Nick Stern, Chairman, Grantham Research Institute on Climate Change and the Environment,
United Kingdom.
Microsoft, BP, Mastercard, an investment company, an IT start-up, garnished with a trade unionist and
the head of an American development organization, who was previously a banker and advisor to the
World Economic Forum, these are the “voices from all stakeholder groups in world society”.
Environmental protection is represented by a Chinese official who has taken up the phoney cause of
Green Finance and an economist who advocates at least the modest sum of one percent of the gross
domestic product be used for measures against global warming.
If the whole thing was just about discussions between these representatives and profiteers of the status
quo, it could safely be ignored, even if it is supported by the Who’s Who of “global governance” (world
government).
But the core of the program is something else: Schwab said, according to the Forum’s press release,
“The ‘Great Reset’ will require us to integrate all stakeholders of the global society into a community with
common interests, goals and actions”. In the video, he is even more explicit about the claim of
monopolizing the debate: “This initiative will integrate everyone in the world who has a voice and who has
a particularly innovative proposal to improve living conditions.”
If they prove to be sufficiently ambitious and manageable, their careers will be promoted. In this way,
Klaus Schwab and the members of his club have someone in an influential position in business, politics
or culture almost anywhere in the world whom they can call if they need to know something or need a
favour.
For the purposes of the Great Reset, the World Economic Forum has declared these Global Shapers to
be the representatives of the young generation, who are to ensure that the reform plans are in the long-
term interest of future generations (of elites). In the next six months, the young established people are to
identify people in the catchment area of their hub who are pushing noteworthy reform initiatives. They are
to invite them to participate digitally in the Davos Great Reset Pow Wow via their hub.
That is then only the beginning. Whoever turns out to be potentially impactful and therefore dangerous
will be embraced and made to feel important, flown to conferences in all parts of the world, lured with job
offers, stipends and other support, imperceptibly entangled in a web of dependencies from which he or
she cannot free themselves without fear of falling into insignificance.
Or else, one resists and withdraws from the embrace from the beginning. Then, one may have to watch
how other reformers with less fear of being corrupted are stylised into beacons of hope.
In this way, the World Economic Forum hopes to make sure that reform movements do not get out of
control, for example, those who want to tax away some of the wealth of the mega-rich, or who would
strive to ensure that this obscene wealth does not come about in the first place, by reducing the
excessive, anti-competitive intellectual property rights, or by strengthening the rights of employees, or by
forcing big corporations to pay taxes like everybody else.
That is how it works, albeit rarely presented as openly as in this reform prevention project of the elites
called the Great Reset. If they come for you, you know now, what they want from you."
https://foreignpolicy.com/2019/01/07/a-new-cold-war-has-begun/
That future has arrived, and it is nothing less than a new cold war: The constant,
interminable Chinese computer hacks of American warships’ maintenance records,
Pentagon personnel records, and so forth constitute war by other means. This
situation will last decades and will only get worse, whatever this or that trade deal is
struck between smiling Chinese and American presidents in a photo-op that sends
financial markets momentarily skyward. The new cold war is permanent because of a
host of factors that generals and strategists understand but that many, especially those
in the business and financial community who populate Davos, still prefer to deny. And
because the U.S.-China relationship is the world’s most crucial—with many second-
and third-order effects—a cold war between the two is becoming the negative
organizing principle of geopolitics that markets will just have to price in.
This is because the differences between the United States and China are stark and
fundamental. They can barely be managed by negotiations and can never really be
assuaged.
The Chinese are committed to pushing U.S. naval and air forces away from the
Western Pacific (the South and East China seas), whereas the U.S. military is
determined to stay put. The Chinese commitment makes perfect sense from their
point of view. They see the South China Sea the way American strategists saw the
Caribbean in the 19th and early 20th centuries: the principal blue water extension of
their continental land mass, control of which enables them to thrust their navy and
maritime fleet out into the wider Pacific and the Indian Ocean, as well as soften up
Taiwan. It is similar to the way dominance over the Caribbean enabled the United
States to strategically control the Western Hemisphere and thus affect the balance of
forces in the Eastern Hemisphere in two world wars and a cold war. For the United
But the Americans will not budge from the Western Pacific. The U.S. defense
establishment, both uniformed and civilian, considers the United States a Pacific
power for all time: Witness Commodore Matthew Perry’s opening of Japan to trade in
1853, America’s subjugation and occupation of the Philippines starting in 1899, the
bloody Marine landings on a plethora of Pacific islands in World War II, the defeat
and rebuilding of Japan following World War II, the Korean and Vietnam wars, and,
most important, Washington’s current treaty alliances stretching from Japan south to
Australia. This is an emotional as well as a historical commitment: something I have
personally experienced as an embed on U.S. military warships in the Western Pacific.
In fact, the U.S. Defense Department is much more energized by the China threat than
by the Russia one. It considers China, with its nimble ability as a rising technological
power—unencumbered by America’s own glacial bureaucratic oversight—to catch up
and perhaps surpass the United States in 5G networks and digital battle systems.
(Silicon Valley is simply never going to cooperate with the Pentagon nearly to the
degree that China’s burgeoning high-tech sector cooperates with its government.)
China is the pacing threat the U.S. military now measures itself against.
This American refusal to yield blue water territory to China is championed by liberal
hawks who will likely staff any incoming Democratic administration’s Asia portfolios,
to say nothing of the Republicans—both pro- and anti-President Donald Trump. As for
the so-called restrainers and neo-isolationists, when you boil it right down, they are
really about getting American ground troops out of the Middle East, something that
may actually strengthen the U.S. position against China. And as for left-wing
Democratic progressives, when it comes to a hard line on trade talks with China, they
are not too far away from Trump’s own economic advisors. Remember that the
Democratic candidate Hillary Clinton was forced to publicly disown the Trans-Pacific
Partnership free trade agreement because of pressure from her own party. The fact is,
since President Richard Nixon went to China in 1972, U.S. policy toward the Pacific
has been notably consistent whatever party has held the White House, and the turn
against China has likewise been a bipartisan affair—and thus unlikely to be
dramatically affected by any impeachment or presidential election.
Regarding the trade talks themselves, what really riles both the Trumpsters and the
Democrats (moderates and progressives alike) is the very way China does business:
stealing intellectual property, acquiring sensitive technology through business
buyouts, fusing public and private sectors so that their companies have an unfair
advantage (at least by the mores of a global capitalistic trading system), currency
manipulation, and so on. Trade talks, however successful, will never be able to change
those fundamentals. China can adjust its business model only at the margins.
And because economic tensions with China will never significantly lessen, they will
only inflame the military climate. When a Chinese vessel cut across the bow of an
American destroyer, or China denied entry of a U.S. amphibious assault ship to Hong
Kong—as happened last fall—this cannot be separated from the atmosphere of charged
rhetoric over trade. With the waning of the liberal world order, a more normal
historical era of geopolitical rivalry has commenced, and trade tensions are merely
accompaniments to such rivalry. In order to understand what is going on, we have to
stop artificially separating U.S.-China trade tensions and U.S.-China military tensions.
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 272
There is also the ideological aspect of this new cold war. For several decades, China’s
breakneck development was seen positively in the United States, and the relatively
enlightened authoritarianism of Deng Xiaoping and his successors was easily
tolerated, especially by the American business community. But under Xi Jinping,
China has evolved from a soft to a hard authoritarianism. Rather than a collegial
group of uncharismatic technocrats constrained by retirement rules, there is now a
president-for-life with a budding personality cult, overseeing thought control by
digital means—including facial recognition and following the internet searches of its
citizens. It is becoming rather creepy, and American leaders of both parties are
increasingly repelled by it. This is also a regime that in recent years has been
imprisoning up to a million ethnic Uighur Muslims in hard labor camps. The
philosophical divide between the American and Chinese systems is becoming as great
as the gap between American democracy and Soviet communism."
Keep in mind that technology encourages this conflict rather than alleviates it.
Because the United States and China now inhabit the same digital ecosystem,
wars of integration—where the borders are not thousands of miles, but one
computer click away—are possible for the first time in history: China can
intrude into U.S. business and military networks as the United States can
intrude into theirs. The great Pacific Ocean is no longer the barrier that it once
was. In a larger sense, it has been the very success of decades of capitalist and
pseudo-capitalist economic development throughout the Pacific that has
generated the wealth required to engage in such a high-end military-cum-cyber
arms race. Truly, the new age of warfare would be impossible without the
economic prosperity that has preceded it: The glass is half-empty precisely
because it is half-full. This is a theme of Yale Professor Paul Bracken’s
prescient 1999 book, Fire in the East: The Rise of Asian Military Power and the
Second Nuclear Age.
The good news is that all this may not lead to a bloody war. The bad news is that
it well might. I believe the chances of a violent exchange are still nowhere near
the 50 percent baseline, where warfare becomes probable rather than
merely possible. Nevertheless, the chances have increased significantly. This
has to do with more than merely the famous Thucydidean paradigm of fear,
honor, and interest. It has to do with just how emotional the Chinese can get
over an issue like Taiwan, for example, and how easy it is for air and naval
incidents (and accidents) to spiral out of control. The more the countries fight
over trade, and the closer Chinese and American warships get to each other in
the South China Sea, over time the less control the two sides will actually have
over events. As we all know, many wars have begun even though neither side
saw it in its interest to start one. And a hot conflict in the South or East China
Sea will affect the world financial system much more than the collapse of Iraq,
Syria, Libya, or Yemen.
What kept the Cold War from going hot was the fear of hydrogen bombs. That
applies much less to this new cold war. The use of nuclear weapons and the era
of testing them in the atmosphere keeps receding from memory, making
policymakers on both sides less terrified of such weapons than their
predecessors were in the 1950s and 1960s, especially since nuclear arsenals
What we really have to fear is not a rising China but a declining one. A China
whose economy is slowing, on the heels of the creation of a sizable middle class
with a whole new category of needs and demands, is a China that may
experience more social and political tensions in the following decade. A theme
of the late Harvard political scientist Samuel Huntington’s 1968 book, Political
Order in Changing Societies, is that as states develop large middle classes, the
greater the possibility is for political unrest. This will encourage China’s
leadership to stoke nationalism even further as a means of social cohesion.
While skeptics, particularly in the world business community, see the South
and East China seas as constituting just a bunch of rocks jutting out into the
water, the Chinese masses don’t see it that way. To them, almost like Taiwan,
the South China Sea is sacred territory. And the only fact that prevents China
from becoming even more aggressive in the East China Sea is the fear that
Japan could defeat it in an open conflict—something that would so humiliate
Beijing’s leadership that it could call into question the stability of the
Communist Party itself. So China will wait a number of years until it surpasses
Japan in naval and air power. Beijing’s rulers know how closely their strategy
dovetails with the feelings of the Chinese masses. Indeed, this new cold war is
more susceptible to irrational passions fueled by economic disruptions than
the old Cold War.
In the second half of the 20th century, the United States and the Soviet Union
each had internal economies-of-scale (however different from each other), that
were far better protected from the destabilizing forces of globalization than the
American and Chinese economies are now. It is precisely the fusion of military,
trade, economic, and ideological tensions, combined with the destabilization
wrought by the digital age—with its collapse of physical distance—that has
created an unvirtuous cycle for relations between the United States and China.
The geopolitical challenge of the first half of the 21st century is stark: how to
prevent the U.S.-China cold war from going hot.
Preventing a hot war means intensified diplomacy not only from the State
Department but also from the Pentagon—American generals talking and
visiting with Chinese generals in order to create a network of relationships that
are the equivalent of the old Cold War hotline. This diplomacy must avoid the
temptation of reducing the American-Chinese relationship to one contentious
theme, be it trade or the South China Sea. It can mean playing hard on trade
but always keeping the public rhetoric cool and reasoned. Passion becomes the
real enemy in this competition, because in the megaphone world of global
social media, passion stirs the impulse to assert status, which has often been a
principal source of wars. And it means most of all stealing a concept from the
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 274
American diplomat George Kennan’s playbook on containment: Be vigilant, but
be always willing to compromise on individual issues and in crises. Wait them
out. Because, in a very different way than the old Soviet system, the Chinese
system—the more authoritarian it gets—is over time more prone to crack up
than America’s.
There are lots of conflicts and disputes in between USA and China and the most
prominent are:
1. Trade Wars
2. Currency Wars
5. Taiwan Issue
7. Covid 19 issue and the Blame of USA on China in the spread of disease
11. Political and Military Block of China with Russia, Iran, Turkey and Pakistan
Hazrat Naemat Allah Shah Wali made several predictions in his poetry 850 years
ago and they proved to be 100% correct as witnessed by Muslims, Hindus and
the Britishers in the Subcontinent and Iran for centuries.
He also made predictions about the War in between China, India and Pakistan.
“Jupiter and Saturn joined in Aries, Eternal God what changes. When
after a long century the bad times will return In France and Italy what
turmoil. Century 1. Quatrain 51”
The conjunction of Jupiter and Saturn in Aries is very rare. The astronomical
conjunction occurred almost two hundred years ago and then again on
September 2, 1995.
The long century brings this quatrain into the present time; as Nostradamus
refers to the 20th century as the long century. The bad times in France and Italy
have been going on during the 20th and 21st century.
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 278
We have September 2, 1995 as the starting point; now we need to find the
duration of these troubles.
“The third antichrist is soon annihilated; His bloody war will have
lasted 27 years. The heretics/unbelievers are dead, captured, exiled.
The blood of human bodies will redden the whole earth. Century 8.
Quatrain 77”
In Hermetic terms the God Hermes stands for Mercury, with Jupiter indicating
Islam. Therefore, Nostradamus states the problems the Antichrist starts will last
for 27 years.
2nd September, 2022 would be officially the End of Armageddon or Big Global War
and the Islamic month is also Safar i.e. 6th Safar, 1444 Hijir
The Islamic Month of Safar would also start in the month of September, 2021 AD.
Now we know that the World Elite has passed Agenda - 21 in the United Nations in
the Year - 1992 and their hidden plan is to reduce the population to 3 billion within
30 years i.e. by 2022 AD
So they have to launch a Big Global War for Big Destruction in the 21st Year of the
21st Century and that would be called Armageddon.
Agenda 21............To Start Armageddon or Big Global War by 21st Year of the 21st
Century to reduce population to 3 Billion by 2022 AD
As Imam Hussain (AS) mentioned that the War would start in the Islamic month of
Safar and will continue till next year and end again in the month of Safar.
The Islamic month of Safar in 2021 AD would also start in the month of September,
2021 AD
10,09,2021/19 = 531159
531159 x 19 = 10 09 2021
The Day is also Friday and is Friday (Juma) is related to Mahdi as told by
Hazrat Ali. Start of Big War as told by Imam Hussain would be:
Divide this date by the Holy Code of Quran i.e. 19, we would get:
2022,09,02/19 = 1064258
1064258 x 19 = 2022 09 02
1444 Hijri is the Year of Kharooj (Exit) of Mahdi on 23rd Ramazan, 1444
Hijri.
Use of Nuclear Weapons ----- 6th and 9th August, 1945 AD by USA on Japan
The Total Number of Years in between the Climax of WW3 and WW2 are:
Prophet Muhammad (PBUH) and Hazrat Ali told that 5 people would die out of 7
people in the World before the Arrival of Mahdi
The Population of the World would reach by 7.86 Billion people by August, 2021 AD
7.860 x (5/7) = 5.61428 Billion people would be Dead by 28th July, 2023 AD
Book Features:
“This is my humble prayer that this book will not save tens or thousands, but millions of souls.
Amen. The Lord Jesus Christ revealed Himself in a dream to appoint me His servant in 1997.
The Lord later revealed my calling for His purpose in 2007 with a dream. This dream was a
warning and a revelation of global disasters that the whole world has already experienced
and will undergo with more severity in the future, if people don't repent with humility. God
revealed the reason for His judgments.
Mankind is doing whatever they want to do, while not thinking about the will of God. This is
not the only wall-an immeasurable wall of water in my dream symbolizing disasters. There are
several walls like this that are held with God's Strength. If this world continues to live with the
same pattern- living in sin-these walls will start to collapse, one after the other.
This book is God's message given to all the nations of the whole world, including prophecies
for year 2012 and year 2023 and prophecies of wars, famines, and natural disasters.
• What is God's will?
• Why God loves you?
• Why God will judge mankind?
God called me to be His witness before the whole world to testify His will & declare the
warning signs of future catastrophe, sequential to the birth pains of a woman in labor before
the second coming of the Lord Jesus Christ.”
Rabbi Alon Anava was born and raised in Israel. He has spoken to the world at
Schools, Synagogues, Yeshivahs, outreach programs and organizations, private
sessions and much more, reaching tens of thousands of people at
over 1,000 lectures in the past ten years. In the past 5 years Rabbi Anava has
expanded his out reach efforts through the internet reaching tens of thousands of
people resulting with over 100,000 followers worldwide on the internet and social
networks. With over 1,700,000 views to his videos, over 500,000 DVDs and CDs
distributed, his followers enjoy daily Torah studying on his websites, social
networks, videos, podcasts, live streaming and live Torah classes and lectures.
Rabbi Anava’s followers enjoy his undivided attention through daily phone calls,
skype meetings, personal and group meetings along with coaching and assistance.
https://atzmut.com/
https://atzmut.org/
In his recent lectures in November, 2020 which is also available on You Tube and
the link of his video mentioning the Time frame of the Arrival of The
Mashiach/Moshiah any time after Oct, 2021 AD is:
"Is the End of the World near? Torah secret that reveals what's
coming! - Rabi Alon Anava"
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=9uDH_nxE8Aw&t=2557s
In this video, he mentions that David became King of Israel and All Nations when he
was 37 years old and when we add 37 years in 2854 years of Jewish Calendar, we
would reach 2891 and that is the Middle of the Ages since Adam.
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=LT8b5pdDki8&feature=share
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=XNBlVrfyFxA&t=7322s
"The prophecies of world war 3 were true!! Find out more info
from the sources you need to know!!
4 Horsemen of Apocalypse
3. The Cry from the Sky in the night of 23rd Ramazan and would be heard by all
people in the World in their languages and then the Cry of Satan at the time of Asr
(Evening) on 23rd Ramazan, 1444 Hijri
5. Global Plagues, Murders, Diseases, Draught after the End of Big War in 1444
10. The 2 Eclipses in the month of Ramazan - Lunar Eclipse in the Start of Ramazan
and Solar Eclipse in the Middle of Ramazan, 1444 Hijri
11. The Face would appear in the Sky in the month of Rajab, 1444 Hijri
12. 1/3rd population would die from Global Draught, Diseases and Murders in
1444 Hijri (2022 - 2023 AD)
13. Naf's Zakia would be murdered in the month of Zil Hajj of 1444 Hijri
14. The 3 Great Mosques of Islam, Masjid Bait Al Maqdas, Masjid e Kufa and
Masjid e Nabawi in Madina would be desecrated by Anti Islam forces in 1444 Hijri
There are lot of books recently published on the topic - LAST events and people
before the Last Savior, which are indicating the End Times.
Some of the photos of the titles of the books written on the Year – 2023 AD are
as follows:
All these amazing books are available on www.amazon.com. And many more
are being written as people are awakening and realizing the fact that the
World is changing at a fast pace towards the Arrival of Mahdi and the Second
Coming of the Jesus Christ – A New and Bright Era for the whole humanity.
The climate scientists are predicting more storms and floods all over the world
due to several reasons. They are highlighting the link between global climate
change and increasingly frequent floods and other extreme weather events.
They warn of even greater risks in the future.
While impacts like temperature spikes and sea level rise may come to mind first
when considering climate change, altering precipitation patterns and
intensifying rainfall can have equally devastating consequences. Katharine
Hayhoe, climate scientist at Texas Tech University, explained during a press
conference held by advocacy group Union of Concerned Scientists, “Climate
change is about more than warming. What we’re really seeing is global
‘weirding.’ For many places around the world, what we are likely to see could be
feast or famine—more frequency of weather at the extremes, from intense
storms to prolonged droughts.”
Consistent with the growing fraction of rainfall coming in heavy storms, the
frequency of droughts has also risen is some areas, although declining in others.
In the United States, the Midwest and Great Plains have experienced more
rainfall whereas the Southeast and West have seen increased drought over the
past 50 years.
All told, these floods cost the lives of tens of thousands and brought destruction
on the scale of tens of billions of dollars. Since 1970, storms and floods were
responsible for more than 90 percent of the economic costs of extreme weather-
related events worldwide, according to the think-tank Resources for the Future.
Insurance companies, positioning themselves for profit, have closely tracked the
economic impact over the years. Nikhil da Victoria Lobo at the international
“Economic losses from natural disasters have soared from a global average of
$25 billion annually during the 1980s to $130 billion a year during the decade
ending in 2010,” he remarked.
Although it’s not possible to say exactly how much is due to climate change—a
significant portion is also attributable to increasing development in flood-prone
areas—there is little doubt that climate was a major factor, he explained.
Four of the five wettest years recorded in the UK have occurred from the year
2000 onwards. Over that same period, we have also had the seven warmest
years.
http://somehelpful.info/Prophecy/Signs.html
"When you see these things happening, know that the kingdom of God is
near." - Luke 21:31
No one can tell us with certainty what tomorrow's weather will be except the one
who causes it - God - but by listening to the weather report or looking at the sky,
people use their eyes and their brains to at least make an educated guess about
tomorrow's weather. Likewise, no one can tell us with certainly when the exact
timing of Jesus' return will be except the one who will cause it to happen, God the
Father (Mt. 12:36), but by listening to the right information sources, people can
use their eyes and their brains to at least make an educated guess about how
close we are to the return of Jesus Christ. Jesus said that when you see certain
things begin to happen, "Look up and lift up your heads, for your redemption
draws near," and "when you see them happen the kingdom of God is near" (Luke
21:28,31). Jesus and Paul both taught that the proper way to wait for His return
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 310
is to therefore be watchful, ready and sober (Matthew 24:42-44,25:13; 1 Th.
5:6).
The apostle John wrote that when Jesus appears, we who believe in Him shall
become like him, and everyone having this hope in Him purifies himself (1 John
3:2,3). He also wrote that the testimony of Jesus is the spirit of prophecy
(Revelation 19:10). So two benefits of studying Bible prophecy and comparing it
to world events are personal purification and a better understanding of Jesus.
Besides, in 1 Th. 4:18, Christians are commanded to encourage each other with
words about the return of Christ. Hebrews 10:24,25 also says that as we should
regularly meet to encourage one another, especially as we see the Day of Jesus'
return approaching.
Although we cannot say with certainty how today's events are related to Bible
prophecy, it is unwise to ignore them. Following are 10 for your consideration.
The first seven are already happening. The last three are in preparatory stages:
In 2007, the World Health Organization (WHO) issued a warning that infectious
diseases are emerging more quickly and spreading faster around the globe than
ever before, and they are becoming increasingly difficult to treat. The UN said in
its 2007 annual world health report that an outbreak or epidemic in one part of
the world can easily threaten billions of people in other parts due to large
numbers of modern day air travelers.
Regarding earthquakes, scientific data does show that we have been seeing a large
increase in seismic activity. According to a number of scientists, another star or
large planet is affecting the sun's magnetic field, which is also affecting the earth's
magnetic field - both the core and the ionosphere. The north pole is shifting at an
accelerated pace, and the earth seems to be expanding. Thus, we should see a
continual increase in earthquakes and volcanic activity in coming years. Stan
Deyo follows earth changes very closely. He's a scientist and has written a lot on
the subject. His web site covers numerous topics related to changes in the world
today.
Although the Bible teaches that Jesus is the promised Jewish Messiah (seeproof)
and is "the only begotten Son of God" (see John 3:18), who created the world and
everything in it (see Col. 1:16), at the end of the Church Age many people will be
teaching these truths, yet they will have other teachings that that are not
consistent with the Bible and will deceive many. Perhaps the majority of
professing Christian teachers in the world today fall into this camp, as most have
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 312
fallen away from sound Biblical teachings and instead place traditions of men
and/or the goal of increasing church attendance figures above the authority of the
Bible. Some are subtle, and some are blatant. Sincere followers of Jesus should
come out of these wayward institutional churches and seek to fellowship with
people who follow and teach what Jesus and His apostles did. If you are unsure
about your current church or fellowship, see Should I stay in my church or leave?
(If you are wondering why three additional commas were not included in the
Scripture above, see Note on commas in the text of Mt. 24:4,5.)
"Thus says the Lord GOD: 'Surely I will take the children of Israel from among
the nations, wherever they have gone, and will gather them from every side and
bring them into their own land; and I will make them one nation in the land, on
the mountains of Israel.'" (Ezekiel 37:21,22)
During the last 130 years Jews from 108 nations have migrated to the land
of Israel.
In 1882 the first wave of modern immigration to Israel started as Jews fled
persecution, or followed the Socialist Zionist ideas of Moses Hess. From
1882 to 1919 around 75,000 Jews immigrated to Palestine, mostly from
Russia. They bought land from Ottoman and individual Arab landholders
and established agricultural settlements. During this period the Hebrews
language was revived, newspapers and literature were published in Hebrew
and political parties and workers organizations were established.
6. Reemergence of Demigods
Jesus said, "As it was in the days of Noah, so shall it be also in the days of the Son
of man." (Matthew 24:37, Luke 17:26). From Genesis 6, we see that not only that
"the wickedness of man was great on the earth" (Genesis 6:5), but we see another
interesting phenomenon, demigods, i.e., powerful hybrid offspring of gods (fallen
angels) and humans:
There were giants in the earth in those days; and also after that, when the sons
of God came in unto the daughters of men, and they bare children to them, the
same became mighty men which were of old, men of renown. (Genesis 6:4)
Some Bible translations use the word "Nephilim" instead of "giants", because in
Hebrew the word is ( נָפִ ילnĕphiyl). This word occurs three times in the Bible, once
in Genesis 6:4 and twice in Numbers 13:33:
And there we saw the giants, the sons of Anak, which come of the giants: and
we were in our own sight as grasshoppers, and so we were in their sight.
(Numbers 13:33)
Some scholars believe that the Nephilim were most likely a group of fallen angels
who came to earth to corrupt mankind, since nephiyl comes from the
word naphal, which means 'to fall'. However, other scholars believe that the the
Nephilim were giants, since Numbers 13:33 seems to clarify their identity. In
either case, Genesis 6:1,2 and 1 Enoch 6-7 both tell of the sons of God, aka angels
After the flood, there were additional giants in the land of Canaan (See
Deuteronomy 3:11, 12:10-12; Joshua 4:15, 13:12, 1 Samuel 17:4-7; 2 Samuel 17:16-
22.) The Bible mentions some of their tribal names: the Emim, the Anakim, the
Horim, and Zamsummim. Ancient texts and pictures from Egyptian, Greek and
other cultures also talk of giants or demigods who were the offspring of
supernatural beings, so it's not a far stretch to see that this was a common
occurrence in antiquity. Archaeological evidence shows that these beings were
sometimes over 30 feet tall and strength to move massive stones that machinery
cannot even move, e.g., Baalbek. Before the flood, angels and their hybrid
offspring corrupted the whole earth. After the flood, they were perhaps not as
large, but still powerful and evil in their influence. Some were even cannibalistic.
That is why God commanded Israel to totally wipe out all the nations of Canaan.
The primary focus of the deception is use of the controlled corporate media by the
Prince of the Power of the Air. TV, radio, Internet, cell phones, PDAs, etc. keep
people completely preoccupied and oblivious to the fate that awaits unbelievers.
The goal is also to prevent people from hearing the Gospel of Jesus, and if they do
hear it to forget about it and be entertained constantly. Most people in developed
countries are now in a fog due to the impact of these media that lull them into a
false sense of security and into a false sense of right and wrong. This delusion can
be seen in three areas:
It was granted to him to make war with the saints and to overcome them. And
authority was given him over every tribe, tongue, and nation. All who dwell on
the earth will worship him, whose names have not been written in the Book of
Life of the Lamb slain from the foundation of the world.(Revelation 13:7,8)
Most religions expect a savior or a man who will bring world peace, justice and
unity. Here are three examples:
Muslims are waiting for the Mahdi or the 12th Imam. Iran's president,
Mahmoud Ahmadinejad has stated that his mandate is to pave the way for
the coming of this Islamic messiah. An Islamic film has been produced
about this: The Coming Is Upon Us. An interview with Ken
Timmerman about this in April 2011 explains the current hope of many
Muslims.
Buddhists are waiting for the Buddha of compassion, Maitreya, or a world
teacher and unifier, the 5th and coming Buddha of the present era. See
also, Maitreya Rising
Hindus are waiting for their completer and savior, Kalki, the name of
Vishnu in his tenth and last avatar. According to the Usborne Encyclopedia
of World Religions, "The tenth and last avatar has not yet appeared. It is
said that at the end of the present age, Vishnu will come to Earth as Kalki,
riding a white horse, to destroy the wicked and re-establish order."
"Then I saw another beast coming up out of the earth, and he had two horns like
a lamb and spoke like a dragon. And he exercises all the authority of the first
beast in his presence, and causes the earth and those who dwell in it to worship
Muslims are waiting for Isa Bin Maryam (i.e., Jesus, the son of the virgin Mary) to
appear with the Mahdi, praying behind him
Christians are waiting for the second coming of Jesus, but most no longer believe
in the literal interpretation of the Bible, so many will be deceived.
Recently, the Roman Church has elected a new pope whom some people say will
be the last pope and may be the beast out of the earth described in Rev. 13:11-15.
See Has the Beast from the Earth Officially Arisen?
Today, smart cards are popular, but they can be lost or stolen. It is likely that the
eventual solution will be an implantable RFID chip or some form of high tech
tatoo on the right hand or forehead. Already, 99% of commercial transactions in
many countries are done without cash. Most paper money is not even backed by
gold or silver anymore, so it's value is purely psychological. When the current
The Utah Data Center became fully operational on May 30, 2013. This was set up
to intercept and store all the world's information. This center may play a huge role
in the coming 666 Surveillance System. For a long list of links related to the Mark
of the Beast, see Technology to Control the World."
As muslims, we don't have to agree with all the facts presented in the above article
but the point is that the Christians are also preparing to see Jesus Christ soon. And
that is our main goal to see what they are thinking about the Second return of the
Jesus Christ from their beliefs and understanding.
“Blacks would come into world power before the Arrival of Mahdi.”
Now in recent years, we have witnessed so many Blacks and Africans who came
into World Power on most powerful positions in the World.
1. Barack Hussain Obama ----- First Black African President of United States
serving as current President since January, 2009. Also won Nobel Peace Prize
in 2009.
So the above examples clearly fulfill the Prophecy of Prophet Muhammad (PBUH)
and the Black Africans came to power before the Arrival of Mahdi.
This is a small list of more than 150 sins of humans in alphabetical order:
1. Anger
2. Adultery
3. Allegations on others
4. Abuse of Self and Others
5. Agree on the crimes of people in the past, present and future
6. Backbiting
7. Banqueting – Party with drinks and women without proper clothes
8. Being Angry with One’s Brothers, Sisters, Family and Friends
9. Bitterness
10. Blasphemy
11. Blaming Innocent man and woman
12. Boasting
13. Beating others
14. Brawling
15. Burying our talents and gifts of God
16. Brother going to Law against Brother, Sister or Family
17. Cheating
18. Calling One’s Brother a Fool --- Ridiculing others
19. Chambering – Unmarried people living and sleeping together
20. Clamor
21. Canabalism --- Eating Human body parts after killing them
22. Complaining
23. Contentious – Quarrelsome
24. Corruption
25. Covenant Breakers --- Lightly breaking a solemn or legal pact
26. Covetousness
27. Child Abuse -- - Child Labor
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 325
28. Craftiness --- Cunningness
29. Characterless --- Having no morals
30. Debate without purpose and knowledge
31. Disobedience of Allah
32. Disobedience of Prophets
33. Disobedience of 14 Masoomeen of Allah
34. Deceit
35. Defiling the Body
36. Defraud
37. Denying God
38. Denying Prophets
39. Denying the Last Prophet ---- Prophet Muhammad (PBUH)
40. Denying the First and Last Imam ---- Imam Ali and Mahdi
41. Denying the 12 Imams
42. Denying the Holy Books
43. Dodging others
44. Denying the 14 Masoomeen of Allah
45. Desiring the Praise of others ---- Doing things to gain praise
46. Despiteful
47. Dishonesty
48. Disobedience to Parents
49. Divisions ---- Forming groups or sects or splitting the community
50. Divorce --- Without proper reason
51. Double Tongued ---- Making insincere and false statements
52. Drunkenness
53. Drugs ----- Taking harmful and Illegal Drugs
54. Effiminate ---- Unmanly or womanish man
55. Envy
56. Evil Concupiscence ---- Desire for forbidden things
57. Evil Eye ---- Having Selfish Motives
58. Evil Thoughts ---- Injurious thoughts or Evil Mind
59. Extortion
60. Eating Pork ----- Illegal in some religions
This is a small list of more than 150 Sins and Crimes of Humans against their brothers,
sisters, family, friends and their community. The people were involved in all these sins and
crimes since the dawn of humanity but in the last 40 years we have all witnessed a rise in
these crimes in all shapes and have reached to their highest levels.
On July 24th, 2014 the Holy Tomb of Hazrat Younas (AS) - 800 BC was
completely destroyed by ISIS in Mosul, Iraq.
This extremist group has no regard for the sacred sites of Muslims and
Christians and this is the same group which is claiming that it would attack
Saudi Arabia and would destroy the Holy Kaaba.
By the End of 2022 AD, the Suffiani would control whole Syria and major
parts of Iraq and would attack Saudi Arabia and destroy the mosque of
Madina. When their army is marching towards Holy Kaaba in Mecca, Saudi
Arabia, Mahdi would destroy their army in 2023 AD.
So the Suffiani group which would emerge from Syria after the Great War in
the Middle East as per the prophecies of Prophet Muhammad (PBUH) and
Hazrat Ali.
Now the world is witnessing that ISIS which would lay foundations for the
Infamous Suffiani group and would kill thousands of innocent people
including Non Muslims all across Iraq and Syria. So this prophecy of Prophet
would also be fulfilled about Suffiani just after the Big War in Middle East.
More than 30 Rozas and Shrines have been demolished by ISIS in Syria and
Iraq so far.
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 331
62. Wars between Pakistan vs India and India vs China in
2021 - 2022 AD
In History, Pakistan and India had fought 3 wars and there was also a major
war between India and China in 1964-65.
In 2012, the Chief of the Army Staff of India said officially that:
“We would have to fight 2 wars at the same time with Pakistan and China.”
So our Prophet (PBUH) said 1400 years ago that there would be 2 wars at the
same time between Pakistan and India and India and China. The geo-political
situation in that region is worsening day by day and we are heading towards
those wars in 2021 - 2022 AD.
The sweeping majority of biased Hindus led by Mr. Moodi has came into
power in the last elections and since then the tensions between Pakistan and
India has been growing.
Similarly China has place 45,000 army troops on the borders of India where
the last war was fought between India and China.
Now the stage is being set for the future wars between India and Pakistan
and India and China.
The whole world had witnessed the Egypt Revolution in 2011. The President
of Egypt, Hosni Mubarak was removed from the Government after serving
more than 30 years on Egypt.
Since 2011 AD, the Egypt has seen lot of political changes. The Muslim
Brotherhood President, Mr. Morsi was also removed and he is in the prison
these days.
“Give me the news of the death of the Abdullah, the ruler of Arab and I would
give the good news of the Arrival of Mahdi.”
“Abdullah would be the Last ruler of Arab and after his death, the conflict would
arise in the King’s family on the succession.”
So he is predicted as the Last Ruler of Saudi Arabia and after him the other
people in Ibn Saud family would strive to become the rulers of Saudi Arabia but
their tenure of Government would be short and temporary.
“A young man from Banu Abbas would come as the ruler of Jordan and his name
would be Abdullah before the Arrival of Mahdi.”
So his name is also predicted in different Ahadith and Sayings of Imams and he is
described as the Young Person who would took the kingdom of Jordan and
would be the Last Ruler before the Arrival of Mahdi
Imam Ali (AS) mentioned the Last Alphabet of the Commander in Chief of the
Armed Forces who would enter Iraq in a speech in Kufa, Iraq was described as
“Sheen” and the Name of the President and the Commander in Chief the US
Armed Forces when US military entered Iraq in 1990 and in 2003 was:
Google hacked a pair of Adidas sneakers to show "how you can use objects to tell
stories on the web today," Aman Govil
Govil,, head of the advertising team told ABC.
The shoes can tell the person wearing them what they are doing (or aren't doing)
and can relay that information to their smartphone via a speaker in the tongue of
the shoe.
The experiment is meant to work the way many other fitness gadgets do, relaying
information about your activity and berating you when you're not being active
enough.
It's a novel idea but given that it needs a phone to function, there's probably no
need for your shoes to be the gadgets that do the talking. All Google really
demonstrated was that the sneakers could do what a smartphone is already
capable of.
So this prophecy of Prophet Muhammad (PBUH) has also been fulfilled in 2013 that
the Shoes would talk to humans before the Arrival of Mahdi.
1400 years ago, Hazrat Ali (AS) predicted about the Group – ISIS or “Daeesh”
having the following characteristics:
Hazrat Ali guided all the Muslims not to follow this particular group. He had
asked the Muslims not to help this group in any way. Because this group
would be a “Kharaji” group in the Muslims.
Now we are seeing the same characteristics in ISIS or “Daeesh” group in Iraq
and Syria.
There are several End Times prophecies about the Mahdi in the Bible. The
following are three of these prophecies:
“At that time Michael, the great prince who protects your people, will arise.
There will be a time of distress such as has not happened from the beginning
of nations until then.” (Daniel 12: 1) (Source: www.Bible.cc )
2. The following is a biblical End of Time prophecy about the Mahdi in Isaiah
19: 20:
“It will be a sign and witness to the LORD Almighty in the land of Egypt. When
they cry out to the LORD because of their oppressors, he will send them a
savior and defender, and he will rescue them.” (Isaiah 19: 20)
(Source: www.Bible.cc )
3. Genesis 49: 10 of the Old Testament of the Bible is an End Times prophesy
about the arrival of an important person who could be the Mahdi :
“The scepter will not depart from Judah ... until he comes to whom it belongs
and the obedience of the nations is his.” (Genesis 49: 10)
(Source: www.Bible.cc )
The Great Tribulation would start on 2nd September, 2016 AD on Friday and
continue till the Second coming of Jesus Christ on 28th July, 2023 AD on Friday.
It is also the Biblical Prophecies that the 7 years before the Second coming of
Jesus Christ is “The Great Tribulation” and then the era of “The Millinium”
starts after the Second coming of Jesus Christ when there would be peace and
prosperity for the whole mankind.
So according to the calculations, the period from 2nd September, 2016 AD till
28th July, 2023 AD is the 7 years period of “The Great Tribulation” and 1000
years after the Second coming of Jesus Christ would be known as “The
Millinium”.
“The musical instruments would be common. The people would carry them in
their pockets and place them on their heads.”
Now the people are using these gadgets and one can see in our societies that
the young generation is carrying these musical gadgets in their pockets and
the head phones on their heads all the times.
It is our Modern Culture all across the world whether you are living in East or
West. Now all the musical instruments and the music are all in one gadget
which is known as “Cell Phone”. You don’t need all the musical instrumens or
DVDs or cassettes to listen music.
So whatever wars, injustice and crimes we are observing in our world are the
gifts of these Banking Institutions and the real cause is “INTEREST”.
John Perkins in his book, “The Economic Hit Man” clearly states that these
institutions fund the wars, chaos, revolutions, and civil wars in the countries
and then bring their agents in the Government positions.
So practically this “Interest” is playing the main role in all wars, disturbances,
migrations, imbalances, etc in our modern world.
“The woman would rely on woman (Lesbians) and men would rely on men
(Gays). The women would dress like men and men would dress like women.”
Now one can witness the sex industry is at boom all across the world. There is
no concept of chastity and integrity in the world. The people of the world are
involved in form of sex or another.
The following are the list of different types of Sex in our world:
The wrath of the Almighty Allah is a must in the form of Arrival of Mahdi. The
sayings of Prophet Muhammad (PBUH) and Hazrat Ali about the spread of
sexuality in the world are completely fulfilled in the modern world which is
full of sex and indescent behavior all across the globe.
“The high rise buildings would be constructed in Mecca and they would
surpass the top of the highest mountains in Mecca. Once you see that sign,
you should be sure that the TIME is near.”
In the last few years especially in the last decade there are lot of high rise
buildings and hotels constructed in Mecca.
The Clock Tower of Mecca is the highest building in Mecca and even its
shadow casts upon the Holy Kaaba. It has surpassed the top of the highest
mountains in Mecca.
This prophecy has also been fulfilled recently and now according to Prophet
Muhammad (PBUH) that the “TIME” is very near. So one can now believe that
the Arrival of Mahdi is very near because when the other prophecies of our
Prophet (PBUH) are fulfilled exactly then the prophecy about the Arrival of
Mahdi would also be fulfilled accordingly without any doubt. Inshah Allah.
There are numerous prophecies in the Holy Bible, Old Testament and also
from our Prophet Muhammad (PBUH) and Imams that there would be rise in
Earthquakes, floods, famines, volcanoes, etc in the End times and before the
Arrival of Mahdi.
Similarly it was also mentioned that there would be rise in the Meteor
shower from the sky in the End Time before the Arrival of Mahdi.
All the space scientists across the world have witnessed the rise of Meteor
shower from the sky significantly in the recent years.
Now we can see lot of Round holes i.e. Tunnels in the mountains of Mecca. It
is impossible to perceive 1400 years ago that the roads would be constructed
in the mountains with the construction of tunnels. There is a huge
construction of highways and tunnels in Mecca, Saudi Arabia in the recent
years as we are heading towards the Arrival of Mahdi quickly.
Even the schools are not teaching obedience and proper discipline at school
or at home. The children are literally become the “BOSSES” of their parents.
They dictate their terms at home. They force their parents to fulfill their
wishes and desires at all costs and most of the parents see their duty to fulfill
the desires of their children as their prime responsibility.
In the name of “Children Rights” the countries are giving unnecessary rights
and making the children more indisciplined and arrogant.
“If you live to see the seat of Caliphate in Bayt al-Maqdis (Jerusalem), then
earthquakes, disasters and great calamities are imminent. The Hour will be
closer to people than this hand of mine to your heart.”
(Al – Haakim)
“A man will come out from the East before the Mahdi, from
His Household (family), carrying a sword for eight (8)
months, killing and maiming people. He heads towards
Jerusalem and dies once he reaches here.”
(Kitab Al – Fitan)
Now we see that till today, all forms of Governments and World Systems
have come into power. For example:
Kingdoms
Dictatorships
Democracy
Capitalism
Communism
Socialism
Islamic rule
Western rule
Women rule
Black rule
Military rule
Bankers rule
All the forms of Governments and people have failed so far to establish peace
and justice in the world.
Now the world population is anxiously waiting for some savior to give them
ultimate peace and justice which can be only given by our last Mahdi.
“The Muslims would sell their children on roads for food and safety in the End
times.”
Now if someone is following the war in Syria, he would see how poor people
of Syria are selling their daughters to rich Arabs for food and safety because
the rebel groups especially ISIS are either raping the women or selling them
to Arabs and human traffickers or forcing them in marriages with their
warriors.
Rape
Forced Marriage
Selling to Arabs and Human traffickers
This prophecy has also come true and it is telling that we are in the End times
just before the Arrival of Mahdi.
“The Iron birds would fly above you and you would hear
their sound once they pass over you.”
Now we can see lots of fighter jets and even passenger planes like Concord
whose speed is more than the Speed of Sound which is 1235 Km/Hour or 767
Miles/Hour or 343 meters/Second.
In 2020 AD, the World witnessed how the Oil prices collapsed in the World and
even reached to Negative rates in March and April, 2020 AD
The Economy of the Arab countries run on Oil production and Oil sale. If Oil prices
reduced to low rates, then their economies would fail and the World saw this year
how Saudi Arabia, UAE, Kuwait, Oman, etc asked IMF and World Bank for loans for
the first time in their history and imposed different Taxes like Income Tax, VAT in
Saudi Arabia and UAE especially.
UAE, Bahrain, Saudi Arabia, Oman and other Middle Eastern countries openly
accepted Israel for the first time in the histoy and betrayed Palestine.
There is a serious conflict in between the alliance of Saudi Arabia, UAE, Kuwait with
Iran and Israel and USA is taking advantage to sell their weapons and Israel is
establishing Military bases in Oman, UAE and Saudi Arabia to attack Iran and
Pakistan in the coming Big War.
Israel has a dream to establish Greater Israel after the Destruction of Middle East in
the Big War. That is why they are playing with all the Middle Eastern Countries to
keep the conflicts in between them and then wage a War at appropriate time in the
coming years soon.
Saudi Arabia is a Big Buyer of Military Equipment about 80 Billion dollars every year
from USA, Israel, UK, France and Canada. And its economy depends on Oil and Hajj.
This year due to Coronavirus, the Hajj and Umrah was also suspended and Oil prices
plunged to negative rates.
The Arabs are coming to close to their destruction as told by our Prophet
Muhammad (PBUH) and 9 out of 10 Arabs would die in the Big War which is coming
soon in 2021 - 2022 AD.
“The Bilal mosque would be demolished near the Holy Kaaba and the
palace of the ruler would be built on mountain and the name of the ruler
would be on the animal and he would be enemy of my family.”
Now that Historical Bilal Mosque has been abolished in the period of King Fahad of
Saudi Arabia.
There is a big awakening in Saudi Arabia in the recent years after this fulfillment of
the prophecy. Hundreds of books have been written in Saudi Arabia and are
available in the libraries all over Saudi Arabia.
There are 119 gates in the Holy Kaaba, Mecca and one of the names of the gates of
Holy Kaaba is known as “Bab e Mahdi”
There is another gate which is on the name of Mahdi in the Madina Mosque which
is known as, “Bab ul Haee Al Mahdi” which means the ‘Gate of Mahdi who gives
Life”
It is also mentioned in the Sayings of Hazrat Ali that when the Arrival of Mahdi
would take place in Mecca, Saudi Arabia, all people in Mecca would come and obey
Mahdi and there would be no bloodshed in Mecca upon the Arrival of Mahdi.
Many analysts and economists are predicting a worse economic and market
collapse by 2020-21 AD. They are warning people by writing books and articles both
on main stream and alternate media.
The fourth and the last blood moon was in the month of September, 2015 on
28th September as the blood mo
moons
ons reminds us important events in History of
mankind.
Most of the calculations done in the past indicate the year – 2023 as the year of His
Second Coming. Number – 7 is considered the lucky number in most faiths of the
world especially in the Christian and Islamic faiths. July is the 7th Month. Now the
dates could be multiples of Number – 7 as: 7th, 14th, 21st and 28th – all these four
dates can be divided by Number -7, which is considered as the luckiest number. The
numbers in the year – 2023 also sum up to 7 as:
2023------------ 2 + 0 + 2 + 3 = 7
Second Coming in the Month of the year – 2023 – July – 7th Month
The date of the 7th Month of the year – 2023 would be 28……. 7 x 4 = 28th July
2023 7 28 = 19 x 106512
Year of Second Coming of Jesus Christ – 2023--------- 2 + 0 + 2 + 3 = 7
The Number – 23 is also considered as the ‘Cosmic Number’ in Numerology and the
most mystic number among the numbers.
So the year of Jesus Christ’s Second Coming along with Mahdi is also divisible by
Number – 19 is:
The year, month and date numbers if written as a single number is divisible
by Number – 19
All the numbers in the year, month and date are linked with Number – 7,
which is considered as the luckiest number.
The year – 2023 -------has Number – 23, which is considered as the ‘Cosmic
Number’ in Numerology
19 x 106512 = 2023,7,28
The world has witnessed an increase in Natural catastrophes in the last few
years and they are increasing year by year.
Now we all notice that time flies in front of our eyes. The years pass quickly.
We usually say that:
‘See, Ramazan is again coming next month. How quickly the year passes!’
When asked from Hazrat Ali about Dajjal, Hazrat replied to his dedicated
followers that:
Now we Dajjal – A Satanic Socio – Political System, which has all the
characteristics mentioned by our Prophet Muhammad (PBUH) and Imams.
Injustice
Poverty
Wars
Drought
Diseases
“Anybody can be President of the United States, but very few can ever have any hope of
becoming President of the Bohemian Club.” – President Richard Nixon, 1972
“They secretly meet for seventeen days each July in a remote “sacred grove” of ancient
redwood trees in the deep forests surrounding San Francisco. Some 1,500 in number, their
membership roll is kept secret, but includes the super-rich, blood dynasty member families
of the Illuminati; heavy-hitting corporate chieftains and high government officials.
Mingling among them are a number of Hollywood movie stars, Broadway producers,
famous entertainers, musicians, authors, painters and poets. Great statesmen and – so
we’re told – gentlemen.
So what is this ultra-elite club with the bizarre Druid customs? They are the Bohemians,
formally known as the Bohemian Club. They practically own their own county north of San
Francisco, a 2,700-acre summer camp they call the Bohemian Grove. Since the 1890s, the
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 367
“Grovers” (as they are known to intimates) have gathered amongst these redwood trees
to “get away from it all,” have a little summer vacation fun, and avoid business dealings
altogether for two weeks. At least, that’s the official story.
Then, there are the other stories…some of them too strange to believe. Tales of world
leaders plotting the world’s destiny there in secret “war rooms,” hand-picking Presidents
and future leaders from the Bohemian Grove. Reports of occult rituals being conducted by
these same powerful men, clad only in hooded red, black and white robes, offering an
effigy of a human being to be sacrificed by fire to a towering 45-foot stone owl God, the
“Great Owl of Bohemia” in a ceremony called “The Cremation of Care.” Sometimes, they
discard the robes, don women’s clothing and parade around onstage in theatrical
productions or – if the spirit so moves them – they wear no clothes at all!
Things get even stranger still. Stories have come out of the Grove about wild homosexual
orgies, male and female prostitutes being engaged in what can only be described as
extreme sexual games, young children being exploited in unspeakable ways, up to and
including cold-blooded ritual murder. There are stories involving actual human sacrifice on
the “altar” of the owl God statue. Understandably, it’s all very hard to believe.
But is any of it true? Does the Bohemian Grove emulate the ancient mystery cults of
Babylon, Rome, and Greece? Do its members celebrate the old Gods such as Molech,
Ishtar, Lilith, Attis, Mithra, Apollo, Zoroaster, and others? Or is it a western secret society
like the freemasons and Yale’s exclusive Skull and Bones? Are they just having “good clean
fun” at the Grove? Or are they covertly plotting to take over the world? Why do our world
leaders meet here to share a fascination with the arts and all things Bohemian? Why the
obsession with the occult and ancient Babylon? This book proposes to answer many of the
most frequently asked questions about Bohemian Grove, investigate the rumors, fully
document what is known to be true, and hopefully destroy a few misconceptions.
Closed to the public, sealed off by helicopters, a private security force, and armed guards,
there can be no doubt that without the prying eyes of the public upon them, the power
elite may engage in whatever activities they wish at the Grove. Whether it’s crafting policy
matters in secret, dancing around in drag, cheating on their wives with prostitutes, taking
drugs, practicing black magic, or even committing murder, the pristine isolation of the
Bohemian Grove provides a convenient cover for any immoral, illegal, or “un-gentlemanly”
behavior one desires.
For most the club’s long history, the public could only speculate as to what these men
were doing in there. Books and news articles about the Bohemian Grove have been scarce;
59 is the 17th Prime Number and there are 17 Wajib Rakats in 5 Daily Prayers.
Number – 17 is the 7th Prime Number. And the main Satanic rituals are on 28th
July every year.
July is also the 7th Month of the Year. So ‘Satan’ is basically the enemy of
Allah and 7 Repeated Verses.
Most of the Sayings of Hazrat Ali indicate that lot of people from Europe and
USA would join Mahdi.
Even the name, “Bostan” is mentioned in the Sayings of Hazrat Ali that 3 to 30
people would come from “Bostan” to join Mahdi.
Now the place “Bostan” in USA is the famous place, “BOSTON” which is in
Massachusetts State.
This story is mentioned in Surah e Qasas, Para – 20 in the Holy Quran when
they said after seeing the Miracle of Hazrat Musa (AS) that we now believe in
Almighty God of Hazrat Musa and Hazrat Haroon (AS) and Pharoah kicked all
of them out of his palace saying them “Rafazee” of Hazrat Musa and Hazrat
Haroon.
Similarly the intellectuals of the Western World would join Mahdi after
seeing His Miracle in the field of Knowledge.
In US History, “Boston Tea Party” is the famous Historical event when the
Americans threw the Tea from the loaded British Ships into the Atlantic
Ocean.
The learned scholars from the Western World would be first ones to join the
forces of Mahdi when they would see the miracles of Imam in the field of
Knowledge.
The modern ‘Qaruns’ of our times are the Banks. They are controlled by few elite
families in the world and they control all the Governments of the world by
influencing them and funding their elections.
The last War or Armageaddon or Third World War would be the War of Qaruns i.e.
War of Bankers and the credit of destroying the world and its population would go
to them.
New World Order is the most popular term used in the modern World
politics. The World Elite has been working to bring this New World Order for
more than 150 years.
Satan has given them a false hope that the New World Order is for them but
the Satan knows since beginning that Mahdi would establish New World
Order for all the people living on this Earth.
So Mahdi would bring a New World Order by bringing Justice in all forms. He
would divide the Earth into 313 provinces and appoint 313 Governors as His
subordinates to serve the people.
There would be ONE Army, ONE Police, ONE World System for all the people
of the World.
So the New World Order or ONE World Order is the Order of Mahdi and not
the Satanic World Order as dreamed by the World Elite.
King Fahd bin Abdulaziz Al Saud was the King of Saudi Arabia from 1982 to
2005. He was born on 16th March, 1921 AD and died on 1st August, 2005 AD
“A ruler of Hijaz whose name would be the animal’s name would rule before
Abdullah becomes the King.”
So this prophecy of our Imam also came true when Fahd became the King of
Saudi Arabia in 1982 before Abdullah.
According
ccording to Imam Jaffar e Sadiq mentioned in Bahar Al Anwar:
“Theree would be few rulers of Najd and Hijaz after Abdullah and they rule
would be very short in months and days.”
“Before the Arrival of Mahdi, the mosques of Allah would be elegant and
beautiful with no spirit of Islam. The Quran would be recited like songs.”
Now if we see the architecture and the construction of the mosques in the
world, we would come across the same situation that mosques are elegant and
beautiful but there is no Islam in them.
If we just go through the major prophecies about the Arrival of Mahdi, we would
see that all the important prophecies have been completed.
Now we are in the count down stage. Some of the prophecies have to be fulfilled
before the Final Arrival of Mahdi in 2023 AD and they would be fulfilled in 2022 -
2023 AD i.e. 1444 - 1445 Hijri:
People claiming to be the Mahdi have appeared across the Muslim world – in South
Asia, Africa and the Middle East – and throughout history.
A claimant Mahdi can wield great temporal, as well as spiritual, power: claimant -
Mahdis have founded states (e.g. the late 19th-century Mahdiyah in Sudan), as well
as religions and sects (e.g. Bábism, or the Ahmadiyya movement). The continued
relevance of the Mahdi doctrine in the Muslim world was most recently emphasised
during the 1979 seizing of the Grand Mosque in Mecca, Saudi Arabia, by at least 200
militants led by Juhayman al-Otaibi, who had declared his brother-in-law,
Muhammad bin abd Allah al-Qahtani, the Mahdi.
1. Salih ibn Tarif, the second king of the Berghouata 8th Century AD
2. Abdullah ibn Muawiya 8th Century AD
3. Abdullah Al Mahdi Billah, the first caliph of Fatimid 10th Century AD
4. Ibn Tumart, the Morrocan 12th Century AD
5. Syed Muhammad Jaunpuri, India 15th Century AD
6. Ahmad ibn Ali Mahalli, Morroco 17th Century, AD
7. Mahamati Prannath, India 17th Century, AD
8. Diponegoro, Prince of Yogyakarta, Java 19th Century, AD
9. Ali Muhammad Shirazi, founder of Babism 19th Century, AD
10. Mirza Ghulam Ahmad, founder of Ahmadiyya 19th Century, AD
11. Muhammad Ahmad, Sudan 19th Century, AD
12. Muhammad bin Abd Allah Al Qahtani 20th Century, AD
13. Riaz Ahmed Gohar Shahi 20th Century, AD
14. Ariffin Mohammad 20th Century, AD
15. Dia Abdul Zahra Kadim, Iraq 21st Century, AD
So one can see how important is the “Concept of Mahdi” in Islam and its
importance was laid by our Prophet Muhammad (PBUH) in their teachings of Islam
throughout their lives. That is why so many people in Islam tried to claim as
“Mahdi” or some of the people were considered Mahdi by their followers even they
never claimed to be Mahdi.
The Ottoman Caliphate, under the Ottoman dynasty of the Ottoman Empire, was
the last Sunni Islamic caliphate of the late medieval and the early modern era.
During the period of Ottoman growth, Ottoman rulers claimed caliphal authority
since Murad I's conquest of Edirne in 1362. Later Selim I, through conquering and
unification of Muslim lands, became the defender of the Holy Cities
of Mecca and Medina which further strengthened the Ottoman claim to caliphate in
the Muslim world.
The demise of the Ottoman Caliphate took place because of a slow erosion of
power in relation to Western Europe, and because of the end of the Ottoman state
in consequence of the partitioning of the Ottoman Empire by the League of Nations
mandate.Abdülmecid II, the last Ottoman caliph, held his caliphal position for a
couple of years after the partitioning, but with Mustafa Kemal's secular reforms and
the subsequent exile of the royal Osmanoğlu family from the Republic of Turkey in
1924, the caliphal position was abolished.
The animals dying all over the world today in huge numbers, due to the polluted
state of the sea and air. Millions of Fish and massive numbers of whales and
dolphins are washing ashore dead. Birds are falling dead out of the sky, and millions
of poultry are dying from avian flu.
The animals of the land like cattle are also dying in large numbers from disease.
Although animals and fish have been dying all throughout history, we have not seen
the massive consistant numbers that we are seeing today. Please remember! This is
just one of the MANY signs of the last days.
In many of these events people from all walks of life are saying that they
have "never seen anything like this before".
Imam Jafar – e – Sadiq said: “There would be two deaths before the re –
appearance of Mahdi. The first death would be ‘Red death’ – the death by War and
destruction in which one third of the human population would die and the second
death would be ‘White death’ – the death by Drought and diseases spread after war
and one third of the human population would die. The remaining population of the
Earth would be left one third after the war and drought before the re –appearance
of Mahdi.” (Bihar ul Anwaar)
The educated people of the world are now aware that we are at the verge of Third
World War and more than 100 books have already been written and in the market
indicating the full break through of the WW – III by 2022 AD. One may see the list of
books on www.amazon.com on WW – III. The third world war would be in 2022 AD
and 1/3rd population of the Earth would die from this destructive war. From 2020 to
2023 – almost 3 years, the people of the Earth would face lack of rains and severe
drought and so 1/3rd population would die from drought, diseases, after effects of
war. Upon the re – appearance date of Mahdi i.e. 28th July, 2023, only 1/3rd
population would be alive by that time on our planet known as ‘Earth’ fulfilling the
prophecy of Imam Jafar – e – Sadiq.
There are lots of books available in the market on the popular subject, “The End
Times”.
End Times Eyewitness: Israel, Islam and the Unfolding Signs of the Messiah's Return
by Joel Richardson and Philip Anthony
The End Time by Neil Ostroff
End Time by John McDonald
The Time of the End by Tim Warner
At the Time of the End by John Carswell Hull
End Times: Apocalypse by Donald Grant
End Times: Are there Biblical signs that show us that Jesus will return? By Glenn Pease
End Times by Anna Schumacher
Ebola, Plagues and the End Times by Mark Hitchcock and Jeff Kinley
Living in the End Times by Slavoj Zizek
The End: A Complete overview of the Bible Prophecy and the End of Days by Mark
Hitchcock
The End Times: Are we seeing any of the signs yet? By Michael J. Oldham
The End Times in Chronological Order: A Complete Overview to Understanding Bible
Prophecy by Ron Rhodes
Are we living in the Time of the End? By United Church of God
End Times to 2019: The End of the Mayan Calendar and the Countdown to Judgment Day
by David Montaigne
At the End of Time: Prophecy and Revelation: A Spiritual Paradigm by Robin Robertson
World at the End of Time by Fredrik Pohl
The Apocalypse Code: Find Out What the Bible REALLY Says About the End Times... and Why
It Matters Today by Hank Hanegraaff
Signs of the End Times in Surat Al-Kahf
There are several people in this world belonging to different religions who are
working on the End Times.
Some of them also put their work, books, magazines, documentaries, videos, etc on
their websites. Some of the important websites are as follows:
www.endtimes2014.com
www.120jubilees.com
www.thepeoplesvoice.org
www.threeworldwars.com
www.signs-of-end-times.com
www.end-times-prophecy.org
www.discoveringislam.org
www.tomorrowsworld.org
www.trendsresearch.com
http://wakeupproject.com/arrivals.html
http://www.prophecyupdate.com/
http://www.spiritualresearchfoundation.org/spiritual-research/global-
issues/world-war-3-predictions-and-armageddon/
http://revelationrevolution.org/
www.endtimestruth.com
http://www.raptureforums.com/BibleProphecy/101lastdays.cfm
http://www.endtime.com/prophecy-news/
http://propheciesoftheendtimes.com/
http://daniel11truth.com
These are some of the websites on which you can find details about the End Times
prophecies to enlighten yourself.
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=rCMgwwDkFxE
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=t6WVZJ_CFHQ
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=xv9K8ifM5Xk
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=QkGQ3OONZIk
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=B0rTk9IAwwg
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=-1xgioLQ4zE
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Yl9ju4M57gg
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=nbVYPfwxChY
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=fR9Gvq7qXIc
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=zYT2J4qYI0w
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=YRLi3ivgG3s
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=5VsKQQc57IQ
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=L5fnm2YO8ZA
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=7CtdGm556gM
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=By7f0YYE9Ck
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=4ab37pal32w
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=cIxz01Eg2pU
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=JxzYmWZlKw4
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=0k3SD6TnlSA
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Dvv2HPYdhMA
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=dUPRa9AIJ1Q
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=yksVwYzfNug
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Yp5bX1kv8Zw
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=NMT0v2utuJA
During its long history, Jerusalem has been destroyed at least twice, besieged 23
times, attacked 52 times, and captured and recaptured 44 times. The oldest part of
the city was settled in the 4th millennium BCE. In 1538, walls were built around
Jerusalem under Suleiman the Magnificent. Today those walls define the Old City,
which has been traditionally divided into four quarters—known since the early 19th
century as the Armenian, Christian, Jewish, and Muslim Quarters. The Old City
According to the Biblical tradition, King David conquered the city from the Jebusites
and established it as the capital of the United Kingdom of Israel, and his son, King
Solomon, commissioned the building of the First Temple.
These foundational events, straddling the dawn of the 1st millennium BCE, assumed
central symbolic importance for the Jewish people. The sobriquet of holy city, was
probably attached to Jerusalem in post-exilic times. The holiness of Jerusalem in
Christianity, conserved in the Septuagint which Christians adopted as their own
authority, was reinforced by the New Testament account of Jesus's crucifixion
there. In Islam, Jerusalem is the third-holiest city, after Mecca and Medina. In
Islamic tradition in 610 CE it became the first Qibla, the focal point for Muslim
prayer, and Prophet Muhammad (PBUH) made his Night Journey there ten years
later, ascending to heaven where he speaks to God, according to the Holy Quran.
As a result, despite having an area of only 0.9 square kilometres (0.35 sq mi), the
Old City is home to many sites of seminal religious importance, among them the
Temple Mount and its Western Wall, the Church of the Holy Sepulchre, the Dome of
the Rock, the Garden Tomb and al-Aqsa Mosque.
Many Prophets are buried here like Hazrat Yaqub (AS), Hazrat Abrahim (AS), Hazrat
Daud (AS), Hazrat Lot (AS), Hazrat Yousaf (AS), etc
“The people would wish at the End times that they would be at Jerusalem.”
Jerusalem is basically the Heart of all Nations. That is why all the 3 Major
Abrahamic religions are contesting to get hold of this city.
The State of Israel was created in 1948 AD on the principles of Zionism. The
founding father of Zionism was Theodore Herzl. Since then, Israel kept on increasing
its land area by pushing the Palestines farther away from their mother land –
Palestine.
Israel has fought many wars with the Middle Eastern Countries mostly Muslim
countries and attacked Gaza and people in Palestine several times during this
period and destroyed their homes, mosques, buildings, etc.
The conflict between Israel and the Muslim world is a long conflict and now Israel
has become a New World Power and it has launched its dream of Greater Israel
since 2001 AD after the September 11 attacks in New York, USA.
Israel helped in the creation of ISIS and ISIL known as Daesh and it has captured
major parts in Syria and Iraq. Now the western countries are attacking ISIS to
contain them. Then in March, 2015 AD, Saudi Arabia with 10 other Middle Eastern
Countries attacked Yemen. So the whole Middle East is in a complete mess and in a
Big War since 1979 AD. This War would further escalate in 2021 AD when Saudi
Arabia with the backing of Israel would attack Iran and then 1/3rd population of the
world would die in that Great War in 2021 AD as mentioned in the prophecies of
the End Times.
The Prophecy of the return of Jews in Jerusalem as mentioned in the Holy Quran in
Surah e Bani Israel, Verse – 104 was fulfilled in 1948 AD.
Mahdi’s Kharooj would be on 14th April, 2023 AD on Friday i.e. 23rd Ramazan, 1444
Hijri
14th is the Day and May is the 5th Month. So we can write the day and month as:
14 – 5…………………145
The reverse of the number – 145 is 541. The Number – 541 is the 100 th Prime
Number in Mathematics.
That is why the Israel flag has 541 small circles on its Country’s flag.
The Number of years in between the creation of Israel and the Kharooj of Mahdi
are:
In Islam, they are known ass Ya'juj and Ma'juj (or Ajuj and Majuj). The Bible in
English refers to them as Gog and MaGog. The emergence of the mighty Ya'juj and
Ma'juj is also a major sign of Qiyamah (Day of Resurrection).
Thousands of years ago, the barbarous tribes of Yajuj and Ma'juj were imprisoned
behind an iron wall built by Zul
Zul-Qarnain.
n. Referred to in the Qur'an in Surah Al-Kahf,
Al
Zul-Qarnain
Qarnain was a pious and just king. He believed in Allah as the one and only god.
Once Zul-Qarnain carried out a expeditions in three directions, the far West, far
East, and then in a northerly direction. Travelling first in the westerly direction, Zul-
Qarnain conquered the lands he passed through establishing the laws of Allah
therein until he reached the setting of the sun. There, Zul-Qarnain met people that
didn't believe in Allah. Given a choice of punishing them for their Kufr (Disbelief) or
being lenient by inviting them first to Islam; he chose the latter and addressed
them, ''Those evil-doers who do injustice to themselves by rejecting Allah will be
punished by death in this World and in the hereafter, the fire of Hell is their abode.
As for those who accept the invitation and believe in Allah, they will be treated
leniently and in the hereafter Paradise is their place of rest.''
After the expedition towards the West, Zul-Qarnain made preparation for the
expedition towards the East. Conquering the lands he passed through, establishing
he laws of Allah therein. Zul-Qarnain continued travelling in an easterly direction
until he reached the rising of the sun. In this area of the East, he saw a nation
receiving the sunshine without any obstruction. He dealt with them in the same
manner he dealt with the people in the West.
After the expedition to the East, Zul-Qarnain started his northern expedition. He
kept on travelling until he reached the midst of two mountains; it was here that Zul-
Qarnain came across a tribe who complained to him about the tribes of Ya'juj and
Ma'juj. Ya'juj and Ma'juj inhabited the land behind the mountains, plundered them,
committed bloodshed, and then ran away. Observing Zul-Qarnain's power, they
asked to set a barrier in return for a tribute for their protection from the atrocities
Many different opinions have been expressed as to the location of the iron wall of
Zul-Qarnain, such as:
1) The Great Wall of China which was built by the Chinese King Fagfor about 3460
years after Prophet Adam was descended to the Earth.
2) The wall in Central Asia near Bukhara and Tirmiz in a place called Derbent.
3) The wall in Dagestan, Russia also known as Derbent near the Caspian Sea.
4) The wall which is in the westerly direction to the third in the region of the
Caucasus.
But in reality, all the above are myths and the actual wall is hidden from the eyes of
all humans. When Mahdi would come, He would destroy the “Yajoj and Majoj’
when they come out of this hidden Wall built by Zulqarnain.
In 2004 AD, Dr. Shahid Masood, who is a famous Television Anchor of Pakistan
made 4 excellent documentaries on the End Times – The Hidden Truth. These videos
are available on Internet. Then his book was published with the name, “The End
Times”.
The videos are available on internet about the documentaries of Dr. Shahid Masood
about the End Times and the Zahoor of Imam Mahdi (AS) on youtube.com.
1. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=pNcE4gmnJ2M
2. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=UFGoImIPvHg
3. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=32_zqBwSQgU
4. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=u7QJ0yvqkdg
Now in this year – 2015 AD, he is conducting other episodes about the End Times
with the name: “The Lost Chapters – The End Time”
Chapter – 2: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=L_f0BtIYIYY
Chapter – 3: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=p121HbbFIhM
Chapter – 4: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=UpYFXRf3ZuI
Chapter – 5: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=6RILtUB4c-s
Chapter – 6: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=pwLGklETaK4
Chapter – 7: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=JoEkkiIGihs
Chapter - 8: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=lhWqbXPIKg4
Chapter 9: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=QOSqe8P2-rg
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=XTrgZlBPZds&t=2s
His another Video - the Arrival of Messiah is very Near available on Youtube is:
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=jr95OgBrI-8
He also released his videos on the End Times in 2020 and the link to his videos
available on Youtube in 8 Episodes are:
Episode - 1: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=j8BELprKOuI&t=385s
Episode - 2 : https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=JoT-W4C3Qrc
Episode - 3: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=aguZ8-rUCT4&t=329s
Episode - 4: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=-uFS_vD79hE
Episode - 5: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=3dDO1QdgYHU
Episode - 6: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=q4Ujs8SAlCw
Episode - 7: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=vm4v4bfJQh8&t=370s
Episode - 8: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=FY72Moqbyr4
The current wars in the world clearly indicate that we are heading towards a major
Armageaddon by 2022 AD. This major War which would be known as Third World
War would be fought mostly in the Middle Eastern countries and the other regional
super powers would also be affected with the loss of life and property. Then there
are other wars such as Economic Wars going on in all the World where IMF and
World Bank have imposed Economic Sanctions and the people are protesting all
over the world against the austerity measures taken by their governments.
As we all know that the major current wars in the world are as follows:
So we see lots of major conflicts and mostly in the Middle Eastern countries
which are either backed by Russia or Israel or USA or NATO which are heading
towards a major Thermo Nuclear War in 2022 AD when 1/3rd population of
the world would die in that war as predicted by all major religions of the
world.
After that Armageaddon, 1/3rd more population of the World would die from
diseases and drought thus fulfilling the Prophecy of our Prophet Muhammad
(PBUH) that 2/3rd Population would die before the Arrival of Mahdi
Once Hazrat Ali said about the Wars in the End Times:
“The Sun rays would be used in the wars and when they would be used,
all the people in the buildings would melt from the heat of Sun rays.”
Now one can imagine the truth in the sayings of our Prophet (PBUH) and Hazrat Ali.
Almost 1400 years ago, Hazrat Ali mentioned about the Modern Warfare
equipment which would be used in the next Big War in the World known as
Armagedon or the Third World War.
In recent years, the scientists are developing ‘Weather Weapons’ to be used against
their enemies when and where required.
There are more than 10 deadly ‘Solar Weapons’ are already been developed by
USA, Russia, Europe, China and other developed nations and they would use these
deadly weapons in the coming war in 2021 AD.
For your information, the list of 10 Solar weapons are listed below, so that you can
imagine the power and intensity of these weapons in the quick destruction of
humanity.
Imagine that the diameter of a mirror of this type is not just 10 cm, but rather
several hundreds or even thousands of meters, as would be the case for a space
mirror. Then, even steel would have to melt and refractory materials would hardly
be able to withstand the heat over longer periods of time, if they were exposed to
solar radiation of such an enormous concentration.
Now, if we visualize that the observer in the space station using his powerful
telescope can see the entire combat area spread out before him like a giant plan
showing even the smallest details, including the staging areas and the enemy's
hinterland with all his access routes by land and sea, then we can envision what a
tremendous weapon a space mirror of this type, controlled by the observer in orbit,
would be!
It would be easy to detonate the enemy's munitions dumps, to ignite his war
material storage area, to melt cannons, tank turrets, iron bridges, the tracks of
important train stations, and similar metal objects. Moving trains, important war
factories, entire industrial areas and large cities could be set ablaze. Marching
troops or ones in camp would simply be charred when the beams of this
concentrated solar light were passed over them. And nothing would be able to
protect the enemy's ships from being destroyed or burned out, like bugs are
exterminated in their hiding place with a torch, regardless of how powerful the
ships may be, even if they sought refuge in the strongest sea fortifications. They
would really be death rays! And yet they are no different from this lifegiving
radiation that we welcome everyday from the sun; only a little "too much of a good
thing."
What is HAARP?
HAARP ---- HIGH FREQUENCY ACTIVE AURORAL RESEARCH PROGRAM
The most prominent instrument at the HAARP Station is the Ionospheric Research
Instrument (IRI), a high-power radio frequency transmitter facility operating in
the high frequency (HF) band. The IRI is used to temporarily excite a limited area of
the ionosphere. Other instruments, such as a VHF and a UHF radar,
a fluxgate magnetometer, a digisonde (an ionospheric sounding device), and an
induction magnetometer, are used to study the physical processes that occur in the
excited region.
For the last 60 years, the military scientists are working on “Weather Weapons”, so
that they can deploy and use them at their discretion with minimum cost and
prominence against their enemies.
So the creation of clouds, rains, hurricanes, thunder storms, igniting the active
earthquake belts to generate earthquakes, formation of tornadoes, etc are some of
the few ‘Weather weapons’ developed in the recent past.
A research paper produced for the United States Air Force written in 1996
speculates about the future use of nanotechnology to produce "artificial
weather", clouds of microscopic computer particle all communicating with each
other to form an intelligent fog that could be used for various purposes.
A micro air vehicle (MAV), or micro aerial vehicle, is a class of Miniature UAVs that
has a size restriction and may be autonomous. Modern craft can be as small as 15
centimetres. Development is driven by commercial, research, government, and
military purposes; with insect-sized aircraft reportedly expected in the future. The
small craft allows remote observation of hazardous environments inaccessible to
ground vehicles. MAVs have been built for hobby purposes, such as aerial robotics
contests and aerial photography.
The purpose of these craft is to understand insect flight and to provide practical
uses, such as flying through cracks in concrete to search for earthquake victims or
exploring radioactivity-contaminated buildings. Spy agencies and the military also
see potential for such small vehicles as spies and scouts.
In early 2008 the United States Company, Honeywell received FAA approval to
operate its MAV, designated as gMAV in the national airspace on an experimental
basis. The gMAV is the fourth MAV to receive such approval. The Honeywell gMAV
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 415
uses ducted thrust for lift, allowing it to takeoff and land vertically and to hover. It
is also capable of "high-speed" forward flight, according to the company, but no
performance figures have been released. The company also states that the machine
is light enough to be carried by a man. It was originally developed as part of
a DARPA program, and its initial application is expected to be with the police
department of Miami-Dade County, Florida.
In 2012, the British Army deployed the sixteen gram Black Hornet Nano Unmanned
Air Vehicle to Afghanistan to support infantry operations. In 2013 the first
commercial micro micro air vehicle have been launched on the consumer market.
The latest Hollywood movie, “The Antman” is featured on the same concept of
Micro Air Vehicles to be used as a weapon in the warfare against the enemies.
That is why in our Holy Quran, there are 2 Chapters on the name of insects, known
as “Surah e Namal” i.e. Ant and “Surah e Ankaboot” i.e. Spider.
Allah also mentioned about, ‘Mosquito’ in the Holy Quran, as an example of one of
His Creations.
The Biblical Age of Great Tribulation of 7 years before the Second Arrival of Jesus
Christ started on 2nd September, 2016 AD.
In 2021 AD, Saudi Arabia with the support of Israel and USA would attack Iran and
the full scale Third World War would begin in between the major Super powers i.e.
Russia, China and Iran Vs Saudi Arabia, Israel and USA.
&
Imam Jafar e Sadiq said: “Five (5) people out of Seven (7) would die
before the Arrival of Mahdi because of war, drought and diseases.”
Now if we analyze His statement that “FIVE (5) people would die out of SEVEN (7)”
before the Arrival of Mahdi. Why He has chosen these two numbers? Why not
other numbers?
If we see the current population of the world today, the UNO Statistics show that
the population of the world has reached the figure – 7.8 Billion People on 31 st
December, 2020.
Now the Number – Seven (7) is appearing in the current World Population Statistics.
So according to the Statement of Imam Jafar e Sadiq, FIVE (5) people would die out
of SEVEN (7) people in the world. It seems that FIVE BILLION people would die out
of SEVEN BILLION people before the Arrival of Mahdi.
Around 72 % of all People of the World would die from Destruction, Drought and
Diseases and only 28% would survive before the Arrival of Mahdi.
7.86 Billion People (Current Population of the World) – 5.41 Billion People (Who
would die)
= 2.45 Billion People (Remaining Population on the Arrival of Mahdi)
Choosing the two numbers – 5 and 7 are so amazing by the Imam and these
numbers are matching with the current Statistics of World Population.
Also the current population of the World in 2020 is 7.8 billion people. As per the
World Population statistics, the World Population would reach 8 Billion by
2024 AD.
So the Arrival of Mahdi would take place before 2024 AD as most of the predictions
and signs of the Arrival of Mahdi has already been fulfilled and only few major signs
has to come yet i.e. 3rd World War and World drought.
Also the Hidden Agenda of the World Elite is to reduce the population of the World
to 3 Billion by 2021. This is known as Agenda - 21. For more details, one can search
the details of the Agenda 21 on the internet.
What is Apocalypse?
In the Book of Revelation, the author writes about the revelation of Jesus Christ
as Messiah, and about present tribulations leading to the ending of this age and
the coming of God's Kingdom. Hence the term 'apocalypse' has come to be
used, very loosely, for the end of the world.
1. FEMA Camps
2. Nuclear Bunkers for the powerful
3. Concentration Camps
4. War Games in Middle East
5. Dollar and Economic Collapse
6. World War scenario preparation
7. Disposable Coffins
8. Secret Prisons
9. Formation of Allies and Enemies
10. Secret Hideouts, etc
According to the Bible, Solomon's Temple, also known as the First Temple, was
the Holy Temple in ancient Jerusalem, on the Temple Mount (also known as
Mount Zion), before its destruction by Nebuchadnezzar II after the Siege of
Jerusalem of 587 BCE. There is no archaeological evidence for the existence of
Solomon's Temple.
The Hebrew Bible states that the temple was constructed under Solomon, King of
the United Kingdom of Israel and Judah and that during the kingdom of Judah,
the temple was dedicated to Yahweh, and is said to have housed the Ark of the
Covenant. Josephus claims that "the temple was burnt four hundred and seventy
years, six months, and ten days after it was built," (Jew. Ant. 10.8.5), though
Rabbinic sources state that the First Temple stood for 410 years and, based on
the 2nd-century work Seder Olam Rabbah, place construction in 832 BCE and
destruction in 422 BCE, 165 years later than secular estimates.
Because of the religious sensitivities involved, and the politically volatile situation
in Jerusalem, only limited archaeological surveys of the Temple Mount have been
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 424
conducted. No excavations have been allowed on the Temple Mount during
modern times. An Ivory pomegranate mentions priests in the house of YHWH,
and an inscription recording the Temple's restoration under Jehoash have
appeared on the antiquities market.
The only source of information on the First Temple is the Hebrew Bible (or Old
Testament). According to the biblical sources, the temple was constructed under
King Solomon during the united monarchy of Israel and Judah. This puts the date
of its construction in the mid-10th century BCE. Some scholars have speculated
that a Jebusite sanctuary may have previously occupied the site. During the
kingdom of Judah, the temple was dedicated to Yahweh, the god of Israel, and is
said to have housed the Ark of the Covenant. Rabbinic sources state that the First
Temple stood for 410 years and, based on the 2nd-century work Seder Olam
Rabbah, place construction in 832 BCE and destruction in 422 BCE, 165 years later
than secular estimates.
The exact location of the Temple is unknown: it is believed to have been situated
upon the hill which forms the site of the 1st century Second Temple and present-
day Temple Mount, where the Dome of the Rock is situated. However, two other,
slightly different sites have been proposed on this same hill: one places the stone
altar at the location of the rock which is now beneath the gilded dome, with the
rest of the temple to the west. The other theory places the Holy of Holies atop
this rock.
The Temple also figures in the account of King Hezekiah, who turned Judah away
from idols; when later in the same century Hezekiah is confronted with a siege by
the Assyrian king Sennacherib (2 Kings 18:23, 19:1 and the Taylor prism),
Hezekiah "instead of plundering the temple treasuries... now uses the temple the
way it is designed to be—as a house of prayer" (2 Kings 19:1–14).
According to the Hebrew Bible, the Temple was plundered by the Babylonian king
Nebuchadnezzar when the Babylonians attacked Jerusalem during the brief reign
of Jehoiachin c. 598 (2 Kings 24:13), Josiah's grandson. A decade later,
The top 15 largest Banks in the World as per Total Assets in 2012 are:
They are:
Now we know the Arrival of Mahdi would be in the year – 2023 AD. The time period
from 1913 AD till 2023 AD would be 110 years
Only Mahdi can deliver Justice and Peace to the whole World.
There are 85 Individuals in the World who owns 50% of the World
Wealth. They are making half a million every hour.
There are 143 World Corporations that own 40% Wealth of the World.
1. Jin
2. Harris
3. Enemy
4. Iblees
5. Khabees
6. Shaitan
7. Devil
8. Evil
9. Satan
10. Serpent
11. Antichrist
12. Abaddon
13. Accuser
14. Adversary
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 431
15. Author of all sins
16. Awful monster
17. Beelzebub
18. Chief of the demons
19. Deceiver
20. Demon
21. Destroyer
22. Devourer
23. Dragon
24. Enemy
25. Enemy of Righteousness
26. Evil spirit
27. Fallen Angel
28. Father of all lies
29. Father of contention
30. Founder of murder
31. Great Antichrist
32. Liar from the Beginning
33. Mutakabir
34. Hasid
35. Lucifer
36. Mammon
37. Murderer from the beginning
38. Old Serpent
39. Perdition
40. Prince of Darkness
41. Enemy of Vilayat
42. Enemy of Ali
43. Prince of Devils
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 432
44. Prince of the Power of the Air
45. Illuminati
46. Prince of this world
47. Wicked One
48. Son of the Morning
49. Spoiler
50. Tempter
51. Enemy of Adam
52. Dajjal…………………………………..And the list can go on……….
“The Dajjal would rule the world first for one year from one place, then for one
month from another place and then lastly for one week from another place and
then Mahdi would re – appear.”
There is a famous Video series known by the name – ‘The Arrivals’ prepared by a
UK – Muslim and there are 51 episodes of that Series. The link of Episode 26 is
available here:
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=bRQ6My0Rpr8
He described in that video that British ruled the world for almost 1000 years from
919 AD till 1919 AD – end of First World War. So we take 1000 years rule of British
equivalent to 1 year as per the Hadith of Prophet Muhammad. If 1000 years is
equivalent to 1 year, then one month would be 1000 years divided by 12 and it
would be 83 years. The USA ruled the world from 1919 to 2002 AD for 83 years till
the event 9 – 11 happened in USA in 2001 AD. Then 1 week would be 1000 years
divided by 12 months and then further divided by 4 i.e. 21 years. The world knows
that the actual policy and decision making power of the world was shifted from
USA to Israel in 2002 AD, with the New World Order and New Doctrine introduced
by the then US president – George W. Bush and Israel now would rule the world
from 2002 to 2023 AD until the Arrival of Mahdi on 28th July, 2023 (Friday – 10th
Muharram, 1445 Hijri).
British ruled the World from 919 AD till 1919 AD when USA took the power as
World Power after the World War – 1.
The Secret Society – The Illuminati was established in 1776 AD – The same year in
which the USA came into the map of the world. Since 1776 AD, The Illuminati is
ruling the world through Secret Societies in USA, Europe and Asia.
We would just show some pictures, photos and images of the Illuminati and
Masons for your view.
The origin of the Skull and Bones Society, once known as The Brotherhood of Death,
in the U.S. begins at Yale in 1832 AD, when a group of men established an
organization for the purpose of drug smuggling. The society's alumni organization,
which owns its properties and oversees all the organization's activity, is known as
the Russell Trust Association (R.T.A.), and is named after one of Bones' founding
members.
It still exists today only at Yale University and has evolved into more an
organization dedicated to the success of it's members after leaving the collegiate
world. The shape of that success can only be left to speculation. The Skull & Bones
Society has been described as the most secretive organization in the world.
So in the Secret Number – 322 of the Society, the first two Number -32 is taken
from the Year of its Establishment in 18 32 AD.
Now what is the Significance of last Number – 2 in the Secret Number – 322.
Number – 2 represents – “THE ORDER of File and Claw” ----- The Order
of the World
322
32—02
3202
Now if we reverse the Number – 3202, we would get the Secret of this Number and
the Number would be:
3202………………………..2023
So the Secret Society knows the Secret of the Arrival of Mahdi and that’s why it has
kept the secret as a reverse Number in the Logo of its Society.
322………………………………………..2023
"Those on the inside know it as The Order. Others have known it for more than 150
years as Chapter 322 of a German secret society. More formally, for legal purposes,
The Order was incorporated as The Russell Trust in 1856. It was also once known as
the "Brotherhood of Death". Those who make light of it, or want to make fun of it,
call it 'Skull & Bones', or just plain 'Bones'.
The American chapter of this German order was founded in 1832 at Yale University
by General William Huntington Russell and Alphonso Taft who, in 1876, became
Secretary of War in the Grant Administration. Alphonso Taft was the father of
William Howard Taft, the only man to be both President and Chief Justice of the
United States.
The rest were silent. An interesting point is whether the many members in various
Administrations or who hold government positions have declared their members in
the biographical data supplied for FBI 'background checks'.
Above all, The Order is powerful, unbelievably powerful. If the reader will persist
and examine the evidence to be presented - which is overwhelming - there is no
doubt his view of the world will suddenly come sharply into focus, with almost
frightening clarity.”
Now the Number of years from 1832 to 2023 AD would be 191 Years
The United States one-dollar bill ($1) is a denomination of United States currency.
The first U.S. President (1789–97), George Washington, painted by Gilbert Stuart, is
currently featured on the obverse, while the Great Seal of the United States is
featured on the reverse (back). The one-dollar bill has the oldest design of all U.S.
currency currently being produced.
In 1923 AD, both the one-dollar United States Note and Silver Certificate were
redesigned. Both notes featured the same reverse and an almost identical obverse
with the same border design and portrait of George Washington. The only
difference between the two notes was the color of ink used for the numeral 1
crossed by the word DOLLAR, treasury seal, and serial numbers along with the
wording of the obligations. These dollar bills were the first and only large-size notes
with a standardized design for different types of notes of the same denomination;
this same concept would later be used on small-size notes.
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 446
Since 1923 AD till todate, all the efforts have been made to keep the US dollar as
the major reserve currency of the world so that USA can rule the world. The US
dollar is printed by Federal Reserve, USA --- A Big Private Bank who prints the US
notes for US government and gives these notes as a loan to US government and
takes interest on the loans and that is why it asks US government to impose taxes
on US citizens to repay its loan with the interest.
“Is it a coincidence?
In recent history, from the Vietnam War to the present, the month of March has
been chosen by Pentagon and NATO military planners as the “best month” to go to
war.
With the exception of the War on Afghanistan (October 2001), all major US-NATO
led military operations over a period of almost half a century –since the invasion of
Vietnam by US ground forces on March 8, 1965– have been initiated in the month of
March.
The Ides of March (Idus Martiae) is a day in the Roman calendar which broadly
corresponds to March 15. The Ides of March is also known as the date on which
Julius Caesar was assassinated in 44 BC.
Lest we forget, the month of March (in the Roman Calendar) is dedicated to Mars
(Martius), the Roman God of War.
For the Romans, the month of March (Martius) marked “the time to start new
military campaigns.”
Does the month of March –identified by the Romans as a “good time” to initiate
new military undertakings–, have a bearing on contemporary military doctrine?
Do Pentagon military planners favor the month of March? Do they also –in some
mysterious fashion– “idolize” Mars, the Roman God of War?
March 23 (which coincides with the beginning of Spring) was the day “Romans
celebrated the start of the military campaign and war fighting season.”
“Homage was paid to Mars the god of war with festivals and feasting. … For the
Romans March 23 was a huge celebration known as Tubilustrium”.
Under these festivities which celebrated the Roman god of war, a large part of the
month of March “was dedicated to military celebration and preparedness.”
Timeline of March Military Interventions (1965- 2011)
Recent history confirms that with the exception of Afghanistan (October 2001), all
major US-NATO led military operations over a period of almost half a century –since
the invasion of Vietnam by US ground forces on March 8, 1965– have been initiated
in the month of March.
On 8 March 1965, 3,500 U.S. Marines were dispatched to South Vietnam marking
the beginning of “America’s ground war”.
The 1991 Gulf War on Iraq began on 17th January. However, after the 28th February
ceasefire was agreed and signed – following the Basra Road massacre of
withdrawing soldiers and fleeing civilians on 26th/27th February – the US 24th
Mechanised Infantry Division slaughtered thousands on 2nd March.“
The US and its NATO allies, not to mention Israel, are on a war footing.
Several military operations are currently on the drawing board of Pentagon.”
Saudi Arabia started attacking Yemen on 25th March, 2015 AD. Thousands of people
have died in Yemen so far due to the brutal attack of Saudi Arabia on its
neighbouring country.
Expected War of Saudi Arabia and Iran in 2021 AD…….Final Chapter in Third World
War
It is expected that Saudi Arabia would start a full scale war with Iran in 2021 AD
and the USA, Israel and the western countries would back those attacks and hence
the world would enter into the Third World scenario with the involvement of all
major powers of the world including Russia and China as both countries would favor
and back Iran in that war.
21st March is also the beginning of Astrology stars. Aries is the 1 st Month in
Astrology.
The Kharooj of Dajjal would be secretly before His worshippers with its NEW
WORLD ORDER on 20th March, 2020 AD i.e. 24th Rajab, 1441 Hijri on Friday with the
announcement of its 3 major goals and objectives as:
The ‘ONE WORLD ORDER’ would be announced publically in 2022 AD and headed by
the Last Pope i.e. Pope Francis from Vatican, Rome in which there would be a
concept of ONE Currency, ONE Government, ONE Religion for all the people of the
World as the only solution after the Third World War.
The secular and aethist people of the World would accept the invitation and other
people would reject this concept and pray for “Messiah” for their salvation from the
cruelty of the World Governments.
According to the Hindus Mythology, the “Kali Yuga” would end in 2025 AD.
Kali Yuga (Devanāgarī: किलयुग [kəli juɡə], lit. "age of [the demon] Kali", or "age of
vice") is the last of the four stages the world goes through as part of the cycle of
yugas described in the Sanskrit scriptures, within the present Mahayuga. The other
ages are called Satya Yuga, Treta Yuga, and Dvapara Yuga.
Kali Yuga is associated with the apocalyptic demon Kali (who is not to be confused
with the goddess Kālī. The "Kali" of Kali Yuga means "strife", "discord", "quarrel" or
"contention".
Now we know the Abjad of Imam’s name, “Mahdi” is 59. The Surah e Hashar is also
the 59th Surah of the Holy Quran.
The punishment of Adam would finish by 2025 AD and the Divine Kingdom of
Almighty God would start in 2025 AD by our Mahdi.
Believers and Biblical scholars spend their time interpreting and reinterpreting the
scriptures to convince themselves they either (a) get the blessings promised to
Israel or (b) will be raptured right before the tribulation.
1. The year of the 2nd Coming could not be verified until the latter half of the
twentieth century.
An error made in the seventh century BC concerns an event that ranks as one of the
most important in the history Jews, Christians and Muslims:
James Hastings, M.A., D.D. in the seventh century published a dictionary of the
Bible that analyzes the different interpretations of Daniel 11:31. He concludes the
verse refers to “The setting up by Antiochus Epiphanies of a small idol/altar on the
altar of the Holy Temple in Jerusalem in 167 BC” and the Maccabean revolution.
But when ye shall see the abomination of desolation, spoken of by Daniel the
prophet, standing where it ought not, (let him that readeth understand). Mark
13:14
The two verses refer to a conversation between Jesus, Peter, James and Andrew on
the Mount of Olives. Before he mentions the abomination Jesus says the following
to his disciples admiring the grandeur of the temple.
Seest thou these great buildings? There shall not be left one stone upon another,
that shall not be thrown down Mark 13:2
Here Jesus is prophesying an event that is to take place within the lifetime of the
disciples. August 29th in 70 A.D. (the exact same day the Babylonians burned down
Solomon’s temple 657 years earlier) the Roman army razed Herod’s Temple to the
ground.
As Jesus places the event of the abomination after the destruction of the temple in
70 A.D. and uses the words “when ye shall see” (Mark 13:14), he places the event in
the future.
It is impossible the abomination spoken of by Jesus could have taken place prior to
70 AD and therefore any exegesis that identifies the abomination, as 167 B.C. is the
“error” made over 1400 years ago.
Jesus predicts the location of the abomination will be somewhere that is not only a
“holy place”, but also a place that under normal circumstances would be forbidden.
Within the Jewish faith the biblical term “holy place” can only mean The Holy
Temple in Jerusalem. After its destruction in 70 A.D. leaving only the Western or
Wailing Wall, the Holy Temple was never rebuilt. The ground where the Temple
stood, the Temple Mount, and the Wailing Wall is to the Jews “the most holy place”
in Jerusalem.
The Mosque of Omar, The Dome of the Rock is the correct identification of the
abomination of desolation.
These two verses appear to be talking about the same time scale and the same
event. But only if we assume an average month is thirty days - then forty-two
months = 1260 days. An “average month” does not account for the extra day for a
leap year. Using the reckonings from the Julian calendar and the extra day, the
period of forty-two months is 1279 not 1260 days.
We also know verse 1 refers to the area outside the temple as being in the hands of
the Gentiles (non Jews) as well as the holy city of Jerusalem for 1279 years (“each
day for a year”.); and in verse 2 the two witnesses of God the Jewish people, the
Houses of Judah and Israel, will prophesy or preach for a similar 1260 years “clothed
in sackcloth”. Sackcloth is symbolic of regret, repentance and mourning.
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 461
What these two verses are saying is that the Jewish people will lose their place of
worship including the city of Jerusalem; it will be given over to non Jewish people
until the first few hours of the six-day war in 1967 (688 A.D. + 1279) when for the
first time since the capture of Jerusalem and destruction of the temple by Titus in
70 A.D. the Jewish people not only had their own state May 14th 1948 (688 A.D. +
1260) they once again controlled “the most holy place” in Jerusalem.
The prophet Daniel, the book of revelation and Paracelsus in the Twenty Ninth
figure of his prognostications confirms 2023.
How blessed shall be the hour, and the poverty, that will come and shall ordain
each one to its meadow, not far from the year XXXXIII.
The fact that Paracelsus tells us this is a year is the clue to the correct interpretation
of the figure.
Could Jesus Christ be coming back to earth in XX (20) XX (20) III (3) XXXXIII or 2023?
NOTE: Research for this article came from an out of print book by Ian Gurney,
the Cassandra Prophesy published in 1999.
Robert Singer:
Robert Singer is a retired information technology professional and an
environmental activist living in southern California. In 1995 he and his cousin Adam
D. Singer founded IPC The Hospitalist Company, Inc., where he served as chief
technology officer. Today the company manages more than 130 practice groups,
providing care in some 300 medical facilities in 18 states. Prior to that he was
president of Useful Software, a developer and publisher of business and consumer
software for the personal computing Industry. Robert also posts to OpEdnews.com.
Robert can be reached at: letters@canadafreepress.com
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 462
128. Prediction about the conflict among Saudi Princes
after the death of King Abdullah by Hazrat Ali
After the announcement of the death of King Abdullah of Saudi Arabia on 23 rd
January, 2015 AD, King Salman became the King and he removed most the princes
appointed by King Abdullah and replaced them with his sons or close relatives.
He also removed the longest serving Foreign Minister of Saudi Arabia, Prince Al –
Faisal on 19th April, 2015 AD. Three sons of Late King Abdullah escaped to Egypt to
save their lives from the wrath of the present King Salman and some daughters and
wives of Late King Abdullah is also in the custody and remained captives in their
palaces.
Recently there was a firing incident in the meeting of the Saudi Princes and the Ex-
Foreign Minister of Saudi Arabia, Prince Al- Faisal along with 2 other Saudi Princes
were shot dead and 7 more princes were injured in that incident.
Prince Al - Faisal served as the Foreign Minister of Saudi Arabia for more than 40
years and known as the longest serving Foreign Minister of any country.
It has been said that 15 more rulers would come after the death of King Abdullah
but their tenure of rule would be months and days and not years as described by
our 6th Imam Jaffar e Sadiq (AS).
So from the death of King Abdullah on the 23rd January, 2015 AD till the Arrival of
Mahdi on 28th July, 2023 AD, there would be 15 more rulers of the Kingdom of Saudi
Arabia.
The President of USA - Mr. Obama announced on 26th June, 2015 (Friday) in White
House that Gays and Lesbian marriages are legal throughout the USA.
If we write the day and month as One number i.e. 26(Day) and 6 (Month) as:
266 = 19 x 14
The Average pregnancy days are 266 Days.
Satan does not want children of Adam and Eve so he is promoting the unnatural
and immoral way of relationships between the humans which is condemned in all
the major religions of the world especially Christianity, Judaism, Islam, Bhuddism
and Hinduism.
Now we have been seeing this trend since early 1970’s that the Governments of the
World are encouraging the Birth Control in their countries and putting incentives for
fewer children in the families especially in China and India.
The Western countries including USA and Europe are also motivating their people
and discouraging them to have more children. In the last 50 years in USA, the
people in United States have killed their own 5 million children by abortion and
other birth control techniques and millions more births were not conceived because
of the fear and greed in the World.
Japan has a One Kit family structure and other countries like Indonesia, Bangladesh,
etc are also encouraging their citizens to go for the Birth Control.
The population of the world is about 7.3 Billion people but the growth in the
population is deterioriating year by year.
So the military and the secret intelligence services of various countries have the
data and knowledge that the Arrival and the Arrival of “Mahdi” is from the Middle
Eastern countries and they are looking to find any clue of his location or place in
case if he is hiding somewhere.
So their intellectuals agree that the Arrival of Mahdi is very NEAR and it is from
Yemen or Syria or Saudi Arabia or Iraq.
That is why they launched Wars in these countries since 1990 AD and the Wars in
the Middle East have increased and spread all across the region.
His Kharooj would take place on 23rd Ramazan, Friday which would be on 14th April,
2023 AD.
"When you see the Chinese people with round noses landed in Syria for
fighting, the Arrival of Mahdi is very near."
Now on 30th September, Russia started its military operation against ISIS in
Syria and its military planes have landed on Syrian soil.
In October, 2015, the Chinese military advisors have come to Syria to help
Russian Military forces.
The Military experts all across the world have gave their judgement that World
War - 3 has already started in Syria in September, 2013. Now the war is just
esclating and would convert into full scale Nuclear World War in 2018 AD.
The World would see the Chinese Military operation in Syria against ISIS.
So the Elite of the World already knows where the World Politics is heading
and where would we end up if it goes in the same direction.
The World is watching the Wars in Middle Eastern Countries like Syria, Iraq,
Yemen, Israel, Lebanon, Turkey, etc. The political tensions are high in North
Korea and South Korea, India and Pakistan, India and China, Ukraine and
Russia, China and Japan, NATO and Russia, NATO and China, etc
All these wars in the Middle East, Unrest in Africa, Refugee Crisis in Europe,
Economic instablity in the World, EAST and WEST tensions, North Korea and
South Korea tension, political instablity in Thailand and Burma, proxy wars
between Saudi Arabia and Iran, proxy war in Pakistan and India, ISIS war in
Syria and Iraq, Taliban issue in Afghanistan would finally reach its climax in
October 2021 AD and in 2022 AD, the world would see the dangers of Nuclear
Conflict.
2/3rd Population of the World would die in this Big Nuclear War by the end of
2022 AD and by Drought and Diseases after the War as predicted in Bible and
as prophecised by many Prophets including our Last Prophet (PBUH) and
Masoomeen of Allah.
The Chinese Military advisors also started arriving in Syria to help Russian
Military. Once the air bombing mission would accomplish their primary goals,
the Iranian Army is expected to go for Land operations by putting their ground
troops in Syria and Iraq.
Israel has given a serious warning by saying that it would not tolerate Iranian
military at its borders i.e. Syrian border. Mean while Saudi Arabia also warned
that it would attack Syria to remove the Syrian President - Bashar Al Asad.
Now Europe is also supporting the Russian air attacks on ISIS by saying that
USA should not dictate their policies in Europe. There is a lot of refugees influx
in Europe in the last few months and the European Governments are very
tense over this new development.
So now the World Powers are seriously clashing with each other. Only a critical
event in the Middle East would engage the World Powers into a Major War,
which would be World War - 3 reaching its climax in 2022 AD.
This Big War in the World has been predicted in Bible and by our Masoomeen
in many sayings. 1/3rd population of the world would die in this World War.
Now in the incoming movie of the Hollywood, "The Fifth Wave", it is clearly
mentioned that the world is entering the Fifth (5th) Wave after the attack of Alliens
on Earth where all humanity have faced destruction and death.
Most of the European countries are experiencing severe economic crisis even
before the flood of the refugees. Now adding fuel to the fire, the refugee crisis
is becoming more burden on their fragile economies and most would go in
deep financial, economic and social crisis.
To avoid the riots and the economic crisis, the World powers would prefer to
go for more wars in the region by 2017 and in 2018 AD, the world would see
the Big War in the whole region in 2022 AD destroying countries and the
people in those regions.
It is mentioned in many sayings of our Masoomeen (AS) that the Divorce rates
would increase all over the world before the Arrival of Mahdi.
Now we can see from the statistics of Divorce rates in most countries of the
world and it is quite evident from the facts that the Divorce rates have risen to
extreme limits.
The
e Children affected by the Divorces in the United States are increasing every
year and the following is the statistics of the Children affected from the
Divorces in USA.
The social fabric of the society all over the world is so much affected by the
Satanic
nic Social Environment that the family life is affected in all ways. That is
why the Divorce rates have risen all over the world.
All the doctors and the psychologists agree that the divorce has worst
impact on the couple and their children if they have any irrespective
when they take divorce. We are not discussing the reasons of divorces
but whatever the cause of the divorce, the fact is that the ratio of
divorces has increased and increasing every year.
The God's Prophetic Clock about Jesus Christ is prophecised in the Bible and
the God's Prophetic Clock about Mahdi was prophecised by our Prophet
Muhammad (PBUH) and Hazrat Ali.
As per Bible, the Last 7 years before the Second Coming of the Jesus Christ, the
humanity would pass through difficult and tough times as mentioned in the
Bible.
1/3rd Bible comprised of Prophecies made by the Almighty God. The Last 360
weeks before the Second Coming of the Jesus Christ would be severe on all the
humanity and 2/3rd population of the world would die before His Second
Coming as described in the Bible and explained by the Bible Scholars.
The Verse - 155 of the Surah - 2 of the Holy Quran clearly mentions that the
Humanity would pass through 5 difficult phases before the Final Arrival of
Mahdi as explained by Imam Jaffar e Sadiq.
Now the whole humanity is entering into the most difficult phase of the End
Times before the Arrival of Mahdi and the Second Coming of the Jesus Christ
(AS) i.e. 2016 AD when the Last and the Final 7 year period of Tribulation and
Severity of Death, Destruction and Drought would start.
The Economists and Financial Experts are predicting the Global Economic Collapse
by the Start of 2021 AD. They are continuously writing books and articles in both
main stream media and alternate media and websites.
The World is experiencing the Fall in the Value of their currencies with respect to
USA Dollar. The Gold prices are also down. The Oil Prices have touched below $40
per barrel. They are not the good indicators in the Finance and Economy of the
World.
http://positivemoney.org/2015/08/next-global-financial-crisis-upon-us/
"Financial markets are currently in a frenzy – and a global market crash could be
just minutes away. Earlier last week, China allowed its currency to fall in value,
prompting its highest one-day decline in over two decades. Today, data shows that
China’s factories have contracted at their fastest pace since the most recent
financial crisis. Market panic is quickly gaining pace as China’s economy shows
clear signs of further deterioration.
The US stock market has experienced its largest decline in 18 months, European
shares have experienced their biggest weekly fall this year, and the FTSE fell to its
lowest point this year. John Ficenec of the Telegraph believes things are only going
to get worse, and he gives us 8 convincing reasons why.
1. China Slowdown
When the financial crisis struck in 2008, it was central banks that essentially
stepped in and provided the finance to keep the world’s major economies afloat.
Indeed, a significant stimulus package was put together for China.
(Here at Positive Money we have previously noted that China has progressively
lowered its benchmark interest rates since 2011 and has lowered reserve ratios a
number of times in the past years. Accordingly, Chinese private sector debt has
quadrupled in the last 7 years, and we noted that soaring Chinese debt levels are
one of three of the biggest threats to global financial stability.)
“China was the great saviour of the world economy in 2008. The
launching of an unprecedented stimulus package sparked an
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 483
infrastructure investment boom. The voracious demand for commodities
to fuel its construction boom dragged along oil
oil- and resource-rich
resource
emerging markets.”
“Economic
onomic growth has dipped below 7pc for the first time in a quarter of a
century, according to official data. That probably means the real economy
is far weaker… Data for exports showed an 8.9pc slump in July from the
same period a year before. Analysts exp
expected
ected exports to fall only 0.3pc,
so this was a huge miss. The Chinese housing market is also in a perilous
state. House prices have fallen sharply after decades of steady growth. For
the millions who stored their wealth in property, it makes for unsettling
unsettlin
times.”
According to Ficenec, there are three primary knock-on effects that this will have
for the West. 1) The profits that many Western companies have been dependent on
for the last 6-7 years will no longer be available. 2) The prices of the shares of
these companies are presently over-valued based on their current earnings. 3)
Thus, as the profits of these companies decline, their share price will decline even
more abruptly.
“The central banks are rapidly losing control. The Chinese stock market
has already crashed and disaster was only averted by the government
buying billions of shares. Stock markets in Greece are in turmoil as the
economy grinds to a halt and the country flirts with ejection from the
eurozone.
Earlier this year, investors flocked to the safe-haven currency of the Swiss
franc but as a €1.1 trillion quantitative easing programme devalued the
euro, the Swiss central bank was forced to abandon its four-year peg to
the euro.”
“As central banks run out of silver bullets then, credit markets are
desperately seeking to reprice risk. The London Interbank Offered Rate
(Libor), a guide to how worried UK banks are about lending to each other,
has been steadily rising during the past 12 months.”
The author makes a good point that this is actually quite a natural process and may
in fact be a ‘ healthy return to normal pricin
pricing’ after a number of years of
unprecedented monetary stimulus by a various central banks. But more
importantly, Ficenec points out that:
“Interest rates have been held at emergency lows in the UK and US for
around six years. The US is expected to move first, with rates starting to
rise from today’s 0pc-0.25pc around the end of the year. Investors have
already starting buying dollars in anticipation of a strengthening US
currency. UK rate rises are expected to follow shortly after”.
This will be particularly problematic for many emerging economies which have in
recent years taken out massive loans in U.S. dollars and U.K. sterling. As the dollar
and pound begin to strengthen in value (appreciate), many of the emerging
economies who depend on a devalued currency in order export more, will struggle
to pay back their loans – as paying back those loans will require a lot more of their
respective domestic currencies than originally intended.
“The UK stock market is in its 77th month of a bull market, which began
in March 2009. On only two other occasions in history has the market
risen for longer. One is in the lead-up to the Great Crash in 1929 and the
other before the bursting of the dotcom bubble in the early 2000s… UK
markets have been a beneficiary of the huge balance-sheet expansion in
the US. US monetary base, a measure of notes and coins in circulation
plus reserves held at the central bank, has more than quadrupled from
around $800m to more than $4 trillion since 2008. The stock market has
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 489
been a direct beneficiary of this money and will struggle now that QE3 has
ended.”
8. Overvalued US Market
Low interest rates and Quantitative Easing programmes have most likely had the
same effect on the US stock Market. Ficenic thus suggests:
“In the US, Professor Robert Shiller’s cyclically adjusted price earnings
ratio – or Shiller CAPE – for the S&P 500 stands at 27.2, some 64pc above
its historic average of 16.6. On only three occasions since 1882 has it
been higher – in 1929, 2000 and 2007.”
If I risk it all
Could you break my fall?
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 491
How do I live? How do I breathe?
When you're not here I'm suffocating
I want to feel love, run through my blood
Tell me is this where I give it all up?
For you I have to risk it all
Cause the writing's on the wall
If I risk it all
Could you break my fall?
The whole message in the song, "The Writings on the Wall" of the film, "Spectre" is
the Appeal of the Elite of the World to the Satan to Save them after the Skyfall,
which was the previous movie of the James Bond, "Skyfall".
In the previous movie, "Skyfall", the Satan announced that the Skyfall is near and
the humans have to count to 10.
The Pharoah's of Egypt who are basically running since the Moses time and have
established their Kingdoms in France, Britain and USA in different forms are actually
the followers of Satan and they are the main political players in the World for the
last many centuries.
They are playing in the hands of Satan and have waged wars, depressions,
recessions, revolutions for the last centuries.
They are seeing the Return of Jesus Christ and Mahdi and now they are worried
about that storm. So they are appealing to Satan to save them after the Skyfall and
in the Storm.
He has given many lectures on the End Times and the Arrival of Jesus Christ.
Some of his Videos on the End Times which are available on the Youtube are listed
below:
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=d8JQqXf-Jv8
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=dANVf61K8Ak
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=z68IhbI3Q3c
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=2n1G9l9wUbc
http://www.pakalertpress.com/shayk-hamza-yusuf-2015-earth-shattering-
truth-unveiled-regarding-world-war-3/
The ISIS
The Hour is coming
Dajjal
The Return of Jesus
The Hajj
Condition of Saudi Arabia - Mecca and Medina
Buildings in Mecca
Economic conditions in the World
https://www.wfp.org/hunger/stats
"Every year, authors, journalists, teachers, researchers, schoolchildren and students ask us
for statistics about hunger and malnutrition. To help answer these questions, we've
compiled a list of useful facts and figures on world hunger.
Some 795 million people in the world do not have enough food to lead a healthy
active life. That's about one in nine people on earth.
The vast majority of the world's hungry people live in developing countries, where
12.9 percent of the population is undernourished.
Asia is the continent with the most hungry people - two thirds of the total. The
percentage in southern Asia has fallen in recent years but in western Asia it has
increased slightly.
Poor nutrition causes nearly half (45%) of deaths in children under five - 3.1 million
children each year.
One in four of the world's children are stunted. In developing countries the
proportion can rise to one in three.
66 million primary school-age children attend classes hungry across the developing
world, with 23 million in Africa alone.
WFP calculates that US$3.2 billion is needed per year to reach all 66 million hungry
school-age children.
The Global Terrorism Index and figures are presented to have a bird's eye view that
this is the most important issue in the lives of all humans in the World.
https://www.rt.com/news/206475-terrorism-increase-report-deaths/
The Global Terrorism Index, produced by the London-based Institute for Economics
and Peace, also found that 80 percent of terrorist attack fatalities occurred in only
five countries; Afghanistan, Iraq, Nigeria, Pakistan and Syria.
Worryingly, the 63 percent increase from 11,133 terrorist deaths in 2012 to 17,958
in 2013 is the biggest year-on-year escalation since records began in 2000. Since the
turn of the millennium, the number of deaths due to terrorist activates has
increased fivefold, which also coincided with US military campaigns in Afghanistan
and Iraq.
There has also been a sharp increase in the number of terrorist attacks, with almost
10,000 occurring in 2013. However, the report also showed that around 50 percent
of terrorist attacks did not claim any lives.
Since 2000, the Taliban has been responsible for the most deaths, 8763, from terror
attacks, closely followed by Al-Qaeda with 8585. The Islamic State (IS, formerly
known as ISIS/ISIL) and Boko Haram both became more active in 2009, which was
the first year that either group killed over 300 people. Based on data up to the end
of 2013, these two groups have killed in excess of 3,000 people in four years, half of
which was in 2013 alone.
However, things could get even worse next year, as the publication does not include
the mass killings carried out by the militant IS, which have been taking place in Iraq
and Syria since the summer.
"There is no doubt it is a growing problem. The causes are complex but the four
groups responsible for most of the deaths all have their roots in fundamentalist
Islam," said the Institute for Economics and Peace founder Steve Killelea.
"They are particularly angry about the spread of Western education. That makes
any attempt at the kind of social mobilizing you need to stop them particularly
difficult - it can just antagonize them more," he said.
“The majority of terrorist groups ended by joining the political process, or were
destroyed by policing and intelligence agencies breaking up the group and either
arresting or killing key members. Military force in of itself was rarely responsible for
ending terrorist groups,” the report, published in the General Terrorism Index (GTI),
stated.
However, terrorist groups are now targeting police and security forces with even
greater frequency, thus making it much harder to try and manage the problem,
according to Killelea. He added that this can lead to rights abuses against the
civilian population, which can sometimes inflame an already-volatile situation even
further.
Terrorist incidents have increased significantly in Iraq during 2013 with the number
of deaths rising by 162 percent from 2012. Bombings are the tactics almost
exclusively used by terrorist groups, with this method accounting for 87 percent of
deaths and 97 percent of injuries. Suicide attacks also continue to be used, with a
very high cost to human life - an average of over seven deaths per suicide attack.
Since the civil war in Syria started in 2011, there has been a massive increase in
terror activity. From 1998 to 2010 there were a combined total of just 27 deaths.
However, since the start of unrest to try and topple President Bashar Assad, that
number has already jumped to well over a thousand by the end of 2013.
Since 2000, suicide attacks have accounted for 5 percent of deaths in terror
activities, while the tactic is most favored by militant group Hamas. The Palestinian
Both Syria and Iraq have witnessed religious struggles between Sunni and Shia
Muslims, which has led to an increase in terrorist activity.
“Religion as a driving ideology for terrorism has dramatically increased since 2000.
Prior to 2000 nationalist separatist agendas were the biggest drivers of terrorist
organizations,” the report adds.
The report also showed that the number of countries which experienced deaths as a
result of terrorist attacks had reached a new high of 24 in 2013, up from the
previous record of 19 nations in 2008.
Over the past 14 years, five percent of all terrorist deaths have taken place in
Organization for Economic Co-operation and Development (OECD) countries. The
data excludes the September 11 terrorist attacks, but shows that Turkey and Israel
have experienced the highest number of deaths.
Although not as frequent as in the Middle East and Africa, OECD countries have
experienced some of the heaviest-casualty terrorist attacks, such as the London
bombings in July 2005 and the Madrid train bombings in March 2004.
Although terrorist attacks are constantly in the news, figures show that 40 times
more people are murdered around the globe every year, in comparison to those
losing their lives as a consequence of terrorist activities."
"Our society is run by insane people for insane objectives. I think we’re being run by
maniacs for manical ends and I think I’m liable to be put away as insane for
expressing that. That’s what’s insane about it.”
John Lennon
Will the Brotherhood actually play the fake alien invasion card? No one knows for
sure what the future will bring, but based on their history, the elites doubtless hope
to continue their process of “Order out of Chaos,” to further centralize and globalize
their control.
This term Order out of Chaos, in Latin Ordo ab Chao, is the slogan of the
33rd degree of Freemasonry.
“Secret Societies have a great motto ‘Ordo Ab Chao’ meaning ‘Order Out of Chaos’.
Agendas are formulated designed to give the powerful more power. Chaos is
created, and media blitzed. Then cries go out for solution. Laws are passed which
could never have been passed without the chaos. The order, has reigned through
deception of the masses, and the agenda is accomplished.”
“The Latin inscription on the banner around the Judaic eagle's head (below the Star
of David) E Pluribus Unum ("From the Many – the One") In other words, first they
combined all the ancient stellar cults, now they’re going to combine the world’s
governments, militaries, currencies, banks.”
The New World Order can and will be defeated through a world wide awakening.
Once the world’s population understands the information presented in this book,
secret society rule will by necessity be phased out.
We must shun secret societies and shame on their members. Shun the world’s
“royalty,” their knights and vassals, shame on their spineless lapdogs. It is
high time for free humanity to make a stand. Support smaller government. Don’t
buy their pharmaceuticals, don’t drink their fluoridated water, and don’t take their
vaccines.
Don’t eat their junk, genetically modified, nutrient starved food. Buy from local
businesses and not from huge corporations and department stores. Don’t watch
their “programs” or tune into their “channels.” Don’t buy into their “news,” their
magazines, or expert opinions. Don’t be scared of their bogeymen, fall for their
patsies, or accept their problem-reaction-solutions.
Refuse RFID chips and the big brother surveillance society. As they phase from fiat
currency to their cashless credit based system, we phase into precious metals and
old-fashioned trade with locals. The key to overcoming the conspiratorial,
oppressive world system is by focusing on and improving your own local systems.
We’ve given our responsibility away and it’s time to reclaim it.
“One of the penalties for refusing to participate in politics is that you end up being
governed by your inferiors.”
--- Plato
There is another very good article from the courtsey of the website:
http://www.alt-market.com/articles/2277-order-out-of-chaos-the-doctrine-that-
runs-the-world
“From the days of Spartacus-Weishaupt to those of Karl Marx, and down to Trotsky
(Russia), Bela Kun (Hungary), Rosa Luxembourg (Germany), and Emma Goldman
(United States), this world-wide conspiracy for the overthrow of civilization and for
the reconstitution of society on the basis of arrested development, of envious
malevolence, and impossible equality, has been steadily growing. It played, as a
modern writer, Mrs. Webster, has so ably shown, a definitely recognizable part in
the tragedy of the French Revolution. It has been the mainspring of every subversive
movement during the Nineteenth Century; and now at last this band of
extraordinary personalities from the underworld of the great cities of Europe and
America have gripped the Russian people by the hair of their heads and have
become practically the undisputed masters of that enormous empire.”
The concept of conspiracy frightens some people, so much so that they are willing
to overlook any and all evidence that world events are for the most part directed,
rather than chaotic and coincidental. For those who are uneducated and unaware,
explanations for the terrible tides of politics and war generally revolve around a
false understanding of Occam’s razor. They argue that the theory states that the
“simplest explanation” is usually the correct one for any particular problem or
crisis. But Occam’s razor actually states that the simplest explanation according to
the evidence at hand is usually the correct answer for any given problem. That is to
say, the simplest explanation must conform to the evidence, or it is likely not
correct.
The most common argument they tend to exploit is that the world is far too
“chaotic” and that if the elites are actually seeking a fully centralized one-world
system, they are “failing miserably” because so many cultures are so clearly divided.
For anyone who holds this argument as logical or practical, first I would suggest
they look beyond the surface of the various conflicts at the similarities between
these so called “enemies.”
For example, what about the United States versus Russia? These two nations have a
long history of opposing ideologies and have come close to war time and time
again. Certainly, average Americans see themselves as individualists and Russians as
socialist or communist. Average Russians see Americans as capitalist imperialists
and see themselves as humanists. But what about their respective governments?
What about their respective financiers and oligarchs? Do they really see each other
as enemies?
If that were so, then why did American Wall Street tycoons and the U.S. military aid
the Bolshevik Revolution in 1917?
Even today, the false East/West paradigm continues, with America painted as the
bumbling villain and Russia painted as the stalwart and reasonable objector. Yet
Even closer to current events, the U.S. has now entered into military operations
against ISIS insurgents moving rapidly through Iraq’s northern regions toward
Baghdad. However, if ISIS is the enemy, why did the U.S. and our ally, Saudi Arabia,
support and train ISIS agents in Syria as well as Iraq?
Is it just irony that our government helped birth ISIS and now the White House is at
war with the group? Or is it possible that maybe, just maybe, a greater plan is
afoot?
As the sinister Rahm Emanuel famously said: “You never want a serious crisis to go
to waste. And what I mean by that is an opportunity to do things you think you
could not do before.”
If a crisis of opportunity does not present itself in the time frame you need, why not
ENGINEER a crisis to fit your goals? This is a tactic that has been used by elites for
generations, and it is called the Hegelian dialectic.
Georg Wilhelm Friedrich Hegel’s work was the very foundation of the
collectivist/socialist ideology, and it inspired Karl Marx during his writing of The
Communist Manifesto. Hegel was an avid statist who believed that the collective
must be ruled and directed by centralized governance and that all individualism
should be sacrificed for the greater good.
Hegel wrote that the state “has supreme right against the individual, whose
supreme duty is to be a member of the State… for the right of the world spirit is
above all special privileges.”
In his dialectic theory, Hegel conjured a strategy by which the establishment elites
could control the masses through deliberately created division. To define the
Hegelian dialectic method simply, the ruling body must first trigger a problem or
crisis that causes the citizenry to react with fear and demand a solution. The rulers
then offer a solution, which they had already predetermined before they had
started the crisis; this solution would usually entail more power for the elites and
less freedom for the citizens.
If you don’t understand the concept of “order out of chaos,” then you’ll never
understand a thing.
Engineered chaos serves several purposes. It provides distraction and cover for the
elites to implement other plans that they would rather not have noticed.
It also provides a scapegoat for the masses, who are now divided against each
other. When violent changes are implemented that produce destructive
consequences, the people must be placated with an easily identifiable villain.
Certain changes globalists wish to make in the way the world functions require the
careful exploitation of scapegoats.
For example, the globalists at the IMF have been discussing the establishment of a
global basket currency for years to replace the U.S. dollar.
Russia and the East have also, conveniently, been calling for the IMF to replace the
dollar with their Special Drawing Rights basket.
And finally, as well as conveniently, the elites in the U.S. government have launched
a controlled coup in Ukraine and initiated direct economic confrontation with
Russia, thereby giving the East the perfect excuse to dump the U.S. dollar as world
reserve and replace it with a basket currency system under the IMF. Despite claims
that Vladimir Putin is “anti-globalist,” the Russian is in fact an avid supporter of the
IMF, and has stated his goal is to continue Russia’s IMF membership in a larger
capacity:
"In the BRICS case we see a whole set of coinciding strategic interests. First of all,
this is the common intention to reform the international monetary and financial
system. In the present form it is unjust to the BRICS countries and to new economies
in general. We should take a more active part in the IMF and the World Bank’s
decision-making system. The international monetary system itself depends a lot on
the US dollar, or, to be precise, on the monetary and financial policy of the US
authorities. The BRICS countries want to change this."
Hopefully, you have the sense to see how this works: problem, reaction, solution.
Economic or physical war is launched between East and West, while the dollar is
killed in the process. The masses react by demanding a fair and balanced
replacement for the dollar as world reserve so that economic stability can return.
The Americans blame Russia and the East for their fiscal misfortune. The East
blames the hubris of the West for its own downfall. Neither side blames the
banksters, who started the whole calamity to begin with. And the elites swoop in as
saviors with a new Bretton Woods-style agreement to appease all sides and cement
their global currency system, the system they had always wanted. And with a global
economic currency and authority in place, global governance is not far behind —
order out of chaos.
This process is more psychological than political in its goals. One could argue that if
the elites already have control of all central banks and governments, then why do
they need a global government? The answer is that these men do not want secret
global governance, they wantopen global governance. They want us to ACCEPT the
idea as a fact of existence, for only when we agree to participate in the lie will they
then have truly won.
The end result of World War I was the creation of the League of Nations and the
argument that sovereignty leads to disunion and catastrophe. World War II led to
the creation of the United Nations and the International Monetary Fund. I believe
that a third world war is nearly upon us, one that may involve weapons of
monetary destruction more so than weapons of mass destruction. Each supposed
disintegration of global unity has eventually led to greater centralization, and this is
something the skeptics seem to forget. The progression of crises suggests that the
next war will lead to total globalization under the dominance of a minority of
elitists posing as "wise men" who only wish to bring peace and harmony to the
masses. In the meantime, the skeptics will continue to mindlessly debate in the face
of all reason that the whole thing was a fluke, an act of random mathematical
chance, leading coincidentally to the one thing the establishment rulers crave: total
global totalitarian micromanagement."
https://warningilluminati.wordpress.com/there-are-13-top-bloodlines/
"Thirteen families or bloodlines are at the top, and five of these families are the
inside core of these thirteen. Prior to Be Wise As Serpents, the existence of thirteen
top families was not known by very many people. The existence of the 13 families
had come out in Berry Smith’s book Final Notice in the 1980s, but the names were
still unknown. Berry Smith of Australia wrote in his book Final Notice p. 9, “There
are 13 families or groups heading up the World Government plan. These families
are portrayed as the 13 layers of blocks found on the strange seal on the reverse
side of the U.S. $1 bill.” In a little read article, one SRA victim recently wrote that
Satanism was controlled by a few families. Recently, one of the Du Ponts was on a
television show because the DuPonts were trying to kidnap him because they didn’t
like his support for the book Dope. Inc. I was able to get a copy of the book, and
was overjoyed to find such an excellent book. My sources have been telling me that
the top Illuminati families were behind the drug trade. Yes, Satan’s top followers
are also the kingpins in destroying humanity for profit through drug trafficking.
The following families (besides others) or individuals from these families are
mentioned in Dope Inc. as involved in some aspect of the drug trade: the Astors,
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 519
Bundys, DuPonts, Freemans, Kennedy’s, Li’s, Rockefellers, Rothschilds, and Russells.
It is no coincidence that nine of the Top 13 families would get there names in a
book which revealed the big names behind the world’s illegal narcotics trade. It
should be mentioned that some other prominent Illuminati families also play key
roles in the drug trade such as the Bronfmans, Cabots, Shaws, Bacons, Perkins,
Morgan, Forbes, Cisneros and Oppenheimers. Where have we seen such names
before? There are names in Dope Inc. that people would do well to know the
danger of such as Louis Mortimer Bloomfield, Robert Vesco, Francois Genoud of
Switzerland, Ivan Slavkov of Bulgaria, the Duke of Kent – Master of the Grand
Mother Lodge of the Scottish Rite, and Jardine Matheson to mention a few. All our
favorite secret fraternal groups appear in Dope, Inc. too. For instance, the Triads, P2
Masonry, regular Freemasonry, the CIA, the Order of St. John, and the Jesuits.
The Universal Christian Gnostic Church’s which practices black magic has a whole
chapter showing its connection to the drug trade. Britain’s assassination bureau
Permindex which has been mentioned previously in this newsletter also gets a
chapter in the book. In the Be Wise As Serpents book, I examine in detail only the
Rothschilds and the Russells. I did not present much to back up my statements
about the 13 families. Further, One of the unthinkable items that most people do
not want to consider is that their leaders who they have idolized may be utterly
corrupt. There was nothing to do but sit down and give the nitty-gritty details if the
threat from the Illuminati was to be properly understood. The facts would speak for
themselves. The ideal solution for both writer and reader was for me to write up my
research and for you to read it as a series of articles. There is only so much a person
can assimilate at once, and these articles give lots of details. In January of this year I
began a series of articles on the top 13 families – families which the top experts said
nobody knew about. I did this with the hope of stimulating others to notice these
families, and to alert a wider sector of the Body of Christ. The young colleague
David J. Smith, who wrote part of the Jan. 1 article on the Illuminati, was led to
carry out further research in addition to what the Jan. 1 article had. Most of this
article’s information on the Astors then is a result of David’s research."
http://humansarefree.com/2014/10/exposing-shadow-forces-behind-nwo.html
The shadow forces behind the New World Order (NWO) are following a slow-paced
agenda of total control over mankind and our planet's resources. David Icke coined
it the "Totalitarian Tip-Toe," because "they" are making very small steps towards
our complete and definitive enslavement.
As a result, the masses remain relatively unaware of the fact that their liberties are
being gradually taken away, while the power of the NWO octopus grows steadily.
Somewhere near the very top of the pyramid, an extremely elitist organisation
known as the Council of the 13 families orchestrates all of the major world events.
As the name suggests, the Council consists of the top 13 most influential families on
Earth.
In their opinion, they are entitled to rule over the rest of us because they are the
direct descendants of the ancient gods and consider themselves royal. These
families are:
(Personally, I suspect that this may not be the complete list and some very powerful
lineages are still unknown to us).
They exercise their power through the world banking empire, which is almost
entirely owned by them.
The most important institutions that work hard to establish the NWO and
completely enslave our species, are:
1. The City of London (finance, controlled by the Rothschilds) - NOT part of the
UK
3. The Vatican City (indoctrination, deception and scare tactics) - NOT part of
Italy
All of the above institutions function as individual states, operating under their own
laws, hence there is no court of law on Earth that could ever prosecute them.
Even though they have been handsomely rewarded for their work, the members of
these secret societies are not members of the "elite" bloodlines, they don't know
who their masters are and they have no idea what the real agenda is.
The brainwashing
Another mass-enslavement tool that they are using against us, is the so
called educational system. Schools are no longer what they used to be and children
are learning to memorize without thinkingand obey without questioning.
"Why obsolete?" you may ask. Because the internet gives us free access to almost
infinite amounts of information.
So why are we still paying huge amounts of money for governmental education?
Because the world's "elite" require that our children learn conformity and inside-
the-box thinking.
Mankind's faith is hanging in the balance right now, as the control of the NWO
octopus spreads. On the one hand, we are very close to our complete enslavement,
while on the other hand, we could easily crumble to the ground their pyramid of
power, by simply uniting against their deception in apeaceful revolution of minds,
hearts and souls.
In my opinion, all of the above combined had a huge impact on our society and the
way we think, buttheir biggest weapon is hands-down the financial system!
Currency slaves
The financial system has stealthily enslaved our species and now we are being used
as currency slaves. We work from 9 to 5 every day, in boring and depressing
environments, not stimulated by anything creative or constructive.
In most cases, the sole motivation for going to work, is the next paycheck — and no
matter how hard we work, we never seem to have enough money.
This has been carefully designed, because a person that is constantly "on the edge,"
will never have time for self-education, introspection and — eventually — spiritual
awakening.
Isn't this our main purpose on Earth? To become spiritual beings (and by spiritual, I
obviously don't mean religious) and complete the incarnation cycle?
"They" don't need educated people, who are capable of critical thinking and have
spiritual goals. No, this kind of people are dangerous to the establishment!
"They" want obedient "robots," just intelligent enough to operate the machines
and keep the system running, but stupid enough never to ask questions.
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 525
Money is the eye of the "devil"
All of the world's biggest problems have their roots deeply embedded in the
financial plague: wars are profitable, diseases are profitable, Earth's plundering is
profitable, human slavery and inhumane working conditions are profitable.
Our leaders have been corrupted by money and mankind's collective mission on
Earth has been hijacked by money. So why do we need the financial system, in the
first place? Actually, we don't need it (at least, not anymore). The planet doesn't
charge us a cent for using its natural resources and we have the technology to
extract them without physically working a day.
The solution
More to the point, there are brilliant minds "out there" discussing the concept of
a resource based economy for decades. One example is mister Jacque Fresco, a
brilliant industrial designer and social engineer, who spent most of his life designing
the future.
The cities proposed by Mr. Jacque Fresco will be built by autonomous construction
robots and will be eco-friendly & self-sustainable, earthquake & fire proof. Learn
more here.
Other people are already discussing the transition plan towards the economy of the
future, where money are no longer required and all individuals will be offered the
best conditions to reach their highest potentials — all for the benefit of our species,
as a whole.
So, my question is: are we ready to embrace the future and escape the control of
the "elite" in a world without money, or are we going to allow the New World
Order to happen?"
All the World Leaders including UN declared World War 3 in different occassions
and in thier different speeches.
An association of countries was held includes: The U.S, Russia, Germany, France,
Iran and Iraq. All member had agreement together to destroy ISIS after they
attacked France and Lebanon.
Similarly, the president of Security Councils of the UN announced that ISIS will be
attacked in next hours and will not stop until Supreme Commander of ISIS, Abu
Bakr al-Baghdadi, surrenders.
The President of the U.S Barack Obama spoke at that this force ( ISIS) is “ the face of
evils”. He said that he felt pressured by criticism that he didn’t act enough to beat
them, specially after the attack at Paris recently.
“We have a President over there worried about Climate Change instead of worrying
about Nuclear Weapons coming into the middle of our cities. We are being run by
stupid people,” the Presidential Candidate from Republican Party, Mr. Trump said
in an exclusive interview with host Stephen K. Bannon on Sirius XM’s Breitbart
News Daily.
World War 3 may have already begun in a piecemeal fashion according to Pope
Francis, and now Ron Paul is warning that the U.S. Congress essentially declared
war on Vladimir Putin with the recently passed Resolution 758, which calls for
President Barack Obama to significantly escalate the actions of the United States in
regards to the Ukraine war by providing lethal aid.
Resolution 758 also mentions the conditions of war and U.S. obligations under
Article 5 of the North Atlantic Treaty, which states that an “armed attack against
one or more” of the treaty signatories “shall be considered an attack against them
all.” According to the NATO website, “Article 5 has been invoked once – in response
to the 9/11 terrorist attacks in the United States.” But back in September, Putin
allegedly threatened Europe by saying, “If I wanted, in two days I could have
Russian troops not only in Kiev, but also in Riga, Vilnius, Tallinn, Warsaw, and
Bucharest.”
Ron Paul responded to the passing of Resolution 758 by claiming that a “reckless”
U.S. House essentially declared war on Russia. Paul derides the legislation as “war
propaganda that should have made even neocons blush,” and scolds the House for
Pope Francis said that the spate of conflicts around the globe today were
effectively a “piecemeal” Third World War, condemning the arms trade and
“plotters of terrorism” sowing death and destruction.
“Humanity needs to weep and this is the time to weep,” Francis said in the homily
of a Mass during a visit to Italy’s largest war memorial, a large, Fascist-era
monument where more than 100,000 soldiers who died in World War One are
buried.
“War is madness,” he said in his homily before the massive, sloping granite
memorial, made of 22 steps on the side of hill with three crosses at the top.
“Even today, after the second failure of another world war, perhaps one can speak
of a third war, one fought piecemeal, with crimes, massacres, destruction,” he said.
In the past few months, Francis has made repeated appeals for an end to conflicts in
Ukraine, Iraq, Syria, Gaza and parts of Africa.
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 529
“War is irrational; its only plan is to bring destruction: it seeks to grow by
destroying,” he said. “Greed, intolerance, the lust for power. These motives
underlie the decision to go to war and they are too often justified by an ideology
…,” he said.
Last month the pope, who has often condemned the concept of war in God’s name,
said it would be legitimate for the international community to use force to stop
“unjust aggression” by Islamic State militants who have killed or displaced
thousands of people in Iraq and Syria, many of them Christians.
As NATO expands eastward fulfilling the organizations plans for the encirclement of
Russia, a number of high-profile opposition voices have pointed out the obvious –
that this alone is an overt act of war. Former Congressman Dennis Kucinich warns
about the House’s reckless adoption of the HR 758:
Russian President Vladimir Putin has ordered Russian military forces to prepare for
World War III, after warning Minister of Defense Sergey Shoygu to prepare for Syria
to become the central battleground between NATO-Western allied countries and
Russia.
And to the effect of President Putin’s order to his top military commanders to turn
Syria into “Obama’s graveyard”, this report continues, was the immediate
deployment to this war zone of advanced Russian fighter aircraft, the movement of
Federation Aerospace Forces aircraft and ground troops to al-Shayrat air base, near
the central city of Homs, and, most crucially, the deployment throughout Syria
ofelectromagnetic weapons designed to turn this war zone into a virtual “electronic
ghost world”.
The Pareto principle (also known as the 80–20 rule, the law of the vital
few, and the principle of factor sparsity states that, for many events, roughly 80%
of the effects come from 20% of the causes.
Now there are almost 195 Countries in the World and they are members of the
United Nations.
The existence of G20 means --- Great 20 Countries or Nations who are deciding the
fate of the rest 80% countries or nations of the World.
The appearance of Dajjal in its full glory and power before the Arrival of Mahdi is a
definite sign of the Arrival of Mahdi.
The Book, "The ISIS Apocalypse" by William McCants of Brookings Institute was
recently published in September, 2015 in USA.
William McCants directs the project on U.S. Relations with the Islamic World at the
Brookings Institution. He is adjunct faculty at Johns Hopkins University and a former
U.S. State Department senior adviser for countering violent extremism. McCants
has a Ph.D. in Near Eastern Studies from Princeton University and lives in the
Washington, D.C. area.
If you focus on the Word ---DoomsDay Vision, the author acknowledges that the
Appearance of ISIS as Suffiani is the DoomsDay Vision of the Muslims before the
Arrival of Mahdi.
There are so many books available in the market on the subject of "ISIS" and the
Middle East politics and the prophecies made for them by our Prophet Muhammad
(PBUH) and Hazrat Ali.
The Western Authors are continuously writing books on End Times, Biblical
Prophecies and on the Infamous topic of ISIS as Suffiani.
The Kharooj of Suffiani is also the definite sign of the Arrival of Mahdi. The political
events and the war of ISIS in the region of Middle East is proving the fact that we
are on the verge of the Arrival of Mahdi
The Hollywood movie, "The Purge Anarchy" shows that the Last Purge would
happen in 2023 AD.
They know from their Scriptures, Prophecies and Signs that the Year - 2023 AD
would bring the Second Coming of Jesus Christ and the War of Anti Christ against
the Christ.
We are just adding the Arrival of Mahdi in the year 2023 AD along with the Second
Coming of Jesus Christ and the Final Battle of Right and Wrong or Imam Mahdi's
forces against the Evil forces of Suffiani and Dajjal before the Final Establishment of
the Divine Kingdom in 2025 - 2026 AD.
The latest Hollywood Movie of X - Men, "The Days of the Future Past" clearly shows
the Destruction of Humanity and the Extinction of Humans by 2023 AD.
They shows to avoid the Destruction in 2023 AD, the heros of the movie sent their
chosen one 50 years ago to change the course of history so that the humans should
not go to the point of Destruction and Extinction.
The normalcy bias is a mental state people enter when facing a disaster. It causes
people to underestimate both the possibility of a disaster and its possible effects.
The 6 deadliest airport attacks in the 21st Century at the International Airports are
as follows:
Istanbul Ataturk Airport is the largest airport in Turkey, and the third busiest in
Europe after London’s Heathrow and Paris’s Charles de Gaulle. Its total passenger
traffic was some 61 million people in 2015.
The explosions occurred in the airport’s international arrivals terminal. The attacks
on the airport involved three suicide bombers. An investigation has revealed that all
three opened fire before detonating their explosive devices. The victims included at
least 10 foreign nationals and three people with dual citizenship, authorities said.
The departure hall of the airport was the target of Islamic State-linked terrorists,
when Brussels was hit by twin suicide bombings at Zaventem Airport and the
Maelbeek metro station.
The hall was rocked by two explosions carried out by suicide bombers, later
identified as Ibrahim El Bakraoui and Najim Laachraoui. In 2015, passenger traffic at
the airport was 23 million people.
Domodedovo was the 12th busiest airport with 30 million passengers a year, 2015
statistics show.
The attack took place when a Taliban group disguised as security guards stormed
the airport in Karachi, Pakistan’s largest city.
The militants launched grenades and opened fire as they entered Jinnah
International Airport. At least three blasts were heard and an airport emergency
declared, leading to flight operations being suspended.
Taliban militants wearing army uniforms armed with AK-47s, rocket launchers and
some wearing suicide vests took control of a school near the airport buildings. The
gunmen then proceeded to target apartment buildings of government employees
and the joint Afghan-NATO military base at the airport.
The Taliban claimed responsibility for the Kandahar attack, boasting on its website
that “a number of martyrdom seekers armed with heavy and light weapons entered
Kandahar airbase undetected and have begun engaging the large number of
foreign invaders and their hirelings inside.”
Twin suicide bombings rocked the airport which hosted the African Union Mission
in Somalia (AMISOM) in the capital of Mogadishu. The attackers managed to get
into the airport by using two stolen UN cars. They targeted a meeting between the
AMISOM servicemen and the Transitional Federal Government."
https://www.rt.com/news/348922-deadly-airport-attacks-world/
Then there are several other terrorist attacks on other airports which includes:
American Airlines Flight 63 The "shoe bomb", a failed al-Qaeda PETN bombing
attempt in December 2001.
China Northern Flight 6136, a 2002 flight brought down by a passenger who
had purchased life insurance, who set a fire in flight with gasoline.
Northwest Airlines Flight 253, the target of a failed al-Qaeda PETN bombing
attempt in December 2009.
Cargo planes bomb plot, failed al-Qaeeda PETN bombing attempt on two
planes in October 2010.
Metrojet Flight 9268, a Russian charter flight from Egypt carrying 224 people
was bombed by ISIL over the Sinai Peninsula on 31 October 2015, killing all on
board.
Of those aboard, mostly tourists, there were 219 Russians, four Ukrainians,
and one Belarusian. The possibility that a bomb was put on the aircraft at
Sharm el-Sheikh led several countries to suspend flights to that airport. With
its death toll of 224 people, Flight 9268 is the deadliest air disaster both in the
history of Russian aviation and within Egyptian territory. It is also the
deadliest air disaster involving an aircraft from the Airbus A320 family, and
the deadliest air disaster of 2015.
Shortly after the crash, the Islamic State of Iraq and the Levant (ISIL)'s Sinai
Branch, previously known as Ansar Bait al-Maqdis, claimed responsibility for
the incident, which occurred in the vicinity of the Sinai insurgency. ISIL
claimed responsibility on Twitter, on video, and in a statement by Abu Osama
al-Masri, the leader of the group's Sinai branch. ISIL posted pictures of what it
said was the bomb in Dabiq, its online magazine.
Now one can see the increase in the terrorism attacks on airlines and airports to
disrupt the travelling of the passengers all over the world.
The travelling in the World is becoming unsafe day by day. As we are near the
Arrival of Mahdi, the travelling would become more dangerous with more terrorist
attacks on airports and airlines.
Hazrat Naemat Shah Wali made remarkable prophecies almost 850 years ago and
all Shia and Sunni agree on the truth of his prophecies which he made in his poetry.
He also made prophecy about the Arrival of Mahdi in his poetry. Some of the pages
we have taken as a courtesy from the above book for you to view his work.
Now this is a scientific phenomenon i.e. the Sun would rise from West instead of
East. How is it possible? Let us see what the scientists are saying about the coming
phenomenon.
As you probably remember from high school, the Earth is a giant bar magnet — a magnetic dipole
with the north pole in the north, and the south pole in the south. If you imagine that there’sreally a
massive bar magnet in the middle of the Earth, it’s tilted by about 10 degrees from the planet’s axis,
which is why the magnetic north pole — currently in the upper northern tracts of Canada — is a few
hundred miles away from geographic/true north.
For now, magnetic north is close enough to true north that it doesn’t really matter (unless you’re
trying to navigate using a compass in arctic or antarctic regions, in which case you’re in trouble). But
the Earth’s magnetic field is shifting. New satellite data from the ESA shows that the Earth’s
magnetic field is weakening 10 times faster than we previously thought — an indicator that scientists
believe is a precursor to a geomagnetic reversal. At the time, there was nothing to worry about —
previous geological records suggested that a geomagnetic reversal occurs over thousands of years.
Now, however, a new study has analyzed rocks from the previous flip — the Matuyama-Brunhes
786,000 years ago — and found that the process completed in
magnetic reversal of
under 100 years. [doi: 10.1093/gji/ggu287]
Due to reasons we don’t fully understand, something causes the movement of the molten core to
change — and thus the north and south poles switch. The most likely reason for the reversal
is simply the general interaction and chaos of the massive dynamic forces at play — but there are
some other hypothesized triggers, such as massive impacts, or significant plate tectonic shifts. The
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 555
fact that there’s no evidence that a reversal occurred after the Cretaceous-Paleogene extinction
event — the asteroid that wiped out the dinosaurs — suggests that impact events probably
aren’t the cause, though.
In any case, these geomagnetic reversals occur irregularly, averaging around 450,000 years
between each switch. The last reversal — the Matuyama-Brunhes reversal — occurred about
780,000 years ago, so it’s high time for another one to occur.
At this point, scientists are pretty certain that a geomagnetic reversal is about to happen —
they’re just not sure exactly when it will occur. Obviously, when you’re dealing with a mass
of molten iron that is best measured in quintillions of tons, and your nearest seismological
probes are thousands of miles away from the action, there’s a fair bit of guesswork involved.
If the ESA’s satellite data and the new paleomagnetic data (literally, the study of Earth’s
magnetic fields by looking at rocks) are both accurate, then the Earth’s next geomagnetic
reversal might have already begun. By the time we die — or at least when our children die
— the north pole might be in the south.
During this period, there won’t be a north or south pole at all, which might impact some computers
and navigational systems — but in most cases, I would’ve thought software updates, plus GPS
satellites, will have us covered.
There is also the possibility that our magnetic field will be significantly weakened during the reversal
process, which would leave us — and more importantly, our atmosphere — vulnerable to the
eroding effects of highly charged solar particles (solar wind). This possibility has led some scientists
to suggest that a geomagnetic reversal would cause an extinction event — but so far, there are no
fossil records that suggest that previous reversals were followed by mass extinctions.
Likewise, considering many of the species currently on Earth lived through the last geomagnetic
reversal, it would seem they already have some mechanism for coping with shifts in the magnetic
field.
So, to answer the question: No, the impending geomagnetic reversal probably won’t cause some
kind of apocalypse — but we may have to live through a few decades of pigeons getting lost,
bacteria behaving weirdly, and other semi-serious problems. There is certainly a possibility that
something nasty and world-ending will be triggered by a geomagnetic reversal — but we should
have plenty of warning (months, years) if that’s the case."
Now we have seen that even the Scientists are admitting that we are experiencing
the Change in the Earth's Magnetic Poles and the North Pole would become the
South Pole and Vice Versa at any time because this they are experiencing the
phenomenon for the last 100 years and as per the facts the last change and shift
took only 100 years to take place.
Even the famous, "Baba Venga" told in her prophecies that the Axis of the Earth
would change in the year - 2023 AD.
The Sun would rise from the West in the year - 2023 AD before the
Arrival of Mahdi.
For the last 30 years, the world is witnessing the rise of very young entrepreneurs
who have become billionaires and the richest people on the face of the earth which
was predicted by our Prophet Muhammad (PBUH) 1400 years ago that the young
people would rich before the Arrival of Mahdi.
http://www.investopedia.com/articles/personal-finance/101415/worlds-top-10-
youngest-billionaires.asp
1. Evan Spiegel
Evan Spiegel is the co-founder and chief executive officer (CEO) of Snapchat, a
photo messaging service that delivers temporary photos between friends. Snapchat
was valued at $10 billion in 2014, and it has been reported that the company has
received offers in 2015 that value it at $19 billion.
Spiegel studied product design at Stanford University, where he met his co-founder
and fellow billionaire, Bobby Murphy. Evan Spiegel is 24 and has a net worth of $1.5
billion.
2. Bobby Murphy
Bobby Murphy is the second half of the co-founding pair that brought Snapchat to the
marketplace. It is estimated that Murphy has a 15% stake in Snapchat.
Murphy is two years older than his fellow co-founder Spiegel and studied
mathematics and computational science at Stanford University. Murphy is 26 years
old and has a net worth estimated at $1.5 billion.
Julio Mario Santo Domingo III lives in a $4 million apartment in New York City and
throws electronic music parties in Manhattan. His father died in 2009 and left him the
4. Mark Zuckerberg
It has been reported that Zuckerberg recently purchased 700 acres on Kauai's North
Shore for $100 million. He is also active on the philanthropic front and has taken the
Giving Pledge to donate half of his net worth to social good. Zuckerberg is 30 years
old and has a net worth of $33.4 billion.
5. Dustin Moskovitz
Dustin Moskovitz was Facebook's third employee and helped Zuckerberg launch the
website out of their shared Harvard dorm room. He dropped out of school and joined
his college roommate in Palo Alto to continue to help develop Facebook. He left the
company in 2008 to start a software firm called Asana, which has become very
successful in its own right.
Moskovitz, like Zuckerberg, has also taken the Giving Pledge. He is 30 years old and
has a net worth of $7.9 billion.
6. Tom Persson
Tom Persson is Europe's youngest billionaire and is the son of Sweden's richest
man. His father is the chairman of H&M, and his brother is CEO of the company. His
grandfather founded the company in 1947.
Tom Persson is 30 years old and an heir to the H&M fortune. His net worth is
estimated at $3 billion.
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 560
7. Anton Kathrein, Jr.
Anton Kathrein, Jr. is the CEO of Kathrein-Werke, a company that makes the cables,
antennas and receivers that allow cellphone signals to travel across the world.
Kathrein inherited leadership duties of the company from his grandfather, who died in
2012.
Kathrein, who became CEO at the age of 28, is now 30 years old. He has a net
worth of $1.7 billion.
8. Elizabeth Holmes
Elizabeth Holmes is the youngest self-made woman billionaire. She dropped out of
college to start Theranos in 2003. Her company tests blood at a fraction of the price
of traditional labs. Holmes has raised $400 million from venture capitalists, and her
company is valued at $9 billion.
Holmes still owns 50% of Theranos, bringing her net worth to $4.5 billion. She is 31
years old.
9. Tatiana Casiraghi
Tatiana Casiraghi is a member of Monaco's royal family and is married to Andrea
Casiraghi, second in line to the throne. Prior to marrying into royalty, Casiraghi was
already the wealthy heiress to one-sixth of Bavaria Brewery, which her grandfather
traded for a 15% stake in SABMiller.
Casiraghi married her husband in 2013 and has shown up in the European tabloids
ever since. She is 31 years old and is worth an estimated $2.2 billion.
Teodrose Fikre is a visionary author who is passionate about justice for all
irrespective of our differences. Teodorse is named after and is the grandson five
generations of Emperor Atse Teodrose II—the greatest king and visionary leader of
Ethiopia. Teodrose writes of the hope possible in unity while addressing the very
issues that lead to the scale of inequity that is pervasive in our society. Born in
Ethiopia the same year Emperor Haile Selassie was overthrown in 1974, Teodrose
Fikre is a prolific writer whose speech idea was incorporated into Barack Obama's
South Carolina primary victory speech in 2008. A lot has changed in the
intervening years, a transformation caused by the most unlikely circumstances
which led to Teodrose's education of our common bonds and humanity's struggles
without regard to the barriers that are erected to separate us. Teodrose's pen is
poignant, writing of love and loss, injustice and resilience. Most important,
Teodrose's writing is a critique of our time and a much needed focus on the issues
that divide us and the core of our collective struggle that often gets blurred by
manufactured outrages and stoked grievances. A must read for those who hope to
one day overcome injustice with a common purpose. Serendipity's Trace is a
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 562
collection of poetry and observations that express hope through struggle and
traces the experiences that have shaped Teodrose's past and present. Powerful,
emotion, and raw in its eloquence, Teodrose's writing is one that speaks to our
collective conscience.
"Watch out for false prophets. They come to you in sheep's clothing, but inwardly
they are ferocious wolves." ~ Matthew 7:15
Once Hazrat Ali (AS) said in a speech about the events before the Arrival of
Mahdi:
The USA represented by the Statue of Liberty - A Masonic Goddess from Top to
Bottom. The BabylonianIshtar, Imperial Rome's goddess Libertas was Papal
Rome's “MOTHER OF THE HARLOTS AND ABOMINATIONS OF THE EARTH” and
the template for America's Statue of Liberty.
We know that USA started the Wars in Afghanistan, Iraq, Libya, Sudan, Syria,
Iran etc. America also imposed severe economic sanctions against these
countries which includes Medical Sanctions as a result of its policies, hundreds of
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 567
people lostt their lives. And hundreds of people are forced to migrate from Africa
and Middle East to Europe because of the hardships they had to face in ther
countries.
Now the word 'Donkey' is also symbolic in the Saying of Hazrat Ali and we know
that:
Donkey is also one of the Symbol of USA – Democratic Party and
The daily London gold “fixing” occurs at the N. M. Rothschild Bank in the City of
London. Here, five of the Eight Families-linked banks unilaterally decide what the
price of gold will be each morning. Kleinwort Benson’s Sharps Pixley subsidiary is
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 578
one of five firms. Another is Mocatta Metals. It is majority-owned by Standard
Chartered- the Cecil Rhodes-founded bank whose Dubai branch wired Mohammed
Atta the funds he needed to carry out the 911 operation.
Midland Bank subsidiary Samuel Montagu is a third London gold “fixer”. In 1999
Midland, headquartered in cocaine-money infested Panama, was bought by the
British oligarchy-controlled HSBC- the old Hong Kong Shanghai Bank Corporation
opium laundry and now the world’s second largest bank. Midland is partially
owned by the Kuwaiti al-Sabah monarchy. The other two gold fixers are Johnson
Matthey and N. M. Rothschild, both of which have interlocking boards with Anglo-
American and HSBC.
The Rothschilds also control BHP Billiton and Rio Tinto, the two biggest global
miners, as well as Royal Dutch/Shell, BP and Bank of America. As Bank of England
Deputy Governor George Blunden put it, “Fear is what makes the bank’s powers so
acceptable. The bank is able to exert its influence when people are dependent on
us and fear losing their privileges or when they are frightened.”
War also enhanced the family fortune. The House of Rothschild financed the
Prussian War, the Crimean War and the British attempt to seize the Suez Canal from
the French. Nathan Rothschild made a huge financial bet on Napoleon at the Battle
of Waterloo, while also funding the Duke of Wellington’s peninsular
campaign against Napoleon. Both the Mexican War and the Civil War were
goldmines for the family.
Rothschild biographer Derek Wilson says the family was the official European
banker to the US government via the Federal Reserve-precursor Bank of the United
States. Family biographer Niall Ferguson notes a “substantial and unexplained gap”
in Rothschild correspondence from 1854-1860. He says all copies of outgoing letters
French and British troops had, at the height of the Civil War, encircled the US. The
British sent 11,000 troops to Crown-controlled Canada, which gave safe harbor to
Confederate agents. France’s Napoleon III installed Austrian Hapsburg family
member Archduke Maximilian as his puppet emperor in Mexico, where French
troops massed on the Texas border. Only an 11th-hour deployment of two Russian
warship fleets by US ally Czar Alexander II in 1863 saved the United States from re-
colonization. That same year the Chicago Tribune blasted, “Belmont (August
Belmont was a US Rothschild agent and had a Triple Crown horse race named in his
honor) and the Rothschilds…who have been buying up Confederate war bonds.”
President Abraham Lincoln- now aware of the Eight Families-controlled Bank of the
United States plot- countered by issuing Greenbacks from the US Treasury. The
London bankers were fuming. Salmon Rothschild stated derisively of President
Lincoln, “He rejects all forms of compromise. He has the appearance of a peasant
and can only tell barroom stories.”
Lincoln was soon assassinated by John Wilkes Booth, who was whisked away from
Ford Theatre by members of a secret society known as Knights of the Golden Circle.
Booth’s granddaughter later wrote This One Mad Act, in which she details Booth’s
contacts with “mysterious Europeans” just before the Lincoln assassination.
Baron Jacob Rothschild was equally flattering towards the US citizenry. He once
commented to US Minister to Belgium Henry Sanford on the over half a million
Americans who died during the Civil War, “When your patient is desperately sick,
you try desperate measures, even to bloodletting.”
Salmon and Jacob were merely carrying forth a family tradition. A few generations
earlier Mayer Amschel Rothschild bragged of his investment strategy, “When the
streets of Paris are running in blood, I buy”.
Mayer Rothschild’s sons were known as the Frankfurt Five. Amschel ran the
family’s Frankfurt bank with his father, while Nathan ran London operations.
Youngest son Jacob set up shop in Paris, while Salomon ran the Vienna branch and
The Warburgs, Kuhn Loebs, Goldman Sachs, Schiffs and Rothschilds have
intermarried into one big happy banking family. The Warburg family- which
controls Deutsche Bank and Banque Paribas- tied up with the Rothschilds in 1814 in
Hamburg, while Kuhn Loeb powerhouse Jacob Schiff shared quarters with
Rothschilds in 1785. Schiff immigrated to America in 1865. He joined forces with
Abraham Kuhn and married Solomon Loeb’s daughter. Loeb and Kuhn married each
others sisters and the Kuhn Loeb dynasty was consummated. Felix Warburg
married Jacob Schiff’s daughter. Two Goldman daughters married two sons of the
Sachs family, creating Goldman Sachs. In 1806 Nathan Rothschild married the
oldest daughter of Levi Barent Cohen, a leading financier in London. The Cohen
family was now part of the club.
Today the Rothschild’s control a far-flung financial empire, which includes majority
stakes in nearly all the world’s central banks. The Edmond de Rothschild clan owns
the Banque Privee SA in Lugano, Switzerland and the Rothschild Bank AG of Zurich.
The family of Jacob Lord Rothschild owns the powerful Rothschild Italia in Milan.
They are members of the exclusive Club of the Isles, which provides capital for
George Soros’ Quantum Fund NV. Quantum made a killing in 1998-1999 destroying
Quantum NV handles $11-14 billion in assets and operates from the Dutch island of
Curacao, in the shadow of massive Royal Dutch/Shell and Exxon Mobil refineries.
Curacao was recently cited by an OECD Task Force on Money Laundering as a major
drug money laundering nation. The Club of Isles group which funds Quantum is led
by the Rothschilds and includes Queen Elizabeth II and other wealthy European
aristocrats and Black Nobility. Fugitive Swiss financier and Mossad cutout Marc
Rich, whose business interests were recently taken over by the Russian mafia Alfa
Group, is also part of the Soros network. Rich was pardoned by President Clinton as
he exited the White House.
Ties to drug money are nothing new to the Rothschilds. N. M. Rothschild & Sons
was at the epicenter of the BCCI scandal, but escaped the limelight when a
warehouse full of documents conveniently burned to the ground around the time
the Rothschild-controlled Bank of England shut BCCI down. The Rothschild’s Bank
of America provided the seed money to launch BCCI.
If we wish we make the world a better place and to usher in a new consciousness;
we must study, discuss and expose the source of global warfare, depopulation
schemes, oil-addiction, drug addiction, poverty and environmental degradation.
The head of the serpent is the House of Rothschild."
http://www3.telus.net/trbrooks/return_of_Jesus.htm
"Just so, when you see the events I've described [Israel becoming an nation
again] beginning to happen, you can know his return is very near, right at the
door" (Matt. 24.33). Israel became a nation on May 14, 1948, but they
continued to fight for a year and did not sign the Armistice Agreements till
1949. Israel took over Jerusalem June 7, 1967.
A Total (feast filled) Lunar Tetrad falls on Passover, Tabernacles and again, on
Passover and Tabernacles. Only once in the past two millennia do we find
two Total Lunar Tetrads occurring in a single century. Therefore, there was a
5% chance two Total Tetrads could have occurred in the 20th century. There
was a 2% chance one of those Tetrads would fall on 1949/50 or 1967/68 and
a 1% chance on the other date, so that's approximately a 1 in 100,000 chance.
The next feast-filled Tetrad is 2014/15 and the one after that is 2582/83
which is over 600 years from when Israel became a nation. I don't think Jesus
Just know that if you don't seal your fate by taking the implant under your
skin (Rev. 14.9,11; 20.4), die in nuclear holocaust (9.18; 16.16), pestilence,
disease, sores and radiation (16.11) and ground war of 200 million (9.16;
16.16), God will give you opportunity to be saved when Jesus steps down on
the mount of olives. But do you really want to risk waiting till then?
The Feast of Trumpets Sept. 14, 2015 (the first rapture) to Tisha B'Av Aug. 7,
2022 is exactly 7 years times 360 days/year (2,520 days). Tisha B'Av does not
fall on the 2,520th day for 2014 to 2021, nor 2016 to 2023. 2013 is too soon
because it is not enough time to build the Temple. 2017 is too far away from
the Tetrad. The event must begin within the Tetrad. Therefore, Jesus must
return in Person Aug. 7, 2022 on Tisha B'Av in keeping with when the
commemoration when the first two Temples were destroyed. "On that day
his feet will stand on the Mount of Olives" (Zech. 14.4) returning just as He
left. "Men of Galilee, why do you stand gazing up into heaven?
This same Jesus, who was taken up from you into heaven, will so come in like
manner as you saw Him go into heaven." (Acts 1.11). "Look! He comes with
the clouds of heaven. And everyone will see him--[eventually] even those
who pierced him. And all the nations of the earth will weep because of him.
Yes! Amen!" (Rev. 1.7).
What is amazing is not that this is going to occur but that so few people see
it! The above probability is a 99.999% chance. But with knowledge of the H3
Hybrid Long-dated Solar Eclipse on Nov. 3, 2013, we now have effectively
100% certainty the Tribulation is from Sept. 14, 2015 to Aug. 7, 2022 (2,520
days). Keep in mind even though this is proven, most of the Church will not
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 592
recognize it so all we can do is pray for and encourage members of the body
of Christ to be watchful and prayerful; keep the word of His patience, the
conduct of Matt. 5-7, allow their spirit to be divided (Heb. 4.12, 1 Thess. 5.23)
from their body and soul to walk by the spirit, and be deeply led in the word
of God by the Holy Spirit.
See the calculation how the probability the Tribulation Sept. 14, 2015 to Aug.
7, 2022 has gone up dramatically because of the Haiti 2010 earthquake, from
1 in 70,000,000 to 1 in 141 billion and yet still further, based on day Jesus
returns and due to circumstances surrounding Tisha B'Av, to 1 in 6.9 trillion.
The reason Jesus did not stay when He came two millennia ago was because
people killed him and didn't want Him. He does not stay where He is not
welcome and does not want to return to a world where people will just try to
kill Him again. He is not interested in bumping heads endlessly with
unregenerates (Tit. 3.5) and an unregenerated world (Is. 11.6-9; Matt. 19.28;
Rom. 8.19-23). So Jesus lets people have their way to see that we can't do it
without Him. We are about to destroy ourselves when 1/3 of the people of
the earth are going to die in nuclear holocaust (Rev. 9.18) and 200 million will
be fighting in the middle east over oil (v.16). Only then will Jesus return when
people will finally listen.
Israel was the first nation God revealed Himself to because they were
enslaved for 430 years, thus they had an ear to hear. Likewise, at the end of
this age, the world will be receptive to His reigning with a "rod of iron" (12.5,
19.15). Sometimes it takes great pain and suffering to wake up to reality!
Most of all He does it for the sake of His elect, those of us who are born-
again, chosen before the foundations of the world, because we are down-
trodden in this world for the sake of the kingdom. There really is nothing
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 593
more beautiful in this world than the Church. If you can't agree with me on
that fact, then I can't call you my brother or sister in Christ.
Troy Brooks
There are so many Sayings of Hazrat Ali that before the Arrival of Mahdi the
earthquakes in the world would increase.
These results are in agreement with the USGS statistics page, which shows an
increase in the frequency of stronger earthquakes (M 5.0+). These trends also
show that the depth of earthquakes has diminished, they occur closer to the
Earth’s surface. Shallow earthquakes occur along fault lines and are due to the
accumulation of stress.
Earthquake waves can also propagate far enough to trigger other earthquakes;
this may explain the noted increase in earthquakes. Certain scientists have
stated that the increased frequency of earthquakes is due to the increased
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 595
number of detection instruments installed worldwide. This would cause more
sensitive earthquakes to be measured.
2010 saw a total of 6,245 earthquakes, in 2011 there were 5,483, and in 2012 the
total was 11,049.
Japan shaking more: Japan had experienced a little over 3,000 noticeable
earthquakes in 2012, nearly 60 percent of them aftershocks from last year’s
massive tremor that devastated the country’s northeast, Japanese media
reported on Monday.
Quoting the Japan Meteorological Agency, the NHK broadcaster reported that a
total of 3,134 quakes had been felt across Japan until Sunday (December 30)
which is about 1,000 more than the annual average from 2001 to 2010. An
analysis of seismic waves indicates that there were more than 10,000 noticeable
quakes in 2011. While the number of quakes decreased from that of last year,
seismologists continue to monitor frequent seismic activity.
They urged people to be on the alert for possible strong quakes with a
magnitude of at least 7 or those triggering tsunami. The March 11, 2011 quake
and the tsunami it triggered had left more than 15,000 people dead or missing
besides wreaking havoc in Japan’s northeast, including the meltdown at the
Fukushima Daiichi nuclear power plant that leaked radiation forcing the
evacuation of more than 160,000 residents.
Earthquakes in Mexico:
Over 5,000 quakes shake Mexico: In 2012, 5,043 earthquakes, including more
than 1,484 with their epicenter in Chiapas, shook Mexico, according to the State
Civil Protection System, local media reported. That number is likely to increase
before the year’s end.
The highest number, 60, was recorded in 2009. It’s also over ten more than the
average of 43.6 recorded each year since digital detection methods were begun
in 1999. There were nine which reached at least 3.0 on the Richter scale and four
which were strong enough to be felt by people. Other than in the seas the
largest number, 11, were in the Daegu and Gyeongsangbuk-do area, followed by
four in Jeollabuk-do and two each in Busan, Ulsan, and Gyeongsangnam-do.
In North Korea seven earthquakes were recorded, and there were none in the
capital region of Seoul, Gyeonggi-do, and Incheon. There were 12 in the West
Sea, nine in the Sea of Japan (East Sea), and seven in the South Sea. The
strongest earthquake of the year so far occurred on May 11th at 12:46 pm, five
kilometers east-northeast of Muju-gun in Jeollabuk-do, registering a 3.9 on the
Richter scale. Houses and windows shook in Muju and Namwon, at an intensity
level of IV.
In Daegu and Daejeon the intensity was of level II but there was no damage. The
increased number of earthquakes in recent years is likely due to the effects of
the Great East Japan Earthquake of 2010, the KMA said. In this country there
were 42 earthquakes in 2010, 52 last year, and 56 as of Christmas of this year.
Kim Yeong-shin of the KMA said that “around the world in recent years there
have been an increasing number of earthquakes… since the Great East Japan
Earthquake there has been a slight decrease as energy levels seem to have been
adjusted.
Fivefold increase in Peru: Peru has been shocked by a total of 225 sensitive
earthquakes, during 2012, Geophysical Institute of Peru (IGP) reported Monday.
Hernando Tavera, head of IGP’s Seismology said in statements to Andina news
agency that the highest percentage of earthquakes, probably 70 percent, was
centered off the coast of Peru. He noted that mostly the cities of Arequipa, Ica
and Lima, in Peru’s central region and southern Peruvian coast, were the most
affected by the several earthquakes.
Tavera added that recent earthquakes occurring off the coast, from Tumbes to
Tacna, which is the area of highest risk to be affected by a major earthquake and
where the subsurface tectonic plates are constantly moving. “It happens that
offshore is exactly where the Nazca plate colliding head-on with the South
American plate, and there is the problem,” he told Andina news agency. The IGP
only reports the tremors sensitive to the population, but the not sensitive are
usually two to three daily. According to Lima Easy, only 45 seismic events were
listed for all of 2011.
Now in recent years, we have witnessed so many women who came into World
Power on most powerful positions as presidents, head of states and prime
ministers in the World. The women have become the cover photos of most
magazines and newspapers these days.
So the above examples clearly fulfill the Prophecy of Prophet Muhammad (PBUH)
and the women in so many countries came to power before the Arrival of Mahdi.
It is a novel about The end of the world by the year 2023. The book also deals with
the end of tax evasion, a detector of ugliness, the destruction of the Sun, high-tech -
fission of silicon, in order to form oxygen, and carbon.
2023年の中国――習近平政権後、中国と世界はどうなっているか?
Now we see how many wars and armed conflicts are going in the world taking the
statistics from Wikipedia and www.warsintheworld.com
1. Syrian Civil War (Rebels, ISIS, Russia, NATO, Iran, Saudi Arabia, Turkey, etc)
2. Iraq War (ISIS War)
3. Afghanistan War (Taliban War)
4. Boko Haram War (Nigeria, Niger, Cameron, Chad)
5. Somali Civil War
6. Kurdish - Turkish Conflict
7. War in North West Pakistan
8. Mexican Drug War
9. Libyan Civil War
10. Yemen War with Saudi Arabia
11. Sinai Insurgency (Egypt)
12. South Kordofan Conflict (Sudan)
13. South Sudanese Civil War
14. Ukraine War
15. Kashmir Conflict (India Vs Pakistan)
16. Balochistan Conflict (Pakistan)
17. Mynmar Conflict (Mynmar)
18. South Thailand Insurgency
19. Insurgency in North East India
20. Israeli - Palestinian Conflict
21. Colombian Conflict
22. Moro Conflict (Phillippines)
1. ONE
2. All Seeing Eye
3. 666
4. Pentagram
5. Lightning Bolt
6. Snakes
7. Minerval Owl
8. Baphomet
9. Eagle
10. Pyramid
11. Bones and Skulls
12. Worship of Sun
13. Ouroboros
14. Distorted Cross
15. ROC Sign or Pyramid Sign
16. El Diablo
17. Hidden Eye
18. Sign of Hermetism --- As Above As Below
19. V - Sign (Victory Sign)
20. Hidden Hand
21. Nazi Salute
22. Checkered Floor
23. Birdcage
24. Rainbow
25. Monarch Mind Control
26. Mirror
27. Umbrella
Now one can understand why the Arrival of Mahdi is so near to abolish the Cruel
System of Dajjal and Zionists.
Friday, the 13th especially in October is regarded as the Horror Day. The
Knights of Templer were burned to death in Europe by their opponents on
October 13 and that was Friday.
The Grail is believed by many Christians to be the cup from which Jesus Christ
drank from the night before his crucifixion. The Knights Templar also used
their enormous wealth to act as a bank for the crowned heads of Europe
during the Middle Ages. To finance a war with England Philip borrowed
money from the knights.
Financial backing from the Knights did not help Philip who was a weak king
and no military commander. England defeated France leaving the country and
its king in poverty. Philip, in league with Pope Clement came up with a plan to
accuse the Knights Templar of heinous acts against the Church including
heresy and worshipping false gods. On Friday Oct. 13th 1307 all of the Knights
Templar were rounded up and imprisoned. They were charged with Satanism
and a number of other "unnatural" practices.
20........17
The Movie, "The Hunt for Red October" on the Novel by Tom Clancy
Then, going immediately from the Chapel to his office, he composed the
prayer to St. Michael, with instructions that it be said after all Low Masses
everywhere.
When asked what had happened, he explained that, as he was about to leave
the foot of the altar, he suddenly heard voices - two voices, one kind and
gentle, the other guttural and harsh. They seemed to come from near the
tabernacle. As he listened, he heard the following conversation:
The guttural voice, the voice of Satan in his pride, boasted to Our Lord: "I can
destroy your Church."
The gentle voice of Our Lord: "You can? Then go ahead and do so."
Satan: "75 to 100 years, and a greater power over those who will give
themselves over to my service."
Albert Pike, the Army Commander of USA wrote a letter to the PM of Italy in
1871 AD mentioning about the 3 World Wars. Here is the Extract of his letter
about World War - 3:
Albert Pike wrote this letter in 1871 AD. If we reverse the year of 1871 AD, we would
would get: 71....17
The events that have given October a bad name span 80 years. They are:
The James Bond Movie, "Skyfall" was released on November 9th, 2012 AD.
Adele was the Singer of the Song of this movie. She also sang the song on the Oscars
Award Ceremony in 2013 AD. Both the Song and the Singer, Adele was selected and
nominated for Oscar Winners.
The 45th President of USA, Donald Trump was also declared winner on 9th
November, 2016 AD 11/9
9/11 Attacks on World Trade Centers in USA was the Headline news for many
years.
The World War 3 would start in September, 2021 AD and the Fall of the Population
in the World by two third due to World War 3 and World Drought would reach by
2022 AD.
2021 - 2022 AD
Are You Ready?
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 640
173. The Prophecies of Edgar Cayce about World War
- 3 before the Second Coming of Jesus Christ
https://www.edgarcayce.org/edgar-cayce/his-life
"Edgar Cayce (pronounced Kay-Cee, 1877-1945) has been called the "sleeping
prophet," the "father of holistic medicine," and the most documented psychic of the
20th century. For more than 40 years of his adult life, Cayce gave psychic "readings"
to thousands of seekers while in an unconscious state, diagnosing illnesses and
revealing lives lived in the past and prophecies yet to come. But who, exactly, was
Edgar Cayce?
Cayce was born on a farm in Hopkinsville, Kentucky, in 1877, and his psychic
abilities began to appear as early as his childhood. He was able to see and talk to his
late grandfather's spirit, and often played with "imaginary friends" whom he said
were spirits on the other side. He also displayed an uncanny ability to memorize the
pages of a book simply by sleeping on it. These gifts labeled the young Cayce as
strange, but all Cayce really wanted was to help others, especially children.
Later in life, Cayce would find that he had the ability to put himself into a sleep-like
state by lying down on a couch, closing his eyes, and folding his hands over his
Many people are surprised to learn that Edgar Cayce was a devoted churchgoer and
Sunday school teacher. At a young age, Cayce vowed to read the Bible for every
year of his life, and at the time of his death in 1945, he had accomplished this task.
Perhaps the readings said it best, when asked how to become psychic, Cayce’s
advice was to become more spiritual.
Although Cayce died more than 60 years ago, the timeliness of the material in the
readings — with subjects like discovering your mission in life, developing your
intuition, exploring ancient mysteries, and taking responsibility for your health — is
evidenced by the hundreds of books that have been written on the various aspects
of this work as well as the dozen or so titles focusing on Cayce's life itself. Together,
these books contain information so valuable that even Edgar Cayce himself might
have hesitated to predict their impact on the contemporary world. In 1945, the year
of his passing, who could have known that terms such as "meditation," "Akashic
records," "spiritual growth," "auras," "soul mates," and "holistic health" would
become household words to millions?
The majority of Edgar Cayce's readings deal with holistic health and the treatment
of illness. As it was at the time Cayce was giving readings, still today, individuals
from all walks of life and belief receive physical relief from illnesses or ailments
through information given in the readings — some readings were given as far back
as 100 years ago! Yet, although best known for this material, the sleeping Cayce did
not seem to be limited to concerns about the physical body. In fact, in their
entirety, the readings discuss an astonishing 10,000 different topics. This vast array
of subject matter can be narrowed down into a smaller group of topics that, when
compiled together, deal with the following five categories: (1) Health-Related
Information; (2) Philosophy and Reincarnation; (3) Dreams and Dream
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 642
Interpretation; (4) ESP and Psychic Phenomena; and (5) Spiritual Growth,
Meditation, and Prayer.
Further details of Cayce's life and work are explored in the classic book, There Is a
River (1942), by Thomas Sugrue, available in hardback, paperback, or audio book
versions.
Members of Edgar Cayce's Association for Research and Enlightenment (A.R.E.), the
nonprofit founded by Cayce in 1931, have access to the entire set of 14,306 readings
in a database residing in the member-only section of our Web site. The readings can
also be found in their entirety in our on-site library, located at our headquarters in
Virginia Beach and open to the public daily. For more information on A.R.E., please
visit our About A.R.E. page."
Edgar Cayce Predicted World War III would start in the Area
Tunis, Egypt, Lybia
According to other sources the real war is going to start in Libya and Syria in
weeks. Upon first hearing this news, this long term military intelligence officer
told us “I’m really shaken, today, I don’t know what to say, I don’t know what to
do.” He believes this is the start of WWIII. According to this source, there are a
number of factions in the military, some of which are concerned that they would be
operating without the consent of Congress and that it could precipitate a
constitutional crisis about the ligitimacy of this kind of order from the Chief
Executive without the express approval of Congress who have been considering
legislation to eliminate funding for any actions in Libya.
On the other side are groups in the military that “never saw a bomb they didn’t
want to drop”, the source said. The source continued “we don’t have the
manpower because the entire continent of Africa is going to come unglued. You
jump Libya and Syria, you jumped Iran. You’re going to find out real soon whether
or not Iran’s got nukes because they aren’t going to care at that point, it’s an
existential threat to them.” Military analysts have noted the vast size of the African
continent and the difficulties of waging war in that region. The U.S. military
created AFRICOM to coordinate the various military bases and branches in Africa.
Our Prophet Muhammad (PBUH) made a prophecy about the modern Aeroplanes
and aircraft 1400 years ago before the people who could not apprehend the
modern inventions and discoveries.
Now in the 21st Century, even the children are flying the aeroplanes and aircraft in
different shapes and forms.
The list of the Definite Signs of the Arrival of Mahdi are as follows:
1. The 1/3rd death of human population by big World War. (2021 - 2022)
2. Kharooj e Dajjal. (2022 - 2023)
3. 1/3rd death of human population by drought and diseases after big World
War - 3 (2022 - 2023)
4. Kharooj e Suffiani in the month of Rajab (2023)
5. Kharooj e Yamani in the same month of Rajab ( 2023)
6. Kharooj e Kharasani in the same month of Rajab. (2023)
7. Face on the Sky in the month of Rajab. (2023)
8. Rising of Sun from the West and the shifting of Magnetic poles. (2023)
9. Cry from the Sky regarding the Kharooj of Mahdi on 23rd Ramazan,
Friday. (14th April, 2023 AD)
10. Murder of Nafs Zakia 15 days ago before the Arrival of Mahdi on 10th
Muharram, Friday at Asr time. (July, 2023)
From 2nd World War to 3rd World War ------ 1939 to 2022 AD = 83 years
Trump Card
He would rule and lead America during the Third World War also shown in the
Simpsons Cartoon and then he would be assassinated before the Launch of New
World Order by Globalists and the Illuminati as indicated in their cards.
Sharing the article with the courtesy from the website by the author - Bibhu Dev
Misra:
https://grahamhancock.com/dmisrab6/
About the author: Bibhu Dev Misra is a graduate of the Indian Institute of
Technology and the Indian Institute of Management and has been working as an
Information Technology consultant for more than 14 years. He is also an
independent researcher and writer on topics related to ancient civilizations,
myths, symbols, science and religion. His research has taken him to many
places of historical interest across the globe. His articles have appeared in
different journals, magazines, and websites including the New Dawn, Science to
Sage, Comsomath, Graham Hancock Forum, Esamskriti, Viewzone and others.
The Yuga Cycle doctrine tells us that we are now living in the Kali Yuga; the age
of darkness, when moral virtue and mental capabilities reach their lowest point
in the cycle. The Indian epic The Mahabharata describes the Kali Yuga as the
period when the “World Soul” is Black in hue; only one quarter of virtue
remains, which slowly dwindles to zero at the end of the Kali Yuga. Men turn to
wickedness; disease, lethargy, anger, natural calamities, anguish and fear of
scarcity dominate. Penance, sacrifices and religious observances fall into disuse.
All creatures degenerate. Change passes over all things, without exception.
The Kali Yuga (Iron Age) was preceded by three others Yugas: Satya or Krita
Yuga (Golden Age), Treta Yuga (Silver Age) and the Dwapara Yuga (Bronze
Age). In the Mahabharata, Hanuman gives the following description of the Yuga
Cycle to the Pandava prince Bhima:
"The Krita Yuga was so named because there was but one religion, and all
men were saintly: therefore they were not required to perform religious
ceremonies… Men neither bought nor sold; there were no poor and no
rich; there was no need to labour, because all that men required was
obtained by the power of will…The Krita Yuga was without disease; there
was no lessening with the years; there was no hatred, or vanity, or evil
thought whatsoever; no sorrow, no fear. All mankind could attain to
supreme blessedness. The universal soul was White… the identification of
self with the universal soul was the whole religion of the Perfect Age. In
the Treta Yuga sacrifices began, and the World Soul became Red; virtue
lessened a quarter. Mankind sought truth and performed religious
ceremonies; they obtained what they desired by giving and by doing. In
the Dwapara Yuga the aspect of the World Soul was Yellow: religion
lessened one-half. The Veda was divided into four parts, and although
some had knowledge of the four Vedas, others knew but three or one.
Mind lessened, Truth declined, and there came desire and diseases and
calamities; because of these men had to undergo penances. It was a
decadent Age by reason of the prevalence of sin.”[1]
And now we are living in the dark times of the Kali Yuga, when goodness and
virtue has all but disappeared from the world. But when did the Kali Yuga begin?
And when does it end? In spite of the elaborate theological framework which
It is generally believed that Aryabhatta had calculated the start date of the Kali
Yuga on the basis of the information in the Sanskrit astronomical treatise,
the Surya Siddhanta, according to which the five “geocentric planets” (i.e. the
planets visible to the naked eye) – Mercury, Venus, Mars, Jupiter and Saturn –
were aligned to 0 of Aries (near the star zeta Piscium) at the beginning of the
Kali Yuga. He, thus, arrived at the date of 17/18 February, 3102 BC as the
starting point of the Kali Yuga. However, modern simulations carried out by
Richard Thompson show that on 17/18 February, 3102 BC, the five geocentric
planets occupied an arc of roughly 42 in the sky and were scattered over three
zodiacal signs – Aries, Pisces and Aquarius. This cannot be considered as a
conjunction by any means. Far more spectacular ‘alignment’ of planets has
occurred in the preceding and succeeding centuries. In other words, the
conjunction of geocentric planets at 0 of Aries that was supposedly targeted by
Aryabhatta did not take place in 3102 BC.
Does this mean Aryabhatta made an error in his back calculations? Not really.
For, the Surya Siddhanta does not ever specify that such an alignment of
planets took place at the beginning of the Kali Yuga. On the contrary, the Surya
Siddhanta explicitly states that this conjunction of planets at 0 of Aries takes
place at the end of the Golden Age (Satya / Krita Yuga). The text states: “Now,
There can be no doubt that the 3102 BC date for the Kali Yuga was not based
on any information in the Surya Siddhanta or any other Sanskrit text. The date
virtually pops out of nowhere. Before 500 CE, this date was not mentioned in
any Sanskrit text. From where, then, did Aryabhatta obtain this date? There
seems to be no indication that Aryabhatta had computed this date himself.
There is a single, stray reference to this date in the Sanskrit
text Aryabhatiya, where Aryabhatta mentions that the text was composed 3,600
years into the Kali Yuga, when he was 23 years old. Since the Aryabhatiya was
composed in 499 CE, the beginning of the Kali Yuga can be traced back to 3102
BC. The statement, by itself, does not reveal any information about the
The task of figuring out this date from the ancient Sanskrit texts, however, is
fraught with difficulties, since a number of inaccuracies have crept into the Yuga
Cycle information contained within them. As pointed out by Sri Yukteswar, in
many Sanskrit texts the 12,000 year duration of the Yuga Cycle was artificially
inflated to an abnormally high value of 4,320,000 years by introducing a
multiplication factor of “360”, which was represented as the number of “human
years” which constitutes a “divine year”. However, certain texts, such as
the Mahabharata and the Laws of Manu, still retain the original value of the
Yuga Cycle as 12,000 years. Many other ancient cultures – the Chaldeans,
Zoroastrians and Greeks – also believed in a 12,000 year Cycle of the Ages. The
renowned Sanskrit scholar and nationalist leader of India, B.G.Tilak had
mentioned in his book, The Arctic Home in the Vedas (1903), that:
“The writers of the Puranas, many of which appear to have been written
during the first few centuries of the Christian, era, were naturally unwilling
to believe that the Kali Yuga had passed away…An attempt was, therefore,
made to extend the duration of the Kali Yuga by converting 1000 (or
1200) ordinary human years thereof into as many divine years, a single
divine year, or a year of the gods, being equal to 360 human years…this
solution of the difficulty was universally adopted, and a Kali of 1200
ordinary years was at once changed, by this ingenious artifice, into a
magnificent cycle of as many divine, or 360 × 1200 = 432,000 ordinary
years.”[5]
Yukteswar also clarified in the book The Holy Science (1894), that a complete
Yuga Cycle takes 24,000 years, and is comprised of an ascending cycle of
12,000 years when virtue gradually increases and a descending cycle of another
12,000 years, in which virtue gradually decreases. Hence, after we complete a
12,000 year descending cycle from Satya Yuga -> Kali Yuga, the sequence
reverses itself, and an ascending cycle of 12,000 years begins which goes from
Kali Yuga -> Satya Yuga. Yukteswar states that, “Each of these periods of
12,000 years brings a complete change, both externally in the material world,
and internally in the intellectual or electric world, and is called one of the Daiva
The idea of an ascending and descending Cycle of Ages was also prevalent in
Greek myths. The Greek poet Hesiod (c. 750 BC – 650 BC) had given an
account of the World Ages in the Works and Days, in which he had inserted a
fifth age called the “Age of Heroes”, between the Bronze Age and the Iron Age.
In Hesiod’s Cosmos, Jenny Strauss Clay writes:
“Drawing on the myth in Plato’s Statesman, Vernant also claimed that the
temporal framework of Hesiodic myth, that is, the succession of races, is
not linear but cyclical; at the end of the age of iron, which he divides into
two, the cycle of races starts again with a new golden age or, more likely,
a new age of heroes, as the sequence reverses itself…Vernant himself
offers a solution when he remarks that ‘there is not in reality one age of
iron but two types of human existence.’ ”[7]
The evidence from different sources supports the notion of a complete Yuga
Cycle of 24,000 years, comprised of an ascending and descending cycle of
12,000 years each. This brings us to the question of the relative durations of the
different Yugas in the Yuga Cycle, and the transitional periods, which occur at
the beginning and end of each Yuga, and are known as Sandhya (dawn)
and Sandhyansa (twilight) respectively. The following values are provided in the
Sanskrit texts for the duration of the Yugas and their respective dawns and
twilights.
Satya Yuga (Golden Age): 4000 years + 400 years dawn + 400 years twilight
=4800 years
Treta Yuga (Silver Age): 3000 years + 300 years dawn + 300 years twilight
=3600 years
Dwapara Yuga (Bronze Age): 2000 years + 200 years dawn + 200 years
twilight = 2400 years
Kali Yuga (Iron Age): 1000 years + 100 years dawn + 100 years twilight
= 1200 years
Since so many inaccuracies have crept into the Yuga Cycle doctrine, as pointed
out by Yukteswar and Tilak, we also need to question the accuracy of the
relative durations of the Yugas mentioned in the Sanskrit texts. Although the
Yuga Cycle is mentioned in the mythic accounts of around thirty ancient
cultures, as described by Giorgio de Santillana, professor of the history of
science at MIT, in the book Hamlet’s Mill (1969), we find very little information
regarding the relative durations of the different ages within this cycle. This is
quite surprising. Nearly all the accounts tell us that virtue and righteousness
decreases as we move from the Golden Age to the subsequent ages. Some of
them specifically mention that virtue decreases by a quarter in every age.
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 681
However, there appears to be scant mention of the durations of the ages
themselves. If the duration of each Yuga decreased from one Yuga to the next,
shouldn’t this important point also have been mentioned in these accounts?
In the few accounts where the durations of the Yuga are specified, we find that
each age in the Yuga Cycle is of the same duration. For instance, the
Zoroastrians believe that the world lasts for 12,000 years, which is divided into
four equal ages of 3,000 years each. A Mexican source known as the Codex
Rios (also referred to as Codex 3738 and Codex Vaticanus A) states that each
age lasts for 4008, 4010, 4801 and 5042 years respectively for a total of 17,861
years. We can see that in this case also the duration of each age is nearly the
same.
Therefore, the durations of the four Yugas mentioned in the Sanskrit texts (i.e.
4800, 3600, 2400, and 1200 years) deviate from the norm. The duration of
each Yuga, in this sequence, decreases by 1200 years from the previous one.
This is an arithmetic progression which is rarely, if ever, found in natural cycles.
This seemingly unnatural sequence raises the question whether the Yuga
durations were deliberately altered at some point in the past, in order to give
the impression that the duration of each Yuga decreases in tandem with the
decrease in virtue from one Yuga to the next. It is important to note that the
ratio’s of the durations of the four Yugas in this sequence is 4:3:2:1. This gives
the superficial impression that the duration of each Yuga is reducing by a
quarter from one to the next. But that is actually not the case. They are
decreasing by a fixed number of years i.e. 1200 years.
Here is the most startling fact: Two of the most famous astronomers of ancient
India, Aryabhatta and Paulisa, both believed that the Yuga Cycle is comprised of
Yugas of equal duration! In the 11th century, the medieval scholar Al-Beruni had
travelled across India for 13 years, questioning and conversing with learned
men, reading the Sanskrit texts, observing the religious rites and customs, and
had compiled a comprehensive commentary on Indian philosophy, sciences and
culture. In Alberuni’s India, Al-Beruni mentions that the Yuga Cycle doctrine was
based on the derivations of the Indian astronomer Brahmagupta, who in turn
derived his knowledge from the Sanskrit Smriti texts. He makes an interesting
statement in this regard:
The fact that Aryabhatta believed the four yugas to be of equal duration is
extremely pertinent! Al-Beruni reasserts this in no uncertain terms: “Therefore,
according to Aryabhatta, the Kali Yuga has 3000 divya years….each two yugas
has 6000 divya years…each three years has 9000 divya years.” Why would
Aryabhatta subscribe to such a belief? Did he have access to sources of
information that are lost to us now?
Surprisingly, it was not only Aryabhatta, who held this point of view. Another
celebrated astronomer of ancient India was Paulisa, who had apparently earned
Brahmagupta’s favor by supporting the 4:3:2:1 ratio for the duration of the
yugas. According to Al-Beruni, however, “it is possible that Paulisa simply
mentions this method as one among others, and that it is not that one in
particular which he himself adopted.”[9] This is evident from Paulisa’s belief
regarding the caturyuga, as documented by Al-Beruni: “Of the
current caturyuga (Yuga Cycle), there have elapsed three yugas i.e. according
to him 3,240,000 years i.e. 9000 divya-years. The latter number represents
three-fourths of the years of a caturyuga.”[10] This indicates that Paulisa
believed that each Yuga was of 3000 divine years’ duration. He uses the same
method while presenting his calculations for the duration of a kalpa where “he
(Pulisa) has not changed the caturyugas into exact yugas, but simply changed
them into fourth parts, and multiplied these fourth parts by the number of years
of a single fourth part.”[11]
This clearly indicates that two of the most respected astronomers of ancient
India, Aryabhatta and Paulisa, believed in a Yuga Cycle that comprised of 4
Yugas of equal duration of 3,000 divine-years each. However, their opinion was
overshadowed by the contradictory view held by Brahmagupta. He railed against
Aryabhatta and the other astronomers who held differing opinions, and even
abused them. Al-Beruni says about Brahmagupta:
We can now understand why Brahmagupta’s opinion finally prevailed over that
of the other astronomers of his time, and it certainly did not have anything to
do with the inherent soundness of his logic, or the authenticity of his sources.
The original Yuga Cycle doctrine appears to have been very simple: A Yuga
Cycle duration of 12,000 years, with each Yuga lasting for 3,000 years. This
cycle is encoded in the “Saptarsi Calendar” which has been used in India for
thousands of years. It was used extensively during the Maurya period in the
4th century BC, and is still in use in some parts of India. The term “Saptarsi”
refers to the “Seven Rishis” or the “Seven Sages” representing the seven stars
of the Great Bear constellation (Ursa Major). They are regarded as the
enlightened rishis who appear at the beginning of every Yuga to spread the laws
of civilization. The Saptarsi Calendar used in India had a cycle of 2,700 years; it
is said that the Great Bear constellation stays for 100 years in each of the 27
Fig 1: The Great Bear constellation (Ursa Major) is clearly visible in the northern sky throughout the year. The seven
prominent stars represent the Seven Sages (Saptarshi). The Great Bear constellation figures prominently in the mythology
of many cultures.
If the 2,700 year cycle of the Saptarsi Calendar represents the actual duration
of a Yuga, then the remaining 300 years out of the total Yuga duration of 3,000
years (representing 1/10th of the Yuga duration), automatically represents the
“transitional period”, before the qualities of the subsequent Yuga are fully
manifested. In accordance with the current convention, this intervening period
can be broken up into two separate periods of 150 years each, one occurring at
the beginning of the Yuga, known as Sandhya (i.e. dawn), and the other at its
termination, known as Sandhyansa (i.e. twilight). The total duration of the Yuga
Cycle, excluding the transitional periods, is equal to (2700*4) i.e. 10,800 years,
which is same as the duration of the “Great Year of Heraclitus” in the Hellenic
tradition!
It is agreed by historians that the Saptarsi Calendar that was in use during the
Maurya period in the 4th century BC, started in 6676 BC. In the book,
“Traditions of the Seven Rsis”, Dr.J.E. Mitchiner confirms this: “We may
conclude that the older and original version of the Era of the Seven Rsis
commenced with the Seven Rsis in Krttika in 6676 BC…This version was in use
in northern India from at least the 4 th century BC, as witnessed by the
In fact, the recorded choronology of Indian kings goes back further than 6676
BC as documented by the Greek and Roman historians Pliny and Arrian. Pliny
states that, “From Father Liber [Roman Bacchus or Greek Dionysus] to
Alexander the Great (d. 323 BC), Indians reckon 154 kings, and they reckon
(the time as) 6451 years and 3 months.”[15] Arrian puts 153 kings and 6462
years between Dionysus and Sandrokottos (Chandragupta Maurya), to whose
court a Greek embassy was sent in 314 BC.[16] Both indications add up to a
date of roughly c.6776 BC, which is a 100 years prior to the beginning of the
Saptarsi Calendar in 6676 BC.
It is obvious from the accounts of Pliny and Arrian that they must have
identified a specific king in the Indian kings list, who corresponded to the Greek
Dionysus or Roman Bacchus, and whose reign had ended at around c.6776 BC.
Who could that have been? According to the renowned scholar and Orientalist
Sir William Jones, Dionysus or Bacchus was none other than the Indian monarch
Rama. In his essay “On the Gods of Greece, Italy and India” (1784), Sir William
Jones “deems Rama to be the same as the Grecian Dionysos, who is said to
have conquered India with an army of satyrs, commanded by Pan; and Rama
was also a mighty conqueror, and had an army of large monkeys or satyrs,
commanded by Maruty (Hanuman), son of Pavan. Rama is also found, in other
points, to resemble the Indian Bacchus.”[17] Sir William Jones also points out
that, “Meros is said by the Greeks to have been a mountain of India, on which
their Dionysus was born, and that Meru is also a mountain near the city of
Naishada, or Nysa, called by the Grecian geographers Dionysopolis, and
universally celebrated in the Sanskrit poems.”[18]
Both Pliny and Arrian were aware of these associations. Pliny had placed the
Dionysian satyrs “in the tropical mountains of India”, while “we learn from
Arrian (Hist.Ind. p 318, 321) that the worship of Bacchus, or Dionysus, was
common in India and that his votaries observed a number of rites similar to
those of Greece…On this account, when Alexander entered India, the natives
considered the Greeks as belonging to the same family with themselves; and
when the people of Nysa sent the principal person of their city to solicit their
freedom of the Grecian conqueror, they conjured him by the well-known name
of Dionysus, as the most effectual means of obtaining their purpose. ‘O King,
A later Saptarsi Calendar, still in use in India, began from 3076 BC. But, as Dr.
Subhash Kak points out, “the new count that goes back to 3076 BC was started
later to make it as close to the start of the Kali era as possible”[20]. This
modification can be easily identified, since in 3076 BC, the Great Bear were in
the “Magha” nakshatra (lunar asterism) as mentioned by Varahamihira
in Brihat-Samhita (Brs. 13-3). But Subhash Kak points out that, “By the time of
the Greeks, the naksatras were listed starting with Asvin (Surya Siddhanta 8.9).
As Magha is the tenth naksatra in a count beginning with Asvin, one needs to
add 900 years to find the epoch for the beginning of the cycle. This takes one to
3976 BC. One more complete Saptarsi Cycle of 2,700 years before that brings
us to 6676 BC.”[21] Since the Dwapara Yuga immediately precedes the Kali
Yuga, we are once again led to the conclusion that the Saptarsi Calendar with a
start date of 6676 BC was counting time from the Dwapara Yuga.
Fig 2: The List of the 27 Nakshatras. The Great Bear was in Magha in 3076 BC and in Ashvini in 3976 BC / 6676 BC
We also know that the Saptarsi Calendar used during the Mauryan period was
used for tracking the genealogical records of the Mahabharata war kings. Since
the Mahabharata describes events that transpired in the Dwapara Yuga, there
cannot be any doubt that the Saptarsi Cycle beginning 6676 BC marks the
beginning of the descending Dwapara Yuga. If we use this date as the anchor
point, and the Saptarsi Calendar as the basis for the Yuga Cycle durations (i.e.
Yuga duration of 2,700 years, with transitional periods of 300 years), then the
entire timeline of the Yuga Cycle gets unraveled:
This Yuga Cycle timeline takes the beginning of the Golden Age to 12676 BC,
more than 14,500 years before present, when the Great Bear was in the
“Shravana” nakshatra (the Great Bear will advance by 3 nakshtras in every
Yuga because of the 300 year transitional period). This agrees very well with the
Indian tradition, since the Mahabharata mentions that in the ancient tradition
the Shravana nakshatra was given the first place in the Nakshatra cycle. The
timeline also indicates that the ascending Kali Yuga, which is the current epoch
in which we are living, will end in 2025 CE. The full manifestation of the next
Yuga – the ascending Dwapara – will take place in 2325 CE, after a transitional
period of 300 years. The ascending Dwapara Yuga will then be followed by two
more Yugas: the ascending Treta Yuga and the ascending Satya Yuga, which will
complete the 12,000 year ascending cycle. The Sanskrit text Brahma-vaivarta
Purana describes a dialogue between Lord Krishna and the Goddess Ganges.
Here, Krishna says that after 5,000 years of Kali Yuga there will be a dawn of a
new Golden Age which will last for 10,000 years (Text 50, 59). This can be
immediately understood in the context of the Yuga Cycle timeline described
here. We are now ending the Kali Yuga, nearly 5,700 years since its beginning
in 3676 BC. And the end of the Kali Yuga will be followed by three more Yugas
spanning 9,000 years, before the ascending cycle ends.
According to the Yuga Cycle doctrine, the transitional periods between Yugas
are always associated with a worldwide collapse of civilizations and severe
environmental catastrophes, which wipe out virtually every trace of any human
civilization. The new civilization that emerges in the new Yuga is guided by a
few survivors of the cataclysm, who carry with them the technical and spiritual
knowledge of the previous epoch. Many ancient sources tell us of the enigmatic
group of “Seven Sages” (“Saptarsi”) who are said to appear at the beginning of
every Yuga and promulgate the arts of civilization. We find them in myths from
across the world – in Sumeria, India, Polynesia, South America and North
America. They possessed infinite wisdom and power, could travel over land and
water, and took on various forms at will. Were they the survivors of the
previous Yuga or visitors from outer space? Opinions differ on this point, but
surely neither option can be discarded without proper scrutiny. In any case, the
main point is that the transitional periods between Yugas must necessarily
correlate with the severe cataclysmic events that regularly impact our planet, as
reflected in the archeological records. As we shall see, the Yuga Cycle timeline
proposed here correlates with these catastrophic events with a stunning
accuracy. In addition, the transitional periods can also be correlated with dates
recorded in various ancient calendars and traditions.
The first transitional period in the 12,000 year descending Yuga Cycle is the 300
year period at the end of the Golden Age from 9976 BC – 9676 BC. This is the
time when the last Ice Age came to a sudden end; the climate became very
warm quite abruptly, and several large mammalian species such as the woolly
mammoth became extinct. A number of scientific studies show that a
devastating global flood occurred at around 9600 BC.[22] This is in accordance
with many ancient traditions and legends. In the Timaeus, Plato talks of the
mythical island of Atlantis, which was swallowed up by the sea in a “single day
and night of misfortune” in c.9600 BC. This event has also been recorded in the
flood myths of many ancient cultures, which almost uniformly talk of enormous
walls of water that submerged the entire land to the highest mountain tops,
accompanied by heavy rain, fireballs from the sky, intense cold and long periods
of darkness. In the Indian tradition, this flood took place at the end of the Satya
Yuga (Golden Age). The survivor of this great deluge was Manu, the progenitor
of mankind, who is placed at the head of the genealogy of Indian kings.
The 300 year transitional period between the Treta Yuga (Silver Age) and the
Dwapara Yuga (Bronze Age) from 6976 BC – 6676 BC also coincides with a
significant environmental event – the Black Sea Catastrophe which has recently
been dated to 6700 BC. The Black Sea once used to be a freshwater lake. That
is, until the Mediterranean Sea, swollen with melted glacial waters, breached a
natural dam, and cut through the narrow Bosphorous Strait, catastrophically
flooding the Black Sea. This raised the water levels of the Black Sea by several
hundred feet, flooded more than 60,000 square miles of land, and significantly
expanded the Black Sea shoreline (by around 30%).[26] This event
fundamentally changed the course of civilization in Southeastern Europe and
western Anatolia. Geologists Bill Ryan and Walter Pitman of Lamont-Doherty
Earth Observatory in New York, who had first proposed the Black Sea
Catastrophe hypothesis, have gone to the extent of comparing it to Noah’s
Flood.
Similar major flooding events were taking place in many parts of the world, as
massive glacial lakes, swelled by the waters of the melting ice, breached their
ice barriers, and rushed into the surrounding areas. In the book Underworld,
Fig 5: The Black Sea catastrophe, before and after. The water from the Mediterranean (Aegean) Sea, cut through a narrow
Gorge (now known as the Bosphorous Strait), and plunged into the Black Sea (whose water level was 80 m below sea
level) creating a gigantic waterfall. Every day for two years, 42 cubic km of sea water cut through the narrow channel and
plunged into the lake — more than 200 times the flow over Niagara Falls. Source: NASA
The transitional period between the Dwapara Yuga and Kali Yuga, from 3976 BC
– 3676 BC was again marked by a series of environmental cataclysms, whose
exact nature remains a mystery. It is referred to in geology as the 5.9 kiloyear
event, and it is considered as one of the most intense aridification events during
The famous Mahabharata War of the Indian subcontinent, which took place
during the transitional period between Yugas, 35 years prior to the beginning of
the Kali Yuga, can now be dated to 3711 BC. The Mahabharata mentions that
the Dwapara Yuga ended and the Kali Yuga started as soon as Krishna left this
world; and then the seas swelled up and submerged the island-city of Dwarka,
which was located off the coast of western India. In 2002, the National Institute
of Ocean Technology (NIO), India, discovered two cities submerged in the Gulf
of Cambay, at a depth of 120 feet. These mysterious submerged cities were laid
out in a grid, had towering walls, massive geometrical buildings and huge
engineering works such as dams, and they stood entirely above water around
7,000 years ago. Nearly 2,000 man-made artifacts were recovered from the
sites, some of which have been carbon dated to 6500 BC – 7500 BC, indicating
their existence in the Dwapara Yuga.
However, this was not just a collapse of the ancient Greek civilization; there was
a worldwide collapse of civilizations during this period. The Hittites suffered
serious disruption and cities from Troy to Gaza were destroyed. Egypt too lost
control over its kingdom. The period from 1070 BC – 664 BC is known as the
“Third Intermediate Period” of Egypt, during which time Egypt was run over and
ruled by foreign rulers, and there was political and social disintegration and
chaos. Egypt was increasingly beset by a series of droughts, below-normal
flooding of the Nile, and famine. In India, the Indus Valley civilization finally
ended at around 1000 BC. Catastrophe also struck the ancient Olmec civilization
of Mesoamerica at this time. The first Olmec center, San Lorenzo, was
abandoned at around 900 BC. A wholesale destruction of many San Lorenzo
monuments also occurred in c.950 BC, and scholars believe that drastic
environmental changes may have been responsible for this shift in Olmec
centers, with certain important rivers changing course.
Once again we don’t know what may have triggered this calamitous turn of
events across the world. Historians speculate about a combination of
catastrophic climatic events. Egyptian accounts tell us that, “something in the
air prevented much sunlight from reaching the ground and also arrested global
tree growth for almost two full decades until 1140 BC.”[29] One proposed cause
is the Hekla 3 eruption of the Hekla volcano in Iceland, but the dating of that
event remains in dispute. However, since the descending and ascending Kali
When the ascending Kali Yuga began in 676 BC, much of the knowledge,
traditions and skills from the descending Kali Yuga were lost. In Greece, the
construction of monumental architecture ceased. The cavalry was replaced by
foot soldiers. Pottery styles were simplified. In India, the use of Sanskrit as the
means of communication was replaced by the language of the common masses
– Pali and Prakrit. Knowledge of the ancient scriptures, sciences and arts had
been all but forgotten. Possibly in response to this grave social crisis, a number
of philosophers and prophets appeared at this time, trying to re-discover the
lost wisdom, and spread it amongst the ignorant masses. Among them were
Buddha (623 BC), Pythagoras (570 BC), Zoroaster (600 BC), and Mahavir Jain
(599 BC).
People were so perturbed by the calamities of the previous centuries that they
began a vigorous attempt to finally document the ancient scriptures, which were
till then being transmitted in a purely oral fashion. It was in this grave social
and cultural milieu that the Mayans re-calculated and re-calibrated their
calendric system at Izapa sometime after 400 BC. And a few centuries later
Aryabhatta and others attempted to fix the beginnings of the Kali Yuga. Such an
effort would have been quite un-necessary if the cataclysms of the previous
centuries had not disrupted the flow of the rich oral traditions. However, much
of the knowledge from the previous epoch was irretrievably lost. For instance,
the original Vedas were comprised of 1,180 sakhas (i.e. branches), of which
only 7 or 8 sakhas (less than 1 %) are remembered now. As a result, it is only
natural to expect that even within the texts that were finally documented,
various errors and omissions had crept in. The mistakes in the Yuga Cycle
doctrine were some of them.
The Yuga Cycle timelines proposed here accurately mirrors the worldwide
environmental catastrophes that accompanies the transitional periods between
Yugas. The four key transitional periods, since the end of the Golden Age, have
been summarized here:
It is evident that the original Yuga Cycle was based on the Saptarsi Calendar. It
was of 12,000 years duration, comprised of four Yugas of equal duration of
2,700 years each, separated by transitional periods of 300 years. The complete
Yuga Cycle of 24,000 years was comprised of an ascending and descending
Yuga cycle, which followed each other for eternity like the cycles of day and
night. For the past 2,700 years we have been evolving through the ascending
Kali Yuga, and this Yuga is coming to an end in 2025. The end of the Yuga will
inevitably be followed by cataclysmic earth changes and civilization collapses, as
is characteristic of the transitional periods. The Dwapara Yuga is fundamentally
different from the Kali in its spiritual and material dimensions, as can be
gleaned from the ancient texts. Hence, we may anticipate far-reaching changes
in our environment, and possibly in our cosmic neighborhood, as we transition
to this period of enhanced consciousness. The current upswing in tectonic
activities and the increased incidence of extreme weather phenomena may be
indicative of the fact that we are slowly entering into a period of volatile earth
changes. We need to be aware of these greater cycles of time that govern
human civilization, and the changes that are looming in the horizon.
Endnotes
1. The Mahabharata, Book 3: Vana Parva, Tirtha-yatra Parva, SECTION CXLVIII, Kisari
Mohan Ganguli, tr.[1883-1896], from sacredtexts.com
2. Sûrya-Siddhânta: a text-book of Hindu astronomy, Ebenezer Burgess, Phanindralal
Gangooly, Chapter 1, p 41
3. Timaeus 39d
4. De die natali 18.11
5. Lokamanya Bâl Gangâdhar Tilak, The Arctic Home in the Vedas, Messrs. TILAK BROS,
Gaikwar Wada, Poona City,1903
6. Sri Yukteswar, The Holy Science, 1894, p xi
7. Jenny Strauss Clay, Hesiod’s Cosmos, Cambridge University Press, 2003, p 83
8. Alberuni’s India, Chapter XLII
9. Alberuni’s India, Chapter XLII, p 375
"The glasses would appear in the End Times and they would be in every house. It
would show the news and events of close and distant places."
Hazrat Ali (AS) predicted the invention of Televions 1400 years ago and also
predicted the availability of this device in every house and its purpose to show
news and events of near and far off places.
But the Invention of Television is at the End Times before the Arrival of Mahdi as
indicated by Hazrat Ali.
All the humanity is using these scientific discoveries and inventions in their day to
day lives. This is a very strong explanation of the End Times in which we all are
living, witnessing and using these things before the Arrival of Mahdi.
Those who argue that Third World War is impossible or not in our near future,
they should see this list of Wars in the link given below in the last 100 years and
then decide whether the next Big War is impossible?
http://www.war-memorial.net/wars_all.asp
More than 100 wars have already been fought in the world in the last 100 years
including World War – 1 and World War – 2.
Now the World War – 3 is in making and would finally release in 2021 AD.
That would be a very swift and most destructive war fought mostly by modern
Nuclear weapons in Middle East region. It would officially end in 2022 AD, when
the World elite would announce the ONE World Order i.e. New World Order by
placing Pope as the Head of the ONE WORLD Government.
It is now becoming a historical fact that the next Third World War would be
fought in the Middle East. So we should know a little about Middle East, existing
conflicts and wars in the Middle East and the Definition of the World War.
World War – A War would be known as World War if more than 2 continents
are directly involved and more than 20 countries are involved in the war.
The Middle East is a region that ncompasses a majority of Western Asia. The
term is used as a synonym for Near East, in opposition to Far East.
There are traditionally 16 countries in the Middle East region. The list of the
countries and the existing conflicts are as follows:
As per the definition of World War, more than 2 continents and 20 countries are
involved in the military conflict and riots in the Middle East countries. As NATO
comprises of 28 countries and the Military presence of NATA and US forces in the
Middle East along with the Russian Military presence in Syria and Iran and Chinese
economic interests in Iran and other Middle Eastern countries are the strong
indicators of the coming Big War in the Middle East some time in 2018 AD.
World War – 3 would be the Last World War and that is why the Holly wood
released the movie – World War Z, as the Alphabet “Z” is the Last Alphabet of
English language.
In Third World War almost 1/3rd population would die mostly in Middle Eastern
region but all the World would be affected by the consequences of its
destruction and the usage of modern nuclear weapons in the world.
Period from the Start of World War – 1 to the End of World War – 3
It is very interesting to note that the total time from the Start of World War – 1
which was started on 28th July, 1914 AD till the end of the World War – 3 and
Armageddon by 28th July, 2024 AD would be 110 years.
Mahdi’s Arrival would be deliver “Haq” and Justice to the whole world which is
absent from the World.
India Vs China
USA Vs Russia
USA Vs China
India Vs Pakistan
By the end of year - 2020 AD, the world population would reach by
7.8 billion people
1. China 19.03
2. India 17.40
3. USA 4.44
4. Indonesia 3.50
5. Brazil 2.81
6. Pakistan 2.60
7. Bangladesh 2.13
8. Nigeria 2.43
9. Russia 2.01
10. Japan 1.78
11. Egypt 1.20
12. Germany 1.13
13. Iran 1.08
14. Turkey 1.07
15. Thailand 0.92
16. France 0.92
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 716
17. UK 0.89
18. South Korea 0.70
19. Ukraine 0.64
20. Sudan 0.53
21. Iraq 0.48
22. Saudi Arabia 0.42
23. Venezula 0.40
24. Nepal 0.37
25. Afghanistan 0.36
26. North Korea 0.35
27. Syria 0.31
28. Israel 0.11
If you are aware of the modern current events and news then you should be aware
of that all the major conflicts and wars in the world are occurring in the above 28
countries of the World out of 196 Countries.
So if the conflicts and regional wars convert to a Big Hot Third World War, then one
can image that 70 % of the Population of the World would be affected and could be
killed in that War.
1. Destruction by Wars
2. Drought by Wars, Weather modifications, Food control, etc
3. Diseases by after effects of Wars, Drought and damaging Technology
Let's see what Secret Weapons of Mass Destruction they have and what they are
using against the populations of the World:
4. Food - Controlling Food Supply all over the world and only supplying the
Inorganic foods and promoting processed food items all over the globe
6. Economy - Central Banks and total control on the printing and distribution of
currencies all over the World. Setting booms and busts in the stock markets
8. Politics - Control over politicians and think tanks all over the world. Making
policies for the regions and playing with the countries as decided by them
11. Spying Agencies - Hold on the Intelligence Agencies of the World and
controlling the politics of the world by engaging and hiring the relevant people in
those Spying agencies of the World.
13. Atheism - Satanic Agenda of spreading Atheism all over the world and
separating people from Almighty God and their religions
These are the 13 Secret Weapons of the Elite Organizations of the World
Ruling Families to have Total Control over the population of the World and
implementing the New World Order by 2023 AD by eliminating two third of the
population of the World by Wars, Diseases and Draught.
"Five people would die out of Seven before the Arrival of Mahdi."
"One third people would die from Red Death because of War and another One third
people would die from White Death because of Drought and Diseases before the
Arrival of Mahdi."
Now if we take the Numbers - Five (5) and Seven (7) from the Hadith of our Prophet
Muhammad (PBUH) that this number of people would die because of the War and
put into the Equation as:
17 x 17 x 5 = 1445 Hijri
17 x 17 x 7 = 2023..........................2023 AD......Arrival Year of Mahdi
17 x 17 x 7 = 2023 AD
17 Wajib Rakats
There are total 51 Rakats in the whole day
17 x 3 = 51
The Number - 17 is the 7th Prime Number in Mathematics.
A point to be noted that the Year is also 2017 in which the major events in the
World would start which would lead the World towards World War - 3 in 2022 AD.
Now if we go through some facts on the population of the World during the last 100
years, we found that:
In 2023 AD, the Arrival year of Mahdi (AD), the World population would reduce to 2
Billion people approximately from 7.5 Billion people in 2022 AD after the death of
approximately 5 billion people.
As everyone has noticed that time is flying. The years, months, and weeks pass
quickly. Why? Sharing a good article by Jim Tetlow with Christian perspective
Many have noted that time seems to be accelerating. The hours, days, seasons, and
years appear to fly by faster than ever before. An hour no longer feels like 60
minutes (unless you’re waiting in line!). One week seems to run into the next. It’s as
if we’re watching the blur of a speeding train pass by. Science and Scripture The
pace of life has certainly increased, but is time speeding up?
However, it is interesting that secular scientists have determined that the universe
– which is comprised of time, space, matter, and energy – is expanding at an
increasing rate. Would this affect the dimension we call time? We on earth do not
understand time well enough to draw any conclusions; however, the Creator
certainly knows the answer. If an acceleration of time is occurring, is it anticipated
in the Bible? When describing the Great Tribulation period, Jesus stated: “And
unless those days were shortened, no flesh would be saved; but for the elect's sake
those days will be shortened” (Matthew 24:22).
Jesus said that if He did not cut those days short, man would destroy all flesh. 3 Of
course, the context of Matthew 24:22 refers to Jesus coming back to earth to rescue
His people from the intense trials which will come upon the earth during the
Tribulation. Yet, as is often true of other Bible prophecies, could this perceived
speeding of time foreshadow that which will be fully realized during the Great
Tribulation? Creation Birth Pangs Do other Scriptures indicate a speed-up of time in
the last days? While there is no single Scripture that specifically states that time will
speed up, several passages imply a quickening during earth’s final days. Jesus
likened the last days’ signs to birth pangs (Matthew 24:8).
The Greek word odin, often translated as sorrows in Matthew 24:8, literally means
birth pangs. In addition, the apostle Paul reminded us that “the creation itself also
will be delivered from the bondage
http://www.answersingenesis.org/e-mail/archive/AnswersUpdate/2007/0407.asp
http://www.cnn.com/TECH/space/9802/27/accelerating.universe/
This, in itself, is an amazing prophecy. Consider that when the Lord made this
declaration the armaments of His day were swords and spears. But today, with
As the time of delivery draws near, birth pangs always increase in both intensity
and frequency. Therefore, the creation itself would travail with increased frequency
as the time of delivery draws near. Interestingly, Scripture teaches that time is a
physical property and is therefore part of God’s creation (Genesis 1:1; 2 Timothy
1:9). Therefore the dimension we call time would also travail, and perhaps increase,
as earth’s final days climax.
Time Changes Jesus explained that at the very end of this age, “Immediately after
the tribulation of those days the sun will be darkened, and the moon will not give
its light; the stars will fall from heaven, and the powers of the heavens will be
shaken” (Matthew 24:29). We are told that God created “lights” (the sun, moon,
and stars) in the heavens “for signs and seasons, and for days and years” (Genesis
1:14-16).
For instance, a year is the time required for the earth to travel once around the sun.
The seasons are caused by the changing position of the earth in relation to the sun.
And the moon’s phases follow one another in clock-like precision – constituting the
lunar calendar. If these lights – the sun, moon, and stars – are affected in the last
days, and the very “powers of heaven” shaken, does this indicate a significant
disruption in how the dimension of time will pass?
In the Book of Amos we are informed: “And it shall come to pass in that day [the
Tribulation], says the Lord GOD, that I will make the sun go down at noon, and I will
darken the earth in broad daylight” (Amos 8:9). Certainly God Himself “changes the
times and the seasons” (Daniel 2:21) as He sees fit.
He is the one and only Sovereign God. He alone determines kings and nations and
ordinances and times and seasons. So it is no surprise that His Word anticipates this
time dilation, and perhaps acceleration. Interestingly, Scripture even informs us
that the Antichrist “shall speak pompous words against the Most High, shall
persecute the saints of the Most High, and shall intend to change times and law…”
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 729
(Daniel 7:25). More Scriptures that Suggest Acceleration Other Scriptures that imply
this quickening of life include Daniel 12:4: “But you, Daniel, shut up the words, and
seal the book until the time of the end; many shall run to and fro, and knowledge
shall increase.” Today we are witnessing an explosion of available knowledge.
With the advent of the computer, and now the Internet, it is estimated that our
cumulative knowledge is doubling every five years. And since the Industrial
Revolution, multitudes are running to and fro just as the Bible prophesied. This
exponential increase in available knowledge, and the ability to travel conveniently
at accelerated speeds, is beyond what anyone could have imagined!
Furthermore, Jesus declared in the final book of the Bible: “Behold, I am coming
quickly!” (Revelation 3:11). In fact, Jesus reiterates three times in the last chapter of
the Bible that He is coming quickly (Revelation 22:7, 12, 20). Some commentators
note that the Lord is not only declaring that His return is imminent, but that this
phrase also indicates that once these events begin to occur they will follow in rapid-
fire succession.
One more Scripture concerning the last days that we will quote states concisely,
“The great day of the LORD is near; it is near and hastens quickly…” (Zephaniah
1:14). Last Days Bible Prophecies Those who study the Bible know that we are living
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 730
in the last days and the times of these prophesied birth pangs are currently ramping
up. Every major last days’ trend anticipated in the Bible is being positioned in place.
Like a tsunami that sweeps the globe, developments in Bible prophecy are
overwhelming and irrefutable. During the Olivet Discourse, Jesus listed several last
days’ signs and then summarized: “So you also, when you see all these things, know
that it is near – at the doors! Assuredly, I say to you, this generation will by no
means pass away till all these things take place” (Matthew 24:33-34).
In other words, once we see all the signs coming into focus, we should expect the
climax of these events within one generation. 5 Here is a list of some of the major
Biblical last days’ trends – all of which are in place today:
7) Israel regathered into their nation after being dispersed for nearly two millennia
(Isaiah 11:11-12; 43:5-6; 66:8; Jeremiah 31:7-10; Ezekiel 37:21-22; 38:8).
10) Preparations to rebuild the Temple in Jerusalem (Daniel 9:27; 12:11; Mark
13:14; Revelation 11:1-2).
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 731
11) Russia, Iran and other countries rising as military powers and preparing a
surprise attack on Israel (Ezekiel 38).
16) Babylon reemerging on the world scene (Zechariah 5:11; Isaiah 13; Revelation
17-19).
17) Increased interest in the occult, witchcraft, and sorceries (Revelation 9:21;
18:23; 21:8; Isaiah 47:9-15; Micah 5:10-15).
18) The kings of the East rising (Revelation 9:14-16; 16:12). There are many more
last days’ signs that appear to be culminating before our very eyes.
Therefore, all indications are that delivery must also be fast approaching. Whether
time is actually speeding up, or whether our perception is the result of these birth
pangs increasing, we cannot be certain. One thing is for sure, the Bible is true and
the Lord’s return is near. The Gospel Yes, events are climaxing. Time is short.
Therefore, the most important question for each of us to answer is “Do we know
the Lord?” “Are we prepared to meet our Creator?” The Bible states that sin has
separated us from God (Isaiah 59:2). A quick review of the Ten Commandments
(Exodus 20) should prove this fact. One lie makes us liars in God’s holy eyes. Placing
our interests or any created thing before our Creator or His Word is idolatry.
Lust is adultery according to Jesus (Matthew 5:27-28). Saying “Oh my God” casually
is taking His name in vain – also known as blasphemy – and this commandment is
even listed before “You shall not murder” (Exodus 20:7-13). The truth is we have all
sinned against our Creator.
The wonderful news is that our Creator, the Lord Jesus Christ, became a man and
died for our sins. Jesus never sinned yet He willingly and in love died in our place.
He paid for all our sins on the cross and then rose from the grave, defeating death!
All who repent (turn) from their sins and trust Jesus as Lord and Savior will be
saved. Time is short. Please do not wait.
Place your trust in Jesus Christ as Creator, Lord and Savior today! “Whereas you do
not know what will happen tomorrow. For what is your life? It is even a vapor that
appears for a little time and then vanishes away” (James 4:14). “Behold, now is the
accepted time; behold, now is the day of salvation” (2 Corinthians 6:2). “For by Him
(Jesus Christ) all things were created that are in heaven and that are on earth,
visible and invisible, whether thrones or dominions or principalities or powers.
All things were created through Him and for Him. And He is before all things, and in
Him all things consist. And He is the head of the body, the church, who is the
beginning, the firstborn from the dead, that in all things He may have the
preeminence. For it pleased the Father that in Him all the fullness should dwell, and
by Him to reconcile all things to Himself, by Him, whether things on earth or things
in heaven, having made peace through the blood of His cross.
And you, who once were alienated and enemies in your mind by wicked works, yet
now He has reconciled in the body of His flesh through death, to present you holy,
and blameless, and above reproach in His sight” (Colossians 1:16-22).
https://www.thesun.co.uk/news/4204249/mystic-predicted-donald-trumps-
presidency-world-war-3-exact-date/
"Third world war has been feared to be the end of the world for decades now.
However, ever since Donald Trump was elected as the President of United States,
there have been increased rumours of World War III becoming a possibility. And
these rumours are now increasing as Clairvoyant Horacio Villegas has predicted that
the third world war will begin on 13th May 2017. With the unique and invasive
methods of President Donald Trump which has openly challenged and ridiculed
various countries, the tension in the world has been rising and to add to this, the
‘Messenger of God’ has claimed that the world is heading for a nuclear war and he
also claimed that President Donald Trump will be the one to initiate the third World
War. The mystic who predicted Donald Trump’s victory in the US presidential
elections claims that he had a vision about this catastrophic event. Third World War
Start Date of First World War = 28th July = End Date of Third World War
There would be 15 Prince after the death of King Abdullah before the Arrival of
Mahdi but their rule is very short for months and days as predicted by our Imam
Jaffar e Sadiq.
https://www.vox.com/world/2017/11/17/16658142/saudi-arabia-prince-salman-
corruption-oil-women-rights
"Saudi Crown Prince Mohammed bin Salman’s decision to arrest scores of the
country’s most prominent officials and business elites under the banner of an anti-
corruption purge last week was a remarkable power play, an unprecedented move
designed to concentrate all authority in the Gulf state in one man’s hands.
But the radical shake-up was also about something else: preparing for life after oil.
MBS, as the 32-year-old heir to the throne is widely known, has not just been
detaining people — he’s also been seizing billions of dollars of their money. And he’s
using this crackdown to make the case to the world that Saudi Arabia is a reformed
nation cleansed of graft, and worthy of a big boost of foreign investment.
In other words, the purge is more than just a way of eliminating his rivals and
consolidating power. Experts say that MBS sees it as an opportunity to refill his
country’s coffers while he works to modernize the stagnating Saudi economy and
wean it off its near-total reliance on oil.
MBS’s anti-corruption committee, which he formed just hours before the arrests
began on November 4, has pledged to take “whatever measures are deemed
necessary” to confiscate the assets of corrupt officials and businessmen.
Saudi authorities have detained more than 200 people and frozen thousands of
bank accounts. A US official briefed on the crackdown told the New York Times that
the committee has even tried to get some of the people caught up in the sweep to
sign over large amounts of money in order to secure better treatment while
detained. (At least 17 people have required medical treatment due to abuse from
authorities.)
The Riyadh Chamber of Commerce and Industry estimates that if the committee
attempted to retrieve all the revenue lost to corruption, it could amount to as much
as $800 billion.
“A key goal of the arrest campaign seems to be about replenishing state coffers,”
Lori Plotkin Boghardt, an Arab Gulf specialist and fellow at the Washington Institute
for Near East Policy, told me.
And Saudi officials haven’t been shy about trying to use the arrests to persuade
skeptical foreign investors that the country’s notoriously corrupt economy was
beginning to change.
“The old ways have ceased to be sustainable long ago and must be replaced,” Majid
al-Qasabi, the Saudi minister of commerce and investment, wrote in an op-
ed published in the Wall Street Journal on November 12. “The new way will offer a
predictable long-term approach and transparent business environment for
investors.”
Anxiety over oil addiction also underlies a number of MBS’s other headline-grabbing
maneuvers in the past couple of years. Analysts say his moves to legalize driving for
women, relax a ban on musical concerts, and curtail the powers of religious
police can be traced back, at least in part, to his concern with making Saudi’s
economy more efficient, diverse, and attractive to foreign talent.
That means MBS is more than just a power-hungry upstart. He appears to have a
real commitment to shepherding Saudi Arabia’s economy into the modern era in
order to preempt the financial catastrophe that will accompany a continued decline
in oil prices. But that also means upending many of the basic tenets that have
governed Saudi life for decades. It’s a risky gamble, and the country’s future hangs
in the balance.
Saudi Arabia depends nearly entirely on oil sales. That’s a bad place to be.
But relying on one commodity has made Saudi Arabia and its neighbors very
economically vulnerable. And while Saudi Arabia has always known that
it should diversify its economy, the pressure created by the plunge in oil prices in
recent years has forced it to finally start scrambling to do so.
The sharp drop in global oil prices began in 2014, largely driven by the boom in the
world’s supply of oil stemming from the shale revolution in the US. Saudi’s oil
exports have lost value quickly: Today, the price of a barrel of crude oil is
around half of what it was in early 2014.
So both from the supply side and the demand side, Saudi knows that oil has bleak
prospects and it has to do something about that. Saudi’s foreign reserves have
The government also knows that with less funds it is more susceptible to domestic
unrest. Saudi Arabia has long used generous social spending and subsidies on
utilities as a way to effectively buy off dissent against its autocratic style of
government, such as when it announced $100 billion in spending projects to
preempt Arab Spring-inspired protests in 2011.
In 2016, MBS unveiled his plan to ward off future ruin with a program called “Vision
2030.”It’s a grand proposal that involves diversifying the Saudi economy away from
oil to generate revenue from sectors like tech and entertainment services. The plan
includes huge projects like selling off a 5 percent share of its state-owned oil
producer Aramco, turning its neglected beaches into tourist destinations, and
investing in a $500 billion megacity where transportation is entirely automated.
The major challenge that MBS faces in his quest to change Saudi Arabia’s economy
is figuring out how to navigate the obstacles of Saudi society and governance that
stand in the way. So far, his approach has been to remove them aggressively.
MBS’s corruption crackdown is perhaps his most brazen attempt yet at removing
barriers to Saudi economic growth.
First, there are the assets MBS is seizing from scores of Saudi citizens, which could
be used to invest in underdeveloped sectors. “He’s working to take economic power
away from places where he can’t control the money and putting it into places where
he can control the money,” John Volle, a Middle East historian at Georgetown
University, told me. “It opens the door to give more resources to make the 2030
dream possible.”
Then there’s the narrative of a Saudi Arabia free from corruption that should attract
the attention of foreign investors. It’s not pure optics — corruption is a serious
problem in Saudi, and this could counteract it.
Economists and business analysts have pointed out all kinds of illicit and
questionable economic practices in Saudi Arabia, such as the way officials
routinely embezzle 10 to 25 percent of government contracts. The government also
uses red tape to shield businesses owned by many members of the royal family from
foreign competition.
MBS’s purge could bring an end to those kinds of practices and discourage them
from happening in the future. The fact that his move was motivated by a desire to
centralize power and generate money doesn’t necessarily mean that the effects on
corruption won’t be real. Consider, for example, how China really has seen a
reduction in corruption in the wake of Chinese President Xi Jinping’s draconian anti-
corruption campaign that most analysts also see as a power grab.
Simon Henderson, director of the Gulf and Energy Policy Program at the
Washington Institute, told me he suspects a “mere fraction” of the assets that MBS
is seizing will make it into government coffers.
The legal process for transferring assets from detained individuals to the
government is unclear, especially if the assets are held abroad and thus in different
legal jurisdictions. (The US National Bureau of Economic Research estimates that
Saudis have around $300 billionstashed abroad in foreign tax havens.)
“What’s the value of a secondhand grand palace in Riyadh? If it’s available [for
sale] to foreigners, what are their chances of getting the title changed?” Henderson
said.
He also points out that foreign investors could be spooked by the volatile and
arbitrary nature of the detainments. The fact that many of MBS’s captives have
experienced injuries that require medical treatment likely won’t give investors
confidence in the rule of law in Saudi.
Furthermore, since MBS used his corruption crackdown to single out rivals and
opponents, it’s unclear if his allies will clean up their act or assume they can act with
impunity.
It’ll take months and years to figure out how serious the prince’s initiative is. But
one thing is clear: MBS is not lacking in ambition."
http://theconversation.com/saudi-princes-power-play-is-more-than-just-a-purge-
87634
"The night of November 5 was a long one in Riyadh. Saudi authorities began a
widespread crackdown aimed, on the one hand, against former economic
policymakers and business leaders and, on the other, against the chiefs of the Saudi
National Guard and Saudi Royal Navy. This had the look of a political purge – but it
is much bigger than that.
The first sign of how serious this was came on November 4 with the removal
of Prince Mutaib bin Abdullah, eldest son of the late King Abdullah and head of a
powerful fiefdom, the Saudi Arabian National Guard. Essentially a force of tribal
recruits from throughout Saudi Arabia, the guard’s structure still bears the mark of
King Abdullah, who oversaw it from its foundation in 1962 before passing it to
Mutaib in 2015.
Then it was the turn of Saudi economic moguls, who have influenced financial
policymaking and its implementation for years. The most remarkable takedowns
were those of Prince Waleed bin Talal, one of the richest men in the world and a
nephew of King Salman; Ibrahim Assaf, former finance minister and father of Prince
Waleed’s daughter-in-law; Prince Turki bin Abdullah, the former governor of
Riyadh; and Adel Fakeih, minister for economy and planning.
Also taken into custody were Khaled al-Tuweijri, the extremely influential advisor to
King Abdullah and head of his royal court, and Amar al-Dabbagh, former head of
the Saudi Arabian General Investment Authority. Business magnates were seized
too, among them Saleh Kamel, Walid al-Ibrahim, and Bakr bin Laden, owner of
the Saudi Bin Laden group.
In the world of money and communications, Walid al-Ibrahim was owner of the
Middle East Broadcasting Company and its subsidiary channels. Walid also launched
al-Arabiya News TV, in which Abdul Aziz Bin Fahd – also a nephew of Walid and the
youngest son of King Fahd – reportedly had major shares. Saleh Abdullah Kamel is
another prominent businessman, and the chairman of Dallah Albaraka Group.
Why now?
This shakeup is not just a consolidation of power by the crown prince, Mohammad
bin Salman, but an act of persecution against members of King Abdullah’s
policymaking circle. To properly move on from the Abdullah era, the leftovers of the
old order had to be scrapped, and suddenly their time was up. The removal of
Mutaib Bin Abdullah is merely a continuation of Mohammad bin Salman’s strategy
to bring the various royals’ security fiefdoms under his direct control. The removal
of former crown prince and interior minister Mohammad bin Nayef, King Salman’s
nephew, was only the first step.
The Saudi government has framed the arrests as an anti-corruption drive and
touted them as proof it is prepared to act against even the kingdom’s richest and
most powerful figures. Even Prince Mutaib has been purportedly accused of graft in
the purchase of bulletproof vests. Mohammad Bin Salman has stuck to the anti-
corruption line in public, as have his lieutenants; in an interview with Bloomberg,
the crown prince’s advisor, Mohammad al-Sheikh, spoke of uncontrolled spending
during the oil boom of 2010-2014, with US$80-100 billion lost to inefficiency each
year.
These financial habits and dealings led Saudi Arabia into a difficult situation, and at
the time, Mohammad bin Salman – then “only” the defence minister – was not
powerful enough to take on these influential royals and business elites. But once he
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 748
became crown prince in June 2017 and saw Mohammad bin Nayef dispatched, the
stage was set for a big political leap.
Bringing the state’s axe down on the Abdullah circle could fulfil an economic motive
and satisfy a PR objective, raising the crown prince’s profile with the Saudi
populace. And for now, Mohammad bin Salman has checked any attempts by the
Saudi elite to question his grand schemes of the Economic Transformation Plan and
Vision 2030. Having already detained religious dissenters, the crown prince has
secured the economic and business fronts in his strategy, and managed to reshape
his country’s security apparatuses. The way is clear, if all goes to plan, for him to
take the Saudi throne."
The real motives of Crown Prince Muhammad Bin Salman are as follows:
Want the Kingdom after the death of his father - King Salman
Want to accept Israel as decided with the USA and Israel if he wants to be
next King of Saudi Arabia.
Control of Power in all impotant sectors.
Need Money to continue War in Yemen, Syria and Lebanon.
Need Money to pay USA to wage possible War against Iran in the near future.
Wants to put Saudi Aramco - Saudi Arabian Oil Company in the Stocks
market.
As we have seen the political and economic differences have emerged in the Royal
Saudi family as predicted by our Imam (AS). Now we can expect the fall of the Saudi
Royal family in the near future and the Kings of Saudi Arabia would come and go
quickly as also predicted by Imam Jaffar e Sadiq (AS) before the Arrival of Mahdi.
The 1st time, the Turks rise as Seljuk Empire. The 2nd time, the Turks rise as the
Ottoman Empire and our Prophet Muhammad (PBUH) told in one of His Ahadith
that:
That means that the Turks would Rise as a power from Turkey and have influence
over different parts or countries of the World as we are witnessing these years that
Turkey has sent its Army to Libya, Syria, Azerbaijan, Mediterranean Sea, etc and
exerting its force as a Regional Power in the Middle East and Europe.
The Seljuk empire was founded by Tughril Beg (990–1063) and his
brother Chaghri Beg (989–1060) in 1037. From their homelands near the Aral
Seljuk gave his name to both the empire and the Seljuk dynasty. The Seljuks
united the fractured political landscape of the eastern Islamic world and played a
key role in the first and second crusades. Highly Persianized in culture and
language, the Seljuks also played an important role in the development of
the Turko-Persian tradition, even exporting Persian culture to Anatolia. The
settlement of Turkic tribes in the northwestern peripheral parts of the empire, for
the strategic military purpose of fending off invasions from neighboring states,
led to the progressive Turkicization of those areas.
The imperial family was deposed from power and the sultanate was abolished on 1
November 1922 during ring the Turkish War of Independence. The Republic of
Turkey was declared the following year. The living members of the dynasty were
initially sent into exile as persona non
non-grata,, though some have been allowed to
return and live as private citizens in Tur
Turkey.
key. In its current form, the family is known
as the Osmanoğlu family.
The Current political and military role of Turkey in Libya, Syria, Azerbaijan, Qatar
and its relationship with Russia, China, Iran and Pakistan is changing the Political
and military theatre in Europe, Central Asia and Middle East.
3rd Rise of Turks.....In End Times just before the Arrival of Mahdi
His full description was mentioned by Hazrat Ali with his first and middle name and
our Hazrat told that once he quit from the Rule, then wait for Imam Mahdi because
Imam Mahdi's signs of Arrival would be knocking at the doors of the Momineen
who have been waiting for centuries for their Imam's Arrival.
Then Hazrat Ali motivated the Muslims to go towards Mahdi after His Arrival when
our Mahdi calls us to join His forces even if we have to crawl on ice mountains to
reach him.
Before he entered politics, Mubarak was a career officer in the Egyptian Air Force.
He served as its commander from 1972 to 1975 and rose to the rank of air chief
marshal in 1973. He assumed the presidency after President Anwar
Sadat's assassination in 1981. Mubarak's presidency lasted almost thirty years,
making him Egypt's longest-serving ruler since Muhammad Ali Pasha, who ruled the
country for 43 years from 1805 to 1848. Mubarak stepped down during
the Egyptian Revolution of 2011 after 18 days of demonstrations. On 11 February
2011, former Vice President Omar Suleiman announced that Mubarak and he had
resigned as president and vice president respectively and transferred authority to
the Supreme Council of the Armed Forces.
Hazrat Jabraeel (AS) who is the Angel specific to reveal and deliver the Holy
Messages from God told about the End Times social and religious conditions before
the Arrival of Mahdi and Hazrat Isa (AS).
That is why we see many Prophecies mentioned in the Book of Daniel in the Old
Testament which were mentioned by Prophet Daniel (AS).
The 2500 years period would be approximately around 2023 AD when the Arrival of
Mahdi is expected.
In His Works, he mentioned that the End Times would be around 2500 years from
his period which was from 428 - 347 BC, which is approximately 2500 years from the
period in which we are living.
So he also indicated the approximate time for the End Times which matches our
time.
They all agree that the whole World is heading towards a Major Economic and
Political Crisis in the coming years. One can go to Internet and see their reports and
analysis regarding the current Economic and Political situation in the World which
are clear signs of the Global melt down of the whole political and economic
structure in the World.
All people can witness the condition of women all around the globe. The Satanic
forces are using the women in all the evil ways. The nudity among the women is at
its peak in the world.
We don't need to elaborate on this topic. The women are totally in the trap of
Satanic forces and submitted their souls in their hands. It is a moto of New World
Order to use women in its interest and now you can see their role in the society.
What is the Doomsday Clock? The Doomsday Clock is a design that warns the public
about how close we are to destroying our world with dangerous technologies of our own
making. It is a metaphor, a reminder of the perils we must address if we are to survive on
the planet.
When the Doomsday Clock was as created in 1947, the greatest danger to humanity came from
nuclear weapons, in particular from the prospect that the United States and the Soviet
Union were headed for a nuclear arms race. The Bulletin considered possible catastrophic
disruptions from climate
limate change in its hand
hand-setting
setting deliberations for the first time in 2007.
2020 AD
IT IS 100 SECONDS TO MIDNIGHT - CLOSER THAN EVER
2020:
"Humanity continues to face two simultaneous existential danger
dangers—
—nuclear war and
climate change—that
that are compounded by a threat multiplier, cyber-enabled
cyber
information warfare, that undercuts society’s ability to respond. The international
In the nuclear realm, national leaders have ended or undermined several major arms
control treaties and negotiations during the last year, creating an environment
conducive to a renewed nuclear arms race, to the proliferation of nuclear weapons,
and to lowered barriers to nuclear war. Political conflicts regarding nuclear programs
in Iran and North Korea remain unresolved and are, if anything, worsening. US-
Russia cooperation on arms control and disarmament is all but nonexistent.
Public awareness of the climate crisis grew over the course of 2019, largely because
of mass protests by young people around the world. Just the same, governmental
action on climate change still falls far short of meeting the challenge at hand. At UN
climate meetings last year, national delegates made fine speeches but put forward
few concrete plans to further limit the carbon dioxide emissions that are disrupting
Earth’s climate. This limited political response came during a year when the effects
of manmade climate change were manifested by one of the warmest years on
record, extensive wildfires, and quicker-than-expected melting of glacial ice.
Faced with this daunting threat landscape and a new willingness of political leaders
to reject the negotiations and institutions that can protect civilization over the long
term, the Bulletin of the Atomic Scientists Science and Security Board today moves
the Doomsday Clock 20 seconds closer to midnight—closer to apocalypse than ever.
In so doing, board members are explicitly warning leaders and citizens around the
world that the international security situation is now more dangerous than it has ever
been, even at the height of the Cold War.
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 767
Civilization-ending nuclear war—whether started by design, blunder, or simple
miscommunication—is a genuine possibility. Climate change that could devastate
the planet is undeniably happening. And for a variety of reasons that include a
corrupted and manipulated media environment, democratic governments and other
institutions that should be working to address these threats have failed to rise to the
challenge.
The Bulletin believes that human beings can manage the dangers posed by the
technology that humans create. Indeed, in the 1990s leaders in the United States
and the Soviet Union took bold actions that made nuclear war markedly less likely—
and as a result the Bulletin moved the minute hand of the Doomsday Clock the
farthest it has been from midnight.
Although Iran has not formally exited the nuclear deal, its actions appear likely to
reduce the “breakout time” it would need to build a nuclear weapon, to less than the
12 months envisioned by parties to the JCPOA. At that point, other parties to the
nuclear agreement—including the European Union and possibly Russia and China—
may be compelled to acknowledge that Iran is not complying. What little is left of the
agreement could crumble, reducing constraints on the Iranian nuclear program and
increasing the likelihood of military conflict with the United States.
The assault on arms control is exacerbated by the decay of great power relations.
Despite declaring its intent to bring China into an arms control agreement, the United
States has adopted a bullying and derisive tone toward its Chinese and Russian
competitors. The three countries disagree on whether to pursue negotiations on
outer space, missile defenses, and cyberwarfare. One of the few issues they do
agree on: They all oppose the Treaty on the Prohibition of Nuclear Weapons, which
opened for signature in 2017. As an alternative, the United States has promoted,
within the context of the review conference process of the Nuclear Non-Proliferation
Treaty (NPT), an initiative called “Creating the Environment for Nuclear
Disarmament.” The success of this initiative may depend on its reception at the 2020
NPT Review Conference—a landmark 50th anniversary of the treaty.
US efforts to reach agreement with North Korea made little progress in 2019, despite
an early summit in Hanoi and subsequent working-level meetings. After a North
Korean deadline for end-of-year progress passed, Kim Jong Un announced he would
demonstrate a new “strategic weapon” and indicated that North Korea would forge
ahead without sanctions relief. Until now, the willingness of both sides to continue a
dialogue was positive, but Chairman Kim seems to have lost faith in President
Trump’s willingness to come to an agreement.
Without conscious efforts to reinvigorate arms control, the world is headed into an
unregulated nuclear environment. Such an outcome could reproduce the intense
arms race that was the hallmark of the early decades of the nuclear age. Both the
United States and Russia have massive stockpiles of warheads and fissile material
in reserve from which to draw, if they choose. Should China decide to build up to US
and Russian arsenal levels—a development previously dismissed as unlikely but
now being debated—deterrence calculations could become more complicated,
making the situation more dangerous. An unconstrained North Korea, coupled with a
more assertive China, could further destabilize Northeast Asian security.
As we wrote last year and re-emphasize now, any belief that the threat of nuclear
war has been vanquished is a mirage.
Lip service continued, with some governments now echoing many scientists’ use of
the term “climate emergency.” But the policies and actions that governments
proposed were hardly commensurate to an emergency. Exploration and exploitation
of fossil fuels continues to grow. A recent UN report finds that global governmental
support and private sector investment have put fossil fuels on course to be over-
produced at more than twice the level needed to meet the emissions-reduction goals
set out in Paris.
The consequences of climate change in the lives of people around the world have
been striking and tragic. India was ravaged in 2019 both by record-breaking heat
waves and record-breaking floods, each taking a heavy toll on human lives. Wildfires
from the Arctic to Australia, and many regions in between, have erupted with a
frequency, intensity, extent, and duration that further degrade ecosystems and
endanger people. It is not good news when wildfires spring up simultaneously in both
the northern and southern hemispheres, making the notion of a limited “fire season”
increasingly a thing of the past.
But the actions of many world leaders continue to increase global risk, at a time
when the opposite is urgently needed.
In recent years, national leaders have increasingly dismissed information with which
they do not agree as fake news, promulgating their own untruths, exaggerations, and
misrepresentations in response. Unfortunately, this trend accelerated in 2019.
Leaders claimed their lies to be truth, calling into question the integrity of, and
creating public distrust in, national institutions that have historically provided societal
stability and cohesion.
In the United States, there is active political antagonism toward science and a
growing sense of government-sanctioned disdain for expert opinion, creating fear
and doubt regarding well-established science about climate change and other urgent
challenges. Countries have long attempted to employ propaganda in service of their
political agendas. Now, however, the internet provides widespread, inexpensive
access to worldwide audiences, facilitating the broadcast of false and manipulative
messages to large populations and enabling millions of individuals to indulge in their
prejudices, biases, and ideological differences.
Meanwhile, space has become a new arena for weapons development, with multiple
countries testing and deploying kinetic, laser, and radiofrequency anti-satellite
capabilities, and the United States creating a new military service, the Space Force.
The overall global trend is toward complex, high-tech, highly automated, high-speed
warfare. The computerized and increasingly AI-assisted nature of militaries, the
sophistication of their weapons, and the new, more aggressive military doctrines
asserted by the most heavily armed countries could result in global catastrophe.
But this year, we move the Clock 20 seconds closer to midnight not just because
trends in our major areas of concern—nuclear weapons and climate change—have
failed to improve significantly over the last two years. We move the Clock toward
midnight because the means by which political leaders had previously managed
these potentially civilization-ending dangers are themselves being dismantled or
undermined, without a realistic effort to replace them with new or better management
regimes. In effect, the international political infrastructure for controlling existential
risk is degrading, leaving the world in a situation of high and rising threat. Global
leaders are not responding appropriately to reduce this threat level and counteract
the hollowing-out of international political institutions, negotiations, and agreements
that aim to contain it. The result is a heightened and growing risk of disaster.
To be sure, some of these negative trends have been long in development. That they
could be seen coming miles in the distance but still were allowed to occur is not just
disheartening but also a sign of fundamental dysfunction in the world’s efforts to
manage and reduce existential risk.
Last year, we called the extremely troubling state of world security an untenable
“new abnormal.”
“In this extraordinarily dangerous state of affairs, nuclear war and climate change
pose severe threats to humanity, yet go largely unaddressed,” we wrote. “Meanwhile,
the use of cyber-enabled information warfare by countries, leaders, and subnational
groups of many stripes around the world exacerbates these enormous threats and
endangers the information ecosystem that underpins democracy and civilization as
we know it. At the same time, other disruptive technologies complicate and further
darken the world security situation.”
There are many practical, concrete steps that leaders could take—and citizens
should demand—to improve the current, absolutely unacceptable state of world
security affairs. Among them:
US and Russian leaders can return to the negotiating table to: reinstate the
INF Treaty or take other action to restrain an unnecessary arms race in
The global security situation is unsustainable and extremely dangerous, but that
situation can be improved, if leaders seek change and citizens demand it. There is
no reason the Doomsday Clock cannot move away from midnight. It has done so in
the past when wise leaders acted, under pressure from informed and engaged
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 774
citizens around the world. We believe that mass civic engagement will be necessary
to compel the change the world needs.
Citizens around the world have the power to unmask social media disinformation and
improve the long-term prospects of their children and grandchildren. They can insist
on facts, and discount nonsense. They can demand—through public protest, at the
ballot box, and in many other creative ways—that their leaders take immediate steps
to reduce the existential threats of nuclear war and climate change. It is now 100
seconds to midnight, the most dangerous situation that humanity has ever faced.
Now is the time to unite—and act.
The past 75 years have seen the risks of nuclear war reach startling heights that
have included the United States and Soviet Union testing hydrogen bombs; multiple
moments when by either accident or design a nuclear exchange between the great
powers seemed possible if not probable; an increasing number of states obtaining
nuclear weapons; and most recently North Korean and American leaders exchanging
childish name calling and not-so-childish nuclear threats. On the climate side, the
past 50 years have resulted in a growing consensus that humans are dangerously
disrupting their environment. As early as 1978, the Bulletin of the Atomic
Scientists asked the question “Is mankind warming the earth?” with a cover story that
answered “Yes.”
But just as humanity has come perilously close to obliterating itself, it has also
experienced moments of exquisite forethought, well-planned efforts to protect the
planet accomplished by determined people. Political leaders were able to cut the
number of total nuclear warheads significantly, and undertake a series of confidence-
building measures that reduced the likelihood of nuclear war. In 2016, another
optimistic moment appeared: Countries from around the world began charting paths
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 775
toward reducing greenhouse gas emissions and investing in bridges to a cleaner
future by adopting the Paris agreement, which builds on the UN Framework
Convention on Climate Change process.
The Bulletin’s Science and Security Board convened in Chicago in November 2019
with a keen recognition of this year’s historic anniversaries. What follows is an
acknowledgment that we live in troubling times, with the risk of nuclear accident
seemingly growing by the day as the time available to responsibly stem the climate
crisis shrinks just as quickly. For these reasons, and others spelled out in the pages
that follow, the time on the Doomsday Clock continues to tick ever closer to midnight.
As seasoned watchers know, the Doomsday Clock did not move in 2019. But the
Clock’s minute hand was set forward in January 2018 by 30 seconds, to two minutes
before midnight, the closest it had been to midnight since 1953 in the early years of
the Cold War. Previously, the Clock was moved from three minutes to midnight to
two and a half minutes to midnight in January 2017. This year, the Science and
Security Board moved the time from two minutes to 100 seconds to midnight, a
decision taken in full recognition of its historic nature. You will see in the following
statement the articulation of why board members reset the clock, and what they
suggest leaders and citizens around the world do to eventually begin moving it away
from midnight.
US sports terminology provides an analogy for the current moment. As fans who
watch it know, American football incorporates a two-minute warning, a break at the
end of each half that differentiates the last two minutes from all that came before.
Decisions are made with different strategic reference points, and expectations are
raised for decisive action. The last two minutes bring newfound vigilance and focus
to participants and viewers alike. Every second matters.
As far as the Bulletin and the Doomsday Clock are concerned, the world has entered
into the realm of the two-minute warning, a period when danger is high and the
margin for error low. The moment demands attention and new, creative responses. If
decision makers continue to fail to act—pretending that being inside two minutes is
no more urgent than the preceding period—citizens around the world should
rightfully echo the words of climate activist Greta Thunberg and ask:
“How dare you?”
Public engagement and civic action are needed and needed urgently. Science and
technology can bring enormous benefits, but without constant vigilance, they bring
enormous risks as well. The Bulletin of the Atomic Scientists is grateful to our
supporters, who allow us to carry on our important work and share it with our growing
global audience. More people came to the Bulletin’s website in 2019 than any year
prior, and our magazine continues to be read and downloaded by followers around
the world. The resurgent interest in issues of nuclear risk, climate change, and other
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 776
disruptive technologies, especially among those 35 years and younger, shows that
young people are hardly apathetic to the deteriorating environment in which we now
operate. Rather, it shows that tomorrow’s leaders are seeking new images,
messages, policies, and approaches and no longer assume that today’s leaders will
keep them safe and secure.
I thank the members of the Bulletin’s Science and Security Board for once again
taking seriously their responsibility for setting the Doomsday Clock and producing
this statement to explain their decision. John Mecklin, the Bulletin’s editor-in-chief
and the writer of this report, ensured that it offers the strongest possible articulation
of the ideas and approaches that were discussed among the Board’s expert
membership. None of this would have been possible without the support of
foundations, corporations and individuals who contribute to the Bulletin year in and
year out. For a full listing of our financial supporters, please see our annual report on
our website at the thebulletin.org
In addition to the anniversaries listed above, December 2020 also marks the 75th
anniversary of the first edition of the Bulletin of the Atomic Scientists, initially a six-
page, black-and-white bulletin and later a magazine, created in anticipation that “the
atom bomb would be on the first of many dangerous presents from Pandora’s box of
modern science.” Over the years, we’ve published debates and recommendations
that have laid the foundation for turning the hands of the Doomsday Clock away from
midnight. We have done it before, which means we can certainly do it again. In 2020,
however, world leaders have less time before midnight in which to make their
decisions, and the need to take urgent action to reduce the risk of nuclear war and
climate change is great. Please continue to petition your leaders to act now, and as if
their lives depend upon it. Because theirs—and ours—most certainly do."
These last 7 years before the Second Coming of Jesus Christ and the Arrival of
Mahdi are from 2nd September, 2016 AD till 28th July, 2023 AD
Last 7 Years of Tribulation ...................2nd Sept, 2016 till 28th July, 2023 AD
Last 360 Fridays....................2nd Sept, 2016 (Friday) till 28th July, 2023 (Friday)
It seems much more reasonable, particularly in the light of His promises to save His church from the
“wrath to come,” that He would have His church from the “hour of trial which shall come upon the
whole world.” That would certainly be characteristic of our loving, merciful, forgiving heavenly
Father and Bridegroom. The saints who are martyred during the Tribulation are not part of the
(18) Revelation 11:15. The seventh trumpet judgment introduces the awesome events described in
chapters 12-18 and the most severe set of judgments yet reported, the Vial Judgments.
(19) Revelation 17:1-18. Describes the destruction of the Babylonish, false religious system—the
great harlot—which will merge all the religions of the world during the first part of the Tribulation
(which will take place easily after the church is raptured). This system will be so powerful that it will
dominate both the Antichrist (“the beast”) and the ten kings at that time. But because of their hatred
for the harlot, at the midpoint of the Tribulation, they will make war on her and kill her.
(20) Revelation 13:1-3. In the process of killing the harlot Mystery Babylon, the false religious
system, somehow the Antichrist is killed and gets “a deadly wound” that is healed. In chapter 12
Satan himself is cast out of heaven, where he has been “the accuser of our brethren,” and now he
enters Antichrist’s body and resurrects him to a new and even more vicious life.
(21) Revelation 13:4-10. Antichrist, now incarnated, will force the remaining people of the earth to
worship him, except those whose names are in the Lamb’s Book of Life (see 2 Thessalonians 2:8-10).
(22) Revelation 13:11-18. The False Prophet will replace the slain religious system, forcing people to
worship Antichrist and his image, or be killed. Everyone will be compelled to display a 666 mark in
order to hold a job and “buy and sell.”
Plainly, if the church were to go through the Tribulation, she would not survive it. And I find no
scriptural evidence that any believers will remain at the end of the Tribulation to be raptured, if that
event is post-Trib. Remember, the worst half of the Tribulation period, which our Lord termed the
Great Tribulation, has not yet begun! That last forty-two month period is covered by the Vial
Judgments.
(23) Revelation 16:1-2. The first vial causes giant sores on those who rejected Christ and instead
accepted the mark of the Beast, signifying their worship of him.
(24) Revelation 16:3. The second vial is poured out on the sea, turning it “to blood as of a dead man;
and every living creature in the sea died.”
The above contents are taken with the courtesy from the website:
https://bible.org/illustration/events-tribulation-period
The World Elite operated by the Secret Societies and the World leaders want to
eliminate 4.5 billion people by the year - 2021 AD. They want to achieve their goals
in 3 stages and they are:
Stage - 1 ----- World War - 3 in the Middle East and in the World
from 2020 AD to 2022 AD to eliminate 1/3rd population of the
world ------- Destruction of the World
Stage - 2........Global Drought ...............Result of the World War
Stage - 3..........Global Diseases................Result of the World War
In Stages - 2 and 3, further 1/3rd population would die because of Global Drought
and Global Diseases.
"You could say the Rapture index is a Dow Jones Industrial Average of end time activity, but
I think it would be better if you viewed it as prophetic speedometer," Todd Stranberg, the
website's creator, told the Daily Mail.
Stranberg launched the site in 1987 to monitor catastrophic world events spanning typical
categories like satanism, terrorism and dramatic weather.
The online index highlights the major signs of the rapture listed in the bible, such as "earth
quakes" or "plagues," and scores them according to activity in the world. The numbers are
then added together to sum up the The Rapture Index total.
Stranberg says the Index total increased to 164 during the Gulf War, but also saw its lowest
on December 12 the same year at 58. Prior to the 2016 U.S. Presidential election October,
however, it peaked at its highest score of 189 since its creation -- and there hasn't been
indication that it will be dropping anytime soon, according to Stranberg.
"It seems like we are heading into the eye of a hurricane and I am fascinated with what's
going on with Donald Trump – both sides are whirling faster and faster," Stranberg said.
He says the higher the number, the faster the human civilization is moving towards "the
occurrence of pre-tribulation rapture."
However, Stranberg tells people his index is by no means "meant to predict the rapture." It
is, however, designed to measure events that he deems could serve as a precursor to the
rapture.
But he cautions when the index reaches about 225, the apocalypse is believed to be upon
us.
1. Satanism:
The Satanism is on the rise every year..
2. Unemployment:
The Unemployment figures are increasing in every country. People are loosing their jobs
every year at a rapid rate and that is why people are migrating to other countries or areas.
3. Inflation:
Slow economic growth is putting downward pressure on prices.
4. Crime Rates:
The crime rate is increasing in many cities of the world
5. The Economy:
The markets have dropped sharply in the past few years
6. Oil Supply/Price:
The production is set to rise but the prices of the oil is on the rise and the increase in
inflation.
7. Financial Unrest:
The US stock market is about to hit 20,000 on the Dow but the Financial Unrest is seen
every where in US and around the world.
8. Drug Abuse:
Several states in US and Canada vote to legalize pot. And the Drug Abuse is rising every
year.
9. Moral Standards:
Rampant immorality threatens the World future of Morality and Character.
12. Anti-Semitism:
There has been a increase in anti-Semitic activities in the world.
23. Volcanoes:
There has been several Volcanic eruptions around the world.
24. Earthquakes:
Earthquakes are also on the rise around the world. A huge quake hits Hawaii.
27. Drought:
Drought conditions have increased all over the world
28. Plagues:
Plagues of different forms like Ebola Virus, Mad Cow disease, SARS, AIDS, etc are on the
rise in the world
30. Floods:
The rise in Floods all over the world has increased due to ice melting, unusual rains, storms,
etc
It has been narrated in different Sayings of Hazrat Ali that Locusts would swarm
Holy Kaaba, Mecca before the Arrival of Mahdi.
In recent years, the Grand Mosque, Mecca has been plagued by swarm of locusts.
On 11th January, 2019 again the Grand Mosque came under attack from Black
Locusts and the local authorities are struggling to clean up the mess.
The countries like Egypt and Israel had also come under attack from the swarm of
locusts in recent years.
It has been a clear message from the Almighty God that the humanity is living in
End Times and they should rectify their way of living before the Arrival of Mahdi.
The Zionists have a secret and evil plan to demolish Mosque Al Aqsa and build
3rd Temple Mount on it. They have recently shifted their capital from Tel Aviv to
Jerusalem in 2017 AD.
Now they have openly started mentioning their plan to build 3rd Temple Mount
on the Mosque Al Aqsa in public forums and Government meetings. Recently,
the US Ambassador David Friedman was given a photoshopped picture of
Temple Mount on Mosque Al Aqsa.
Israeli institutions and organizations are reportedly awaiting the regime’s go-
ahead for the construction of a so-called “third temple” in place of al-Aqsa
Mosque and the Dome of the Rock in the Israeli-occupied Jerusalem al-Quds.
Israeli Zionists claim they have the right to build a third temple in line with
“scriptural prophecies” to follow the tradition of the first and second ones built
in ancient times.
Back in June, 2016 AD, Israeli Minister of Agriculture and Rural Development Uri
Ariel said “the first temple was destroyed in 586 BCE, the second temple in 70
CE,” adding that he wished to see a third one built.
“These organizations explained that they are ready to bring the equipment and
tools to start building the temple in the place of both the Dome of the Rock and
the al-Aqsa Mosque,” it added, citing Al Ray Palestinian Media Agency.
“They further stated that the total time needed to accomplish the building is
three years, according to their plans.”
The al-Aqsa Mosque and the Dome of the Rock are situated in Haram al-Sharif or
Temple Mount in Jerusalem al-Quds, which was occupied by Israel in 1967.
The mosque is the third holiest site in Islam after Masjid al-Haram in Mecca and
Masjid al-Nabawi in Medina. The site is also holy to Christians and Jews.
According to the agreement signed between the Tel Aviv regime and the
Jordanian government after Israel’s occupation of East Jerusalem al-Quds in
1967, visits to the compound by Israelis are permitted, but non-Muslim worship
is prohibited.
Muslims consider the trespass into the al-Aqsa Mosque yard as part of an Israeli
Judaization campaign that targets the holy city of al-Quds and a provocation.
Over the past decades, Tel Aviv has been trying to change the demographic
makeup of Jerusalem al-Quds by constructing illegal settlements, destroying
historical sites and expelling the local Palestinian population.
They would build the 3rd Temple Mount after the 3rd World War which is very
near on the political horizon of the World.
"Hide where ever you want from me and you would find me there before
you hide yourself."
The fears of Nuclear War in the coming years are mounting. As a result, the super-
rich have contemplated going into hiding, with sales of luxury bunkers skyrocketing.
Texas based bunker builders Rising S have experienced a 400 percent rise in sales
following Trump’s election.
Custom made shelters aren’t cheap either — they range in price from the tens of
thousands to the tens of millions.
After 1970's more and more people started using aeroplanes and high speed trains
for travelling across the cities and countries and more frequent use of cars in the
cities became popular after 1980's.
This prophecy of the End Times also been fulfilled as the distances in the cities and
around the countries and regions have become smaller and the travelling has
become more safe and faster.
https://www.bbc.com/news/science-environment-47144058
Climate change: World heading for warmest decade, says Met Office
By Matt McGrathEnvironment correspondent
The world is in the middle of what is likely to be the warmest 10 years since records
began in 1850, say scientists.
The Met Office is forecasting that temperatures for each of the next five years are
likely to be 1C or more above pre-industrial levels.
In the next five years there's also a chance we'll see a year in which the average
global temperature rise could be greater than 1.5C.
Each year since then, the global average has hovered close to or above the 1C mark.
Now, the Met Office says that trend is likely to continue or increase over the next
five years.
"By looking at individual years in that forecast we can now see for the first time,
there is a risk of a temporary, and I repeat temporary, exceedance of the all-
important 1.5C threshold level set out in the Paris climate agreement."
Last October, UN scientists published a special report on the long-term impacts of a
temperature rise of 1.5C.
They concluded that it would take a massive carbon cutting effort to keep the world
from tipping over the limit by 2030. The Met Office analysis now says there's a 10%
chance of this happening within the next five years.
"It's the first time the forecasts have shown a significant risk of exceedance - it is
only temporary. We are talking about individual years fluctuating above the 1.5
degree level," said Prof Scaife.
"But the fact that that can happen now due to a combination of general warming
and the fluctuations due to things like El Niño events in the next few years does
mean we are getting close to that threshold."
It says that from 2019 to 2023, we will see temperatures ranging from 1.03C to
1,57C above the 1850-1900 level, with enhanced warming over much of the globe,
especially over areas like the Arctic.
The research team says it is pretty certain in its predictions because of its past
experience. The team's previous forecast, made in 2013, predicted the rapid rate of
warming that's been observed over the past five years. It even predicted some of
the lesser known details such as the patch of cooling seen in the North Atlantic and
the cooler spots in the Southern Ocean.
If the observations over the next five years match the forecasts, then the decade
between 2014 and 2023 will be the warmest in more than 150 years of records.
"Temperatures are only part of the story. Extreme and high impact weather
affected many countries and millions of people, with devastating repercussions for
economies and ecosystems in 2018," said WMO Secretary-General Petteri Taalas.
"Many of the extreme weather events are consistent with what we expect from a
changing climate. This is a reality we need to face up to. Greenhouse gas emission
reduction and climate adaptation measures should be a top global priority," he
said.
"The forecast from the Met Office is, unfortunately, no surprise," said Dr Anna
Jones, an atmospheric chemist at the British Antarctic Survey.
"Temperatures averaged across the globe are at a record all-time high, and have
been for a number of years. They are driven predominantly by rising concentrations
of greenhouse gases, such as carbon dioxide, that result from our continued use of
fossil fuels.
"Until we reduce greenhouse gas emissions, we can expect to see upward trends in
global averaged temperatures."
Prophet Muhammad (PBUH) told us 1400 years ago that the heat would rise all
over the world in the End Times before the Arrival of Mahdi and the scientists
are confirming this prophecy through the proofs of scientific data and analysis of
weather from the last 150 years that we are experiencing high heat.
"The insect apocalypse is indeed upon us, according to the first global scientific
review of insect population decline.
There have been warning signs for years about plummeting insect populations
worldwide, but the extent of the potentially “catastrophic” crisis had not been
well-understood — until now.
The first global scientific review of insect population decline was published this
week in the journal Biological Conservation and the findings are “shocking,” its
authors said.
More than 40 percent of insect species are dwindling globally and a third of
species are endangered, concluded the peer-reviewed study, which analyzed 73
historical reports on insect population declines.
Chillingly, the total mass of insects is falling by 2.5 percent annually, the review’s
authors said. If the decline continues at this rate, insects could be wiped off the
face of the Earth within a century.
“It is very rapid. In 10 years you will have a quarter less, in 50 years only half left
and in 100 years you will have none,” study co-author Francisco Sánchez-Bayo,
an environmental biologist at the University of Sydney, Australia, told The
Guardian.
But according to the new review, the proportion of insects in decline is currently
twice as high as that of vertebrates and the insect extinction rate is eight times
faster than that of mammals, birds and reptiles.
Insects play a profoundly important role in Earth’s ecosystems. They are a food
source for many animals, are critical pollinators and recycle nutrients back into
the soil.
“Unless we change our ways of producing food, insects as a whole will go down
the path of extinction in a few decades,” the review’s co-authors wrote. “The
repercussions this will have for the planet’s ecosystems are catastrophic to say
the least.”
As one can understand the gravity from the issue discussed above regarding the
existence of humanity is in danger due to the catastrophic decline in Insects
population due to our dangerous activities on our planet.
As we have already crossed the limits set by Almighty Allah, so now the
interference from the God is necessary in the form of Arrival of Mahdi in 2023
AD. Insha Allah.
“And it shall come to pass in that day that living waters shall go out from
Yerushalayim: half of them toward the eastern sea and half of them
toward the western sea; in summer and in winter shall it be.”
Zechariah 14:8 (The Israel Bible™)
Almost ten times saltier than the ocean, nothing can live in the Dead Sea’s hypersaline
environment – Or so scientists thought until recently. Scientific research has proved the
existence of life at the bottom of the sea, but due to a unique set of circumstances, signs of
life have begun appearing on its very shores, precisely as it is written in the Book of
Prophets.
A young woman on a nature hike was shocked recently when she discovered freshwater
ponds with fish on the shores of the Dead Sea. Samantha Siegel, a Jewish woman living in
Jerusalem, often takes trips to the desert and the ancient body of water. On a recent visit,
she encountered an incongruous sight with powerful implications: a prophecy appearing
before her eyes that seemed to contradict the laws of nature.
Its inhospitality has been documented for centuries. A mosaic on the floor of a church in
Medeba, Jordan, showing a map for Byzantine pilgrims on their way to the Holy Land,
illustrates this. It features a picture of fish swimming down the Jordan River and then turning
around once they arrive at the waters of the Dead Sea.
The Bible, however, describes a very different picture of the region. Lot looked out on the
valley where the Dead Sea is now and saw an incredibly fertile and well-watered region.
And Lot lifted up his eyes, and beheld all the plain of the Jordan, that it was
well watered every where, before Hashem destroyed Sdom and Gomorrah,
like the garden of Hashem. Genesis 13:10 (The Israel Bible)
The Bible relates that the landscape changed when the fire and brimstone destruction
of Sodom and Gomorrah turned the valley into a wasteland. Indeed, people who visit the
Dead Sea today would find it difficult to envision a garden in the arid region.
Even more perplexing are the Messianic prophecies that water will flow east from Jerusalem
into the Dead Sea, and these bitter waters will fill up with fish and the surrounding desert will
be teeming with life.
Then said he unto me: ‘These waters issue forth toward the eastern region and
shall go down into the Arabah; and when they shall enter into the sea into the
sea of the putrid waters the waters shall be healed. And it shall come to pass
that every living creature wherewith it swarmeth whithersoever the rivers
shall come shall live; and there shall be a very great multitude of fish; for
these waters are come thither that all things be healed and may live
whithersoever the river cometh. Ezekiel 47:8-9 (The Israel Bible)
The water level at the Dead Sea has been receding at the fantastic rate of up to one meter
every year. This is due to water being diverted from the Jordan River for agricultural
purposes and evaporation caused by the Dead Sea mineral works. The dropping water level
has led to sinkholes appearing on the shores of the Dead Sea. On a visit to the arid region,
Siegel discovered that many of these pools have been filling up with sweet fresh water, and
even more incredibly, fish.
The proof is undeniable. Siegel produced a video in which fish are clearly seen swimming
on the shores of the Dead Sea, and she films herself swimming in a large pool surrounded
by green plants.
The researchers discovered huge craters on the seafloor, 15 meters across and 20 meters
deep. Fresh water was flowing from these craters, which were carpeted with mats of
microorganisms, showing that the Dead sea was not entirely dead. The beginnings of the
prophecy are in place, waiting to spring forth.
Perhaps the most remarkable aspect of this Biblical prophecy appearing in plain sight is, as
Siegel stated in her video, “This is a big deal, and no one is really talking about it.”
There is another article recently published in the same website and following is
the link and the contents of that article published in 2018:
https://www.breakingisraelnews.com/114621/ezekiels-vision-revealed-dead-
sea-life/
And it shall come to pass that fishers shall stand by it from En-gedi even
unto En-eglaim; there shall be a place for the spreading of nets; their fish
shall be after their kinds as the fish of the Great Sea exceeding
many. Ezekiel 47:10 (The Israel Bible™)
For those who have visited the lowest point on the face of the earth, Ezekiel’s end-of-days
prophecy of the Dead Sea coming to life seems impossible, yet recently, scientists have
been shocked to discover that the sinkholes appearing around the sea are quickly filling up
with fish and other forms of life previously unseen in the inhospitable region.
Speeding atop the water, saltwater playfully splashing each smiling person on the boat,
each individual’s eyes are wide open despite the stinging salt. Nobody wants to miss a
second of the beautiful Israeli sunrise – the multisensory experience makes everyone feel
so alive that they begin to question why the body of water upon which they are riding can
possibly be called the ‘Dead Sea.’
The Dead Sea is “anything but dead,” he said, calling it the “eighth wonder of the world.”
Bedein has witnessed fish in Dead Sea sinkholes, microorganisms, growing vegetation and
millions of visitors each year who come seeking life through the body of water’s high oxygen
levels and special minerals.
Indeed, the existence of fish in the Dead Sea, a reality that seems to contradict the laws of
nature, has been explained by science and Biblical prophecy alike.
On the shores of the Dead Sea – more than 400 meters below sea level – are freshwater
sinkholes, created as a result of dropping water levels. These large sinkholes were
discovered in 2011, carpeted with microorganisms and on the sea’s shores – fish and algae.
“One hundred and sixty researchers and almost every university has something to say
about saving the Dead Sea,” said Jackie Ben Zaken, Dead Sea guide and expert on the
Dead Sea ecosystem. Sinkholes, he said, are caused by “fresh water running under the
ground, meeting the sediment layers and melting them.”
“As a result of these sinkholes, we see habitats with less than 1.5% salinity – water you
could drink – surrounded by salt water as well as minerals like bromium, magnesium, and
potassium,” he told Breaking Israel News.
But this is no scientific miracle, said Bedein – it’s Biblical prophecy coming to fruition.
“Coming to the Dead Sea, the lowest point on earth, you see prophecy coming true,” he
said.
According to the Bible, the landscape changed with the destruction of Sodom and
Gomorrah, which turned the valley into a wasteland. The Bible also describes the area as
fertile and well-watered in its narrative of Lot looking out onto the valley where the Dead
Sea is now:
And Lot lifted up his eyes, and beheld all the plain of the Jordan, that it was
well watered everywhere, before Hashem destroyed Sdom and Gomorrah,
like the garden of Hashem. (Genesis 13:10)
“A place that was once cursed in Biblical times, now you can come here to the Dead Sea,
explore the sinkholes and see fish where the water has receded – fulfilling prophecies from
Ezekiel who talked about the land flourishing and blooming when the Jews return,” said
Bedein.
Indeed, Biblical prophecy also holds that water will flow east from Jerusalem into the Dead
Sea, filling it up with fish and the surrounding desert with life:
“Then said he unto me: ‘These waters issue forth toward the eastern region
and shall go down into the Arabah; and when they shall enter into the sea into
the sea of the putrid waters the waters shall be healed. And it shall come to
pass that every living creature wherewith it swarmeth whithersoever the
rivers shall come shall live; and there shall be a very great multitude of fish;
for these waters are come thither that all things be healed and may live
whithersoever the river cometh.” (Ezekiel 47:8-9)
“The curse is over, and this place and its minerals are now bringing life to people around the
world,” he added.
Others who have witnessed life in the Dead Sea have similarly pointed to prophecy. In
2016, a Breaking Israel News story about signs of the Dead Sea coming to life went viral,
garnering more than a quarter million views. At the time, the presence of fish and other
wildlife in the brackish waters of the sinkholes surrounding the Dead Sea went largely
unnoticed by the scientific community. The phenomenon was brought to the public’s
attention by a remarkable young Jewish immigrant to Israel named Samantha Siegel who
visited the isolated location to meditate. Siegel is still connected to the site and continues to
see prophecy unfolding in the brackish waters surrounding the Dead Sea.
“I still go to the Dead Sea every week,” Siegel told Breaking Israel News. “It is the best thing
to keep me sane and connected to Hashem. It is a glimpse into another world. I went there
Siegel’s spirituality is rooted in nature and for her, the Dead Sea is the most powerful
example of God’s revelation.
“The Dead Sea is an opening into the earth,” she said. “It is like Momma Earth breaking
water before giving birth. It looks so harsh right now but that is just heaven being coated
with a little bit of hell. When Moshiach comes and the goodness of creation comes out, it will
be pure heaven. If you have the eyes to see it, you can see it happening already,” she said.
And yet, there exists a dual complexity of the Dead Sea: while the current state of the sea
with its salt chimneys (salt buildup formations around freshwater springs) and deposits
(formed by pressurized crystallization of minerals – saturated acids – as
temperature changes) make for stunning photos and prophetic occurrences, its illusory
beauty is a result of the 600 Olympic pools worth of water that is emptied every day from the
sea – 750 million cubic inches per year – a reality that Noam calls an “environmental
catastrophe.”
“The next generation is not going to be able to enjoy the Dead Sea as we know it today –
over 1 billion people around the world are using the Dead Sea’s 24 minerals for their
therapeutic effects,” he told Breaking Israel News.
Over the past two years, Noam has been documenting Dead Sea’s changes and geological
phenomena. His sunrise Dead Sea boat tours of the northern part of the lowest point on
earth aim to educate guests about the changes the sea is undergoing as a result of water
diversion from the Jordan River and Sea of Galilee (Kinneret) for agricultural purposes and
evaporation caused by the Dead Sea mineral works.
Also focused on the magnificent, prophetic and endangered Dead Sea – and the healing
that is necessary – Ben Zaken poses that many questions remain, such as how much and
which type of water can be added to the Dead Sea without ecological damage in order to
keep it as a life source for generations to come.
“The problem is not what evaporates, but what doesn’t enter,” said Ben Zaken. “To save the
Dead Sea we need to fill in the Sea of Galilee, the source of water that is already in a state
of ecological disaster. If we do nothing, we will have 80 years, until an ecological disaster –
a point of no return – where the sea drops, minerals will crystalize but not sink and oxygen
in the air will be blocked,” he maintained.
Efforts toward solutions include the ‘Red-Dead’ canal, a desalination pipeline from Aqaba,
Jordan and desalination plant in the Gulf of Eilat that would give water to Jordan – an idea
discussed as a part of peace agreements that was supposed to be actualized nine months
ago, but has yet to start because of political complications.
“We need to fill in the Galilee to the upper level, open the dam, let water flow in the Jordan
River, which will fill the Dead Sea – without Jordan cutting off the supply. Lack of circulation
means fish will die in Galilee,” said Ben Zaken.
Additionally, posed Bedein, “Only 10% of what the Dead Sea actually needs is going to
come through this $10 billion project. The ultimate and natural solution is restoring the
historical flow: the Kinneret and the Jordan River. That will be our focus for the near future.”
Bedein is no novice in rising to the challenges facing the Jewish people in their Biblical
homeland. As director of the Sderot Media Center, Bedein has spent years speaking about
the experience of the southern Israeli community of Sderot that is under constant threat of
Hamas terrorism.
Now, he’s using the Dead Sea’s story, water treasures and beautiful complexities to inspire
the next generation about Israel, hoping that it may also be a solution toward restoring the
historical flow of the Dead Sea.
The Burj Khalifa, known as the Burj Dubai prior to its inauguration in 2010, is
a skyscraper in Dubai, United Arab Emirates. With a total height of 829.8 m
(2,722 ft) and a roof height (excluding antenna) of 828 m (2,717 ft), the Burj Khalifa
has been the tallest structure and building in the world since its topping
out in 2009.
Burj Khalifa in Dubai is the Tallest structure and building in the world and in Middle
Eastern country owned by Arabs. This prophecy has also come true as told by our
beloved Prophet Muhammad (PBUH). Now see the competition among Arabs with
the recent construction of Jeddah Tower in Saudi Arabia which is due to open in
2020 AD.
If we see Dubai just couple of years ago, we don't see lot of tall buildings in that city
which is now fill with lot of skyscrapers including the tallest structure in the world.
No one can imagine 30 years ago that these Arab nations would be competing with
each other in building highest buildings in their cities. The prophecy of our Prophet
Muhammad (PBUH) came true in recent years and so the Arrival of Mahdi comes
closer as time passes by.
The Arabs usually build low height structures and used to live in camps. Now as the
wealth came in their hands, they changed the way of their living and adopt the
Western style of high rise buildings in their cities and towns.
The demolition has focused on mosques, burial sites, homes and historical locations
associated with the Islamic prophet Muhammad and many of the founding
personalities of early Islamic history. In Saudi Arabia, many of the demolitions have
officially been part of the continued expansion of the Masjid al-Haram at Mecca and
the Prophet's Mosque in Medina and their auxiliary service facilities in order to
accommodate the ever-increasing number of Muslims performing the Hajj
pilgrimage.
In 1803 and 1804, the Saudis captured Mecca and Medina and destroyed historical
monuments and various holy Muslim sites and shrines, such as the shrine built over
the tomb of Fatimah, the daughter of Muhammad, and even intended to destroy
the grave of Muhammad himself as idolatrous, causing outrage throughout
the Muslim world.
This is the vast burial site adjacent the Prophet's Mosque (Al-Masjid al-Nabawi)
housing the remains of many of the members of Muhammad’s family,
close companions and central figures of early Islam.
Widespread vocal criticism of this last action by Muslim communities as far away as
India, eventually led to abandoning any attempt on this site. Political claims made
against Turkish control of the region initiated the Ottoman–Saudi war (1811–1818)
in which the Saudi defeat forced Wahhabi tribesmen to retreat from the Hejaz back
into the interior.
Turkish forces reasserted control of the region and subsequently began extensive
rebuilding of sacred sites between 1848 and 1860, many of them done employing
the finest examples of Ottoman design and craftsmanship.
Among specific sites targeted at this time were the graves of the Martyrs of
the Battle of Uhud, including the grave of the renowned Hamza ibn 'Abd al-
If we notice that most of the Islamic heritage in Saudi Arabia has been destroyed in
the last 25 years and their speed of demolition increased as they are seeing that
their time is near and the Arrival of Mahdi is very near.
The Wahabbi regime of Saudi Arabia also secretly agreed to relocate the Grave of
Prophet Muhammad (PBUH) to an unknown place and demolish the Green Tomb of
Prophet Muhammad (PBUH) which Allah would save inshaAllah.
Pastor Roger Barrier's "Ask Roger" column regularly appears at Preach It, Teach It. Every
week at Crosswalk, Dr. Barrier puts nearly 40 years of experience in the pastorate to work
answering questions of doctrine or practice for laypeople, or giving advice on church
leadership issues. He wrote the following article and published on the website:
https://www.crosswalk.com/church/pastors-or-leadership/ask-roger/the-abcs-of-
bible-prophecy.html
The book of Daniel provides an overview of world events from the days of King
Nebuchadnezzar of Babylon all the way to Christ's crucifixion, resurrection and subsequent
millennial reign. Daniel forms the framework for the book of Revelation and for the
understanding of biblical prophecy.
Daniel's generalized overview occurs in Daniel chapter 9. Daniel was reading the book of
Jeremiah when he realized that the 70 years of Jewish Babylonian captivity was coming to
an end. Daniel wondered what would happen next--exactly what many Christians today are
also wondering about our own times. Understanding these prophecies can help us
understand what God has revealed to us about His plan for the End of the Age.
Along with asking God to tell him what came next for Israel, Daniel spent time in
prayer, confessing the sins of Israel and pleading God's forgiveness for those sins.
Daniel's overview begins with Nebuchadnezzar's dream-vision in Daniel 2.
Nebuchadnezzar dreamed of a huge multi-metallic man with a golden head, chest and arms
of bronze, belly and thighs of brass, and feet and toes made out of iron mixed with clay. He
then saw a mountain coming out of the sky which hit the man on the toes and feet. The
mountain crushed the man into powder, and the mountain grew to fill the earth.
The nations were in chronological order from top to bottom. We see here the devolution of
human governments. The value of these kingdoms begins with gold and ends with iron.
Also, notice that the nations increase in power over time. Babylon was a terrible foe;
however, its wickedness and power were nothing to match the wickedness, strength, and
power of the Roman Empire.
As explained in the book of Revelation, the 10 toes represent 10 nations, occupying the
area of the old Roman Empire. These nations will come together in the last days in an
attempt to destroy Israel and take over the world. The nations don't get along very well just
as iron doesn't mix well with clay. Revelation describes these nations, along with several
others, that will all be led in a loose coalition by the antichrist.
The mountain which destroyed the multi-metallic man is a picture of the resurrected Jesus
Christ at His Second Coming destroying the wickedness of the Gentile nations on earth. The
mountain which grew to fill the earth is a picture of the millennial reign of Christ on earth.
God sent the angel Gabriel to give Daniel an answer to his prayer concerning what God had
planned for Israel.
Gabriel shared that God had another program for Israel when the 70 years were concluded.
This plan was for 490 years. As you read the verses below you will see how the book of
Revelation fits into this passage.
Daniel 9:24 is the overview: Seventy "sevens" are decreed for your people and your holy
city to finish the transgression, to put an end to sin, to atone for wickedness, to bring in
everlasting righteousness, to seal up vision and prophecy and to anoint the Most Holy
Place."
Daniel 9:25 -27 gives the details: “Know and understand this: From the time the word goes
out to restore and rebuild Jerusalem until the Anointed One, the ruler, comes, there will be
seven ‘sevens,’ and sixty-two ‘sevens.’ It will be rebuilt with streets and a trench, but in
times of trouble. 26 After the sixty-two ‘sevens,’ the Anointed One will be put to death and
will have nothing. The people of the ruler who will come will destroy the city and the
sanctuary. The end will come like a flood: War will continue until the end, and desolations
have been decreed. 27 He will confirm a covenant with many for one ‘seven. In the middle
Remarkably, this passage looks 560 years into the future to predict the very day when
Jesus Christ entered Jerusalem on Palm Sunday, April 6, 30 A.D.
In Daniel 9:24 we learn three facts regarding God's plan for Israel.
1. First, God’s program for Israel extends for 70 "Sevens" (70 x 7 = 490 Sevens). "Seven" is the
Hebrew word "Heptad." This is a generic word which can mean seven of anything. It is similar to
our word, "Dozen" which can mean twelve of virtually anything: twelve bananas, twelve pencils,
twelve years. The context of this passage helps us to determine that here the word "Heptad" is
referring to seven years. One "Seven" equals 7 years. (70 X 7 years = 490 years.)
2. Second, this program applies to Israel. "Your people and your holy city."
3. Third, this program will continue until Christ establishes His Messianic Kingdom.
Gabriel shared six characteristics of the Messianic Kingdom of Christ's l000-year reign
on earth.
To finish transgression: refers to Israel's national transgression of rejecting the Messiah. At the
Second Coming, transgression will be ended because they will accept Him as Savior.
To put an end to sin: the national sin of Israel will end.
To atone for wickedness: refers to the reconciliation for all in the Cross of Christ. At the Second
Coming Jew and Gentile alike will recognize and believe in the atoning work of Christ.
To bring in everlasting righteousness: Christ's Kingdom is set up on earth for a millennium.
To seal up vision and prophecy: After 70th week all prophetic announcement and visions will be
confirmed and fulfilled.
To anoint the Most Holy: refers to the Millennial Temple which will function during that time.
God reassured Daniel that He still has a plan for Israel. After 490 years Israel will be
restored to their land and will prosper in a glorious future.
The first sixty-nine "sevens" (483 years) (Daniel 9:25) began at the issuing of a decree to
restore and rebuild Jerusalem. This decree is described in Nehemiah 1:1 and 2:5-8.
Historically, the "20th year of Artaxerxes" was 444 B.C. Using the Jewish calendar of 360
days per year and the fact that the prophecies began on the first day of the month, we know
for certain that this period began on March 4, 444 B.C.
The 69 "sevens" are broken down into two phases: One seven and sixty-two "sevens."
1. Seven "sevens" tells of the time during which the temple was rebuilt. It took 49 years. Ezra and
Nehemiah both helped in the rebuilding and spoke often of the troubled times occurring during this
process.
2. The 69 "sevens" concludes when the Anointed One, the Ruler comes." From 444 B.C. until the
coming of Christ on Palm Sunday is 483 years or 69 "sevens."
483 prophetic years (360 days adjusted to 365.25 days =5.25 days difference between
the Jewish calendar and our present-day calendar. 483 X 5.25 = 2535.75 days or
about 6 years and 11 months. Subtract adjustment... and...483 Jewish years from
March 4, 444 B.C. to Palm Sunday is April 6, 30 A.D. (see Robert Anderson's
book, The Coming Prince).
This is one way that Anna and Simeon knew that it was about time for the Messiah to
be born so that they could carry out their planned worship of Jesus as a baby.
We live in a day in which the Word of God is under attack on every hand. Many mock it, and
thousands ignore it; yet, here is a tremendous confirmation for all of us to see this prophecy
fulfilled in absolute detail to the very day.
Of course, most of Israel was blinded to it all, as many are blinded to how God is working
today as well.
Several things occur between the end of the 69th seven at the beginning of the 70th (Daniel
9:26).
First, "the Messiah will be cut off and have nothing." This is one of the prophecies in the
Bible of the death of Jesus Christ.
"Cut off" describes his death. Isaiah 53:8 describes Jesus as "cut off from the land of the
living." Jesus mentioned often that he must go to Jerusalem and die (e.g. Matthew 16:21).
One of Holman Hunt's most famous paintings of Jesus hangs in the Birmingham City
Museum and Art Gallery, and is called "The Shadow of Death." Christ is pictured as a
young man in Joseph's workshop. The sun is setting. Christ stretches out his hands after a
hard day's work. At that moment, the artist catches Jesus' image. The shadow on the wall
shows a man with arms outstretched like He's dying on a cross.
Jesus Christ lived his entire life in the Shadow of the Cross. He came to die on that cross
for the sins of Israel and for the sins of the entire world. After 69 "sevens" - 483 years, Jesus
was "cut off".
"The People of the Ruler who will come" refers to the Romans who destroyed Jerusalem
and the Temple in 70 A.D.
More than three million Jews were killed. Masada occurred. When you are in Rome be sure
to see the huge arch of Titus standing at the entrance to the Roman forum which
commemorates Titus' his victory over Israel. Seeing the coming Holocaust,Jesus wept for
Jerusalem as described in Matthew 23.
"The Ruler who is to come" is the Antichrist. He's the little horn of Daniel 7:8 and the Beast
of Revelation l3.
A time gap occurs after the end of the sixty-ninth "seven" and before the beginning of the
seventieth "seven".
We have no indication giving insight into how long until the 70th "seven" commences. After
all, long gaps of forty years occurred between the crucifixion and the destruction. Today we
are in the gap, waiting for the last seven years to commence, but in His Word, God has
revealed much information concerning his plan for this "seven," so that we can understand
the times in which we live.
You can read more about the gap in Luke 4:18-21, as Christ quotes from Isaiah 61:12.
The Seventieth "Seven" (Daniel 9:27) begins when the antichrist makes a peace treaty with
the nation of Israel for seven years.
"He" is "The Ruler of People Who Will Come". The Romans came in 70 A.D. The antichrist
will be descended from them. "Many" refers to the Jews and the nation of Israel.
Daniel sketches the outline of 70th seven; Jesus roughs in the picture with the Olivet
Discourse; John fills in details with the Book of Revelation.
This is why we don't have to be baffled or surprised by what we see in Europe and the
Middle East. I believe that God is preparing to restart the clock. The teams are lined up and
the ball is about to be snapped.
Amazingly, Israel has never been assimilated into another nation. In 1948 Jews came
home from all over the world. Sociologically, this has never happened with any people.
When's the last time you saw a Babylonian walking around? They're all gone. But not the
Jews.
We're told elsewhere that the Jews will accept the Peace Treaty with the Antichrist who
rules Europe because they are fearful of the threat of the "King of the North."
Incidentally, the Jews will mistake the Antichrist for their coming Messiah and the beginning
of peace for the initiation of the Millennium.
Notice that the Rapture does not restart God's prophetic clock. No one knows exactly when
the Rapture may occur. It could come at any moment.
In the middle of the 70th "seven" (3 l/2 years, 42 months, l260 days) Satan falls from
Heaven and indwells the Antichrist (Revelation 12:912; 13:4).
Then, the Antichrist breaks the peace treaty and does two things:
1. He forbids the offering of sacrifices in the Temple (Daniel 9:27). This indicates that Israel will have
a Temple during this time.
2. He sets up the Abomination of Desolation on the altar in the Holy Place in the Temple.
Jesus said that this is a sign for the godly to flee. The Antichrist will then launch the greatest
wave of Anti-Semitism that the world has ever seen.
Three and a half years of Great Tribulation will then begin as the Antichrist tries to wipe the
Jews off of the face of the earth. As the time of great tribulation comes to an end, Jesus
returns with the Armies of Heaven and defeats the Antichrist (Revelation 19).
The Messianic Kingdom begins and the six characteristics of Daniel 9:24 will occur.
Baffled? Never, thanks to Daniel 9.
Today, we see the rise of Israel as a state, its alignment with the West, its possession of
Jerusalem, its plans to rebuild the Temple, soon to be deployed Iranian nuclear missiles,
and the beginnings of worldwide anti-Semitism: all of which are preparing the way for the
Beast. Watch closely the rise of the European Union.
We see it all as God preparing the scene for His program with Israel. We don't look for 70th
seven. We look for our deliverance (1 Thessalonians 1:10). We look for our blessed hope
(Titus 2:13).
Here is a good way to think about the Second Coming: "We plan as though Jesus isn't
coming for 1,000 years, but we live as if He is coming in the next 10 minutes." Israel's
immediate future is desperate, but she will repent and turn to God, trust in the blood of
Christ, and have a glorious future with the Lord. By the way, the same future is available to
all who apply the blood of Christ to themselves.
Susanna, I know that I answered a lot more than you asked, but hopefully this overview will
help you to make sense of Bible prophecy and how it applies to what is going on in the
world today, as well as to remind you that God is in control of our future, and has been since
the beginning of time.
It has been narrated in different Ahadith of Prophet Muhammad (PBUH) that young
female singers and dancers would emerge and become famous in all parts of the
world in the End Times before the Arrival of Mahdi.
As we witness in our era, we notice that there are more female singers and dancers
in the world who are becomig famous as compared to male singers as
Entertainment Industry gives female singers more fame and money.
Some of the most famous female singers and dancers in the World are as follows:
Beyonce
Mariah Carey
Adele
Kate Pery
Christina Aguilera
Taylor Swift
Lady Gaga
Alicia Keys
Aretha Franklin
Whitney Houston
Rihanna
Madonna
Britney Spears
Celine Dion
Pink
Tina Turner
Shakira
Miley Cyrus
Billie Holiday
Amy Winehouse
Demi Levota
Jennifer Lopez
Etta James
Janis Joplin
In the last 40 years, we see that the Main Stream Media (MSM) and Entertainment
Industry have been promoting more female singers and dancers all over the world
as women came easily into the trap of Satan and it was also told by our beloved
Prophet Muhammad (PBUH) that female young singers and dancers would become
famous all over the world.
Our young generations have become a victim of these singers and their music all
over the world and listening music has become part of their lives. They can't live
without music on their ears.
Now even the modern research on music also indicates the bad effects of music on
our lives. One can see the reseach work on music on internet if he or she likes to see
the bad effects of music.
It has been reported by many people all over the world that they are hearing
mysterious humming noises in their areas.
Strange sounds in the sky, which some call “sky trumpets” or “sky quakes,” have
been reported from around the world in recent years. People in the United
States, Canada, Costa Rica, Russia, the Czech Republic, Australia, and other
places have been puzzled by what they describe as low frequency hums,
trumpets, or horns that seem to emanate from the top of the sky or from under
the earth.
Most of these sounds have never been heard before now, which makes the
phenomenon unnerving. These noises have a groaning quality overlaid with a
metallic, vibrating sound similar to that of musical instruments.
Some say the sounds are the result of solar plasma interacting with the earth’s
magnetic field. Others theorize that the source of the sounds is the movement of
tectonic plates or a shift in the earth’s north magnetic pole.
If these “sky trumpets” or “sky quakes” or “acoustic gravity waves” are naturally
caused, then the question is, why weren’t the sounds being reported long before
March 2011?
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 838
Sky Trumpets—a spiritual Christian explanation in the End Times
And then there are those who attach a spiritual significance to the sky trumpets
and look for a spiritual origin. Some see the sounds as demonically generated,
believing that Satan’s forces are attempting to frighten and confuse people.
Others see the sky trumpets as divine in origin, believing them to be a warning
that we are living in the last days.
It is true that trumpets figure into several biblical events. When God gave the
Law on Mt. Sinai, His presence was accompanied by “a very loud trumpet blast,”
causing everyone in the camp to tremble
(Exodus 19:16).
It later intensified, and “the sound of the trumpet grew louder and louder”
(verse 19). The rapture of the church will occur at a time when “the trumpet will
sound, the dead will be raised imperishable, and we will be changed”
(1 Corinthians 15:52).
Jesus said that, at His second coming, “he will send his angels with a loud
trumpet call, and they will gather his elect from the four winds”
(Matthew 24:31).
Jesus also spoke of “fearful events and great signs from heaven”
(Luke 21:11).
And, during the tribulation, there are “seven angels who had the seven
trumpets” (Revelation 8:6).
Every time one of these angels blows a trumpet, a new judgment befalls the
earth (Revelation 8—9).
Those who look for a harbinger of the end times often refer to the sky trumpets
The most probable explanations for the “sky trumpets,” biblically, would be that
they are either natural or manmade. Whether these unidentified sounds are the
work of pranksters, the effect of changes to our planet’s magnetic field, or the
evidence of a sinister global plot, the fact remains that we just don’t know.
No one knows for sure what part, if any, “sky trumpets” will have in the end
times. We do know this: the days before the rapture will be characterized by
increasing wickedness (2 Timothy 3:1–4) and widespread false teaching
(1 Timothy 4:1; 2 Timothy 4:3; Jude 1:18).
After the rapture, the deception and wickedness will grow even worse
(2 Thessalonians 2:9–11). The only way to escape this confusion is to be born
again and live in hope of the imminent coming of Jesus Christ for the church.
The Prophet again said, "O Allah, Bless our Sham and Yemen."
On that the Prophet said, "There will appear earthquakes and afflictions, and
from there come out the side of the head of Satan."
(Book - 17, Hadith - 147, Al Bukhari)
The Kingdom Tower in the Capital City, Riyadh, Saudi Arabia resembling the same Evil Tower
Najd is the Western part of Saudi Arabia, the Eastern part is known as Hijaz. The
Kings of Saudi Arabia are from the Najd - area of Saudi Arabia and if we see the
Kingdom Tower in Riyadh, the Capital city of Saudi Arabia in Najd, we would
clearly say that the Prophecy of our Prophet Muhammad (PBUH) has been
fulfilled as the tallest building in the Capital, Riyadh is clearly showing the Horn
of Satan which is also depicted in the Hollywood Movie as the Satanic Evil Tower
showing ONE Eye.
All the Sunnis and the Shias agree that the Wahabbis Kingdom is doing the Evil
part in the Ummah since its inception. They have spent billions of dollars in wars
and spreading hatred and terrorism not only in the Muslim countries but also in
other parts of the world where they want to spread their Evil and Satanic
message.
This Kingdom Tower was completed in the year - 2002 AD and 5th tallest tower
in Saudi Arabia.
ONE - Eye of Dajjal - Signs all over in Saudi Police, Military and Government
With the courtesy from the following website, the following article is written
https://www.breakingisraelnews.com/113476/temple-institute-certifies-red-heifer/
"Many will be purified and purged and refined; the wicked will act wickedly and
none of the wicked will understand; but the knowledgeable will
understand. Daniel 12:10 (The Israel Bible™)
"Last Tuesday, the Temple Institute’s Red Heifer program was blessed with results; an entirely
red female calf was born, paving the way for re-establishing the Temple service and marking the
final stage of redemption.
Almost three years ago the Temple Institute inaugurated its Raise a Red Heifer in Israel
program. Due to laws restricting the importation of live cattle into Israel, the Temple Institute
imported frozen embryos of red angus, implanting them in Israeli domestic cows. The pregnant
One week after it’s birth, the newborn red heifer was certified by a board of rabbis as fulfilling all
the Biblical requirements. The rabbis emphasized that the heifer could, at any time, acquire a
blemish rendering it unsuitable. They will be inspecting the calf periodically to verify its
condition.
The red heifer was the main component in the Biblically mandated process of ritual purification
for impurity that results from proximity or contact with a dead body. Because the elements
needed for this ceremony have been lacking since the destruction of the Second Temple, all
Jews today are considered ritually impure, thereby preventing the return of the Temple service.
“This is the ritual law that Hashem has commanded: Instruct B’nei Yisrael to bring you a red cow
without blemish, in which there is no defect and on which no yoke has been laid. Numbers 19:2
Several heifers have been found in recent years that seemed to qualify but ultimately
were unsuited for the ritual. Earlier this month, two calves born in Israel to the Institute’s red
heifer program were deemed to be unsuitable for the performance of the mitzvah. One calf was
a bull while the second, a heifer, had a small patch of white hair which disqualified her.
The heifer, born from a natural birth, must be entirely red, with no more than two non-red hairs
on its body. It must also never have been used for any labor or have been impregnated. The
existence of such a heifer is considered a biological anomaly and very rare. Fortunately, the
ritual requires an infinitesimally small quantity of ashes. From the time of Moses, who personally
prepared the first heifer, until the destruction of the Temple, only nine red heifers were prepared.
Nonetheless, this was sufficient to maintain the ritual purity of the entire nation for almost 2,000
years.
According to Jewish tradition, there will only be ten red heifers in human history with the tenth
heifer ushering in the Messianic era. Rabbi Moshe ben Maimon (Maimonides), the most
renowned medieval Jewish scholar known by the acronym Rambam, wrote in his explanation of
the mitzvah that “the tenth red heifer will be accomplished by the king, the Messiah; may he be
revealed speedily, Amen, May it be God’s will.”
Rabbi Chaim Richman, the International Director of the Temple Institute, commented on this on
the institute’s website.
“If there has been no red heifer for the past 2,000 years, perhaps it is because the time was not
right; Israel was far from being ready. But now… what could it mean for the times we live in, to
have the means for purification so close at hand? With the words of Maimonides in mind, we
cannot help but wonder and pray: If there are now red heifers… is ours the era that will need
them?”
Cedarwood, hyssop, and wool or yarn dyed scarlet are added to the fire, and the remaining
ashes are placed in a vessel containing spring water to purify a person who has become ritually
contaminated by contact with a corpse. Water from the vessel is sprinkled on the subject, using
a bunch of hyssop, on the third and seventh day of the purification p process.
rocess. The priest who
performs the ritual then becomes ritually unclean, and must then wash himself and his clothes in
running waters. He is deemed impure until evening.
No less stringent than the laws pertaining to the heifer are the laws pertaining to the
t site where
the heifer is burned. Almost 30 years ago, Rabbi Yonatan Adler, who is also an archaeologist,
performed an in-depth
depth study into the textual references to the site where the red heifer was
burned, publishing his results in in the Torah journal Techumin. His calculations, based on the
Holy of Holies being located where the Dome of the Rock stands today, led him to a spot where
Dominus Flevit, a Catholic Church built in 1955, now stands. Archaeological surveys discovered
unique characteristics of the site that corresponded to descriptions in the Talmud.
This Red Heifer (baby cow) was born on August 28th, 2018 AD after 2000 years
and fulfilling the Biblical Prophecy as it paved the way for the sacrifice to be
given on the 3rd Temple Mount which is planned to be built soon.
According to their beliefs, the Sacrifice of this Red Heifer should be done with in
2 years from its birth before 28th August, 2020 AD in the 3rd Temple Mount. So
the Construction of the 3rd Temple Mount of Jews has to be started or its
foundation has to be laid before 28th August, 2020 AD.
Sacrifice of the RED HEIFER in the 3rd Temple Mount.....On & Before 28th Aug, 2020 AD
There is a misconception among the scholars of Islam that Ghazwa e Hind would
happen before the Arrival of Hazrat Esa and Mahdi. This Holy War was predicted by
our Prophet Muhammad (PBUH) which will happen after the Arrival of Hazrat Isa
(AS) and the Arrival of Mahdi.
The Islamic definition of "Ghazwa" is the Holy War in which Prophet
Muhammad (PBUH) or Any Prophet should be present.
Then the Holy War in the presence of Mahdi and Prophet Hazrat Esa (AS) would be
called as "Ghazwa" in which Hind - India would be defeated by the forces of Sindh -
Pakistan.
The monument stands at an approximate elevation of 750 feet (230 m) above sea
level, about 90 miles (140 km) east of Atlanta, 45 miles (72 km) from Athens,
Georgia and 9 miles (14 km) north of the center of the city of Elberton.
The structure is sometimes referred to as an "American Stonehenge". The
monument is 19 feet 3 inches (5.87 m) tall, made from six granite slabs weighing
237,746 pounds (107,840 kg) in all.
Purposely placed in nature’s grasp, undisturbed by city life, this massive monument
has an alarming message to convey to the world. Although the message is a
beautiful ideal—tracing its roots back to the concept of a Utopia—it also entails
sinister prospects for the future of humanity .
Although the 10 “guides” are somewhat vague, they raise 5 main areas of interest:
1) Sustainable Development
2) New-Earth based Religion
3) World Government System
4) Eugenics or Transhumanism
5) Reducing the Population by 80-90%
So one can easily understand that the Elite no longer wants Democracy in the World
but want to implement ONE WORLD ORDER after the Great War in which 1/3rd
population would die and another 1/3rd would die from Drought and Diseases as
the result of that Great War by the year - 2021 AD --- The 21st year of the 21st
Century.
AGENDA 21 --- To Kill 2/3rd Population by Great War and Diseases by 2021-2022 AD
The most popular weapons in the Army of Dajjal - The Satanic Forces are as follows:
1. Music Industry
2. Banking Industry
3. Stock Markets
4. Film Industry
5. Weapons Industry
6. Entertainment Industry
7. Sports Industry
8. Sex Trade - Prostitution
9. Drug Industry
10. Pharma Industry
11. Food Industry
12. Insurance Industry
13. War Industry
14. Fashion Industry, and so on
The Dajjal is the Master of Deception and Illusion. So the Dajjal System created a
Web of Deception and Illusion all over the World to trust its System and this System
would be prevailing in the World before the Arrival of Mahdi and the Second
Coming of Jesus Christ.
The 3 Famous - W:
1. Wealth
2. Women
3. War
The 3 Famous - S:
1. Sports
2. Screen
3. Science
The Dajjal System has to control Science to control human population all over the
world. The Modern Scientific advancements in the Dajjal System is controlling the
minds and hearts of people all over the World.
Some of the modern scientific developments of Dajjal System to control the human
population are as follows:
Transhumanism
Human Organ Transplants
5G/6G - Technology
Solar Weapons
Genetically Modified Crops - GMC
Genetic Engineering
Artifical Intelligence (AI)
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 859
Robotic Body Parts
Weather Modifications - HAARP
Biomechanics
Smart Phones
Drone Technology
Mission to planet Mars
Human Cloning
Research in Teleportation
There are several other technologies in which the Dajjal System has made
tremendous advancement to control the human population of the world and all
these discoveries and inventions are leading to the claim of Dajjal as GOD of
the World on and after the Arrival of Mahdi and the Second Coming of Jesus Christ.
In the past, the Evil used Magic to control the minds and hearts of people and now
Science has replaced Magic in controlling the behaviour, minds and hearts of
people.
All the famous Economists, Investors, Trend Analysts like Warren Buffet, Alan
Greenspan, Gerald Celente, etc have predicted that the Global Economy is heading
towards major Debt Bubble, major Global Economic Collapse, Stock Market Crash,
Global Depression and World Recession by the end of year 2019 and getting its
climax in 2020 AD.
"2019
2019 will mark exactly 10 years since end of the Global Financial Crisis in 2009. The
cracks have started to appear in the markets and fundamentals are not looking as
strong as they once were. In 2018, stock markets suffered their worst since 2008.
There are several warnings signs are showing red flags in the market - causing some
analysts to predict a 70% correction this year.
2018 was the most volatile year in the stock market since the recession, and
volatility can make stock market crises more likely. Yet, volatility is just one reason
the world's biggest hedge fund managers and leading economists are predicting a
2019 crash. Another reason is rising interest rates.
The US economy firing on all cylinders, the Federal Reserve has increased interest
rates eight times since 2015. However, as the US nears fullll employment, there is
increased danger of rising inflation and consumer prices. Increasing interest rates is
a strategy to curb the rise of inflation - increasing the cost of credit and making
saving more attractive strikes a balance between people spending
spend and saving.
However, there are also dangers to this approach. History shows it can lead to
economic shrinkage, falling stock prices and stock market crashes. It's not surprising
that interest rate hikes have preceded over 10 economic recessions in the past 40
years.
For the first time in nearly 12 years Apple downgraded their sales outlook. In
a letter to investors, chief executive Tim Cook blamed the company's sales problem
almost entirely on problems
blems in China - which accounts for approximately 20% of
their overall revenue.
Source: Bloomberg
For the first time in Donald Trump's presidency, both economic data and sentiment
indicators are missing analyst expectations. US factory activity has dropped to a two
year low and has missedssed every estimate in Bloomberg surveys. According to Jeff
Carbone off Cornerstone Wealth, "the market is pricing in recession no matter
what. Now to what extent and when? That history hasn't been written yet."
"We have the strongest economy in 40 years, at full employment. The mood is
euphoric. But it is unsustainable and comes with costs such as bubbles in stocks and
credit."
In all Versions of Bible available today, the Chapter - Matthew - 24 and the Verse -
36 mentions that:
NET Bible
"But as for that day and hour no one knows it--not even the angels in heaven--except the Father
alone.
Douay-Rheims Bible
But of that day and hour no one knoweth, not the angels of heaven, but the Father alone.
This Verse from Bible clearly says that we could not know the Day and the Hour but
we can know the Year of His Second Coming from the signs given in the Bible. Let us
see the verses from the Bible mentioning the Signs of the Second Coming of Jesus
Christ. And most of the priests agree that we are living in the End Times and it is a
matter of few years that we would see the Return of Jesus Christ.
And some Christian scholors even calculated using the Scripture Knowledge, the
year of His Second Coming as 2023 AD like Ian Gurney mentioned in his book,
'Casandra Prophecy'.
Now may the God of peace Himself sanctify you entirely; and may your spirit and soul and body be
preserved complete, without blame at the coming of our Lord Jesus Christ.
James 5:7
Therefore be patient, brethren, until the coming of the Lord The farmer waits for the precious
produce of the soil, being patient about it, until it gets the early and late rains.
Thessalonians 5:1-3
Now as to the times and the epochs, brethren, you have no need of anything to be written to you. For
you yourselves know full well that the day of the Lord will come just like a thief in the night. While
they are saying, "Peace and safety!" then destruction will come upon them suddenly like labor pains
upon a woman with child, and they will not escape.
And after He had said these things, He was lifted up while they were looking on, and a cloud received
Him out of their sight. And as they were gazing intently into the sky while He was going, behold, two
men in white clothing stood beside them. They also said, "Men of Galilee, why do you stand looking
into the sky? This Jesus, who has been taken up from you into
Acts 3:19
"Therefore repent and return, so that your sins may be wiped away, in order that times of refreshing
may come from the presence of the Lord;
Hebrews 9:28
so Christ also, having been offered once to bear the sins of many, will appear a second time for
salvation without reference to sin, to those who eagerly await Him.
Thessalonians 1:10
and to wait for His Son from heaven, whom He raised from the dead, that is Jesus, who rescues us
from the wrath to come.
Philippians 4:5
Let your gentle spirit be known to all men. The Lord is near.
Revelation 22:12
"Behold, I am coming quickly, and My reward is with Me, to render to every man according to what
he has done.
Revelation 1:7
BEHOLD, HE IS COMING WITH THE CLOUDS, and every eye will see Him, even those who
pierced Him; and all the tribes of the earth will mourn over Him. So it is to be. Amen.
Matthew 24:42
"Therefore be on the alert, for you do not know which day your Lord is coming.
Corinthians 1:7
so that you are not lacking in any gift, awaiting eagerly the revelation of our Lord Jesus Christ,
Peter 3:4
and saying, "Where is the promise of His coming? For ever since the fathers fell asleep, all continues
just as it was from the beginning of creation."
"There will be signs in sun and moon and stars, and on the earth dismay among nations, in perplexity
at the roaring of the sea and the waves,
Philippians 3:20
For our citizenship is in heaven, from which also we eagerly wait for a Savior, the Lord Jesus Christ;
Titus 2:13
looking for the blessed hope and the appearing of the glory of our great God and Savior, Christ Jesus,
John 14:3
"If I go and prepare a place for you, I will come again and receive you to Myself, that where I am,
there you may be also.
Matthew 26:64
Jesus said to him, "You have said it yourself; nevertheless I tell you, hereafter you will see THE SON
OF MAN SITTING AT THE RIGHT HAND OF POWER, and COMING ON THE CLOUDS OF
HEAVEN."
Matthew 16:27
"For the Son of Man is going to come in the glory of His Father with His angels, and WILL THEN
REPAY EVERY MAN ACCORDING TO HIS DEEDS.
Matthew 25:31
"But when the Son of Man comes in His glory, and all the angels with Him, then He will sit on His
glorious throne.
Mark 8:38
"For whoever is ashamed of Me and My words in this adulterous and sinful generation, the Son of
Man will also be ashamed of him when He comes in the glory of His Father with the holy angels."
Peter 3:4
and saying, "Where is the promise of His coming? For ever since the fathers fell asleep, all continues
just as it was from the beginning of creation."
Revelation 16:15
"Behold, I am coming like a thief Blessed is the one who stays awake and keeps his clothes, so that
he will not walk about naked and men will not see his shame."
"But of that day and hour no one knows, not even the angels of heaven, nor the Son, but the Father
alone.
Luke 12:40
"You too, be ready; for the Son of Man is coming at an hour that you do not expect."
Thessalonians 5:2
For you yourselves know full well that the day of the Lord will come just like a thief in the night.
Revelation 3:3
'So remember what you have received and heard; and keep it, and repent Therefore if you do not
wake up, I will come like a thief, and you will not know at what hour I will come to you.
Matthew 16:27
"For the Son of Man is going to come in the glory of His Father with His angels, and WILL THEN
REPAY EVERY MAN ACCORDING TO HIS DEEDS.
Jude 1:14-15
It was also about these men that Enoch, in the seventh generation from Adam, prophesied, saying,
"Behold, the Lord came with many thousands of His holy ones, to execute judgment upon all, and to
convict all the ungodly of all their ungodly deeds which they have done in an ungodly way, and of all
the harsh things which ungodly sinners have spoken against Him."
Timothy 4:1
I solemnly charge you in the presence of God and of Christ Jesus, who is to judge the living and the
dead, and by His appearing and His kingdom:
Corinthians 4:5
Therefore do not go on passing judgment before the time, but wait until the Lord comes who will
both bring to light the things hidden in the darkness and disclose the motives of men's hearts; and
then each man's praise will come to him from God.
Matthew 25:31-32
"But when the Son of Man comes in His glory, and all the angels with Him, then He will sit on His
glorious throne. "All the nations will be gathered before Him; and He will separate them from one
another, as the shepherd separates the sheep from the goats;
"For whoever is ashamed of Me and My words in this adulterous and sinful generation, the Son of
Man will also be ashamed of him when He comes in the glory of His Father with the holy angels."
Matthew 24:30
"And then the sign of the Son of Man will appear in the sky, and then all the tribes of the earth will
mourn, and they will see the SON OF MAN COMING ON THE CLOUDS OF THE SKY with
power and great glory.
Revelation 1:7
BEHOLD, HE IS COMING WITH THE CLOUDS, and every eye will see Him, even those who
pierced Him; and all the tribes of the earth will mourn over Him. So it is to be. Amen.
Thessalonians 1:7-8
and to give relief to you who are afflicted and to us as well when the Lord Jesus will be revealed from
heaven with His mighty angels in flaming fire, dealing out retribution to those who do not know God
and to those who do not obey the gospel of our Lord Jesus.
Luke 21:26
men fainting from fear and the expectation of the things which are coming upon the world; for the
powers of the heavens will be shaken.
Thessalonians 4:16
For the Lord Himself will descend from heaven with a shout, with the voice of the archangel and with
the trumpet of God, and the dead in Christ will rise first.
Colossians 3:4
When Christ, who is our life, is revealed, then you also will be revealed with Him in glory.
Thessalonians 3:13
so that He may establish your hearts without blame in holiness before our God and Father at the
coming of our Lord Jesus with all His saints.
Thessalonians 5:23
Now may the God of peace Himself sanctify you entirely; and may your spirit and soul and body be
preserved complete, without blame at the coming of our Lord Jesus Christ.
For our citizenship is in heaven, from which also we eagerly wait for a Savior, the Lord Jesus Christ;
who will transform the body of our humble state into conformity with the body of His glory, by the
exertion of the power that He has even to subject all things to Himself.
Corinthians 1:7
so that you are not lacking in any gift, awaiting eagerly the revelation of our Lord Jesus Christ,
Corinthians 4:5
Therefore do not go on passing judgment before the time, but wait until the Lord comes who will
both bring to light the things hidden in the darkness and disclose the motives of men's hearts; and
then each man's praise will come to him from God.
Timothy 6:14
that you keep the commandment without stain or reproach until the appearing of our Lord Jesus
Christ,
Matthew 24:44
"For this reason you also must be ready; for the Son of Man is coming at an hour when you do not
think He will.
John 2:28
Now, little children, abide in Him, so that when He appears, we may have confidence and not shrink
away from Him in shame at His coming.
Peter 5:4
And when the Chief Shepherd appears, you will receive the unfading crown of glory.
Luke 19:13
"And he called ten of his slaves, and gave them ten minas and said to them, 'Do business with this
until I come back.'
Titus 2:13
looking for the blessed hope and the appearing of the glory of our great God and Savior, Christ Jesus,
Luke 12:37
"Blessed are those slaves whom the master will find on the alert when he comes; truly I say to you,
that he will gird himself to serve, and have them recline at the table, and will come up and wait on
them.
Beloved, now we are children of God, and it has not appeared as yet what we will be We know that
when He appears, we will be like Him, because we will see Him just as He is.
John 14:3
"If I go and prepare a place for you, I will come again and receive you to Myself, that where I am,
there you may be also.
So the Second Coming of Jesus Christ is very near in the Year - 2023 AD and as far as
the Day and the Hour is concerned, it is in the knowledge of Allah. But Hazrat Esa
(Jesus Christ) would come along with Imam Mahdi on His Arrival.
ONE WORLD RELIGION is another attack on all relgions by Satanic forces so that
people leave their religion and follow False Religion and False Prophets and Saints
and it is a clear sign that we living in the End Times.
The one-world religion described in Revelation 17:1–18 as “the great harlot” will be
part of the end-times scenario. The term harlot is used throughout the Old
Testament as a metaphor for false religion. The actual identity and makeup of the
religion has been debated for centuries and has resulted in a number of different
views among Bible commentators and theologians. There are convincing arguments
for the one world religion being Catholicism, Islam, the New Age movement, or
some form of religion not even invented yet, and an internet search will produce
many more possibilities and theories.
There is no doubt that some sort of one-world religion under the false prophet will
be a part of the end times, perhaps made up of a number of different religions,
sects, and isms that are around today.
Verses 2–3 describe the harlot as committing adultery with the “kings of the earth,”
referring to the false religion’s influence among the world’s rulers and influential
people. The reference to being drunk with the wine of her adulteries may refer to
those who are drunk with the power they receive from worshiping the false god of
the false religion.
Satan frequently ensnares those whose lust for power drives them away from the
worship of the true and living God. The alliances forged by the false religion will
unite church and state as never before.
Eventually, the harlot will lose favor with the Antichrist, who will want to receive
the world’s worship for himself. He will not share the adoration of the world with
the prophets and priests of the false religion, no matter how obsequious or fawning
they may be. Once the Antichrist gains the world’s amazed attention by his
miraculous return from the dead (Revelation 13:3, 12, 14), he will turn on the false
religious system and destroy it, establishing himself as God. The deception, Jesus
tells us, will be so great that, if it were possible, even the elect would fall for it
(Matthew 24:24).
Pope Francis has openly promoted One World Religion for New One World Order.
Recently Saudi Arabia also agreed to open churches in the their country to promote
ONE WORLD RELIGION concept.
Under the guise of fighting extremism and interfaith brotherhood, the ONE WORLD
RELIGION is making its ground work to be lauched in full operation once they
announce NEW ONE WORLD ORDER after the Great 3rd World War.
If you notice that most of the famous Hollywood Movie series and the famous
Drama series are ending in the year - 2019 AD and they are showing their Final
Episodes as:
These films and their titles are the clear indicator that Elite is planning to End the
Shows and Series of major Film and Drama series in 2019 before they hit their show
in the World of the End Game in the form of Wars and New World Order before the
Arrival of Imam Mahdi and the Second Coming of Jesus Christ in 2023 AD.
With the courtesy of the following website, the following article is reproduced and
the link of the article is:
https://www.carbonbrief.org/sea-level-rise-due-antarctic-ice-melt-has-tripled-over-
past-five-years
The rate of sea level rise resulting from the melting of the Antarctic ice sheet has
tripled over the past five years, according to new research from a global team of
scientists.
The study, published in Nature, finds that ice loss from Antarctica has caused sea
levels to rise by 7.6mm from 1992-2017, with two fifths of this increase occurring
since 2012.
At a press conference held in London, scientists said the results suggest that
Antarctica has become “one of the largest contributors to sea level rise”.
A glaciologist not involved in the paper tells Carbon Brief that the findings show
“there now should be no doubt that Antarctica is losing ice due to regional climate
change, likely linked to global warming”.
Melting continent:
The new research was carried out by a team of scientists from the Ice Sheet Mass
Balance Inter-comparison Exercise (IMBIE). The international group was established
in 2011 with the aim of creating a comprehensive view of how melting in world’s
polar regions could be contributing to sea level rise.
However, the new analysis finds that Antarctic ice melt is now driving sea level rise
of 0.6mm a year – suggesting that the rate of melting has increased three-fold in
just five years.
The results show that Antarctic ice melt has become “one of the largest
contributors to sea level rise”, says Prof Andrew Shepherd, co-leader of IMBIE and
director of the Natural Environment Research Council (NERC) Centre for Polar
Observation and Modelling based at the University of Leeds.
Satellite sentinels
For the new study, the researchers combined data on ice cover and weight taken
from a range of satellites, including NASA’s Gravity Recovery and Climate
Experiment (GRACE) mission and the European Space Agency’s CryoSat mission.
The team then used models to adjust the data to take into account physical
processes that might have influenced sea level changes – such as how the ground
beneath ice sheets responds to shrinking ice cover.
The resulting data reveals a “clear signal” showing an acceleration in the rate of
Antarctic ice sheet melt, says Dr Erik Ivins, co-leader of IMBIE and a senior research
scientist at the NASA Jet Propulsion Laboratory. He tells Carbon Brief:
“We now have a signal that is large enough that those adjustments we have to
make are smaller than the signal that we’re seeing. So we’re very confident in the
net result – which is Antarctica seems to be losing ice mass, enough to cause about
0.6mm of sea level rise per year.”
The diagram below shows their locations: the Antarctic Peninsula (green), West
Antarctica (pink) and East Antarctica (blue). The numbers show the location of ice
sheet drainage basins.
Diagram showing the location of the Antarctic Peninsula (green), the West Antarctic
ice sheet (pink) and the East Antarctic ice sheet (blue). Numbers show the location
of ice sheet drainage basins. Source: Shepherd et al. (2018)
The chart below shows the total amount of ice loss from Antarctica (purple) and in
each region, including West Antarctica (green), East Antarctica (yellow) and the
Antarctic Peninsula (red) from 1992
1992-2017.
2017. Results from the current study are shown
against results from IMBIE’s last assessment in 2012 (dashed lines).
The results show how, in the past decade, West Antarctica has experienced the
highest volume of ice loss.
The animation
nimation below shows changes in ice sheet thickness across West Antarctica,
with red showing reductions in thickness and blue showing gains.
The following chart indicates the extent to which each Antarctic region has
contributed to recent sea level rise. It shows that, over the past decade, ice loss
from West Antarctica contributed the most to sea level rise.
The reason that West Antarctica may be more vulnerable to melting than other
regions is because it is largely made up of “marine-based”
based” glaciers, which
w sit on
land below sea level.
Around 75% of the glaciers in West Antarctic ice sheet are marine-based, compared
to just 35% of glaciers in East Antarctica, according to the latest assessment
report from the Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change (IPCC).
Though the study did not seek to make future predictions about how Antarctic
melting could influence sea level rise, it does cause “concerns for the future”,
Shepherd says:
The findings are “significant” because they encompass “new satellite missions and
advances in geophysical techniques and corrections”, says Dr Alison Banwell, a
glaciologist at the National Snow and Ice Data Center Group (NSIDC) at
the University of Colorado, Boulder, who was not involved in the research. She tells
Carbon Brief:
“There now should be no doubt that Antarctica is losing ice due to regional climate
change, likely linked to global warming. If these rates of sea level rise continue, they
The research is part of a special issue in Nature, which includes five papers
exploring Antarctica’s past, present and possible futures.
With the courtesy of the following website, the facts about the Arctic Sea
melting is produced:
https://www.scientificamerican.com/article/arctic-ice-melts-cause-rising-sea/
Recent NASA photos showed the opening of the Northwest Passage and that a third
of the Arctic’s sea ice has melted in recent. Are sea levels already starting to rise
accordingly, and if so what effects is this having?
Researchers were astounded when, in the fall of 2007, they discovered that the
year-round ice pack in the Arctic Ocean had lost some 20 percent of its mass in just
two years, setting a new record low since satellite imagery began documenting the
terrain in 1978. Without action to stave off climate change, some scientists believe
that, at that rate, all of the year-round ice in the Arctic could be gone by as early as
2030.
This massive reduction has allowed an ice-free shipping lane to open through the
fabled Northwest Passage along northern Canada, Alaska and Greenland. While the
shipping industry—which now has easy northern access between the Atlantic and
Pacific oceans—may be cheering this “natural” development, scientists worry about
the impact of the resulting rise in sea levels around the world.
The World Wildlife Fund (WWF) reports that low-lying island nations, especially in
equatorial regions, have been hardest hit by this phenomenon, and some are
threatened with total disappearance. Rising seas have already swallowed up two
uninhabited islands in the Central Pacific. On Samoa, thousands of residents have
moved to higher ground as shorelines have retreated by as much as 160 feet. And
islanders on Tuvalu are scrambling to find new homes as salt water intrusion has
made their groundwater undrinkable while increasingly strong hurricanes and
ocean swells have devastated shoreline structures.
WWF says that rising seas throughout tropical and sub-tropical regions of the world
have inundated coastal ecosystems, decimating local plant and wildlife populations.
In Bangladesh and Thailand, coastal mangrove forests—important buffers against
storms and tidal waves—are giving way to ocean water.
Unfortunately, even if we curb global warming emissions today, these problems are
likely to get worse before they get better. According to marine geophysicist Robin
Bell of Columbia University’s Earth Institute, sea levels rise by about 1/16” for every
150 cubic miles of ice that melts off one of the poles.
“That may not sound like a lot, but consider the volume of ice now locked up in the
planet’s three greatest ice sheets,” she writes in a recent issue of Scientific
American. “If the West Antarctic ice sheet were to disappear, sea level would rise
almost 19 feet; the ice in the Greenland ice sheet could add 24 feet to that; and the
East Antarctic ice sheet could add yet another 170 feet to the level of the world’s
oceans: more than 213 feet in all.” Bell underscores the severity of the situation by
pointing out that the 150-foot tall Statue of Liberty could be completely submerged
within a matter of decades."
The facts from the above Scientific articles prove that the Earth is becoming
Unstable and Unsustainable due to extreme Ice Melting in both the Arctic and
Antarctic regions in the North and South Poles and the Oceans and Sea levels would
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 892
rise to extreme levels and destroy most coastal regions of the World in the next few
years. So the God's Intervention to save His Earth from this disaster is very Urgent
in the next few years because the World Organizations have already declared that
all the Ice would be melted by 2030 AD.
With the courtesy of the following article from the website to show the gravity of
Antarctica Ice melting:
https://www.sciencedaily.com/releases/2019/01/190114161150.htm
Antarctica experienced a sixfold increase in yearly ice mass loss between 1979 and
2017, according to a study published today in Proceedings of the National Academy
of Sciences. Glaciologists from the University of California, Irvine, NASA's Jet
Propulsion Laboratory and the Netherlands' Utrecht University additionally found
that the accelerated melting caused global sea levels to rise more than half an inch
during that time.
"That's just the tip of the iceberg, so to speak," said lead author Eric Rignot, Donald
Bren Professor and chair of Earth system science at UCI. "As the Antarctic ice sheet
continues to melt away, we expect multi-meter sea level rise from Antarctica in the
coming centuries."
For this study, Rignot and his collaborators conducted what he called the longest-
ever assessment of remaining Antarctic ice mass. Spanning four decades, the
project was also geographically comprehensive; the research team examined 18
regions encompassing 176 basins, as well as surrounding islands.
Techniques used to estimate ice sheet balance included a comparison of snowfall
accumulation in interior basins with ice discharge by glaciers at their grounding
lines, where ice begins to float in the ocean and detach from the bed. Data was
derived from fairly high-resolution aerial photographs taken from a distance of
about 350 meters via NASA's Operation IceBridge; satellite radar interferometry
Hebrews 9:4 states that the Ark contained "the golden pot that had manna, and
Aaron's rod that budded, and the tablets of the covenant."
Revelation 11:19 says the prophet saw God's temple in heaven opened, "and the
ark of his covenant was seen within his temple."
The biblical account relates that, approximately one year after the Israelites' exodus
from Egypt, the Ark was created according to the pattern given to Moses by God
when the Israelites were encamped at the foot of biblical Mount Sinai. Thereafter,
the gold-plated acacia chest was carried by its staves while en route by
the Levites approximately 2,000 cubits (approximately 800 meters or 2,600 feet) in
advance of the people when on the march or before the Israelite army, the host of
fighting men.
When carried, the Ark was always hidden under a large veil made of skins and blue
cloth, always carefully concealed, even from the eyes of the priestsand the Levites
who carried it. God was said to have spoken with Moses "from between the
two cherubim" on the Ark's cover. When at rest the tabernacle was set up and the
holy Ark was placed in it under the veil of the covering, the staves of it crossing the
middle side bars to hold it up off the ground.
According to the Book of Exodus, God instructed Moses on Mount Sinai during his
40-day stay upon the mountain within the thick cloud and darkness where God
was and he was shown the pattern for the tabernacle and furnishings of the Ark to
be made of shittim wood to house the Tablets of Stone. Moses
instructed Bezalel and Oholiab to construct the Ark. In Deuteronomy, however, the
Ark is said to have been built specifically by Moses himself without reference of
Bezalel or Oholiab.
The Book of Exodus gives detailed instructions on how the Ark is to be constructed.
It is to be 21⁄2 cubits in length, 11⁄2 in breadth, and 11⁄2 in height (approximately
131×79×79 cm or 52×31×31 in). Then it is to be gilded entirely with gold, and a
crown or molding of gold is to be put around it. Four rings of gold are to be attached
to its four corners, two on each side—and through these rings staves of shittim-
wood overlaid with gold for carrying the Ark are to be inserted; and these are not to
be removed. A golden lid, the kapporet(translated as "mercy seat" or "cover")
which is covered with 2 golden cherubim, is to be placed above the Ark. Missing
from the account are instructions concerning the thickness of the mercy seat and
details about the cherubim other than that the cover be beaten out the ends of the
Ark and that they form the space where God will appear. The Ark is finally to be
placed under the veil of the covering.
Mobile vanguard
The biblical account continues that, after its creation by Moses, the Ark was carried
by the Israelites during their 40 years of wandering in the desert. Whenever the
Israelites camped, the Ark was placed in a separate room in a sacred tent, called
the Tabernacle.
When the Israelites, led by Joshua toward the Promised Land, arrived at the banks
of the Jordan river, the Ark was carried in the lead preceding the people and was
the signal for their advance. During the crossing, the river grew dry as soon as the
When Joshua read the Law to the people between Mount Gerizim and Mount Ebal,
they stood on each side of the Ark. We next hear of the Ark in Bethel where it was
being cared for by the priest Phineas the grandson of Aaron (where 'Bethel' is
translated 'the House of God' in the King James Version). According to this verse it
was consulted by the people of Israel when they were planning to attack the
Benjaminites at the battle of Gibeah. Later, however, the Ark was kept at Shiloh,
another religious centre some 16 km (10 mi) north of Bethel, at the time of the
prophet Samuel's apprenticeship, where it was cared for by Hophni and Phinehas,
two sons of Eli.
1728 illustration of the Ark at the erection of the Tabernacle and the sacred vessels, as in Exodus 40:17-19
A few years later the elders of Israel decided to take the Ark out onto the battlefield
to assist them against the Philistines, after being defeated at the battle of Eben-
Ezer. They were, however, heavily defeated with the loss of 30,000 men. The Ark
was captured by the Philistines and Hophni and Phinehas were killed. The news of
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 898
its capture was at once taken to Shiloh by a messenger "with his clothes rent, and
with earth upon his head." The old priest, Eli, fell dead when he heard it; and his
daughter-in-law, bearing a son at the time the news of the capture of the Ark was
received, named him Ichabod—explained as "The glory has departed Israel" in
reference to the loss of the Ark. The mother of the child Ichabod died at his birth.
The Philistines took the Ark to several places in their country, and at each place
misfortune befell them. At Ashdod it was placed in the temple of Dagon. The next
morning Dagon was found prostrate, bowed down, before it; and on being restored
to his place, he was on the following morning again found prostrate and broken.
The people of Ashdod were smitten with tumors; a plague of mice was sent over
the land. The affliction of boils was also visited upon the people of Gath and
of Ekron, whither the Ark was successively removed.
After the Ark had been among them for seven months, the Philistines, on the advice
of their diviners, returned it to the Israelites, accompanying its return with an
offering consisting of golden images of the tumors and mice wherewith they had
been afflicted. The Ark was set up in the field of Joshua the Beth-shemite, and the
Beth-shemites offered sacrifices and burnt offerings. Out of curiosity the men
of Beth-shemesh gazed at the Ark; and as a punishment, seventy of them (fifty
thousand and seventy in some translations) were smitten by the Lord. The
Bethshemites sent to Kirjath-jearim, or Baal-Judah, to have the Ark removed; and it
was taken to the house of Abinadab, whose son Eleazar was sanctified to keep it.
Kirjath-jearim remained the abode of the Ark for twenty years. Under Saul, the Ark
was with the army before he first met the Philistines, but the king was too
impatient to consult it before engaging in battle. In 1 Chronicles 13:3 it is stated that
the people were not accustomed to consulting the Ark in the days of Saul.
On hearing that God had blessed Obed-edom because of the presence of the Ark in
his house, David had the Ark brought to Zion by the Levites, while he himself,
"girded with a linen ephod ... danced before the Lord with all his might" and in the
sight of all the public gathered in Jerusalem—a performance that caused him to be
scornfully rebuked by his first wife, Saul's daughter Michal. In Zion, David put the
Ark in the tabernacle he had prepared for it, offered sacrifices, distributed food, and
blessed the people and his own household.
The Levites were appointed to minister before the Ark. David's plan of building a
temple for the Ark was stopped at the advice of God. The Ark was with the army
during the siege of Rabbah; and when David fled from Jerusalem at the time
of Absalom's conspiracy, the Ark was carried along with him until he
ordered Zadok the priest to return it to Jerusalem.
In Solomon's Temple
When Abiathar was dismissed from the priesthood by King Solomon for having
taken part in Adonijah's conspiracy against David, his life was spared because he
had formerly borne the Ark. Solomon worshipped before the Ark after his dream in
which God promised him wisdom.
During the construction of Solomon's Temple, a special inner room, named Kodesh
Hakodashim (Eng. Holy of Holies), was prepared to receive and house the Ark; and
when the Temple was dedicated, the Ark—containing the original tablets of the Ten
Commandments—was placed therein. When the priests emerged from the holy
place after placing the Ark there, the Temple was filled with a cloud, "for the glory
of the Lord had filled the house of the Lord".
In 587 BC, the Babylonians destroyed Jerusalem and Solomon's Temple. There is no
record of what became of the Ark in the Books of Kings and Chronicles. An ancient
Greek version of the biblical third Book of Ezra, 1 Esdras, suggests that Babylonians
took away the vessels of the ark of God, but does not mention taking away the Ark:
A late 2nd-century rabbinic work known as the Tosefta states the opinions of these
rabbis that Josiah, the king of Judah, stored away the Ark, along with the jar
of manna, and a jar containing the holy anointing oil, the rod of Aaron which
budded and a chest given to Israel by the Philistines. This was said to have been
done in order to prevent their being carried off into Babylon as had already
happened to the other vessels. Rabbi Eliezer and Rabbi Shimon, in the same
rabbinic work, state that the Ark was, in fact, taken into Babylon. Rabbi Yehudah,
dissenting, says that the Ark was stored away in its own place, meaning,
somewhere on the Temple Mount.
References in Scriptures
Tanakh
The Ark is first mentioned in the Book of Exodus, and then numerous times
in Deuteronomy, Joshua, Judges, I Samuel, II Samuel, I Kings, I Chronicles, II
Chronicles, Psalms and Jeremiah.
And it shall be that when you multiply and become fruitful in the land, in those
days—the word of the LORD—they will no longer say, 'The Ark of the Covenant of
the LORD' and it will not come to mind; they will not mention it, and will not recall
it, and it will not be used any more.
Rashi comments on this verse that "The entire people will be so imbued with the
spirit of sanctity that God's Presence will rest upon them collectively, as if the
congregation itself was the Ark of the Covenant."
The records show that it was the prophet Jeremiah who ... prompted by a divine
message ... gave orders that the Tent of Meeting and the ark should go with him.
Then he went away to the mountain from the top of which Moses saw God's
promised land. When he reached the mountain, Jeremiah found a cave-dwelling; he
carried the tent, the ark, and the incense-altar into it, then blocked up the entrance.
Some of his companions came to mark out the way, but were unable to find it.
When Jeremiah learnt of this he reprimanded them.
"The place shall remain unknown", he said, "until God finally gathers his people
together and shows mercy to them. The Lord will bring these things to light again,
and the glory of the Lord will appear with the cloud, as it was seen both in the time
The "mountain from the top of which Moses saw God's promised land" would
be Mount Nebo, located in what is now Jordan.
New Testament
In the New Testament, the Ark is mentioned in the Letter to the Hebrews and
the Revelation to St. John. Hebrews 9:4states that the Ark contained "the golden
pot that had manna, and Aaron's rod that budded, and the tablets of the
covenant."
Revelation 11:19 says the prophet saw God's temple in heaven opened, "and the
ark of his covenant was seen within his temple."
In the Gospel of Luke, the author's accounts of the Annunciation and Visitation are
constructed using eight points of literary parallelism to compare Mary to the Ark.
Saint Athanasius, the bishop of Alexandria, is credited with writing about the
connections between the Ark and the Virgin Mary: "O noble Virgin, truly you are
greater than any other greatness. For who is your equal in greatness, O dwelling
place of God the Word? To whom among all creatures shall I compare you, O
Virgin? You are greater than them all O (Ark of the) Covenant, clothed with purity
instead of gold! You are the Ark in which is found the golden vessel containing the
true manna, that is, the flesh in which Divinity resides" (Homily of the Papyrus of
Turin).
Chapter 2 (Sura 2) of the Quran (Verse 248), is believed to refer to the Ark:
And their prophet said to them, "Indeed, a sign of his kingship is that the chest
(tābūt) will come to you in which is assurance (sakīnatun) from your Lord and a
remnant of what the family of Moses (Mūsā) and the family of Aaron (Hārūn) had
left, carried by the angels. Indeed in that is a sign for you, if you are believers."
The Islamic scholar Al Baidawi mentioned that the sakina could be Tawrat, the
Books of Moses. According to Al-Jalalan, the relics in the Ark were the fragments of
the two tablets, rods, robes, shoes, mitre of Moses and the vase of manna.
According to Uri Rubin the Ark of the Covenant has a religious basis in Islam, and
Islam gives it special significance.
There is a lot of confusion and conflict about the possible locations of the Ark of the
Covenant as no one is sure about the whereabouts of the precious Ark of the
Covenant of the Jews till today.
Some of the possible locations of the Ark of the Covenant according to different
sources are as follows:
Mount Nebo
Ethiopia
Southern Africa
Chartres Cathedral, France
Rome
United Kingdom
Ireland
Egypt
But Mahdi would bring this Ark of Covenant from one of the Mountains of Syria and
read the Old Scripture of Jews in front of them in their Holy Language and after
seeing this Miracle of Mahdi, hundreds and thousands of Jews would accept Islam
on His Hands as narrated in the Sayings of Hazrat Ali regarding the Arrival of Mahdi.
https://labs.sogeti.com/predictions-2019-2023/
When in the glimmering between two years it is tradition predict the “near” future. Since
predicting only one year ahead is a bit boring, I am going to start with my yearly 5(+)-years
prediction.
Predictions 2019-2023
My predictions will not be of the type “2019 will be the year of AI and Ethics” or “2019 will be
the year of autonomous cars”.
1. 2019 will be the year of a Mondial financial crisis larger than the 2008 financial crisis.
2. 2020 will be the year of the financial crisis combined with big social unrest aka in the
US and EU forced the resignation of leaders of government.
3. 2021 will be the year of financial, civil crisis and the start of World War 3.
4. 2021-2022 will be the rise of the new Gandhi or Martin Luther King. I will call this the
MLK 2.0
5. 2023 will be the year of the start of the new and global enlightenment.
Prediction one
2019 will see a financial crisis that dwarves the 2008 crisis.
Prediction two
In 2020 the financial crisis will evolve into global civil unrest.
Where the current society is developing more and more from a hierarchical and dialogue
based society to a network society.
We as a people are connected everywhere via technology, social media, and ease of
transportation. The predicted global village is now a reality. This is the reason we as a
people do not trust the “elite” anymore since we can Google everything, or are in
a bubble with our tribe that sees the world differently.
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=LfMe0dsxk_Q
https://twitter.com/wmiddelkoop/status/1077518981370728448
This dark side of the coin is also called VUCA (Volatile, Uncertain, Complex,
Ambiguous). VUCAcombined with the need for a tribe and a leader bring me to prediction 3.
Hate for others, blind following of a strong leader in a complex and unpredictable world are
ingredients for an accident blowing stuff up and pull us into a new world war.
When you listen to politic podcasts like “Talking Politics” (EN) or “Boekenstein & de Wijk”
(NL) you will recognize the analysis.
Most countries in the world are unstable (Venezuela, Brazil, Spain, Italy, France, USA,
Germany, Hungary, Russia, Iran, Turkey, etc).
The world is a big unstable atom, a heap of dry grass waiting for a spark to ignite it all.
Prediction four
In 2021-2022 the rise of MLK 2.0
“Darkness cannot drive out darkness: only light can do that. Hate cannot drive out hate: only
love can do that.”
― Martin Luther King Jr., A Testament of Hope: The Essential Writings and Speeches
This is where my hope is. We as a world will see a big crisis and a big war coming. And this
pendulum will create room for our next enlightenment, the question only is.. Who is going to
step up and direct the people of the whole world to our new future?
History doesn’t repeat itself but it often rhymes. What we see is that various people that
have a story of hope get big traction. Obama, Piketty, Harari, and in every country there are
local versions of these preachers of hope. We only have to wait and see what event will
unite us as inhabitants of the global village we call earth.
Edzo Botjes is an Enterprise Engineer with more than 15+ years experience. His believe is
that Enterprise Engineering covers not only Enterprise Architecture but also the skills
needed to realistically implement innovation, governance and architecture. This implies that
Group Psychology, IT Security Architecture, Technology Innovation and Ethics are a few
topics that should be included into the developing strategy and architecture. Edzo is
currently working on a Blockchain Reference Architecture and separately active as Principal
Architect PKI.
Daniel 12:11
"And from the time that........the abomination of desolation IS SET-UP there shall be
1,290 days."
Revelation 12:6 and 9-10 and 13 tell us that the rapture happens on the same day
Satan is cast down to earth mid-week 1,260 days before the end of the 70th week
of Daniel.
So you see, there are 30 days from the time the anti-Christ is revealed (1,290 days)
to the day of the rapture (1,260 )days before the end of the 70th Week.
There must be at least 1,290 days, or more, between the Spring Equinox in the year
the anti-Christ is revealed, which is also the year of the rapture, and the end of the
70th Week of Daniel on the New Moon of the Feast of Trumpets October 3, 2024 - 3
1/2 years later because of the following Scripture:
Matthew 24:20
"An pray that your flight may NOT BE IN WINTER or on the Sabbath."
So you see, the revealing of the anti-Christ will happen 1,290 days before the end of
the 70th Week of Daniel, BUT IT MUST HAPPEN AFTER THE SPRING EQUINOX ON
MARCH 20, the first day of Spring of that year, so that it will "NOT BE IN WINTER".
The year 2021 is the ONLY YEAR, for several years either way, that there are at least
1,290 days between the Spring Equinox and the end of the 70th Week of Daniel 3
1/2 years later on the New Moon of the Feast of Trumpets Tishri 1 / October 3,
2024.
March 20, 2021 is the Spring Equinox which is 1,293 days before the end of
the 70th Week of Daniel on the New Moon of Feast of Trumpets Tishri 1 /
October 3, 2024
March 23, 2021 is the day, Nisan 10 / Day of Palms, the anti-Christ reveals
himself by setting up the abomination 1,290 days before the end of the 70th
Week of Daniel.
April 21, 2021 sunset to April 22, sunset is 30 days later, which is the Day of
the rapture, mid-week, 1,260 days before the end of the 70th Week of Daniel.
According to the Scriptures, I firmly believe that this will be the YEAR 2021 scenario
of events we look forward to. I may be wrong, but I am not wrong yet! So mark
these dates on your calendar, AND WATCH!
2. Crisis in Israel - War with Iran and Proxy wars in Middle East
4. Crisis in North Korea - Nuclear tensions with USA, South Korea and Japan
11. Crisis in Germany - Political and Economic tensions with Russia and Britain
13. Crisis in India - War with Pakistan, Political and Economic Crisis
16. Crisis in France - Yellow Vest Movement, Economic and Political tensions
17. Crisis in Afghanistan - War in Afghanistan since 1979 till today, Taliban
19. Crisis in Libya - War, Civil Unrest, Economic and Political tensions
22. Crisis in Iraq - Three (3) Wars in Iraq in the last 25 years, Economic Crisis
World War 3 is the 16th Simpsons short and originally aired on The Tracey
Ullman Show on November 22, 1987. Edwin Starr's 1970 hit "War" is playing
in the background during this short.
Synopsis:
Homer wakes up everyone in the house while everyone else is asleep. He tells them
that it's World War 3 and that the bombs are dropping. Everyone frantically makes
it into the bomb shelter in 18 seconds. Homer says they would be dead meat if it
were a real war. His family starts shivering because they're cold. Homer wakes up
his family another time once they're sleeping, and says he means it. The rest of the
family is annoyed and go slowly down to the fallout shelter. Homer says that once
again, they're timing is off, to which they are angry. Homer wakes up his family a
This World War 3 Prediction was predicted in the year 1987 on 22n November. If
the World War 3 starts after 59th Presidential Elections in USA on 3rd November,
2020 AD, the years in between 2020 AD and 1987 AD are 33 years.
So World War 3 climax comes after 33 years of the release of this Simpsons Cartoon
in 1987. And most of the people know that 33rd is the Highest Degree in Free
Masons. General Albert Pike, Queen Elizabeth and most high ranking officials in
Free Masons are 33rd degree Masons.
1987 till 2020 ....................33 Years to reach the Climax of World War 3
So what exactly led to this crazy, accurate prediction? The writer, Dan Greaney told
Washington Post, “He seems like a ‘Simpsons’-esque figure — he fits right in there,
in an over-the-top way.” He continued, “But now that he’s running for president, I
see that in a much darker way. He seemed kind of lovable in the old days, in a
blowhard way.”
Jesus Christ would return in 2023 i.e. after 75 years from 1948 AD, when Israel
becomes Nation for the Jews.
http://www.iawwai.com/MuslimProphecies.html
A central tenet of the Muslim faith is the future coming of Imam Mahdi or the
Imam at the end of time. He is also known as Q'aim or the promised one. Though
the concept of Imam Mahdi is common to all branches of Islam, there is far more
emphasis and importance attributed to his coming, in the Shia sect as opposed
to the majority Sunni branch. It is in the Shia Islam that we find the most
heightened state of expectation for the imminent arrival of Imam Mahdi.
Though Shiites make up around 15% of total Muslim population Worldwide the
proportion is far higher in the Middle East where they make up over a third of
the total. Two important countries where Shiites make up the majority are Iran
and Iraq.
It is an interesting but not widely known fact that the official head of state of
Iran is actually Iman Mahdi, or will be when he arrives. The most power
politicians in Iran are really temporary stand ins for Imam Mahdi. Ayotollah
literally means 'place holder'.
In Iraq, among the Shiites, there is also a strong sense that the coming of Imam
Mahdi is imminent. A lot of Iraqis believe that '[The Americans] will not leave
until [Imam Mahdi] appears'. One of the biggest Shiite militias in Iraq, the so
called 'Mahdi Army' is waiting to be led by the Imam at the End of Time when he
announces himself. The acting head of the Mahdi Army, Moqtada Al Sadr has
said that, 'The Mahdi Army does not belong to me, but it is the base of [Imam
Mahdi]. All those who are in Iraq are [Imam Mahdi's] army.'
In the August of 2009, Iran's Khamenei called on Muslims around the world to
unite in response to the imminent arrival of the Mahdi. However the schism that
exists within Islam between the Sunni and Shiite sects is deep and this may not
happen. But what could quite possibly happen is a charismatic individual may be
able to unite the Shiites of the World especially those located in the Middle East
to form a Shiite Superstate and create America and Israel's worst nightmare.
what follow are a selection of prophecies describing the role and attributes of
Imam Mahdi and also the conditions of the World around the time of his arrival.
"The Imam who will create a world state will make the ruling nations pay for
their crimes against society. He will bring succor to humanity. He will take out
the hidden wealth from the breast of the earth and will distribute it equitably
amongst the needy deserving. He will teach you simple living and high thinking.
He will make you understand that virtue is a state of character which is always a
mean between the two extremes, and which is based upon equity and justice. He
will revive the teaching of the Holy Qur'an and the traditions of the Holy Prophet
after the world has ignored them as dead letters.... He will protect and defend
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 946
himself with resources of science and supreme knowledge. His control over these
resources will be complete. He will know how supreme they are and how
carefully they will have to be used. His mind will be free from desires of bringing
harm and injury to humanity. Such a knowledge to him will be like the property
which was wrongly possessed by others and for which he was waiting for the
permission to repossess and use. He, in the beginning, will be like a poor stranger
unknown and uncared for, and Islam then will be in the hopeless and helpless
plight of an exhausted camel who has laid down its head and is wagging its tail.
With such a start he will establish an empire of God in this world. He will be the
final demonstration and proof of God's merciful wish to acquaint man with the
right ways of life." - Islam. Nahjul Balagha, Khutba 141, 187
'The Apostle of Allah said, "Were there remaining but one day of the duration of
all time, God would send forth a man from the people of my house, who will fill
the earth with equity as it has been filled with oppression.' - Hadith of Abu
Dawud
The conditions of the World around the time of the coming of Imam Mahdi
'Society will be engulfed by ravaging wars, overflowing with havoc and
devastation. In the beginning the conquerers will feel very happy over their
success and booties gathered therein, but it will all have a very sad end. I warn
you of wars of the future; you have no idea of the enormity of evil which they
will carray.' - Nahjul Balagha, Sermon 141
'And when the Word is fullfilled against the unjust, We shall produce from the
earth a Beast to face them: he will speak to them, because that mankind did not
believe with assurance in Our signs.' - Quran 27.82
'The time is near in which nothing will remain of Islam but its name, and of the
Qur'an but its mere appearance, and the mosques of Muslims will be destitute of
knowledge and worship; and the learned men will be the worst people under the
heavens; and contention and strife will issue from them, and it will return upon
themselves.' - Islam. Hadith.
We are living in tumultuous times. A time of change and transition where we are
witnessing cultural and technological progress happening at dizzying speed. All
the while changes happening to the planet environmentally and political are
ushering in a world that will be very different from what we know today. And
not only is the pace of change frantic, the speed at which this global
transformation is taking place is actually accelerating. So what is happening in
the world? How can we understand this process that we are living through?
What's going to happen next and where is it all leading?
A key to understanding the world in which we live and what's happening on the
planet is the prophecies contained in all the World's great religions. prophecies
which talk about the future state of the world can be found in just about all of
the world's major faith traditions. When we read what these prophetic
scriptures have to say then we find recurrent themes and common narrative
threads. This would make sense if we take it as our starting point that all religion
Why it is that the prophecies are most definitely talking about present times?
I should also mention at this point that together with the kinds of prophecies
which describe the general conditions of the planet when the appointed hour
comes, there also exist a myriad number of rather specific prophecies. These
prophecies predict a variety of precise circumstances and well defined events
which have actually been realized in recent times. An example of this sort of
prophesy would be the one contained in Isaiah in the Old Testament which
predicts that when the time of the prophecies is upon us:
This is an uncanny reference to the founding of the modern state of Israel just
after World War II. Also related to the kinds of prophecies so far discussed there
also exist predictions based on specific calendar dates and special numerical
calculations. Many of these likewise suggest that the time of the final and
ultimate realization of the prophecies is around now. An example of this kind of
prediction is the expectation contained in the Mahayana Buddhist scriptures
which tell of the coming of the next Buddha to be 2500 years after the last one
i.e. Siddhartha Guatama. Another example would be one which is much referred
to by new age types and some of the psychedelic crowd; this is the ancient
Mayan 2012 calendar prediction for the end times. Again like many other of
these types of calendar predictions, the suggestion is that in the present times,
we are approaching what is sometimes referred to as the end of time or else the
end of the age or cycle.
These very specific prophecies and calendar based predictions are interesting in
themselves, and support the case that the time of the great happening is about
now. However these kinds of prophecies are not the most interesting or
conclusive I believe. The prophecies which are more relevant to understanding
what is happening now and also more certain in their correspondence with the
present state of the planet, are those prophecies that describe the overall
conditions of the World when the end of the age is nearing. I will now focus our
attention to these prophecies which describe the special and unprecedented
general conditions of this world.
So what are these special and unique general conditions of the world in which
we live? Also what are these current and critical issues which are described by
One of the most noticeable changes taking place in our world today and in
recent history, is this process called Globalization. Undeniably the world is
becoming one place and all the people on this planet are becoming integrated
into an all encompassing entity called variously the 'Global village' or the 'One
World Order'. Through the process of international trade, cultural exchange,
tourism, economic integration and political union, the human race is being
brought together on a scale and extent never before seen in the history of the
World. Also through the enabling technologies of the Internet, the jumbo jet and
other logistical and communications systems, the widely dispersed members of
"The Imam who will create a world state will make the ruling nations pay for
their crimes against society. He will bring succor to humanity. He will take out
the hidden wealth from the breast of the earth and will distribute it equitably
amongst the needy deserving." - Nah Balagha, Khutba 141
If we think about this passage then obviously until recent times the creation of a
world state would have been impossible. It is only today that we are on the
brink of this state of affairs being realized.
In the book of revelation in the New Testament, which gives the most vivid
symbolic descriptions of conditions and circumstances relating to the end times,
we find things being described happening on a global scale. So in the Book of
Revelation we find that the expression 'whole world' is used 4 times, the word
'world' is used 8 times and the word 'earth' is used around 60 times. So there is
no doubt that the prophecies as related in the christian scriptures are describing
events unfolding globally and all across the planet.
Also in the New Testament in the Gospels we find Jesus saying that just before
the coming of the end of the age...
Again this process can only really be made manifest in present times and at no
other time in history. Indeed there are evangelical missionary groups in the
United States which are systematically trying to complete this process of the
propagation of the Christian Gospel. Today the Bible is being translated into the
most obscure and uncommonly spoken languages, in order that evangelical
missionaries may be able to preach to the most isolated peoples and tribes of
this World, living in the remotest regions. They are doing this to make sure the
necessary conditions are in place so that the coming of the prophecies, they
believe, may be hastened.
If we examine the Hindu scriptures then the descriptions for the Kalki avatar, or
the next full manifestation of God on Earth, are of a World Avatar whose
influence and power will be global and not limited to any one country, continent
or culture. So we find this passage in the Hindu scriptures..
' When the Kali age is well-nigh past, the Lord will appear in his divine form
consisting of Sattva [ purity ] alone for protection of virtue. ', ' Vishnu will return
as [ Kalki ] the last Avatar, amid fire and flames he will travel across the globe.' -
The Srimad Bhagavata ( circa 1500 BCE )
Finally in the ancient Zoroastrian scriptures, concerning the end times, we find
prophecies for the long awaited Saoshyant. Again a world figure and global
agent of change is described. So we discover the following...
We turn our attention now to the second of our special and unprecedented
general conditions of the World today.
Without a doubt we are living through some pretty turbulent and dangerous
times. Recent history has been characterized by some of the greatest conflicts
and wars known to mankind. From global warming, environmental destruction
and the depletion of the World's natural resources to the possibility of nuclear
annihilation, never before in recorded history has the planet and all the people
living on it, been in such a precarious state. There are various factors and trends
'When you hear of wars and rumours of wars, do not be alarmed. Such things
must happen, but the end is still to come. Nation will rise against nation, and
kingdom against kingdom. There will be earthquakes in various places, and
famines. These are the beginning of birth pains . [ Birth of the new age ]' -
Prophecy given by Jesus. NT Mark 13:7-8
Some commentary would probably be helpful here. Without a doubt all through
history there have been wars, natural disasters and also famine. However the
Second World War which took place in the 20th century is quite unprecedented.
Nothing like it has ever happened on the same scale, extent or level of
destruction. As for natural disasters, because the world is so populated it can be
argued that mankind is definitely more affected by phenomena such as
earthquakes like no time before. Sadly and worryingly it has been projected that
one of the effects of global warming will be adverse consequences for
agriculture, particularly in the Third World. This planet is set to bear witness to
famine of extreme severity and unprecedented extent, which will affect a large
proportion of humanity. Probably nothing that has happened before will
compare to this future scenario.
'Drought, famine, disease and war will sweep the world.. Nation will fight
nations, and the larger will devour the smaller. ' - The prophecy of Shambala (
Buddhist, BEF 700 CE )
In the above prophecy from Buddhism, again we find the themes of famine and
war but it is explicitly mentioned here that what is being talked about is its
occurrence on a global scale.
Furthermore the Bible, in the Book of Revelation, talks about the destroyers of
this Earth and the poisoning of the rivers and seas. This can be taken as a
reference to the ecological destruction and contamination of the environment
that we are witnessing happening on a global scale today. So we find the
following two passages...
'The time has come for judging the dead, and for rewarding your servants the
prophets and your saints and those who reverence your name, both small and
great - and for destroying those who destroy the earth." - Revelation 11:18
'A great star , blazing like a torch, fell from the sky on a third of the rivers and on
the springs of water - the name of the star is Wormwood. A third of the waters
turned bitter, and many people died from the waters that had become bitter.' -
Revelation 8:10
The third, unprecedented state of the world today is the universal decline in
world religion that we have been witnessing in recent history. This is an
unprecedented state of affairs brought about by an unprecedented cause. That
is the rise of Scientific Rationalism which has been accompanied by a
Materialistic philosophy and ideas such as Darwin's Theory of Evolution. This has
produced the falling away into Secular Humanism and the degeneration of
religion, into Religious Fundamentalism and New Age.
At this point the reader might counter this view with examples from the Middle
East, the United states and perhaps parts of Latin America where it seems that
people are extremely religious and where regular Church or Mosque attendance
is high. I would agree with anybody who said that Religious Fundamentalism is
strong and is attracting large numbers of people to its fold. But in reality,
Religious Fundamentalism is the very anti-thesis of religion as laid out by its
founders. Where religion starts out with the ideas of progressiveness, tolerance,
peace and compassion enshrined within its original make up, in the hands of the
Fundamentalists of this world, religion is altered into something characterized by
a backward retrogression, intolerance, and a conditional compassion.
Now, I don't deny that many people of this world still adhere to the outward
manifestations of religion, that is its rules, its rituals and regulations, without
being remotely Religious Fundamentalist in any way, shape or form. However,
even though people may be outwardly observant when we examine a lot of
modern religion closely we discover what is really behind a lot of modern
spirituality. Often it seems to be the case that modern religion is either dressed
up superstition or else a sort of glorified social club providing people with a
'People will no longer have any religion to which they can turn for solace or
liberation: the doctrines of materialism will overwhelm their minds and drive
them to struggle for their own selfish ends. The lust for power and wealth will
prevail over teachings of compassion and truth' - The prophecy of Shambala (
Buddhist, BEF 700 CE )
' Whenever there is a falling away from the true law [ religion ] and an upsurge
of unlawfulness, then I emit myself. I come into being age after age, to protect
the virtuous and to destroy evil-doers, to establish a firm basis for the true law. '
- Bhagavad Gita 4:7-8
'The time is near in which nothing will remain of Islam but its name, and of the
Qur'an but its mere appearance, and the mosques of Muslims will be destitute of
knowledge and worship; and the learned men will be the worst people under the
heavens; and contention and strife will issue from them, and it will return upon
themselves. ' - Islam. Hadith.
'Before the coming of the Maitreya, the holy religion will decline. How will it
occur? After my decease, first will occur the five disappearances. And what are
the five disappearances? The disappearance of attainments, the disappearance
of the method, the disappearance of learning, the disappearance of symbols, the
disappearance of the relics. These are the five disappearances that are to occur. '
- Buddhism. Anagatavamsa
'Immediately after the tribulation of those days shall the Sun be darkened, and
the Moon shall not give her light, and the stars shall fall from Heaven, and the
I also include here a prophecy from the Norse tradition to add a little variety...
' The age of evil has come to the world . Everyone steals and hoards great
wealth, and sensual sin rules the day. The end of the world is at hand - yet men
are hard and cruel, and listen not to the doom that is coming . No one heeds the
cries of his neighbour, or lifts a hand to save. ' - The Ragnarok ( Ancient Norse
prophecy, C 1000 CE )
We now move on to the fourth and last of our special overall conditions of the
present age.
There is something very special about present times that is not obvious to most
ordinary people. It is a process that is much less visible than the ongoing changes
wrought upon the environment and also one that is less easy to grasp than the
formation of the Global Village. What I am talking about here is the current state
of humankind's collective and accumulated knowledge in all areas and in
particular science. Since around the time of the Enlightenment onwards, the
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 961
systematic advancement of human knowledge has been rapidly increasing what
we know about ourselves, society, the Universe, life on Earth and also a myriad
variety of other subjects. Indeed not only has this process been steady and
unabated, in recent times this ongoing increase in things that we know and
understand, has actually accelerated.
However, even though we are collecting more minute details about all the things
in the Universe that there are to know, at the same time progress on the really
big questions seems to have reached an impasse. These questions concern
matters such as the nature of existence, the puzzle of consciousness, the
beginning of the universe and the purpose of life. It is my belief that we are on
the verge of gaining definitive answers to all these questions. In the present age,
an ultimate understanding of the nature of God is finally within our grasp.
It is argued here that the pieces are in place for what is known as a paradigm
shift. This is where we have a fundamental change in our basic assumptions
which then allows us to understand things which were beyond our grasp when
the old assumptions were adhered to. An example of a paradigm shift would be
when people started to see the World as being round instead of flat. This new
assumption allowed people to understand why it was that only the masts of
distant ships would be visible when viewed with a powerful telescope. The
paradigm shift that is about to occur in the World today is one where spiritual
and mystical truths will finally make perfect sense to us. This fundamental
change in perspective will allow us to finally understand and have definitive
answers for the deepest questions about existence, such as 'Who am I?', 'Why
am I here?', 'What happens when I die?', 'Is there a God?' and 'What is my
relationship to God?'.
At the heart of this change of World view or paradigm shift is a revision of our
basic assumptions concerning the very nature of existence and reality itself.
Without going into too much detail here, what this change involves is a shift
from the dominant idea concerning existence, which is Materialism, to it's rival
called Idealism. Materialism, supposes that existence is physical and that the
Finally a powerful and plausible case for Idealism can be made. It is also a vision
which brings together and unifies science, religion and philosophy. At the heart
of this new understanding is the provable idea that everyone is God. To put it
another way, we might say that the mystery of consciousness and mystery of the
nature of God are one and the same. Furthermore it is the demonstration of
Idealism as discussed already, that everything is consciousness, but also that
everything and all existence is one consciousness. That one consciousness is God
and it is also our true nature. So therein lies the proof of Idealism. We may prove
unequivocally that all existence is consciousness by experiencing the ultimate
mystical state and revelation of our real identity, that is to reawaken and return
to become God again. This proof of Idealism is also the falsification of
Materialism because the experience of being God is accompanied by our being
able to totally see through the illusion that there is a physical world 'out there'.
Indeed the state of being God is the realization that we are the generator of the
Ultimately my view of the meaning of the prophecies is this. In the end what I
am saying is that the history of humankind and indeed the process the life on
Earth is a continuous, progressive and cumulative process. When we talk about
the evolution of life, refinement of human culture and the advance of science
and technology, then these are really different angles on the same planet wide
process. I believe that this process has points of culmination and meaningful
termination. What I mean by this is that all through the planet's long history
there have been special times when some critical point was arrived at.
These special moments in time mark the beginning of some dramatic phase
change or new order of things. Examples of these might be the first coming into
being of multi-cellular organisms, the appearance of the first land animals or the
beginning of human civilization. So in the same way, I believe that the coming
one world order and the final revelation of truth of God is a transition and phase
shift of awesome magnitude and historical consequence. So it is this that the
prophecies are really talking about. It so happens that these events are
accompanied by the perilous state of the World and spiritual malaise we find
ourselves in. But it may be considered that perhaps these are necessary
circumstances for a unified humanity to emerge and a state of affairs which is
conducive to a global spiritual reawakening. Anyway, this is the state of affairs
that we find ourselves in today in the World and it is also what has been
prophesied long ago in the various spiritual traditions of the World. Therefore it
is reasonable to believe that the times we live in today are the times prophesied.
I have tried to present a view of the prophecies that is sensible and also one that
doesn't put people in a passive state of awaiting some kind of saviour to appear
To read more purchase the book 'Quest' by Wai H. Tsang, from Amazon, Barnes
Noble or Ingram
http://www.iawwai.com/JewishProphecies.html
The concept of the Messiah is central to Judaism. Also there exists in the World
today a state of expectation, and hope of the imminent arrival of the Jewish
World Saviour among many Jews, particularly members of the various Orthodox
Sects of Judaism. There are many reasons why some Jews believe that the time
of the coming of the Messiah is at hand. For instance, in the Midrash which are
Jewish spiritual writings and commentaries, it is described how when the
Messiah comes there will be a warming of the Earth. A seeming reference to the
phenomenon of Global Warming. Another reason is discussed in the following
section.
The founding of the modern state of Israel and the coming of the Messiah
The founding of the modern state of Isreal just after the Second World War has
also led some people to believe that the end times and therefore the coming of
the Messiah is at hand. Because this act of nation building seems to have
satisfied an interesting prophecy concerning the end times..
"In that day the Lord will reach out his hand a second time to reclaim the
remnant that is left of his people from Assyria, from Lower Egypt, from Upper
Egypt, from Cush, from Elam, from Babylonia, from Hamath and from the islands
of the sea. He will raise a banner for the nations and gather the exiles of Israel;
he will assemble the scattered people of Judah from the four quarters of the
earth." - Isaiah 11:11-12 NIV
The above prophecy is remarkable because it predicts three things and this is the
reason why. The prophecy predicts that the Jews or 'scattered people of Judah'
will be returned to the Holy Lands a second time. However the prophecy was
made during the first exile in Babylon which occurred at around 586BC. So firstly
What follows in the rest of this webpage are a selection of passages from Jewish
scripture which gives us more information about the Messiah and what will be
happening when he arrives.
'For to us a child is born, to us a son is given, and the government shall be upon
his shoulder, and his name shall be called "Wonderful Counsellor, Mighty God,
Everlasting Father, Prince of Peace." Of the increase of his government and of
peace there will be no end, upon the throne of David, and over his kingdom, to
establish it, and to uphold it with justice and with righteousness, from this time
forth and for ever more. The zeal of the Lord of hosts will do this.' - Old
Testatment, Isaiah 9.6-7
'And behold, the glory of the God of Isreal came from the way of the East: and
his voice was like a noise of many waters: and the earth shined with his glory.' -
Ezekiel 43.2
'Behold the man whose name is the Branch; and he shall grow up out of his
place, and he shall build the temple of the Lord.. And they who are far off shall
come and build in the temple of the Lord.' - Zechariah 6:12,15
'I saw in the night visions, and behold, with the clouds of heaven there came one
like a son of man. He came to the Ancient of Days and was presented before him.
And to him was given dominion and glory and kingdom, that all peoples, nations
and languages should serve him. His dominion is an everlasting dominion, which
shall not pass away. And his kingdom one that shall not be destroyed.' - Bible -
Old Testament, Daniel 7.13-14
'For the windows of heaven are opened and the foundations of the earth
tremble. The earth is utterly broken, the earth is rent asunder, the earth is
violently shaken. The earth staggers like a drunken man, it sways like a hut; its
transgression lies heavy upon it, and it falls, and will not rise again. on that day
the Lord will punish the hosts of heaven, in heaven, and the kings of the earth on
the earth. They will be gathered together as prisoners in a pit; they will be shut
up in a prison, and after many days they will be punished. Then the moon will be
confounded, and the sun ashamed; for the Lord of hosts will reign on Mount Zion
and in Jerusalem and before its elders he will manifest his glory.' - Bible, Isaiah
24.18-23
'With the footprints [heralding] the Messiah, presumptions shall increase and
dearth reach its height; the vine shall yield its fruit but the wine shall be costly;
and the empire shall fall into heresy and there shall be none to utter reproof. The
academies shall be given to fornication, and.. the wisdom of the scribes shall
become insipid, and they that shun sin shall be deemed contemptible, and truth
shall nowhere be found. Children shall shame the elders, and the elders shall rise
up before the children. The face of this generation shall be [brazen] as the face of
a dog, and the son will notbe put to shame by his father. On whom can we stay
ourselves? On our Father in heaven.' - Mishnah, Sota 9.15
Ezekiel 36:11; 24 KJV - "And I will multiply upon you man and beast; and they
shall increase and bring fruit: and I will settle you after your old estates, and will
do better [unto you] than at your beginnings: and ye shall know that I [am] the
LORD.... For I will take you from among the heathen, and gather you out of all
countries, and will bring you into your own land."
"For the Israelites will live many days without king or prince, without sacrifice or
sacred stones, without ephod or idol. Afterward the Israelites will return and
seek the LORD their God and David their king. They will come trembling to the
LORD and to his blessings in the last days." - Hosea 3:4-5
'For out of Zion shall go forth the law, and the word of the Lord from Jerusalem.
He shall judge between the nations, and shall decide for many peoples; and they
shall beat their swords into ploughshares, and their spears into pruning hooks;
nation shall not lift up sword against nation, neither shall they learn war any
more.' - Judaism and Christianity. Isaiah 2:2-4
'The spirit of the Lord shall rest upon him, the spirit of wisdom and
understanding, the spirit of counsel and might, the spirit of knowledge and the
fear of the Lord.. With righteousness shall he judge the poor, and reprove the
equity for the meek of the earth: and he shall smite the earth with the rod of his
mouth, and with the breath of his lips shall he slay the wicked. And
righteousness shall be the girdle of his loins, and faithfulness the girdle of his
reins.' - Bible - Isaiah 11:2-5
'I will tread them in my anger, and trample them in my fury; and their blood shall
be spinkled upon my garments, and I will stain all my raiment.' - Isaiah 63:3
http://www.iawwai.com/ChristianProphecies.html
The idea of Christ's return to Earth or the second coming is something that is
mentioned a fair bit in the New Testament in the Bible. It is stressed again and
again that followers of the Way and good Christians should be ever vigilant and
prepared for his arrival, and it is also described how his coming may happen at
any time even when we least expect it. And so it is that in present times, many
Christians do expect the imminent arrival of Christ and his second coming.
It seems that Christianity derives, at the outset, from it being a small Jewish
Apocalyptic sect with it's original founder preaching a strong message of the end
being imminent. And in the first few centuries of the early Christian church it
seems that there were many who lived in a state of expectation that the end
may soon be upon them. From these humble beginnings Christianity went on to
become the state religion of all Rome in the early 4th century under the emperor
Constantine. Around this time and later it seems that the idea of Christ's return
and the notion of the Apocalypse associated with the Second Coming, became
more downplayed and to a certain degree pushed into the background. This is
still the case with the Roman Catholic church today. One of the reasons why this
came about is probably that there were too many false alarms concerning the
end and Christ's imminent arrival during the time of the early church.
Another reason why the idea of Christ's Second coming and the prophecies
became de-emphasized has to do with the writings and thoughts of one man, St
Augustine of Hippo who came on the scene the latter 4th century. He is certainly
one of the most influential figures in early Christianity and the impact of his
ideas were immense. It was Augustine who formulated the doctrine of Original
Sin and more relevant to present discussion it was he who pushed for a more
symbolic interpretation of the prophecies, particularly those contained in the
Book of Revelation; the book most associated with Christian prophecies for the
end times. To Augustine the Book of Revelation didn't depict, even allegorically,
events that would unfold on Earth, but rather things that would take place in a
more spiritual or metaphysical realm. His interpretation gained the upper hand
and dominated Christian thinking about such matters. However the Reformation
in the 16th century changed this state of affairs.
With the Reformation came the translation of the Bible from Latin into the
common Vernacular i.e. into plain English, German and French etc. Whereas up
to the time of the Reformation, only scholars and priests, versed in the
intricacies of Latin, could understand the Bible. With the coming of the
Reformation and the invention of the Gutenberg printing press, suddenly it
became possible for ordinary folk to read the Bible in their native language, in so
doing they were able to form their own impressions and make their own
interpretations. When it came to the prophecies contained in the Bible, many
people decided that they were indeed about the foretelling of actual events that
will be occurring on the Earth in the future. And to some in the not too distant
and quite immediate future. This gave rise to many new Apocalyptic Sects or
Millenarian movements eagerly awaiting, to them, the imminent return of the
Christ and his 1000 year reign over an earthly paradise. Ever since the
Reformation, people have repeatedly, over the course of time, interpreted the
For instance, there is the case of a nuclear weapons factory in Colorado USA,
where most of the workers there were Fundamentalist Christians who actually
believed they were building the instruments that Jesus will one day be using to
'Scorch the Earth'. Of course it's sensible for any employer to find motivated and
diligent workers who believe that their paid labour is for something that serves a
higher purpose. The real problem emerges when the employer, in this case the
United States government, and the President at the very top of the chain of
command also believes in the imminent end of the World and the the Rapture.
This was particularly the case during the Reagan administration in the 1980s.
During the time of the Reagan administration it was quite widely known that he
was a firm believer in the end times and also that the end was imminent. A Born
Again Christian Reagan firmly believed that the end was nigh and also that the
Soviet Union was Gog and Magog, or the dark powers decribed in the Book of
Revelation in the Bible. In an October 1983 interview Reagan told the Executive
Director of the American Israel Public Affairs Committee, Thomas Dine, ""I turn
back to your prophets in the Old Testament and the signs foretelling
Armageddon, and I find myself wondering if we are the generation that is going
to see that come about. I don't know if you have noted any of those prophecies
lately, but, believe me, they describe the times we are going through." Also later
the same year he told two reporters from People Magazine, in a White House
interview, "There were times in the past when we thought the end of the world
was coming, but never anything like this."
His most notorious remark came when testifying before the U.S. Congress, in
1981, he was asked whether it was important to preserve the environment for
future generations to which he replied, “I do not know how many future
generations we can count before the Lord returns.” This clearly shows how
certain fantastic beliefs concerning the end times and the Second Coming of
So the doctrine of Dispensationalism, where Jesus literally appears in the sky and
those born again are lifted into a sort of protective bubble while the Earth is
destroyed and remade anew; is an example of how prophecies can be
completely misinterpreted to produce fantastic fairy tale scenarios. It also shows
how gullible and lacking in judgement people can be. If there was ever an idea or
doctrine that can rightfully be labelled evil then Dispensationalism is it, in that it
has enormous potential to wreck havoc and death on an unimaginable scale,
together with immense pain and suffering. Those who seriously believe in
Dispensationalism have bought into a ghastly lie and one which causes people to
be unable or just plain unwilling to be part of the solution to the problem of
saving the planet. Furthermore it is an idea which can actually make people into
active agents happily and knowingly aiding in the very process of destroying the
very environmental and ecological substrates of this World upon which all
human life depends; on the mistaken and blind belief that Jesus will physically
save them and miraculously restore the living Earth for the Born Again, and for
them only. If Satan really was some sort of supernatural arch villain who spent
all his time thinking up ingenius ways to mislead people with the aim of causing
as much misery and suffering as possible then what better way of satisfying his
aims than to invent the doctrine of Dispensationalism?
We present some of the prophecies from the Bible concerning the end times and
the Second Coming of Christ. We believe that a sensible interpretation can be
made in relation to these prophecies which will have a good correspondence to
what will actually occur here on Earth in the next 10, 20 years or so. The
prophecies have been grouped in sensible categories.
Prophecies about the state of the World at the time of Christ's return
'When you hear of wars and rumours of wars, do not be alarmed. Such things
must happen, but the end is still to come. Nation will rise against nation, and
kingdom against kingdom. There will be earthquakes in various places, and
famines. These are the beginning of birth pains . [ Birth of the new age ]' -
Prophecy given by Jesus. NT Mark 13:7-8
'Immediately after the tribulation of those days shall the Sun be darkened, and
the Moon shall not give her light, and the stars shall fall from Heaven, and the
powers that are in Heaven shall be shaken.' - Jesus NT Mark 13:23-24. [ Some
explanation needed here. The Moon is to the Sun as religion is to God. As the
Moon reflects the light of the Sun in the dark of the night, so religion is supposed
to reflect God's light. That the 'Sun be darkened and the Moon shall not give her
light' can be taken as a reference to the state of religion in the world today. ]
'But understand this, that in the last days there will come times of stress. For
men will be lovers of self, lovers of money, proud, arrogant, abusive, disobedient
to their parents, ungrateful, unholy, inhuman, implacable, slanderers,
profligates, fierce, haters of good, treacherous, reckless, swollen with conceit,
lovers of pleasure rather than lovers of God, holding the form of religion but
denying the power of it.' - Bible, 2 Timothy 3.1-5
'And this gospel of the kingdom will be preached in the whole world as a
testimony to all nations, and then the end will come.' -Bible, Matthew 24:14
'And then shall many be offended, and shall betray one another, and shall hate
one another. And many false prophets shall rise, and shall deceive many. And
because iniquity shall abound, the love of many shall wax cold. But he that shall
endure unto the end, the same shall be saved.' - Matthew 24:10-13
Jesus said - "Take heed that no one leads you astray. For many will come in my
name saying, 'I am the Christ,' and they will lead many astray.", "And many false
prophets will arise and lead many astray." - Matthew chapter 24
'Let no one deceive you in any way; for that day will not come, unless the
rebellion comes first, and the man of lawlessness is revealed, the son of
perdition, who opposes and exalts himself against every so-called god or object
of worship .. The coming of the lawless one by the activity of Satan will be with
all power and with pretended signs and wonders, and with all wicked deception
for those who are to perish, because they refused to love the truth and so be
saved. Therefore God sends upon them a strong delusion, to make them believe
what is false, so that all may be condemned who did not believe the truth but
had pleasure in unrighteousness.' - Bible, 2 Thessalonians 2.3-12
Prophecies concerning the attributes and role of the Second Coming of Christ
'Then I saw heaven opened, and behold, a white horse! He who sat upon it is
called Faithful and True, and in righteousness he judges and makes war. His eyes
'For as the lightning cometh out of the East, and shineth ever unto the West; so
shall also the coming of the Son of man be.' - Matthew 24:27
And the beast was given a mouth uttering haughty and blaphemous words, and
it was allowed to exercise authority for forty-two months; it opened its mouth to
utter blasphemies against God, blaspheming his name and his dwelling, that is,
those who dwell in heaven. Also it was allowed to make war on the saints and to
conquer them. And authority was given it over every tribe and people and
tongue and nation, and all who dwell on earth will worship it, everyone whose
Also it caused all, both small and great, both rich and poor, both free and slave,
to be marked on the right hand or the forehead, so that no one can buy or sell
unless he has the mark, that is, the name of the beast or the number of its name.
This calls for wisdom: let him who has understanding reckon the number of the
beast, for it is a human number, its number is six hundred and sixty-six.' - Bible,
Revelation 13.1-18
The Final Battle between Good and Evil at the End of Time
'And I saw the beast, and the kings of the Earth, and their armies gathered
together to make war against him that sat on the horse, and against his army.
And the Beast was taken, and with him the false prophet that wrought miracles
before him .. These both were cast alive into a lake of fire burning with
brimstone.. And the remnant were slain with the sword of him that sat upon the
horse, which sword proceeded out of his mouth: and all the [birds] were filled
with their flesh.' - Revelation 19:19-21
'And I saw an angel standing in the Sun, who cried in a loud voice to all the birds
flying in mid-air, "Come, gather together for the great supper of God, so that you
may eat the flesh of kings, generals, and mighty men, of horses and their riders,
and the flesh of all people, free and slave, small and great.". Then I saw the
beast and the kings of the earth and their armies gathered together to make war
against the rider on the horse [ Second coming of Christ ] and his army.' - Bible.
Revelation 20:17-19
'The time has come for judging the dead, and for rewarding your servants the
prophets and your saints and those who reverence your name, both small and
great - and for destroying those who destroy the earth." - Revelation 11:18
'And I, John, saw the holy city, new Jerusalem, coming down from God out of
Heaven, prepared as a bride adorned for her husband.. And he carried me away
in the spirit to a great and high mountain, and showed me that great city..
descending out of heaven from God, having the glory of God: and her light was
like unto a stone most precious, even like a jasper stone, clear as crystal; and had
a wall great and high, and had twelve gates, and at the gates twelve angels, and
names written thereon, which are the names of the twelve tribes of the children
of Isreal.. And the wall of the city had twelve foundations.. And the city lieth four
square and the length was as large as the breadth.. the wall thereof, a hundred
and forty and four cubits, according to the measure of a man, that is, of the
angel.
And the buildings of the wall of it was of jasper: and the city was pure gold, like
unto clear glass. And the foundations of the wall of the city were garnished with
all manner of precious stones. The first foundation was jasper, the second,
sapphire; the third, a chalcedony; the fourth, an emerald; the fifth, sardonyx; the
'They shall hunger no more, neither thirst any more; neither shall the Sun light
on them, nor any heat. For the Lamb which is in the midst of the throne shall
feed them, and shall lead them unto living fountains of waters; and God shall
wipe away all tears from their eyes.' - Revelation ( 81 - 96 CE )
http://www.iawwai.com/HinduProphecies.html
In the prophecies of the Hindu religion there also exists the notion of an awaited
one or Avatar, which is understood as a manifestation of God in bodily form.
When we also understand that the central truth behind all religion is the idea
that 'everyone is God' then the notion of the Avatar is in effect the equivalent to
any human being who in his or her behaviour and effect upon the World,
manifests the divine and transcendent on the earthly plane. So we may consider
an Avatar to be related to the concept of a prophet, saint or other person
considered to be extremely holy. So by the same token, the next Avatar in
Hinduism is equivalent to and of the same nature as the Messiah in Judaism,
Second Coming in Christianity and the Imam Mahdi in Islam etc.
In Hinduism time is considered to the cyclical and each such cycle is ended and
the next cycle commences with the appearance of an Avatar. It is as if Avatars
act as punctuation marks demarcating the great cycles of time, separating one
cycle from the next. When we examine each cycle of the Hindu time scheme
then we discover that it is divided into four separate sub phases or 'Yugas', these
are in chronological order the Kitral Yuga, Treta Yuga, Dvapara Yuga and Kali
Yuga. In the beginning of the cycle we have the age of purity and light i.e. the
Kitral Yuga. As we progress through that cycle then things become steadily less
pure and descend gradually into relative darkness. When we get to the final age,
the Kali Yuga then we arrive at a stage where things are in a pretty degenerate
state of morale and social decay.
This sets the stage for the coming of the Avatar, leading to the beginning of the
next cycle and a return once again to a happy and wholesome state of affairs.
Though there are different opinions on this matter, it is widely believed that in
What follows are some prophecies concerning the coming of the Kalki Avatar,
grouped in two partitions. The first containing those prophecies relating to the
condition of the World at the time of the the Kalki's appearance and the second
concerns his attributes and the role he plays in the proceedings at the end of the
age.
'Whenever there is a falling away from the true law [ religion ] and an upsurge of
unlawfulness, then I emit myself. I come into being age after age, to protect the
virtuous and to destroy evil-doers, to establish a firm basis for the true law.' -
Bhagavad Gita 4:7-8
'Those who present themselves as saints are constantly engaged in preaching
false doctrines. Those who have apparently renounced the world are rich in
worldly possessions, and have become family men.' - The Srimad Bhagavata ( BEF
300 CE )
'And the path of the wind will be confused and agitated and all around will be
noise and uproar, and everywhere there will be conflagrations and fires will
blaze on all sides. ' - The Mahabharata ( circa 3000 BCE )
'Wealth and piety will decrease day by day, until the world will be totally
depraved. then property alone will confer rank; wealth will be the only source of
devotion; passion will be the sole bond of union between the sexes; falsehood
will be the only means of success in litigation; and women will be objects merely
of sensual gratification. Earth will be venerated but for its mineral treasures; the
Brahminical thread will constitute a brahmin; external types will be the only
distinction of the several orders of life; dishonesty will be the universal means of
Amidst all castes he who is the strongest will reign over the principality, thus
vitiated by many faults. The people unable to bear the heavy burdens imposed
upon them by their avaricious sovereigns, will take refuge amongst the valleys of
the mountains, and will be glad to feed upon wild honey, herbs, roots, fruits,
flowers, and leaves: their only covering will be the bark of trees, and they will be
exposed to the cold and wind and sun and rain. NO man's life will exceed three
and twenty years. Thus in the Kali age shall decay constanlty proceed, until the
human race approaches its annihilation.' - Vishna Purana 4.24
'He will then reestablish righteousness upon Earth; and the minds of those who
live at the end of the Kali age shall be awakened, and shall be as translucent as
crystal.' - Vishnu Purana IV:24,26-27
'The learned pandits [Hindu theologians] for their part indulge in sexual
commerce with their wives like buffaloes. They are expert in breeding children
and are not at all clever in attaining Enlightenment.. the substance and depth of
things has disappeared everywhere.' - Srimad Bhagavata
'People in that era [Kali age] turn out to be greedy, immoral and merciless; they
freely enter into violence without cause and are unlucky and excessively
covetous.' - Srimad Bhagavata
'There are numerous quarrels between husband and wife.' - Srimad Bhagavata
'In the Kali age, men will be afflicted by old age, disease, and hunger, and from
sorrow there will arise depression, indifference, deep thought, enlightenment,
and virtuous behaviour. Then the age will change, deluding their minds like a
dream, by force of fate, and when the Golden Age begins, those left over from
'Already vexed by famine and heavy taxation, people will perish through
drought, excessive cold, storms, scorching sunshine, heavy rain, snowfall and
mutual conflict. In the age of Kali men will be tormented by hunger and thirst,
sickness and worry.' - Srimad Bhagavata
Prophecies concerning the attributes, role and actions of the Kalki Avatar
'Lord Vishnu [ appearing as Kalki ] adorned of the whole animate and inanimate
creation, and the soul of the universe, appears in this world of matter for
protecting the virtue of the righteous and wiping out the entire stock of their
karma and thereby liberating them. The Lord will appear under the name of
Kalki … riding a fleet horse … and capable of subdueing the wicked. The Lord of
the universe wielding … divine powers and possessed of endless virtues and
matchless splendor, he will traverse the globe on that swift horse and
exterminate with his sword the robbers [ those whose minds are devoted to
iniquity ] by the thens of millions.' - The Srimad Bhagavata ( circe 1500 BCE )
'When the practices taught by the Vedas and the institutes of law shall nearly
have ceased, and the close of the Kali age shall be nigh, a portion of that divine
being who exists of his own spiritual nature in the character of Brahma, and who
is the beginning and the end, and who comprehends all things, shall descend
upon the earth. He will be born as Kalki in the family of an eminent brahmin of
Sambhala village, endowed with the eight superhuman facilities. By his
irresistable might he will destroy all the barbarians and thieves, and all whose
minds are devoted to iniquity. He will then reestablish righteousness upon earth;
and the minds of those who live at the end of the Kali age shall be awakened,
and shall be as pellucid as crystal. The men who are thus changed by virtue of
that peculiar time shall be as the seeds of human beings, and shall give birth to a
race who shall follow the laws of the Krita age, the Age of Purity. As it is said,
"When the Sun and Moon, and the luner asterism Tishya, and the planet Jupiter,
are in one mansion, the Krita age shall return." - Vishnu Purana 4.24
'Vishnu will return … as [ Kalki ] the last Avatar, amid fire and flames … he will
travel across the globe …' - The Srimad Bhagavata ( circa 1500 BCE )
'When the Kali age.. is well-nigh past, the Lord will appear in His Divine form
consisting of Sattva[purity] alone for the protection of virtue. Lord Vishnu
adorned of the whole animate and inanimate creation, and the Soul of the
Universe, appears in this world of matter for protecting the virtue of the
righteous and wiping out the entire stock of their Karma and thereby liberating
them. the Lord will appear under the name of Kalki.. riding a fleet horse.. and
capable of subduing the wicked. the Lord of the Universe wielding.. divine
powers and possessed of endless virtues and matchless splendor, he will traverse
the globe on that swift horse and exterminate with his sword the robbers[those
whose minds are devoted to iniquity] by the tens of millions.' - Srimad Bhagavata
http://www.iawwai.com/BuddhistProphecies.html
'In the evil age to come, living beings will decrease in good qualities and increase
in utter ignorance, coveting gain and honors, developing their evil qualities, and
being far removed from deliverance.' - Lotus Sutra 13
'Before the coming of the Maitreya, the holy religion will decline. How will it
occur? After my decease, first will occur the five disapperances. And what are the
five disappearances? The disappearance of attainments, the disappearance of
the method, the disappearance of learning, the disappearance of symbols, the
disappearance of the relics. These are the five disappearances that are to occur.'
- Buddhism. Anagatavamsa
'I am not the first Buddha [ awakened one ] who has come upon the Earth, nor
will I be the last. In due time another Buddha will rise in the world, a holy one, a
supreme enlightened one, endowed with auspicious wisdom embracing the
universe, an incomparable leader of men, a ruler of gods and mortals. He will
reveal to you the same eternal truths, which I have taught you. He will establish
his law [ Religion ], glorious in its origins, glorious at the climax and glorious at
the goal in the spirit and the letter. He will proclaim a righteous life wholly
perfect and pure, such as I now proclaim. His disciples will number many
thousands, while mine number many hundreds. He will be known as Maitreya.' -
Buddha Gautama
'The banner of Shambala shall encircle the central lands of the Blessed One.
Those who accept him shall rejoice, and those who deny him shall tremble. The
decriers shall be given over to justice and shall be forgotten. The warriors shall
march under the banner of Maitreya.'
- The prophecy of Shambala ( Buddhist, BEF 700 CE )
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 990
'Drought, famine, disease and war will sweep the world.. Nation will fight
nations, and the larger will devour the smaller. '
- The prophecy of Shambala ( Buddhist, BEF 700 CE )
'People will no longer have any religion to which they can turn for solace or
liberation: the doctrines of materialism will overwhelm their minds and drive
them to struggle for their own selfish ends. The lust for power and wealth will
prevail over teachings of compassion and truth'
- The prophecy of Shambala ( Buddhist, BEF 700 CE )
'Thus have I heard: At one time the Buddha was staying near Kapilavatthu in the
Banyan monastery on the bank of the river Rohani. Then the venerable Sariputta
questioned the Lord about the future conquerer, "The Hero that shall follow you,
The Buddha - of what sort will he be? I want to hear of him in full. Let the
Visioned one describe him." When he heard the elder's speech the Lord spoke
thus, "I will tell you, Sariputta; listen to my speech. In this auspicious eon Three
leaders there have been: Kakusandha, Konagamana, and the leader Kassapa
too. I am now the perfect Buddha; and there will be Maitreya too before this
same auspicious eon runs to the end of its years." '- Anagatavamsa
'In those days, brethren, there will arise in the World and Exalted One named
Metteya. He will be an Arahant, Fully Awakened, abounding in wisdom and
goodness, happy, with knowledge of the worlds, unsurpassed as a guide to
mortals willing to be led, a teacher of gods and men, an Exalted One, a Buddha,
even as I am now. He, by himself , will thoroughly know and see, as it were face
to face, this Universe, with its worlds of the spirits, its Brahmas and its Maras,
and its world of recluses and brahmins, of princes and peoples, even as I now, by
myself thoroughly know and see them. The Law, lovely in its origin, lovely in its
progress, lovely in its consummation, will he proclaim, both in the spirit and in
the letter; the higher life will he make known, in all its fulness and in all its
purity, even as I do now. He will be accompanied by a congregation of some
thousands of brethren, even as I am now accompanied by a congregation of
some hundreds of brethren.' - Digha Nikaya iii.76, Cakkavatti-Sihanada Sutanta
'There will come a time, brethren, when immoral courses of action will flourish
excessively; there will be no word for moral among humans - far less any moral
agent. Among such humans, homage and praise will be given to them who lack
filial and religious piety, and show no respect to the head of the clan; just as
today homage and praise are given to the filial minded, to the pious and to them
who respect the heads of their clans.
Among such humans, there will be no such thoughts of reverence as are a bar to
intermarriage with mother, or mother's sister, or teacher's wife, of father's
sister-in-law. The world will fall into promiscuity, like goats and sheep, fowls and
swine, dogs and jackals.
Among such humans, keen mutual enmity will become the rule, keen ill will, keen
animosity, passionate thoughts even of killing, in a mother toward her child, in a
child toward its mother, in a father toward his child and a child toward its father,
in brother to brother, in brother to sister, in sister to brother. Just as a sportsman
feels toward game that he sees, so will they feel.' - Digha Nikaya iii.71-72,
Cakkavatti-Sihanada Suttanta
'[Before the coming of the Maitreya, the holy religion will decline.] How will it
occur? After my decease, first will occur the five disappearances. And what are
the five disappearances? The disappearance of the attainments, the
disappearance of the method, the disappearance of learning, the disappearance
of the symbols, the disappearance of the relics. These are the five
disappearances that are to occur.
'The signs of these times are new and fantastical modes of dressing - traditional
styles forgotten.' - Padmasambhava
'Famine, frost and hail govern many unproductive years.. release[ing] diseases,
horrible epidemics and plagues which spread like wildfire, striking men and
cattle.' - Padmasambhava
'No rain falls in season, but out of season; the valleys are flooded.' -
Padmasabhava
'Earthquakes bring sudden floods, while fire storms and tornadoes destroy
temples, stupas and cities in an instant.' - Padmasambhava
http://www.iawwai.com/ZoroastrianProphecies.html
And he will achieve these ends the defeat of evil and the re-establishment of
virtue..
The next three passages from various sources of Zoroastrian scriptural wisdom
suggest that the Saoshyant arrive and emerge anytime now.
"When a thousand two hundred and some years have passed from the inception
of the religion of the Arabian [Most probably Islam and the Coming of
Muhammed] and the overthrow of the kingdom of Iran and the degradation of
the followers of My religion, a descendant of the Iranian kings will be raised up
as a Prophet." - ZOROASTER - Dinkird
"When the people of Iran will become wicked and do evils ... at that time a Man
shall rise up from the Arabs, through whose disciples they will lose the crown,
the throne, the land, and their religion, and be destroyed ... By the lapse of one
thousand years, after the establishment of the Arabic Religion, His followers will
have already spoiled their Faith so much by splitting up themselves into sects
that, were it to be presented to its Founder, He would not recognize the same.
Thus shalt thou see the Iranians that they shall not listen to any Wise Man. Were
some one to say the Truth, they shall come out with weapons to fight with Him.
The worst among the evil deeds of Iranians is that they have killed the One Who,
though from amongst themselves, was the Sovereign Lord of all the Angelic
Attributes." - Dasàstìr-Asmànì' (The Book of Heavenly Commandments)
This passage is similar to the last though suggesting an earlier date for the
coming of the World Saviour. This would mean that the chosen one is due but a
little late.
This next passage from the Zoroastrian prophecies talks about the impact of a
Comet or some sort of Asteroid that impacts the planet and which will
precipitate the unfolding of other end times events.
"As Gochihr (a comet) falls in the celestial sphere from a moon-beam on to the
earth, the distress of the earth becomes such-like as that of a sheep when a wolf
falls upon it. Afterwards, the fire and halo melt the metal of Shahrewar, in the
hills and mountains, and it remains on this earth like a river. Then all men will
pass into that melted metal and will become pure; when one is righteous, then it
For readers with a special interest in Zoroastrian prophecies for the end times I
include in the this article, the complete 30th chapter from the Bundahishn,
which provides a detailed description of events, including the comet strike
described earlier.
3. Then they will desist from meat food, and eat vegetables and milk;
afterwards, they abstain from milk food and abstain from vegetable food, and
are feeding on water; and for ten years before Soshyant comes they remain
without food, and do not die.
4. After Soshyant comes they prepare the raising of the dead, as it says, that
Zartosht asked of Ohrmazd thus: 'Whence does a body form again, which the
wind has carried and the water conveyed (vazhid)? and how does the
resurrection occur?'
6. Observe that when that which was not was then produced, why is it not
possible to produce again that which was? for at that time one will demand the
bone from the spirit of earth, the blood from the water, the hair from the plants,
and the life from fire, since they were delivered to them in the original creation.'
7. First, the bones of Gayomard are roused up, then those of Mashye and
Mashyane, then those of the rest of mankind; in the fifty-seven years of Soshyant
they prepare all the dead, and all men stand up; whoever is righteous and
whoever is wicked, every human creature, they rouse up from the spot where its
life departs.
8. Afterwards, when all material living beings assume again their bodies and
forms, then they assign (bara yehabund) them a single class.
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 1000
9. Of the light accompanying (levatman) the sun, one half will be for Gayomard,
and one half will give enlightenment among the rest of men, so that the soul and
body will know that this is my father, and this is my mother, and this is my
brother, and this is my wife, and these are some other of my nearest relations.
10. Then is the assembly of the Sadvastaran, where all mankind will stand at this
time; in that assembly every one sees his own good deeds and his own evil
deeds; and then, in that assembly, a wicked man becomes as conspicuous as a
white sheep among those which are black.
11. In that assembly whatever righteous man was friend of a wicked one in the
world, and the wicked man complains of him who is righteous, thus: 'Why did he
not make me acquainted, when in the world, with the good deeds which he
practiced himself?' if he who is righteous did not inform him, then it is necessary
for him to suffer shame accordingly in that assembly.
12. Afterwards, they set the righteous man apart from the wicked; and then the
righteous is for heaven (garothman), and they cast the wicked back to hell.
13. Three days and nights they inflict punishment bodily in hell, and then he
beholds bodily those three days' happiness in heaven.
14. As it says that, on the day when the righteous man is parted from the
wicked, the tears of every one, thereupon, run down unto his legs.
15. When, after they set apart a father from his consort (hambaz), a brother
from his brother, and a friend from his friend, they suffer, every one for his own
deeds, and weep, the righteous for the wicked, and the wicked about himself; for
there may be a father who is righteous and a son wicked, and there may be one
brother who is righteous and one wicked.
17. Among his producers of the renovation of the universe, those righteous men
of whom it is written that they are living, fifteen men and fifteen damsels, will
come to the assistance of Soshyant.
18. As Gochihr falls in the celestial sphere from a moon-beam on to the earth,
the distress of the earth becomes such-like as that of a sheep when a wolf falls
upon it.
19. Afterwards, the fire and halo melt the metal of Shahrewar, in the hills and
mountains, and it remains on this earth like a river.
20. Then all men will pass into that melted metal and will become pure; when
one is righteous, then it seems to him just as though he walks continually in
warm milk; but when wicked, then it seems to him in such manner as though, in
the world, he walks continually in melted metal.
21. Afterwards, with the greatest affection, all men come together, father and
son and brother and friend ask one another thus: 'Where has it been these many
years, and what was the judgment upon thy soul? hast thou been righteous or
wicked?'
22. The first soul the body sees, it inquires of it with those words (guft).
23. All men become of one voice and administer loud praise to Ohrmazd and the
archangels.
24. Ohrmazd completes his work at that time, and the creatures become so that
it is not necessary to make any effort about them; and among those by whom
the dead are prepared, it is not necessary that any effort be made.
26. This, too, it says, that whoever has been the size of a man, they restore him
then with an age of forty years; they who have been little when not dead, they
restore then with an age of fifteen years; and they give every one his wife, and
show him his children with the wife; so they act as now in the world, but there is
no begetting of children.
27. Afterwards, Soshyant and his assistants, by order of the creator Ohrmazd,
give every man the reward and recompense suitable to his deeds; this is even the
righteous existence (ait) where it is said that they convey him to paradise
(Wahisht), and the heaven (garothman) of Ohrmazd takes up the body (kerp) as
itself requires; with that assistance he continually advances for ever and
everlasting.
28. This, too, it says, that whoever has performed no worship (yasht), and has
ordered no getig-kharid, and has bestowed no clothes as a righteous gift, is
naked there; and he performs the worship (yasht) of Ohrmazd, and the heavenly
angels provide him the use of his clothing.
30. Then two fiends remain at large, Ahriman and Az; Ohrmazd comes to the
world, himself the Zota and Srosh the Raspi, and holds the Kusti in his hand;
defeated by the Kusti formula the resources of the evil spirit and Az act most
31. Gochihr burns the serpent (mar) in the melted metal, and the stench and
pollution which were in hell are burned in that metal, and it (hell) becomes quite
pure.
32. He (Ohrmazd) sets the vault into which the evil spirit fled, in that metal; he
brings the land of hell back for the enlargement of the world; the renovation
arises in the universe by his will, and the world is immortal for ever and
everlasting.
33. This, too, it says, that this earth becomes an iceless, slopeless plain; even the
mountain, whose summit is the support of the Chinwad bridge, they keep down,
and it will not exist.
http://www.iawwai.com/NorthAmericanProphecies.html
Here are some Hopi native North American prophecies relating to the end times.
The first three were made famous by the cult 70s movie, Koyaanisqatsi. They
were shown right at the end.
"If we dig precious things from the land, we will invite disaster."
"Near the day of Purification, there will be cobwebs spun back and forth in the
sky."
"A container of ashes might one day be thrown from the sky, which could burn
the land and boil the oceans."
“The Fourth World shall end soon, and the Fifth World will begin. This the elders
everywhere know. The Signs over many years have been fulfilled, and so few are
left.
“This is the First Sign: We are told of the coming of the white-skinned men, like
Pahana, but not living like Pahana men who took the land that was not theirs.
And men who struck their enemies with thunder.
“This is the Third Sign: A strange beast like a buffalo but with great long horns,
will overrun the land in large numbers. These White Feather saw with his eyes —
the coming of the white men’s cattle.”
“This is the Fourth Sign: The land will be crossed by snakes of iron.”
“This is the Fifth Sign: The land shall be criss-crossed by a giant spider’s web.”
“This is the Sixth sign: The land shall be criss-crossed with rivers of stone that
make pictures in the sun.”
“This is the Seventh Sign: You will hear of the sea turning black, and many living
things dying because of it.”
“This is the Eight Sign: You will see many youth, who wear their hair long like my
people, come and join the tribal nations, to learn their ways and wisdom.
“And this is the Ninth and Last Sign: You will hear of a dwelling-place in the
heavens, above the earth, that shall fall with a great crash. It will appear as a
blue star. Very soon after this, the ceremonies of my people will cease.
“These are the Signs that great destruction is coming. The world shall rock to and
fro. The white man will battle against other people in other lands — with those
who possessed the first light of wisdom. There will be many columns of smoke
and fire such as White Feather has seen the white man make in the deserts not
far from here. Only those which come will cause disease and a great dying. Many
of my people, understanding the prophecies, shall be safe. Those who stay and
live in the places of my people also shall be safe. Then there will be much to
rebuild. And soon — very soon afterward — Pahana will return. He shall bring
with him the dawn of the Fifth World. He shall plant the seeds of his wisdom in
“But White Feather shall not see it. I am old and dying. You — perhaps will see it.
In time, in time…”
According to the wisdom of this prophecy, men and women would one day turn
to the Onkwehonwe for both guidance and direction. It is up to the present
generation of youth of the Kanienkehaka to provide leadership and example to
all who have failed. The children of the Kanienkehaka are the seventh
generation.
http://www.iawwai.com/NorseProphecies.html
The Norse Prophecies derive from the ancient myth of The Ragnarok which
translates, from old Norse to English, roughly as 'The Final Destiny of the Gods'
or 'Twilight of the Gods'. An important part of the Norse Mythological Canon,
the Ragnarok describes an epic battle at the end of time or World cycle, between
the Gods themselves and between men on the Earth. During the course of
events there are a number of various natural disasters, earthquakes and sea
surges over the dry land. Mountains topple, the air and the oceans are sprayed
with poison, fire and flame ravage the land and then the World is submerged in
water. At the end, the World Tree Yggdrasil is destroyed, the Gods Odin, Freya
Loki, Thor etc. are no more and all of humankind perishes also. So the World
cycle ends.
However the end is also a new beginning for the Earth eventually re-emerges
from the submersion fertile and green. Also there are survivors, including two of
Thor's sons Móði and Magni also the Gods Baldr and Höðr. Likewise two
humans, Líf and Lífþrasir, have been saved from the destruction and they go on
to re-populate the Earth with their progeny. In this way another cycle begins and
life goes on.
Some people may counter that it is inappropriate to use an ancient Norse Myth
and present it as something prophetic and a foretelling of events in real life.
However I make the case in a separate article on this website where I show
that 'The Apocalypse and Prophecies can be seen as the expression of Mythic
archetypes'. It was the 4th century Roman historian Sallustius who wrote that,
"Myths are things that never happened but always are." This means that myths
a representations and allegorical descriptions of eternal archetypes that are
aspects of the divine. Though the fantastical aspects of mythology, i.e. fabulous
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 1008
monsters, supernatural Godlike characters and magical objects, are fantasies
and things which are not a part of reality. Noneless the eternal archetypes to
which these facets or motifs of mythology refer are real in the sense that these
eternal archetypes manifest themselves in reality and find their expression in
aspects of our day to day lives.
Seen in this way, the Ragnarok can be mapped to real world events and the
process of history because both are the expressions of a transcendent archetype
which act as a Cosmic template from which the forms and processes of the
Universe and the World are stamped. So that all things existing are like
impressions of this template or image of God. And myths exist in order to
communicate something of the qualities of this divine image. This is what the
late great World renowned scholar of mythology, Joseph Campbell, described
myths as the 'Masks of God'.
Anyway.. below are two passages from the Ragnarok which talk about some of
the conditions of the World towards the time of the end of the World Cycle.
' The age of evil has come to the world . Everyone steals and hoards great
wealth, and sensual sin rules the day. The end of the world is at hand - yet men
are hard and cruel, and listen not to the doom that is coming . No one heeds the
cries of his neighbour, or lifts a hand to save. ' - The Ragnarok ( Ancient Norse
prophecy, C 1000 CE )
'The warlike fall upon the peaceful, brothers kill brothers, and even children soil
one another's blood.' - The Ragnarok
http://www.iawwai.com/NostradamusProphecies.html
'In 1999 and seven months the great king of terror will come from the sky. He
will bring back to life the King of the Mongols. Before and after the God of war
reigns happily.' - c10 q72
'The year the great seventh number is accomplished. Appearing at the time of
the games of slaughter, not far from the age of the great millenium, when the
dead will come out of their graves.' - c10 q74
'The man from the East will come out of his seat passing across the Apennines to
see France. He will fly thru the sky.' - c2 q29
'He will fly thru the sky, the rains and the snows and strike everyone with his
rod.' - c2 q2
'A man will be charged with destroying the temples and religions alterned by
fantasy. He will the rocks rather than the living. Ears filled with ornate
speeches.' - c1 q96
'The rose upon the middle of the World scene... To speak the truth they will have
closed mouths. Then at the time of need the awaited one will come late.' - c5 q96
'[He] will take Diana's day as his day of silent rest. He will travel far and wide in
his drive to infuriate, delivering a great people from subjection.' - c2 q28
'Libra will see the Western lands to govern, holding the rule over theskies and
the Earth. No one will see the forces of Asia destroyed until seven hold the
hierarchy in succession.' -c4 q50
'Long awaited he will never return. He will appear in Asia at home in Europe, one
issued from Great Hermes.' - c10 q75
The Surah e Hashar is 59th Surah of the Holy Quran and has 24 Verses.
The Arabic word, "Hashar" means Qiyamat e Sughra and it is related with Imam
Mahdi's Arrival and the punishment of the Criminals by Mahdi upon His Arrival.
Surah Number is 59
The Abjad of the Imam's name, "Mahdi" is also 59
Verses - 22 + 23 + 24 = 69
The Abjad of Allah's name, "Hakim" meaning The Ruler is also 69
Now we also know that the 2/3rd humanity would die by 2022 AD, the
Arrival of Mahdi would take place in 2023 AD and the Dajjal and other
enemies of Imam would be completely defeated in 2024 AD.
Very Important years for the whole humanity in the End Times.
22 + 23 + 24 = 69
17 Names of Allah are mentioned in the Last 3 Verses of Surah e Hashar
The Number - 59 is the 17th Prime Number in Mathematics and the Abjad of
Imam's Name, "Mahdi" is also 59.
Prophet Muhammad (PBUH) mentioned Imam Mahdi's name 17 times in His
Last Sermon after His Last Hajj
There are 17 Wajib Prayers in the whole day for muslims to pray
Now what is the link between the Number - 17 and the Arrival of Mahdi in 1445
Hijri or 2023 AD
According to Plutarch's Moralia, the Egyptians have a legend that the end of Osiris'
life came on the seventeenth of a month, on which day it is quite evident to the eye
that the period of the full moon is over. Now, because of this, the Pythagoreans call
this day "the Barrier," and utterly abominate this number. For the number
seventeen, coming in between the square sixteen and the oblong rectangle
eighteen, which, as it happens, are the only plane figures that have their perimeters
equal their areas, bars them off from each other and disjoins them, and breaks up
the epogdoon by its division into unequal intervals.
The number of the raka'ahs that Muslims perform during Salat on a daily basis.
According to Kabbalism and Hurufism, there are many ‘holy numbers’ in our life. The
number 23 is one of them.
In mathematics, twenty-three is the ninth prime number. It is also the fifth factorial
prime and the second Woodall prime.
No doubt, Einstein was the one who worked with the number as an Eisenstein
prime with no imaginary part and the real part having the form of 3n − 1. It was in the
center of his attention.
There is also a link to Islam. The Qur'an was revealed in a total of 23 years to
Prophet Muhammed. Also, Muslims believe that the first verses of the Qur'an were
revealed to the Prophet Muhammad on the 23rd night of the 9th Islamic month,
Ramazan.
Number twenty-three is also in our body and genes. Normal human sex cells have
23 chromosomes. Other human cells have 46 chromosomes, arranged in 23
pairs. The average human physical biorhythm is 23 days and the blood circulates
the body on average every 23 seconds.
In Christianity, Psalm 23, also known as the Shepherd Psalm, is possibly the most
quoted and best known Psalm. Psalms are also the 23rd book in the Douay–Rheims
Bible.
The Cabalists affirm that a letter is missing in the Torah. That letter of the alphabet
does not appear at all in our "eon" and also is not used in the Torah. The primitive
divine alphabet and all the Torah also would base on a series of 23 letters, not 22.
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 1016
Somehow it became invisible to us and will reappear only during a next terrestrial
period.
Principia Discordia, the sacred text of Discordianism, holds that 23 is one of the
sacred numbers of Eris, goddess of discord.
Composer Alban Berg had a similar view when it comes to the number 23, using it to
structure several works either. Various suggestions have been made as to the reason
for this interest: that he took it from the Biorhythms theory of Wilhelm Fliess, in
which a 23-day time cycle is considered significant. Or just because he suffered
an asthma attack on 23rd of the month.
There are even two movies about number 23 called The Number 23. In 2007, Jim
Carrey characterized a man who becomes obsessed with the 23 enigma in the movie.
And the German production movie called 23 was also about a man who is obsessed
with the number.
https://archive.islamonline.net/?p=643
The Qur’an and Sunnah indicate that jinn exist, and that there is a purpose for their
existence in this life, which is to worship Allah Alone with no partner or associate.
Allah Almighty says:“And I (Allah) created not the jinns and humans, except they
should worship Me (Alone).”(Adh-Dhariyat: 56)
Scholars are in disagreement over the difference between jinn and demons. Some
of them say that the word jinn goes far to encompass the jinn as well as the
demons. The word also includes believing and unbelieving jinn.
Allah Almighty says,“And among us there are righteous folk and among us there
are far from that. We are sects having different rules.”(Al-Jinn: 11)
“And there are among us some who have surrendered (to Allah) and there are
among us some who are unjust. And whoso hath surrendered to Allah, such have
taken the right path purposefully.”(Al-Jinn: 14)
However, the word demon orshaytanis used to refer to the unbelieving ones among
the jinn.
Allah Almighty says,“…and the devil was ever an ingrate to his Lord.”(Al-Isra’: 27)
The world of the jinn is an independent and separate world with its own distinct
nature and features that are hidden from the world of humans. Jinns and humans
have things in common, such as the ability to understand and choose between good
and evil. The word jinn comes from the Arabic root meaning “hidden from sight”.
Allah Almighty says:“… Verily he (shaytan) and his soldiers from the jinn or his tribe
see you from where you cannot see them…”(Al-A`raf: 27)
`A’ishah (may Allah be pleased with her) says that the Prophet (peace and blessings
be upon him) said:“The angels were created from light, the jinn were created from
fire, and Adam was created from that which has been described to you.”(Reported
by Muslim)
Types of Jinn
Allah has created different types of jinn. Among them are some who can take on
different forms such as dogs and snakes; some who are like flying winds with wings;
and some who can travel and rest.
Abu Tha`labah al-Khushni says that the Prophet (peace and blessings be upon him)
says:“The jinn are of three types: a type that has wings and they fly through the
air; a type that looks like snakes and dogs; and a type that stops for a rest then
resumes its journey.”(Reported by At-Tahawi in Mushkil Al-’Athar)
Their powers
Allah has given jinn powers that he has not given to humans. Allah has told us
about some of their powers such as the ability to move and travel quickly. One of
the jinn guaranteed to Prophet Sulayman (Solomon, peace and blessings be upon
him) that he would bring the throne of the Queen of Yemen to Jerusalem in a
Allah Almighty says:“A stalwart of the Jinn said: I will bring it thee before thou can't
rise from thy place. Lo! I verily am strong and trusty for such work. One with whom
was knowledge of the Scripture said: I will bring it thee before thy gaze returneth
unto thee. And when he saw it set in his presence, (Solomon said) This is of the
bounty of my Lord. That He may try me whether I give thanks or am ungrateful.
Whosoever giveth thanks he only giveth thanks for (the good of) his own soul: and
whosoever is ungrateful (is ungrateful only to his own soul’s hurt). For lo! My Lord
is Absolute in independence, Bountiful.”(An-Naml: 39-40)
The Jinn asked the Prophet about their provision and he said:“Every bone on which
the name of Allah is recited is your provision. The time it will fall in your hand it
would be covered with flesh, and (you can have) all the droppings as food for your
animals.”The Prophet (peace and blessings of Allah be upon him) said,“So do not
use (these things) for cleaning yourselves (after relieving oneself), for they are the
food and provision of your brothers (Jinn).”(Reported by Muslim)
The believing jinn may eat any bone on which the name of Allah has been
mentioned, because the Messenger (peace and blessings be upon him) did not
permit them to have anything on which Allah’s Name has not been mentioned –
those are for the unbelieving jinn.
One of these are reported by Anas ibn Malik (may Allah be pleased with him) who
says: “When the Messenger of Allah (peace and blessings be upon him) entered the
toilet, he would say,‘Allahumma inni a`udhu bika min al-khubuthi wal-khaba’ith(O
Allah, I seek Refuge with You from all offensive and wicked things [evil deeds and
evil spirits]).’”
Allah Almighty says,“And say: My Lord! I seek refuge in Thee from suggestions of
the evil ones. And I seek refuge in Thee, my Lord, lest they be present with me.”(Al-
Mu’minun: 97-98)
Saying Bismillah (in the Name of Allah) before entering one’s home, eating or
drinking, and having intercourse will keep Satan from entering the house or
partaking with a person in his food, drink and sexual activity.
Similarly, mentioning the name of Allah before entering the toilet or taking off
one’s clothes will prevent the jinn from seeing a person in a state of undress or
harming him.
Strength of faith and religion in general will also prevent jinn from harming a
person, so much so that if they were to fight, the one who has faith would win. Ibn
Mas`ud (may Allah be pleased with him) says: “A man from among the Companions
of Muhammad met a man from among the jinn. They wrestled, and the human
knocked down the jinn. The human said to him, ‘You look small and skinny to me,
and your forearms look like the front paws of a dog. Do all the jinn look like this, or
only you?’ He said, ‘No, by Allah, among them I am strong, but let us wrestle again,
and if you defeat me I will teach you something that will do you good.’ The human
said, ‘Fine.’ He said, ‘Recite (the verse):“Allah! There is no God save Him, the Alive,
the Eternal. Neither slumber nor sleep overtaketh Him. Unto Him belongeth
whatsoever is in the heavens and whatsoever is in the earth. Who is he that
intercedeth with Him save by His leave? He knoweth that which is in front of them
and that which is behind them, while they encompass nothing of His knowledge
save what He will. His throne includeth the heavens and the earth, and He is never
weary of preserving them. He is the Sublime, the Tremendous.”(Al-Baqarah: 255)
The human said, ‘Fine.’ He said, ‘You will never recite this in your house but the
shaytan will come out of it like a donkey breaking wind, and he will never come
back in until the next morning.’” (Reported by Ad-Darami)
The Satan in the form of Dajjal would use the Evil Jinns in the form of Alien forces
against the forces of Hazrat Esa and Mahdi after their Arrival and Arrival.
https://www.islamreligion.com/articles/669/viewall/world-of-jinn/
Existence of Jinn
The Jinn are beings created with free will, living on earth in a world parallel to
mankind. The Arabic word Jinn is from the verb ‘Janna’ which means to hide
or conceal. Thus, they are physically invisible from man as their description
suggests. This invisibility is one of the reasons why some people have denied
their existence. However, (as will be seen) the affect which the world of the
Jinn has upon our world, is enough to refute this modern denial of one of
God’s creation. The origins of the Jinn can be traced from the Quran and the
Sunnah. God says:
“Indeed We created man from dried clay of black smooth mud. And We
created the Jinn before that from the smokeless flame of fire” (Quran 15:26-27)
Thus the Jinn were created before man. As for their physical origin, then the
Prophet, may the mercy and blessings of God be upon him, has confirmed the
above verse when he said:
“The Angels were created from light and the Jinn from smokeless fire.”
(Saheeh Muslim)
It is this description of the Jinn which tells us so much about them. Because
they were created from fire, their nature has generally been fiery and thus their
relationship with man has been built upon this. Like humans, they too are
required to worship God and follow Islam. Their purpose in life is exactly the
same as ours, as God says:
“I did not create the Jinn and mankind except to worship Me.” (Quran 51:56)
Jinns can thus be Muslims or non-Muslims. However, due to their fiery nature
the majority of them are non-Muslims. All these non-Muslim Jinns form a part
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 1024
of the army of the most famous Jinn, Satan. Consequently, these disbelieving
Jinns are also called devils. Jinns also become Muslims, as they did in the
time of the Prophet when a group of them were amazed by the recitation of the
Quran. God orders the Prophet to tell the people of this event:
“Say (O’ Muhammed): It has been revealed to me that a group of Jinn listened
and said; ‘Indeed we have heard a marvelous Quran. It guides unto
righteousness so we have believed in it, and we will never make partners with
our lord’.”(Quran 72:1-2)
In many aspects of their world, the Jinn are very similar to us. They eat and
drink, they marry, have children and they die. The life span however, is far
greater then ours. Like us, they will also be subject to a Final Reckoning by
God the Most High. They will be present with mankind on the Day of Judgment
and will either go to Paradise or Hell.
Abilities of Jinn
That which clearly distinguishes the Jinn from mankind, are their powers and
abilities. God has given them these powers as a test for them. If they oppress
others with them, then they will be held accountable. By knowing of their
powers, we can often make sense of much of the mysteries which go on
around us. One of the powers of the Jinn, is that they are able to take on any
physical form they like. Thus, they can appear as humans, animals trees and
anything else. Thousands of people have sighted strange looking creatures all
over the world - and it seems more plausible all the sightings of such creatures
may have been Jinns parading in different forms.
The ability to possess and take over the minds and bodies of other creatures is
also a power which the Jinn have utilized greatly over the centuries. This
however, is something which has been prohibited to them as it is a great
oppression to possess another being. Human possession is something which
has always brought about great attention. But the true knowledge of this
subject is rare. Over the last 3 decades the subject of possession has become
very commercialized. During the 70’s, films such as The Exorcist and
Rosemary’s Baby were used to educate people about possession. However,
“Indeed, Satan flees from the house in which Surah Al-Baqarah (the 2nd
chapter of the Quran) is recited.” (Al-Tirmidhi)
If a person does become possessed, then the name of God has to be used in
expelling the Jinn. If we look at the practice of the Prophet and his
companions, we find many invocations to exorcise the Jinn. All of them
invoke God to help the possessed person. How contrary this is to many
modern-day exorcists. Many exorcists, often invoke the names of others
besides God to exorcise the Jinn. When the Jinn does leave, these people
believe that their way was successful. However, this is a ploy of the Jinn, as it
knows that if it obeys the exorcist, then it has succeeded in making him
worship others besides God. The Jinn often returns when the exorcist leaves,
as it knows that nothing except the words of God can stop it from oppressing
others.
It is not only humans which are possessed, but also animals, trees and other
objects. By doing this, the evil Jinn hope to make people worship others
besides God. The possession of idols is one way to do this. Not so long ago
the world-wide phenomenon of Hindu idols drinking milk, shocked the world.
From Bombay to London, Delhi to California, countless idols were lapping up
milk. Ganesh the elephant god, Hanuman the monkey god and even Shiva
lingam, the male private organ (!), all seemed to guzzle down the milk as if
there was no tomorrow! Unfortunately people were taken in by this and many
One of the most frequent activities associated with the Jinn, is fortune telling.
Before the advent of the Prophet Muhammad, fortune-tellers and soothsayers
were wide spread. These people would use their associates from the Jinn to
find out about the future. The Jinns would go to the lowest heaven and listen
to the Angels conversing amongst themselves about events of the Future
which they heard from God. The Jinns would then inform the fortune-tellers.
This is why before the time of the Prophet many fortune-tellers were very
accurate in their predictions. However, upon the Prophet’s arrival the heavens
were guarded intensely by the Angels, and any Jinn who tried to listen was
attacked by meteors (shooting stars):
“And We have guarded it (the heavens) from every accursed devil, except one
who is able to snatch a hearing and he is pursued by a brightly burning flame.”
(Quran 15:17-18)
Thus, it is clear from this as to how fortune-tellers get predictions of the future
sometimes right. It is also evident as to why they get so many wrong. Men
like Nostradamus are an example, as some of his predictions of the future
were correct whilst many were completely wrong. Unfortunately, the amount
of fortune telling which occurs amongst the Muslims is also increasing. By
visiting Muslim lands such as Morocco, one is able to see as to how much
inter Jinn-fortune-teller activity there really is. If you look up at the sky on a
clear night in Morocco, you will see the heavens ablaze with shooting stars! A
clear display of the devils being chased away from the heavens.
Fortune-tellers also operate through the Qareen. The Qareen is the Jinn
companion which is assigned to every human being. It is this Jinn which
whispers to our base desires and constantly tries to divert us from
righteousness.
The Prophet said: “Every one of you has been assigned a companion from the
Jinn. The companions asked: Even you O’ Messenger of God? And the
Prophet replied: Even me, except that God has helped me against him and he
has become a Muslim. Now he only tells me to do good” (Saheeh Muslim).
Because the Qareen is with a person all his life, it knows all that has happened
to the person from the cradle to the grave. By making contact with the Qareen,
the fortune-teller is thus able to make out that it is he who knows about the
person. He looks in his crystal ball or the palm of a person and proceeds to
amaze him with knowledge which no one else knows. The severity of going to
a fortune-teller is such that:
The Prophet said: “The prayer of one who approaches a fortune-teller and asks
him about anything, will not be accepted for forty days or nights” (Saheeh
Muslim) and: “Whosoever approaches a fortune-teller and believes in what he
says, has disbelieved in what was revealed to Muhammed.”
The onslaught of satanic visions has also hit the Muslims. Many Muslims
claim to have seen visions of the Prophet Muhammed and even God! By doing
this, Satan is able to lead astray the weak Muslims. Through such visions,
Muslims are often told that the commands of Islam are not applicable to them.
The Jinns tell them that Prayer, Fasting, Hajj etc. are not obligatory for them. It
is a great deception and unfortunately one which has been very effective. The
extent of satanic visions still continues to this day. The recent death of Diana
Princess of Wales sparked off great love and adoration for this woman. In fact
the grief of the British people was such, that it was as if Diana was something
divine. No sooner had the mourning of Diana reached its peak, that visions of
her were already being seen at Hampton Court Palace! If these visions did
occur, the desire of Satan and his army of Jinn to capitalise on this event, was
Saying Bismillah (in the Name of Allah (God)) before entering one’s home,
before eating or drinking, and before having intercourse will also keep Satan
from entering the house or partaking with a person in his food, drink and
sexual activity. Similarly, mentioning the name of Allah before entering the
toilet or taking off one’s clothes will prevent the Jinn from seeing a person’s
private parts or harming him, as the Prophet said. Strength of faith and
religion in general will also prevent the Jinn from harming a person.
Also the Prophet Muhammad said: “Do not make your houses like graves, for
Satan runs away from a house in which al-Baqarah chapter [chapter 2] is
recited.”(Narrated by Saheeh Muslim)
These Arabic verses and prophetic sayings were some examples of how a
Muslim would get protection from the Jinn. Islam teaches us how to deal with
all of God’s creation - and not just the Jinn. A true Muslim should not fear
Satan or the Jinn, because Islam taught us about them and how to get
protection from their harm.
“Indeed he (Satan) and his tribe watch you from a position where you cannot
see them.” (Quran 7:27)
Now we see in recent history, there are lot of movies and documentaries are
produced on Aliens and many story books and fiction books are written for
children and young generation so that they believe in Aliens in one form or
another. They may call them UFO's or Aliens from Space or other parts of the
Universe.
The main purpose of the Satan is to make the people believe that Aliens exist
in the Universe and they would come to invade the Earth and take control of
our Planet.
In the End Days when Satanic Dajjal would emerge, he would use the forces of
Jinn as Aliens and try to control the World using their extra forces and powers
given to them by God.
The Surah Dukhan is 44th Chapter of the Holy Quran and has 59 Verses.
We all know that the Abjad of the name of our Imam, "Mahdi" is 59
We also know that the Kharooj of Mahdi would be in 1444 Hijri on 23rd Ramazan,
Friday.
Abjad of "Mahdi".................................... 59
Now the year 2022 would be year when the World would see Nuclear War and in
Nuclear War, there would be Orange Smoke when Nuclear weapons would
be used. The 1444 Hijri year starts on 29th July, 2022 AD and the Surah's name is
Surah Dukhan meaning "Smoke".
So the World would see Big Smoke in 1444 Hijri or 2022 AD before Imam Mahdi
would come in 2023 AD
59........................... 5 + 9 = 14
When Hazrat Ali (AS) came into the Holy Kaaba on 13th Rajab, the Big Crack
appeared in the Wall of Holy Kaaba, Mecca which is still in that Wall.
Prophet Muhammad (PBUH) was 30 years of age when Hazrat Ali came into the
world. He waited next 10 years and when Hazrat Ali (AS) became 10 years old, then
Prophet Muhammad (PBUH) announced that the Religion of Islam to all the people
of Mecca at the age of 40 years
The time period from the Arrival of Hazrat Ali in this world till the Announcement of
Islam by Prophet Muhammad (PBUH).................................. 10 years
If the number of years from the Crack appeared in the Holy Mosque of Kufa, Iraq
would be the same as 10 years, then the Arrival of Mahdi would take place on
28th July, 2023 AD
Exactly 10 years from the Crack in the Holy Mosque of Kufa, Iraq till the Arrival of
Imam Mahdi on 28th July, 2023 AD.
10 Years........ Crack in the Holy Mosque of Kufa, Iraq till the Announcement of the
Arrival of Mahdi..................... Last Muhammad (PBUH)
Crack in the Holy Mosque of Kufa, Iraq (28th July, 2013 AD)
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 1035
Announcement of Last Risalat/Nabuwat of Prophet
Muhammad (PBUH) and the Announcement of Last
Imamat of Mahdi after 10 years of Crack
Prophet Muhammad (PBUH) was 30 years of age, when Hazrat Ali (AS) came in the
Holy Kaaba and the Crack appeared in the Wall of Holy Kaaba which is still there
even after more than 1400 years.
When Prophet Muhammad (PBUH) was 40 years of age, then Allah asked Him to
announce His Last Risalat and Last Nabuwat.
So the Announcement of the Last Risalat/Nabuwat was 10 years after the Crack
appeared in the Holy Kaaba at Rakun e Yamani, the wall facing toward Yemen.
Now the Crack appeared in the 4th Holy Mosque of the Muslims, Masjid e Kufa,
where Hazrat Ali (AS) was martyred on 19th Ramazan, 1434 Hijri on 28th July, 2013
AD. The Shia Muslim Scholars are referring this Crack as the Sign of the Arrival of
Mahdi.
So 10 years after the Crack appeared in the Holy Mosque of Kufa would be 28th
July, 2023 AD - 10th Muharram, 1445 Hijri, the announcement of the Arrival of
Mahdi and the Announcement of the Last Imamat of 12th Imam.
10 years Later:
Although warfare between the Romans and Persians continued over seven
centuries, the frontier, aside from shifts in the north, remained largely stable. A
game of tug of war ensued: towns, fortifications, and provinces were continually
sacked, captured, destroyed, and traded. Neither side had the logistical strength or
manpower to maintain such lengthy campaigns far from their borders, and thus
neither could advance too far without risking stretching its frontiers too thin. Both
sides did make conquests beyond the border, but in time the balance was almost
always restored. Although initially different in military tactics, the armies of both
sides gradually adopted from each other and by the second half of the 6th century
they were similar and evenly matched.
Israel along with Saudi Arabia and UAE are also building military pressure against
Iran. USA has put Economic Sanctions on Iran since 2018 AD which Iran says that it
is a Economic War against them.
The USA is building Military in the Persian Gulf with the support of its allies. So the
region is heading towards the Final Encounter betwen the two empires again - The
Roman Empire (USA and the Western Countries) and the Persian Empire (Iran and
the support the World powers - Russia and China) in this War by 2021 - 2022 AD
before the Arrival of Mahdi and the Second Coming of Jesus Christ in 2023 AD.
Let us Count to 3 ---- 3 years from 2020 to 2022 AD till the Arrival in 2023
AD
Then the
2023 AD --- Last Messiah and the Last Return of Hazrat Esa (AS)
https://www.rt.com/news/466157-foxes-jerusalem-temple-mount-prophecy/
Prophecy watchers are on high alert after a group of foxes were spotted frollicking
on Jerusalem’s Temple Mount, potentially auguring the long-prophesied
reconstruction of the Jewish Temple.
The foxes were spotted ahead of the Tisha B’av religious festival, which begins on
August 10 and commemorates the destruction of the two temples in Jerusalem,
first by the Babylonians and later by the Romans.
“One cannot refrain from crying at the site of the fulfilment of the prophecy of
‘foxes will walk on it’”said Shmuel Rabinowitz, rabbi of the Western Wall and holy
sites. He was referring to the Book Of Lamentations (5:18), a passage which tells the
story of the Babylonians’ destruction of the first temple in Jerusalem and a
prophecy that the site would one day be inhabited by foxes.
This particular passage is, in turn, tied to a prophecy by the Prophet Zechariah as
explained in the Talmud (Makkot 24b) that the temple will one day be rebuilt.
“Until the prophecy of Uriah with regard to the destruction of the city was fulfilled, I
was afraid that the prophecy of Zechariah would not be fulfilled, as the two
prophecies are linked,” Tractate Makkot 24b reads.
The group of about a dozen foxes were seen in the southwestern area of the
Western Wall over the past few days. This is the only surviving section of the
Second Jewish Temple. The Book of Lamentations (5:18) is traditionally read during
the upcoming religious festival on the 9th day of the 9th Month of the Jews.
The Temple Mount is one of the holiest spots in Jerusalem and is a focal point for
the Jewish, Christian and Muslim faiths alike.
"As the Jewish world is counting the days to the ninth of Av (Tisha Be'Av), the date
on which Jews mourn the destruction of the two Temples in Jerusalem following its
destruction by the Romans, foxes have been spotted walking near the Western
Wall, a press release reported on Thursday.
It is written in the Book of Lamentations (5:18), which is read on Tisha Be'Av, that
Mount Zion – where the Temples stood – will be so desolate that “foxes will walk
upon it.” The understanding, according to the Talmud in the tractate Makkot (24b),
is that if the prophecies of destruction have been fulfilled, so will be the ones by the
prophet Zechariah about the Temple being rebuilt."
With the courtesy of the website, the following article is reproduced as:
https://www.breakingisraelnews.com/134846/foxes-temple-mount-prophetic-
proof-jerusalem-returning-glory/
It was reported in The Yeshiva World that visitors to the area have observed the
group of about a dozen foxes in the southwestern area of the Western Wall for the
last three days in the early hours of the day.
Wild foxes at the site of the destroyed Temple are described specifically in the
Jewish Talmud.
This Talmud, which was written 2,000 years ago as a sign that Jerusalem will be
rebuilt. This precise scenario was discussed in the Talmud (Makkot 24b). Rabban
Gamliel, Rabbi Elazar ben Azaria, Rabbi Joshua and Rabbi Akiva went up to
Jerusalem.
When they reached the Temple Mount, they saw a fox emerging from the place of
the Holy of Holies.
Assuredly, because of you Tzion shall be plowed as a field, And Yerushalayim shall
become heaps of ruins, And the Har Habayit A shrine in the woods. Micah 3:12
The Prophet Zechariah described the return of Jerusalem to its days of glory.
Thus said the lord of Hosts: There shall yet be old men and women in the squares
of Yerushalayim, each with staff in hand because of their great age. And the
squares of the city shall be crowded with boys and girls playing in the
squares. Zechariah 4-5
As the focus of Jewish prayer and the site of the future Temple, the Temple Mount
has frequently been the scene of prophetic images.
In July 2018, a large segment from one of the stones of the Wall suddenly fell,
barely missing a woman.
Last year during the morning prayers of the last day Sukkot (Feast of Tabernacles), a
strange mist rose from the ground and covered the Dome of the Rock. Just a few
weeks earlier, a snake crawled out from between the ancient stones. At around the
same time, strange sinkholes appeared adjacent to the Shaar HaRachamim which
the Palestinians later turned into a mosque.
"Catch us the foxes, The little foxes That ruin the vineyards— For our vineyard is in
blossom." (Song of Songs 2:15)
https://www.clearlywritten.net/
Genesis 1:14 tells us that the lights in the sky are primarily for signs.
The "great sign" in Chapter 12 of the book of Revelation describes a celestial
alignment of the stars and planets in the sky. Verses 1 and 2 of this 2000 year old
prophecy were fulfilled on September 23, 2017. Astronomy software confirms that
this precise alignment occurs once in human history.
On November 13th, 2017 there was an exceedingly rare Jupiter Venus conjunction
with a closeness and brightness that was in the same league as the one in the year 2
BC. Which many believe was part of the Star of Bethlehem sign. This Jupiter Venus
conjunction on November 13th symbolized verse 5 of Revelation 12, which
describes the Rapture event - the disappearance of Jesus' faithful disciples, not
cultural Christians.
Through astonishing day count connections that could only have been procured by
God, these signs, and many more, in turn pointed to Hanukkah Day 8 and the
massively prophetic UN vote to condemn Jerusalem as Israel's capital. Through this
historic vote in the world's court, the world officially and formally condemned
Since December 20th, 2017, God has provided a series of stunning prophetic signs
and clues that revealed His timing for the Rapture and the beginning of the End
Times period before Christ's return to rule from Jerusalem for 1000 years in
December 2024. Overwhelming evidence points to May 21st, 2019.
You need to read this website, but more importantly, you need to watch all of
my videos, parts 1 through 5, in the playlist on my YouTube channel
clearlywrittendotnet. You can watch these important videos parts 1 - 5 from the
menu at the top of this page.
If you are interested in learning about the numerous stunning signs God has been
pouring out over the last year and years, which have revealed His precise timing,
then you owe it to yourself to watch the other videos on my YouTube channel. Here
is an excellent video to get you started video .
Also, in the additional resources section on this website I have linked to a plethora
of AMAZING videos, on a wide range of subjects, from archaeology that proves the
Bible, and scientific evidence for the God of the Bible, to near death experiences
and the truth about alien abductions, to spiritual warfare and the truth behind New
Age spirituality and yoga. You must check out this additional resources page.
You are about to read the most astounding information you have ever
read.
After the vision, Archangel Gabriel interprets the vision for Daniel. He tells Daniel that “the ram
that you saw… these are the kings of Media and Persia”, and that “the goat is the king of
Greece” (Daniel 8:20-21). Gabriel also tells Daniel that the second part of his vision that
concerned the disturbing events in the temple sanctuary “will happen later in the time of wrath,
because the vision concerns the appointed time of the end" (Daniel 8:19).
Shortly after Alexander the Great came to power, he sought to conquer the Persians, and
remove their influence from Greece. His first momentous, and very important battle in this
conquest was the Battle of Granicus in 334 BCE.
In Jewish context, the significance of this battle and defeat of the Persians to the Greeks
marked the passing from Medo-Persian rule to Hellenistic rule over Israel and Judah.
Before explaining the addition of 2,300 years to 334 BCE, which equals 1967, it’s worth pointing
out a few of the many very interesting prophetic details in this prophecy. Because of these
amazing accuracies, secular scholars had previously been confused regarding the period the
book of Daniel was written. On my website, clearlywritten.net, in the Additional Resources
section, I have linked to an academic article regarding the recently published evidence derived
from the Dead Sea Scrolls that prove the Book of Daniel was not written in the second century
BCE as many scholars had previously hypothesized.
1) Daniel 8:5: “A male goat came from the west across the whole face of the earth, without
touching the ground.”. Alexander and the Greeks came from the west into Anatolia (present day
Turkey) to battle the Persians. Alexander's army was the first in history to rely on horse cavalry,
hence why the goat traveled "across the whole face of the earth, without touching the ground."
2) In the vision the goat representing Greece, defeats the ram representing Media-Persia, just
as Alexander defeated the Persians at Granicus. Daniel 8:7: “And the ram had no power to
stand before him [the goat], but he [the goat] cast him down to the ground and trampled on him
[the ram]”.
3) Daniel 8:21: “And the goat is the king of Greece. And the great horn between his eyes is the
first king [Alexander The Great]. As for the horn that was broken, in place of which four others
arose, four kingdoms shall arise from his nation, but not with his power.” Centuries after this was
written in the book of Daniel, upon Alexander the Great's death, his kingdom was divided into
four Hellenistic kingdoms that did not retain the first kingdom's power. Alexander's four generals
were each given a kingdom to rule.
4) In the vision Daniel sees that the ram “had two horns, and both horns were high, but one was
higher than the other, and the higher one came up last.” The ram is noted for having two horns
because they represented the two kings of the united Media and Persian Empires. These
empires united in 550 BCE when the dominant Persian empire defeated the Median Empire.
The reason one horn was higher than the other is because the two kings were not equal rulers,
5) Daniel 8:6: "It [the goat] came toward the ram with the two horns that had been standing
beside the river, and it ran at it with savage force." The Persians underestimated Alexander and
waited for the Greeks on the banks of the Granicus River, which disabled their best
weapon, their chariots. Upon arrival Alexander's generals advised him to stop and camp before
attacking, but Alexander rejected their advise and led his army straight into battle, charging
through the river "with savage force".
Regarding the second part of the vision that Gabriel says “will happen later in the time of wrath,
because the vision concerns the appointed time of the end” (Daniel 8:19). Daniel is given a
disturbing description of the ruler to arise during the time of wrath, and also a description of end
times events that will happen on the Jewish Temple. Gabriel is asked, "‘How long will it take for
the vision to be fulfilled – the vision concerning the daily sacrifice [a daily Temple ritual], the
rebellion that causes desolation [a reference to an end times event on the Temple], the
surrender of the sanctuary [the Temple] and the trampling underfoot of the Lord’s people?’"
(Daniel 8:13). To which Gabriel replies, "‘It will take 2,300 evenings and mornings; then the
sanctuary will be restored to its rightful state.’" (Daniel 8:14). Also, the last thing Gabriel tells
Daniel at the end of this chapter is that "the vision of the evenings and the mornings that has
been told is true..." Therefore the point of this entire chapter is the significance of the evenings
and mornings, and the point of this description of this Battle of Granicus in such detail is for the
purpose of adding the 2,300 number to the date of this battle. "..[B]ut seal up the vision, for it
concerns the time of the distant future.” (Daniel 8:26). (Therefore, the understanding of the
vision is 'unsealed' now close to the time of the end.)
The widely understood day-for-a-year prophecy rule makes 2,300 days = 2,300 years.
(Numbers 14:34) "According to the number of the days in which you spied out the land, forty
days, a year for each day, you shall bear your iniquity forty years".
(Ezekiel 4:5) "For I assign to you a number of days, 390 days, equal to the number of years."
(Ezekiel 4:6) "Forty days I assign you. A day for each year."
To summarize, Daniel receives from Archangel Gabriel a clearly interpreted vision of the Battle
of Granicus in 334 BCE. In reference to the question of when the End Times events on the
Temple will take place, Archangel Gabriel tells Daniel to add 2,300 years, which gives us 1967.
1967 is the year that Jerusalem came under Jewish control for the first time since the time that
Daniel lived during the Babylonian Exile of the Jews! It is the second most important year in
Israel's modern history. It is the year of the 6 Day War, when East Jerusalem (the Old City, and
ancient capital) and the Temple Mount grounds were brought under Jewish control for the first
time in 19 centuries. Thus, bringing the Temple reconstruction closer at hand, when the
"sanctuary will be restored to its rightful state" (Daniel 8:14). Which will fulfill many other
prophecies concerning its reconstruction in the time of the end. For example, Ezekiel chapters
1967, the second most important year in modern Israel's history, clear as day, in the Bible! This
should have your attention, as it is indisputable evidence of the supernatural! Also getting 1967
in context of the Jewish Bible, is evidence that demonstrates that prophecy in the Bible is
divinely inspired! There is no other rational explanation. It is not possible to calculate the
odds of getting 1967 in the Jewish Bible, along with a prophetic description of the Temple in the
last days. Therefore, it cannot be a coincidence. Therefore, if rational reasoning is maintained,
one will be obliged to reconsider their worldview. 1967 is a number. Numbers are objective, and
are not subject to alternate interpretations. This is why Gabriel gives this number to us through
Daniel. If however, due to the implications for one's worldview; if one's preconceived biases
about this life and the world prevent clear, intellectually honest thinking, and you are one of
those that conclude this is convoluted to fit a preconceived agenda, or that this is numerology,
then you do not know what numerology is, and I strongly suggest you carefully read
this again. In fact, it is so simple and straightforward that a child can understand it. To think this
is convoluted is foolish, and is willful blindness. Our culture currently has an overwhelming
predisposition against the supernatural, and so I realize many people will not know what to think
yet regarding this information. However, it only gets more interesting...
Daniel 12
How are these derived? Again, it couldn't be more simple and straightforward...
Daniel chapter 12
First, Archangel Michael tells Daniel that concerning his vision about "the time of the end" in this
chapter, "none of the wicked shall understand, but those who are wise shall understand"
(12:10). "Many shall go to and fro" - a reference to our modern age of travel, "and knowledge
shall increase" - a reference to our information age, and our present ability to understand end
time prophecy. Michael says that the knowledge of the time of the end is "shut up,
and sealed until the time of the end" (verse 4, and emphasized again in verse 9). Therefore,
this knowledge is 'unsealed' in the time of the end. Which is why, if we are "wise" (and not
"wicked"), you and I are able to read and understand this - the significance of 1948, 1967, 1978.
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 1048
One reason it was sealed is because appreciating these dates was not possible prior to the 20th
century.
In the 1967 prophecy, Gabriel gives 334 BCE as the starting year, from which to add the 2300
years. The 1948, 1978, and 2023 prophecies also have a starting year, from which to add their
numbers of years. These three prophecies use the same starting year - 688 CE. As we see from
Daniel chapter 8, and the 1967 prophecy, the Jewish Temple sanctuary is key. Likewise, in the
1948, 1978, and 2023 prophecy passages we also find references to the Jewish Temple
sanctuary, along with additional descriptions of disturbing future end time events regarding the
Temple - after it is rebuilt. These references and end days descriptions, tell us that the starting
year with which to add the numbers of years is somehow related to the Temple - in a negative
way.
The Dome of The Rock, the third holiest site in Islam, began to be constructed in 688 CE. It
currently sits directly atop the ruins of the old Temple, on the Temple Mount grounds in
Jerusalem. And it is what currently prevents the Temple sanctuary from being rebuilt, and the
daily temple rituals from restarting. Which will then inaugurate the end days period. Therefore,
because the Dome of The Rock is preventing the end times period from starting, and is
preventing end times prophecy from being fulfilled, the year it began to be constructed is
extremely relevant. Prophecy scholars have wondered for a long time, from which year to start
adding the three numbers of years. It is now clear, and the proof is that the results couldn’t be
more profound.
Here are two verses with numbers of years given, along with disturbing references to the
Temple in the end times period. Daniel 12:6: “How long shall it be till the end of these wonders?"
Daniel 12:11: "The [end] time [when] the regular burnt offering is taken away, and the
abomination that makes desolate is set up, there shall be 1,290 days". Revelation 11:1-2: "Rise
and measure the temple of God and the altar,... but do not measure the outside temple, leave
that out, for it is given over to the nations, and they will trample the holy city for 1,260 days".
Another 1,260 days: In reply to the question of how long will it be until the end times period in
Daniel 12:6, “How long shall it be till the end of these wonders?", Archangel Michael tells Daniel
it will be 1,260 days. Daniel 12:7: ”He raised his right hand and his left hand toward heaven and
swore by him who lives forever that it would be for a time, times, and half a time... [until it]
comes to an end [and] all these things would be finished." In ancient Hebrew a time refers to 1
year; times = 2 years; half a time = 0.5 years. So 3.5 years. Until the 8th century BCE, all
ancient cultures used 360-day calendars (the reason the ellipse is divided into 360 degrees), so
3.5 years = 1,260 days. Another way we know that 3.5 years is 1,260 days is because in
parallel passages the same time period is referred to as being 42 months in Revelation 11:2,
and Revelation 13:5. 42 x 30 day months equals 1,260 days. In the books of Daniel and
Revelation there are a total of 7 passages that reference 1,260 days. Take note of this 1,260
number, as it is key later on in this writing as well.
There are many more prophecies like this that have been fulfilled, with accurate descriptions of
the final regathering in general. Yet there are also many detailed predictions, like for example
how centuries before the modern scientific breakthroughs that made it possible, the barren
desert that was the land in Israel would be turned into the modern agricultural miracle it is today
(Isaiah 35:1). Also, Micah 4:1: "In the last days the mountain of the Lord's temple will be
established as chief among the mountains; it will be raised above the hills, and peoples will
stream to it." Today, people are literally "streaming" to Jerusalem, the city "raised above the
hills". No other city is the religious focal point, to as many people, the way Jerusalem is today.
(On my website, clearlywritten.net, there is a link to a short video that illustrates another
truly astounding and exceedingly simple way the spring of 1948 (1948.4 to be precise) is
found. I highly recommend watching this short video! It is the first link in the Additional
Resources section.)
To be clear, the abomination that causes desolation event Michael describes to Daniel did not
occur in 1978 (nor in 688), but will occur in the last days/end times. Neither did the last days
events on the temple described in the other passages happen in 1967, or 1948. They are all last
days events. This is a 3,500 year perspective, and these three most significant years in Israel's
modern history, given to Daniel and John, 2,700 and 1,900 years ago, are simply proofs for us.
They prove the prophecy, and point us to the general time leading up to the last days events
concerning the Temple. These three most important years in Israel's modern history
demonstrate that the general time leading up to the last days events concerning the Temple, is
naturally, the regathering of Jewish people to Israel.
2023
2023 - The last year given to Daniel is 2023. Given in the very last verses of the whole book
of Daniel - an intense prophetic book concerning the End Times, that comes before a new age
for our world. Archangel Michael tells Daniel, "go your way till the end, And you shall rest, and
then rise to receive your allotted place at the end of days" (Daniel 12:13). That day at the "end
of days", is "The Day of The Lord" - the climax of the appointed time of the end (Zechariah
chapter 14). "Blessed is he who waits and arrives at the 1,335 days." (Daniel 12:12). There is
no question that Michael is referring to The Day of The Lord here, with this revealing of the
number 1,335 to Daniel in the very last verses of the book. Getting 2023 from the 1,335 is
also confirmed logically by the fact that the other two numbers in Daniel 12 reveal the first and
third most important years in Israel's history.
It's very interesting that not only do we derive 1948 from the 1,260 in Daniel, but also from
Revelation. Revelation is the last book in the New Testament, and like Daniel, it also concerns
the time of the end. It is indisputable evidence that the book of Revelation was also divinely
inspired. Let me just explain that the odds of this are incalculable, and therefore it is impossible
that this is a coincidence. There simply is no other rational conclusion for getting 1948 from
Revelation; simply, clearly, and logically. I will explain the meaning of all of this in a minute.
Why are these dates in the Bible? One third of the Bible is prophecy for the purpose of God
revealing and proving Himself. He also loves using numbers to communicate and demonstrate
There are also links to more information on all of the following astounding things on my website,
in the Additional Resources section. Also, if you find this information interesting, please be sure
to pass the link to this site on to others!...
1. Nostradamus
If you don't know who Nostradamus is you must be new to Western culture. Five hundred years
ago this man wrote some six thousand predictions for the future in the form of quatrains. In the
following quatrain he very clearly describes the current pope. Nostradamus' prophecies don't at
all compare with the writings of Daniel, because Nostradamus' predictions are derived from a
method of divination, and also he often used cryptic wording, therefore many of his quatrains
seem either cloudy or nonsense. Although, Nostradamus did make a number of incredibly
accurate predictions. Including this remarkable one:
1 - Nostradamus lived in the 16th century, and so Century 6 is the 21st century.
2 - Francis was elected Pope on March 13, 2013.
3 - The Monarchy of The Great Fisherman is the nickname of the Pope's rule.
4 - This is perhaps debatable, but one could argue he is young compared to his two
predecessors, but more importantly many Catholics regard him as youthful, refreshing, and as
revitalizing for the Catholic Church.
Besides Nostradamus' prediction being remarkable, and likely proof of the supernatural, what is
particularly interesting are the descriptive verbs he used for why this pope is of importance. He
says this pope "'thwarted' the monarchy of the Great Fisherman", and will "'seize' the
hierarchy". He says the monarchy of the great fisherman (the papacy and Catholic Church) will
be in "ruinous" trouble. When this prophecy is considered in conjunction with St. Malachy's well
known Prophecy of the Popes that predict this current pope is the last pope, it becomes even
much more interesting.
The prophecies conclude with a pope identified as the 112th and last pope. The last pope in the
prophecy is given more than a short epithet. This last pope is given a description of how
his pontificacy will allegedly coincide the destruction of the city of Rome. (The book of
Revelation also singles out Rome and describes its destruction in the end times.) According to
the Prophecies of the Popes, Pope Francis is the last pope. According to the Nostradamus
prophecy, we are told that the current Pope is not such a good guy, and "the Monarchy of The
Great Fisherman will be in ruinous trouble". Nostradamus' words, "ruinous trouble", are
interesting in light of Malachy's prophecy of Rome's destruction. In any case, it is interesting to
consider the reason why there might not be any more popes in the future, if The Day of The
Lord is soon.
3. The Shemitah
The number 7 is the biblical number of completion, perfection, or specifically divine authorship.
Over 500 times in the Bible the number 7 is used to show the divine touch of God or divinity
upon something. (For interest sake, there are 7 colors in a rainbow; 7 notes in a musical scale;
7 levels in the periodic table of elements; 7 continents; 7 objects in our solar system that are
visible to the naked eye; 7 stars in the big dipper that point to the north star, used for navigation
for centuries; it is proven that 7 digits is the average limit of memory for most human beings,
thus our 7 digit phone numbers; 7 metals of antiquity on which civilization was based; and on
and on...)
The sabbath year (shemita Hebrew: שמיטה, literally "release") also called the sabbatical year or
sheviit (Hebrew: שביעית, literally "seventh") is the seventh year of the seven-year agricultural
cycle mandated by the Torah for the Land of Israel. It is a year of rest or release. If
however, God's mandated rest and His commands were not observed, it turned into a year of
judgement, signifying fall or collapse. On the last day of this seven year cycle, all debts are
mandated to be wiped clean; effecting financial remission and nullification. This once every
seven years 'wipeout' day occurs on the last day of the Jewish calendar year, which is the 29th
day of the month of Elul. It is still observed in contemporary Orthodox Judaism.
September 17th, 2001, was the day that the stock market first re-opened after 9/11. This day
was also the exact last day of the 7 year shemitah cycle, Elul 29. The Dow had its biggest one
day loss in history in terms of points lost, and it equaled 7%.
September 29, 2008, was the following shemitah cycle's last day, or wipeout day. That morning,
for the first and only time in history, the opening bell at the New York Stock Exchange strangely
did not ring at all. (I have a CNBC video clip of this on my website, clearlywritten.net, under
Additional Resources.) That day the stock market again had its biggest one day loss in
history, in terms of points lost. On this day the Dow lost exactly 777.7 points, and
another 7%.
***insert video
To be clear, the odds of this occurring, on back to back shemitah wipeout days, are incalculable
and therefore cannot be a coincidence. To conclude that this is a coincidence would be
seriously irrational, and would be the result of deeply entrenched bias on the subject of God's
existence. If in fact, these biggest in history one day losses on wipeout days -- Elul 29 in the 7
year shemitah cycle -- imply the touch of God, then it also implies God has the ability to
influence billions of trading transactions, and also that the timing of 9/11 was planned by God. It
would also mean that these are warning signs, or harbingers, for us. As the shemitah not only
signifies release (of financial debts), but also of fall or collapse. I will elaborate more on this a
little later, and I guarantee you will find it extremely interesting.
If the fact that these crashes that coincide with shemitahs and their wipeout days, imply biblical
disfavor, then it's interesting that they got progressively worse over time, and parallel what some
would argue is the progressive decline of our culture post the 1960's Baby Boomer, counter
cultural revolution. Also, if the shemitah signifies collapse, was the collapsing of the World
Trade Center Twin Towers on 9/11 -- which occurred at the peak of the shemitah cycle in 2001 -
- in anyway a sign? I have more truly astounding things to show regarding 9/11 in a little bit.
What major, significant event took place on the last day of the shemitah cycle in 2015? It is one
key to understanding what is really going on in our world, and I will explain this in a minute as
well. First...
Leviticus 25:8 “'You shall count seven weeks of years, seven times seven years, so that the
time of the seven weeks of years shall give you forty-nine years."
Leviticus 25:10 "And you shall consecrate the fiftieth year, and proclaim liberty throughout the
land to all its inhabitants. It shall be a jubilee for you, when each of you shall return to his
property and each of you shall return to his clan."
The book of Ezekiel speaks of the jubilee year during which property is returned to the original
owner (or their heirs).
In the Jewish calendar, 1917 - 1918 was a jubilee year. It began on September 4, 1917 in the
Gregorian calendar. In November of 1917 World War I ended, and Great Britain received the
mandate from the League of Nations to oversee the Palestine territory, after the defeat of the
Ottoman Empire. Also in November of 1917, the Balfour Declaration was written by British
Foreign Secretary Arthur James Balfour. Which, for the first time in 19 centuries, established
"a national home for the Jewish people". As a result of the Balfour Declaration, there has
It is quite amazing that the historic Balfour Declaration occurred in a jubilee year! Given
that the biblical jubilee deals with land and property rights. As well as being the year for coming
home to one's original land (or their heirs), and their clan. Yet it becomes even more interesting
because the same pattern occurred the following jubilee year.
The jubilee year is also the first year of the following 49 year super shemitah cycle, so 48
additional years added to the 1917-1918 jubilee year, equals 1965-1966, which thus ended the
cycle. The following year, the fiftieth year, of 1966-1967 was the jubilee year. This was the
year of the 6-Day War, in which Israel regained possession of their ancient capital of East
Jerusalem - the Old City. Their ancient capital came into Jewish national possession for
the first time in 19 centuries. That this also occurred in a jubilee year is astonishing! The odds
that the ancient Jewish people survived as a people, when no other ancient people has
survived, and came back to Israel as promised, is one thing in itself. But for this to coincide with
a jubilee year, twice, makes the odds incalculable.
If this pattern were to continue it would mean that the Temple Mount would come under Jewish
control in the following jubilee year. As the pattern is demonstrating a three step process, to the
fulfillment of prophecy regarding the Jewish people's regathering to the land and Israel's
restoration. First, to the land in Israel (jubilee of 1917-1918). Second, to their ancient capital city
of Jerusalem (jubilee of 1966-1967). Third, to their Temple Mount grounds and the
reconsecration of their Temple (the jubilee of jubilee years 2016-2017?). The jubilee year after
1966-1967 is September 13, 2015 to October 3, 2016. However, the year of 2014-2015 was not
only the last year of a 49 year jubilee cycle, it was the exact last year of 70 jubilee cycles since
Joshua and Caleb entered the Promised Land for the first time. (This is supported by solid
archaeological evidence, and an article that documents this can be found on my website in the
additional resources section.) Thus, because 70 jubilees are completed for Israel, it is a jubilee
of jubilees, and it requires an extra jubilee year, October 4, 2016 - September 22, 2017. The
time of this writing is May, 2016. Currently, the Temple Mount complex grounds are controlled
by the Jerusalem Islamic Wafq, with custodianship to Jordan. Non-Muslims are only allowed
onto the grounds for one hour, twice a day; and Jews, including Israeli citizens, are not allowed
onto the grounds at all. All holy sites of other religions in Israel are open to everyone, all day
long.
"...in those days... I will show wonders in the heavens above and signs on the earth below....
The sun will be turned to darkness, and the moon to blood, before the coming of the great and
glorious day of the Lord." Joel 2:30 and Acts 2:19
A total lunar eclipse, almost always produces an effect which makes the moon appear red. The
red color is caused by Rayleigh scattering of sunlight through the Earth's atmosphere - the
same effect that causes sunsets to appear red. In astronomy, a tetrad is a set of four total lunar
eclipses within two years, with no intervening partial lunar eclipses. The lunar eclipses in a
A series of blood moons began on April 15, 2014, and ended on September 28, 2015. The ones
in the spring occurred on the Jewish Passovers, and the ones in the fall occurred on the Feasts
of Tabernacle. This was the ninth time in 2000 years that a tetrad coincided with Jewish Feast
holy days, and the next one will be more than 500 years from now. It is the first time in 2000
years that two of the blood moons occurred in a shemitah year. The last of these recent blood
moons was on September 28, 2015, and it was also a rarer "supermoon", when the moon is at
its closest to the Earth. This last of these blood moons was visible in Israel.
What is extremely interesting is that each of the previous 8 blood moons tetrads in history,
coincided with significant events that are related to the theme of this writing. Without going into
the history of each one though, the last two blood moons tetrads couldn't be more interesting.
There hadn't been a blood moons tetrad in almost 500 years by the time a blood moons
tetrad coincided with the Arab-Israeli War and the birth of Israel in 1948. Incredibly, the
following blood moons tetrad coincided with the 6-Day War and the ancient capital of
East Jerusalem coming into the possession of the Jewish nation in 1967.
Similar to the three-step pattern of prophecy fulfillment with the jubilee cycle, this blood moons
pattern indicates that this recent blood moons tetrad of 2014-2015 will coincide with the Jewish
Temple coming into possession of the Jewish nation. Similar to the jubilee pattern of land,
capital city, Temple Mount -- first the national birth in 1948, second the capital Jerusalem in
1967, third the Temple Mount in 2017? (The blood moons of 2014-2015 unmistakably point to a
particular date in 2017. I will explain this in a bit in this writing, and I promise you will be
amazed!). The 1948 blood moons, coincided with a war that Israel was forced into, and as result
the nation was born. The 1967 blood moons, also coincided with a war that Israel was forced
into, and as a result the ancient capital in Jerusalem came into their possession. Could Israel be
forced into a war that results in Israel controlling the Temple Mount this year?
I mentioned earlier that there was a significant event that occurred on the last day (wipeout day)
of the 7 year shemitah cycle in 2015. On this day, September 13, 2015 (Elul 29), Israeli Security
forces clashed with masked Arab youths on the Temple Mount. Intelligence information
gathered discovered a plan for an organized riot on the Temple Mount, with protesters
stockpiling rocks and firecrackers as well as a barricade at an entrance to the al-Aqsa mosque.
Pipe bombs were also confirmed to be discovered. The intention of the demonstrators was to
upset the movements of Jewish visitors in the compound ahead of the Rosh Hashanah holiday,
which is the Jewish New Year and the day after Elul 29. Arab youths were trying to create an
international uproar over the Temple Mount, which they succeeded in doing. Arab countries
decried the Israeli Security Forces incursion on the Temple Mount, and it was the beginning of
the current wave of terrorism in Israel. As a result, the Israeli Public Security Minister has begun
to question the current "status quo arrangement" regarding the Temple Mount. It's interesting to
consider whether these events will escalate into something bigger. Especially given that this
occurred on the day of the shemitah, and on the eve of the jubilee year, and in light of the three-
step jubilee and blood moons patterns, as well as 2017 being found in the Bible - which I will
show in a moment. (I highly recommend reading how 2017 is found in the Bible!!! -- #7 in this
writing -- It is the most interesting thing you will ever read.)
The official beginning of the Nazi "Final Solution" for the Jewish population was the
Ghettoization Policy in Poland. On August 2, 1941, Hinrich Lohse, the Reichskommisar
Ostland, formally introduced a draft of “temporary guidelines for treatment of the Jews.” Jews
were to be cleared from the countryside and concentrated in those sections of cities where the
predominate portion of the Jewish population already resided. “There ghettos were to be
created” and those Jews capable of work were to be put to forced labor as needed. This was
the first order in what became the "Final Solution" and the Holocaust.
August 2, 1941 was the 9th day of the month of Av in the Jewish calendar. It was the
beginning of one of the biggest calamities in Jewish history. In the following years the Jews
of Europe were rounded up, their possessions and identities taken away, and 2 out of 3 Jews In
Europe were killed.
A year later on July 22, 1942 began the secretive Nazi operation called Grossaktion or Gross-
Aktion Warsaw. During the Grossaktion Jews were terrorized in daily round-ups, marched
through the ghetto, and assembled at the Umschlagplatz station square for the so-called
"resettlement to the East" (Umsiedlung). From there, they were sent aboard overcrowded
Holocaust trains to the extermination camp in Treblinka. July 22, 1942 was the beginning of
the death camps and the Holocaust, and it was the 9th of Av in the Jewish calendar.
WWI
Germany entered WWI on August 1, 1914, when it declared war on Russia. Without getting into
great historic detail, WWI caused massive upheaval for European and Russian Jewry, and it
resulted in rising Anti-Semitism, and severe pogroms following the war. August 1 was the 9th
of Av in the Jewish calendar. WWI also led to WWII, and the Holocaust.
Spain
A golden age of Jewish culture in Spain coincided with the Middle Ages in Europe. Jews were
generally accepted in society and Jewish religious, cultural, and economic life blossomed. Jews
contributed to, and affected Spanish culture. Anti-Semitism had emerged by the time the
Kingdoms of Aragon and Castile came together with the marriage of Ferdinand and Isabella in
1469. The uniting of these kingdoms was seen as the unification of Spain, and under them the
peak phase of the Reconquista took place. Ferdinand and Isabella also helped to introduce the
Spanish Inquisition. The inquisition was largely against Jews who were pressured to convert to
Catholicism, but who were afterwards accused of still secretly practicing Judaism. They were
arrested, interrogated, tortured, and sometimes killed. Finally in 1492 Ferdinand and Isabella
The date was set for July 31st, but it was extended a few days to August 2. On this day
multitudes of Jews filled the harbors of Spain and emigrated elsewhere in the Mediterranean. As
a result, many died in numerous ways, at sea and in different lands. The age of Spain as a great
homeland for the Jewish people was over. The expulsion is recorded as one the greatest
calamities of Jewish history in the last 2000 years, and Spanish Jewry never recovered. The
date of August 2, 1492, was also the 9th of Av in the Jewish calendar.
It's interesting to note that Christopher Columbus set sail for his discovery of the New World the
following day. The irony is that out of this tragedy, the next day was the beginning of the
greatest safe haven for Jews - the Americas. His very first entry in his diary recorded passing
ships with Jews fleeing Spain.
Here are some more interesting facts about Columbus: Scholars are now convinced that
Columbus was a Marranos - a Jew that feigned conversion, practicing Catholicism outwardly
while covertly practicing Judaism. I have a CNN article about this on my website,
clearlywritten.net, in the Additional Resources section. Also, it is a misconception that Ferdinand
and Isabella financed his voyage. The loan for his voyage was advanced by Luis de Santangel,
chancellor of the Royal household, and Gabriel Sanchez, high treasurer of Aragon. Both were
born into Jewish Converso families. (Conversos were Jews that had converted.) Support also
came from Alfonso de la Caballeria vice-chancellor of Aragon and also of converso descent.
Scholars now know that Columbus was deeply religious, and like many Jews is his day, he was
passionate about liberating Jerusalem from the Muslims. The motivation for his expedition was
to find gold for the cause of liberating Jerusalem, and to find a safe haven for Jews. It's also
interesting that he was supposed to set sail on August 2, but postponed it a day out of
superstition, because it was the 9th of Av (by 1492 many other historical Jewish calamities had
already occurred on the 9th of Av).
Something else of interest coincided with this great calamity for Jews in 1492. The expulsion,
and the following calamity they faced in the lands they fled to, coincidentally coincided with one
of the rare blood moon tetrads in the last 2000 years. This particular blood moons tetrad is the
one I mentioned that came 500 years before the blood moons tetrad that coincided with the
1948 Arab-Israeli War. Like the blood moons pattern of 1948 and 1967, Columbus’s discovery
of what would ultimately become safe haven land for Jews, came about through tragedy after
the blood moons of 1492.
There are many examples of momentous calamities for Jews, mysteriously occurring on the 9th
of Av. I am only referencing a few of the major ones.
France
The same pattern that occurred in Spain occurred in France in 1306. There was a turning
against the Jews, and against those that had converted to Catholicism, but were suspected of
keeping Jewish customs. By the middle of 1306 the royal treasury of France was nearly
bankrupt. King Phillip the 'Fair", decided to banish the Jews and in the process take all of their
possessions and sell them at an auction and take the money for himself. The Jews were again
uprooted, and wrested from their possessions and property, in what is called The Great Exile of
England
The same pattern occurred in England. King Edward issued the Edict of Expulsion on July
18, 1290. Which was the 9th of Av. It was the first nationwide expulsion of Jews.
The Crusades
The First Crusade was called for by Pope Urban, in response to the request of the Byzantine
emperor. The goal was to drive back the Turks, and in the process take the Holy Land. The
knights and peasants of Western Europe marched to Jerusalem and massacred Muslims, Jews,
and other Christians. But it wasn't just in Jerusalem. The Jews were also massacred in Europe
by the crusading armies. In the first month alone 10,000 Jews were killed and Jewish
communities were destroyed. The First Crusade set a dangerous precedent -- the rise of
organized, popular, anti-Jewish uprisings. The official start date of the First Crusade was set
as August 15, 1096. Which was also the 9th of Av.
The Bar Kokhba revolt was a rebellion of the Jews of the Roman province of Judea against the
Roman Empire. Led by Simon bar Kokhba, who the Jews took for the Messiah. On July 4, 135
CE the rebellion was eventually crushed with the destruction of the city of Betar, which was Bar
Kokhba's last fortress. Some scholars describe the event as genocide, and it is estimated that
100,00 to 500,000 Jews were killed. Many more died of hunger and disease, while those who
survived were sold into slavery. July 4, 135 CE was the 9th of Av.
The Bar Kokhba revolt enraged Roman emperor Hadrian, and he became determined to erase
Judaism from the province. Circumcision was forbidden, Judah province was renamed Syria
Palaestina (which is where we get Palestine and Palestinian from), and Jews were expelled
from the city. Until the 7th century Jews were prohibited from entering the city on penalty of
death, except for one day each year, during the holiday of Tisha B'Av - the 9th of Av. Jerusalem
was renamed Aelia Capitolina, named after the god Jupiter Capitolinus. Hadrian leveled the the
Temple Mount area and covered the remains of the old Jewish Temple. On top he constructed a
temple to Jupiter, which was later incorporated into the Dome of The Rock and Al Aqsa
Mosque.
What is the origin of the mystery of the 9th of Av? Where does it all begin?
The destruction of the First and Second Temples, and the aftermaths for the Jewish people,
rank with the Holocaust in terms of degree of calamity for the Jewish people.
There is a clear pattern here. The 9th of Av is a day of calamity for the Jewish people. But a
particular kind of calamity. The Jewish people are expelled from foreign lands throughout the
centuries, yet the tragedy and suffering all begins when they are expelled from their own land in
70 AD. It's as if, for 2000 years of history the Jewish people are reliving, and are being reminded
of the exile from their own land.
The following passages become very interesting, in light of the mystery of the Ninth of Av.
Leviticus 26
14 "If you don't obey me, and do not carry out all these commandments, if instead you reject my
statutes, if your soul abhors my ordinances, so that you will not carry out all my commandments,
and you break my covenant... 17 I will set my face against you so you'll be struck down before
your enemies. Those who hate you will rule over you and you will flee when no one is
pursuing... 25 I will bring upon you a sword which will execute vengeance for the covenant and
when you gather together in your cities I will send pestilence among you. You will be delivered
into your enemies’ hands .. 31 I will lay waste to your cities, I will make your sanctuaries
desolate. And I myself will devastate the land, so that your enemies who settle in it shall be
appalled at it. You however I will scatter among the nations, and I will set a sword after you, as
your land becomes desolate [it has been proven with cave stalactites that precipitation levels in
Israel dropped dramatically in the latter half of the first century CE, and began rising significantly
in the 20th century], and your cities become waste,.. 36 And as for those of you who are left, I
will bring weakness into their hearts in the lands of their enemies, and the sound of a driven leaf
will chase them... you will have no strength to stand before your enemies."
This was written long before the destruction of Solomon's Temple. It all came true. It would
mean that Israel turned from God. But the biggest fulfillment of these passages of exile was not
in 586 BCE, because although Israel was exiled for 70 years in Babylon, that was nothing
compared to what happened in 70 CE. In 70 CE the Jewish people were not taken to Babylon
for 70 years, they were taken to the ends of earth for 2000 years. Whatever error or turning from
God that the Jewish people committed leading up to 70 CE had to have been bigger than in 586
BCE. Yet in 586 BCE they were worshiping false pagan gods and idols, and lifting up their
children on altars to kill them. So what error could have possibly been committed by the Jews in
the years leading up to 70 CE, that would warrant this punishment?! Did the Jews reject God
in a manner that was somehow greater, or more personal, than their rebellion in 586 BCE?. And
did anyone significant in the years leading up to 70 CE predict that the destruction of the
Temple and Jerusalem would come soon?
Daniel chapter 9
"Seventy weeks are decreed about your people and your holy city". (Daniel 9:24)
In chapter 9, Daniel receives knowledge from Archangel Gabriel concerning 70 Weeks. Here is
verse 9:25: "Know therefore and understand, that from the going forth of the command to
restore and build Jerusalem until an anointed one, a prince, there shall be 7 weeks and 62
weeks; the streets shall be built again, and the wall, even in troublesome times."
In 597 BCE Jerusalem was destroyed and all the Jews in Judah, except a small number of poor
people on the land, were deported to Babylon for seventy years. In this passage Gabriel tells
Daniel that from the time of a command to rebuild Jerusalem, there will be 7 weeks and
62 weeks (69 weeks total) until an "anointed one, a prince". "From the going forth of the
command to restore and build Jerusalem... the streets shall be built again, and the wall", reveals
the starting point of the 70 weeks prophecy. The Bible presents four possible commands, or
decrees, that might fulfill this description. Three of the four speak of rebuilding the temple,
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 1062
instead of specifically "Jerusalem" the city and "the wall". Nehemiah 2:1-8, is the only one of the
four Bible passages that speaks of rebuilding the city and wall: King Artaxerxes made a written
decree giving Nehemiah permission, safe passage and supplies to return to Jerusalem and
rebuild the city and the walls in 445 BCE.
As with the previous prophecies, the day-for-a-year prophecy rule makes 70 weeks = 70 sets of
7 years. 490 years.
Besides the day-for-a-year prophecy rule, we can also know that 70 sets of 7 years is correct
because the ancient Hebrew word for weeks simply refers to a unit of 7. Genesis 29:15-28 is an
example of using the ancient Hebrew word (shabuwa') for both seven days and seven years in
the same context. Additionally, Leviticus 25:8 is an example of God issuing commands for
sabbatical years, which He treated as sets of seven years or 'weeks'. "And you shall count
seven sabbaths of years for yourself, seven times seven years; and the time of the seven
sabbaths of years shall be to you forty-nine years." We can also know that 70 weeks was not
literal because is was simply not enough time to build the temple. Lastly, another clue is in
Daniel 10:2 when he referred to a period of three weeks, and to distinguish this from
the weeks referred to in the prior chapter he specifically called it "weeks of days".
Again, Daniel 9:25: "Know therefore and understand, from the going forth of the command to
restore and build Jerusalem until the coming of an anointed one, a prince, there shall be 7
weeks and 62 weeks".
62 more weeks of years after the first 7 weeks of years (69 weeks of years total), "until the
coming of the anointed one, a prince."
(In Hebrew vocabulary, prince has more the idea of a "strong, mighty ruler", than "son of a king
and heir to the throne")
69 weeks of years (69 x 7) = 483 years. So, 483 years from the command until the coming of
the annointed one. This is simple and straightforward.
A prophetic year
Up until the 8th century BC all ancient civilizations all over the world used 360-day calendars. It
would have made sense for them to do so. Sir Isaac Newton stated "All nations, before the just
length of the solar year was known, would have reckoned months by the course of the moon,
and years by the return of winter and summer, spring and autumn, and in making calendars for
their festivals, they reckoned thirty days for a lunar month, and twelve lunar months to a year,
taking the nearest round numbers, whence came the division of the ecliptic into 360 degrees."
The 360 day calendar would have been used in Babylon at the timing of Daniel's writing.
We have examples of 30-day month calendars in the Bible. The Genesis account of the flood in
the days of Noah illustrated this 360-day year by recording the 150-day interval till the waters
abated from the Earth. The 150 days began on the seventeenth day of the second month, and
ended on the seventeenth day of the seventh month. (Genesis 7:11-24, 8:3-4). The book of
The biblical writers used the 360-day year in the historical and predictive parts of Scripture.
Daniel recorded that the time of the absolute power of the anti-messiah over the holy people will
last three-and-one-half years (7:25). John in the book of Revelation described the same three-
and-one-half year period (Revelation 13:5-7) as consisting of forty-two months of thirty days
each, totaling 1,260 days (Revelation 11:2-3; 12:6).
Therefore (69 x 7 weeks of years = 483 years) 483 years x 360 days = 173,880 days
Artaxerxes Longimanus ascended to the throne of the Medo-Persian empire in July 465 BCE
(Encyclopedia Britannica, 1990 ed.). The twentieth year of his reign began in July 446 BCE.
Nehemiah 2:1 tells us that the decree occurred in the twentieth year, approximately nine months
later in the month of Nisan (March/April 445 BCE on our calendar). By Hebrew tradition when
the day of the month is not specifically stated (as in Artaxerxes' decree), it is given to be the first
day of that month. Consequently, the very day of Artaxerxes' decree was the first day of the
Hebrew month of Nisan in 445 B.C. The first day of Nisan in 445 BCE corresponds to the 14th
day of March in our calendar. These dates were confirmed through astronomical calculations at
the British Royal Observatory and reported by Sir Robert Anderson (Robert Anderson, "The
Coming Prince", Kregel. Reprinted in 1984.).
Jesus started His ministry in the 15th year of Tiberius (Luke 3:1). Tiberius started his reign in 14
AD, so Jesus' ministry started in 29 AD. Jesus celebrated four Passovers during His ministry
(John 2:13; 5:1; 6:4; 19:14). One each in 29 AD, 30 AD, 31 AD, and His final one in 32 AD.
With the help of lunar charts, we can calculate the exact date of ancient Passovers, so we can
calculate the exact day of Jesus' 'Triumphal Entry' on Palm Sunday into Jerusalem as April 6,
32 AD.
.
From 445 BC to 32 AD there are 476 years on the Gregorian calendar (not 477 years, because
there is no year zero).
The total number of days from March 14th, 445 BC to April 6th, 32 AD
173,740 days + 24 + 116 = 173,880
According to his calendar, Daniel told us there would be 173,880 days between the decree and
the arrival of Messiah the Prince!!! (69 x 7 years = 483 years. 483 x 360 days = 173,880 days).
Again, the odds of this being a coincidence are incalculable, and therefore impossible. Gabriel
gave Daniel the exact day of the crucifixion of Jesus ("an anointed one, a prince" -- the
Messiah). (The term "anointed one" is a common messianic reference in the Old Testament.)
Jesus said to the Jews of this day: If you had known, even you, especially IN THIS DAY, the
things that make for your peace! (Luke 19:42).
As already explained, the Jewish year of 2014-2015 was a shemitah year - the last year of
God's 7 year cycle. It was also the last year of a jubilee cycle of 49 years (7 x 7 years). It was
also the last year of 70 jubilee cycles - jubilee of jubilees (70 x 49 years). After completing
the shemitah, jubilee, and jubilee of jubilees, the following year of 2015-2016 was the first year
of a new shemitah cycle of 7 years. For this reason, and many other reasons too numerous to
mention in this paragraph, it is clear that Daniel's 70th week will begin sometime in this new
shemitah cycle of 7 years. One obvious reason is that the last of the four years revealed in
Daniel, revealed in the very last verses of the book of Daniel, is 2023.
Before we continue, it was verse 25 in Daniel chapter 9 that just explained the 69 weeks that
started from the "command" "until the coming of the anointed one, a prince". Now let's quickly
look at verse 9:24 - the prior verse. "Seventy weeks are decreed about your people and your
holy city, to finish the transgression, to put an end to sin, and to atone for iniquity, and to bring in
everlasting righteousness, to seal up both vision and prophet, and to anoint a most holy
place. 25 Know therefore and understand, from the going forth of the command to restore and
build Jerusalem until the coming of an anointed one, a prince, there shall be 7 weeks and 62
weeks". (Dan 9:24).
The "sealing up of both vision and prophet" in this 70 weeks prophecy implies a full revelation of
God where visions and prophets are no longer needed afterward. In other words, it refers to the
Day of The Lord. To "finish the transgression" and "bring in everlasting righteousness", literally
means to establish a new order on Earth. To "put an end to sin, and to atone for iniquity"
forever, literally means to have a redeemed world. To atone means to make amends, or
reparation. Everlasting atonement for sin that "puts an end" to the separation that sin causes,
can only be accomplished one way: Through an act of God, on our behalf. "To anoint the most
holy place", taken simply, and literally, refers to a place - the most holy temple sanctuary, where
He will dwell on the Day of The Lord, and into the new age... Ezekiel 48:35: "And the name of
the city [Jerusalem] from that time on shall be, "THE LORD IS THERE" (the very last verse of
the important, prophetic book of Ezekiel). In short, Gabriel is telling Daniel that these
amazing things will happen within the course of the 70 weeks.
So, not only does the 173,880 days given to Daniel predict exactly the day of Jesus' Triumphal
Entry on Pam Sunday before His crucifixion, this prediction is in context of a description of an
anointed ruler that without doubt sounds like Christianity (given 700 years prior to Christianity).
I have highlighted some verses from this chapter of Isaiah that was written seven centuries
before Christ. Without first knowing that this was written by Isaiah, and that it comes from the
Old Testament, the average person reading this would very confidently assume this chapter is
talking about Jesus. Surveys have been conducted that show all those that read this, without
knowing first that it is was written by Isaiah in the 8th century BC, confidently say it
could only be speaking about Jesus. It certainly disproves the secular notion that Christianity
was invented during and after Jesus' day.
Verse 1: "Who has believed what we have heard? And to whom has the arm of the
Lord been revealed?"
Verse 2 "For he grew up before him like a tender shoot, and like a root out of dry ground;
[A tender shoot, and Jesse's root out of dry ground, are also clear,
unmistakable references to the messiah, that recur throughout Old Testament prophecy.
Including Isaiah 11:1] he had no form or majesty that we should look at him, and no
beauty that we should desire him."
Verse 3 "He was despised and rejected by men; a man of sorrows, and acquainted
with grief; ... he was despised and we esteemed him not."
Verse 4 "Surely he has borne our griefs and carried our sorrows; yet we esteemed him
stricken, smitten by God, and afflicted." (This is Christianity.)
Verse 5 "But he was pierced for our transgressions; he was crushed for
our iniquities; upon him was the chastisement that brought us peace, and with
his wounds we are healed." (There is only one man in history that fits this
description! This can only be speaking of Jesus!!)
Verse 6 "All we like sheep have gone astray; we have turned--every one--to his own
way; and the Lord has laid on him the iniquity of us all." (This is pure
Christianity.)
Verse 7 "He was oppressed and he was afflicted, yet he opened not his mouth [It was
recorded that Jesus was silent during his persecution.]; like a lamb that is led to the
slaughter, and like a sheep that before its shearers is silent, so he opened not his mouth."
(Seven centuries later, Jesus is described as the Lamb of God.)
Verse 8 "By oppression and judgement he was taken away. …[In] his generation, who
considered that he was cut off out of the land of the living, stricken for the
transgression of my people?"
Verse 10 "Yet it was the will of the Lord to crush him; he has put him to grief;
when his soul makes an offering for guilt, he shall see his offspring; he shall
prolong his days;" (His offspring is a reference to his followers/church, and his days
being prolonged is a reference to the resurrection.)
Verse 11 "Out of the anguish of his soul he shall see and be satisfied; by his knowledge
shall the righteous one, my servant, make many to be accounted righteous, and he
shall bear their iniquities." (God being satisfied out of anguish, through His
righteous servant, for the iniquities of many, IS Christianity.)
Here are passages from Isaiah 52: (Scholars believe Isaiah 52 and 53 are actually one chapter.)
There is only one man in history that could fit this description!
Most people are unaware that the Old Testament is littered with prophecies that could only have
been fulfilled by Jesus. A college professor of mathematics and science named Dr. Peter Stoner
wanted to determine what the odds were that any one human being throughout history could
fulfill 48 of the Messianic prophecies. So he had his students come up with very conservative
estimates, and then they ran the numbers. It was calculated at 1 in 1 trillion, trillion, trillion,
trillion, trillion, trillion, trillion, trillion, trillion, trillion, trillion, trillion, trillion.
Here are two more brief examples of these Old Testament prophecies.
"In the future [God] will honor Galilee of the nations, by way of the Sea, beyond the Jordan--
Psalm 22: 14-19 (1000 BC): "I am poured out like water, and all my bones are out of joint:
my heart is like wax; it is melted in the midst of my bowels. My strength is dried up like a
potsherd; and my tongue cleaveth to my jaws; and thou hast brought me into the dust of
death. For dogs have compassed me: the assembly of the wicked have inclosed
me: they pierced my hands and my feet. I may tell all my bones: they look and
stare upon me. They part my garments among them, and cast lots upon my vesture."
(It was recorded that the soldiers that crucified him divided up his clothes and cast lots to
see what each would get.)
Another astounding Old Testament prophecy is Micah (8th century BC) chapter 5: 'The Ruler
to Be Born in Bethlehem'
Verse 2: "But you, O Bethlehem Ephrathah, who are too little to be among the clans of
Judah, from you shall come forth for me one who is to be ruler in Israel, whose coming
forth is from of old, from ancient days." (From ancient days is a common Old
Testament reference to God, and being uncreated.)
Verse 3: ..."when she who is in labor bears a son"
The rest of Micah chapter 5 speaks of the regathering of the people of Israel, and the ruler
being referred to as the shepherd securing his flock on the Day of The Lord and into the
Messianic Age.
Verse 3: "Therefore Israel will be abandoned until the time... [that] the rest of his brothers
shall return to the people of Israel."
Verse 4: "And he shall stand and shepherd his flock in the strength of the Lord, in the
majesty of the name of the Lord his God. And they shall dwell securely, for then his
greatness will reach to the ends of the earth."
Verse 5: "And he shall be their peace."
Isaiah 48:16 (7th century BC). This verse clearly speaks of the Trinity, 7 centuries before
Jesus. The voice speaking belongs to a being that is uncreated, yet the voice says that the Lord
God sent him, and his Spirit.:
Psalm 110:1 (1000 B.C.) "A Psalm of David. The LORD says to my Lord: 'Sit at My right
hand Until I make Your enemies a footstool for Your feet.'"
The following amazing passage in Zechariah illustrates how on the Day of The Lord, when
Jesus is finally revealed to the Jews in Jerusalem, Israel will be in great mourning for
their blindness and rejection of Him.
Zechariah 12:9-13 (518 B.C.) "And in that day [The Day of The Lord] I will set about to
destroy all the nations that come against Jerusalem. I will pour out on the house of
David and on the inhabitants of Jerusalem, the Spirit of grace and of supplication,
so that they will look on
Me whom they have pierced ; and they will mourn for Him, as one mourns for an
only son, and they will weep bitterly over Him like the bitter weeping over a
firstborn. On that day the weeping in Jerusalem will be as great as the weeping of Hadad
Rimmon in the plain of Megiddo. The land will mourn, each clan by itself, with their wives
by themselves: the clan of the house of David and their wives, the clan of the house of
Nathan and their wives, the clan of the house of Levi and their wives, the clan of Shimei
and their wives, and all the rest of the clans and their wives".
The New Covenant, spoken of in Jeremiah 31:31-34 (526 BC - 586 BC), describes the
covenant Jesus brought.
“Behold, the days are coming, declares the Lord, when I will make a new covenant with the
house of Israel and the house of Judah, that is notlike the covenant that I made with their
fathers on the day when I took them by the hand to bring them out of the land of Egypt, my
covenant that they broke… For this is the covenant that I will make with the house of Israel after
those days, declares the Lord: I will put my law within them, and I will write it on their hearts."
Speaking of clear, amazing evidence for Jesus, here are a couple more brief, but fascinating,
extra-biblical examples. Most people have not taken the time to carefully evaluate the evidence
available, but instead have rested on our culture's overwhelming predisposition against the
supernatural. Many others that claim to hold "spiritual" beliefs have come to believe in a God
that is impersonal, panthiestic, or "transcendental". Yet the scientific evidence for
a personal creator being is voluminous. I will now briefly show some of the extra-biblical
scientific evidences for Jesus, and then briefly some of the incredible, scientific evidences for a
personal creator of the universe. Also, my website has some truly astounding information and
documentary videos on this, including more follow up sources to the evidences I will now briefly
show. In short though, given the evidence now available, it takes much more faith to believe
there is not a Creator and designer of the universe, that is a personal being, than it does to
believe there is.
In the late 19th century, shortly after the invention of photography, it was discovered that the
image on the cloth was a negative image. Prior to photography no one knew what a negative
image was. So if it was a medieval forgery, the question is why did the forger produce a
negative image?
Scientists were first allowed to examine the cloth in 1969. Initial examinations led to the
formation of an 11-member Turin Commission composed of scientists and advisers, and in 1977
the Shroud of Turin Research Project (STURP) was born.
Their findings, based on a gamut of rigorous tests, were reported in 1981, stating:
"We can conclude for now that the Shroud image is that of a real human form [a corpse] of a
scourged, crucified man. It is not the product of an artist. The blood stains are composed of
hemoglobin and also give a positive test for serum albumin. The image is an ongoing mystery
and until further chemical studies are made, perhaps by this group of scientists, or perhaps by
some scientists in the future, the problem remains unsolved."
Most interesting is how scientists are still completely baffled as to how the image was made
(This is a fact). Scientists that have closely examined it and studied it, have determined that
there is no possible way any type of ink or ointment was applied to the cloth to produce the
image. Scientists have concluded that the most logical explanation for the image on the cloth is
that it was produced by intense light radiation, but they are unsure how this light radiation would
have occurred. They also know that the light source would have had to have been high
frequency short wavelength, but it could not have come from within the electromagnetic
spectrum as we know it.
Scientists also discovered pollen in the cloth from plants that only live in Israel, and have also
concluded that the cloth was made in India - far from medieval Europe.
The radiocarbon dating that took place in 1988 has since been discounted. It was later learned
that the shroud was patched up after a fire in 1532, and that the sample for radiocarbon dating
was taken from a fringe portion of the shroud where this patchwork was. This explains why the
scientists' results had a wide range for the dating of 1260 - 1390 AD. Normally, the dating result
should have produced a range of only a few years. The original sample taken from the fringe of
the shroud was cut into three pieces, and sent to three separate universities. Each university
had a different date, and thus the wide range. What's interesting is that the university that had
the piece closest to edge of the shroud, and therefore had the highest number of newly added
patchwork fibers, had the most recent date - 1390. Whereas the university that received the
piece closest to the center of the shroud, and therefore least number of added patchwork fibers,
had the earliest date of 1260. (Scientists have wanted to examine and carbon date the cloth
again, but the Catholic Church will not allow them to.)
Multiple scientific studies show the cloth is consistent with someone that was crucified. Blood
stains confirm the man wore a crown of thorns.
Pollen samples confirm the historical account of the cloth's passage from Jerusalem, through
North Africa, into northern Spain.
The really fascinating evidence comes to light when the cloth is compared to the Shroud of
Turin. The blood type AB matches. The stain marks match up perfectly, including the thorn
marks on the nape of the neck. The frontal side of the sudarium shows 70 points of coincidence
with the shroud, and 50 points on the rear side.
The only possible conclusion is that the Oviedo Sudarium covered the same face as the Turin
Shroud. The history of the Oviedo cloth is well documented, and much more
straightforward than that of the Shroud. It was recorded as leaving Palestine before 614,
in order to avoid destruction when Jerusalem was conquered by King Chosroes II of
Persia. The rest of its journey is also well documented. Therefore the conclusions of this
for the dating of the Shroud need no further comment.
If you search for all the facts on the Shroud of Turin, you'll have to look beyond the religion of
atheism biased sites. There are a lot of sites though, and on my website I provide truthful links.
Yes! Contrary to popular belief, the evidence for the historical accuracy and reliability of the
gospels is overwhelming. For example, the mainstream secular idea that the "historical Jesus"
claimed to be someone different than what the gospels recorded, is false. Even the gospel's
most well known scholar critics confirm this. This is explained on my website, along with a
wealth of other reasons for why they are reliable. It is amazing, and I strongly encourage you to
check it out.
Yet, regarding the commonly held notion of a supposed "historical Jesus", and that for example
the resurrection was a legend that emerged long after his death, here is some evidence that
shows otherwise:
One of the greatest ancient historians that ever lived, A. N. Sherwin-White of Oxford, studied the
rate at which legend developed in the ancient world. He said that two generations is not enough
Josephus Flavius (born in Jerusalem 37 A.D.), the first century Jewish general, and excellent
historian wrote the following about Jesus in his Antiquities (18:63), while writing for the Romans:
About this time there lived Jesus, a wise man if indeed one ought to call him a man. For he was
one who wrought surprising feats and was a teacher of such people as accept the truth gladly.
He won over many Jews and many of the Greeks. He was the Messiah. When Pilate, upon
hearing him accused by men of the highest standing among us, had condemned him to be
crucified, those who had in the first place come to love him did not cease. On the third day he
appeared to them restored to life. For the prophets of God had prophesied these and myriads of
other marvelous things about him. And the tribe of the Christians, so called after him, has still up
to now, not disappeared.
This above passage is known as the Testimonium Flavianum. The "Testimonium" is found in
every copy of Josephus in existence.
In Book 20 there is what could be called a passing reference to Jesus in a paragraph describing
the murder of Jesus' brother, James, at the hands of Ananus, the High Priest.
But the younger Ananus who, as we said, received the high priesthood, was of a bold
disposition and exceptionally daring; he followed the party of the Sadducees, who are severe in
judgment above all the Jews, as we have already shown. As therefore Ananus was of such a
disposition, he thought he had now a good opportunity, as Festus was now dead, and Albinus
was still on the road; so he assembled a council of judges, and brought before it the brother of
Jesus the so-called Christ, whose name was James, together with some others, and having
accused them as lawbreakers, he delivered them over to be stoned.
In the remainder of this writing I have a few more extremely fascinating subjects and evidences
to present. Much different than the topics presented already. They will build upon each other,
and become even more interesting as you read on. I will also explain the exact day that the
Great Tribulation/End Times almost certainly begins. Before I describe these amazing things, I
have a few extremely important paragraphs of commentary - the point of this writing. After
this commentary, I will briefly share the explanation on NDEs, as well as briefly share some
astounding, solid, scientific evidence for God as a personal being that will change your
worldview. I will then present a few incredible, shocking subjects that will build upon each other.
I guarantee that you will be amazed!
In reaction to our pluralistic world that seems to necessitate this political correctness, a
worldview has evolved that says that all of the worldviews contain elements of the truth, or
contain authentic expressions of the truth. That everything is "interconnected", and that all paths
ultimately lead to the same goal. Yet this is in actuality an Eastern worldview, and a 'particular'
worldview in itself. It's origins were formed mostly from Eastern philosophy and ideas, and by a
variety of Western philosophers and intellectuals in the first half of the 20th century. Today, the
wide array of views within this worldview are collectively referred to as the New Age or New
Yet, the fact remains that there can only be one truth, and basic understanding of religions and
philosophy makes it obvious that the differing worldviews fundamentally conflict. The fact that
there are differing worldviews in our world, does not mean that there is no truth, and neither
does it mean that all worldviews are somehow true. It also does not necessarily imply that the
truth in unknowable. In fact, the logical tree diagram breakdown of the question of whether one
of the worldviews is the truth and whether it is knowable, is quite simple and straightforward.
First, either there is a God /supernatural consciousness Creator, or there isn't. Second, if there
is a God, He is either a personal being, or an impersonal being. He cannot be both. The
monotheistic view and the pantheistic view fundamentally conflict. Either God is a personal
being Creator, outside of time and space, or the concept of God is altogether different and this
universal consciousness exists in everything and is everywhere. So, either the Abrahamic
religions' monotheistic view is true, or the Eastern religions' and New Age view is true. They
cannot both be true, as they are fundamentally different. If the truth is that there is a personal
being Creator outside of time and space, and He is directly concerned about the affairs of
mankind, then it would therefore be likely that He would want to let Himself be known, and
provide direct, universally understandable, clear guidance for His creation. Therefore, if God is a
personal being, and He has chosen to reveal Himself to the world, the question then is which of
the three monotheistic traditions is true.
Biblical Christianity on the other hand, stands alone as the only worldview that recognizes and
concedes that we are all hopeless sinners, and that there is no possible way or method to get
to, or connect with God. That even our best deeds are filthy, and filled with vanity, in comparison
to a holy, pure, and righteous God. To believe there is something one can do or perform, or that
a certain amount of good deeds can outweigh one's sins, is the height of folly, arrogance,
and pride in the Biblical Christian worldview. In Biblical Christianity, pride is considered the
essence of all evil, and Biblical Christianity is the only worldview that requires this recognition,
and it's implied humility, and humbling. (An ethos of humility and is of course the antithesis of
today's self absorbed culture.) Yet the Biblical Christian worldview is the only worldview,
wherein because the individual cannot get to Heaven or reach God on one's own merit, God
thereby sacrificially comes down to the individual, and offers saving grace.
This world and life has been designed to challenge us, and seduce us. So that we may grow
through adversity, because without adversity there is no growth or learning. It has been
designed to test us, and it is designed for us to make a decision. Whether we will succumb to
the worries and pleasures of life and focus on the world, or instead focus on the eternal - God
and the promised coming kingdom of heaven. To determine whether we will choose to see
through and beyond this world of seeing is believing, and instead believe without seeing first.
God has masterfully designed this life to see who will choose Him, over themselves and the
world -- without first having God's full self-revelation. This life is His way of separating the goats
-- that go their own way, from the sheep -- that choose to follow the shepherd home. Once you
understand that this life is a test, everything else falls into place. You will understand for
example why God has only partially revealed Himself, progressively over time. The type of
evidence like the Turin Shroud as just an example, was never supposed to be blatantly obvious.
Therefore, it is no wonder that it won't be carbon dated again, correctly. It is for those with eyes
to see.
God desires us to seek Him, come to Him, and get to know Him as He truly is. Which is more
than just love and “oneness”. His other attributes include holy, just, and righteous. He desires a
relationship with us. Yet, in Biblical Christianity this is not truly possible until there is
reconciliation. Through the choosing and molding of a people, the Jews, as recorded in the
Bible, he has demonstrated that there is standard, and that sin and pride are what separates us
from a true relationship with Him. When two friends or family members have a falling out, the
only true way to restore the relationship is through reconciliation. The same is true for us and
God. In order to have a true relationship, we must reconcile our differences, which is sin and
pride. We do this by recognizing who we truly are, and repenting. This is the only way. People of
other faiths or worldviews may presume to have a close relationship with God, but in fact they
do not. Their presumption, based on whatever method or way their man made cultural tradition
claims, is in fact pride. God may still offer common grace to unrepentant individuals, but this is
not the same as saving grace. Neither is it a deep relationship. In order to have a right
relationship with God, one needs to know who God is, and who they are in relation to God. And
this understanding of who God truly is, and who we truly are, naturally produces genuine
repentance and a repentant lifestyle, if they are truly sorry and grateful.
There is also a powerful spiritual adversary that counterfeits and deceives many into thinking
they have a relationship with God (or Gaia, or "Universe"), when in reality they have been
purposefully deceived because they refused to believe the truth about who they really are.
In this life He desires us to truthfully love Him, and not the world (this life etc), of our own free
will. To recognize and confess our true nature, of our own free will. He seeks for us to lose our
Why did Jesus say that He was the way, the truth, and the life? That He was the door and gate
for the sheep? That no one comes to the Father, but by and through Him? Jesus is the free gift
that God is offering to make reconciliation. In the garden of Gethsemane, Jesus, through His
infinite nature, experienced all the sins ever committed, in a moment. And then paid the price for
it all in one moment on the cross. Having experienced our lives entirely, and all our sins first
hand, and through knowing us better than we know ourselves, He is now able to perfectly
mediate on our behalf. Why did Jesus say that "whoever eats My flesh and drinks My blood, will
have eternal life and I will raise that person on the last day"? And, "whoever feeds on my flesh
and drinks my blood abides in me, and I in him"? (John 6:54-56). Why did He say, "in that day
you will know that I am in My Father, and you in Me, and I in you"? (John 14:20). God is too
pure, too holy, and too bright, for us to withstand His immediate presence on our own. We need
to be in Christ. Yet His design is such that He cannot force us to accept Him in us. We need to
invite Him in.
It is for good reason that Jesus said the path to salvation and the Kingdom of Heaven is narrow,
but that the road to destruction is wide. Most people willnot choose to love the truth, but instead
their lives, the world, their tribe, their cultural beliefs, and their own truth, false truth, and false s
piritual
progress". In short, "in the last days... men will be lovers of themselves" (2 Timothy 3:2). It is als
o for good reason that Jesus said “I am the way and
the truth and the life. No one comes to the Father except through Me." "Make every effort to ent
er through the narrow door. For many, I tell you, will try
to enter and will not be able." (Luke 13:24). Contrary to what New Age philosophers would like t
o think, Jesus was not saying he was an "enlightened
master trying to teach about the supposed God nature within ourselves. He said He was the ON
LY way. His political incorrectness would surely have
brought Him persecution in our time as well. Today He and His followers are increasingly being
persecuted through the legal system, and in many
countries many, many Christians are being murdered for their faith. Jesus specifically said he ca
me, not to unite people, but to divide people (the goats from the sheep). "Do you think that I
have come to bring peace to the earth? No, I tell you, but division" (Luke 12:51). There is
nothing as divisive in our world as the Biblical Christian worldview, because of the effect of it
being contrary to people's pride and lusts. Just as nothing is as divisive in our world as the
existence of the tiny nation the size of New Jersey called Israel.
2 Peter 3:3-4 "You must understand that in the last days scoffers will come, scoffing and
following their own evil desires. 'Where is the promise of His coming?' they will ask. 'Ever since
our fathers fell asleep, everything continues as it has from the beginning of creation.'"
False Politics
Also, because of this spiritual force that is against Israel, there are lies and misinformation in the
left leaning media and left leaning academic world. Generally, all too often the problem with the
Left is they are more concerned with powerful vs weak, instead of wrong vs right and truth.
That's not to say by any means that Israel is by default always right, but the conflict and its
history is poorly understood by the left that has made it their pet project. Their dogmatic
ideology of powerful vs weak also makes their politics of emotions suitable for our modern age
of news sound bites. Furthermore, God does not care for our modern left leaning politically
correct sensibilities (not that Israel's right to exist as a Jewish nation is or should be politically
incorrect). God has a foreign policy, and it revolves around Israel: "I will bless those who bless
you, and whoever curses you I will curse; and all nations on earth will be blessed through you"
(Genesis 12:3). God has the last word on this conflict. And it is a watershed issue with spiritual
roots, that is purposefully designed to divide people and nations. In the same way the question
of Jesus is designed to divide individuals -- the sheep from the goats. I recommend being very
cautious about which side of the issue you choose on these two questions…...
As an example of God's foreign policy, one of numerous examples, on June 3rd (this week that I
write this) the peak of the epic, destructive floods in Paris coincided with the exact day of the
French Peace Initiative talks (arrogantly held without Israel) in Paris. France initiated and hosted
the talks. Also, the day prior, John Kerry flew from the US to France for the talks. On that day
President Obama gave a graduation commencement speech at the Air Force Academy in
Colorado. Moments later a USAF Thunderbird jet crashed while participating in the ceremonial
flyover. The same day a Blue Angels jet crashed in Nashville. Crashes in the two elite,
symbolic, precision flight squads are extremely rare, yet they both happened on this same
day that Kerry flew to the cursed talks in Paris. The pilot in Nashville was from Colorado. Both
pilots were flying aircraft #6 in their squads. A coincidence? A sign of impending judgment?
Another example of a sign, and God's foreign policy in Genesis 12:3, was Katrina. First, the
odds of a hurricane of this magnitude hitting New Orleans so precisely as to cause maximum
destruction, was extremely low. What makes it tie into the Bible, and therefore communication
from God, is that the hurricane hit on the very same day of the forced Israeli Gaza strip pullout.
Thousands of Jews were forced to evacuate their homes and property, and Israel essentially
abandoned this territory. Which is the opposite of God's will if we understand prophecy. The US
had a major hand in pressuring Israel to withdraw, which is why it was cursed that same
day. Incidentally, the day Katrina hit, and Israel pulled out of Gaza, was the 9th of Av.
9/11
9/11 is a personal interest of mine. There are profound, good reasons to believe God allowed
9/11 to happen, when it happened. First, the root word for tower in Hebrew is the word for
arrogance. In this regard, I also believe that the sinking of the Titanic on its maiden voyage was
also allowed by God. The ocean liner of decadence and prestige was arrogantly billed as
"unsinkable". It is God's prerogative to remind those that will pay attention, that He is in control.
We are just children, mistakenly filled with prideful independence. Also, both of these events
serve as wake up calls. They are God's way of shaking us from our slumber regarding the truth
about God.
I recently visited the 9/11 museum, and one thing that really made an impression on me was a
particular photography art exhibit. All of the images in this exhibit were of people in New York
and New Jersey looking up, in horror and despair. I think this really captured God's intent with
this event. The entire world was fixated on this event, and was in despair on this day. Many
were metaphorically looking up for answers. The purpose of 9/11 was to wake those up that
would be woken up. It woke me up. The Great Tribulation and End Times period will serve the
same purpose of causing people to look up, but it will be on an unimaginable scale compared
to 9/11. (For one thing, the book of Revelation speaks of two asteroids hitting Earth, preceded
by the raining fiery debris that precedes the objects. And this is just the beginning.) The Great
Tribulation will be God's last ditch, desperate attempt to wake those up that will be woken up,
before it is too late. It is too late when full self-revelation comes on the Day of The Lord at the
climax of the Tribulation. Yet, at the same time, the tragedies that are coming, are an act of
God's love. He desperately wants to wake people up in time, and without a shaking most people
that are consumed with their secure comfortable lives and plans, will simply not wake
up and make sacrifices for Him.
God left us numerous clues and signs in the event as well, to remind us He is still in control. For
example, a perfectly proportioned giant cross made of steel beams, landed upright in the
flattened debris field. Today this famous cross is in the 9/11 museum. Also, in the debris was
found a Bible that was miraculously solidly fused with intense heat to a hunk of metal, without
having been burned up. It was opened to a particularly appropriate page that the world needed
at that moment. It was opened to the well known passage from the Sermon on the Mount in the
book of Matthew on Retaliation. (This passage applies to the individual's response to evil, not
the state's response to evil.) This Bible is also in the 9/11 museum. As illustrated already in this
writing, God loves to reveal Himself through numbers. On the day of 9/11, the New York State
Powerball lottery winning numbers were 911. Also the stock market on Wall Street was halted
for days, and the Dow Jones remained at 9605 during this time. The 6 and 5 make 11.
It's very interesting also that George Washington, immediately after being inaugurated as the
first president, led his vice-president and cabinet down the street from Federal Hall in
Manhattan, to this chapel at Ground Zero where he then consecrated the nation to God. He said
that if the nation ever turned away from God, it would lose its blessings, prosperity, and
protection. “We ought to be no less persuaded that propitious smiles from Heaven can never be
expected on a nation that disregards the eternal rules of order and right, which Heaven itself
has ordained.” Could the destruction at Ground Zero, the location where the nation was
consecrated, be God's way of pointing to Washington’s chapel, and warning us? Could the
place of the dedication of the nation be the place of the warning?
In every one year Bible, whether Catholic or Protestant, the daily reading for September 11
includes Isaiah 9:11. Every year these verses are read on 9/11.
Before the destruction of the First Temple in Judah, Israel in the north was temporarily invaded
by the Assyrians -- the ancient inventors of terrorism, and ancestors of the 9/11 attackers -- in a
bloody terrifying raid that had political motives, and included mass beheadings. It was terrorism.
In the Bible this is described as an event that God used to warn Israel with, but that the warning
went unheeded. After the raid Israel's leaders are described as responding to it with defiant
hubris. This is in chapter 9 of the book of Isaiah and it is titled Judgment on Arrogance. Isaiah
9:10 is the verse in which God quotes the leaders of Israel's hubristic response to the raid and
His warning.
The following verse, Isaiah 9:11, is God's response to Israel's hubris and ambition to rebuild,
without repentance. In verse 11, God declares that because Israel refused to turn from their
unbelief and sin, and come back to God, through repentance, He will follow through on His final
judgment on the nation. This final judgment came some years later with the invasion of Babylon,
There is another scripture from the September 11 daily reading in the one year Bible, that God
has paired with Isaiah 9:10-11. Here are some of the verses that are uncanny given the context
of 9/11.
Psalm 55:2-11
In verse 9 the word for violence in Hebrew also means "damage" and "destruction". This same
word in Arabic means Islamic "fanaticism" and "zeal". This word is "hamas". The Hamas
organization is linked to and born out of the same organization as Al Qaeda. "I see hamas and
strife in the city."
.
It would be one thing to have one incredible parallel like the hewn stone, but again there are
9 such parallels. I will share three more here, and the rest you can watch a video of on my
website, under the Rabbi Jonathan Cahn section in the Additional Resources section. Another
parallel is the rebuilding of the fallen buildings, in defiance with their own power. Just as Israel
rebuilt its buildings, stronger than ever, America vowed to replace the World Trade Center Twin
Towers with an even higher tower, with many national leaders calling for it be the highest
building in the world. As it is, the new One World Tower is the tallest in the Western
Hemisphere.
Incidentally, there is a spiritual connection in calling it the One World Tower, as it is symbolic of
the story of the Tower of Babel in Genesis 11:1-9. In this story the people of the world came
together as one, and arrogantly tried to build a tower to Heaven using their own might and
technology. Genesis 11:9 read backwards is 9:11. Which creates an interesting connection with
another relevant passage within this context of arrogance toward God. Isaiah 26:19 "They turn
everything upside down. Which is more important, the potter or the clay? Can something you
have made say, 'You didn't make me'? Or can it say, 'You don't know what you are doing'?"
Interesting too is that a photographer had found a Bible buried in the rubble of Ground Zero.
Blown apart and charred with only one page showing, it read from Genesis 11:4, "Come let us
build for ourselves a tower".
The word for tower in Hebrew is from the root word for arrogance. Towers are monuments to
pride. In this most hubristic of ages, where man mistakenly believes he can master anything he
puts his mind to, yet the very solutions he works out become the bigger problems which he can
no longer encompass (the lesson of Genesis 11), all over the world a new breed of "super
tower" has emerged. If the inauguration of the Tribulation period occurs with the
prophesied worldwide earthquake, it could possibly bring down all of these towers at once.
Which would be appropriately symbolic.
Another uncanny parallel from Isaiah 9:10 is the sycamore trees. Psalm 78 also talks about God
striking down sycamore trees as a severe sign of national judgment. It just so happens that
around Ground Zero there was one little plot of land that had soil, and in it was a sycamore tree.
The tree that saved Washington's chapel. A sign of national judgment just happened to be at the
corner of Ground Zero. Amazingly, people turned this fallen sycamore tree into a national
symbol. A sign of judgment, and national uprooting became a national symbol of pride. Also
very interesting is that America's first stock market took place under a buttonwood tree, which is
a type of sycamore tree. This informal stock trading outside of 68 Wall Street was later
institutionalized in 1792 with the Buttonwood Agreement, and was named the New York Stock &
Israel vowed to replace the fallen sycamore trees with cedar trees. The precise Hebrew word for
the type of cedar tree in this verse is the "erez" tree, or what we call a pinachia tree. With what
kind of tree did they replace the fallen sycamore tree that saved the chapel? A pinachia tree --
the exact tree of the Scriptures. They then had a ceremony for this replacement pinachia tree
and incredibly named this sign of judgment the Tree of Hope. Of course no one knew what they
were doing, or had a hand in any of this Isaiah 9:10 fulfillment. In the Bible, cedar wood is a
symbol of strength and purity (Leviticus 14:49). The cedar tree is a rugged, robust tree that does
well even in harsh conditions. Yet the Tree of Hope did not prosper, and withered away. This
symbol of purity could not take root in symbolically poor soil. The prophetically significant
message here is that there is no hope in man's ways without God in the world, and only through
Christ is there hope. God’s blessings will not take root in a people that shun him. The tree was
finally unceremoniously uprooted and destroyed on Passover, April 14, 2014. This was the day
of the first blood moon lunar eclipse of the recent blood moons tetrad. A date, as I will later
show, that has massive symbolic significance. You need to keep reading!
Another uncanny parallel is the Isaiah 9:10 public pronouncement of the vow. For this Isaiah
9:10 harbinger fulfillment, it is the national leaders of the nation that must publicly pronounce the
defiant vow, in the capital city. However, what national leader is going to want to pronounce
judgment on America? On the third anniversary after 9/11, vice presidential candidate John
Edwards gave a speech in Washington. Without knowing what he was doing, he actually recited
Isaiah 9:10 -- an obscure passage that no one knows or ever quotes. Out of 30,000 inspiring
scriptures why did he choose this particular one? He didn't realize that he was quoting this
passage out of context, or that it is actually a passage about national judgement. But not only
that, he builds his whole speech around this passage. Without knowing for example that there
was an actual sycamore tree that was uprooted and replaced by a cedar tree. Another public
pronouncement of the vow was even more incredible. On the very morning after 9/11, America
was to give its formal response to the world regarding the calamity. Senate majority leader Tom
Daschle was appointed to represent the nation and give the speech. At the end of his speech,
he recites Isaiah 9:10, and by doing so he unknowingly links 9/11 to ancient Israel's national
judgement. Then he goes on to say, "That is what we, America will do. We will rebuild, we will
recover." On this day he has no idea that the sycamore tree will be found uprooted, and neither
is he aware of the other harbinger parallels that confirm 9/11 as a warning of national judgment.
Amazingly, both John Edwards and Tom Daschle fell into public shame and disgrace shortly
after their pronouncements, and Tom Daschle was not able to serve in Obama's administration.
Yet another public pronouncement of the Isaiah 9:10 defiant vow came after the second stage
of financial calamity and judgment on America in the autumn of 2008. After being elected on a
platform of "hope", in February 2009 President Obama gave his first State of The Union speech,
which was naturally a response to the financial crisis. The next day the major newspapers all
around the world ran the headline: "We Will Rebuild". If you had to summarize Isaiah 9:10, this
would be it. But what does this statement have to do with an economic speech? He also said,
"we will emerge stronger than before". Obama has yet to fall into public disgrace like Edwards
and Daschle. I personally believe that his disgrace will be on a much higher level than that of
The final public pronouncement of the Isaiah 9:10 vow to rebuild came in 2012. The president of
the United States returned to Ground Zero, the site of the judgment warning, and ceremoniously
wrote a message on a steel beam that was hoisted and placed at the very top of the tower. In
other words, as symbolically close to God as it gets. On this beam Obama wrote: "We
remember, We rebuild, We come back stronger!". This time the pronouncement of the vow was
in the present tense, instead of the future tense, thus completing the act of defiance 11 years
after 9/11. There were 8 words in his pronouncement. In Hebrew, Isaiah 9:10 also has 8 words.
The middle word (the fourth word) in both Obama's pronouncement and Isaiah 9:10 in Hebrew
is the same -- rebuild.
This defiant pronouncement on the highest beam for God to see, was not the final symbolic
chapter in this Isaiah 9:10 Judgment on Arrogance. Although all of the harbingers and parallels
with defiant ancient Israel had been symbolically completed with the placement of this beam,
America needed to further symbolically mock God as well. America needed to symbolically end
its Christian heritage, and symbolically begin its prophesied persecution of believers. This came
on June 26th, 2015 with the Supreme Court's decision to legalize gay marriage. Every single
member of the 4 dissenting Supreme Court justices sounded an alarm in that ruling that
believers will be persecuted as a result of the ruling. America has officially decided to celebrate
what the Bible calls evil, and go its own way apart from God.
In the Bible, homosexuality is the symbolic sin of rebellion. Not only is homosexuality NOT just
another sin, it serves in the Bible, from Genesis to Revelation, as the primary symbol of end-
stage, extreme rebellion against God triggering the outpouring of His wrath on a people or
nation. From the homosexual culture preceding Noah's flood, to Sodom and Gomorrah, to the
Canaanites, to King Solomon, right through the NT, the Bible singles out homosexuality as the
symbolic sin and key marker of extreme rebellion before God's wrath.
(Incidentally, it is absurd propaganda that people are born with their sexual orientation. I have
two simple points for countering this. First, that would therefore mean that people are born
pedophiles and bestiophiles. Second, if homosexuality is genetic and not cultural, then why is it
that for example in Vietnam where it is culturally unaccepted there is virtually none, yet across
the border in Thailand where it is culturally accepted homosexuality is widespread. Or why is
that in America, among millennials homosexuality is now far more prevalent than it is among the
baby boomer generation, and is even less prevalent among the GI generation? The truth is that
although the human brain is a highly complex, malleable organ, and human sexuality is
adaptable, there is also a spirit of rebellion against God's created order in sexual perversion.
And the taboo of the sexual perversion, whether it be an affair, homosexuality, or something
else, is part of the excitement for those that indulge in it.)
There is an unseen spiritual aspect to everything, and it is no coincidence that the LGBT
movement uses the rainbow as their symbol. It is God's symbol of authority. It is His sign of
mercy and covenant in the face of judgment on the earth, revealed to Noah and his sons after
the flood. In Ezekiel the Lord's surrounding radiance is described as being a rainbow, and in
Revelation a rainbow emanates from His throne. Yet, in Revelation the symbolic image of the
Antichrist that John sees is revealed to be holding a rainbow in his hand. The Tribulation
Kingdom of the Antichrist will be defined by homosexuality and a New Age “religious pluralism”.
It also must be mentioned that there is a spiritual law to the universe. This law is that there is a
price for sin. It cannot go unpunished. Hitler does not get off the hook. God would not be
righteous or just without this spiritual law of physics, and its enforcement. Also, one's sin is
multiplied, like a ripple in a pond, as those who one sins against, or potential for good that is
unfulfilled, in turn affect others as a result. Or in the case of sin against oneself, one’s potential
is not fulfilled, at a loss to oneself and others. Also, understanding properly what sin is, is
critical. It's more than the obvious. There are layers, under layers, of ego and vanity. It's not
possible for any of us to commit one act holy enough for God. Even our best deeds are tainted
with selfishness and ego. It should be made clear however that eternal hell is not biblical, but
"paying every last penny" for every sin is biblical. Once these sins are paid then there is a
"second death" for this individual, and they cease to exist (Revelation 21:8). God is offering you
a free gift, but you must be willing to receive it by overcoming one’s arrogant independence
(independence from God is the root of sin), and humbling yourself, and recognizing your sins
through asking for forgiveness.
I will share what I believe is perhaps a very useful insight and metaphor that came to me. Books
like Rare Earth, and Privileged Planet, demonstrate the most recent scientific thinking in
astrophysics. The Rare Earth hypothesis argues that the evolution of biological complexity
requires a host of fortuitous circumstances, that cumulatively are so improbable, that it is likely
Earth is the only planet in the entire universe with evolved, complex, intelligent life. (I discuss
this hypothesis more in the Scientific Evidence part of this writing.) If this is the case, and that
the creation of the vast lifeless universe was necessary in order for God to produce one Earth,
then therefore Earth is exceedingly special to God, and the rest of the planets are a necessary
byproduct. In this same way, in order for God to produce a creature with free will that would
choose to love Him, it was also therefore necessary for God to create creatures that would not
choose Him. It is like an immutable law of physics that cannot be changed. Creatures that don't
choose Him, and ultimately pay the price for their sin, are an unfortunate but necessary part of
creating a creature that chooses to love Him of their own free will. This answers the question of
how could a loving God create a creature He would punish. The answer is that it was
necessary, in order to achieve His desire to have a creature that loves Him of their own free will.
The entire world has now had a chance to hear the gospel, which God, in His grace, has
provided. (For those that think Christianity is a Western, or "white man's religion", Christianity is
for example exploding in China today, and there are over 30 million Christians in India.) Yet
even those that never heard the gospel, or lived before the gospel, and did not receive
this special revelation, are without excuse. The general revelation evidence for a Creator is all
God's full divine self-revelation is soon. The Day of The Lord and Judgment Day is very soon.
(You also could die at any moment). If you have been on the fence regarding the question of
Jesus, now is the time (ideally before the upcoming date in 2017 -- I will explain what I mean in
a minute) to get over your pride and make a decision. If these proofs have been intriguing, but
you feel you need more evidence, I implore you to continue looking into this diligently and
urgently. All questions have answers, and we live in the age of information. After these next few
paragraphs I will show and describe some incredible scientific proofs. As well, more detailed
explanations and additional links to other incredible sources and astounding evidences, on a
wide range of subjects - many not discussed here, are on on my website, in the Additional
Resources section. I can't recommend enough checking them out! One thing you can also
experiment with, is talking to Jesus. Sincerely ask Him to show Himself to you. Invite Him in.
Countless people have come to the Truth not by convincing their minds through intellectual
evidence like prophecy, but through supernatural experiences. Each individual will be presented
a way for them to come to the Truth, if they have the will. Also, be mindful of unconscious
spiritual resistance, rooted in a force that is trying to prevent you from recognizing and coming
to the truth. Many people are in spiritual bondage to a host of different things, and will simply not
want to change themselves, no matter how much light and truth is provided.
Although, in my opinion, getting 1948, 1967, and 1978 from the Bible is case closed, as far as
evidence. In my opinion, any other interpretation than the Bible and Bible prophecy being
divinely inspired, is not logical or rational. And neither is it rational to interpret Bible
prophecy through the lens of another worldview, like Islam or the New Age. That is
completely irrational as well, given that the prophecy concerns Israel, and the coming Messianic
Kingdom and “thousand years of peace” on Earth in the Messianic Age. It does not prove Islam,
nor is it an authentic expression of the truth that can be found among all religions. If your current
worldview leaves you not knowing what to think regarding these dates being found in the Bible,
and you have questions that still need to be answered, then in my opinion you should feel
obliged to use this rock solid prophetic proof of Biblical Christianity as a base, and work
backwards from there and find the necessary answers you need. As I have done. In my opinion
it should be the number one priority in your life right now! If for some reason you do not
understand that these dates are obvious and straightforward, and wish to believe they are
hokum, I have included many other indisputable evidences in this writing to back it up. There is
no denying that Israel was restored in jubilee years; there is no denying that ALL of the major
calamities in Jewish history occurred on the 9th ov Av. The Old Testament passages for
example are undeniably about Jesus. If you are/were an atheist, stay tuned for the incredible
scientific evidence in this writing.
The fact that 1948 is found in Revelation, the last book in the New Testament, and like Daniel
also concerns the time of the end, is very interesting. To say the least! It is indisputable
evidence that the book of Revelation was also divinely inspired! If you're not understanding this
yet, let me just explain that the odds of this are incalculable, and therefore it is impossible that
this is a coincidence. There simply is no other rational conclusion for getting 1948 from
One last comment here. The End Times or Great Tribulation is going to be an extremely difficult
and terrible time for humanity. Yet, it is designed by God, and is an act of God's love. It is His
last ditch attempt to wake people up before it is too late. Those that would not be woken up
otherwise, because they are living their secure and comfortable lives. 9/11 was a miniature
wake up call, and it served to wake many people up, myself included. The End Times will be
many times the scale of 9/11. It is too late to wake up after the The Day of The Lord, and God's
full divine self-revelation. This is why the End Times/Great Tribulation/Jacob's Hour of Trouble
precedes it.
Another last comment here. God has placed an adversary in this world, in order to test us. 2
Thessalonians 2:9-12:
“The coming of the lawless one is by the activity of Satan with all power and false signs
and wonders, and with all wicked deception for those who are perishing, because they
refused to love the truth and so be saved. Therefore God sends them a strong
delusion, so that they may believe what is false, in order that all may be condemned
who did not believe the truth but had pleasure in unrighteousness.”
Other individuals pursue what can be called spirituality, but do not find the truth. Many find false
religion in one form or another, whether it is organized religion or new age spirituality. For
example a Muslim, or Catholic, or Eastern Orthodox, or Jew, or Hindu, or Buddhist, that follows
their faith, because they were born into it, is typically not following this faith after a rigorous
pursuit of the evidence, or religious comparative study. They are typically not interested in
the truth. They are simply following the faith of their tribe, and this tribalism therefore becomes
their worldly false idol, and they receive the deception they asked for.
To illustrate this, please allow me to talk about Catholicism for a couple minutes before
continuing briefly with new age spirituality, and then other truly amazing things. Catholicism is
instructive of the bigger picture in general. Many Catholics for example, by following the false
man made Catholic system, have been led to believe that they are “in”, simply because they are
Catholic, and by being a “good” person. And because of the false Catholic system, they are
led to believe they don't need to seek understanding of the gospel, or even read the Bible, or be
"born again" as Jesus said. They have truly asked for their deception, because of their lack of
yearning for the truth, and their pride and presumtuousness. If I had more space I could explain
more in detail, but the corrupted, paganization of the gospels, that is the Catholic Church
system, is a prime example and expression of man made religion, and what man really is
without God. Also, found throughout Catholicism are prime examples of the Adversary’s
strategy of counterfeiting and inverting. No one believes an outright lie, so the father of
lies cleverly provides truth mixed in with lies, in order to corrupt the truth. "A little yeast leavens
the whole batch of dough" (1 Corinthians 5:6).
One major example of counterfeiting and inverting truth in Catholicism is prayer to/the worship
of Mary as co-intercessor, or "mediatrix". Catholics will say the unbiblical doctrine of Mary isn't
against the first commandment of idolatry, and that they are not worshiping Mary, but rather
they are "venerating" her, because they claim she too was sinless like Jesus. That when they
place their prayer "requests" with Mary, because she is the "Queen of Heaven" (which is man
made theology and not biblical), and mother of Jesus, God is more likely to grant their requests.
Exchanging the word worship with venerate, and claiming it is not the same thing is dishonest,
and to believe otherwise is to be deceived. Mary's supposed sinlessness isn't biblical, and the
reason why Jesus was sinless was because He is God - as a man. Sin is what separates man
from God, but God can't be separated from Himself, which is why Jesus is sinless. Not only
does making Mary sinless take away from who Jesus is, but it makes Mary part deity as well.
Which is why they pray to her to intercede for them. A tour through any museum with medieval
art will undeniably demonstrate Mary depicted as a deity, and much more important than the
baby Jesus figure that is often with Mary. In fact, Jesus is quite often a side note in the Catholic
religion. For example, the subtitle to the website Catholic Bible 101 is: "21st century Catholic
A couple other examples in a long list of examples that are directly counter to biblical principles
are confessing sins to a priest or "father" instead of God; and belief in salvation
through works and not through faith alone. Which as I explained earlier, believing that doing
something merits good standing with God, is pride and sin - the antithesis of the required
humility that is naturally derived from recognizing the significance and sufficiency of Jesus -
because there is nothing one can 'do' to get to God. A belief in any works for salvation negates
a true humbling belief in the necessity of Christ, and therefore negates the individual's salvation.
An example of salvation through works is the Catholic requirement to take the wafer at mass
(transubstantiation), ordained prayers, and infant baptism, and among many things, including
what are called indulgences. Incredibly, a Catholic believes that they can receive forgiveness of
their sins through doing things the Pope says, like make a pilgrimage to a statue of Mary. Other
examples of Satan's counterfeiting and inverting of the gospel are having spiritual teachers and
calling them all fathers, when Jesus said to call no one your teacher or father; prayer to/the
worship of what the pope officially decides are "saints"; the office of pope/papacy itself; and
creating graven images. Although the second commandment instructs us not to create graven
images, the Catholic Church is awash with images of Christ, angels, supposed saints, and relics
- that Catholics pray to.
There are many more examples of deception that are contrary to biblical principles within
Catholicism, but one last major example is misinterpreting the gospel, and promoting what is
called the social gospel, or social justice gospel. Catholics are persuaded that engaging in
social reform and liberal left wing causes are a key to being a good Catholic, and therefore their
salvation. This stems from their unbiblical view of salvation through works, and not through faith
alone. They incorrectly interpret the passages in Matthew 25 on Judgment Day to support this.
Yet, rather than being judged by how we treat the poor, it is clear in these passages that Jesus
is referring to judgment according to how his messengers of the gospel have been treated.
What He calls his "brothers and sisters" in this passage are His true followers and messengers,
not the poor. Furthermore, Jesus didn't come to change the world, or reform institutions. He
came to bring light into a dark world, and to save souls. This Catholic social justice gospel will
undoubtedly be a catalyst for the world government order the pope would like to bring in, and
will bring in in the End Times. There is a spirit of Antichrist in the political left, and I have no
doubt the Catholic Church will play a major role for the Adversary and the Antichrist system in
the End Times. It is very clear from Daniel chapter 7 and 9, as well as Revelation chapter 13,
that the Pope is the Antichrist; and that from Revelation chapter 18 "Mystery Babylon" is the
Roman Catholic Church. (For Catholics and those interested, I have put up an article on my
website explaining why Matthew 25 Judgment Day does not infer a gospel of social justice.)
My personal thoughts regarding the Catholic Church, is that the Catholic system is exactly what
one might expect from the Deceiver. In a world that requires him to battle the gospel, it is
masterful deception to cunningly steer people away from the truth by using a counterfeit system
that is cloaked in the gospel. A wolf is sheep's clothing. It is clever because the lies corrupt the
truth, and prevent the gospel from being properly understood.
The counterfeit system also requires a hierarchy to interpret the Bible for them. Elders that
discourage its adherents from thinking for themselves. This is not only the case with
Catholicism, but also with the other anti-biblical forms of Christianity, including Mormonism,
Jehovah's Witnesses, and Seventh Day Adventists. In this respect, Catholics justify their anti-
biblical principles with their belief that their church is the first, true church, whose leaders have
been entrusted by God with special man-made doctrinal authority. It took the invention of the
printing press, and people reading the Bible for themselves, for people to understood that the
Catholic Church system was in direct opposition to biblical principles. This led to the
Reformation. If only Catholics understood that the point of God revealing Himself to the world,
was to get man away from man made religion, and to know Him personally through true
repentance and a repentant lifestyle.
(Update: This weekend Pope Francis officially declared Mother Teresa a saint, after confirming t
he two required healing miracles Catholics have
arbitrarily determined are necessary for "sainthood". These healing miracles occurred after Tere
sa died, when women in India, and a woman in Brazil, prayed to Teresa for
miraculous healing through relics they had of hers. I don't doubt that miraculous healing
occurred, but was this healing due to prayers to Teresa in Heaven, or was it customized
deception because they worshiped false idols? How many Catholics will now be praying to
Teresa?) (Speaking of demonic deception within Catholicism, I believe there will be a powerful
demonic manifestation of Mary once the end times Tribulation period begins. Similar to other
demonic manifestations in history, like Guadalupe and Fatima. This will fool many into following
the Pope.)
The beliefs that Catholics hold regarding counter-balancing one’s sins, against a greater
number of good deeds, combined with superstitious rituals and traditions, is the same
deception that deceives Muslims, Jews, and many Eastern Orthodox. People also become
attached to the tribe they are born into, and their tradition's beliefs and customs, and their love
for their tribe and its traditions replaces love of the truth, and the truth about God. They are not
willing to seriously question whether the religion they were born into is the truth about God.
Which is why He detests these superstitious customs. Again, “they refused to love the truth and
so be saved.” In reality, these methods of reaching Heaven are arrogance and pride, and it is
partly rooted in their pride for their tribal affiliation. This arrogance and pride prevents them from
recognizing who they truly are - a hopeless, depraved sinner in need of God’s saving grace.
By choosing to believe their false beliefs, and practicing their superstitious rituals and customs,
they do not truly love God because they have not sought what he desires, which is a
relationship, through true reconciliation. They have not sought to learn about his nature, and
therefore their own true nature. Mostly, they are simply superstitious about their faith, which is
The original sin, is the sin of independence. Trying to be like God, without God. The New
Ager’s pursuit of experience, power (including healing power), self-development, and false
divine knowledge is what brings them their deception. Even though these are so called spiritual
pursuits, New Agers are nonetheless driven by self interest and their ego, and what they pursue
are false idols. New Agers are typically not interested in truth, but rather what is “true for
themselves”, and what will benefit themselves or their “spiritual progression”. God really detests
false idolatrous worship and false spiritual practices and calls them abominations. He has
allowed these practices to be an invitation for “strong delusion” from adversarial spirits, that the
New Ager has invited into their life.
Many New Agers have “progressed” far enough to be in communication with their “spirit guides”,
which are in reality “by the activity of Satan”. Other newbies to the New Age are currently
entering it through the massively popular yoga trend. Without going into the subject deeply,
yoga is not exercise, it is a spiritual practice (from Hinduism). And every woman that does yoga
knows this, and keeps coming back for its spiritual benefits. They keep coming back, typically
for greater amounts of yoga, because it is an example of spiritual bondage, and it is similar to
drug addiction. They experience highs, and then lower lows, which causes them to need more
to feel good again. And the more into it they get, the more pronounced this cycle becomes. (I
have powerful, must watch, personal testimony videos on yoga on my website,
clearlywritten.com, in the Additional Resources section.) The word yoga itself means to “yoke”
with the gods. The stretching poses that were designed to emulate the different gods; the
breathing exercises; and the OM chanting; are spiritual practices. They are designed to assist
the practitioner to let go and yield to spiritual forces - which they naively assume are benevolent.
There are tons of ways to "exercise", so why has this one become the sweeping craze in our
time? As of 2015 one study showed that 62% of American women are into yoga. If the Biblical
Christian worldview is true, it means that women in America are being spiritually primed to
accept and connect with the Antichrist. Which would be in line with prophecy for our time. (I
'highly' recommend checking out the section on Spiritual Warfare on this website. It is
exceedingly interesting.)
New Agers, Catholics, and the Emergent Church (a new, massive, liberal, and heretical
movement out of the Protestant line) have a lot in common, and in the Tribulation they will
ultimately come together in the new world religion that is emerging in the West. (Atheism will be
become patently untrue in the Tribulation, as the supernatural becomes obvious.) Together,
their new "enlightened" regime will severely persecute those that stand in the way of "peace".
Those that are not into “love and oneness”, but rather “fear and separation”. In other words the
politically incorrect remnant of people that still believe the Bible to be literally true. Jews will also
be persecuted, again.
On the night of June 26th, 2015, after the Supreme Court decision was made, the highest house
in the land, representing American government, was bathed in colors not of the American flag,
but of another flag representing what the Bible calls evil. That same night the top of the One
World Tower was also bathed in rainbow colors. Where the public vow of defiance resides
This day, June 26th, 2015, was a very interesting day in the Jewish calendar. It was the 9th day
of the month of Tammuz. A day that was commemorated with fasting in ancient Israel, as it is
the anniversary of the day that King Nebuchadnezzar of Babylon breached the wall of Old
Jerusalem and within 4 weeks Jerusalem and the Temple were destroyed, and the Jews taken
captive to Babylon. This US Supreme Court ruling symbolizes the enemy having now breached
the protective wall of America, and therefore America's destruction is soon.
Like Israel, the judgement will be commensurate with the amount of light, blessing, and
responsibility America was given. The same is true for the individual. Those Americans and
Westerners that have had all the access in the world to the Truth, and still ignored it, will be
judged more harshly on Judgment Day, compared with those in countries with little or no access
to the Truth.
The accounts of NDEs can be divided into two categories: Pleasant and unpleasant. The most
unpleasant experiences reported are various types of hellish experiences. I have links to
people’s incredible hellish NDE accounts on my website, in the Additional Resources section.
Not only do I think they are fascinating, I think they are important to know about and appreciate,
for a complete, clear worldview. It would be foolish to ignore them.
Believe it or not, all of the reports from non Western cultures are unpleasant. Does this count as
evidence for the Christian worldview? Of course it does.
The following are two examples of Indian NDE accounts from a NDE researchers’ site that
promotes reincarnation and a New Age philosophical worldview. To remain unbiased, I have
simply copied and pasted the first two NDE reports from their website, which are all quite
unpleasant to say the least. I have this link on my website, clearlywritten.net, under the
Additional Resources section, where you can read the other example NDEs they recorded.
Vasudev Pandey was interviewed in 1975 and again in 1976. He was born in 1921 and
had nearly died in his home of what he described as "paratyphoid disease" when he was
about 10 years old. Vasudev had been considered dead and his body had actually been
taken to the cremation ground. However, some indications of life aroused attention, and
Vasudev was removed to the hospital where doctors tried to revive him, using "injections,"
with eventual success. He remained unconscious for 3 days and then became able to
describe the following experience (as narrated to us in 1975):
Two persons caught me and took me with them. I felt tired after walking some distance;
they started to drag me. My feet became useless. There was a man sitting up. He looked
dreadful and was all black. He was not wearing any clothes. He said in a rage to the
attendants [who brought Vasudev there]:
"I had asked you to bring Vasudev the gardener. Our garden is drying up. You have
brought Vasudev the student."
In reply to questions about details, Vasudev said that the "black man" had a club and used
foul language. Vasudev identified him as Yamraj, the Hindu god of the dead. He said that
he was "brought back" by the same two men who had taken him to Yamraj in the first
place. Vasudev's mother, who died before the time of the interview, was a pious woman
who read scriptures which included descriptions of Yamraj. Vasudev, even as a boy
before his near-death experience, was quite familiar with Yamraj.
A few days after Durga revived, his sister and a neighbor noticed marks on Durga's knees
which had not been there before. These folds - or deep fissures - which appeared on his
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 1093
skin in front of his knees were still visible in 1979. There was no bleeding or pain in his
knees other than the discomfort engendered by Durga following the "instructions" to keep
his knees in a fixed position. X-ray photographs we took in 1981 showed no abnormality
below the surface of the skin.
Durga had not heard of such experiences until his own near-death experience. He did not
see his physical body from some other position in space. He said afterward the
experience seemed like a dream; nevertheless, he claimed it strengthened his faith in
God.
One informant for this case was the headman of the village where Durga lived who said at
the time of Durga's experience, another person by the same name had died in Agra about
30 km away; however, neither Durga nor his older sister were able to confirm this
statement.
The pattern of being taken away, by malevolent people or entities, is occurring all over the
world. Many accounts also go further than the initial stage of being taken away, into deeper
realms of hellish experience.
On the other hand, the pleasant experiences being reported in the West most often involve
meeting deceased family members who told them to go back, or say they came back because
of ties of love and duty with living persons, or say they were told it was not their time to die. This
is never the experience of Indian Hindu NDEs. These Western experiences also sometimes go
further into deeper realms of heavenly experience. Sometimes, people also experience angels,
and Jesus.
The last unique type of NDE account is extremely interesting. This last type is rare. They
are the unpleasant/pleasant experiences of some Westerners that describe an experience that
is in line with a New Age philosophical worldview. Typically these experiencers come back to
the world on a mission to spread their knowledge and wisdom. They come back to teach -- us
that are supposedly less enlightened -- about what life is really all about. One of the most
famous near death experiencers that has come back to teach us is Eben Alexander. A
neurosurgeon, and former atheist (before his NDE), turned New Age lecturer.
In his lecture about his NDE, he describes some very interesting things. Of note, his experience
starts off unpleasant. No Christian’s experience ever begins this way. After this initial unpleasant
period, he encounters an angel that imparts to him all the insights and wisdom to life. And just
like in the experiences of the other near death experiencers that have come back as wise New
Age teachers, the angel that gives the wisdom is female. This is actually a clue for discerning
Christians, because biblically all angels are male. Angels don’t sexually reproduce, so there is
no need for female angels.
What is most interesting of all is what Alexander says are the two most important things the
angel told him for us to know. First, “we have nothing to worry about”. This is essentially
because life is a classroom in which we get to come back again and continue our learning.
Second, “we can do no wrong”. And the reasoning for this is the same. As we can see, these
two pieces of wisdom are the exact opposite of biblical Truth.So, one of these worldviews
must be wrong. Either we need to be concerned about our eternity, and we can do wrong; or we
don’t need to worry, and we can do no wrong. The dichotomy couldn’t clearer. (This inversion of
the truth that is the handiwork of the adversary couldn't be clearer.)
In regards to this question of whether we have nothing to worry about, and we can do no wrong,
the New Age perspective views the Biblical Christian worldview as ancient, oppressive, and
unenlightened. Whereas the Biblical Christian perspective views the New Age perspective, as
immature, narcissistic, and naive. The New Age perspective doesn’t have a good explanation
for hellish or Christian NDEs, however the Christian perspective can certainly explain the New
Ager’s NDE. New Agers do not think there is evil. Usually the most they will admit to is that
some form of malevolent beings may exist. Which they claim to be able to avoid because they
think of themselves as wise and enlightened, or filled with light. Yet the Christian understands
that this arrogance is exactly why they are susceptible to evil deception, and the demonic
beings that appear to them as beings of light. In the Biblical Christian perspective, the New Ager
is essentially like a proud child, seeking independence from their parent, without any
accountability but to themself. As a result, they invite satanic deception into their lives.
This explanation for New Age NDEs, is really the underlying explanation to all false religion and
spiritual deception in our world. This illustration and example demonstrates what is called
spiritual warfare. The material world is simply the surface layer, or the visible tip of the iceberg.
There is a spiritual realm behind everything. I could write many pages on this subject, but I only
have space for this one topic of NDEs, to try to illustrate this understanding of spiritual warfare.
There are forces counterfeiting and inverting the truth, whose goal is to try and steer those
susceptible away from the truth and salvation. These forces are often extremely cunning, and
many times smarter than we are. God has placed deception and evil in the world to test us, and
see whether we will overcome it and see through it; or be weak, or foolish, or proud, or wicked,
and fall for the deception.
2 Thessalonians 2:11: “Therefore God sends them a strong delusion, so that they may believe
what is false, 12 in order that all may be condemned who did not believe the truth but had
pleasure in unrighteousness.”
When someone is involved in spiritual deception, they become bonded to it, and it is difficult for
them to see through it and leave it. It is spiritual bondage. Like a drug addict that can’t stop, so
too is the case with someone involved with a form of spiritual deception. Like drugs, they get a
high, but then later get a lower low, or a crash. Which, like drugs, causes them to come back for
a larger dose. With spiritual bondage, the high comes in the forms of increased inner peaceful
feelings, increased inner energy, increased knowledge, or increased psychic abilities. A few of
the more popular forms of this in our culture are yoga, horoscopes, astrology, any form of
divination - eg. tarot cards, any form of spiritual healing power, psychotropic drugs, and dancing
to hypnotic music for hours.
The intensity of this spiritual warfare battle will be increased dramatically during the End Times
Tribulation period. The supernatural will become so obvious that atheism will disappear
altogether. Susceptibility to satanic spiritual deception in our world today, has been rising
proportionately with our culture’s departure from Judeo-Christian values, and especially so in
these last years. Today, people are being primed for the arrival and acceptance of the
I have compiled on my website many explanations of some of the best evidences, and links to
some of the best resources; including some truly fascinating documentaries. No matter what
your worldview is, I'm confident you will be amazed. The following incredible explanations of
scientific evidences are brief, for the sake of space. In depth explanations, along with supporting
sources and videos are on my website. You need to check out my website!
It is well known that our existence in this universe depends on numerous cosmological
constants and parameters whose numerical values must fall within a very narrow range of
values. If even a single variable were off, even slightly, we would not exist. The extreme
improbability that so many variables would align so auspiciously in our favor merely by
chance has led some scientists and philosophers to propose instead that it was God who
providentially engineered the universe to suit our specific needs. This is the Anthropic
Principle: that the universe appears to have been fine-tuned for our existence.
Consider protons, for example. Protons are the positively charged subatomic particles
which (along with neutrons) form the nucleus of an atom (around which negatively
charged electrons orbit). Whether by providence or fortuitous luck (depending on your
perspective), protons just happen to be 1,836 times larger than electrons. If they were a
little bigger or a little smaller, we would not exist (because atoms could not form the
molecules we require). So how did protons end up being 1,836 times larger than
electrons? Why not 100 times larger or 100,000 times? Why not smaller? Of all the
possible variables, how did protons end up being just the right size? Was it luck or
contrivance?
Or how is it that protons carry a positive electrical charge equal to that of the negatively
charged electrons? If protons did not balance electrons and vice versa, we would not
exist. They are not comparable in size, yet they are perfectly balanced. Did nature just
stumble upon such a propitious relationship, or did God ordain it for our sakes?
Another illustration of the universe's fine tuning in order for life to exist is gravitational force.
Imagine a ruler in one inch increments, stretched across the entire universe, some 14 billion
light years long. The ruler represents the possible range for gravity. In other words the setting
for the strength of gravity could have been set anywhere along the length of the ruler, but it just
happens to be situated in exactly the right place so that life is possible. If you were to change
the force of gravity by moving the setting just one inch as compared to the entire width of the
universe, the effect on life would be catastrophic.
This dial setting doesn't only apply to gravitational force, it applies to all the known laws of
physics.
The list of these extremely finely tuned variables is quite lengthy. A more extensive list is on my
website. You will be amazed.
The Omega Point is a term [Frank J.] Tipler uses to describe a cosmological state in the
distant proper-time future of the universe that he maintains is required by the known
physical laws. According to this cosmology, it is required for the known laws of physics to
be mutually consistent that intelligent life take over all matter in the universe and
His book is titled the Physics of Immortality. Interestingly, he points out the correct translation,
included in most Bibles' footnotes, for God's reply to Moses' question on top of Mount Sinai,
regarding God's name. Instead of "I Am, What I Am", the footnoted translation is, "I Will Be,
What I Will Be". In this case, God is alluding to His future tense, as Omega - the infinite
singularity at the end on time and space after the Big Crunch (the opposite of the Big Bang).
Also, Jesus often referred to the Kingdom of God in the future tense, as in the coming Kingdom
of God.
(This concept of the resurrection of the dead at the end of time, that Tipler claims is
evidenced from mathematical quantum physics, is not compatible with a worldview that
claims reincarnation. So how is that some people swear they have past life memories?
How is it that some young kids claim past lives? As I explained earlier, the answer is
"strong delusion", because of "refusal to love the truth". Even the most well known
reincarnation research scientist, Dr. Ian Stevenson - who admits to having a personal
bias toward Eastern spirituality - does not rule this hypothesis out. He claims that
spiritual deception could in fact be one conclusion of his research.)
Our world and universe seems to have been designed for our
scientific discovery
The rare things that life needs in a planetary environment, also setup the best conditions overall
for scientific discovery. Here are some examples of this correlation.
Earth's life sustaining - transparent atmosphere, that allows us to study the universe. It didn't
have to be this way. (Incidentally, almost half of all cosmologists believe in a personal being
Creator - due to studying their field.)
The sun is four hundred times further away from us than the moon, but it is also four hundred
times larger than the moon (secular scientists call this a "grand coincidence"). The Earth's
precise distance from the sun, the size of its moon and its home star, are factors that not only
control our planet's temperature, axial tilt, and the movement of its tides; they also ensure
perfect solar eclipses. Phenomena that have provided scientists with invaluable data about the
composition of stars and the properties of light.
The Earth is positioned in our galaxy in between two spiral arms, in a relatively small region
where life is possible. As a result, we enjoy an excellent platform for clear unimpeded views of
our galaxy and the rest of our cosmos.
In planetary astronomy and astrobiology, the Rare Earth Hypothesis argues that the origin
of life and the evolution of biological complexity such as sexually reproducing, multicellular
organisms on Earth (and, subsequently, human intelligence) required an improbable
combination of astrophysical and geological events and circumstances. The hypothesis
argues that complex extraterrestrial life is a very improbable phenomenon and likely to be
extremely rare. The term "Rare Earth" originates from Rare Earth: Why Complex Life Is
Uncommon in the Universe (2000), a book by Peter Ward, a geologist and paleontologist,
and Donald E. Brownlee, an astronomer and astrobiologist, both faculty members at the
University of Washington.
An alternative view point was argued by Carl Sagan and Frank Drake, among others. It
holds that Earth is a typical rocky planet in a typical planetary system, located in a non-
exceptional region of a common barred-spiral galaxy. Given the principle of mediocrity (in
the same vein as the Copernican principle), it is probable that the universe teems with
complex life. Ward and Brownlee argue to the contrary: that planets, planetary systems,
and galactic regions that are as friendly to complex life as are the Earth, the Solar System,
and our region of the Milky Way are extremely rare.
The Rare Earth hypothesis argues that the evolution of biological complexity requires a
host of fortuitous circumstances, such as a galactic habitable zone, a central star and
planetary system having the requisite character, the circumstellar habitable zone, a right
sized terrestrial planet, the advantage of a gas giant guardian like Jupiter and a large
natural satellite [our moon], conditions needed to ensure the planet has a magnetosphere
and plate tectonics, the chemistry of the lithosphere, atmosphere, and oceans, the role of
"evolutionary pumps" such as massive glaciation and rare bolide impacts, and whatever
led to the appearance of the eukaryote cell, sexual reproduction and the Cambrian
explosion of animal, plant, and fungi phyla. The evolution of human intelligence may have
required yet further events, which are extremely unlikely to have happened were it not for
the Cretaceous–Paleogene extinction event 66 million years ago which saw the decline of
dinosaurs as the dominant terrestrial vertebrates.
In order for a small rocky planet to support complex life, Ward and Brownlee argue, the
values of several variables must fall within narrow ranges.
In fact, Ward and Brownlee go on to calculate that the required fortuitous circumstances,
suggest that it is very possible our Earth is the only planet in the universe that has been able to
evolve intelligent life. Richards and Gonzalez come to the same conclusion in their book, The
Privileged Planet: How Our Place in the Cosmos is Designed for Discovery.
Jesus said to him, "Unless you people see signs and wonders, you will
never believe." John 4:48.
The biblical basis is when God warned Egypt of the coming 7 years of famine. In genesis the
pharaoh has a dream of two sets of 7 cows. The meaning is given to Joseph through God, and
he interprets the dream for him. Each cow represents a year. The first 7 cows represent 7 years
of prosperity for Egypt, and the second set of sickly cows, represent 7 years of coming famine.
The key cow is the last cow in the first set of 7 cows. This represents the last year of the 7 year
shemitah cycle that is described earlier in my writing. It also represents the turning point from
prosperity to famine.
On what day does the AP (secular press) release this uncanny image of this cow with the
number 7 on its head?! The very opening day of the last year of the 7 year shemitah cycle! The
Jewish New Year's Day, September 25, 2014. The biblical symbol of the 7th year is released to
the public on the first day of the shemitah year.
The cow was named Benjamin, which is linked to Joseph. The cow was born near Pittsburgh,
and so people saw this "weird" cow as an omen that number 7 Ben Roethlisberger would lead
It gets more interesting. Upon learning of this cow, a farmer couple from Texas realized their
records showed that they had a calf born with a number 7 on its head on the same day,
September 25, 2014.
First, Deuteronomy 19:15, "one witness is not enough to convict anyone [in a matter of
judgement]." The two calves serve as two witnesses. Also, in pharaoh's dream there were 14
cows - two sets of 7. The calves are different types of cows; and one is male, the other is
female. Also if you look at the first cow's 7 it looks like a fancy type writer 7, which would parallel
the first 7 cows representing abundance. The second cow's 7 looks like a no frills dabbed
Passover (blood of lamb over doorway) 7. Which parallels the famine in the dream, and coming
judgement.
The 7th cow represents the warning of turning from abundance to judgment for America, and
the timing coincides prophetically with this current 7 years shemitah cycle containing the
beginning of the Great Tribulation/End Times period.
Comet Shoemaker-Levy 9
"Let there be lights in the expanse of the heavens to separate the day from the night, and let
them be for signs and for seasons and for days and years." Genesis 1:14
"Unless you people see signs and wonders, you will never believe." John 4:48
Comet Shoemaker-Levy 9 is another sure sign and proof that the Tribulation will commence
during this current 7 year shemitah cycle. Comet Shoemaker–Levy 9 was a comet that broke
apart in July 1992 and collided with Jupiter in July 1994, providing the first direct observation of
an extraterrestrial collision of Solar System objects. This generated a large amount of coverage
in the popular media, and the comet was closely observed by astronomers worldwide. The
collision provided new information about Jupiter and highlighted its role in reducing space debris
in the inner Solar System.
On July 16, 1994 the first fragment hit Jupiter, and over the next six days, 21 distinct impacts
were observed, with the largest coming on July 18 at 07:33 UTC when fragment G struck
Jupiter. This impact created a giant dark spot over 12,000 km across, and was estimated to
have released an energy equivalent to 6,000,000 megatons of TNT (600 times the world's
nuclear arsenal). Two impacts 12 hours apart on July 19 created impact marks of similar size to
that caused by fragment G, and impacts continued until July 22, when fragment W struck the
planet.
Despite published predictions, astronomers had not expected to see the fireballs from the
impacts, and did not have any idea in advance how visible the other atmospheric effects of the
impacts would be from Earth. Observers soon saw a huge dark spot after the first impact. The
spot was visible even in very small telescopes, and was about 6,000 km (3,700 mi) (one Earth
radius) across.
Solar Eclipses
"...in those days...I will show wonders in the heavens above and signs on the earth below... The
sun will be turned to darkness, and the moon to blood, before the coming of the great and
glorious day of the Lord." Joel 2:30 and Act 2:19
“There will be signs in the sun, moon and stars” Luke 21:25
It's worth reminding at this point that it's very interesting that the sun is 400 times larger than the
moon, and is also 400 times further away, ensuring perfect solar eclipses. Phenomena that
have provided scientists with invaluable data about the composition of stars and the properties
of light. Scientists call this the "Grand Coincidence."
Eclipse 1
First, Deuteronomy 19:15, "one witness is not enough to convict anyone [in a matter of
judgement]." The two calves serve as two witnesses. Also, in pharaoh's dream there were 14
cows - two sets of 7. The calves are different types of cows; and one is male, the other is
female. Also if you look at the first cow's 7 it looks like a fancy type writer 7, which would parallel
the first 7 cows representing abundance. The second cow's 7 looks like a no frills dabbed
Passover (blood of lamb over doorway) 7. Which parallels the famine in the dream, and coming
judgement.
The 7th cow represents the warning of turning from abundance to judgment for America, and
the timing coincides prophetically with this current 7 years shemitah cycle containing the
beginning of the Great Tribulation/End Times period.
Comet Shoemaker-Levy 9
"Let there be lights in the expanse of the heavens to separate the day from the night, and let
them be for signs and for seasons and for days and years." Genesis 1:14
Comet Shoemaker-Levy 9 is another sure sign and proof that the Tribulation will commence
during this current 7 year shemitah cycle. Comet Shoemaker–Levy 9 was a comet that broke
apart in July 1992 and collided with Jupiter in July 1994, providing the first direct observation of
an extraterrestrial collision of Solar System objects. This generated a large amount of coverage
in the popular media, and the comet was closely observed by astronomers worldwide. The
collision provided new information about Jupiter and highlighted its role in reducing space debris
in the inner Solar System.
On July 16, 1994 the first fragment hit Jupiter, and over the next six days, 21 distinct impacts
were observed, with the largest coming on July 18 at 07:33 UTC when fragment G struck
Jupiter. This impact created a giant dark spot over 12,000 km across, and was estimated to
have released an energy equivalent to 6,000,000 megatons of TNT (600 times the world's
nuclear arsenal). Two impacts 12 hours apart on July 19 created impact marks of similar size to
that caused by fragment G, and impacts continued until July 22, when fragment W struck the
planet.
Despite published predictions, astronomers had not expected to see the fireballs from the
impacts, and did not have any idea in advance how visible the other atmospheric effects of the
impacts would be from Earth. Observers soon saw a huge dark spot after the first impact. The
spot was visible even in very small telescopes, and was about 6,000 km (3,700 mi) (one Earth
radius) across.
1994 was a shemitah year. July 16, 1994 was the also 9th day of Av in the Jewish
calendar -- the day of Jewish calamity in history. The comet hit in the 7th month, and lasted
7 days. If 21 distinct fragments and impacts symbolizes 21 years, or three shemitah cycles of 7
years, then this points to the shemitah year of 2014-2015. 2014-2015 is also the year of the
blood moons, eclipses, and importantly the event that occurred on the wipeout day and last day
of that year -- Elul 29/Sep 13, 2015 - also the last day of the jubilee, and jubilee of
jubilees. September 13, 2015 was the day of a solar eclipse and the Israeli Security Forces
incursion on the Temple Mount, which I will explain more about in a minute. This comet impact,
on the planet that has been known from ages-old as the King Planet, is just one more sign of
many that points to transition times, and the Tribulation beginning in this current shemitah cycle.
Also, the significance of this occurring on the 9th of Av implies calamity for Israel in this next 7
year shemitah cycle. Which is in line with biblical prophecy concerning 7 years of Tribulation for
Israel; which speaks about the world ganging up on Israel and Jews. Which is certainly also in
line with the direction of current world events regarding Israel and Jews.
Solar Eclipses
"...in those days...I will show wonders in the heavens above and signs on the earth below... The
sun will be turned to darkness, and the moon to blood, before the coming of the great and
glorious day of the Lord." Joel 2:30 and Act 2:19
“There will be signs in the sun, moon and stars” Luke 21:25
It's worth reminding at this point that it's very interesting that the sun is 400 times larger than the
moon, and is also 400 times further away, ensuring perfect solar eclipses. Phenomena that
Eclipse 1
Besides the blood moons, another very interesting astronomical phenomenon occurred during
this last shemitah year of 2014--2015. The Spring (Vernal) Equinox is the exact moment when
day and night are the same length everywhere on the planet. This occurred on March 20, 2015
at 22:45 UT. On this day as well, a total solar eclipse peaked at 9:45 UT.
Also on March 20th at sundown was the first day of the Jewish ecclesiastical year - the 1st day
of the month of Nissan, which is a holy day. Which is also the precise split, or halfway point, of
the Jewish calendar year. So not only did March 20th mark the exact split of day and night on
Earth, it also precisely split the Jewish shemitah year. It also occurred in between the blood
moons of 2014 and the blood moons of 2015, thereby splitting them.
What is perhaps most interesting, is the path that the shadow of the total solar eclipse traced on
the surface of the Earth. Its path exactly split the Old World from the New World. I have
watched a NASA computer simulated video of this, and it is uncanny how precise
pre the splitting
on the map is! Also, the peak of the eclipse at 9:45 UT is the peak of the splitting on the map.
You have to view the video to see what I mean, and you can see it on my website,
clearlywritten.net, in the Additional Resources section. Some eschatologists deduce that the
symbolic meaning of this geographical splitting infers that in this new shemitah cycle, there will
be a dramatic shifting of power from the New World, back to the Old World, which would be in
line with end times biblical prophecy, and the many signs of impending wrath and judgement
that have been given to America. Including 9/11, and the shemitah wipeout days of 1987, 2001,
and 2008. Another way in which this symbolic splitting is a divine warning is related to the
world's current attempt to split Israel. Which Bible prophecy predicts will happen in these last
days.
Although solar eclipses are not tied to lunar eclipses, a second solar eclipse occurred in the
shemitah year of 2015 - the second year of the blood moons tetrad that has lunar eclipses on
Jewish Feast days. Incredibly, it occurred on September 13, the wipeout day of the
shemitah - Elul 29, the last day of the 7 year shemitah cycle, and completion of the jubilee
and jubilee of jubilees. This was the day of the symbolic incursion on the Temple Mount by
Israeli Security Forces, and the beginning of the recent spate of terrorism in Israel. Also, it was
the eve before the new jubilee year of 2015-2016 and a symbolic sign of what is to come
regarding Jewish control of the Temple Mount. Also on this day, Germany closed its border with
Austria for the first time in the EU era (along with other EU countries closing their borders) due
to the migrant crisis. Which was a telling blow to the open travel border and the two decade long
Schengen system itself. It could likely be a sign of things to come for the EU. The shemitah day
is about collapse if in disfavor, and this could symbolically point to a collapse or splitting of the
current EU system soon. (Noteworthy, is that in this shemitah year both solar eclipses and both
blood moons lunar eclipses, occurred on important Jewish calendar days. Another
improbable coincidence.)
Eclipse 3
In the shemitah year of 1987, an annular solar eclipse (a total eclipse, but with a ring of light)
occurred on September 23. September 23, 1987 was the once every seven years day of the
shemitah, or the wipeout day - Elul 29 in the Jewish calendar. A few days later panic struck on
what became known as Black Monday, and the Dow had its biggest one day percentage loss in
history. It lost 22% in one day, which nearly doubled that of the next biggest one day percentage
loss in history of 12% that occurred in 1929. Recall also that the two biggest stock market
crashes in history in terms of points lost (2001, 2008) occurred precisely on shemitah wipeout
days!
Eclipse 4
The date of this eclipse is very interesting. It occurs on August 21, 2017, and is Elul 1 in the
Jewish calendar. The beginning of the season of forgiveness and repentance, that climaxes 40
days later on the Day of Atonement. If the eclipse is a warning from the God of Israel to repent,
its date is perfectly timed. The eclipse could also be interpreted as a warning about dividing
land. Specifically the land of Israel. Joel 3:1-2 "For then, in those days and at that time, when I
restore the fortunes of Judah and Jerusalem, I will gather all the nations and bring them down to
the valley of Jehoshaphat, and I will enter into judgment with them there, on account of my
people and my heritage Israel, because they have scattered them among the nations. They
have divided my land..."
What makes the Great American Eclipse in 2017 even more fascinating, is that another one
occurs 7 years later, on the Feast of Passover in 2024 (April 8). This time the eclipse goes from
south to north. Placing both eclipses' paths over the US on a map creates an X pattern. It's also
very interesting that the point on the map where they cross is coincidentally where the first
eclipse's peak is. It may also be where the second eclipse peaks as well, but I don't have this
information.
Where the paths cross, and where the first eclipse peaks, happens to be at the very epicenter of
the New Madrid fault line earthquake zone. Many people claim to have had dreams of a future
where America is geographically divided (split) in two by an ocean inlet from the Gulf to the
Great Lakes along this fault line. If their dreams are prophetic, it could be judgement for dividing
Israel. And if so, and if like I am about to demonstrate in a minute, 2017 is the beginning of the
Tribulation, the timing of the second eclipse being 7 years after the first one would align with
Daniel's 70th week, of 7 years.
Eclipses 6, 7, 8, and 9
Four total eclipses have, or will occur next to Israel. Here are their paths.
Not only is Israel in the middle of the area demarcated by their paths, but there is also a middle
point in their timing. The exact midpoint between the first and last of the four eclipses is
November 29, 2016. This is the exact date of the 69th anniversary of the passing of the United
Nations Partition Plan for Mandatory Palestine in 1947. Thus the beginning of the 70th year.
The autumn feasts of 2017 fall within this 70th year. Does the 70th week in Daniel begin the
70th year of this Partition Plan, in 2017? Which is not only 70 years from the UN plan to divide
the land, but 120 years from first Zionist Conference, 100 years from the Balfour Declaration for
a Jewish homeland, and 50 years from the 6-Day War and capture of East Jerusalem and the
Temple Mount.
The United Nations Partition Plan for Palestine was a proposal by the United Nations, which
recommended a partition of Mandatory Palestine at the end of the British Mandate. On 29
November 1947, the UN General Assembly adopted the Plan as Resolution 181(II). The
resolution recommended the creation of independent Arab and Jewish States and a Special
International Regime for the city of Jerusalem. The Partition Plan, a four-part document
attached to the resolution, provided for the termination of the Mandate, the progressive
withdrawal of British armed forces and the delineation of boundaries between the two States
and Jerusalem. Part I of the Plan stipulated that the Mandate would be terminated as soon as
possible and the United Kingdom would withdraw no later than 1 August 1948. The new states
would come into existence two months after the withdrawal, but no later than 1 October 1948.
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 1106
The Plan sought to address the conflicting objectives and claims of two competing movements,
Palestinian nationalism and Jewish nationalism, or Zionism. The Plan was accepted by the
Jewish Agency for Palestine, despite its perceived limitations. Arab leaders and governments
rejected it and indicated an unwillingness to accept any form of territorial division. Immediately
after adoption of the Resolution by the General Assembly, a civil war broke out and the plan
was not implemented. To this day most Arabs will not accept Jews in what they perceive as
Muslim land, or accept a tiny Jewish state, and the world is still trying to force a division of this
land and make Jerusalem an international city. Yet, God has the last word in the Middle East.
More symbolism is contained in the year 2017 through its significant milestone anniversaries. It
is the 500th anniversary of the Protestant Reformation, 120 years since the first Zionist
Conference, 100 years from the Balfour Declaration for a Jewish homeland, 70 years from the
UN Partition Plan, and 50 years from the 6-Day War and capture of East Jerusalem and the
Temple Mount.
The seven holy feasts have prophetically foreshadowed things to come. Here are the three
'types' the symbolic feasts have foreshadowed:
In order to demonstrate this, let's look at the first four spring feasts, before looking at the other
three autumn feasts. These four spring feasts coincided with the exact days of important events
in Jesus' first coming and earthly ministry.
Israel - the sign of blood of a lamb over Hebrews' house entrances, first dealing of God with the
Hebrews/Israel as a corpus, and deliverance from Egypt. Moses is the deliverer.
(Incidentally, Moses the deliverer is a type for Jesus the deliverer; Egypt is a type for the
world; the Jews' slavery is a type for a sinner's bondage to the world through sin; Pharaoh is a
type for Satan; the Holy Spirit passing over the Hebrews' houses with the blood of the sacrificed
lamb on the doorway and sparing their first born, is a type for the wrath of God passing over
those that have accepted the blood of Jesus and His sacrifice at Calvary.)
Messiah - our Passover lamb and deliverer. Jesus was crucified during a Passover festival, and
the world was delivered.
Individual - when a non-believer is first saved by recognizing Jesus and what was accomplished
on the cross. The individual's deliverance.
Israel - the Hebrews in the desert for 40 years is Israel in a womb of transformative
development, being taught by God, through Moses, and purged of sin. (The manna bread from
Heaven is a type for the spiritual food we receive when we learn about God, His will, and His
word.)
Messiah - Jesus, in the tomb during the days of this feast, before His resurrection and
transformation to His resurrection body.
Individual - after recognizing Jesus, and one's sinful nature, one naturally begins to purge
themselves of sin.
Israel - Joshua and the Hebrews coming into the Promised Land, the birth of Israel.
Messiah - the first to be resurrected and overcome death, on the day of this feast. He is called
the firstborn.
Individual - the regenerating believer's life begins to show the first outward signs of change -
good fruit (Luke 6:43).
Israel - the establishment of the Judges period and then the first kings. The establishment of
Israel.
Messiah - Jesus' Church was established on the day of this feast when the Holy Spirit was
poured out on the disciples and 3,000 Jews responded to Peter's first sermon and proclamation
of the gospel.
Individual - the established redeemed individual begins receiving gifts of the Holy Spirit.
Given that these spring feasts are a type for Jesus' first earthly ministry, and the timing of these
feasts corresponded exactly to the day with the significant events of His first ministry, it is very
logical to assume that the timing of the autumn feasts will also correspond exactly with the
prophetic days of His Second Coming as King of Kings and ruler of nations. Therefore the
calendar days of the following three autumn feasts should coincide with the following Second
Coming events:
The Feast of Trumpets - The Rapture of the Church (true followers of Christ), before the
Tribulation
The Feast of Trumpets is also the beginning of the "Ten Days of Awe and Repentance" in the
Jewish calendar, which are a type for the Great Tribulation/End Times/Jacob's Hour of Trouble.
The Feast of Trumpets is also known as Rosh Hashanah, Yom Teruah (the awakening blast),
the Day of Shouting, the Day of the Resurrection, Coronation Day, and the Last Trump.
The Feast of Tabernacles - The annual festival during the Millennial Kingdom of Christ, when
all the nations make pilgrimage to the Temple in Jerusalem to tabernacle with the Lord
(Zechariah).
The Feast of Trumpets (Rosh Hashanah/Yom Teruah) is the feast that marks the Jewish
calendar New Year. It is also the warning, and inauguration of the season of atonement and the
Ten Days of Awe and Repentance, that lead up to the Day of Atonement (Yom Kippur). It was
the time of the "Great Assembly" when Israel was gathered to the Temple to hear the king read
from the holy Torah, and 100 shofar blasts were sounded, with the last long blast named the
"last trump". The start of the new year, and the start of the feast, wasn't confirmed until the first
siting of the new moon sliver was visible by the two witnesses/priests, at the time of twilight
that was called the "twinkling of an eye" - the moment when the first three stars become visible
in the night sky after sunset. The feast/festival was allotted two calendar days, and the festival's
nickname was a Jewish idiom, "no one knows the day or the hour", because no one knew on
which day or hour of the two days that the first new moon sliver would be visible. For many
obvious reasons, the next prophetic event in God's redemption calendar should occur during a
future Feast of Trumpets. The Rapture of God's saints to Heaven, sparing them from the
ensuing Tribulation, which will be the beginning of the end times, is this next event.
The Great Assembly of the Israelites at the Temple on the Feast of Trumpets, is a type for the
"great assembly" at the throne in Heaven described in the NT as being at the time of the
Rapture. The Ten Days of Awe and Repentance is a type for the Tribulation. The inauguration
"For the Day of The Lord of hosts shall be upon every one that is proud and lofty, and
upon everyone that is lifted up; he shall be brought low." (Isaiah 2:12)
As with everything, God has a purpose. The purpose of the Days of Awe and Repentance - The
Great Tribulation and the Hour of Jacob's Trouble - is to get mankind, and Israel, to wake up
and to repent. It is His last call, last chance, desperate attempt to wake up those that are still
asleep that will wake up before time runs out in this age of free choice. Before full divine self-
revelation on the Day of The Lord. In this way, His wrath is an act of love. Similar to how 9/11
was a day of awe that woke up many people. Like 9/11, people will be looking up, in awe,
except what will unfold will be many times more horrible, and worldwide.
Amos 5:18-20: Woe unto you that desire The Day of The Lord. To what end is it for you?
The Day of The Lord is darkness and not light. As if a man did flee from a lion, and a bear
met him; or went into the house, and leaned up against the wall and a serpent bit him.
Shall not The Day of The Lord be darkness, and not light? Even very dark, and no
brightness in it?
The ancient Jewish betrothal process symbolizes the Rapture of the Church (those in the body
of Christ) in many ways. Jesus referred to His Church as His Bride and referenced the
traditional Jewish betrothal process to describe the union of Himself and His Bride. In the
traditional Jewish betrothal process, after proposing, the bridegroom would leave the bride and
return to His father's house and prepare a room for His bride.
The timing of the bridegroom's return for his bride would be left a surprise. The occasion of his
return was a loud celebration of joyous shouts and rams horns blowing, which is another reason
for knowing that the Feast of Trumpets is a type for the Rapture. Also, the bridegroom would
typically return at night, and so oil lamps were lit by the bride in waiting. This parallels the oil
lamps of the virgins in waiting in Jesus' Ten Virgins parable. After the bridegroom's return he
would then take her to the bridal chamber for the consummation of the marriage. This is a type
for the end the Church Age, when the raptured believers, and those that have died before, are
resurrected and changed into their immortal bodies. Afterward, the wedding banquet feast
would typically last seven days. This is a type for the Wedding Banquet in Heaven with those
that are raptured and resurrected. The seven days symbolize the seven years that the
Church will be hidden in their heavenly bridal chambers while the inhabitants of the earth
experience God's indignation. As described in the following Old Testament passage.
Isaiah 26:19-21:
The other two fall feasts are the Feast of Atonement, and the Feast of Tabernacles. The Feast
of Atonement should be the Day of The Lord. The Day of the Lord's Second Coming, along with
His saints that were raptured and resurrected before the Tribulation 7 years. This day will see
the destruction of Antichrist, and the nations that are gathered to destroy Israel. As well, it is the
day when the Jewish remnant "look upon Him whom they have pierced", repent for their sins,
and finally receive Him as their Messiah.
Zechariah 12:10: (520 BC) And I will pour out on the house of David and the inhabitants of
Jerusalem a spirit of grace and supplication. They will look on me, the one they have
pierced, and they will mourn for him as one mourns for an only child, and grieve bitterly for
him as one grieves for a firstborn son. On that day the weeping in Jerusalem will be as
great as the weeping of Hadad Rimmon in the plain of Megiddo. The land will mourn, each
The Feast of Booths/Tabernacles symbolizes a time of renewed fellowship with God. The Feast
of Tabernacles shadows the time when He will once again "tabernacle" with His people as He
reigns over all the world - His kingdom - in the Messianic Age (Micah 4:1-7).
Zechariah 14:16-19: The survivors from all the nations that have attacked Jerusalem will
go up year after year to worship the King, the Lord Almighty, and to celebrate the Festival
of Tabernacles. If any of the peoples of the earth do not go up to Jerusalem to worship the
King, the Lord Almighty, they will have no rain. If the Egyptian people do not go up and
take part, they will have no rain. The Lord will bring on them the plague he inflicts on the
nations that do not go up to celebrate the Festival of Tabernacles. This will be the
punishment of all the nations that do not go up to celebrate the Festival of Tabernacles.
Recently, it has come to light that the Star of Bethlehem was an actual real astronomical event.
Why was it not known before? First, we couldn't have known what the stars in the ancient sky
looked like, until we discovered the math behind the movements of the solar system. The laws
and math that Johannes Kepler discovered in the 1600's are the same laws and math that
NASA uses today. NASA is able to launch a rocket and reach a celestial body because the
mathematics are precise, and the celestial movements are extremely regular, like a clock. Now,
with modern software, in an instant, we can view what the night sky looked like at any point in
history, and we can also animate the sky.
Job 9:9 [Job speaking] He is the Maker of the Bear and Orion, the Pleiades and the
constellations of the south.
Job 38:31-32 [God speaking] “Can you bind the chains of the Pleiades? Can you loosen Orion’s
belt? Can you bring forth the constellations in their seasons..."
Isaiah 40:26 Lift up your eyes and look to the heavens: Who created all these? He who brings
out the starry host one by one and calls forth each of them by name. Because of his great
power and mighty strength, not one of them is missing.
David uses verb after verb to say that the stars communicate.
In the book of Romans, Paul is asking the rhetorical question, did the Jews know the messiah
had come. Romans 10:17-18 "Consequently, faith comes from hearing the message, and the
message is heard through the word of Christ. But I ask: Did they [the Jews] not hear? Of course
they did: "Their voice has gone out into all the earth, their words to the ends of the world."" He
quotes David! He's saying his people, the Jews, knew because the stars told them.
Jesus - Luke 21:25 "There will be signs in the sun, moon, and stars..."
The Magi (Three Wise Men) and the 9 clues in the book of Matthew
A lawyer named Robert Larson looked into the Star of Bethlehem mystery, and determined that
there are 9 clues contained within the gospel of Matthew, that should align with whatever the
star was. Without going into too much detail, I will cover some main points. Ancient historical
records from the library of Alexandria tell us the eastern school of magi in Babylon were the
protoscientists of their day. They were probably Jews, descended from Jews like Daniel that
stayed behind after the Babylonian captivity ended. The prophecy in the book of Daniel chapter
9 regarding the coming Messiah after the 173,880 days from Artaxerxes' decree in 445 BC, as
discussed earlier in this writing, had the Magi looking in the sky at this time for three things:
birth; Jewish nation; and kingship.
This theory of the Magi explains why they were excited to travel 700 miles and worship the
Jewish king. This also explains why Herod and everyone else were shocked and unaware of the
star/sign. Herod also asked for the exact timing of the star/sign, even though in those days there
was no light pollution, and people often slept outside on top of their roofs, under the stars. If it
were obvious, like a comet, everyone would have known about it. From Matthew we know that
Herod then directed the Magi to Bethlehem, because of the prophecy in the book of Micah
regarding the Messiah being born there. The one possibility for the star that the Magi saw, but
others missed, are the wandering stars. Planets - from the Greek to wander.
Might Jupiter, the star known as the "King Star" from ages old, be the Star of Bethlehem?
(Jupiter was known by the Jews as the planet of the Messiah.)
Kingship
It turns out that in the autumn of 3 BC, the year the star/sign should have occurred (using a
correct dating of Herod's death in 1 BC, derived from copies of Flavius Josephus predating the
16th century), Jupiter's movements fulfilled all 9 required clues in Matthew. First, Jupiter,
the king planet, did a triple conjunction with the king star, Regulus, due to retrograde motion.
Jewish nation
From Genesis 49:9-10 we are told that of the 12 tribes of Israel, the Messiah would come from
the tribe of Judah. We are also told the symbol for the tribe of Judah is the lion, and that the
Messiah would be like a lion. Regulus, the king star, is in the constellation of Leo the lion.
Jupiter's triple conjunction, and crowning of Regulus was in Leo. This is the Jewish nation sign
the Magi were looking for.
Birth
In Jewish culture life begins at conception. The crowning of the king sign, was the conception
sign. Nine months later, in June 2 BC, the two brightest stars in the sky, Jupiter and the woman
planet, Venus, conjoined. In this conjunction they stacked together and added to each other's
light to form the brightest star anyone had ever seen. Astronomers know it was the brightest
ever from the math - Kepler's math. From Babylon, this conjunction occurred in the western sky,
right over Jerusalem as the sun set. This was the birth sign the Magi were looking for.
The last clue in Matthew is that the star was in the south by the time the Magi got to Jerusalem.
Bethlehem is 5 miles south of Jerusalem. Sure enough, Jupiter was in the southern sky by
December 2 BC, and over Bethlehem as they looked south from Jerusalem. But how did it stop
over Bethlehem? Retrograde motion explains this. Amazingly, Jupiter stopped and reversed
course over Bethlehem on December 25th, 2 BC. December 25th was not the date of birth of
Jesus, but it quite likely was the date of the first Christmas.
No other sign in the Bible is called a "great sign". Signs are portents, and thus they symbolize
something. Obviously, this passage is filled symbolism, and is not be interpreted literally. Given
that there is mention of the moon, sun, and stars, this sign that appears in heaven is a sign that
appears in the night sky. Similar to the Star of Bethlehem, this sign must be some type
of alignment of the celestial bodies mentioned. What celestial alignment could explain this sign?
And what is its significance?
After the discovery of the Star of Bethlehem came out in 2007, this insight led others to look into
other heavenly signs described in the Bible. Using widely available astronomy software, what
has been discovered regarding this sign is truly astonishing! First, what does it mean?
Revelation 12:4-6 And the dragon stood before the woman who was about to give birth,
so that when she bore her child he might devour it. She gave birth to a man child, one
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 1114
who is to rule all the nations with a rod of iron, but her child was caught up to God and
to his throne, and the woman fled into the wilderness, where she has a place prepared by
God, in which she is to be nourished for 1,260 days.
Without getting into too much end time eschatological detail and scriptural references, we know
that the woman corporately represents Israel. We also know that the dragon corporately
represents the Antichrist's system that persecutes Israel in the last days. We know for example
that at the mid point of the Tribulation (1,260 days), many Christ believing Jews will flee
Jerusalem into the wilderness, probably to Petra. If the woman and dragon are symbols for
corporate bodies, therefore the "man child" is also a symbol for something corporate. Therefore
the man child doesn't only symbolize Christ, but also his body - The Church. Proper
understanding of Scripture also informs us that Christ will not be ruling "the nations with a rod of
iron" by Himself, but will be ruling with His body - The Church - in the Messianic Age.
The word used for "caught up" in the Greek manuscripts is harpazo. Harpazo does not mean
ascended, but rather it has an aggressive, violent meaning, more like to snatch away, or to yank
something out of something. When translating the Greek Septuagint into Latin, Saint Jerome
used the word rapio. From which we get the English word rapture. Also, in this passage, the
word harpazo is used in a rescue context. So, this passage is a Rapture passage. And this sign
is the Rapture sign! The understanding that this a Rapture sign is not new among theologians,
and it dates back centuries. What is recent, is the understanding of what the sign itself actually
is. So, if it is a sign in the night sky, when does it occur?
The sign of Revelation 12 has many details that are common, but uncommon when all put
together. How uncommon? It appears only once in all of human history! Again, we know this
from Kepler's math and modern software. The woman is represented by Virgo--the virgin. The
first part of the sign is the woman clothed with the sun. This happens every year, but it narrows
the time down to one month around the autumnal equinox. She is clothed by the sun from mid-
September to early October. September 23, 2017 meets these requirements.
The next requirement is that the moon must be under the feet of Virgo. With the sun in Virgo
and her feet to the east, the moon must be at new moon. The Hebrew Calendar is lunar and the
Feast of Trumpets (sunset September 21 to sunset September 23, 2017) is on the new moon.
The Feast of Trumpet's new moon aligning directly under Virgo's feet happens most years, as
long as the new moon did not occur too early or too late in relation to the equinox, which would
put the sun too high or low in Virgo. Astronomy software shows us that the moon will be directly
under Virgo's feet on September 23, 2017. The requirement of the moon and sun narrows it
On September 23, 2017 there are four planets in the vicinity that complete the sign and its
ultimate uniqueness. Mercury, Venus, Mars, and Jupiter play their parts. Above the head of
Virgo is the constellation Leo. In Leo at this time there will be Mars, Venus, and Mercury. With
Leo being a constellation of nine principle stars, the three wandering stars make it twelve at this
time. Thus the crown of twelve stars on the head of the woman. For three planets to be in Leo at
this time with all of the other preconditions makes this extremely rare. Combined with the final
piece of the picture below is what makes this sign occur once in history.
"She was pregnant and was crying out in birth pains and the agony of giving birth... She
gave birth to a man child...."
The final piece of the sign is Jupiter. Jupiter was known by the Jews as the planet of the
Messiah. Jupiter goes through the constellation Virgo about every 12 years. What is special
about this time is the exceedingly rare retrograde action it does inside the womb of Virgo. The
lines connect the stars of Virgo to form a quadrangle - her abdomen/womb. Not only is it
amazing that this retrograde motion keeps Jupiter inside her womb, but it stays in her womb for
between 9 and 10 months (depending on which stars are connected to make the
abdomen/womb), which is a healthy human gestation period. Incredibly, Jupiter exits Virgo's
abdomen a few days before The Feast of Trumpets, which lends more evidence to this being
the birth sign. It is the birth of the matured Church into Heaven after 2000 years of gestation.
By arguing that the first sign is clearly one shown in the heavens, that would mean this sign is
also to be seen in the night sky, and is not simply figurative language. Rising in the night
sky right after Virgo, is the constellation Draco. One of the 48 constellations listed by 2nd-
century astronomer Ptolemy, and one of the 88 modern constellations. Draco is Latin for
dragon.
In Draco’s head four stars are visible, but three of those stars are binary, which results in seven
stars. The brightest star in the constellation is Ethanin, which in the Hebrew means “the long
serpent or dragon”. It is located in the head. Ethanin is a red giant star giving the definition of
red to the dragon.
Right next to Bootes, above the head of Draco, is the constellation Corona Borealis. One of the
48 constellations listed by 2nd-century astronomer Ptolemy, and one of the 88 modern
constellations. Corona Borealis in Latin means "the northern crown.” Wikipedia’s definition for
diadem is “a jeweled crown or headband worn as a symbol of sovereignty”
.
“And his tail swept away a third of the stars of heaven and threw them to the earth.”
The details of the sign described thus far exist in the heavens at any given time. This sign is
different from the Woman since there are no time markers such as the positioning of the sun,
moon, or planets. However, this sign is to be paired with the sign of the Woman, which does
place this at a specific time. As a sign in heaven, all it then needs is a meteor shower coming
from the Dragon–Draco.
There is a meteor shower called the Draconids that occurs every year on October 7-9th as the
earth passes through the orbit trail of Comet 21P/Giacobini-Zinner that has an orbital period of
6.6 years (EarthSky). The falling stars appear to come out of Draco and the showers of 1933
and 1946 were some of the biggest of last century. There were bursts in 2005, 2011, and 2012.
“And the dragon stood before the woman who was about to give birth, so that when she
gave birth he might devour her child.”
The position of Draco and its head is perfectly placed to appear to be waiting for the birth of the
man child sign in Revelation 12:2. Draco here represents the kingdom of the Antichrist
empowered by the dragon, the serpent of old--Satan.
UN Resolution 2334
If the Feast of Trumpets on September 23, 2017 is the birth of the Church, and Jupiter's pattern
inside the womb of Virgo represents this, then it becomes extremely interesting that exactly 9
months (human gestation period) before on December 23, 2016, UN Resolution 2334 passed,
condemning Israel's rights to their land, including their capital East Jerusalem. It was the first
such condemnation that was not vetoed by the United States. Barack Obama finally showed his
true colors on his way out, and orchestrated the resolution behind the scenes to be passed on
the eve of Christmas to reduce media attention.
What is the significance of these blood moons? If you recall, at the beginning of this writing I
said to take note of the number 1,260. This was after demonstrating that the year 1948, the year
Israel was born, is clearly in the Bible by adding 1,260 years to 688 AD, which is the year the
Dome of The Rock began to be constructed, and what is preventing the End Times from
starting. There are 7 passages in Daniel and Revelation containing 1,260. One of the
significances of this tetrad, is that the first one on April 15, 2014 comes exactly 1,260
days before the Feast of Trumpets on September 23, 2017! There are many more amazing
numerical relationships between the blood moons tetrads, and I have links to these on the my
website in the additional resources section.
John 21 is one of the richest passages in all of Scripture. Filled with symbolism, its theme is that
of redemption. In scripture fish symbolize believers. Four of the disciples were fishermen, and
Jesus told his disciples that they would be fishers of men. Jesus began his ministry in AD 28
and therefore began his efforts in fishing for men. After his time on earth, the twelve disciples
become the twelve apostles and were sent to spread the gospel. The apostles trained others
and those others have passed this understanding down to us. Jesus said that "this gospel of the
kingdom will be preached in all the world as a testimony to all nations, and then the end will
come." This time of preaching the gospel, and fishing of men, is the age of the Church, and
is also known as the age of the fish. The gospel has now gone around the world, and even
remote tribes deep in the Amazon have now heard it. Therefore, the end of the Church age is
soon.
As one of Jesus’ last and most mysterious miracles, this would seem to support the theme of
fishing for men until the time of the harvest of fish. Is the Feast of Trumpets 2017 the time of
that harvest?
Of all of the symbolism in this chapter, none has been as intriguing as to what the significance
of such a distinct number might be. Now we have a good answer. Jesus started His ministry in
28 AD. Him, plus his twelve disciples equals 13. From AD 28 until 2017 is 1989 years, which is
exactly 13 times 153 years. At such a large increment of 153, it is probably not a coincidence
that 2017 is such a direct hit. But not only does 2017 hit the increment of 153 years from AD 28,
it hits it at 13 increments, just like the number of disciples plus Jesus in the beginning.
Daniel 9:24-25 “Seventy ‘sevens’ are decreed for your people and your holy city to
finish transgression, to put an end to sin, to atone for wickedness, to bring in everlasting
righteousness, to seal up vision and prophecy and to anoint the Most Holy Place. Know
and understand this: From the time the word goes out to restore and rebuild Jerusalem
until the Messiah, the ruler, comes, there will be seven ‘sevens,’ and sixty-two
‘sevens.’ It will be rebuilt with a broad wall, but in times of trouble."
Again, "there will be seven ‘sevens,’ and sixty-two ‘sevens" = 69 x 7 years = 483 years
March 14, 445 BC, Artaxerxes Longimanus issues the decree to rebuild Jerusalem and its walls.
Palm Sunday, April 6, 32 AD, Jesus presents Himself as the Prince at the Triumphal Entry.
March 14, 445 BC to Palm Sunday, April 6, 32 AD is 173,880 days = 483 x 360-day years = 69
x 7 years
Gabriel said to Daniel: "After the 62 weeks [plus prior 7 weeks = 69 weeks], Messiah shall be
cut off..."
1465 years after Jesus was crucified and Jerusalem and the Temple were destroyed in 70 AD,
in 1535 AD, Suleiman the Magnificent decreed to rebuild the walls of Jerusalem.
Then in 1969 AD on Passover, the Knesset in Israel founded the JQDC to rebuild war torn
Jerusalem.
The World is entering the year - 2021 AD with the 21 Global issues which would
lead the whole world into a Big War by 2021 - 2022 AD with the implementation of
the New World Order plan and Agenda 21 by the Elite of the World.
The Strait of Hormuz is a strait between the Persian Gulf and the Gulf of Oman. It
provides the only sea passage from the Persian Gulf to the open ocean and is one of
the world's most strategically important choke points. On the north coast lies Iran,
and on the south coast the United Arab Emirates and Musandam,
an exclave of Oman. The strait is about 90 nautical miles (167 km) long, with a
width varying from about 52 nautical miles (96 km) to 21 nautical miles (39 km).
A third of the world’s liquefied natural gas and almost 25% of total global oil
consumption passes through the strait, making it a highly important strategic
location for international trade.
Since President Donald Trump pulled the U.S. out of the 2015 Iran nuclear deal,
Iranian President Hassan Rouhani and others in Tehran have reinvigorated a long-
made threat that the Islamic Republic could close off the strait. Meanwhile, Gulf
officials say that a “sabotage” attack targeted oil tankers off the coast of Fujairah in
the United Arab Emirates. That’s a point where many ships travelling through the
strait stop.
In response Iran got the military help from Russia and China and they are also
exerting their military presence and pressure.
There are lot of instances happenned in 2019 AD when Tanker Ships were attacked
and USA put blame on Iran for these terrorist attacks which Iran denied. The
Foreign Minister of Iran said that the Persian Gulf region would become a tender
box if any miscalculation happenned from any side.
As we are heading towards more tensions in that region and Israel along with Saudi
Arabia and UAE are helping each other to attack Iran in the coming years of 2021 -
2022 AD after the elections in USA.
It was also predicted by our Prophet Muhammad (PBUH) that the Strait of Hormuz
region would be closed for the Ships in the End Times before the Arrival of Mahdi
because of war in that region.
"In the End Times, the people would build bathroom in their homes near
the bed rooms and the kitchens."
If we see the construction of homes just 100 years ago around 1920 AD in the
World, we notice that people build the bath rooms and wash rooms away from
their houses in little far away places to control and manage the waste from them.
Now in the last 100 years, people start building the washrooms and bathrooms in
their houses near the bed rooms and kitchens.
This prophecy has also been fulfilled as told by our Hazrat Imam Ali (AS) 1400
hundred years ago.
In the recent years, UAE allowed Hindus to open one of the biggest Hindu temples
in the city of Dubai. Saudi Arabia, UAE and Bahrain gave highest awards to one of
the biggest enemies of Muslims i.e. the President of India - Mr. Moodi.
According to Brazil's National Institute for Space Research, there have been around
100,000 wildfires in the entirety of the country so far this year—a 45 percent
increase on the same period last year. More than half of these fires (around 53,000)
have occurred in the Amazon biome—the highest number in this region since 2010.
Fire in the Amazon is used as a technique to clear land, usually for agriculture—the
biggest driver of deforestation in the Amazon, alongside mining and other forms of
land-grabbing. Farmers and other groups cut down vegetation and then wait for the
dry season to ignite the fires. In this sense, humans are the main cause of fire in the
Amazon—although natural wildfires do sometimes occur.
According to the ESA, the loss of trees in the Amazon through deforestation is
concerning with regards to the global climate because of the role they play in acting
as a carbon sink.
"The Amazon is a carbon sink, which slows the rate of carbon dioxide build up in the
atmosphere, and thus climate warming," James Randerson from the University of
California, Irvine, told Newsweek.
Ecologist and author Sandra Steingraber from Ithaca College said that around half of
the carbon dioxide that is pulled out of the atmosphere by the earth's biosphere on
land is sucked up by tropical forests. But in the face of deforestation, the Amazon,
at least, may be losing this ability
The European Space Agency (ESA) has said that forest fires in the Amazon could be
having an impact on global climate change as they release carbon dioxide into the
atmosphere. On Monday, the organization released satellite imagery which
provided new details of the impact of the blazes.
The data showed an increase in air pollution in the Brazilian Amazon as fires
ravaged the region in August, the Associated Press reported.
Despite President Jair Bolsonaro announcing a 60-day ban on land clearing-fires last
month, blazes have continued to burn in the rainforest. Not only could these have
an impact on global warming through the release of carbon dioxide, but the fires
are also emitting several other pollutants into the air which can be damaging to
human health.
Wildfire season is generally defined as the time period between the year’s
first and last large wildfires. This infographic highlights the length of the
wildfire season for the Western U.S. as a region. Local wildfire seasons vary
by location, but have almost universally become longer over the past 40
years.
The following article is reproduced with the courtesy of the following website:
https://www.ucsusa.org/global-warming/science-and-impacts/impacts/global-
warming-and-wildfire.html
As the climate warms, moisture and precipitation levels are changing, with wet
areas becoming wetter and dry areas becoming drier.
These hot, dry conditions also increase the likelihood that wildfires will be more
intense and long-burning once they are started by lightning strikes or human error.
The costs of wildfires, in terms of risks to human life and health, property damage,
and state and federal dollars, are devastating, and they are only likely to increase
unless we better address the risks of wildfires and reduce our activities that lead to
further climate change.
Natural cycles, human activities like land-use change and fire exclusion, and human-
caused climate change can all influence the likelihood of wildfires. Many of the
areas that have seen increased wildfire activity, like Yosemite National Park and
the Northern Rockies, are protected from or relatively unaffected by human land-
use change, suggesting that climate change is a major factor driving the increase in
wildfires in these places.
Natural, cyclical weather occurrences such as El Niño events also affect the
likelihood of wildfires by affecting levels of precipitation and moisture and lead to
year-by-year variability in the potential for drought and wildfires regionally.
Surprisingly, some dry grasslands may be less at risk of catching fire because the
intense aridity is likely to prevent these grasses from growing at all, leaving these
areas so barren that they are likely to lack the fodder for wildfires to start and
spread.
A conflagration of costs
The economic costs of wildfires can be crippling. Data on total US property damage
from wildfires are hard to come by, but the costs are estimated to be on the level
of hundreds of millions of dollars per year.
In addition to property damage, wildfires cost states and the federal government
millions in fire-suppression management. The US Forest Service’s yearly fire-
suppression costs have exceeded $1 billion for 13 of the 18 years between 2000 and
2017. In 2015, these costs exceeded $2 billion, and in 2017 they totaled almost $3
billion. The risk to property owners is particularly acute in areas at the “wildland-
urban interface.” In California alone, this area includes more than 5 million
homes in coastal southern California, the Bay Area, and northeast of Sacramento.
The environmental and health costs of wildfires are also considerable. Not only do
wildfires threaten lives directly, but they have the potential to increase local air
pollution, exacerbating lung diseases and causing breathing difficulties even in
healthy individuals.
Our Prophet Muhammad (PBUH) predicted 1400 years ago that the Heat would rise
in the World before the Arrival of Mahdi as we are witnessing this prophecy before
our eyes all over the World.
Now the Signs and Symbols of the Pharoah's Kingdom are showing every where in
the World especially USA, France and UK. They have established their rule again in
the World and have become the Modern Dajjal of the World.
The Bible is filled with signs as to what the end times will look like. Some signs are
so specific we can’t miss them. For example, in Matthew 24:15-16 Jesus pointed out
one sure sign of the end times: “So when you see standing in the holy place 'the
abomination that causes desolation,' spoken of through the prophet Daniel — let
the reader understand—then let those who are in Judea flee to the mountains…”
Jesus expects His readers to understand the signs of the end. How will we know
what to look for? We study the Scriptures.
God told the prophet Daniel that when the end is near, many seemingly enigmatic
verses will become clear. Probably because as the events prophesied are
increasingly fulfilled, the more clear other signs will become.
As Daniel concluded his prophecy in chapter twelve, he asked God to let him in on
the timing of the end-time events. God deflected his request in verse four: “But
you, Daniel, close up and seal the words of the scroll until the time of the end…”
(Notice that when the end is near everything will become more clear).
Daniel then asked the two angels standing nearby, “How long will it be before these
astonishing things are fulfilled?”
An angel replied in verse seven, “It will be for a time, times, and half a time. When
the power of the holy people has been finally broken, all these things will be
completed.”
Daniel confessed in verse eight that he still did not understand so once again He
asked the Lord, "My Lord, what will the outcome of all this be?"
God replied in verse nine, “Go your way, Daniel, because the words are closed up
and sealed until the time of the end…. None of the wicked will understand, but
those who are wise will understand."
So, rest assured that discerning spiritual men and women in the Body of Christ will
be able to read the signs—and will be happy to share what they see with you.
Notice I said, “spiritual men and women.” Jesus predicted that near the end of time
many false individuals will confuse many (this, of course, is another sign in itself).
But, don’t stop by depending on the insights of others. Do your own homework. Be
a biblical “self feeder” and check these things out for yourself.
So that you won't have to go searching to get started, I've listed below the basic
prophetical books and passages in order to help make your study a little easier.
Scriptures that explain the signs and events of the End Times:
Psalms 2
The Psalm of the battle of Armageddon: Nations rage; God laughs; and the
exaltation of Christ as Lord
A time line of events from the days of Daniel, 598 B.C. to Palm Sunday, April
6, 30 A.D.
An overview of the last seven years before the Second Coming known as the
Great Tribulation which begins with a peace treaty between Israel and a
confederation of European states and ends with the Battle of Armageddon
and the return of Christ
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 1145
Ezekiel 37
The prophecy of the return of Jews from all over the world to the land of
Israel to reestablish the nation of Israel (the dispersion occurred in 70 A.D.
and against all odds, the return took place in 1948 A.D.)
The battle between Gog, from the land of the north (Magog), that is directly
north of Jerusalem (Russia??) and the nation of Israel. Gog, who is allied with
a number of African nations is soundly defeated. The battle probably occurs
before the time of Great Tribulation.
Zechariah 12:10-14
The Israelites weep and repent when they see the nail-scarred hands of Christ
at the second coming.
Matthew 24
Known as the Olivet Discourse, Jesus answers the Disciples' questions about
the end times and the future destruction of Israel.
1 Thessalonians 4:13-18
A description of the rapture when Jesus comes "for His saints" and takes
them to Heaven.
2 Thessalonians 2:1-12
When "that which restrains" (either the Holy Spirit or the church) is removed
from earth, the Lord's wrath is unleashed.
2 Peter 2
The Second Coming time table is right on schedule. God is not delaying.
Jude
In order to read the signs well and not be deceived, I recommend that you:
Listen to spiritual men and women who listen to God for their insights into
"the times of the end."
: “But you, brothers, are not in darkness so that this day should surprise you like a
thief…”
These verses form the skeleton for all prophecy. All other prophetical passages are
the meat on the skeleton. Revelation, Ezekiel, the Olivet Discourse, 1 & 2
Thessalonians are only understood with a foundational understanding of Daniel 9.
God had a plan for Israel that lasted 70 years. We know these years as the
Babylonian Captivity. At the conclusion of the 70 years, God revealed to Daniel that
He had another program for Israel (Daniel 9:1-23) which would last 490 years and
culminate at the second coming of Christ.
God’s new plan for Israel began at the command of Artaerxes (444 B.C.) to restore
and to rebuild Jerusalem. The program would end 490 years later at the second
coming of Jesus Christ.
Let’s simplify: The time from the decree to restore Jerusalem until Jesus would
come is 483 years. Using Jewish prophetic years of 360 days per year this figures
out, incredibly, to April 6, 32 A.D. 483 years after the decree to rebuild Jerusalem,
Christ rode into Jerusalem on Palm Sunday. The 483 year period is over. There are
seven years left to complete the plan.
Jesus knew Daniel’s prophecy. He knew that this was the exact day he was to enter
Jerusalem. Unfortunately, He knew that the people failed to understand what was
happening. “If only you had known,” He said. And He wept over the city.
Here is one of the clearest testimonies in the Bible of the death of Jesus Christ
(Isaiah 53:8 and Matthew 16:21).
The “Ruler who is to come" refers to the destruction of Jerusalem by the Romans
who were led by Titus in 70 A.D. Titus foreshadowed the Antichrist who would
eventually destroy the temple and then rule during the last seven-year-period
known as the Tribulation. He's the little horn of Daniel 7:8 and the Beast of Rev. 13.
There is a “time out” after the end of 483 years and before the beginning of the last
seven years. We are not in “time out” (Luke 4:18-21, Isaiah 61:1-2 and Hosea 3:4-5).
At the Triumphant Entry of Christ into Jerusalem on Palm Sunday, 30 AD, God's
prophetic time clock stopped. The hands are poised at 483, indicating that there is
still one "seven" to go.
How long is God's plan for Israel? 490 years. Not really.
4. The time period between the crucifixion of Jesus and his second coming is known
as the “Great Parenthesis” or, the “Church Age.”
Daniel 9:27: “He will confirm a covenant with many for one 'seven.' In the middle of
the 'seven' he will put an end to sacrifice and offering. And on a wing [of the
temple] he will set up an abomination that causes desolation, until the end that is
decreed is poured out on him."
1. The final seven years begin when the Antichrist makes a peace covenant with the
nation of Israel.
Three and one-half years into the final seven the Antichrist breaks the covenant. He
puts an end to sacrifices and offerings in the temple; and, indwelt by Satan
(Revelation 12:9, 12; 13:4), he sets up the Abomination of Desolation in the rebuilt
Temple in Jerusalem. Jesus says, “Get out of town fast the Holocaust is now
beginning!”
2. The Battle of Armageddon soon follows and the Antichrist is cast into a hellish
prison (Revelation 19:20).
Note the following verses that reveal a Biblical paradox concerning Christ’s second
coming. In each case, the first verse describes the Rapture while the second verse
describes the Revelation.
1 Thessalonians 5:2 and Revelation 16:15: “He will come in secret, as a ‘thief
in the night.’”
1 Thessalonians 4:16-17 and John 14:2-3: “He will come ‘for’ His saints.’”
The only way to reconcile these verses is to understand that Christ's second coming
is in two stages:
Rapture
The first stage occurs when Christ comes in the air, in secret, in great blessing and
hope, for His saints to remove them to Heaven. This is called the Rapture. Rapture
comes from a Latin word, Rapturo which means to catch away.
Revelation
The second stage occurs at the end of the last seven-year period when Christ comes
to the ground, with every eye on Him, with His saints, to bring judgment and
punishment. This is called the Revelation.
Will Christians be here? That depends upon which scenario you choose.
There are three major choices with a number of variation to consider as we attempt
to pinpoint when rapture will occur during the end times:
1. Pre-Tribulation is the view that the rapture will occur sometime before, or at the
beginning, of the final seven years. This is the view my wife espouses. She doesn’t
want to be anywhere near those last seven years.
God has rescued His people from great trouble in the past. He closed the door of
the ark and Noah and his family were saved from the flood.
He opened the Red Sea to make a way of escape for Israel when the Egyptians were
on them.
In Daniel 3, Daniel is absent from the fiery furnace. Some believe that by missing
the fire he is a pre-figure of the deliverance of Christians by the rapture.
2. Mid-Tribulation is the view that the rapture will occur in the middle of the seven
years when the Antichrist sets up the Abomination Of Desolation on the altar in the
Temple. Like pre-Tribulationists, mid-Tribulationists will not experience the horrors
of the last 3½ years described in Revelation.
3. Post-Tribulationists believe that the rapture occurs after the seven-years, and
that, therefore, Christians will go through the horrors described in the book of
Revelation. There are verses that may support this interpretation, but I hope not. I
don’t want to be anywhere around that horrible time.
Dr. Roger Barrier recently retired as senior teaching pastor from Casas Church in
Tucson, Arizona. In addition to being an author and sought-after conference
speaker, Roger has mentored or taught thousands of pastors, missionaries, and
Christian leaders worldwide. Casas Church, where Roger served throughout his
The Western Capitalism is falling and the massive Global Debt of $250 Trillion
dollars is about to burst. There are several Economic indicators which are indicating
that the World would be entering into the Worst Economic Collapse in 2021 AD.
The World would see the Big Economic Collapse in 2021 AD after the Election in USA
in November, 2020 AD. The Banks and Governments would hold the Economic
Collapse until the US Elections would finalize and then in early 2021 AD, the World
would see the Big Global Debt Bubble bursting and the World Powers would start a
World War in Middle East spreading to all parts of the World.
Hazrat Ali predicted 1400 years ago that the Land of Syria would see conflicts and
Wars in the End Times before the Arrival of Mahdi and the Great War would erupt
at the End of the Syrian Conflict when the opposite parties would not reach to any
success. The speech of Hazrat Ali is in the Book - "Bihar Al Anwar" in the Chapters
of Mahdi
Now we are entering in 2020 AD and the ISIS forces have been defeated by Syria
with the help of Iran, Russia and Hezbollah. The US, Israel and Saudi Arabia failed
to remove the President Bashar Al Assad till today as they removed Sadam
Hussain of Iraq and President Qadaffi of Libya after the US military interventions in
those countries.
As predicted by Hazrat Ali that no party would become get any success and at the
End of the Syrian Conflict, a Big War (3rd World War) would start in the Middle
East and at the End of that Great War, the Arrival of Mahdi would take place.
After the Elections in USA in November, 2020 AD, the World would enter into
Global Economic Collapse and then the Bankers and the World Elite would take
the World into a Big Global War known as 3rd World War in the Middle East.
The Israel and Saudi Arabia now openly become political allies in the Middle East
region against Syria and Iran. Saudi Arabia bought Military equipment from Israel
and USA worth of Billions of Dollars in the past few years to be used against Iran,
Syria and Yemen.
As the prophecies of Hazrat Ali and Prophet Muhammad (PBUH) are folding in
front of our eyes, we are coming closer to see the Big War in the Middle East by
2021 - 2022 AD.
Some people even in the Muslim World are saying these days that there is No
Mahdi and Prophet Muhammad (PBUH) had not mentioned about any Mahdi who
would appear in the End Times.
We don't want to mention the names of those Muslim Scholars but if you listen
Islamic programs, you would come across lot of these so called Muslim Scholars
who are rejecting the Basic Islamic Belief of Mahdi which is accepted and
established for the last 1400 years in all the Muslim Sects irrespective of other
religious differences in understanding the Holy Quran and interpreting the Sunnah
of Prophet Muhammad (PBUH).
So this is another very strong sign of the Imam Mahdi's appearance and the time of
His Arrival is also coming very near.
In recent years, we notice that Tattoos have become very popular in most Western
countries and the people of the other countries are blindly following the fashions of
the West.
So even in Muslim countries, the fashion of putting Tattoos on your body became a
popular fashion and modern trend.
The Bible mentions that the Mark of the Beast i.e. Satan would be on the bodies of
the people and even Hazrat Ali mentions about the Tattoos in their Sayings.
Tattoos are not the modern concept. The people in Africa and South America put
Tattoos on their bodies even centuries ago.
Tattoos are created from piercing body parts with needles while injecting colours other
than the natural skin colour. This would permanently decolour the skin.
Tattooing, these days, has become a fashion and is practised by both genders, Ahaidth
2-4, below forbid the tattooing for both genders. For more information on tattooing of
pictures of animals, living beings, strange creatures and signs, which are surely
forbidden.
The problem with tattooing Holy Names and/or Verses is that one cannot remove them
(the permanent tattoos) upon becoming ‘Najis’ (in the state of impurity), so it would imply
certain restrictions for its bearer which are difficult to comply with, as per several Ahadith,
see, for example the following Hadith:
Mohammed ibn Yahya has narrated from Ahmad ibn Mohammed from al-Hussain ibn Sayd
from Hammad ibn Isa, who from Al-Hussain ibn Al-Mukhtar, who from Abu Basir, who has
said the following:
‘I once asked Abu Abd Allah, about the one who read from a copy of Al-Mushaf (the
Book) without having the Wuzu. The Imam replied: It is not harmful, but one must not
touch the Book in such condition.’
Also there are instructions regarding in removal of the finger rings, engraved with the Holy
names, in the state of impurity.
Below, we have translated three Ahadith, all the other Ahadith which convey the similar
meanings are given as:
‘Abu Abd Allah has said that the Messenger of Allahsaww has cursed tattooing
persons and those (women) who are tattooed, those who raise the price of a piece of
goods for sale without the intention to buy and those who agree to such act’.
And from Qatada who said, ‘When Ibleesla went down, Adam said: ‘O Lord! He has
been cursed. What is his knowledge?’ Allah replied: ‘ The magic’. He asked: ‘What
is his reading?’ Allah replied: ‘The poetry’. He asked: ‘What is his writing?’
Allah replied: ‘The Tatoos’. He asked: ‘What is his food?’ Allah replied: ‘ Every
corpse (dead) and on which the Name of Allah has not been mentioned’. He asked:
‘What is his drink?’ Allah replied: ‘Every intoxicant’. He asked: ‘Where is his
dwelling place?’ Allah replied: ‘The bath’. Heas asked: ‘Where is his sitting (place)?’
Allah replied: ‘The markets’. He asked: ‘What is his voice?’ Allah replied: ‘The
flute’. He asked: ‘What are his traps?’ Allah replied: ‘The women’.
‘When Adamas descended, with knowledge and heas would also learn from the Books
and the Messengers, Ibleesla said to his Lordazwj the High, ‘O Lord, What were the
Books and the Messengers?’ He Said: ‘The Messengers were the Angels and the
Prophets (from Me), and the Books were the Torah, and the Evangel, and the
Psalms, and the Furqan’. He said, ‘And what is my book?’ Allah replied: ‘Your book
(writing) are the Tattoos, and your reading is the poetry, and your messengers
are the soothsayers, and your food is that on which Allah’s Name is not mentioned,
and your drink is every intoxicant, and your charity is the lie, and your house is the
(public) bath, and your entrapments are the women, and your Muezzin (Caller) is the
flute, and your mosque are the market places’.
It is written in Fiqh Al-Reza that Prophet Mohammed has cursed the one who creates
Tattoos by his hand."
References:
The Satan or the Beast as called in the Bible or Lucifer wants people to mark
themselves and label them as His Mark on their bodies.
It is now mandatory in US Army and for the prisoners in USA and optional for
students and parents who wants to volunteer for this program. There are lot of
RFID chips developed recently which would be injected in the skin and remain there
as the Identification tool.
Some people say that the Satan use - Number - 666 as the Mark of the Beast
and that is why 666 is widely used in Commerce and Shopping labels.
4. The famous Saint Malachy mentioned in his writings in 1139 AD that the Jesus
Christ will return after 112th Pope after him. And current Pope Francis is the 112th
Pope and he is considered to be the Last Pope before Jesus Christ in Christianity.
5. Prince Handley in his book, Prophetic Calender for Israel and the Nations: The
Next Decade - Last Days News and Events through 2023 indicate the Coming of
Messiah in 2023 AD.
6. Wayne L Atchison mentioned in his research book, 120 Jubilees - Why 2023 may
be The End of Days mentioned that Adam's punishment would end in 2023 with the
Arrival of Jesus Christ.
9. Mr. Bediuzzaman of Turkey indicated the Arrival of Jesus Christ and Imam Mahdi
after 2022 AD.
11. Famous Muslim Saint, Hazrat Naimatullah Shah Wali mentioned in his writings
more than 850 years ago that there will be Big World War and then Hazrat Esa and
Imam Mahdi would arrive soon after that World War.
12. The famous documentary The Arrivals, available on the Youtube mentioned in
26th Episode that Imam Mahdi and Jesus Christ may arrive in 2023 AD after the
World War and Global Drought.
13. Christian Scholars interpreted the Old Testament, the Book of Daniel, Chapters
8 - 12 that Jesus Christ would return to Earth in 2023 AD.
14. More than 100 scholars and saints gathered in 1974 AD in Seoul, South Korea
and they concluded that the End Times Messiah would return to Earth after 2020
AD and the Divine Kingdom would be established by 2023 AD.
15. The Mayan scholars also indicate that there are 5 Eras and the humans have
entered into the Last and 5th Era on 21st Dec, 2012 AD and soon there would be all
peace and prosperity that will prevail through out this Last Era after 2023 AD.
16. Most of the Muslim scholars are also indicating that we are living in the End
Times and the Arrival of Imam Mahdi and Hazrat Esa is very near in the future.
17. The Jews have already planned to build their 3rd Temple Mount on the place of
Dome of the Rock after demolishing Mosque Al Aqsa fulfilling their prophecy for the
18. The famous Seer, Baba Vanga (Late) of Portugal predicted that the Earth would
change its axis in 2023 AD and the Sun would rise from the West.
19. Most of the Signs of the Arrival of Hazrat Esa and Imam Mahdi have already
been fulfilled in the past and in recent years except few Signs as indicated in the
books of scholars which are hopefully to be seen in coming years.
As one can notice that most scholars of all religions agree that we live in End Times
before the Arrival of Hazrat Esa and Imam Mahdi. We all should pray that we would
remain on Right path and wait and prepare ourselves for the messengers of God
and His Commands.
We don't see the problem of obesity among the people in all the Nations except in
few people all over the world just 50 years ago. Now this is a major health concern
of most people in all the Nations of the World. The Obesity is rampant in all the
Nations of the World these days fulfilling the Prophecy of our Prophet (PBUH)
The following facts are presented with the courtesy of the website:
https://www.medicinenet.com/obesity_weight_loss/article.htm
Obesity means having excess body fat. Adults 35 years of age and older with
a BMI greater than 30 are obese.
Obesity is difficult to treat and has a high relapse rate. Most people who lose
weight regain the weight within five years.
Even though medications and diets can help, the treatment of obesity cannot
be a short-term "fix" but has to be a lifelong commitment to
proper diet habits, increased physical activity, and regular exercise.
The goal of treatment should be to achieve and maintain a "healthier
weight," not necessarily an ideal weight.
Even a modest weight loss of 5%-10% of initial weight and the long-term
maintenance of that weight loss can bring significant health benefits
What is Obesity?
The definition of obesity varies depending on what one reads. In general,
overweight and obesity indicate a weight greater than what is healthy.
Obesity is a chronic condition defined by an excess amount of body fat. A
certain amount of body fat is necessary for storing energy, heat insulation,
shock absorption, and other functions.
Body mass index best defines obesity. A person's height and weight
determines his or her body mass index. The body mass index (BMI) equals a
person's weight in kilograms (kg) divided by their height in meters (m)
squared (more information will be found later in the article). Since BMI
describes body weight relative to height, there is a strong correlation with
total body fat content in adults. An adult who has a BMI of 25-29.9 is
overweight, and an adult who has a BMI over 30 is obese. A person with a
BMI of 18.5-24.9 has a normal weight. A person is morbidly obese (extreme
obesity) if his or her BMI is over 40.
Type 2 (adult-onset) diabetes. The risk of type 2 diabetes increases with the
degree and duration of obesity. Type 2 diabetes is associated with central
obesity; a person with central obesity has excess fat around his/her waist.
High blood pressure (hypertension). Hypertension is common among obese
adults. A Norwegian study showed that weight gain tended to increase blood
pressure in women more significantly than in men.
High cholesterol (hypercholesterolemia)
Stroke (cerebrovascular accident or CVA)
Heart attack. A prospective study found that the risk of developing coronary
artery disease increased three to four times in women who had a BMI greater
than 29. A Finnish study showed that for every 1 kilogram (2.2 pounds)
increase in body weight, the risk of death from coronary artery
disease increased by 1%. In patients who have already had a heart attack,
obesity is associated with an increased likelihood of a second heart attack.
Congestive heart failure
The political Elite in the World decided in 1970's to eliminate the extra
population of the World by different ways and the "Food Genocide" is one of
the most efficient ways to kill people through slow poisoning by making junk
foods popular, hotelling a new way of life and promoting GMC - Genetically
Modified Crops led by Monsontana Group all over the World.
Even the US Secretary of State, Mr. Henry Kissinger introduced the Population
Control program for 13 countries in 1975 by introducing lot of actions
including 2 Children program, Polio Vaccinations which weakens the
Fertilization process in the humans and making Food chains popular all over
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 1179
the World which make junk food in abundance for the people to consume
and become obese.
This is a clear Sign of the Arrival of Mahdi and the Second Coming of the Jesus
Christ when there is no value of life on the planet and the Elite of the World
wants to eliminate the majority of the people by Wars, Slow poisoning by
Junk Foods and Medicines, Drought and Spread of Diseases. The Zionist Elite
consider the people of the world as "Useless Eaters."
They have been working slowly but effectively on their Slow Poisoning
programs and people became victims all over the world. So it is a new disease
which became rampant because of love of eating Junk food of the
Multinational Restaurant Chains.
rd
Skyfall was the 23 Movie of James Bond released on 14th November, 2012.
It’s famous song, “Let the Skyfall” was sung by Adele.
The song was recognized as the Best Song and the Best Singer nomination was
won by Adele in Oscar Awards, 2013.
The famous lyrics of the song are as follows in blue ink and italic style and
its interpretation in Red ink.
rd
It is a 23 James Bond movie and we know that the Arrival of Imam Mahdi is
also in 2023 AD.
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 1182
The 24th Movie of the James Bond was released on 31st December, 2015
named, “Spectre”
If you carefully see the word, NO --- It also shows 1 in between N and
O as O
1 --- ONE
O --- ORDER
New World Order ----- Time to Die
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 1184
Latest Hollywood Movies indicating the End Times &
Armageddon
The latest Hollywood movies indicate the end time of our Modern World and
the coming of New World.
The following are some of the names of the Hollywood Movies as follows:
World War Z
Now you see me
2012
The Ender’s Game
The Running Man
The World’s End
300
Skyfall
The Son of God
Siege
White House Down
The Olympus has Fallen
The Lord of the Ring
The Son of God
300 – The Rise of Empire
Divergent
The Terminator - Series
Oz – The Great and Powerful
Hunger Games
Hunger Games – The Catching Fire
The Last Purge
Insurgent
X – Men – The Days of the Future Past and X – Men – Apocalypse (2016)
Hazrat Ali predicted that in the End Times before the Arrival of Imam Mahdi,
there would be Music in the Marriages of Muslims and the men and women
would sit together in those marriages and eat together.
If we see the culture in the Muslim countries just 50 years ago, the marriages
among the Muslims were mostly simple and there is no music in the
marriages.
Now in the recent years, people are arranging Music Concerts and Music
Functions in the Marriages. It is a common practice in all the Muslim
countries now to arrange Music functions in the Marriages.
The Muslim men and women are also sitting together and eating together
and there is no concept of 'Hijab' in these marriage functions these days.
So another prophecy of Hazrat Ali have also been fulfilled before the Arrival
of Mahdi as the Arrival of Imam is approaching near.
There are lot of terminology used in the Main Stream Media run by Dajjal
forces like, "Islamic Terrorism", "Muslim Terrorist", "Islamic Radicals",
"Muslim Radicals", etc.
There are more than 1.4 billion Muslims all over the World. There are 57
Independent Muslim Countries in the World out of 193 Member states of
UNO. Islam is the fastest growing religion in the World in the last 25 years
and Islam is the 2nd largest Religion with most followers after Christianity.
After 9/11 in New York, USA the religion Islam came under severe attack with
the premise that there is a problem with the religion Islam and its followers
and this religion is creating the Terrorists all over the World.
But if we see that the Dajjal (Satanic) forces suppressed and killed Muslims all
over the World in the name of "War on Terror" initiated by Israel, led by USA
and followed by Western Countries like UK, France, Germany and other
countries of the World like Australia, India and Myanmar, etc.
Then we see the total human disaster and catastrophe in Myanmar when the
Army and political leadership killed and raped hundreds of Muslims living in
More than 70,000 Pakistani Muslims were killed in the War on Terror led by
USA in Afghanistan. The CIA created Taliban and Islamic Afghan forces against
Russia back in 1979 AD and then attacked the same Taliban forces in 2001 AD
when USA wanted to get rid of them and capture Afghanistan.
Recently USA along with UK, France, Australia sent their Naval military
Warships to the Gulf Region along the Persian Gulf and Strait of Hormuz to
monitor the Sea routes and control the supply of oil in that region and not
allowing Iran to sell its oil even to China and Russia, the allies of Iran against
USA and Western countries.
Saudi Arabia, UAE and Qatar funded ISIS and Taliban and these countries are
helping Dajjal (Satanic) forces in the world to achieve their Satanic goals and
implement ONE World Order after the 3rd World War in 2022 AD. Saudi
There are reports in the Media that thousands of Muslims houses and their
colonies were totally demolished and hundreds of thousands of Muslims
were either killed and kidnapped by Chinese forces in recent years.
Then we see the massacre and killings of Palestines Muslims for the last 70
years by Israel. Palestinian Muslims have lost all their land due to illegal
occupation by Israel and all the world is silent on the brutalities by Israeli
Military forces on Palestine Muslims.
The Right Wing Extremists who were opposed to the Muslim Migrants started
harrassing Muslims in Europe and USA by different ways. The Right Wing
White Extremist Political parties started winning in elections in their
respective countries and started making tough laws against the Muslim
Migrant population who came to save their lives and their children due to the
Wars imposed by USA and the Western Countries.
This is one of the Signs of the Arrival of Mahdi and the Second Coming of the
Jesus Christ as people are loosing Faith as their religion is under attack by the
Main Stream Media, political leaders, social media, etc and they can't live
peacefully in their own countries as they are being invaded by other
countries. Mahdi and Jesus Christ would come to rescue the Faith of the
Faithful people and restore peace in the World.
Water scarcity is the lack of fresh water resources to meet water demand. It
affects every continent and was listed in 2019 by the World Economic
Forum as one of the largest global risks in terms of potential impact over the
next decade. It is manifested by partial or no satisfaction of expressed
demand, economic competition for water quantity or quality, disputes
between users, irreversible depletion of groundwater, and negative impacts
A mere 0.014% of all water on Earth is both fresh and easily accessible. Of the
remaining water, 97% is saline and a little less than 3% is hard to access.
Technically, there is a sufficient amount of freshwater on a global scale.
However, due to unequal distribution (exacerbated by climate change)
resulting in some very wet and some very dry geographic locations, plus a
sharp rise in global freshwater demand in recent decades driven by industry,
humanity is facing a water crisis. Demand is expected to outstrip supply by
40% in 2030, if current trends continue.
The world is already facing numerous Global problems and this is another
crisis folding in front of our eyes. Our prayers are for our Imam so that Allah
would haste His Arrival as early as possible.
'and when all have arrived, their ears, their eyes, and their skins
shall bear witness against them, stating all that they had done in
the life of the world.' Holy Quran (41:20)
The Verses in the Holy Quran mentions about the Judgment Day and we
know that there are 2 Qiyamats - Qiyamat e Sughra (Arrival of Imam Mahdi)
and Qiyamat e Kubra (Final Day of Judgment).
The information that Pharaoh's corpse would serve as a sign for later generations may be
regarded as an indication that his body would not decay. On display in the Royal Mummies
Chamber of the Egyptian Museum in Cairo is a mummified body believed to be that of this
tyrant. In all likelihood, Pharaoh's body floated to shore after being drowned, was found and
mummified by the Egyptians, and then carried to a previously prepared burial chamber.
Dr. Maurice from France who did research on Pharaoh's body who was
drowned and later discovered converted to Islam wrote the following book:
“In the End Age, a glass would appear on which the people of East would talk to
the people of West.”
Now the invention of “Mobile Phones” in our current age is the prophecy
fulfilled as “Cellular Mobile Phone” is just a glass with all technology involving
from internet to computer to video conferencing to MP3. But the main function
of Cell phone is to talk.
And people sitting in Eastern countries are talking to their friends, family and
relations in West.
“The Eye of Satin - Antenna (Evil Antenna) would be placed on the top of the
buildings.”
The word, “Antenna” is a French word but it is used in all the languages in the
world as “Antenna”. The entire world had seen this ‘Antenna’ on the top of the
roofs of their houses and buildings to see the World TV channels and News.
Imam Jafar – e – Sadiq explained this Ayat and mentioned that Allah will test
Humanity through 5 Tests before the Arrival of Imam Mahdi by:
1. Fear
2. Poverty
3. Hunger
4. Loss of Life
5. Draught - Loss of Crops
Simpsons Cartoon is a very popular Cartoon series and has the reputation of
predicting important political, scientific and social events in the World
including Trump Presidency, 9 - 11 incident in USA, smart watches, phones
with videos, baby transalators, Greece economy, Higgs Boson Particle, FIFA
Scandal and Germany Win, etc
September, 2023
Rapture in September, 2023
The Tribulation and the Rapture would be from September (9th), 2021 AD
till September (9th), 2023 AD. The 2 year period would see 1/3rd
population death in World War 3 and then 1/3rd population death by
Draught and Diseases till September, 2023 AD as indicated in the Cartoons.
The Netflix Series - Messiah is showing the Role of Christ in the first few
episodes and then the same Messiah would become the Anti - Christ and play
the role of Dajjal.
Now you can imagine that in 2020 AD, the World Zionist Media is slowly
preparing the World Population for the Arrival of both Dajjal (Anti Christ) and
the Christ.
Now people has to choose their path - Right (With Jesus and Mahdi) or Wrong
(Anti - Christ or Dajjal).
As the Arrival of both Jesus Christ and Mahdi is approaching closer, the more
and more Zionist propaganda would be shouting against the Christ and Mahdi
(AS).
The humanity has never seen the convergence of the Major Prophecies and
Signs in the history and we can say that we are living in the Season of End
Times as told by the Prophets and Saints and would soon see the Arrival of
Mahdi and the Second Coming of Jesus Christ.
The Creation of Israel and the events after the creation of Israel are the Major
proof of the Second Coming of Jesus Christ and the Arrival of Mahdi.
The 7 roads are coming from the airport built on the back of Mount Uhad to
Medina these days.
Our Prophet Muhammad (PBUH) told 1400 years ago that there would be 7
routes that would come from the back of the Mount Uhad.
Mount Uhad is the famous mountain where the 2nd battle - Battle of Uhad
was fought between Muslims and the Kafirs of Mecca.
Now there is a construction of Airport on the Back of Mount Uhad these days
and 7 roads are coming into Medina city.
This prophecy has also been fulfilled in our Times as we all are witnessing the
fulfillment of the End Times in our lives.
The Global Economic Reset Button is going to be seen very soon by 2021 to
2022 AD when the US Dollar would crash, World Stocks would fall, and the
International markets would fall. Then a major Chaos would happen in the
whole world and because of that Economic Collapse, the Global Bankers and
the Zionist Elite would push the whole world into 3rd World War in 2022 AD.
The Stocks and Bonds are already at very high. The US Federal Reserve is
printing US Dollars out of thin air and this whole Ponzi Scheme has to collapse
at certain time. It could not go for ever. The World has seen a massive growth
in Stocks and Bond Market since 2009 AD and the Federal Reserve has kept
the interest rates lower. Now the other Major countries like Russia, China,
Iran, India, Turkey are getting away from US Dollar. The supply of US Dollar
would decrease and eventually it would collapse in 2021 AD. All the World
Economists are indicating the World Economic Collapse in the coming years of
2021 - 2022 AD as we have already entered into Recession in 2020 AD.
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 1229
278. The camp or house of Dajjal outside Madina --
Kingdom Palace - 7 miles away from Madina
This prophecy has also been fulfilled recently and the Kingdom
Palace was built exactly 7 Km from the Madina Mosque.
Then it heavily contributed in all Middle Eastern Wars like Iran - Iraq War,
Desert Storm when Saudi Arabia asked USA to invade Iraq in 1990 and
liberate Kuwait. Then it was funding the Syrian War and in 2015, when New
King Salman came into power, his young son - Muhammad Bin Salman known
as MBS started Yemen War. Since then, Saudi Arabia is going into deficit
every year in billions of dollars. That is why MBS started 2030 project and
initiated the idea of building new city - NEOM with the help of Israel and USA.
Saudi Arabia is on the verge of Economic Collapse as indicated by IMF in 2021.
The whole world is now connected through Internet using Social Media tools
like Facebook, Instagram, Twitter, etc and through their Cell phones by
Whatsapp, Messenger, Botim, etc
These two technologies helped the World to come so close that we can see
each other, talk at any time and get any information using these tools at any
time.
"The Momin in East would talk with the Momin in the West in the End Times."
The Cover Title of the famous International Magazine run by the most richest
family on Earth - Rothschild, "The World in 2020"
It shows 2020 in two colors, Red and Green
The 10 Topics covered are Red Issues and 10 Topics covered are Green Issues.
Trump would win the 2020 Election and would prove to the Last President of USA
before the Arrival of Mahdi and the Second Coming of Jesus Christ.
The Vision of the whole World is RED as the World would be going in deep
Economic Recession and followed by W
World War 3 in 2022 AD.
NEW WORLD ORDER (NO) TIME TO DIE for the World population as planned
by the World Elite by 2021 - 2022 AD to reduce the World population to 3 billion
people
eople after the Great War and Global Draught and Diseases.
The World has witnessed worst Global Protests all over the World over the
major issues of Poverty, Inequality, Human Rights, Justice, Economic
problems, Jobs issues, Immigration, etc
The Major Countries which remain in the News in International Media are:
1. Hong Kong
2. Iraq
3. Iran
4. India
5. Venezuela
6. Chile
7. Bolivia
8. Lebanon
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 1236
9. El Salvador
10. Spain
11. Colombia
12. Turkey
13. UK
14. Pakistan
15. France
16. Netherlands
17. Palestine
18. Haiti
19. Syria
20. USA
21. Russia
22. China
23. Italy
There are 195 member countries of United Nations and the Global Protests
were over in more than 23 countries of the World.
Even the people in other countries are not coming forward for protests but
they are closely watching the Global unrest and protests in these countries on
daily basis and it is just a matter of time, when the people in those countries
would also come on the Streets of their respective countries and start protest
against the brutal and inhumane Governments of the World who have
miserably failed to provide Economic, Social and Political solutions to their
people.
There are lots of books written by Western Authors on the Coming Collapse
of Western Capitalism in recent years. The Western Scholars, Bankers,
Economists and the Philosophers have reached to the conclusion that
Capitalism is not the Solution for New Emerging Markets in the World.
If we put 1, 2 and 3 from the above years as One Number, we would get:
123...............................Aal e Muhammad
The Babies born in 1997 and after that year are considered as Generation - Z .
The English letter - 'Z' is the Last Alphabet and 26th in Number
If we count from 1997 till 2023, there are 26 years from 1997 till 2023 AD.
Generation - Z is also the Last Generation before the Second Coming of Jesus
Christ and the Arrival of Mahdi.
Its name - Generation - Z is indicating that it is the Last and the Lost
Generation before the Arrival of Mahdi
And Amazingly, the Number of Years from 1997 till 2023 AD are the same as
26 as the English Alphabet - 'Z' is also the 26th Alphabet and the Last One.
14! = 1 x 2 x 3 x 4 x 5 x 6 x 7 x 8 x 9 x 10 x 11 x 12 x 13 x 14 =
87,178,291,200
87,178,291,200……Now if we add all the numbers individually, we
would get an amazing result as:
87,178,291,200……..8 + 7 + 1 + 7 + 8 + 2 + 9 + 1 + 2 + 0 + 0 = 45
87,178,291,200…………………45
Factorial of 14!............ 87,178,291,200………….45
14!..............45
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 1246
287. The Muslim Era is computed from the starting point of the
year of the Emigration (Hijri); that is, from the year in which
Muhammad, the Prophet of Islam, migrated from Mecca to
Medina in 622 AD
The first day of the month Muharram which is the beginning of the year
was set as:
Hazrat Esa (Jesus Christ) ----------- 12th Caliph and Wasi” of Prophet Moses
They say that the Modern Babylon i.e. USA would collapse and destroy before the
Second Coming of Jesus Christ as we are witnessing these years - The Economic
Collapse in USA, the Political and Social Collapse and destruction of American
Empire all over the World after 2001 AD due to its policies - Internal and External.
There are lot of books written on this topic in the West by Christian authors and
thinkers eloborating the concept mentioning USA - The Modern Babylon and its
Collapse before the Second Coming of Jesus Christ.
With the courtesy of the following website of Huff Post US, the article is
reproduced - Written by the panel of Rowaida Abdelaziz, Akbar Shahid Ahmed and
Nick Robbins - Early:
https://www.huffingtonpost.ca/entry/islamophobia-is-a-global-crisis-and-its-time-
we-view-it-that-way_n_5c8e5867e4b0db7da9f48156?ri18n=true
"The deadly attacks brings into harsh light the global nature of the alarming rise in
Islamophobia. In countries around the world, anti-Muslim rhetoric and policies have become
dangerously normalized ― in institutions, politics, media, and everyday life. Violent and
lethal assaults like the Christchurch shooting are but one consequence; Muslims face daily
acts of discrimination, bias and threats.
The world’s Islamophobia problem also has a powerful knock-on effect, enabling broader
anti-immigrant and white nationalist coalitions in many countries. And the “soft” anti-Muslim
rhetoric of mainstream pundits has given oxygen to more radical extremists, who often
advocate violence on social media platforms.
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 1253
"In countries around the world, anti-Muslim rhetoric and
policies have become dangerously normalized ― in institutions,
politics, media, and everyday life."
While some dismiss incidents like the New Zealand massacre as the deranged act of a lone
wolf, a wider look reveals the extent to which world leaders have made space for the far-
right movements that drive Islamophobia globally. Not even 24 hours after the attack, for
example, Trump denied that white nationalism is a growing danger. And although Trump
has emerged as a potent inspiration for Islamophobes, he’s far from alone. In countries
around the world, elected leaders and mainstream elites have fueled anti-Muslim sentiment,
benefited from the rise of white nationalism, and supported policies that directly target
Muslims.
And France is not the only country targeting Muslim women. In 2011, Belgium
almost unanimously passed a bill that banned full-face veils. In 2010, parts of
both Spain and Italy had imposed their own versions of laws restricting Muslim dress.
Across the Atlantic, Quebec has proposed a ban to block public employees, such as judges,
teachers and police officers, from wearing religious clothing ― a resolution many have said
targeted Muslim women who wear the hijab.
In 2018, a Muslim couple in Switzerland was denied citizenship because the couple didn’t
want to shake hands with members of the opposite sex, citing religious reasons. Later that
year, Denmark passed a law that required those who seek Danish citizenship to shake
hands at the naturalization ceremony. Both laws were denounced by civil rights groups
across Europe for targeting Muslims.
In the United States, over 200 anti-sharia bills have been introduced since 2010 in over 40
states. This nationwide campaign against so-called sharia law has been led by anti-Muslim
hate groups who lobby lawmakers and attempt to draw public support by circulating
conspiracy theories about how a backward and barbaric judicial system will soon take over
American courts. (There is no evidence to support any of those claims.)
The manifesto the Christchurch shooter left behind, named “The Great Replacement” after
an anti-immigrant tract by French writer Renaud Camus, is riddled with such anxieties. It
echoes the ideas of Anders Breivik, who killed 77 people in Norway in 2011 and spoke of
forcing his government to stop an “invasion of Muslims.”
A 2015 march by the German organization PEGIDA (Patriotic Europeans Against the
Islamization of the West), one of the increasingly popular groups spreading the idea that
white populations are being replaced.
Leaders like Viktor Orbán in Hungary, where the Muslim population is below 1 percent, have
spread the idea that their societies are on the brink of demographic collapse and must make
procreation a top national priority. “We want Hungarian children,” Orbán said last month.
“Migration for us is surrender.”
Such narratives have particular power when they cast Muslims as an existential threat,
invoking the specter of an alien religion, racial difference and, in some cases, the influx of
formerly colonial subjects. The people who peddle the myth of a white “demographic winter”
know this ― it’s why pro-Brexit campaigners talked about Turks eventually flooding the
U.K., instead of French entrepreneurs trying to make it in London.
And the fear mongering is working. In 2016, a survey showed that Americans believe 17
percent of the country is Muslim. It’s closer to 1 percent. The French think the proportion of
Muslims in their country is more than four times what it really is. The British believe it to be
triple what the numbers actually say.
Mainstream commentators have licensed and legitimized these fears. The April cover
story of The Atlantic magazine, written by prominent former GOP speechwriter David Frum,
is an extended meditation on what could go wrong as the proportion of the U.S. population
that’s white falls. The French equivalent of NPR has provided a platform to Camus, the
French writer referenced by the New Zealand attacker, and the leader of the country’s
powerful center-right party has said Camus’ idea of a “replacement” is accurate.
Other radical right populists in Europe have successfully campaigned on anti-Muslim and
anti-immigrant platforms, with Italy’s ruling League party promising to deport 500,000
undocumented immigrants and one of its governors vowing to defend the “white race.” In
the Netherlands, anti-Islam politician Geert Wilders notoriously called Moroccans
“scum” and once led a crowd to chant that they wanted fewer Moroccan immigrants in the
country. Even some countries traditionally viewed as liberal and progressive, such as
Denmark, have enforced restrictive immigration policies that target Muslim-majority
countries and asylum-seekers.
The attack in Christchurch may have targeted two local mosques, but the inspiration behind
it appears to have come from far-right extremists around the world who have become
increasingly adept at using online platforms to globalize hate. The shooter in New Zealand
made references to white supremacists from no less than half a dozen countries.
These international connections are hardly unique. In the month before Alexandre
Bissonnette killed six Muslim men at a mosque in Canada, he googled President Donald
Trump hundreds of times and obsessively searched Twitter for American pundits who had
expressed anti-Islam views, including Ben Shapiro and Tucker Carlson.
Far-right and white nationalist ideologies can also be spread by licit channels and
government-sanctioned sources. Trump’s former chief strategist Steve Bannon has been
busy trying to create a second act for himself mobilizing radical right parties in Europe, while
Rep. Steve King talked at length about his white nationalist views to an Austrian
propaganda site on one of his many visits to the country.
Although sites such as YouTube, Facebook and 4chan have accelerated the process, this
globalization of white nationalism and anti-Muslim extremism is deeply rooted in the
movement. White supremacist groups such as the Aryan Nation were communicating with
European counterparts decades ago, while Islamophobic organizations such as Finland’s
Soldiers of Odin have opened up chapters around the world.
But somehow politicians still tend to dismiss white nationalist, anti-Muslim attacks such as
the one in New Zealand as the work of lone extremists or the mentally ill. This view is not
only wrong ― often part of a double standard involving white attackers ― but misses the
threat of Islamophobia and white nationalism as an international network, extremism
researchers warn.
Trump isn’t associated with the Muslim ban ― a proposal that would have affected more
than 1.6 billion people ― the way he constantly is with his ties to Russia or his frequent
breaks from traditional presidential decorum, a fact that Rep. Alexandria Ocasio-
Cortez highlighted after the New Zealand attacks.
And the Islamophobic aides Trump has elevated, like former National Security Council chief
of staff Fred Fleitz and adviser Sebastian Gorka, continue to have prominent roles in right-
wing politics. Fleitz has taken over a well-funded think tank known for pushing anti-Muslim
views, and Gorka regularly offers commentary in conservative media and at events like this
year’s Conservative Political Action Conference. Others remain in positions of power:
Though CNN reported last year that Veterans Affairs official Thayer Verschoor spread anti-
Muslim conspiracy theories, he is still one of the public faces of the agency. A
2018 BuzzFeed News investigation found that GOP officials have publicly castigated Islam
in 49 states since 2015 and almost never faced repercussions.
The pattern holds abroad. Nicolas Sarkozy and Manuel Valls, the former president and
prime minister of France respectively, last year endorsed a widely condemned demand to
alter the Quran, with seemingly little consequence. Valls is currently running for mayor of
Barcelona. In Canada, opposition leader Andrew Scheer ― a potential successor to Prime
Minister Justin Trudeau ― has for over a week dodged questions about his appearance with
an activist who regularly pushes conspiracy theories about Muslims.
The list of leaders who benefit from Islamophobia even extends to the Muslim-majority world
itself. United Arab Emirates crown prince Mohammed bin Zayed once argued that his
people can’t handle democracy because given the right to vote they would inevitably
support dangerous extremists. Egyptian president Abdel-Fattah el-Sisi has used the guise of
fighting extremism to jail tens of thousands of people. Both leaders have sustained support
in the West.
Press coverage of Muslims in the United Kingdom isn’t any better. A 2011 study by the
University of Leeds found that 70 percent of news coverage of the Muslim community in
Britain has been hostile. (Only 15 percent was rated “inclusive.”) One British man took it
upon himself to submit more than 14,000 complaints in 2016 to a plethora of news
organizations due to their inaccurate, biased or antagonistic reporting about Muslims.
Studies have shown that coverage of the Muslim community across the
globe is not only one-dimensionally bleak, it is often riddled with
conspiracy theories and factual inaccuracies.
For years, media organizations such as Fox News have spewed anti-Muslim
disinformation without consequence. The conservative network has repeatedly invited
notorious anti-Muslim activists, like Pamela Geller, whom the Southern Poverty Law Center
called “the anti-Muslim movement’s most visible and flamboyant figurehead,” and Frank
Gaffney, who founded a neoconservative turned anti-Muslim think tank, for segments where
they disseminated hatred and bigotry without interruption from the anchors.
To make matters worse, the anchors themselves have also engaged in similar rhetoric.
Earlier this month, Fox News host Jeanine Pirro explicitly questioned Rep. Ilhan Omar’s (D–
Minn.) loyalty as an American lawmaker simply because of her religious beliefs. On “Fox &
Friends,” co-host Brian Kilmeade claimed in 2010 that “all terrorists are Muslims.”
But the problem isn’t just with Fox News. Media organizations across the political spectrum
have also indulged in similar narratives. In 2015, CNN host Don Lemon asked guest Arsalan
Iftikhar, a Muslim American human rights lawyer, if he supported ISIS, for no reason other
than the fact that Iftikhar is a Muslim. After the San Bernardino shooting in 2015,
journalists from numerous national news networks swarmed the home of Syed Rizwan
Farook and Tashfeen Malik, broadcasting close-ups of the items left behind. Those used for
worship, which included a Quran, a Muslim prayer rug and prayer beads, were equated with
the tools a terrorist might use in an attack.
But tackling Islamophobia from liberal and left circles is trickier. New Atheists such as Bill
Maher and Sam Harris, both championed as progressives, have been accused of
perpetuating anti-Muslim sentiments under the guise of intellectual debate.
“Not only does the Muslim world have something in common with ISIS. It has too much in
common with ISIS,” proclaimed Maher in a 2014 episode of his HBO show. Harris
voraciously opposed the construction of a mosque near the World Trade Center site in
2010, writing that its construction would be “a sign that the liberal values of the West are
synonymous with decadence and cowardice.”
New Atheists Richard Dawkins has also touted anti-Muslim stances under the premise of
science and academic freedom. Dawkins, a UK-based evolutionary biologist and former
Oxford professor, once called Islam the “greatest force for evil today.”
Tragedies like the Christchurch shooting inevitably lead to global outpourings of grief and
affirmations of inclusive, liberal values. As New Zealand Prime Minister Jacinda Ardern
eloquently put it after the attack, the victims “have chosen to make New Zealand their home,
and it is their home. They are us.” The perpetrators of such violence, she continued, “have
no place in New Zealand.”
While expressions of solidarity with Muslim victims are welcome and appropriate, it will take
a deeper resolve and real action to confront the growing tide of Islamophobia around the
world. From heads of state to powerful media figures to celebrated intellectuals, anti-Muslim
views flourish in plain sight, often unchecked and unpunished. In many countries, these
sentiments have created the space for rising tides of white nationalism and violent
extremism, which thanks to online channels, now have a global reach.
With the massacre in New Zealand, we’ve seen what can happen when such views are
allowed to fester. Now it’s time to see if actual accountability can keep hate in check. “We
utterly reject and condemn you,” Ardern said of the likes of the shooter. What would the
world look like if those condemnations were loud, clear, and ― most importantly ―
consistent?
Whenever there is a word, “Saat” used in the Holy Quran, it means the “Arrival
of Imam Mahdi” or ‘Qiyamat e Sughra” or ‘Hashar”
531 = 59 x 9
“Nay, but they deny the coming of the Hour (Arrival of Imam Mahdi), and for
those who deny the coming of the Hour (Arrival of Imam Mahdi), We have
prepared a flame.”
(Surah e Furqan, Verse – 11)
In the last few months of 2019 and the year 2020 AD, the World has seen
apocalyptic fires in Australia
tralia which has destroyed millions of hectares of forests and
killed more than 1 Billion Animals mostly Kangaroos, Koalas, Bats, Birds, etc.
this is a crisis for biodiversity in Australia, which is home to some of Earth’s most
distinctive animals, like ma
marsupials.
rsupials. Around 244 species of mammals are found only
in Australia. What’s more, according to the University of Sydney’s statement,
“Some 34 species and subspecies of native mammals have become extinct in
Australia over the last 200 years, the highest rat ratee of loss for any region in the
world.”
The current loss of Australian animal life is a serious tragedy by anyone’s count.
So heavy was the smoke from the forest fires in Australia, it even drifted over to
neighboring New Zealand, 1,300 miles away, who woke up to a blood-red sun on
New Year’s Day.
With several blazes burning out of control, thousands were stranded in evacuation
centers in other towns along the coast as firefighters told people to stay put. Tens
of thousands of people were without power, the Australian military was authorized
to deploy aircraft and naval vessels, and the government requested firefighting help
from Canada and the United States.
More than 1 Billion Animals Killed & Millions of Acres of Forest Destroyed
Scientists say that deforestation in the Amazon is pushing the region to a tipping
point at which the forest will gradually turn into dry savanna — and which humans
will be unable to reverse. Once sufficiently degraded, the forest will lose its ability
to generate its own rainfall, thereby preventing the rainforest ecosystem from
being able to exist at all. Instead of leafy forests teeming with wildlife, the Amazon
would be a desolate expanse of shrublands.
From the Amazon to the Arctic, forests around the world are burning. Catastrophic
manmade fires are raging across the Brazilian Amazon, imperiling the world’s most
biodiverse forest. In Indonesia, annual blazes set to clear land for oil palm
plantations are ravaging the ancient rainforests of Kalimantan and Sumatra. In the
wake of the unprecedented wildfires that tore through the frozen lands of Siberia
and Alaska this summer, many fear that the worst is yet to come. As the global
alarm sounds, many are asking why our forests are burning—and who is to blame?
The Earth and Its Inhabitants - Animals and Humans need a Divine Solution as we all
are heading towards a Divine Kingdom which would be established in 2025 AD.
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 1265
293. The Collective Wisdom of all Scholars around the
World have a consensus that the humans are living in End
Times and the Return of the Savior is very Near
Most of the Scholars of major Religions in the World like Christianity, Islam,
Judaism, Hinduism, etc have a consensus that we all are living in End Times and the
Return of the Savior is very Near.
The Scholars of Abrahmic Religions - Judaism, Christianity and Islam strongly believe
that the Major Signs of the End Times are fulfilling at a very rapid pace and the
Return of the Messiah, Jesus Christ and Mahdi is very Near.
There are lots of books and articles written on this topic of End Times and the
Second Coming of Jesus Christ have been written in the recent past proving the
Return of Jesus Christ and the Messiah from the Bible and the Old Testament.
The Muslim Scholars also believe that the Return of Hazrat Isa (AS) and Mahdi is
also very Near and most of us would see their return very soon.
https://www.cuttingedge.org/news/n1260.cfm
1) Timing of the Rapture For His Church -- "But of that day and hour
knoweth no man, no, not the angels of heaven, but my Father only. But as the days of
Noah were, so shall also the coming of the Son of man be." [Matthew 24:36-37] In
Chapter 24 of Matthew, Jesus told His disciples of all the "Signs" by which people living
in the End of the Age might know that the time of His return was close. A little earlier,
Jesus told them boldly, "Now learn a parable of the fig tree; When his branch is yet
tender, and putteth forth leaves, ye know that summer is nigh: So likewise ye, when ye
shall see all these things, know that it is near, even at the doors." [Matthew 24:32-33]
Therefore, we know that the people living in the End of the Age can
know the approximate time of Jesus' return for His Church in the
Rapture, but we will never be able to know the exact "day and hour". Since Israel came
back to her land on May 15, 1948, the End of the Age has been officially in progress. We
know that "this generation shall not pass away" [verse 34] until Jesus returns for His
Church.
We also know that Matthew 24:36-37 cannot be speaking of the time Jesus returns after
the 7-year Tribulation Period has ended. Why? Because God has been very specific
about the length of this period; it will be exactly 7 Jewish years long, or 2,520 days [7
years x 360 days in a Jewish year]. The beginning point of this 2,520 year period will be
when Antichrist "confirms the covenant" with Jewish religious and secular leaders as
foretold in Daniel 9:27. Parallel periods of specific time are also foretold in Daniel 12:11-
In Verses 4-5, Paul tells the people of Thessalonica that Antichrist will fulfill the
prophecy in Daniel 11:36-37, of profaning the Holy of Holies because of his supernatural
arrogance and pride.
Verse 6-8 deserves our detailed examination, because therein hold the clues to solve the
question as to whether Christians in the End of the Age can know the specific date of
Antichrist's appearance. "And now you know what is restraining him from being revealed
at this time; it is so that he may be manifested (revealed) in his own appointed time." [vs
6] Now we know God has set an "appointed time" for Antichrist to arise; verse 3 tells us
that he will arise when church people have departed from the firm, Absolute faith and
underlying doctrine they have always held in previous generations, and maybe, just
maybe, after the Church has been Raptured. Let us continue:
"For the mystery of lawlessness (that hidden principle of rebellion against constituted
authority) is already at work in the world, but it is restrained only until he who restrains is
taken out of the way." [verse 7] Bible scholars know that the power to restrain evil in
both individuals and nations is exercised by the Holy Spirit. Therefore, we can know for
certain that the restraining power of the Holy Spirit is going to be withdrawn enough to
allow Antichrist to arise; some Bible scholars hold that, since the Holy Spirit indwells
each believer, this verse is also foretelling that the Rapture of the Church must occur
before Antichrist can arise.
However, the key ingredient we need to grasp in this verse is that the Antichrist will
appear only after "he who restrains is taken out of the way". Notice the interesting use of
Verse 8 then sums this matter up, when it says, "And then the lawless one (the antichrist)
will be revealed ..." [NOTE: All Scripture quoted above was taken from the Parallel
Bible, KJV/Amplified Bible Commentary .]
Not once in the entire Bible are we told that we cannot know the specific plan of Satan
and his human agents as to the date(s) by which Antichrist is to be revealed. Since May 1,
1776, the Masters of the Illuminati has been the leading force driving the world to the
Kingdom of Antichrist -- the New World Order. Since 1782, Freemasonry has cooperated
with the Illuminati in all leadership functions. And, from 1776, the demonic Guiding
Spirits have been telling their human hosts that the New World Order would occur in the
year 2000 A.D.
Our source has told us that the specific plan was formulated almost 50 years ago. The
appearance of Antichrist is planned to be a two-stage affair, and will evidently include all
the "lying signs and wonders" of which the Bible speaks so eloquently."
https://www.prophecynewswatch.com/article.cfm?recent_news_id=3833
"What we are witnessing in east Africa and across much of the Middle East right
now is hard to believe. 360 billion locusts are eating everything in sight, and UN
officials are warning that this plague of "Biblical proportions" could get many times
worse over the next several months.
Desert locusts can travel up to 93 miles a day, and each adult can consume the
equivalent of its own weight in food every 24 hours. These voracious little
creatures are traveling in absolutely colossal swarms that are up to 40 miles wide,
and they continue to push into new areas.
I have previously written about the horrors that this plague is causing in east
Africa, but many people don't realize that this plague is devastating crops
throughout the Middle East as well.
In Saudi Arabia, the swarms have been so thick at times that they have
completely blocked out the sun, and video footage coming out of that country is
getting attention all over the world...
Meanwhile swarms of locusts have been milling the skies in Saudi Arabia, with
one video circulating online showing the sky saturated with the insects.
Another shows a tree in Saudi Arabia crawling with desert locusts, which
consume their own bodyweight in food each day.
But of course east Africa remains the hardest hit region, and UN officials are
warning that a horrible famine could rapidly develop as a result of this plague.
The following comes from Scientific American...
Locust swarms of biblical proportions are threatening crops across a wide swath
of Africa and southwest Asia--spurring alarm among top international officials.
A major concern is famine. The United Nations is warning that mass swarms of
desert locusts are endangering food supplies in eastern Africa. In response,
officials in Rome mobilized an emergency briefing yesterday in a bid to raise
money--noting the situation has a high potential to devolve into a full-blown crisis.
According to the Daily Mail, the number of locusts has now reached 360 billion...
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 1271
A locust plague decimating crops and livestock pastureland in east Africa,
including swarms 40 miles wide, threatens to trigger a humanitarian crisis, the UN
has warned.
The horde of 360 billion insects has laid waste to farmland across Ethiopia, Kenya
and Somalia, caused damage in Dijibouti and Eritrea, posing an unprecedented
threat to food security.
There are less than 8 billion people living on the entire planet.
And what these locusts want more than anything else is food. If you doubt the
destructive power of these swarms, please consider what the FAO's senior
agriculture officer recently had to say...
"It's certainly the most dangerous migratory pest in the world, desert locust," said
Keith Cressman, FAO's senior agriculture officer. "A swarm the size of Rome can
eat enough food in one day as everybody in Kenya."
And some of these swarms are actually bigger than the city of Rome.
In Somalia, officials are calling this crisis "a national emergency" as the locusts
consume "huge amounts of crops"...
Over in Kenya, things are even worse. At this point the only viable way to combat
these swarms is to spray them, and the UN is desperately asking for financial
help to aid in that effort...
Just five planes are currently spraying as Kenyan and other authorities try to stop
the locusts from spreading to neighboring Uganda and South Sudan. The United
Nations has said $76 million is needed immediately to widen such efforts across
East Africa.
UN officials keep claiming that the number of locusts could get 500 times larger
over the next few months, but I am having a really hard time believing that this
plague could possibly get much worse than it is now.
Unfortunately, conditions are very favorable for breeding, and these locusts are
constantly searching for new sources of food. They will continue to migrate in
new directions, and they will eat crops everywhere they go.
According to Scientific American, the breeding cycles over the next couple of
months could push the locust swarms as far as India...
Cyclones that struck the driest parts of the Arabian Peninsula last year triggered
the current crisis, creating ideal conditions for the desert locust species to
multiply. Left to breed in isolated corners of Saudi Arabia and Yemen, the locust
swarms crossed to the Horn of Africa where they were given further support by
another cyclone.
More breeding cycles are expected. The swarms increase in size twentyfold with
each successive generation and could reach India by June.
When I first told my wife about this locust plague she was absolutely horrified.
She wondered what all those people would eat if all their crops were gone. Of
course the truth is that they aren't going to have much of anything to eat.
These locusts are going to create a famine, and the more they eat the worse the
famine will become.
We have never seen anything like this before, and this is yet another
"unprecedented crisis" that we can add to all the others that we are currently
facing.
Our planet is changing, global weather patterns are going absolutely nuts, and
worldwide events are really starting to spiral out of control.
And at this point we are just a little over one month into 2020. If you think that
things are bad so far, just wait until you see what is coming over the course of the
rest of the year."
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 1273
Another Article is reproduced with the courtesy of:
https://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/2020/01/25/inside-locust-mega-swarms-devouring-crops-africa/
"The locusts are coming thick and fast as the low-flying aircraft punches through the
swarm, leaving khaki-coloured streaks smeared across the plane’s windscreen and
obstructing the view outside.
But the pilot - despite travelling at 100 miles per hour - is unfazed. He simply winds
down the window of the unpressurised cockpit, reaches his arm outside and wipes
away what’s left of the insects with a damp cloth.
This is life on the frontline for locust hunters, as they battle to contain the worst
plague to hit the Horn of Africa for some seven decades - on Monday, the United
Nations will convene a conference in Rome with the aim of mobilising $70 million
(£53 million) to help respond to the crisis.
It is only the third time since 1950 that locusts swarms have been seen on this scale.
A local tour guide holds a handfull of dead desert locusts after an invasion in Shaba National
Reserve in Isiolo, northern Kenya, CREDIT: DANIEL IRUNGU/EPA-EFE/REX
In the last serious locust upsurge, between 2003 and 2005 across some 20 countries
in North Africa and the Middle East, roughly $750 million (£574 million) was spent
to bring the swarms under control, and some 12 million hectares of land were
sprayed with pesticides.
In biblical style, the locusts have already devoured and destroyed 70,000 hectares
(175,000 acres) of farmland across Somalia and Ethiopia, and earlier this month a
passenger plane was diverted and grounded in Ethiopia after an unexpected swarm
blocked its entry to Dire Dawa airport.
Concerns have already been raised that the invasion could threaten a food crisis
and stall economic growth in the region unless the situation is brought under
control.
“Cyclones bring very heavy rains, meaning breeding conditions for desert locusts
are extremely favourable for much longer than usual. As a result swarms can grow
very rapidly… the numbers just skyrocket.”
Swarms of desert locusts fly up into the air from crops CREDIT: AP
He added that these cyclones have in turn been triggered by climate change, which
has made extreme weather events all the more common worldwide.
But containing the plague is easier said than done, said Mehari Tesfayohannes,
chief information and forecasting officer at the Desert Locust Control Organisation
(DLCO) for Eastern Africa – the team trying to control the ravenous insects from the
sky.
In specially modified Turbo Beaver aircrafts equipped with spray equipment and
pesticide tanks locust hunters fly hundreds of miles across nine countries in east
Africa to track down and target the swarms.
“Of course sometimes the windshields are smeared with crushed and dead
locusts, blocking the pilot from seeing outside,” Mr Tesfayohannes, who has
worked for DLCO Eastern Africa since 1992, told The Telegraph. “But as the
pilots are aware of this, they usually carry moist cloth to wipe it.”
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 1276
The lightweight Beaver planes are specially modified to protect against denting
due to locust crushing, while the engine cooling systems are fixed with strong wire
meshes to avoid blocking by the crushed locusts,” said Mr Tesfayohannes.
But with just four planes at their disposal, ending the plague is a big task for a
small team – especially this year.
The UN has warned that the swarms represent an “unprecedented threat to food
security” with locust numbers potentially increasing 500-fold in the next six
months.
"There would be a Global Draught three (3) years before the Arrival of Imam
Mahdi."..............................28th July, 2020 till 28th July, 2023 AD
“Five people would die out of seven before the Arrival of Imam Mahdi”.
Now if we want to know the ratio of people who would die before the Arrival of
Imam Mahdi, we have to divide 5 with 7.
The Ratio of people who die before the Arrival of Imam = 5/7 x 100
As we know that Mahdi would Arrival in the year 1445 Hijri or 2023 AD and
according to Imam Jaffar e Sadiq (AS), five people would have to die out of
seven.
We take the ratio of 1445 and 2023 and see the results:
Amazingly the results are the same. We can also write the above equation as:
1445 = 17 x 17 x 5
2023 = 17 x 17 x 7
On the night of Feb 11th, 2020 Karbala, Iraq experienced a very rare Snowfall for
the First Time in the History of Karbala in the Modern History.
Whether the snowfall is due to the Global Climate Change or Polar Shifting, the
Earth is experiencing strange change in Weather in most parts of the World.
Karbala, Iraq has a very special place in Islamic History and our Imam Hussain along
with His family was martyred in 61 Hijri.
The Snowfall in Karbala is another Big Sign of the End Times and the Arrival of Imam
Mahdi is very near.
Now if we multiply the Number – 15 with the Special property of Number – 5 i.e. 3 rd
Odd Number or 3rd Prime Number, we would get:
14 45 ……..Hijri Year
15 + 8 = 23………………………….23………………..Year of Arrival
14……………………………..1 + 4 = 5
5 + 15 = 20………………..20………………………..Century of Arrival
"Hazrat Isa was 23 Years of Age when Allah lifted Him and then He would return
back to Damascus and would kill Dajjal."
This Saying was mentioned in the Book by Allama Rajab Barsi, "Mashariq Al
Waqeen" - Page - 102
The Number 23 is a 2007 American thriller film written by Fernley Phillips and
directed by Joel Schumacher. Jim Carrey stars as a man who becomes obsessed with
the 23 enigma once he reads about it in a strange book that seemingly mirrors
his own life. The film was released in the United States on February 23, 2007.
Feb (02) 23
02 23
Year of Second Coming of Jesus Christ - 20 23
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 1284
The Islamic Date on 23rd Feb, 2007 was:
The new 69-degree high was recorded at Argentina's Marambio research base,
located on Seymour Island, part of an island chain off the coast of the Antarctic
Peninsula. The peninsula is one of the fastest-warming regions on Earth, according
to the World Meteorological Organization — an agency of the United Nations (UN)
— with average temperatures rising 5.4 F (3 C) over the last 50 years.
At the same time, annual ice loss from the Antarctic ice sheet increased more than
sixfold. As the surrounding ocean warms, huge chunks of ice break off and enter the
sea, slowly diminishing the continent's icy coastline. If a glacier retreats faster than
new ice can form to replace it, that glacier could collapse, potentially spilling billions
of tons of ice into the water and contributing to sea level rise. According to NASA,
Antarctica's two fastest-shrinking glaciers — the Pine Island Glacier and Thwaites
The warming trend is already continuing into the new year: January 2020 was rated
the hottest January in the 141-year climate record.
One of Antarctica's fastest-shrinking glaciers just lost an iceberg twice the size of
Washington, D.C.
Pine Island Glacier, one of the fastest-shrinking glaciers in Antarctica, has just lost
another huge chunk of ice to the sea, continuing a troubling trend that has become
a near-annual occurrence in the last decade.
While England, Scotland and Wales have outlawed inter-family relations, incest
between same-sex siblings in the Republic of Ireland is not illegal.
That's more because the Punishment of Incest Act 1908 assumes relations between
males and females. Consensual incest is fully legal in Spain, Russia, and is not
strictly prohibited under Portuguese law. There is also no law prohbiting consenting
relatives from having sex in France, Belgium and Luxembourg, It's also legal for
people in the Netherlands. In Greece, incest is outlawed for adults, but there is
nothing to stop minors.
This is a SIN in most Religions of the World but now the humanity is under the Trap
of Satan and doing those Sins which were not acceptable for centuries.
This is a Major Sign of the End Times and the Coming of the Jesus Christ.
Hazrat Esa (AS) known as Jesus Christ in Christians was lifted to 4th Sky when he
was 23 Years of Age according to the Sayings of our Imam Hassan (AS). He will come
back to Earth in 2023 AD at the same age of 23
Imam Mahdi's Arrival would take place in 1445 Hijri and He would look like 45 years
of Age.
The Ages of Hazrat Esa (AS) - Jesus Christ and Mahdi are Same as the Years of their
Second Coming and Arrival. It is another Strange thing in their Arrival.
Solar cycles have an average duration of about 11 years. They have been
observed by changes in the sun's appearance and by changes seen on Earth, such
as auroras for hundreds of years.
Solar variation causes changes in space weather, weather, and climate on Earth.
It causes a periodic change in the amount of irradiation from the Sun that is
experienced on Earth.
Throughout the history, the Sun has been worshipped in many religions. Sun
worship was prevalent in ancient Egyptian religion.
Very important political events happened on every solar cycle. For example,
1990 AD: The New World Order was introduced by the US President, George
H.W. Bush on 11 September, 1990
2001 AD: USA came under attack by terrorists on 11 September, 2001 AD exactly
after 11 years. The Wars against Terrorism started in Afghanistan, Pakistan,
Lebanon, Iraq, etc.
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 1290
2012 AD: The African Countries came under attack like Libya, Sudan, CAR, etc
2023 AD: Now on the next Solar Cycle after 11 years, it is believed that the
Second Coming of the Jesus Christ and the Arrival of Imam Mahdi is expected.
So even from the Solar Cycle, the Year – 2023 AD is the next important year for
any Big Change in the World.
There is a lot of resemblance between the Arrival of 1st Muhammad i.e. Prophet
Muhammad (PBUH) and the Arrival of Last Muhammad i.e. The Arrival of Mahdi
The Two Big Empires at the time of the Arrival of Prophet Muhammad (PBUH) were
Roman and Persian Empires. The Kings of those Empires knew that the Last Prophet
is soon coming to the World and His father would be Hazrat Abdullah.
They contacted Hazrat Abdul Mutalib who was the Grand Father of Prophet
Muhammad (PBUH) to marry Hazrat Abdullah with their daughters. But Hazrat
Abdul Mutalib refused the Marriage Proposals both from the Roman Empire and
the Persian Empire.
Similarly the Modern Empires of America, Europe and Isreal know about the Arrival
of the Mahdi and the Second Coming of Jesus Christ very precisely.
The Fire which was burning in the Temple of Persian Empire extinguished on the
Arrival of our Prophet Muhammad (PBUH) and the 14 Pillars in the Roman Empire
fell on that occasion of the Arrival of Mahdi.
Similarly the Western Capitalism and Satanic Dajjal System is failing all over the
World and the Strong Economic Pillars of the West and the East are falling apart as
the humanity is approaching the Arrival of Mahdi in 2023 AD.
The Jews and Hindus Scholars are known as best Mathematicians in the History and
even today they are the Best. Both Hindu and Jew Scholars are clearly indicating
the Arrival of their Saviors in 2023 AD.
The Movie showed the sudden and mysterious deaths of people all over the World
and fulfilling the prophecy of the Bible that 2/3rd Population of the World would
die from War, Hunger and Diseases before the Second Coming of Jesus Christ.
2014 AD till 2023 AD.........10 Years before Second Coming of Jesus Christ
"The Mountain of Gold would arise near the River Arafat and the people
would fight over that Mountain of Gold and when you see that Gold,
please remain away from that Mountain of Gold."
Prophet Muhammad (PBUH)
The Muslim Scholars interpret that Mountain of Gold as the Oil and Gas which is the
top hot commodity in the World today and its demand is every where in the World.
That Oil and Gas in Iraq which was discovered in 1925 AD - almost Hundred years
ago is the Mountain of Gold and since 1925 AD, there were many wars fought in
and near Iraq as we see in the past 100 years.
The recent Iraq war was in 2003 AD when the USA invaded Iraq and removed the
President Saddam from power and captured all the Oil fields in Iraq and gave to
their Oil and Gas Companies as they were the Occupiers of Iraq and Iraq was their
new colony.
Millions of people in Iraq lost their lives because of these Oil Wars and to capture
the Oil resources of Iraq by the British and USA in the past 100 years.
The River Arafat starts from Turkey and passes through Iraq and Syria. All this
region has Oil and Gas and that Oil and Gas is the Mountain of Gold and the people
are fighting for this Mountain of Gold i.e. Oil and Gas as told by our beloved
Prophet Muhammad (PBUH) 1400 years ago.
Presenting the article by David Treybig with the courtesy of the following website:
https://lifehopeandtruth.com/prophecy/revelation/meaning-of-the-
seventh-trumpet/
The book of Revelation provides an overview of prophetic events that will occur
in the end time before Jesus Christ’s second coming and beyond.
The seals, trumpets and plagues represent a series of events that will affect all
mankind during these momentous times.
The sounding of the seventh trumpet announces the culmination of God’s plan for
this world and the remaining steps that He will take to ensure that His plan is
accomplished for all of mankind.
“Then the seventh angel sounded: And there were loud voices in heaven, saying,
‘The kingdoms of this world have become the kingdoms of our Lord and of His
Christ, and He shall reign forever and ever!’
“And the twenty-four elders who sat before God on their thrones fell on their faces
and worshiped God, saying: ‘We give You thanks, O Lord God Almighty, the One
who is and who was and who is to come, because You have taken Your great power
and reigned. The nations were angry, and Your wrath has come, and the time of the
dead, that they should be judged, and that You should reward Your servants the
prophets and the saints, and those who fear Your name, small and great, and
should destroy those who destroy the earth.’
“Then the temple of God was opened in heaven, and the ark of His covenant was
seen in His temple. And there were lightnings, noises, thunderings, an earthquake,
and great hail” (Revelation 11:15-19).
Years later, Daniel also had a dream in which God confirmed the coming of this
eternal kingdom. In his vision Daniel saw “One like the Son of Man, coming with
the clouds of heaven,” who “was given dominion and glory and a kingdom, that
all peoples, nations, and languages should serve Him.”
And again, Daniel noted that His dominion “shall not pass away, and His
kingdom [is] the one which shall not be destroyed” (Daniel 7:13-14).
After Jesus’ death and resurrection, He spent 40 days with His disciples before
ascending into heaven. He spent this time “speaking of the things pertaining to the
kingdom of God” (Acts 1:3). The Kingdom of God, which has been prepared by God
the Father and His Son from the foundation of the world.
The Kingdom of God has likewise been the focus of God’s people throughout the
ages. Abraham “waited for the city which has foundations, whose builder and
maker is God” (Hebrews 11:10), and Jesus instructs us to pray for this Kingdom to
come (Matthew 6:9-10). Additionally, Jesus said that seeking this Kingdom and
God’s righteousness is to take priority in our lives (Matthew 6:33).
These elders say that the nations were angry, that God’s wrath has come, that the
time for rewarding God’s faithful people has come and that God will soon destroy
those who destroyed the earth.
Let’s now consider how these end-time events relate to the establishment of the
Kingdom of God.
When Jesus gave signs of the end of this present age in His Olivet Discourse—signs
which correlate with the seals in the book of Revelation—He said, “For nation will
rise against nation, and kingdom against kingdom” (Matthew 24:7).
Some of the conflicts between nations during the end times are specifically
identified. Bible prophecy indicates that a major conflict will erupt between powers
warring over control of the Middle East. “At the time of the end the king of the
South shall attack him; and the king of the North shall come against him like a
whirlwind” (Daniel 11:40).
In addition to this conflict, Zechariah 14:2 says that in the end all the nations will
come together “to battle against Jerusalem.” When Christ returns, these armies will
unite to fight against Him and quickly be overcome (Revelation 19:19-21).
So, by the time the seventh trumpet sounds, mankind will have already been
suffering from the wrath of God.
The wrath of God, however, is not yet complete. Because humans will still refuse to
repent of their sins and acknowledge Jesus as the King of the earth, seven last
plagues—also called “seven golden bowls full of the wrath of God” that will follow
the seventh trumpet—will wreak additional devastation upon mankind and the
earth (Revelation 15:7).
In these seven last plagues, “the wrath of God is complete” (verse 1).
In praising God at the sounding of the seventh trumpet, the 24 elders also noted
that the time had come for the dead to be judged and God’s faithful people to be
rewarded. (Do you know what the Bible means by a converted, faithful Christian?
See our online article “Many Are Called, but Few Are Chosen.”)
The Bible shows that the sounding of this trumpet is indeed the great hope of the
saints throughout the ages.The Bible shows that the sounding of this trumpet is
indeed the great hope of the saints throughout the ages.
In teaching about the resurrection of the dead, Paul wrote: “Behold, I tell you a
mystery: We shall not all sleep, but we shall all be changed—in a moment, in the
twinkling of an eye, at the last trumpet. For the trumpet will sound, and the dead
will be raised incorruptible, and we shall be changed” (1 Corinthians 15:51-52).
On another occasion Paul wrote: “For the Lord Himself will descend from heaven
with a shout, with the voice of an archangel, and with the trumpet of God. And the
dead in Christ will rise first. Then we who are alive and remain shall be caught up
together with them in the clouds to meet the Lord in the air. And thus we shall
always be with the Lord” (1 Thessalonians 4:16-17).
Thus, in their praise of God, the 24 elders summarize what has led up to the
blowing of the seventh trumpet and what is yet to occur.
This year the Feast of Trumpets falls on Saturday, Sept. 19, 2020. If you’d like to join
Christians around the world who will be observing this day in anticipation of Christ’s
return, feel free to contact us for further information.
To learn more about end-time events that will affect your life, see “How 7 Trumpets
of Revelation Will Affect Humanity” and our booklet The Book of Revelation: The
Storm Before the Calm.
https://www.vice.com/en/article/qjp48x/is-the-us-already-in-a-new-civil-war
The signs of a coming conflict are everywhere. Political polarization is up, gun
and ammunition sales have spiked, killers such as Kyle Rittenhouse are being
lauded by their political allies, and protests are widespread in American cities.
Police kill unarmed people in the street, the government is polarized and
corrupt, and our institutions are failing. Armed militias patrol U.S. streets and
groups like the Atomwaffen Division and the Base plot to start a larger conflict.
Mass shootings, sometimes ideologically motivated and other times not, occur
frequently. Poverty and unemployment are widespread as mass evictions loom
and Congress stalls to help those in need.
This is all happening during an election year, and we have a sect of the president's
supporters who have vowed to show up at polling places armed. If you have a
terrible and ominous feeling about all this, you’re not alone.
Some on the far right are talking about another civil war. Some experts who have
studied sectarian violence in the United States and other countries think we're
already in one.
INCIPIENT INSURGENCY
According to several experts I spoke with, a new civil conflict will look nothing
like the first American Civil War. It’s not likely that clear sides will be drawn up
with massive armies of Americans marching towards each other as drones strike
from above. An insurgency is more likely—a period of sustained and distributed
conflict where non-state actors carry out violence to achieve a political goal.
Several said they believe we’re already in the early stages of one, a period before
large-scale political violence the CIA defines as an “incipient insurgency.”
There are plenty of examples from around the world for what this might look
like, and many civil wars today do not have soldiers marching on the battlefield.
The early stage of the Syrian Civil War was fought by paramilitary groups in
neighborhoods. For 30 years in Ireland, insurgent groups policed the streets,
disappeared people from their homes, assassinated political enemies, and bombed
buildings. The "Colombian conflict" was an asymmetrical war that lasted almost
60 years and involved various guerrilla groups (most famously the FARC)
fighting each other and the government. During the Years of Lead in Italy, right-
wing terrorists colluded with the police and assassinated leftists political leaders.
These and other conflicts are overwhelmingly what civil war looks like now.
Armed groups with various objectives vying for territory, and cultural and
political influence, often violently. According to several experts, if America goes
to war with itself, it won’t look like it did in 1860. It’ll look more like Belfast in
1972 or Aleppo in 2011. But even these analogies fall short.
It’s hard to find direct historical analogues for what’s happening in the United
States right now. This kind of political violence and civil strife isn’t new, but
there’s a lot of factors that make America unique. The United States is a large
country spread out across millions of square miles, social media is fueling the
conflict, and our populace is heavily armed.
“The worst atrocities come from fear, not hate. Because people think they’re
good,” he said. “And they can justify incredible atrocious violence to themselves
on the basis that it is defensive…you need a belief that some other group is
encroaching on your territory. And then you need to have lost confidence in the
ability of the state to act as an impartial and neutral protector. We’re already
losing that confidence because of COVID.”
Kilcullen isn’t the only person who thinks America is close to something
incredibly dangerous.
“We are in a state of civil war, whenever, in more than one geographical location
in the United States it becomes commonplace for multiple non-state armed
groups, to fight each other with deadly force. When that is an occurrence that is
common in more than one location in the country, that’s a civil war,” Robert
Evans told me over the phone. Evans is a conflict journalist who’s reported from
Ukraine, Syria, and Iraq. His work has appeared in Bellingcat where he reports
on modern American extremist movements. He’s also a podcaster and his 2019
podcast “It Could Happen Here” described the possibility of a new American
Civil War.
“To most people, the idea of a second American Civil War feels more like science
fiction than a possible future,” Evans said on “It Could Happen Here.” “It feels
silly when I stand in line at the DMV or hop on to a public bus or train. The
systems that govern our lives here are so seemingly intricate, so stable, and so
settled that any kind of mass upset feels impossible. Fantastic even. But I have
walked through the cities where the busses still run, just without windows
because the blast from mortars have blown them all out. I’ve watched people
stand in line and fill out forms in government buildings while howitzers shake the
foundations and machine guns chatter half a mile away. I have seen systems
collapse. Everything I’ve seen and everything I’ve read over the past two years
has convinced me that the United States is closer to that kind of terror than
anyone is willing to admit.”
Even now, much of what's happening in the United States can be put out of mind
or avoided if you don't go to protests and avoid large parts of the internet. Life
marches on.
In the early 2000s, Isaacson was in Bogotá working with security experts and
human rights activists who were detailing the horrors unfolding in Colombia’s
countryside. In between meetings, he would grab a meal at a cafe.
“I’m eating my sandwich, I’ve got another meeting coming up, I’m going to hear
more horrible things, and I look up and I just see the beginning of this soap opera
that's very popular in Colombia at the time, with this happy middle class family,
eating together and dancing and hugging and you know, then they could go off
and do their soap opera things,” Isaacson told me over the phone. “You realize
that even in this horrible period for Colombia, for most of the country, this
conflict was just something you saw on television. It doesn’t really impact their
everyday lives.”
“Collapse,” he said, “is not evenly distributed…I’d say there’s a real danger that
[America] is going to see sustained political violence.”
But Isaacson noted there are important differences between Colombia and the
United States. In Colombia, the conflict happened mostly in the country and the
different sides took and held territory. “In America, it will be more urban. It’s
not going to be about controlling territory,” he said. “A lot of it will be, like
terrorism, an effort to display a show of force and make a statement. It’ll be more
performative than what you’d see in Colombia where the guerillas really did
intend to take over the country.”
According to Kilcullen, the step above militants are militias. “Militias are a subset
of militants who are actually armed and organized,” he said. “But they’re still
mostly defensive. You get smaller and smaller groups as you go up the pyramid.”
He’s seen a growing movement called Area Code Militias, groups that organize to
defend specific area codes. They even have a website where they organize in the
open. Organizing for community defense in America is not illegal.
At the very top of the pyramid are the actual insurgents. “A militia is generally
defensive,” Kilcullen said. “Then you get people that are willing to travel a long
distance to fight somebody else or they’re willing to go into somebody else’s
neighborhood and carry out an atrocity.”
Members of the Atomwaffen Division have killed several people. In February, the
FBI arrested several members of the group as part of a national crackdown and
In Michigan, the FBI arrested 14 people, including members of a group called the
Wolverine Watchmen, for allegedly plotting to kidnap Governor Gretchen
Whitmer. The prosecution released videos of the group it said show the alleged
conspirators conducting live fire training in preparation for the kidnap attempt.
“If this whole thing starts to happen, I’m telling you what dude, I’m taking out as
many of these mother fuckers as I can,” suspect Brandon Caserta said in one of
the videos. “Every single one. Every single one.”
There’s also the Base, a group of neo-Nazi accelerationists who see America’s
police forces as spread thin thanks to the protests. According to the Base, it’s a
perfect time for a terrorist attack that could spread violence. The Base built its
insurgency starting in 2018 and had picked antifascist, journalist, and
government targets but was busted by the FBI in January 2020.
In Kilcullen’s pyramid, these groups sit at the top and are the real threat.
Kilcullen was particularly worried about accelerationists.
“The bases are loaded and all the components are there. It really only takes a
spark to set off a significant amount of violence and once you have that violence,
it becomes self sustaining,” Kilcullen said. “If you and I see that, for sure the
accelerationists do too. And their whole agenda is to set that spark. I worry that
people that haven’t shown themselves yet, who aren’t doing street stuff, the
underground cells, are planning a full on bombing, not a firework.”
He said he’s worried about a scenario where there’s widespread violence and
death at a protest. This might cause the groups involved to lose public support.
Or, it might not. “Worst case scenario is that you develop a network of reprisals.
That’s like The Troubles, that’s like fucking Syria.”
“Syria wasn’t just Assad and his army versus the people,” Evans said. “It was
Assad and his paramilitaries. I’m much more worried about the United States
winding up like Syria than about the United States winding up like Ireland.”
Kilcullen said that one thing that makes the American situation uniquely
dangerous is the amount of weapons it has. “Something that’s not usual in other
circumstances. You’ve got 100 million plus weapons in private hands…and about
a five million spike in weapon purchases in the last six months and a nationwide
ammo shortage,” he said.
Sales of guns, ammunition, and body armor are way up in the United States in
2020. We’ve had spikes in firearms sales in the past, they typically happen after a
mass shooting as people panic-buy weapons they soon think might be illegal. This
is different and it’s bigger. In the January after Obama’s re-election in 2012, an
estimated 2 million guns were sold in America. The spike quickly dropped back.
In March 2020, Americans purchased an estimated 1.9 million guns. In April, the
FBI processed 2.9 million background checks for guns. In June, it conducted 3.9
million background checks. Gun sales are so high that arms
manufacturers literally can’t make ammunition fast enough to keep up with
demand. Body armor sales are up as much as 600 percent for some
manufacturers.
Right wing paramilitary groups clashing with leftists while politicians egg them
on is similar to the strategy of tension employed by Italy’s conservative Christian
Democracy (DC) party during the Years of Lead from 1960s through the 1980s.
“The strategy would involve trying to frighten the bulk of the population by
saying, ‘We’re in a polarized society where the extreme left is very very powerful
and may succeed, and if they do, society will fundamentally change and we need
to be fearful of that,” Matt Clement, a senior Lecturer of criminology at the
University of Winchester in the UK told me over the phone.
During those years in Italy, political cynicism among the population was de
rigueur. “The political machinery of Italy looked broken,” Clement said. “There
was a crisis of confidence in the ruling party and the left. The rush to violence was
precisely because the conventional political options of either party were bad. As a
result, people were on the streets and people were using violence on both sides.”
Clement sees the parallels between Italy then and America now and, like
Kilcullen and Evans, he thinks much depends on the upcoming election. “If
Trump lost and tried not to leave office, then clear that would lead to outrage and
protests,” he said. “On the other hand if Trump loses, especially if he loses
narrowly, you can imagine that many of his supporters would be very keen on the
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 1311
idea of actively demonstrating their beliefs…it’s ready made for further ruptures
no matter what way the election goes.”
According to Kilcullen, the pandemic and social media as direct causes for the
current climate of uncertainty and looming violence. Historical comparisons
between Ireland in the 20th century and America in the 1960s and 70s are
imperfect, though people have been bringing both up a lot lately. From 1971 to
1972, there were 2,500 bombings in the U.S. The explosions were ubiquitous and,
in cities like NYC, a part of the background of city life.
But 2020 is different. “The difference is social media,” Kicullen said. “How many
Americans knew there were that many bombings at the time? I’d say probably
not many. What we have now, is every time there’s an incident it gets amplified
and goes viral and the players become martyrs…when you have the amplification
effects of social media, it takes fewer incidents than it did in the 1970s.”
“I don’t know how you pull back from the brink here,” he said. “At the end of the
day, the least you’ve got right now is in the low tens of millions of people who’ve
actively prepared to murder their countrymen and in many were looking forward
to it. How does a Joe Biden electoral victory change that?”
Kilcullen wanted to stress that he could be very wrong about everything. Both he
and Evans have spent their lives studying conflict and it has a way of affecting
their point of view.
“I’ve spent 30 years getting pretty good at spotting [civil conflicts] when they’re
starting,” Kilcullen said. “A colleague has joked that I’ve predicted eight out of
the last two civil wars. I would take what I’m saying with a grain of salt.”
Imran Nazar Hosein is an Islamic scholar, author and philosopher, who specializes
in Islamic eschatology, world politics, economics, and modern socio-
economic/political issues. He is the author of Jerusalem in the Qur'an and other
books.
Hosein was born into an Indo-Trinidadian family in Trinidad and Tobago. He studied
Islam under the guidance of the Islamic scholar, Muhammad Fazlur Rahman
Ansari at the Aleemiyah Institute of Islamic Studies, Karachi, Pakistan. He also did
post-graduate studies in Philosophy at Karachi University, and International
Relations at the University of West Indies, Trinidad, and the Graduate Institute of
International Studies, Geneva, Switzerland. He led the Jumu'ah prayers and
delivered the sermon at the United Nations headquarters in Manhattan once a
month for ten years.
http://imranhosein.org/n/
His famous books on the coming End Times are also availble on his website:
He has been preaching and advocating the Coming of End Times in his lectures and
his books for the last 40 years. He has been a great speaker on Islamic topics and
especially on the Signs of the End Times.
His forecasts since 1993 have included predictions about terrorism, economic
collapses and war. More recent forecasts involve fascism in the United States, food
riots and tax revolts. Celente has long predicted global anti-Americanism, a failing
economy and immigration woes in the U.S.
The Research Institute engages in trend forecasting across a wide range of topics
including global economics to geopolitics, to health and education etc. It also
organizes keynote speaker engagements, and symposiums and engages in private
consultations for business and for individuals. Gerald Celente is its founder and
director.
https://trendsresearch.com/
He has recently predicted the coming months:
1. World Economic Collapse
4. World Draught
5. Global Reset
It is narrated in different Ahadith that the Three (3) famous Holy Mosques of
Muslims would be either desecrated or damaged by Suffiani group and Jews and
the names of these Mosques are:
It would be destroyed by Zionist Jews in Israel so that they can build their 3rd
Temple of Solomon.
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 1317
Temple of Solomon -- Design Plan to build it on Al Aqsa Mosque
This Holy Mosque in Kufa would be desecrated or damaged by the Army of Suffiani
few months before the Arrival of Mahdi. This is the Headquarter of Hazrat Ali (AS)
and Hazrat Ali (AS) was Shaheed in this Mosque when He was attacked by Ibn e
Muljim on the morning of 19th Ramazan, 40 Hijri.
This Mosque is the 2nd Most Holy Mosque in Islam after Holy Kaaba. This Mosque
would also be damaged and desecrated by the Army of Suffiani who would emerge
6 months before the Arrival of Mahdi.
When the World War - 3 would officially End by 2nd September, 2022 AD there
would be severe shortages of food and medicine supplies all over the world because
of wide spread destruction by the Nuclear and Solar Weapons used in the Last and
3rd World War.
From September, 2022 AD till July, 2023 AD, the Total Time is 11 Months.
مهـ ــدى- 59
25 Prophets of Allah are mentioned in the Holy Quran:
509
The Abjad of Arabic word, "Sharat" - ط meaning The Condition is also 509
ط - 509
509................5 + 0 + 9 = 14
مهـ ــدى- 59...................5 + 9 = 14
After the use of Nuclear and Solar Weapons by the Big Powers in the World in
WW3, the sun rays would not reach the Earth properly and the World would also
suffer with bitter Winter which would start in October, 2022 AD and continue till
April, 2023 AD all over the World. So this Drama is warning about that Winter which
is coming very soon in 2022 - 2023 AD.
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 1327
316. Imam Jaffar e Sadiq predicted that after the Death
of a King of Arab, the desendents of the King would fight
for the throne and the days of their kingdom would be in
months and weeks before the Arrival of Imam Mahdi
"After the Death of a King in Arabia, their Days of Rule for Years would be Gone and
they would rule for months and days before the Arrival of Mahdi."
We all know that after the death of prominent Ruler of Saudi Arabia, i.e. King
Abdullah who is also mentioned in severa Ahadith of our Masoomeen, Muhammad
Salman became the King and Ruler of Saudi Arabia and he is very ill and old and
practically his son, known as MBS - Muhammad Bin Salman is ruling the Saudi
Arabia in practically all decisions whether foreign affairs or military decisions.
As our Imam Jaffar e Sadiq (AS) mentioned that after the Death of a King, the next
rulers would not rule even for a Single Year but only for few months and days
before the Arrival of Mahdi.
According to the current situation in Saudi Arabia, the current ruler of Saudi Arabia
would die in 1444 Hijri some time after 29th July, 2022 AD and after the End of
WW3, the same year in which we would see the Kharooj (Exit) of Dajjal or Anti
Christ as the Arrival of Imam Mahdi would be on 28th July, 2023 AD.
The Royal family of Saudi Arabia is seriously fighting and have serious conflict over
the next Ruler of Saudi Arabia especially the Rule of MBS - Muhammad Bin Salman
and after the Death of current King of Saudi Arabia i.e. Muhammad Salman the
princes of Royal Family of Saudi Arabia would start fighting for the Throne of Saudi
Arabia and their Rule would End with the Arrival of Mahdi in 2023 AD.
The “Yaum e Kharooj” i.e. The Day of Exit of Mahdi from Gaibat would be
announced by Hazrat Ali (AS) on 14th April, 2023 AD.
The “Yaum e Arrival” i.e. The Day of Arrival on the Holy Kaaba, Mecca would be
on 28th July, 2023 AD.
That is 10th Muharram, 1445 Hijri on Friday
There are five (5) confirmed signs of the Arrival of Imam Mahdi.
https://time.com/5876606/economic-depression-coronavirus/
We’re not talking about Hoovervilles. Today the U.S. and most of the
world have a sturdy middle class. We have social safety nets that didn’t
exist nine decades ago. Fortunately, that’s true even for developing
countries. Most governments today accept a deep economic
interdependence among nations created by decades of trade and
investment globalization. But those expecting a so-called V-shaped
economic recovery, a scenario in which vaccinemakers conquer COVID-
19 and everybody goes straight back to work, or even a smooth and
steady longer-term bounce-back like the one that followed the global
financial crisis a decade ago, are going to be disappointed.
Depressions don’t just generate ugly stats and send buyers and sellers
into hibernation. They change the way we live. The Great Recession
created very little lasting change. Some elected leaders around the
world now speak more often about wealth inequality, but few have done
much to address it. Large segments of society, particularly people who
weren’t already on the verge of retirement, were able to hunker down
and later return to the same approach to saving and investing they
practiced before the crisis. They were rewarded with a period of solid,
long-lasting recovery. That’s very different from the current crisis.
COVID-19 fears will bring lasting changes to public attitudes toward all
activities that involve crowds of people and how we work on a daily
basis; it will also permanently change America’s competitive position in
the world and raise profound uncertainty about U.S.-China relations
going forward.
Social safety nets are now being tested as never before. Some will break.
Health care systems, particularly in poorer countries, are already
buckling under the strain. As they struggle to cope with the human toll
of this slowdown, governments will default on debt. For all these
reasons, middle-income and developing countries are especially
vulnerable, but the debt burdens and likelihood of defaults will pressure
the entire global financial system.
Now for the bad news. First, that data reflects conditions from mid-
June–before the most recent spike in COVID-19 cases across the
American South and West that has caused at least a temporary stall in
the recovery. Signs of corporate economic distress are mounting. And
second and third waves of coronavirus infections could throw many
more people out of work. In short, there will be no sustainable recovery
until the virus is fully contained. That probably means a vaccine. Even
when there is a vaccine, it won’t flip a switch bringing the world back to
normal. Some will have the vaccine before others do. Some who are
offered it won’t take it. Recovery will come by fits and starts.
Eurasia Group
In the early days of the pandemic, the G-7 governments and their
central banks moved quickly to support workers and businesses with
income support and credit lines in hopes of tiding them over until they
could safely resume normal business. The Fed, European Central Bank,
Bank of England and Bank of Japan threw out the rule book to add
unprecedented support to ensure markets could continue to function.
That’s why the shape of economic recovery will be a kind of ugly “jagged
swoosh,” a shape that reflects a yearslong stop-start recovery process
and a global economy that will inevitably reopen in stages until a
vaccine is in place and distributed globally.
https://www.nytimes.com/2020/04/14/us/politics/coronavirus-economy-
recession-depression.html
The grim forecast underscored the magnitude of the shock that the pandemic
has inflicted on both advanced and developing economies and the daunting
task that policymakers face in containing the fallout. With countries already
hoarding medical supplies and international travel curtailed, the I.M.F warned
that the crisis threatened to reverse decades of gains from globalization.
In a joint statement after the meeting, they pledged to coordinate their efforts
to restore growth, protect jobs and reinforce the global financial system. They
noted that the I.M.F. was prepared to deploy its $1 trillion lending capacity to
help vulnerable economies cope with recessions and they endorsed a proposal
to let poor countries suspend debt service payments. The broader Group of 20,
which is also expected to convene virtually this week, must still sign off on the
debt relief plan.
“The scale of this health crisis is generating unprecedented challenges for the
global economy,” the G7 officials said.
The United States is expected to take a severe hit, with the I.M.F. projecting
that the American economy will contract by about 6 percent in 2020.
The global group was skeptical about the prospect for a “V” shaped recovery in
the United States, suggesting that a sharp rise in unemployment and
disruptions to supply chains will keep the economy below its pre-virus trend
next year.
The impact is already evident in trade data, where slowing economic activity
has caused global commerce to plummet. Tracking by S&P Global Panjiva
published Tuesday showed global shipments of goods into the United States fell
by 10.1 percent in March, the fewest number of monthly shipments since 2016.
Consumer goods have been hit particularly hard, with shipments of furniture,
apparel, steel and electronics falling by more than 15 percent last month
compared with one year ago.
Ms. Gopinath said that the loss of global output would be “far worse” than the
2008 financial crisis and that policymakers were facing an unusual
predicament in that traditional stimulus measures are little match for a
pandemic that is being fought with shutdowns and quarantines.
“It is very likely that this year the global economy will experience its worst
recession since the Great Depression,” she said.
According to the I.M.F., the global economic contraction from 1929 to 1932 was
approximately 10 percent. Advanced economies shrank by 16 percent during
that period.
downturn, which could prolong the crisis as poor countries struggle to combat
the virus.
While the Great Depression started in the financial sector and played out over
several years, Mr. Eichengreen notes that the drop in economic activity this
year has been sudden and the bottom remains unclear. But some of the
spillover effects could be similar, he said, with skittish households increasing
their savings and businesses growing wary of large capital investments. And as
deficits soar, some countries could push for austerity measures.
Governments around the world are grappling with how and when to reopen
parts of their economies in hopes of reviving business activity. President
Trump is expected to make an announcement this week that could provide
guidance for scaling back stay-at-home orders.
But the economic recovery is expected to be slow until people are confident it’s
safe.
Bank of America economists said in a research note that “the coronavirus will
cause the deepest postwar recession in U.S. history,” predicting a 6 percent hit
to growth for the full year. Neel Kashkari, president of the Federal Reserve
Bank of Minneapolis, said a quick rebound was unlikely, particularly if people
continued to worry about getting sick.
“We know after the Great Depression people carried the scars of that
experience with them for many, many years,” Mr. Kashkari said in an interview
on the “Today” show on NBC. “I think the longer that this goes on, the more
people who are affected by it, the longer that recovery is going to be.”
That view is not monolithic. Another Fed official suggested on Tuesday that the
shutdown was costing $25 billion a day in lost output, and that blanket testing
should be made available to get people back to work.
“People say it can’t be done or we don’t have enough resources,” he said. “You
really want to ramp that up at all costs and even if somebody gets rich off it or
something, you still want to do it.”
Emerging markets and developing economies will not be spared, but in some
cases they fare better. In China, where the virus originated and where
draconian measures were imposed to combat it, the economy will expand at a
sluggish 1.2 percent this year, down from 6.1 percent last year. India’s economy
is expected to grow 1.9 percent, down from 4.2 percent in 2019.
Tentatively, the fund projects global growth to rebound to 5.8 percent next
year. Barring the fast discovery of a vaccine or treatment, most countries are
not expected to return to their pre-virus growth trends in 2021.
The fund calls for governments to invest in supporting their health care
systems and ensuring that workers maintain ties to their jobs during
lockdowns so that economic activity can resume when the virus recedes. In a
press briefing that was broadcast online, Ms. Gopinath urged countries not to
turn to protectionism and retreat behind their borders, warning that following
such instincts could slow the recovery.
“It is very important that this does not become a feature where we reverse all
the gains we have got from globalization,” she said.
The 19th Century famous Writer, Mr. Ingersoll Lockwood wrote a book,
"1900 or The Last President" in 1896 AD and mentioned the names, "Trump and
Pense" in His book and mentioned Trump as the Last President of UNITED
AMERICA - Amazing Prophecy. He even mentioned 3rd November in His book and
the next 59th US Presidential Elections would be on 3rd Nov, 2020 AD ---
Remarkable Prophecy and after this historic election, the America would NOT
remain UNITED again.
“And Listen on the Day when the Crier shall Cry from a near place. The
Day when they shall hear the Cry in truth; That is the DAY of Kharooj
(Imam Mahdi).”
So Quran used the Arabic words, “Yaum al Kharooj” for the Appearance of
Mahdi. And Hazrat Ali (AS) would announce his Day of Arrival on 23 rd Ramadhan,
1444 Hijri i.e. 14th April, 2023 AD on Friday and everyone in this world would
hear the voice and message of Hazrat Ali in their language from the near place of
their house. But only 1 Nation i.e. Shias of Ali would understand this message of
Imam Mahdi’s Arrival.
In recent years, all of us are witnessing the conditions of Drought every where in
the World including major players in food market as USA, India, China, etc.
According to UN report, 2 billion people are facing food shortages out of 7 billion
people in the world today.
The United Nations Food and Agriculture Organization estimates that nearly 870
million people of the 7.1 billion people in the world, or one in eight, were
suffering from chronic undernourishment in 2010-2012. Almost all the hungry
people, 852 million, live in developing countries, representing 15 percent of the
population of developing counties. There are 16 million people undernourished
in developed countries (FAO 2012).
Developed regions also saw the number of hungry rise, from 13 million in 2004-
2006 to 16 million in 2010-2012, reversing a steady decrease in previous years
from 20 million in 1990-1992 (FAO 2012). The principal problem is that many
people in the world do not have sufficient land to grow, or income to purchase,
enough food.
1/3rd people in the world would die from Global drought from 2018 to 2023 AD
as per the prophecies of our Imams i.e. 5 years from the Arrival of Mahdi (AS).
“Arab world would not be destroyed unless Egypt would be destroyed and
there would not be a Big War unless Kufa would be destroyed.” (Al- Fitan)
“In the future, you would find armies in Syria, Iraq and Yemen.”
“You would not be safe when the War would erupt in Syria.”
“The Day of Judgement (Arrival of Imam Mahdi) would not occur unless the
good people of Iraq would shift to Syria and the evil people of Syria would
not shift from Syria to Iraq.”
“You keep on holding Syria.” (Masnad Ahmad Bin Hambal)
So from the above Sayings of Prophet Muhammad (PBUH), every thing has
happened so far. There is a Civil War going in Syria and Iraq and militants
from Syria known as ISIS have moved from Syria to Iraq and captured many
cities in Iraq and killed thousands of people in Iraq.
This crisis in Iraq and Syria is rapidly becoming an International Conflict in Big
Powers in the region and then by 2018 AD, the Big World War would occur
on the Battle ground of Middle East and many Middle Eastern countries
would be razed to ground in that war and millions of people would die in
that region before the Arrival of Mahdi in 2023 AD.
Hazrat Ali (AS) predicted 1400 years ago to Hazrat Kumail that:
“There would be construction of high rise buildings in Kufa and Baghdad. And
the Eye of Satan – Antenna would be on the top of the buildings.”
So this prophecy has also been fulfilled. One can see lots of high rise buildings
in Kufa and Baghdad, Iraq these days.
Here are some examples of the Names and Terminology having 13 Alphabets as the
Stamp of 13 Satanic Families of the World who are in full control of World Politics,
Global Economy and World Government.
1. WORLD PHARAOHS
2. SIGN AND SYMBOL
3. THIRTEEN RULES
4. TEMPLAR KNIGHT
5. THE UNDERWORLD
6. THE FREE MASON
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 1355
7. THE ROTHSCHILD
8. SECRET SOCIETY
9. The ILLUMINATI
10. ZION PROTOCOLS
11. DIVIDE AND RULE
12. STATE OF ISRAEL
13. ZIONIST STATE
14. LEAGUE NATIONS
15. UNITED NATIONS
16. UNITED KINGDOM
17. UNITED AMERICA
18. THE MIDDLE EAST
19. EUROPEAN UNION
20. BANK OF ENGLAND
21. BANK OF AMERICA
22. THE BILDERBERG
23. GLOBALIZATION
24. ONE WORLD ORDER
25. THE GOVERNMENT
26. ENTERTAINMENT
27. MONEY CHANGERS
28. THE PROPAGANDA
29. HIDDEN AGENDAS
30. SATANIC POWERS
31. THIRD WORLD WAR
32. THE CONSPIRACY
33. ORGANIZATIONS
34. INTERNATIONAL
35. THE REVOLUTION
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 1356
36. ELITE GAME PLAN
37. SCHIZOPHRENIC
38. STERLIZATION
39. MODERN SLAVERY
40. MODERNIZATION
41. MULTICULTURAL
42. ADVERTISEMENT
43. THE MEDIA WORLD
44. OUR GOVERNMENT
45. SKULL AND BONES
46. THE GLOBALISTS
47. THE WALL STREET
48. THE NEW KINGDOM
49. THE AWAKENING
50. WORLD OF TERROR
51. DICTATORSHIPS
52. ELITE FAMILIES
53. BOHEMIAN GROVE
54. LET THE SKY FALL
55. EGYPTIANS RULE
56. ILLUMINATI EYE
57. SATANIC ORDERS
58. THE ARCHITECTS
59. RULE OF AMERICA
60. THE NOBLE PRIZE
61. THE INSIDER JOB
62. ALL SEEING EYES
63. THE NEW DARK AGE
64. ECONOMIC CRASH
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 1357
65. GLOBAL POVERTY
66. EGYPT PYRAMIDS
67. EXPLOITATIONS
68. THE FEDERATION
69. HANDS OF SATAN
70. MEDIA ILLUSION
71. FAKE TERRORISM
72. WORLD CURRENCY
73. ZIONISM AGENDA
74. STATES OF THE US
75. TERROR ATTACKS
76. BANKING SYSTEM
77. PYRAMID SCHEME
78. FEDERAL BANKER
79. FAKE DEMOCRACY
80. NO PLACE LIKE OZ
81. THE SAFETY PLAN
82. FASCIST REGIME
83. THE LATEST NEWS
84. CORONAVIRUS 19
85. THE GREAT RESET
86. WORLD WAR THREE
87. THE APOCALYPSE
88. NEW WORLD ORDER
89. EVERY ONE TO DIE
90. END OF THE WORLD
91. GREATER ISRAEL
13 X 7 = 91
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 1358
326. Imam Mahdi is known as "Muntaqim" and Imam
would take the revenge of Prophets and family of
Prophet Muhammad (PBUH) after His Arrival in 1445 Hijri
1445 Hijri
14...............Century of Arrival
45...............Year of Arrival
If we multiply the Number of Century of Arrival with the Number of Year of Arrival
of Mahdi, we would get:
The Dajjal ( )دجﺎلwould Kharooj (Exit) from Isphan, Iran in the same Year of the
Kharooj of Mahdi which is on 23rd Ramazan, 1444 Hijri from Yemen
The Kharooj (Exit) of Dajjal ( )دجﺎلis also in the Year - 1444 Hijri.
How?
The Abjad of Arabic word, "Dajjal" - دجﺎلis 38
The Kharooj (Exit) of Dajjal - دجﺎلwould also be in the same year of 1444 Hijri when
our Mahdi would Kharooj (Exit) from His Occultation on 23rd Ramazan, 1444 Hijri
from Kara Valley in Yemen.
Number - 119
119 = 17 x 7
1. The Abjad of Arabic words, "Hua Nahnu" - ﻫ ــﻮ ﻧﺤ ــﻦis 119
4. The sum of names of 'Muhammad, Ali and Fatima' in One Arabic Alphabets is also
119 as:
Arrival of Mahdi
1445 Hijri
2023 AD
If we multiply the first 3 Numbers with the Last Number in these Years, we would
get:
144 x 5 = 720
202 x 3 = 606
Now add the Number - 119 with the results i.e. 720 and 606, we would get again
the Year of Arrival of Mahdi as 1445 Hijri as:
ﻃ ــﻮل- 45
Imam Mahdi - 14th Masoom (Infallible) of Allah
If we multiply the Number of the Century of Arrival i.e. 14 with the Number of the
Year of Arrival i.e. 45, we would get:
اس ــم- 101
The ( اس ــمNames) revealed in "Hadith e Saqlain" - ﺣ ـ ـ ـ ـ ـ ـ ــد ث ﺛق ـ ـ ـ ـ ـ ـ ــلare:
We all know that all Muhammad and Aal e Muhammad (PBUH) are ﺷ ـ ـ ـ ـ ـ ـ ـ ـ ـ ــﻔيﻊ
meaning The Intercessors.
ﺷ ـ ـ ـ ـ ـ ـ ـ ـ ــﻔيﻊ- 460
The Arrival of Mahdi is in the Year - 2023 AD. If we multiply the Number of the
Century of the Arrival i.e. 20 with the Number of Year of Arrival i.e. 23, we would
get:
When the Satan asked his life till the Big Judgement Day, Allah replied which is
mentioned in Surah Al- Hajr (15), Verses – 36 to 38 as:
“He (Satan) said: My Lord! Then respite me till the time when they are raised.
He (Allah) said: So surely you are of the respited ones.
Till the period of the TIME MADE KNOWN.”
Presenting the excellent article by Wade Davis published on August 6th, 2020 in The
Rolling Stone website as:
https://www.rollingstone.com/politics/political-commentary/covid-19-end-of-
american-era-wade-davis-1038206/
Wade Davis holds the Leadership Chair in Cultures and Ecosystems at Risk at
the University of British Columbia. His award-winning books include “Into the
Silence” and “The Wayfinders.” His new book, “Magdalena: River of Dreams,” is
published by Knopf.
"Never in our lives have we experienced such a global phenomenon. For the first
time in the history of the world, all of humanity, informed by the unprecedented
reach of digital technology, has come together, focused on the same existential
threat, consumed by the same fears and uncertainties, eagerly anticipating the
same, as yet unrealized, promises of medical science.
Pandemics and plagues have a way of shifting the course of history, and not always
in a manner immediately evident to the survivors. In the 14th Century, the Black
Death killed close to half of Europe’s population. A scarcity of labor led to increased
wages. Rising expectations culminated in the Peasants Revolt of 1381, an inflection
point that marked the beginning of the end of the feudal order that had dominated
medieval Europe for a thousand years.
COVID’s historic significance lies not in what it implies for our daily lives. Change,
after all, is the one constant when it comes to culture. All peoples in all places at all
times are always dancing with new possibilities for life. As companies eliminate or
downsize central offices, employees work from home, restaurants close, shopping
malls shutter, streaming brings entertainment and sporting events into the home,
and airline travel becomes ever more problematic and miserable, people will adapt,
as we’ve always done. Fluidity of memory and a capacity to forget is perhaps the
most haunting trait of our species. As history confirms, it allows us to come to terms
with any degree of social, moral, or environmental degradation.
To be sure, financial uncertainty will cast a long shadow. Hovering over the global
economy for some time will be the sober realization that all the money in the hands
of all the nations on Earth will never be enough to offset the losses sustained when
an entire world ceases to function, with workers and businesses everywhere facing
a choice between economic and biological survival.
In a dark season of pestilence, COVID has reduced to tatters the illusion of American
exceptionalism. At the height of the crisis, with more than 2,000 dying each day,
Americans found themselves members of a failed state, ruled by a dysfunctional and
incompetent government largely responsible for death rates that added a tragic
coda to America’s claim to supremacy in the world.
For the first time, the international community felt compelled to send disaster relief
to Washington. For more than two centuries, reported the Irish Times, “the United
States has stirred a very wide range of feelings in the rest of the world: love and
hatred, fear and hope, envy and contempt, awe and anger. But there is one emotion
that has never been directed towards the U.S. until now: pity.” As American doctors
and nurses eagerly awaited emergency airlifts of basic supplies from China, the
hinge of history opened to the Asian century.
No empire long endures, even if few anticipate their demise. Every kingdom is born
to die. The 15th century belonged to the Portuguese, the 16th to Spain, 17th to the
Dutch. France dominated the 18th and Britain the 19th. Bled white and left
bankrupt by the Great War, the British maintained a pretense of domination as late
as 1935, when the empire reached its greatest geographical extent. By then, of
course, the torch had long passed into the hands of America.
In 1940, with Europe already ablaze, the United States had a smaller army than
either Portugal or Bulgaria. Within four years, 18 million men and women would
serve in uniform, with millions more working double shifts in mines and factories
that made America, as President Roosevelt promised, the arsenal of democracy.
When the Japanese within six weeks of Pearl Harbor took control of 90 percent of
the world’s rubber supply, the U.S. dropped the speed limit to 35 mph to protect
tires, and then, in three years, invented from scratch a synthetic-rubber industry
that allowed Allied armies to roll over the Nazis. At its peak, Henry Ford’s Willow
Run Plant produced a B-24 Liberator every two hours, around the clock. Shipyards in
Long Beach and Sausalito spat out Liberty ships at a rate of two a day for four years;
the record was a ship built in four days, 15 hours and 29 minutes. A single American
In the wake of the war, with Europe and Japan in ashes, the United States with but
6 percent of the world’s population accounted for half of the global economy,
including the production of 93 percent of all automobiles. Such economic dominance
birthed a vibrant middle class, a trade union movement that allowed a single
breadwinner with limited education to own a home and a car, support a family, and
send his kids to good schools. It was not by any means a perfect world but affluence
allowed for a truce between capital and labor, a reciprocity of opportunity in a time
of rapid growth and declining income inequality, marked by high tax rates for the
wealthy, who were by no means the only beneficiaries of a golden age of American
capitalism.
But freedom and affluence came with a price. The United States, virtually a
demilitarized nation on the eve of the Second World War, never stood down in the
wake of victory. To this day, American troops are deployed in 150 countries. Since
the 1970s, China has not once gone to war; the U.S. has not spent a day at peace.
President Jimmy Carter recently noted that in its 242-year history, America has
enjoyed only 16 years of peace, making it, as he wrote, “the most warlike nation in
the history of the world.” Since 2001, the U.S. has spent over $6 trillion on military
operations and war, money that might have been invested in the infrastructure of
home. China, meanwhile, built its nation, pouring more cement every three years
than America did in the entire 20th century.
As America policed the world, the violence came home. On D-Day, June 6th, 1944,
the Allied death toll was 4,414; in 2019, domestic gun violence had killed that many
American men and women by the end of April. By June of that year, guns in the
hands of ordinary Americans had caused more casualties than the Allies suffered in
Normandy in the first month of a campaign that consumed the military strength of
five nations.
More than any other country, the United States in the post-war era lionized the
individual at the expense of community and family. It was the sociological
equivalent of splitting the atom. What was gained in terms of mobility and personal
freedom came at the expense of common purpose. In wide swaths of America, the
family as an institution lost its grounding. By the 1960s, 40 percent of marriages
were ending in divorce. Only six percent of American homes had grandparents living
With slogans like “24/7” celebrating complete dedication to the workplace, men
and women exhausted themselves in jobs that only reinforced their isolation from
their families. The average American father spends less than 20 minutes a day in
direct communication with his child. By the time a youth reaches 18, he or she will
have spent fully two years watching television or staring at a laptop screen,
contributing to an obesity epidemic that the Joint Chiefs have called a national
security crisis.
At the root of this transformation and decline lies an ever-widening chasm between
Americans who have and those who have little or nothing. Economic disparities
exist in all nations, creating a tension that can be as disruptive as the inequities are
unjust. In any number of settings, however, the negative forces tearing apart a
society are mitigated or even muted if there are other elements that reinforce social
solidarity — religious faith, the strength and comfort of family, the pride of
tradition, fidelity to the land, a spirit of place.
But when all the old certainties are shown to be lies, when the promise of a good
life for a working family is shattered as factories close and corporate leaders,
growing wealthier by the day, ship jobs abroad, the social contract is irrevocably
broken. For two generations, America has celebrated globalization with iconic
intensity, when, as any working man or woman can see, it’s nothing more than
capital on the prowl in search of ever cheaper sources of labor.
For many years, those on the conservative right in the United States have invoked a
nostalgia for the 1950s, and an America that never was, but has to be presumed to
have existed to rationalize their sense of loss and abandonment, their fear of
change, their bitter resentments and lingering contempt for the social movements
of the 1960s, a time of new aspirations for women, gays, and people of color. In
truth, at least in economic terms, the country of the 1950s resembled Denmark as
much as the America of today. Marginal tax rates for the wealthy were 90 percent.
Today, the base pay of those at the top is commonly 400 times that of their salaried
staff, with many earning orders of magnitude more in stock options and perks. The
elite one percent of Americans control $30 trillion of assets, while the bottom half
have more debt than assets. The three richest Americans have more money than the
poorest 160 million of their countrymen. Fully a fifth of American households have
zero or negative net worth, a figure that rises to 37 percent for black families. The
median wealth of black households is a tenth that of whites. The vast majority of
Americans — white, black, and brown — are two paychecks removed from
bankruptcy. Though living in a nation that celebrates itself as the wealthiest in
history, most Americans live on a high wire, with no safety net to brace a fall.
With the COVID crisis, 40 million Americans lost their jobs, and 3.3 million
businesses shut down, including 41 percent of all black-owned enterprises. Black
Americans, who significantly outnumber whites in federal prisons despite being but
13 percent of the population, are suffering shockingly high rates of morbidity and
mortality, dying at nearly three times the rate of white Americans. The cardinal rule
of American social policy — don’t let any ethnic group get below the blacks, or
allow anyone to suffer more indignities — rang true even in a pandemic, as if the
virus was taking its cues from American history.
COVID-19 didn’t lay America low; it simply revealed what had long been forsaken.
As the crisis unfolded, with another American dying every minute of every day, a
country that once turned out fighter planes by the hour could not manage to
produce the paper masks or cotton swabs essential for tracking the disease. The
nation that defeated smallpox and polio, and led the world for generations in
medical innovation and discovery, was reduced to a laughing stock as a buffoon of a
president advocated the use of household disinfectants as a treatment for a disease
that intellectually he could not begin to understand.
Trump’s performance and America’s crisis deflected attention from China’s own
mishandling of the initial outbreak in Wuhan, not to mention its move to crush
democracy in Hong Kong. When an American official raised the issue of human
rights on Twitter, China’s Foreign Ministry spokesperson, invoking the killing of
George Floyd, responded with one short phrase, “I can’t breathe.”
These politically motivated remarks may be easy to dismiss. But Americans have not
done themselves any favors. Their political process made possible the ascendancy to
the highest office in the land a national disgrace, a demagogue as morally and
ethically compromised as a person can be. As a British writer quipped, “there have
always been stupid people in the world, and plenty of nasty people too. But rarely
has stupidity been so nasty, or nastiness so stupid”.
Odious as he may be, Trump is less the cause of America’s decline than a product of
its descent. As they stare into the mirror and perceive only the myth of their
exceptionalism, Americans remain almost bizarrely incapable of seeing what has
actually become of their country. The republic that defined the free flow of
information as the life blood of democracy, today ranks 45th among nations when it
comes to press freedom. In a land that once welcomed the huddled masses of the
world, more people today favor building a wall along the southern border than
supporting health care and protection for the undocumented mothers and children
arriving in desperation at its doors. In a complete abandonment of the collective
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 1376
good, U.S. laws define freedom as an individual’s inalienable right to own a
personal arsenal of weaponry, a natural entitlement that trumps even the safety of
children; in the past decade alone 346 American students and teachers have been
shot on school grounds.
The American cult of the individual denies not just community but the very idea of
society. No one owes anything to anyone. All must be prepared to fight for
everything: education, shelter, food, medical care. What every prosperous and
successful democracy deems to be fundamental rights — universal health care,
equal access to quality public education, a social safety net for the weak, elderly,
and infirmed — America dismisses as socialist indulgences, as if so many signs of
weakness.
How can the rest of the world expect America to lead on global threats — climate
change, the extinction crisis, pandemics — when the country no longer has a sense
of benign purpose, or collective well-being, even within its own national
community? Flag-wrapped patriotism is no substitute for compassion; anger and
hostility no match for love. Those who flock to beaches, bars, and political rallies,
putting their fellow citizens at risk, are not exercising freedom; they are displaying,
as one commentator has noted, the weakness of a people who lack both the
stoicism to endure the pandemic and the fortitude to defeat it. Leading their charge
is Donald Trump, a bone spur warrior, a liar and a fraud, a grotesque caricature of a
strong man, with the backbone of a bully.
Over the last months, a quip has circulated on the internet suggesting that to live in
Canada today is like owning an apartment above a meth lab. Canada is no perfect
place, but it has handled the COVID crisis well, notably in British Columbia, where I
live. Vancouver is just three hours by road north of Seattle, where the U.S. outbreak
began. Half of Vancouver’s population is Asian, and typically dozens of flights arrive
each day from China and East Asia. Logically, it should have been hit very hard, but
the health care system performed exceedingly well. Throughout the crisis, testing
rates across Canada have been consistently five times that of the U.S. On a per
capita basis, Canada has suffered half the morbidity and mortality. For every person
who has died in British Columbia, 44 have perished in Massachusetts, a state with a
comparable population that has reported more COVID cases than all of Canada. As
of July 30th, even as rates of COVID infection and death soared across much of the
United States, with 59,629 new cases reported on that day alone, hospitals in British
Columbia registered a total of just five COVID patients.
This has nothing to do with political ideology, and everything to do with the quality
of life. Finns live longer and are less likely to die in childhood or in giving birth than
Americans. Danes earn roughly the same after-tax income as Americans, while
working 20 percent less. They pay in taxes an extra 19 cents for every dollar earned.
But in return they get free health care, free education from pre-school through
university, and the opportunity to prosper in a thriving free-market economy with
dramatically lower levels of poverty, homelessness, crime, and inequality. The
average worker is paid better, treated more respectfully, and rewarded with life
insurance, pension plans, maternity leave, and six weeks of paid vacation a year. All
of these benefits only inspire Danes to work harder, with fully 80 percent of men
and women aged 16 to 64 engaged in the labor force, a figure far higher than that
of the United States.
Evidence of such terminal decadence is the choice that so many Americans made in
2016 to prioritize their personal indignations, placing their own resentments above
any concerns for the fate of the country and the world, as they rushed to elect a
man whose only credential for the job was his willingness to give voice to their
hatreds, validate their anger, and target their enemies, real or imagined. One
shudders to think of what it will mean to the world if Americans in November,
knowing all that they do, elect to keep such a man in political power. But even
should Trump be resoundingly defeated, it’s not at all clear that such a profoundly
polarized nation will be able to find a way forward. For better or for worse, America
has had its time.
The end of the American era and the passing of the torch to Asia is no occasion for
celebration, no time to gloat. In a moment of international peril, when humanity
might well have entered a dark age beyond all conceivable horrors, the industrial
might of the United States, together with the blood of ordinary Russian soldiers,
literally saved the world. American ideals, as celebrated by Madison and Monroe,
Lincoln, Roosevelt, and Kennedy, at one time inspired and gave hope to millions.
If and when the Chinese are ascendant, with their concentration camps for the
Uighurs, the ruthless reach of their military, their 200 million surveillance cameras
watching every move and gesture of their people, we will surely long for the best
years of the American century. For the moment, we have only the kleptocracy of
Donald Trump. Between praising the Chinese for their treatment of the Uighurs,
describing their internment and torture as “exactly the right thing to do,” and his
dispensing of medical advice concerning the therapeutic use of chemical
disinfectants, Trump blithely remarked, “One day, it’s like a miracle, it will
disappear.” He had in mind, of course, the coronavirus, but, as others have said, he
might just as well have been referring to the American dream."
2. Massive National Debt due to Costs of War and poor economic planning
7. More conflicts of USA all over the World especially with Major Regional Powers
like China, Russia, Iran, Turkey, Venezuela, Pakistan, etc
19. Trade Wars and Currency Wars with Major Global Powers especially China.
For instance, the Americans have killed their own 50 million children by obortion
due to the fear of poverty and to get more freedom in their lives.
Similarly this trend of Obortion of Children became popular after 1970's in Europe
and USA and millions of people in those regions have killed their own children.
Now this killing tendency became popular all over the world and people are killing
their unborn children by obortion in India, China, Russia and other Asian countries
also.
So this prophecy of End Times have also been fulfilled and now the World is waiting
for its Savior to save the World from Injustices and Inequality all over the World.
“The sun shall be turned into darkness, and the moon into blood, before the
great and the terrible da
day of the LORD comes,” [Joel 2:31].
The incredible
ncredible alignment has only happened a handful of times in the last two
thousand years but, remarkably, on each of the last three occasions it has
coincided with a globally significant religious event.
NASA has confirmed that the Tetrad has only happened three times in more than
500 years – and that it’s going to happen now.
“To get four blood moons you need something absolutely extraordinary in
astrological terms.
“The really significant fact is that between these four blood moons there will be
a total solar eclipse.
“Even Jesus himself, in the Book of Luke, states there ‘will be signs in the sun,
moon and stars’ and to ‘lift up your heads for redemption draws nigh’.
“There’s a sequence of prophetic events that the Bible says will happen. It does
not, ever, give a timeline.
“It just says ‘when you see these signs’ – and four blood moons is a very
significant one – ‘the end of this age is coming.”
Even Christians are now seeing the Biblical prophecies coming true regarding the
Second Coming of Jesus Christ and the Muslims believe that Jesus Christ would
come with Imam Mahdi to assist in the Establishment of Justice and Peace in the
World.
Now if we note that the last and the 4th Blood Moon would occur on:
5 9
23 ( ) and 45( )………..2023 AD and 1445 Hijri………..Arrival of Imam
Mahdi( 59)
As we know from the famous Ahadith of Prophet Muhammad that:
“I (Muhammad) am the City of Knowledge and Ali is the Bab (Gate) of Knowledge.”
And:
“I (Muhammad) am the House of Hikmat (Wisdom) and Ali is the Bab (Gate) of
Hikmat (Wisdom).”
“One third population of the world would die after the Big War by
Diseases and Drought.”
Even now before the Big World War, we are witnessing many Global diseases
which are taking the lives of millions of people in the world every year.
Thousands of people die everyday because of the diseases which are common
in the world. But from 2018 till 2023 AD, the rate would increase many times.
As we know the Numbers - 17 and 19 are related with the Arrival of Mahdi.
The Abjad of name, "Mahdi" is 59 and the Number - 59 is the 17th Prime Number in
Mathematics.
The Number - 19 is the Code of the Holy Quran. As Imam is the 'Quran e Natiq' i.e.
the Speaking Holy Quran so the Number - 19 is also related with Mahdi
If we add the Abjad of 17th and 19th Arabic Letters with the Abjad of "Aal e
Muhammad" i.e. 123, we would get:
There are 28 Arabic Letters in the Language of Arabic in which the Holy Quran
was revealed.
There are 14 Arabic Letters with 'Nuqtas'. The other 14 Arabic Letters have
no Nuqtas.
ن ق ف غ ظ ض ش ز ذ خ ج ث ت ب
ب-2
ت- 400
ث- 500
ج-3
خ- 600
ذ- 700
ز-7
ش- 300
ض- 800
ظ- 900
غ- 1000
ف- 80
ق- 100
ن- 50
Hazrat Ali is prominently known as "Nuqta" of 'Bismillah' according to the
Sayings of Hazrat Ali and Prophet Muhammad (PBUH)
There are 10 Arabic Letters with One (1) Nuqta, 2 Arabic Letters with two (2) Nuqtas
and 3 Arabic Letters with 3 Nuqtas.
1 Nuqta in 10 Arabic Letters, 2 Nuqtas in 2 Arabic Letters and 3 Nuqtas in 2 Letters
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 1389
Mahdi is the 11th Son of Hazrat Ali who is known as "Nuqta" of Bismillah and Bibi
Fatima.
The Name of Hazrat Ali (AS) in One (1) Arabic Alphabet is 'Aeen' - ع
The Name of Bibi Fatima (AS) in One (1) Arabic Alphabet is "Toah" - ط
Bibi Fatima (AS) is the Only Masooma wife of Hazrat Ali (AS) who is
known as "Nuqta" and the Holy Mother of Mahdi.
If we put 'Nuqta' on top of the names of Hazrat Ali and Bibi Faitma (AS ) in
One Arabic Alphabets, we would get another Arabic Alphabets as:
Hazrat Ali and if we add the Abjad or Numeric Values of Arabic Alphabets - غ
and ظwith the Abjad of " " آ ل مﺤمد, we would get:
( غ1000) + ( ظ900) + ( آ ل مﺤمد123) = 2023
2023......2023 AD is the Year of the Arrival of Imam Mahdi
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 1390
There are 12 Arabic Letters with 6 Combinations which pronounce differently
with Nuqtas on top of them and their Abjad i.e. Numeric Values are also different
as:
( ح8) ( خ600)
( ط9) ( ظ900)
( ر200) ( ز7)
( د4) ( ذ700)
( ص90) ( ض800)
( ع70) ( غ1000)
If we add the Abjad of 2 Combinations of 4 Arabic Letters with the Abjad of name,
"Najaf" i.e. 133, we would get the Year of Arrival of Mahdi as:
The Abjad of Tasbih - "La Illah Illa Allah" - ﷲ ﻻ الـ ـ ـ ـ ــﻪ اﻻis 165
Adding the Abjad or the Numeric Value of the above 4 Most Important Tasbih, we
would get:
7, 8 and 9
Adding the 7th, 8th and 9th Prime Numbers, we would get:
17 + 19 + 23 = 59
The Abjad or Numeric Value of Imam's Name, "Mahdi" is also 59
Mahdi = 59
One of the basic faiths of all Muslims in the World is the Arrival of Imam Mahdi in
the End Times.
( عق ـ ـ ـ ـ ـ ـ ـ ــدهFaith) - 189
The Abjad of Arabic word, "Arrival" - ظهـ ـ ـ ــﻮرis 1111
ظه ـ ـ ــﻮر- 1111
Prophet Muhammad (PBUH) told us 1400 years ago about the major War of India
China and Pakistan as:
https://www.cfr.org/in
https://www.cfr.org/in-brief/china-india-border-dispute
dispute-what-know
Speaking by phone on June 17, both the Chinese and Indian foreign ministers agreed
to avoid actions that might escalate the conflict. The same day, Indian Prime
Minister Narendra Modi emphasized in a TV address that “India wants peace. But
on provocation, India will give a befitting reply.”
Why are Chinese and Indian troops there in the first place?
Both countries’ troops have patrolled this region for decades, as the
contested 2,200-mile border [PDF] is a long-standing subject of competing claims
and tensions, including a brief war in 1962. The border, or Line of Actual Control, is
not demarcated, and China and India have differing ideas of where it should be
located, leading to regular border “transgressions.” Often these don’t escalate
tensions; a serious border standoff like the current one is less frequent, though this
is the fourth since 2013.
The Ladakh region is especially complex, with particularly unusual features. First,
there is Aksai Chin, a territory that India has long claimed but China occupies. China
began building a road through the area in 1956—linking Tibet to Xinjiang—and
has occupied it since 1962. There is also territory that Pakistan ceded to China in
1963. Surveying and mapping the region’s terrain historically proved immensely
challenging. A forthcoming history of the Ladakh region points out how colonial-era
efforts to survey this area using natural features such as watersheds as focal points
did not always align with cartographic needs for precision, and, importantly, ideas
of where a country’s territory begins and ends.
Explanations circulating in the Indian and international media cover a broad range:
China was unhappy with India’s actions in August 2019 to end Jammu and Kashmir’s
traditional autonomy, one result of which was the creation of the Union Territory of
Ladakh; China saw India’s recent road construction work in the area as a change to
the status quo and a challenge to its strategic position; China dislikes India drawing
closer to the United States and its allies in Asia; China seeks to distract
attention from its part in the global pandemic; and the frank appraisal that India’s
growing military imbalance with China, and China’s “political will” to deploy its
might under President Xi Jinping, is the real difference.
The Newspaper - The New York Times reported on 31st August, 2020
about the Rising Conflict between India and China as:
https://www.nytimes.com/2020/08/31/world/asia/india-china-troops-border.html
After months of efforts to defuse tensions, soldiers rushed to shout in each others’
faces again. Though the confrontation wasn’t bloody, where it happened was
significant.
In a terse and somewhat cryptic statement, India’s defense ministry said the
Chinese Army had “violated the previous consensus” and “carried out provocative
military movements” near Pangong Tso Lake, in the remote Ladakh region.
Indian Army officers and security analysts said Chinese troops landed a few days
ago on the southern side of the lake, which traditionally has been considered Indian
territory — a move the Indians saw as the latest example of Chinese aggression in a
long string of provocations.
The move provoked a standoff and then a rapid buildup. Troops from both sides
yelled at each other and surged to within a yard or two before commanding officers
from both sides pulled them apart. No punches were thrown and no one was
injured, the analysts said, and the incident was much less severe than the vicious
hockey-brawl type of melee that exploded in June in roughly the same area, when
20 Indian soldiers and an unknown number of Chinese troops were killed.
But China was emphatic that it had done nothing wrong. Chinese troops respect the
border, known as the Line of Actual Control, said Zhao Lijian, spokesman for China’s
foreign ministry, and Chinese troops “never crossed the line.”
Senior Col. Zhang Shuili, a spokesman for the Western Theater Command of the
People’s Liberation Army, went further, accusing the Indian military of “blatant
provocation” and ruining the agreement the two sides had reached over the area by
making illegal incursions.
“This action by the Indian side has seriously violated Chinese territorial
sovereignty, and seriously damaged the peace and stability of the Chinese-Indian
border region,” Colonel Zhang said, according to Xinhua, China’s official news
agency. He demanded that India immediately withdraw its forces and “strictly
control and constrain frontline troops.”
“Chinese troops are taking necessary measures in response and will closely monitor
developments,” he said.
In June, north of that area, the worst clash between the two nations in decades
erupted. High up in the mountains, in the rocky and isolated Galwan Valley,
hundreds of troops raged at each other with rocks, sticks, clubs and their bare fists.
Indian officials said Chinese soldiers even used specially made iron clubs, with
spikes welded to their tips, to inflict maximum damage.
China never specified its casualties, but Western intelligence officials have
estimated that China probably lost around 20 soldiers as well.
For more than half a century, this border has been a sore spot. In 1962, the two
Asian giants fought a brief war over this same lifeless land. China won and wrested
away a chunk that India still claims.
Though the border has never been demarcated, the two sides eventually worked
out protocols on how to patrol it, advising their soldiers not to shoot at each other.
This kept the occasional border confrontation or dispute from turning deadly, up
until the enormous brawl in June.
On Monday, the Indian media swung into action, running wall-to-wall television
coverage and raising jingoistic feelings. Maps broadcast by Indian channels showed
two lines cutting through Pangong Tso Lake — one to the east, which India believes
is the border, and one that lies several miles to the west, which is what China
claims.
“The Chinese are playing their usual game of surprise and deception,” said Brahma
Chellaney, a professor of strategic studies at the New Delhi-based Center for Policy
Research. “They have opened a new front.”
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 1403
Residents in Ladakh, which is a mountainous region historically connected to Tibet,
said that Indian soldiers had shut down one of the area’s main highways — again —
and that troop convoys were chugging up the windy roads on their way to the
border.
Ladakhis have complained for years that Chinese troops have been steadily nibbling
away at Indian territory, taking over high-altitude pasture land and blocking
traditional herding routes, and that the Indian army knew about this and did
nothing.
India’s military is less advanced than China’s, and India has been trying to walk a
fine line, sounding tough but not striking back in Chinese territory or doing anything
that might set off a major conflict against a superiorly armed foe.
“The military option to deal with transgressions by the Chinese Army in Ladakh is
on, but it will be exercised only if talks at the military and the diplomatic level fail,”
General Bipin Rawat, head of India’s military, said earlier this month.
Indian analysts said the Chinese were stepping up their campaign to change the
facts on the ground around Pangong Tso Lake. Until recently, it was a major tourist
attraction in India, with visitors flocking to the lake in the summer to admire the
many shades of blue its cold waters reflected.
Now no tourists are allowed to come even close. Within the past few months,
analysts said, the Chinese have built observation towers, fortified bunkers and two
new marinas.
Bharat Karnad, an Indian national security expert, called China’s latest move “a
probing action” that the Indians had successfully stalled."
Now as the whole world is watching the rising conflict between India and China in
the period of Global Pandemic and India would also engage Pakistan in the coming
War with China in 2021 AD.
It is in the interest of USA and Israel that India should engage with China and
Pakistan in the Big Regional War in 2021 AD that would lead to a Big Global War in
2022 among major players of the World as we all are heading towards that event.
https://www.theguardian.com/world/2017/jul/06/china-india-bhutan-standoff-
disputed-territory
"Regional rivalry escalates as forces mobilise near borderland that China claims
but India says is in Bhutan.
China has demanded the withdrawal of Indian troops from a scrap of disputed
territory to end an escalating border row between the two Asian powers that has
drawn in tiny Bhutan.
Beijing claims the Indian troops are occupying its soil, but both Bhutan and India
maintain the area in question is Bhutanese territory.
Analysts maintain that armed conflict between the two Asian powers is unlikely,
but say the harsh language and scale of the mobilisation in the remote but
strategically important area, where the borders of China, India and Bhutan
intersect, is unprecedented in recent years.
One former Indian foreign secretary said the impasse, now in its third week, also
marked the first time India and China had squared off on the soil of a third country,
an overt display of the escalating regional rivalry between the pair.
Bhutan, a small Himalayan kingdom with close military and economic ties to India,
requested assistance from Delhi, which sent forces to resist the Chinese advance.
To avoid escalation, frontline troops in the area do not generally carry weapons,
and the Chinese and Indian troops reportedly clashed by “jostling”: bumping chests,
without punching or kicking, in order to force the other side backwards.
At the heart of the dispute are different interpretations of where the “trijunction” –
the point where the three countries’ borders meet – precisely lies. China argues its
territory extends south to an area called Gamochen, while India says Chinese
control ends at Batanga La, further to the north.
About 3,000 troops from both countries are reportedly stationed near Doka La , an
area initial media reports said was about 15km from Gamochen, but which satellite
imagery shows could be as close as two to three kilometres away.
In support of its claim, China points to an 1890 treaty signed with the British Raj,
and seemingly endorsed by India’s first prime minister, Jawaharlal Nehru, in a letter
to his Chinese counterpart. India says the letter does not accurately capture Nehru’s
position and that China cannot unilaterally alter the territorial status quo.
It is the longest standoff between the two armies since 1962, when tensions over
Tibet and elsewhere along the border sparked a brief war from which China
emerged victorious.
China still claims a section of the Indian state of Arunachal Pradesh and was
angered in April when the Dalai Lama, whom Beijing regards as an “anti-China
separatist”, conducted a tour of the state.
Though India says its troops in Bhutan are in “non-combative mode”, the rhetoric
on both sides is growing increasingly pugilistic. India’s army chief, Bipin Rawat, has
said that India is ready to fight a “two and half front war” – referring to Pakistan,
China and against the country’s various internal insurgencies.
“No one is willing to rock the boat, despite all that we have seen,” he said. Rather,
as it does in the south China sea, he said Beijing was employing a “salami-slicing”
strategy, patiently absorbing small swaths of territory it considers to be its own.
Global attention is usually focused on China’s expansion into east Asia, but the
burgeoning superpower is increasingly also muscling into south Asia, forging links
with countries India considers to be firmly within its sphere of influence.
“For the past six years China has been attempting to hem India in and take away its
strategic space in South Asia,” said Ashok Malik, a fellow at the Delhi-based
Observer Research Foundation.
India was especially sensitive to China’s encroachment near its Bhutanese border,
he said, because it brought Chinese troops uncomfortably close to a section of
Indian territory called the “chicken’s neck”, a thin corridor which, if broached, could
cut Delhi off from its northeastern states. “This is in fact a provocative gesture
which makes the defence of Doklam virtually the defence of India,” Malik said. “I
don’t expect a conflict, but I expect both sides to stay put as long as Chinese supply
and logistical lines will allow.”
Mahdi is the Mazhar of Allah who would establist the 'Khahiat of Allah' i.e. The Fear
of Allah among all the people of the World by 1446 Hijri or 2024 AD
The Abjad of Arabic words, "Kashiat Allah" - ﷲ خش ـ ـ ـ ـ ــع تis 1446
The Hijri and Gregorian Calendars are two different calendars. One is linked with
the Islam and other is accepted all over the world. Now we see is there any
mystery hidden in the two different Calendars Years i.e. 1445 Hijri and 2023 AD.
There are 12 different combinations of Number – 1445 and Imam Mahdi is our
12th Imam.
1. 1445
2. 1544
3. 1454
4. 5144
5. 5414
6. 5441
7. 4145
8. 4415
9. 4451
10. 4154
11. 4514
12. 4541
Similary there are 12 different combinations of Number – 2023 and Imam Mahdi
is our 12th Imam.
1. 2023
2. 2203
3. 2302
4. 2032
5. 2230
6. 2320
7. 3202
8. 3022
9. 3220
10. 0223
11. 0322
12. 0232
Now we see the link between two numbers – 23331 and 46662
46662 = 2 x 23331
The Sum of 12 different combinations of 1445 = 2 x (12 different combinations of 2023)
69993 = 9 x 7777
Also:
69993 = 63 x 11 x 101
Perilous Times
Lovers of pleasure more than God
People will be covetous
People will be boasters and proud
Children disobedient to parents
People will be unthankful
People will be unholy
People without natural affection
Despisers of those that are good
People will be lovers of themselves
Source: http://www.signs-of-end-times.com/the-last-days-end-of-world-signs.html
Dr. Israr Ahmed was the prominent and famous Islamic Scholar in Pakistan and he
delivered lots of speeches and lectures on the Coming End Times and the Arrival of
Imam Mahdi and Hazrat Esa (AS) after the Big War in the World and the Kharooj of
Dajjal near Qiyamat.
1. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=aUEL-3-z7Ew
2. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=PkgaAQpX1GA
3. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=sPIK4zZOEic
4. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=ThaItNfo8zM
5. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=JY0ReOp3r4s
6. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=5jzMnAd91bk
7. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=TJKSrFKvnhc
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 1414
8. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=r4mYFqU5Odc
9. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=8Eskq3Ivghk
10. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=OQokAsKHVX8
11. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=taUamyZmlf4
12. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=xqpDvCHFtVc
13. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=r4mYFqU5Odc&t=14s
14. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=LRYNVtqmli0
15. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=V5McQl0_yCo
16. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=sPIK4zZOEic&t=17s
17. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Dws7Dx0168o
18. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=xrWXTxcWL2A
19. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=nQ7seEgrYYM
20. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=SwBn-_tvOp8
21. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=AAcILxWTj6A
22. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=hnXdD4zkCAo
23. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=YstTnRIpxvc
One Can listen his videos to see the Events of the End Times are coming in front of
our eyes as predicted by the Islamic Scholars of our time.
Syed Alamdar Hussain Naqvi of Hassan Abdal, Pakistan predicted specifically 3 years
ago about the Global Coronavirus and mentioned that the Arrival of Imam Mahdi is
very near. He told that he knew about the Exact Day of the Arrival of Imam Mahdi
but he does not have the permission to tell the public but he mentioned that from
the Start of 2020 AD, the whole world would start suffering from Wars, Diseases
and Plagues and they will continue till the Arrival of Imam Mahdi. He requested the
people to attach with Imam Mahdi to get Salvation.
The links of the vidoes of Syed Alamdar Hussain are presented as:
1. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=sCkc6zDf584
2. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=CmsNL34oa7M
3. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=yyjTAhXDFko
4. https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=lb7v5iPC4Vw
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 1416
350. Hashar e Asghar - Qiyamat e Sughra and the
Arrival of Imam Mahdi in 2023 AD
The 2nd Column in this Casino Game is showing the Fixed Signs which are not
rotating as shown in other 3 columns.
1. Joe Biden ---- Next US President who would lead America in the next Global
Depression and the coming WW3 in 2022 AD
2. Nuclear Sign with Missile ---- Coming Nuclear WW3 in 2021 - 2022 AD
1. Vaccination with Green color --- The Green Color of Poison - Meaning
the World Elite would poison the population of the World with the Vaccines
containing harmful ingredients to health
2. Corona Virus Sign -- The Corona Virus would remain in the World and
would continue as Global Pandemic
4. Zoon Sign -- The World would prefer to do Online business and Online
meetings rather than going physically to offices and businesses.
5. The Graph Sign -- The World Economy would show dips and rises with the
decisions of the World Bankers and Politicians. The Inflation and Poverty would rise
for the Poor and the Stock Markets would rise for the Rich and Powerful.
7. Wind Turbine --- The World would shift from Oil markets to more Energy
conservation projects like Wind and Electric sources of Energy
9. Question Mark -- The World would keep on thinking ng whether their Socio,
Economic, Political and Health problems would be solved in 2021 or not?
12. Bet and Cash out on Casino Game --- The World would bet and hope
for the Pandemic to be resolved by the so called Vaccination and the Rich would
Cash on Stocks, Online Business and Global Warming programs.
Presenting a good article on the Nations destroyed by Allah with the courtesy of the
following website:
https://www.ukessays.com/essays/history/demolished-nations-described-in-holy-
quran-history-essay.php
I didn't find any article or book comparing the perished nations and today's nation.
All of the books which i have read only have discussed the stories of demolished
nations.
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 1428
This topic is very important for the people now a days, specialy Muslims. All the
people should get aware of Allah power. They should know what will be their end if
they get themselves involve in the same actions by which previous nations have
faced a fierced end. Not only by the sins they did, but we should abide by all the
actions Allah and His prophet (s.a.w) mentioned not to do. By this topic Muslims
will know that if they will not stop doing the bad activities and will be involved in
these deeds, then they will be punished harshly.
Past nations were involved in many wronge activities which were prohibited by
Allah. Some of the nations were Nuh's (as) nation (was involved in worshiping
false gods), Lut's (as) nation (was involved in sodomy), people of A'd (were
arrogant and boastful), Thamud (rejected warnings of Allah), Pharaoh (was
involved in shirk and was a cruel ruler), people pf Madyan (were dishonest in
doing business). Today's nation is also involved in same avtivities where as Allah
has clearly mentioned the stories of previous nations and told to learn a lesson
from them. Today people are involved in such activities like, seeking help from
the dead people, having a wronge concept that visiting a shrine of good people
and seek help from them, involve in adultery (even with homosexual), involve in
doing shirk.
INTRODUCTION:
Allah has always sent His prophets in every age since the creation of this world to
give humans the knowledge about Allah (their creator). Some people followed
those instructions told by prophets and majority of them didn't followed. Some of
them even not only denied to follow the right path but they also harmed prophets
and the people who followed them. The messengers were generally accused
slanderously of "falsehood, magic, insanity and conceit" and leaders of many
peoples even sought to have them murdered.
Allah gave those nations many chances to belief in truth, but they never did.And
then allah perished them.The Muslims are, therefore, given a constant reminder
not to follow the path of these nations.because no one can hide from Allah when
His chastisement occurs.
"But how many generations before them did We destroy (for their sins) - stronger
in power than they? Then did they wander through the land: was there any place
of escape (for them)?" (Surah Qaf: 36)
Allah says:
"Indeed, We sent Nuh (Noah) to his people and he said: "O my people! Worship
Allah! You have no other God but Him. Certainly, I fear for you the torment of a
Great Day!"" [Al-A'raf 7: 59]
Originally these were the names of good people who had lived among them. After
their deaths, statues of them were erected to keep their memories alive. After
sometime, however, people began to worship these statues. Later generations did
not even know why they had been erected; they only knew their parents had
prayed to them. That is how idol worshipping developed. Since they had no
understanding of Allah the Almighty Who would punish them for their evil deeds,
they became cruel and immoral.
Prophet Nuh (a.s) warned them and invite them to worship only Allah, but they
denied. They firstly denied prophethood of Nuh. As they said that he is also a man
like us, he just want superiority on us that's why, he is doing this.
Allah says:
The leaders of his people said: "Ah! we see thee evidently wandering (in mind)."
(Surat al-A‘raf: 60)
'The chiefs of the disbeliveers among his people said: "We see you but a man like
ourselves."' (11:27 Quran)
Prophet Nuh (a.s) warned his people about the punishment of Allah.
Allah says:
"We sent Nuh to his People (with the Command): "Do thou warn thy People before
there comes to them a grievous Penalty."" (Surah Nuh: 1)
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 1431
Nuh continued appealing to his people to believe in Allah hour after hour, day
after day year after year. He admonished his people and called them to Allah day
and night, in secret and openly. HE gave them examples, explained Allah's signs
and illustrated Allah's ability in the formation of His creatures. But whenever he
called them to Allah, they ran away from him. Whenever he urged them to ask
Allah to forgive them, they put their fingers in their ears.
But they didnt listened and Allah told Nuh to prepare a large boat and collect
pairs of every specie and every believer to make them safe from the
disaster.Prophet Nuh (a.s) was grief about his people that they will be punished. It
was revealed to Nuh: "None of thy people will believe except those who have
believed already! So grieve no longer over their (evil) deeds." (Surah Hud: 36)
The ship was constructed, and Nuh sat waiting Allah's command. Allah revealed
to him that when water miraculously gushed forth from the oven at Nuh's house,
that would be the sign of the start of the flood, and the sign for Nuh to act.
The terrible day arrived when the oven at Nuh's house overflowed. Nuh hurried
to open the ark and summon the believers. He also took with him a pair, male and
female, of every type of animal, bird and insect. Seeing him taking these creatures
to the ark, the people laughed loudly: "Nuh must have gone out of his head! What
is he going to do with the animals?"
Slowly the level of water increased and every non-believer died in the flood. Nuh's
wife and his son who were non-believers didn't join him and were faced to death.
Not a single non-believer was left alive. Then the order to stop the rain and to
retreat the water was given and once again dry land was shown but flood had
cleaned the non-believers from the land.
This city was filled with evil. Its residents waylaid, robbed and killed travelers.
Another common evil among them was that men had sex with men instead of with
It was at the height of these crimes and sins that Allah revealed to Prophet Lut
(alai salam) that he should summon the people to give up their indecent behavior,
but they were so deeply sunk in their immoral habits that they were deaf to Lut's
preaching. Swamped in their unnatural desires, they refused to listen, even when
Lut warned them of Allah's punishment. Instead, they threatened to drive him
out of the city if he kept on preaching.
Allah says:
And his people gave no answer but this: they said, "Drive them out of your city:
these are indeed men who want to be clean and pure!" (Surat al-A‘raf: 80-82)
Lut (as) called his people to an obvious truth and warned them explicitly, but his
people did not heed any warnings whatsoever and continued to reject him and to
deny the penalty of which he told them. Receiving the above answer from his
people, Lut asked for the help of Allah: He said: "O my Lord! help Thou me
against people who do mischief!" (Surat al-Ankaboot: 30)
Upon Lut's (as) prayer, Allah sent two angels in the form of men. These angels
visited Ibrahim (as)before coming to Lut (as). Giving Ibrahim (as) the good news
that his wife would give birth to an infant, the messengers explained the reason
for their being sent: the insolent people of Lut (as) were to be destroyed.
Angels came to Lut (a.s) as guest and stayed at his house. This news was spread in
town by his wife who was non-believer and in some time the whole town was
standing outside his home. They broke the door and came in. Angels said to Lut
(a.s) that dont fear as we are angels and they cannot harm you. After listening
that non-believers got feared and ran outside.The angels warned Prophet Lut
(pbuh) to leave his house before sunrise, taking with him all his family except his
wife.
Allah had decreed that the city of Sodom should perish. AN earthquake rocked
the town. IT was as if a mighty power had lifted the entire city and flung it down
in one jolt. A storm of stones rained on the city. Everyone and everything was
destroyed, including Lut's wife.In the morning, his people were destroyed by the
disaster of which Lut (as) had informed them in advance.
But the (mighty) Blast overtook them before morning, And We turned (the cities)
upside down, and rained down on them brimstones hard as baked clay. Behold!
in this are Signs for those who by tokens do understand. And the (cities were)
right on the high-road. (Surat al-Hijr: 73-76)
People of A'd:
The people of 'Ad lived many years in the windswept hills of an area between
Yemen and Oman. They were physically well built and renowned for their
craftsmanship especially in the construction of tall buildings with lofty towers.
They were outstanding among all the nations in power and wealth, which,
unfortunately, made them arrogant and boastful. Their political power was held
in the hand of unjust rulers, against whom no one dared to raise a voice.
They were not ignorant of the existence of Allah, nor did they refuse to worship
Him. What they did refuse was to worship Allah alone. They worshipped other
gods, also, including idols. This is one sin Allah does not forgive.
Allah wanted to guide and discipline these people so He sent a prophet from
among them. This prophet was Hud (as), a noble man who handled this task with
great resoluteness and tolerance.
Hud (as) condemned idol worship and admonished his people. "MY people, what
is the benefit of these stones that you carve with your own hands and worship? In
reality it is an insult to the intellect. There is only One Deity worthy of worship
and that is Allah. Worship of Him and Him alone, is compulsory on you.
In Quran:
To the Ad People (We sent) Hud, one of their own brethren. He said: "O my
people! worship Allah! ye have no other god but Him. (Your other gods) ye do
nothing but invent!
Prophet Hud (as) told them "He created you, He provides for you and He is the
One Who will cause you to die. He gave you wonderful physiques and blessed you
in many ways. So believe in Him and do not be blind to His favors, or the same
fate that destroyed Noah's people will overtake you." Hud (as) warned them.
Allah says:
O my people! I ask of you no reward for this (Message). My reward is from none but
Him Who created me: Will ye not then understand?
Hud (as) tried to speak to them and to explain about Allah's blessings: how Allah
the Almighty had made them Noah's successors, how He had given them strength
and power, and how HE sent them rain to revive the soil.Hud's (as) people looked
about them and found they were the strongest on earth, so they become prouder
and more obstinate. Thus they argued a lot with Hud (as). Hud (as) taught them
everything a prophet teaches to his nation. But they used to ask silly questions.
Hud (as) used to answer them gently but they never followed his message.
Hud (as) warned them if they wont worship only Allah they will destroyed like
Nuh's (as) nation. And they declared "we will be safe by our gods". Hud (as) told
them that these idols will be the reason of your destruction.There is no one who
harms or benefits any one except Allah.
The conflict between Hud (as) and his people continued. The years passed, and
they became prouder and more obstinate, and more tyrannical and more defiant
of their prophet's message.
"O my Hud! No evidence have you brought us, and we shall not leave our gods for
your mere saying! And we are not believers in you. All that we say is that some of
our gods (false deities) have seized you with evil (madness)." (11:53-54 Quran)
A drought spread throughout the land, for the sky no longer sent its rain. the sun
scorched the desert sands, looking like a disk of fire which settled on people's
heads. The drought increased, the trees turned yellow, and plants died.
A day came when they found the sky full of clouds. Hud's (as) people were glad as
they came out of their tents crying: "A cloud, which will give us rain!".But the
weather changed suddenly from burning dry and hot to stinging cold with wind
that shook everything; trees, plants, tents, men and women. The wind increased
day after day and night after night.
Hud's (as) people started to flee. They ran to their tents to hide but the gale
became stronger, ripping their tents from their stakes. They hid under cloth
covers but the gale became stronger and still and tore away the covers. It slashed
clothing and skin. It penetrated the apertures of the body and destroyed it. It
hardly touched anything before it was destroyed or killed, its core sucked out to
decompose and rot. The storm raged for 8 days and 7 nights.
That violent gale did not stop until the entire region was reduced to ruins and its
wicked people destroyed, swallowed by the sands of the desert. Only Hud (as) and
his followers remained unharmed. They migrated to Hadramaut and lived there
in peace, worshipping Allah, their true Lord.
A small part of the community complied with Salih's (as) call, but most of them
did not accept what he told. The leaders of the community in particular denied
Salih (as) and took an antagonistic stand towards him. They tried to impede those
who believed Salih (as) and tried to oppress them. They were enraged at Salih
(as), because he called them to worship Allah. This rage was not specific only to
Thamud; Thamud were repeating the mistake made by the people of Nuh (as)
and by Ad' who had lived before them.
Has not the story reached you, (O people!), of those who (went) before you? - of
the people of Prophet Nuh, and 'Ad, and Thamud? - And of those who (came)
after them? None knows them but Allah. To them came messengers with Clear
(Signs); but they put their hands up to their mouths, and said: "We do deny (the
mission) on which ye have been sent, and we are really in suspicious (disquieting)
doubt as to that to which ye invite us." (Surah Ibrahim: 9)
Despite the Prophet Salih's (as) warnings, the people continued in their ways on
overcome by doubts. But still, there was a group who believed in the prophethood
The End Times - 2023 AD Page 1437
of Salih (as) - and those were the ones who were saved along with Salih (as) when
the great catastrophe came. The leaders of the community tried to oppress the
group believing in Salih (as). Moreover, a certain group openly denied Salih (as).
A group among those who rejected faith - supposedly in the name of Allah - made
plans to kill Salih (as).
Saleh's people disbelieved and thought he was bewitched. Then they asked him to
show them a sign from Allah that he was indeed a prophet. They pointed at a
huge rock that was standing by itself, and proposed to him that he ask his God to
create a she-camel out of it. They of course thought that it was a good way to
dumbfound him and silence him. But Saleh, in turn, took a strong oath from them
that if Allah provided them with this sign they would believe in him and follow
him. He then fervently prayed to Allah to answer their request. The huge rock
moved and split and from it came a wonderful she-camel, which was pregnant
and soon to give birth. Allah provided the Thamud people this miracle which was
also a test for them, to see if they obey His orders.
In Quran:
Saleh told them: "O my people! This she-camel of Allah is a sign to you. Leave
her to feed on Allah's earth, and inflict no harm on her, or a swift punishment
will seize you!" (Hud, 11:64)
The she-camel and her young offspring lived among the Thamud people, she
would drink from the water of the well for one day, and leave it to them the
second day as Allah ordered:
"She has a right to drink (water), and you have a right to drink water, each on a
day appointed," (Al-Shu'ara', 26:155).
Allah ordered Prophet Saleh to tell his people of the camel's rights, saying:
"And tell them that the water is to be shared between her and them. Each one's
right to drink being established by turns," (Al-Qamar, 54:28).
On the day the she-camel was to drink from the well, she would have enough milk
for all the people of Thamud who would milk her and fill all their containers. She
would graze in the valley and she was so huge that when she came near their
sheep, they would flee and leave the way for her, and the cattle would not come
near the well on the day she would drink from it.
They plotted to kill her and get rid of her, so that way they would use the well
every day. There were nine men in the city who were known for their mischief
and crimes, and hence they were trusted with the mission of killing the camel.
After making sure that all the disbelievers were in agreement to kill the she-
camel, the men went out secretly by night to the well when she came to drink
water. They hit her and killed her, then ran to kill the child but he ran away and
vanish in the mountain from where she-camel came.
When saleh (as) heard of their horrible crime, Prophet Saleh (as) warned them
saying:
"Enjoy yourselves in your homes for three days. This is a promise that will not be
belied!" (Hud, 11:65).
This warning was an occasion for them to repent to Allah, but to the contrary,
they not only disbelieved in the threat but also decided to kill Saleh as well.
After three days Angel Gabriel (as) shaked the walls of their homes and when
they came out of their homes, he made a loud sound by which they were caused to
death.Except saleh (as) and his believers.
The Pharaoh:
The pharaoh who ruled Egypt was a tyrant who oppressed the descendants of
Musa (as). He used every means to demean and disgrace them. They were kept in
bondage and forced to work for him for small wages or nothing. Under this
system the people obeyed and worshipped the pharaoh, and the ruling class
carried out his orders, thereby authorizing his tyranny and crazy whims.The
pharaoh wanted the people to obey him only, and to believe in the gods of his
invention. Perhaps, during that time, there were many classes of people who did
not believe in or practice polytheism; however, they kept this to themselves and
outwardly did as they were expected to do, without revolting or revealing
themselves to anyone.Pharaoh came to know that a child will be born who will be
Ibn 'Abbas narrated: "Pharaoh saw in his vision a fire, which came from
Jerusalem and burned the houses of the Egyptians, and all Copts, and did not do
harm to the children of Israel. When he woke up, he was horrified. He then
gathered his priests and magicians and asked them about this vision. They said:
"This means a boy will be born of them and the Egyptian people will perish at his
hands.' That is why Pharaoh commanded that all male children of the children of
Israel be killed."
But that child was born. He was prophet Musa (as). Even he was cherished by
pharaoh in his palace. But after the prophethood Musa (as) conveyed the message
of Allah.
Musa (as) and Harun (as) went to pharaoh in obedience to Allah's command and
conveyed to him the message of the religion of truth. They asked him to stop
tormenting the Children of Israel and let them go with Musa (as) and Harun (as).
It was unacceptable to pharaoh that Musa (as), whom he had kept near him for
years and who most probably was to have been his successor on the throne, stood
up to him and talked to him in this manner. For that reason, Fir'awn accused him
of ingratitude.
In Quran:
(Fir'awn) said: "Did we not cherish thee as a child among us, and didst thou not
stay in our midst many years of thy life? And thou didst a deed of thine which
(thou knowest) thou didst, and thou art an ungrateful (wretch)!" (Surat ash-
Shu'ara: 18-19
Out of pride and greed for power, pharaoh did not listen to what Musa (as) said.
He tried to make fun of him, attempted to prove his power, and denied him. At
the same time, he aimed to portray Musa (as) and Harun (as) as anarchists and
accuse them of being politically motivated. Finally, neither Pharaoh nor the
leaders of the people within his close circle, except for the magicians, obeyed
Musa (as) and Harun (as). They did not follow the religion of truth shown to
them. Therefore Allah first of all sent some disasters to them.
"We punished the people of Fir'awn with years (of droughts) and shortness of
crops; that they might receive admonition." (Surat al-A‘raf: 130).
However, instead of "taking heed" as they should have, they held all that had
happened was because of ill fortune brought by Musa and the Children of Israel.
They were overcome by such conviction because of their superstitions,
disobedience and devotion to the religion of their ancestors and, as a result, they
suffered great distress for years. Allah sent to them a series of disasters, and
warned them. These disasters are described as follows in the Quran:
So we sent (plagues) on them: Wholesale death, Locusts, Lice, Frogs, and Blood:
Signs openly self-explained: but they were steeped in arrogance - a people given to
sin. (Surat al-A‘raf: 133)
Finally, no matter how the disasters took place, and what effect they left, neither
pharaoh, nor his people turned to Allah by paying heed, but they continued in
their arrogance.
Musa (as) set out from Egypt with the Children of Israel who obeyed him.
However, pharaoh could not accept their departure without his permission. He
and his soldiers followed them . By the time Musa (as) and the Children of Israel
reached the shore, pharaoh and his soldiers had caught up with them. Some of the
Children of Israel, who saw this, began to complain to Musa (as). This weakness
of the community is also described in the Qur'an in the following verse:
"And when the two bodies saw each other, the people of Musa said: 'We are sure
to be overtaken.'" (Surat ash-Shu'ara: 61)
Allah revealed to Musa (as) that he should strike the sea with his rod. Upon this,
"it divided, and each separate part became like the huge, firm mass of a
mountain." (Surat ash-Shu'ara: 63).
We took the Children of Israel across the sea: Fir'awn and his hosts followed
them in insolence and spite. At length, when overwhelmed with the flood, he said:
"I believe that there is no god except Him Whom the Children of Israel believe in:
I am of those who submit (to Allah in Islam)." (Surah Yunus: 90)
The people of Madyan were Arabs who lived in the country of Ma'an, part of
which today is greater Syria. They were a greedy people who did not believe that
Allah existed and who led wicked lives. They gave short measure, praised their
goods beyond their worth, and hid their defects. They lied to their customers,
thereby cheating them.They led a very happy and a prosperous life. Due to
Allah's grace and endowments, they were very wealthy. But instead of thanking
Allah for His bounties, they turned greedy and started cheating and betraying
people in business. They used to cheat in weighing goods i.e. when they sold goods
they weighed less whereas while buying they asked for more. Fraud and deceit
were commonplace and the one who was more expert in this field was considered
more intelligent and wise.
Allah sent His Prophet Shoaib (as) armed with many miracles. Shu'aib preached
to them, begging them to be mindful of Allah's favors and warning them of the
consequences of their evil ways, but they only mocked him. Shu'aib remained
calm as he reminded them of his kinship to them and that what he was doing was
not for his personal gain.
Shoaib (as) prohibited the people from committing such contemptible deeds, and
also reminded them about Allah's chastisement. But people mocked at him and
said, "You want us to worship as you worship? You expect us to leave the religion
of our forefathers? You expect us to employ some other method in our trade?
You want us to deal honestly and suffer losses? Never! Certainly we will never
heed you! Since you have become old and also have children, we pardon you. Else
we would certainly have stoned you to death'!
They seized the belongings of Shoaib (as) and his followers, then drove them out
of the city. The Messenger turned to his Lord for help, and his plea was answered.
Allah sent down on them scorching heat and they suffered terribly. On seeing a
cloud gathering in the sky, they thought it would bring cool, refreshing rain, and
rushed outside in the hope of enjoying the rainfall. Instead the cloud burst,
hurling thunderbolts and fire. They heard a thunderous sound from above which
caused the earth under their feet to tremble. The evil doers perished in this state
of horror.
Today's Muslims are proud to be Muslims. But should they really get proud of it?
Today's Muslims are also involved in the activities the previous nations used to be
involved in and they can to no good end. They were perished by Allah.
Muslims are involved in different sins like; stealing, killing, greed, not to be
thankful to Allah, arrogant, mean, boastful, diminish, and the worst sin shirk."
We have seen that Allah has destroyed so many nations in the Past and after the
Zahoor of Imam Mahdi (AS), Allah will punish the Criminals and the Enemies of
Islam.
The punishment of Imam Mahdi (AS) would be very severe as this is the Torment or
Punishment of Allah by Imam Mahdi (AS) on His Enemies and the Criminals of
humanity all over the World. Imam Mahdi (AS) would also punish the Criminals and
Hypocrites of Islam.